WQ0031396_Regional Office Physical File Scan Up To 4/12/2022

...............................................................................-
DIVISION OF WATER QUALITY
RALEIGH REGIONAL OFFICE MAY 14 2007
May 10, 2007
Office
.............................................................................,
MEMORANDUM
TO: Landon Davidson
Regional Supervisor
Aquifer Protection, Asheville Regional Office
FROM: Rich Hayes
Senior Environmental Specialist
Aquifer Protection Section, Raleigh Regional Office
SUBJECT: Permit No. WQ0031427
Santeetlah Lakeside
Reclaimed Wastewater Treatment & Drip Irrigation
Graham County
I am sending on the submittal package as well as all additional information received during the
express permitting process for permit number WQ0031396 for your files. You will be receiving the
permit from the Central Office in a separate mailing. Please do not hesitate to contact me if you need any
additional information about this project.

To: Nathaniel Thornburg
Co.: NCDWQ
From: Victor F. Rosado
CC: Rich Hayes
IbEx
MoPniAin
RECEIVED
MAY 14 2007
Asheville Regional Office
95 Merrick Way, Suite 610
Coral Gables, FL 33134
Telephone: [phone]
Direct Fax: [phone]
[e-mail]
www.ibexmountaingroup.com
Date: 4/24/2007
Re: IBEX Thunderbird, LLC / Santeetlah Properties, LLC Permit
Nathaniel —
Ll , IDR 2 5 2007
Enclosed please find one original and two copies of the Reclaimed Water Non -
Conjunctive Systems Application, amended to include those changes requested by
your Department. I have also delivered a copy directly to Rich Hayes at the Raleigh
Regional Office.
In addition, I have included a check for $1,253.00 made out to the Department of
Environment and Natural Resources, as per item 1 of the "Application" section of
your response letter.
Please note that the remainder of the response comments are being delivered
directly to you under another cover letter from McGill Associates.
Feel free to contact me if you have any additional questions or concerns.
Regards,
IBEX Mountain Group
Victor F. Rosado
Vice President of Development

RECLAIMED WATER NON -CONJUNCTIVE SYSTEMS
APPLICATION
SANTEETLAH LAKESIDE
PHASE II WASTEWATER SYSTEM
GRAHAM COUNTY, NORTH CAROLINA
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Note: This document is arranged to correspond to the Instructions for Form RWNCS 12-06
format. Each lettered tab correlates to the same paragraph number in the attached checklist.
A Application Form
B Watershed Classification Attachment
C Application Fee
D Cover Letter
E Property Ownership Documentation
F Environmental Assessment
G Certificates of Public Conveyance and Necessity
H Operational Agreement
I Analysis of Wastewater
J Soil Evaluation
K Water Balance
L Agronomist Evaluation
M Hydrogeologic Report
N Detailed Plans
O Site Map
P Specifications
Q Engineering Calculations
R Reliability
S Operation and Maintenance Plan
T Residuals Management Plan
U General (Other Information
RECEIVED
MAY 14 2007
Asheville Re(*,)ryel 0i ice

�9AV1yy
Y
State of North Carolina
Department of Environment and Natural Resources
Division of Water Quality
RECLAIMED WATER NON -CONJUNCTIVE SYSTEMS APPLICATION
INSTRUCTIONS FOR FORM`. RWNCS 12-06
The Division of Water Quality (Division) will not accept this application package unless all the instructions are
followed. Plans, specifications and supporting documents shall be prepared in accordance with 15A NCAC 2T
.0100, 15A NCAC 2T .0900 and good engineering practices. Failure to submit all of the required items will lead to
additional processing and review time for the permit application.
For more information, links to forms requested in this application, or for an electronic version ofthis form, visit the Land Application
Unit (LAU) web site at: h[tp:11h2o.enr.state nc.us/lau/main hunt
A. Application Form (All Application Packages):
✓ Submit one (1) original and three (3) copies of the completed and appropriately executed application form. The instructions
(Pages 1 through 4) need not be submitted. Any content changes made to this form will result in the application package
being returned. The Division will only accept application packages that have been fully completed with all applicable items
addressed.
✓ If the Applicant is a corporation or company, it must be registered for business with the NC Secretary of State
(htti)://w",w.secretarv.state.nc.us/Coryorations/CSearch.asp ).
✓ If the Applicant is a partnership, sole proprietorship, trade name, or d/b/a, enclose a copy of the certificate filed with the
Register of Deeds in the county of business.
✓ The application must be signed appropriately in accordance with 15A NCAC 2T .0106(b). An alternate person may be
designated as the signing official, provided that a delegation letter is provided from a person who meets the referenced
criteria. You may download an example delegation letter at: http://h2o.enr.state.nc.us/lau/policies.htTnl#Examl)l .
✓ The facility name on all forms should be consistent with the facility.name on the plans, specifications, agreements, etc.
✓ If this project involves a modification of an existing reclaimed water non -conjunctive system, submit four (4) copies of the
most recently issued existing permit.
✓ If this project is for a renewal without modification, please use the most recent FORM: WWR, which can be downloaded at:
http://h2o.enr.state.ne.us/lau/applications.html#SIA.
B. Attachment (All New or Major Modification Application Packages):
✓ Submit a completed and properly executed Watershed Classification Attachment (FORM: WSCA), along with the 8.5" by
I I" topographic map locating the facility, for each watershed within the facility location (including reclaimed water non -
conjunctive use areas). The most recent version of FORM: WSCA may be found at:
htti)://h2o.enr.state.nc.us/lau/applications.html#AGREEMENTS.
C. Application Fee (All New or Major Modification Application Packages):
✓ The appropriate application fee can be determined from the Division's fee schedule found at:
htti)://h2o.enr.state.nc.usAaa/fees.html.
✓ Submit a check or money order in the appropriate amount made payable to: North Carolina Department of Environment and
Natural Resources (NCDENR).
D. Cover Letter (All Application Packages):
✓ Submit one (1) original and three (3) copies of a cover letter, which lists all items and attachments included in the application
package as well as a brief description of the requested permitting action.
✓ If necessary for clarity, include attachments to the application. Such attachments will be considered part of the application
package and should be numbered to correspond to the section to which they refer.
E. Property Ownership Documentation (All New or Modification Application Packages involving new and/or relocated treatment
or reclaimed water non -conjunctive use components):
✓ Provide either:
✓ Legal documentation of the ownership (such as a contract, deed, article of incorporation, etc.) of the property, or
✓ Written notarized agreement signed by both parties indicating future purchase of the property by the permit applicant and
a plat or survey map showing the property, or
✓ Written notarized long term lease agreement signed by both parties and specifically indicating intended use of the
property and a plat or survey map showing the property addressed in the lease.
FORM: RWNCS 12-06 Page 1

F. Environmental Assessments (Maybe required if public lands and/or monies are used —See 15A NCAC IC .0100 to .0400):
✓ Submit one (1) copy of the Findings of No Significant Impact (FONSI) or Environmental Impact Statement (EIS).
✓ Include information on any mitigating factor(s) from the Environmental Assessment (EA) that impact the design and/or
construction of the wastewater treatment and disposal system.
G. Certificates of Public Convenience and Necessity (All New Application Packages if the applicant is a Privately -Owned Public
Utility per determination by the NC Utilities Commission: http://www.ncuc.commerce.state.ne.uso:
✓ Submit four (4) copies of the Certificate of Public Convenience and Necessity, which demonstrates that the public utility is
authorized to hold the utility franchise for the area to be served by the wastewater system.
✓ If a Certificate of Public Convenience and Necessity has not been issued, provide four (4) copies of a letter from the NC
Utilities Commission's Public Staff that states that an application for a franchise has been received, that the service area is
contiguous to an existing franchised area, and/or that franchise approval is expected.
H. Operational Agreements (All New Application Packages if the applicant is a Homeowners' Association, or a Developer and lots
are to be sold):
✓ Submit one (1) original and three (3) copies of a properly executed operational agreement if the utilization site will be
serving, or currently serves, residential or commercial lots that are to be sold. Appropriate forms can be downloaded at:
htti)://h2o.enr.state.nc.us/lau/applications.html4AGREFMENTS.
✓ If applicant is a HOMEOWNERS' ASSOCIATION, use the most recent version of FORM: HOA, and submit the following
information: articles of incorporation, bylaws, and current or proposed annual budget.
✓ If applicant is a DEVELOPER that intends to turn ownership and responsibility of the wastewater system over to a
homeowners' association, submit the most recent version of FORM: DEV.
I. Analysis of Wastewater (All New Application Packages or Modifications that are not 100% Domestic Waste):
✓ Submit four (4) copies of a complete chemical analysis of the effluent wastewater including but not limited to the following
parameters: Total Organic Carbon, 5-day Biochemical Oxygen Demand (BODs), Chemical Oxygen Demand (COD), Nitrate
Nitrogen (NO3-N), Ammonia Nitrogen (NH3-N), Total Kjeldahl Nitrogen (TKN), pH, Chloride, Total Phosphorus, Phenol,
Total Volatile Organic Compounds, Fecal Coliform, Calcium, Sodium, Magnesium, Sodium Adsorption Ratio (SAR), Total
Trihalomethanes, Toxicity Test Parameters and Total Dissolved Solids in compliance with 15A NCAC 2T.0904(g).
✓ A laboratory certified by the Division shall perform all testing.
J. Soil Evaluation (All New Application Packages or Modifications that include new utilization sites):
✓ Submit four (4) copies of a detailed soil evaluation in accordance with 15A NCAC 2T .0905(b) and current Division Policy
available at: htto://h2o.enr.state.nc.usAau/l)olicies.html.
K. Water Balance (All New Application Packages or Modifications that include new utilization sites):
✓ Submit four (4) copies of a completed and accurate water balance in accordance with 15A NCAC 2T .0905(k) and current
Division Policy available at: http://h2o.enr.state.nc.us/lau/policies.html.
L. Agronomist Evaluation (All New Application Packages or Modifications that include new utilization sites or new cropping
patterns for existing utilization sites):
✓ Submit four (4) copies of a detailed agronomist evaluation in accordance with 15A NCAC 2T .0905(i) and current Division
Policy available at: http://h2o.enr.state.nc.us/lau/policies.html.
M. Hydrogeologic Report (All New Application Packages with Design Flows over 25,000 GPD or Modifications involving
increasing the total design flow to over 25,000 GPD):
✓ Submit four (4) copies of a detailed hydrogeologic evaluation in accordance with 15A NCAC 2T .0905(e) and current
Division Policy available at: http://h2o.enr.state.ne.us/lau/Rolicies.html.
N. Detailed Plans (All New or Modification Application Packages):
✓ Submit four (4) sets of standard size plans and two (2) sets of I I" by 17" plans (electronic format is acceptable - Adobe PDF
only) that have been signed, sealed, and dated by a NC licensed Professional Engineer in accordance with 15A NCAC 2T
.0905(c) and (d). For Modifications, submit plans specific to the modification(s) only.
✓ Plans must include the following minimum items:
✓ A general location map, a vicinity map and a topographic map.
✓ Plan and profile views of all treatment/storage/disposal units, piping, valves, and equipment (i.e., pumps, blowers,
mixers, diffusers, flow meters, etc.) including dimensions and elevations of all treatment/storage/disposal units.
✓ Hydraulic profile from the treatment plant headworks to the highest disposal point.
✓ Highest spray nozzle or drip emitter, locations within the utilization system of air releases and system drains, locations
within the utilization system of all control valves, and other essential equipment.
✓ For automated spray/drip utilization systems, the design must include equipment to prevent spray/drip utilization during
precipitation events or when the soil is in a condition that the reclaimed water could not be assimilated.
FORM: RWNCS 12-06 Page 2

✓ A map showing the entire utilization area with an overlay of the suitable utilization area depicted by the soil scientist's
evaluation. The plans shall show each nozzle/emitter and wetted area (when applicable). Clearly label spray/drip
utilization zones as they will be operated.
✓ Plans must depict a completed design and not be labeled with preliminary phrases (e.g., FOR REVIEW ONLY, NOT
FOR CONSTRUCTION, etc.) that indicate that they are anything other than final plans. However, the plans may be
labeled with the phrase: FINAL DESIGN - NOT RELEASED FOR CONSTRUCTION.
✓ All requirements in Rule 15A NCAC 2T .0909.
0. Site Map (All New or Modification Application Packages):
✓ Submit four (4) copies of a standard size site map and two (2) copies of an 11" by 17" site map (electronic format is
acceptable - Adobe PDF only) that have been signed, sealed, and dated by a NC licensed Professional Engineer and/or
Professional Land Surveyor in accordance with 15A NCAC 2T .0905(d). For Modifications, submit an updated site map
specific to the modification(s) only.
✓ The site map shall include the following minimum items:
✓ A scaled map with topography of the site showing all facility -related structures and fences within the treatment, storage
and utilization areas.
✓ Soil mapping units shown on all disposal sites.
✓ The location of all wells (including usage and construction details if available), streams (ephemeral, intermittent, and
perennial), springs, lakes, ponds, and other surface drainage features within 500 feet of all waste treatment, storage, and
utilization site(s).
✓ Delineation of the review/compliance boundary.
✓ Setbacks as required by 15A NCAC 2T .0909(h), (i), 0) and .0912.
✓ Site property boundaries within 500 feet of all waste treatment, storage, and utilization site(s).
✓ All habitable residences or places of public assembly within 500 feet of all waste treatment, storage, and utilization
site(s).
P. Specifications (All New or Modification Application Packages):
Submit four (4) sets of specifications that have been signed, sealed, and dated by a NC licensed Professional Engineer in
accordance with 15A NCAC 2T .0905(c). For Modifications, submit specifications specific to the modification(s) only.
✓ Specifications must include the following minimum items:
✓ Detailed specifications for each treatment/storage unit, utilization site, piping, valves, equipment (i.e., pumps, blowers,
mixers, diffusers, flow meters, etc.), nozzles/emitters (if applicable), precipitation/soil moisture sensor (if applicable),
audible/visual high water alarms, etc.
✓ Site Work (i.e., earthwork, clearing and grubbing, excavation and backfill, fencing, seeding, etc.)
✓ Materials (i.e., concrete, masonry, steel, method of construction, etc.)
✓ Mechanical and Electrical (i.e., control panels, transfer switches, generator, etc.)
✓ Means for ensuring quality and integrity of the finished product including leakage and pressure testing.
✓ Specifications must represent a completed design and not be labeled with preliminary phrases (e.g., FOR REVIEW
ONLY, NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION, etc.) that indicate that they are anything other than final specifications.
However, the specifications may be labeled with the phrase: FINAL DESIGN - NOT RELEASED FOR
CONSTRUCTION.
✓ All requirements in Rule 15A NCAC 2T .0909.
Q. Engineering Calculations (All New or Modification Application Packages):
✓ Submit four (4) copies of all design calculations that have been signed, sealed; and dated by a NC licensed Professional
Engineer in accordance with 15A NCAC 2T .0905(c). For Modifications, submit calculations specific to the modification(s)
only.
✓ Calculations must include the following minimum items:
✓ Hydraulic and pollutant loading calculations for each treatment unit (Note: "black box" calculations are unacceptable).
✓ Sizing criteria for each treatment unit and associated equipment.
✓ Friction/total dynamic head calculations and system curve analysis for each pump used.
✓ Pump selection information including pump curves.
✓ Manufacturer's information for all packaged treatment units, pumps, blowers, mixers, diffusers, flow meters, etc.
✓ Flotation calculations for all tanks constructed partially or entirely below grade.
✓ Submit the selected utilization system information including manufacturer's information and recommended installation
guidelines.
✓ Utilization pump capacity should consider reasonable operational control, address multiple zones of the utilization
system, address variability of nozzle sizing as necessary, and include the ability to utilize all areas in an appropriate
amount of time.
FORM: RWNCS 12-06 Page 3

R. Reliability (All New or Major Modification Application Packages):
✓ Submit documentation of system reliability in accordance with 15A NCAC 2T .0908(h).
✓ Ensure that the plans and specifications detail the generator, the automatic transfer switch, and how these items interact with
the system instrumentation/controls.
✓ All generators must be capable of powering all essential treatment units.
S. Operation and Maintenance Plan (All New or Major Modification Application Packages):
✓ Submit four (4) copies of an operation and maintenance plan in accordance with 15A NCAC 2T .0913 that shall be
maintained for all systems and include at a minimum:
✓ Description of the operation of the system in sufficient detail to show what operations are necessary for the system to
function and by whom the functions are to be conducted.
✓ Description of anticipated maintenance.
✓ Include safety measures including restriction of access to the site and equipment.
✓ Spill prevention provisions such as response to upsets and bypasses including how to control, contain and remediate.
✓ Contact information for plant personnel, emergency responders and regulatory agencies.
T. Residuals Management Plan (All New or Modification Application Packages that include new treatment systems or an
expansion of the treatment system):
✓ Submit a detailed explanation describing how the residuals (including trash, sediment and grit) that are generated by the
wastewater treatment system will be stored, treated, and disposed, in accordance with 15A NCAC 2T .0908(n) and .0914.
✓ An evaluation of the residuals storage requirements for the treatment facility based upon the maximum anticipated residuals
production rate and ability to remove residuals.
✓ A permit for residuals utilization or a written commitment to the Permittee of a Department approved residuals
disposal/utilization program accepting the residuals which demonstrates that the approved program has adequate capacity to
accept the residuals, or that an application for approval has been submitted
✓ If oil or grease removal and collection is a designed unit process, please submit an oil/grease disposal plan.
✓ If an on -site restaurant or other business with food preparation is contributing waste to this system an oil/grease disposal plan
will be necessary. Please note that operation and maintenance of all grease traps will be the responsibility of the permittee.
U. General (All New or Modification Application Packages):
✓ Please ensure that any systems within the Coastal Area as defined in 15A NCAC 2H .0400 meet all requirements required by
that Section.
✓ Note that all designs and documentation must conform to all state and federal rules and regulations.
✓ Note that if other approvals are necessary for the construction of these facilities (i.e. Wetlands, Stormwater, Dam Safety, etc)
the Division may hold approval of this application package to coordinate with other approvals.
✓ Provide documentation of floodway compliance in accordance with 15A NCAC 2T .0105(c)(8)
✓ Sewers tributary to the subject facilities must be applied for separately from this application in accordance with the Surface
Water Protection Section's requirements(htto://h2o.enr.state.nc.us/peresn.
THE COMPLETED APPLICATION PACKAGE, INCLUDING ALL SUPPORTING INFORMATION AND MATERIALS,
SHOULD BE SENT TO THE FOLLOWING ADDRESS:
NORTH CAROLINA DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENT AND NATURAL RESOURCES
DIVISION OF WATER QUALITY
AQUIFER PROTECTION SECTION
LAND APPLICATION UNIT
By U.S. Postal Service:
1636 MAIL SERVICE CENTER
RALEIGH, NORTH CAROLINA 27699-1636
TELEPHONE NUMBER: [phone]
By Courier/Special Delivery:
2728 CAPITAL BOULEVARD
RALEIGH, NORTH CAROLINA 27604
FAX NUMBER: [phone]
FORM: RWNCS 12-06 Page 4

O
State of North Carolina
Department of Environment and Natural Resources
Division of Water Quality
RECLAIMED WATER NON -CONJUNCTIVE SYSTEMS APPLICATION
FORM: RWNCS 12-06
(THIS FORM MAY BE PHOTOCOPIED FOR USE AS AN ORIGINAL)
Application Number:
I. GENERAL INFORMATION:
(to be completed by D WQ)
I. Applicant's name (See Instruction A): IBEX Thunderbird LLC
Applicant type: ❑ Individual ® Corporation ❑ General Partnership ❑ Privately Owned Public Utility
❑ Federal ❑ State ❑ Municipal ❑ County
Signature authority's name: Jose F. Rosado (per 15A NCAC 2T .0106) Title: President
Applicant's mailing address: 95 Merrick Way. #610
City: Coral Gables State: Florida Zip: 33134
Telephone number: 305) 447-8697 Fax number: 305) 445-1015 Email Address: [e-mail]
2. Facility name (name of the subdivision, shopping center, etc.): Santeetlah Lakeside
Facility's physical address: 90 Old Lodge Road
City: Lake Santeetlah State: North Carolina Zip: 28771- County: Graham
Wastewater Treatment Facility: Latitude: 350 21' 49" Longitude: -83'
51' 43" USGS Map Name: Robbinsville
3. Consulting Engineer's name: Harry B. Buckner, PE License Number: 22541 Firm: McGill Associates, PA
Engineer's mailing address: 55 Broad Street
City: Asheville State: North Carolina Zip: 28801-_
Telephone number: 828) 252-0575 Fax number: [phone]
Email Address: [e-mail]
4. Consulting Soil Scientist's name: John B. Allison
License Number: 1066Firm: Southeast Soils Science, Inc.
Soil Scientist's mailing address: 533 Crabtree Mountain Road
City: Canton State: North Carolina Zip: 28716-_
Telephone number: 828 2324700 Fax number: 828 778-7080
Email Address: [e-mail]
5. Consulting Geologist's name: n/a <25,000 god
License Number: Firm:
Geologist's mailing address:
City: State: Zip:
Telephone number: L—) _ Fax number: (_) _-
Email Address:
6. Consulting Agronomist's name: Edwin Stott
Firm: Soil and Environmental Consultants
Agronomist's mailing address: 3817 E Lawndale Drive
City: Greensboro State: North Carolina Zip: 27455-_
Telephone number: 3( 36) 540-8234 Fax number: 336) 540-8235
Email Address: [e-mail]
FORM: RWNCS 12-06 Page 5

11. PERMIT INFORMATION:
1. Project is: ® New ❑ Major Modification. ❑ Minor Modification
2. Fee submitted: $5,013.00 (See Instruction )- Existing Permit No.: WQ00 , issue date:
3. Facility status: ❑ Existing ® Proposed
" Was this system approved for reclaimed disposal under 15A NCAC 2H .0219(k)? ❑ Yes or ❑ No
4. Does this project utilize: ❑ public funds and/or ® private funds; ❑ public lands and/or ® private lands
5. What is the status of the following appropriate permits/certifications?
Permit/Certification
Submitted
Approved
Permit/Certification No.
Agency Reviewer
Erosion & Sedimentation
Plan
n/a
Nationwide 12 or 404
n/a
Wetlands 401
n/a
Stormwater Management Plan
n/a
Dam Safety
n/a
Sewer System
5/l/07
Other:
6. Does the project comply with all setbacks found in the river basin rules (15A NCAC 2B .0200)? ® Yes or ❑ No
If no, list non -compliant setbacks:
FORM: RWNCS 12-06 Page 6

III. INFORMATION ON WASTEWATER GENERATION:
1. What is the origin of the wastewater (i.e., school, subdivision, hospital, municipality, shopping center, industry, apartments,
condominiums, etc.)? Subdivision
2. Volume of wastewater flow for this project: 4120 gallons per day (GPD)
3. Explanation of how wastewater flow was determined (15A NCAC 2T .0114(c)):
Type of Establishment
Basis of Flow
Flow Per Unit
Number of Units
Total
Residential Dwelling
Gallons/Bedroom
120
26
3,120
Bathhouse
Gallons/Person
10
25
250
Food Stand
Gallons/100
Square Feet
50
1500
750
Gallons/`
Gallons/
Gallons/
Gallons/
Total
4,120
4. Nature of wastewater: ® 100% Domestic Waste (residential, commercial, etc)
❑ 100% Industrial
❑ Combination of Industrial and Domestic Waste: _% Domestic _% Industrial
❑ Municipal waste (town, city, etc.)
" Is there a Pretreatment Program in effect? ❑ Yes or ❑ No
5. Wastewater characteristics (See 15A NCAC 2T .0906(a)):
Estimated Influent
Designed Effluent
Designed Effluent
Parameter
Concentration
Concentration
Concentration
(monthly average)
dal) maximum
Biochemical Oxygen Demand
BOD5)
300 mg/l
10 mg/l
15 m
Total Suspended Solids (TSS)
250 mg/1
5 mg/l
10 mg/1
Ammonia Nitrogen (NH3-N)
25 mg/1
4 mg/1
6 mg/l
Nitrate Nitrogen (NOg-N)
0 mg/1
9 mg4
i
Nitrite Nitrogen (NO2-N)
0 mg/1
I mg/1
Total Nitrogen
40 mg/1
15 mg/1
Total Phosphorus
7 mg/1
6 mg/1
Total KJeldahl Nitrogen
5mg/I
*
im . w5ax"
Phi. a}..._.... _
Turbidity
,�q. �,.y.r
=
r e..ja sra a 'xGii4 , '
r i £K
< 10 NTU
rt
^ct
ek; r „f„x
Fecal Coliforms -
4 " -
14 per 100 ml
25 per 100 ml
FORM: RWNCS 12-06 Page 7

IV. GENERAL PROJECT INFORMATION:
1. Brief project description: Santeetlah Lakeside is a planned residential community comprised of 13 two -bedroom homes and a
sinele building with a foodstand bath house.
2. In accordance with 15A NCAC 2T .0901 and .0910, what is the intended beneficial utilization of this reclaimed water?
Irrigation of common garden and natural amenity areas
3. In accordance with 15A NCAC 2T .0912, provide the minimum distance in feet from the facility's utilization system and
treatment/storage units to each parameter (distances greater than 500 feet may be left blank):
Setback Parameter
Utilization System
Treatment/Storage
Units
Any habitable residence or place of assembly under separate ownership or not
to be maintained as part of the project site
100 ft
Any private or public water supply source
Surface waters (streams — intermittent and perennial, perennial waterbodies,
and wetlands) not classified SA
40 ft
150 ft
Surface waters (streams — intermittent and perennial, perennial waterbodies,
and wetlands) classified SA
Any well with exception of monitoring wells
Any property line
a
50 ft
4. The treatment and disposal facilities must be secured to prevent unauthorized entry. Details and notations of restricted access
measures shall be shown on submitted plans and specifications. Briefly describe the measures being: Locked access hatches
and secure enclosed buildings
5. What is the 100-year flood elevation? feet mean sea level. Source:
✓ Are any treatment units or utilization areas located within the 100-year flood plain? ❑ Yes or N No
If yes, briefly describe which treatment units and/or utilization areas are affected: _, and the measures being taken to
protect them against flooding: _
If yes, does the Applicant have documentation of compliance with §143 Article 21 Part 6? ❑ Yes or ❑ No
6. Method to provide system reliability per 15A NCAC 2T .0908(h) (See Instruction R): Standby Generator
7. A certified operator of a grade equal or greater than the facility classification is on call 24 hrs/day? N Yes or ❑ No
8. What is the specified method of disinfection? Ultraviolet Light Radiation
✓ If chlorine, specify detention time provided: minutes (30 minutes minimum required). Please indicate in what
part of the wastewater system chlorine contact time occurs (i.e. chlorine contact chamber):
✓ If ultraviolet (UV), specify the number of banks: 4 total lamps: 8 and maximum capacity: 40 gpm.
9. How many days of residuals storage are provided (15A NCAC 2T .0908(n))? 365
10. Is duality provided for all treatment units per 15A NCAC 2T .0908(c)? N Yes or ❑ No
11. Is there continuous online monitoring and recording of effluent for turbidity? N Yes or ❑ No
12. Is lined 5-day upset storage provided? N Yes or ❑ No
13. Does the 5-day upset storage have restricted access? N Yes or ❑ No
14. Is aerated flow equalization of at least 25% average daily flow provided? N Yes or ❑ No
FORM: RWNCS 12-06 Page 8

V. DESIGN INFORMATION FOR NEW OR MODIFIED PORTIONS OF THE WASTEWATER TREATMENT FACILITY
1. Type of treatment system (fixed film, suspended growth, etc): Fixed Film
2. Provide the number and dimensions of each treatment unit, and provide their location in the specifications and plans. If an
item is not applicable, do not fill in the requested information:
a. PRELIMINARY TREATMENT (i.e., physical operations such as large solids screening and equalization to remove
problem characteristics such as abrasive grit and clogging rags, as well as to dampen high flows):
Treatment Unit
Number
of Units
Manufacturer
or Material
Dimensions (ft)
/ S acin s (in)(gallons)
Volume
Plan Sheet
Number
Specification
Pa a Number
Flow Equalization
1
Precast Concrete
8' Diameter
3,750
C3
11312
Select
Select
Select
Select
b. PRIMARY TREATMENT (i.e., physical operations such as fine screening and sedimentation to remove floating and
settable solids):
Treatment Unit
Number
Manufacturer
Dimensions (ft)
Volume
Plan Sheet
Specification
of Units
or Material
/ S acin s (rum)
Number
Page Number
Stay -Right
Septic Tank
1
Precast or
8' x 16' x 6'H
5,000
C3
n/a
Approved Equal
Select
Select
c. SECONDARY / TERTIARY TREATMENT (i.e., biological and chemical processes to remove organics and nutrients)
Treatment Unit
Number
Manufacturer
Dimensions (ft)
Volume
Plan Sheet
Specification
of Units
or Material
(gallons)
Number
Pa a Number
Aquapoint
1847 1st
Trickling Filter
2
Bioclere
Stage, 2377
C4
11700
2nd Stage
Clarifier
2
Aquapoint
8,5' Dia.
1600
C4
] 1700
Bioclere
Select
Select
Select
Select
Select
Select
FORM: RWNCS 12-06 Page 9

d. DISINFECTION
Treatment Unit
Number
Manufacturer
Dimensions (ft)
Volume
Plan Sheet
Specification
of Units
or Material
(gallons)
Number
Page Number
Ultraviolet
2
Tipton or
0.58' x 4'
CS
11398
Aroved Equal
Select
Select
e. RESIDUAL TREATMENT
Treatment Unit
Number
Manufacturer
Dimensions (ft)
Volume
Plan Sheet
Specification
of Units
or Material(gallons)
Number
Page Number
Stay -Right
Septic Tank
1
Precast or
8' x 16' x 6'H
5,000
C3
n/a
Approved Equal
Select
Select
f. PUMPS
Location
Number
Purpose
Manufacturer/
Capacity
Plan Sheet
Specification
GPM
TDH
of Pumps
Type
Number
Page Number
Equalize
Equalization
2
flow to
Submersible
30
10.50
C3
Bioclere
Centrifugal
Units
Flow to
Submersible
Bioclere Dosing
4
Trickling
10
C4
Filter
Centrifugal
Bioclere Recycle
2
Return
solids from
Submersible
35
C4
Bioclere
Centrifugal
Sand Filter Feed
2
Feed Sand
Centrifugal Self
15.7
CS
Filter
Priming
Sand Filter
z
Backwash
Centrifugal Self
Backwash
Sand Filter
Priming
48
C5
g. BLOWERS
Location
No. of
Blowers
Units Served
Manufacturer /
Type
Capacity
(CFM)
Plan Sheet
Number
Specification
Page Number
FORM: RWNCS 12-06 Page 10

h. MIXERS
Location
No. of
Mixers"
Units Served
Manufacturer /
T e
Power
h)
Plan Sheet
Number
Specification
Page Number
i. RECORDING DEVICES & RELIABILITY
Number
Maximum
Plan
Specification
Device
of Units
Capacity
Manufacturer
Location
Sheet
Page
Number
Number
Turbidimeter
1
Continuous,
Hach
Co 'Filter
C2
11253
<100 NTU
Buildin
Influent Flow Measuring Device
1
80 gpm
Endress and
FlowHauser Equalization
C3
n/a
Force Main
Drip Irrigaton
Effluent Flow Measuring Device
1
20 -pm
Master Meter
Hydraulic
C6
11300
Unit
Select
Select
FORM: RWNCS 12-06 Page 11

VI. DESIGN INFORMATION FOR STORAGE IMPOUNDMENTS
1. Provide the number of earthen impoundments in the system: 0
2. Are any impoundments designed to receive adjacent surface runoff? ❑ Yes or ® No
If Yes, please specify which impoundment: and the drainage area: _ ftZ.
3. Are impoundment(s) designed to include a discharge point (pipe, emergency spillway, etc)? ❑ Yes or ® No
4. Provide the design measures proposed for impoundment liner protection from wind driven wave action: Concrete storage
tanks are being provided
5. Provide the location of each design element in the specifications and engineering plans for each storage unit:
Storage Impoundment
.Plan Sheet
Number
Specification
Pa a Number
Liner material (15A NCAC 2T .0908(f) and (g))?
❑ S thetic
❑ Cla
C7
® Concrete
❑ Steel
Liner installation and testing requirements
_
Inside berm surface dimensions (L x W x H)
10 ft
20 ft
10.5 ft
C7
Bottom dimensions (L x W)
10 ft
20 ft
C7
Embankment side slope
Mean seasonal high water table depth *
ft
Finished grade elevation
ft
Depth from bottom to top of embankment
ft
Total volume
ft'
15,000 gallons
C7
Design freeboard
0.5 ft
C7
Depth of minimum liquid level (above permanent
liquid level)
0 ft
C7
Effective volume provided **
it'
4 Tanks at
15,000 gallons
each
C7
Effective storage time provided
14 days
C7
IN V 1 E: The liner snap be protected from impacts of the seasonal high water table as necessary.
** NOTE: The storage volume should be calculated between the top of any permanent liquid level (as indicated by outlet
pipe) and maximum allowable liquid level in the impoundment.
6. Provide the number of 5-day upset impoundments in the system: 1
7. Are any 5-day upset impoundments designed to receive adjacent surface runoff? ❑ Yes or ® No
If Yes, please specify which impoundment: and the drainage area: _ fc.
8. Are the 5-day upset impoundment(s) designed to include a discharge point (pipe, emergency spillway, etc)? ❑ Yes or ® No
9. Provide the design measures proposed for the 5-day upset impoundment liner protection from wind driven wave action: A
concrete storage tank is being provided
FORM: RWNCS 12-06 Page 12

10. Provide the location of each design element in the specifications and engineering plans for each storage unit:
5-day Upset Impoundment
Plan Sheet
Number
Specification
Page Number
Liner material (15A NCAC 2T .0908(f))?
❑ S
❑
C7
Concnthetrete
® Concrete
SteCla
El Steel
Liner installation and testing requirements
Inside berm surface dimensions (L x W x H)
10 ft
20 ft
7.5 ft
C7
Bottom dimensions (L x W)
loft
20 ft
C7
Embankment side slope
Mean seasonal high water table depth *
ft
Finished grade elevation
ft
Depth from bottom to top of embankment
ft
Total volume
ft3
10,500 gallons
C7
Design freeboard
0.5 ft
C7
Depth of minimum liquid level (above permanent
liquid level)
0 ft
C7
Effective volume provided **
ft TI
2- tanks at
0,300 gallons
Each
C7
Effective storage time provided
5 days
C7
. N � In. ino iutcr suad no protected from impacts of the seasonal high water table as necessary.
** NOTE: The storage volume should be calculated between the top of any permanent liquid level (as indicated by outlet
pipe) and maximum allowable liquid level in the impoundment.
FORM: RWNCS 12-06 Page 13

VII. DESIGN INFORMATION FOR UTILIZATION SYSTEM
1. The utilization system is: ❑ Spray Irrigation ® Drip Irrigation
2. Utilization system is: ❑ existing ® proposed.
3. If applicable, provide the location of each design element in the specifications and engineering plans:
Utilization Pump Tank
Plan Sheet
Specification
Number
Pace Number
Internal dimensions (L x W x H or W x H)
ft
E ft N
16.5 ft H
C7
11300, 11210
Total volume
466.5 ft'
3489.6 gallons
C7
11300, 11210
Dosing volume
92 ft
687 gallons
C7
11300, 11210
Audible & visual alarms
C7
1li0Q 11210
Equipment to prevent utilization during rain events
C7
1130Q 11210
4. List any equipment (note sheet number of the plans or page number in the specifications) not specifically mentioned above
(pump hoist, odor control equipment, etc.):
5. Loading rates recommended by the Soil Scientist Evaluation:
Fields within
Recommended Loading
Recommended Loading
g LOadin
If Seasonal,
list
Soil Series
Soil Area
Rate
(in/hr)
Rate
(in/yr)
Recommended
appropriate
months
Junaluska-
Zones 1-4
0.72
176
® Annual
Brasstown
❑ Seasonal
❑ Annual
❑ Seasonal
❑ Annual
❑ Seasonal
❑ Annual
❑ Seasonal
❑ Annual
❑ Seasonal
6. Design loading rates are equal or less than the loading rates recommended by Soil Scientist? ® Yes or ❑ No
If No, explain why 15A NCAC 2T .0908(m) is not met:
7. In accordance with 15A NCAC 2T .0910(a)(1) and (b)(1), how will the public and/or employees be notified of the use of
reclaimed water? Access to the utlization area will be limited to property owners and their guests Property owners will be
informed about the system during the purchasing process
8. In accordance with 15A NCAC 2T .0910(a)(3), what education materials will be provided to property owners of utilization
sites not owned by the generator? No sites not owned by the generator are proposed for utilization of reclaimed water.
FORM: RWNCS 12-06 Page 14

9. Provide the following location information for the approximate center of each utilization field / zone:
Field / Zone
Latitude
Longitude
Zone 1
35 °
21 '
54 "
-83 °
51'
32 "
Zone 2
35 °
21 '
54 "
-83 °
51,
32 "
Zone 3
35 °
21 '
54 "
-83 °
51'
32 "
Zone 4
35 °
21 '
54 "
-83 °
51'
32 "
°
°
°
°
°
If
°
„
°
„
°
°
If
°
✓ Level of accuracy? +- I second
✓ Method of measurement? Electronic Maooine
✓ Datum? NAD83
FORM: RWNCS 12-06 Page 15

10. Utilization Design (fill in the appropriate information for either a spray or drip utilization system):
a. Spray Utilization:
Field / Zone
Design Area (ft)
Number of
Nozzles
Maximum Precipitation
Rate (in/hr)
Design Annual Loading
Rate (in/ r
Total
Spray Utilization Design Element
Plan Sheet
Number
Specification
Page Number
Wetted diameter of nozzles
ft
Wetted area of nozzles
ft
Nozzle capacity
gpm
Nozzle manufacturer / model
/
Elevation of highest nozzle
R
FORM: R)WNCS 12-06 Page 16

b. Drip Utilization:
Field / Zone
Design Area (ft')
Number of
Nozzles
Maximum Precipitation
Rate in/hr)
Design Annual Loading
Rate in/ r
Zone 1
4,716
590
0.12
122.2
Zone 2
4,660
583
0.12
122.2
Zone 3
5384
673
0.12
122.2
Zone 4
5060
633
0.12
122.2
Total
Drip Utilization Design Element
Plan Sheet
Number
Specification
Page Number
Wetted area of emitters
8 f Z
DS2
11300
Distance between laterals
4 ft
DS2
11300
Distance between emitters
2 ft
DS2
11300
Emitter capacity
.01 gpm
DS2
11300
Emitter manufacturer / model
Netafim / Bioline
DS2
11300
Elevation of highest emitter
1888 ft
DS2
11300
FORM: RWNCS 12-06 Page 17

11. Cover crop information:
Use the Nutrient Management in North Carolina's Realistic Yield Expectations webpage
(hgp://,A,ww.soil.ncsu.edu/nmp/ncnmwg/yields/index.php#coLinty) to determine the PAN (Ibs/acre) and Phosphorus removal
(Ibs/acre) rates for each cover crop.
Cover Crop
Soil Series
% Slope
Nitrogen Removal Rate
Ibs/acre)
Phosphorus Removal
Rate (lbs/acre)
Hardwoods
3545%
360+
205
✓ Proposed mineralization rate: _ and volatilization rate:
✓ Utilization area based upon the nitrogen balance: 22.748 ftz
✓ Utilization area based upon the phosphorus balance: 15937 fl'
✓ Utilization area based upon the water balance: 13707 ftZ
✓ Utilization sites are: ❑ hydraulically limited ® nutrient limited
FORM: RWNCS 12-06 Page 18

ZOOlJ IOLZ3 ON IH/XS,1
651£T NON LOOZ/9Z/Cal
Pr.fessionotl Eagi... t's C rdfleadou:
I_Ijpdy 13 'B kn PF , arrest that this application for ME i lmindcrbird. LLC Santmtlah Lakeside
has been reviewed by me and is ac v ib-, complete
and consistirtt with the information supplied in thcengincering plans, caloulatlons, and all other supporting dta:umcnbdinn to the hest
of my knowledge. I further attest that to the best of my knowledge the proposed design has been prcpmcd in accordance with this
❑pplicurion gsckage and its insttucdons as well m oil applicable regulations and statutes. Although other professionals may have
developc,i uc;rmin portions of this submittal package, inclusion of these materials under my signature and seal signifies Nat 1 have
reviewed thps material and havejudged it to be consistent with the proposed design. Note: In accordance with NC General Sramtes
143-215.6A.and 143-215.6B, any person who knowingly makes any false stdement, represenmdm, or crrtificntim in ally epph(xition
package shall he guilty of Class misdemeanor, which may include u fine not to exceed $10 as well as civil penalties up to
$25',000 pocviolatiort. {
{{III 'All irrr
North Carolina professional Engineer's seal, signature, and darn: dA r
s SEAL
22541
f
tit; I NF;�<c,� c
11111111111,10
Applicant's iCertificatiun (signing authority, must ne in compliance with 15A NCAC 2T.0106(b));
(signing authority name) (title) President
attest thatthis application for I1317,7C,7hundcrioird. LLC SanteetlahloL:ggj c
(futility name)
has been reviewed by me and is accurate and complete to the best of my knowledge. t. understand thin my discharge of wastewater
from this non -discharge sysmm to surface waters or the land will result in an immediate eniamumcm uction that may include chri)
penalties, initmctive relief, and/orcrimmal prosecution. I will make no claim against the Division of Water Quality should u condition
of this permit be violated. I also understand that if all rtgaircd parts of this application package me not completed and that if all
required suplrorting infon^atinn and onnehments are nut included, this application package will be returned to me w incomplete. I
further ecrtiiY that the applicant or any affiliate has not been convicted of an environmental crime, has not abandoned a wastewater
facnity with. rot proper closures, does not have on outstanding civil penalty where all appeals have been exhausted or abandoned, arc
compliant with any active compliance schcddq and do no w any overdue annual fees under Rule 2T.0] 05. Note: !n accordance
with NC General Statures 1 a3. 3-215.6 person who knowingly makes any false statement, representation, or
ecrtlficatim in any applic a package shall ofa Class 2 mtsdentennor, which may include a tine norm exceed $10,000 m
well as civil !penalde to $25,000 per v' " n.
Signature: v Data: 7
I
ZOPI d0IddO 3QIS,EIIVI V99t6Lh97,8 XBA MDT i.nn;./Az/en

State of North Carolina
Department of Environment and Natural Resources
Division of Water Quality
WATERSHED CLASSIFICATION ATTACHMENT
(FORM: WSCA 10-06)
(THIS FORMMAYBE PHOTOCOPIED FOR USE AS AN ORIGINAL)
The Division of Water Quality will not accept this attachment form unless all the instructions are
followed. Failure to submit all required items will lead to additional processing and review time.
For more information, visit our web site at: httD•/At2o.enr.state.nc.us/la:Jrnain.hhnl
INSTRUCTIONS TO THE APPLICANT:
A. Attachment Form:
✓ Do not submit this attachment form for review without a corresponding program application
form.
✓ Any changes to this attachment form will result in the application package being returned.
B. Prepare the attachment form with the requested information for each land application site.
✓ Additional copies of Page 5 of 5 of this attachment form may be used if necessary.
✓ Use a portion of an 8.5-inch by 11-inch copy of the portion of a 7.5-minute USGS Topographic
.Map to identify the location where the residuals program activities are planned to occur as well as
the closest downslope surface waters as clearly as possible. Each map portion must be labeled
with the map name and number, the identified location, and be of clear and reproducible quality.
✓ Latitudes and longitudes must be reported as being based on either the NAD 27 or the NAD 83
data systems.
✓ Acceptable methods of determining location latitudes and longitudes and their corresponding codes
are as follows:
♦ Address Matching (ADD) ♦ Digital or Raw Photo Extraction (EXT)
♦ Aerial Photography with Ground Control (A -ER) ♦ Geodetic Quality GPS Survey (GEO)
♦ Cadastral Survey (SUR) ♦ LORAN-C Navigation Device (LOR)
♦ Conversion from Coordinate Plane (CP) ♦ Navigation Quality GPS (GPS)
♦ Conversion from Township -Section -Range (TSR) ♦ Remote Sensing (RS)
♦ Conversion from Universal Trans Merc (UTM) ♦ Zip Code Centroid (ZIP)
♦ Map Interpretation by Digital or Manual Extraction
(MAP)
✓ Location accuracy must be provided to the nearest unit (e.g., nearest second, tenth of a second,
etc.).
C. Fill in all required information, including waterbody and classifications information.
✓ Surface water body classifications information may be found at: htto://h2o.enr.state.ne.us/cst✓
✓ Any questions concerning the waterbody and its classification, please contact the Division's
regional offices.
✓ A list of the Division's regional offices, their county coverage, and their contact information may
be downloaded from the web site at: http://h'—)o.enr.state.ne.us/lab/regions.htm
***INSTRUCTIONS CONTINUE ON NEXT PAGE***
FORM: WSCA 10-06 Page 1 of 5 Attachment Order 3-a

D. General Instructions
There are 17 river basins in North Carolina. Each basin has associated waterbodies with assigned
subbasins, location descriptions, stream index numbers and established classifications.
1. Identify the project area on a 7.5 minute USGS topographical map (an 8.5" x 1 I" sheet showing
the project area should be submitted with the permit application regardless of whether a Stream
classification was completed).
2. Determine the names of all the closest down slope surface waters from the project site. For
unnamed tributaries, see Table 1: Unnamed Tributaries Entering Other States or for Specific
Basin Areas. Label any unnamed tributaries as "UT to stream name" as the waterbody name
Watershed Classification Attachment (FORM: WSCA 10-06).
3. Open the link http://h2o.erir.state.ne.us/bims/reports/rel)ortsVvB.htmi (Figure 1). [If this link
does not work, open http://h2o.enr.state.nc.us/ and select Classifications from the Streams,
Rivers, Lakes and Estuaries list. Then select NC Stream Classification Schedules (BIMS).
aas(mride t,j 0 s .
Inttltmatlon `R'
Mandtlnmont
Hugh Carolina Waterhodles Repmec
pjp,f. ne1e. P.pob ar. vpJal.C.w.gY.nJ nalLpl. p.r. In PDf lemr.l
.I.ItA un L. M.w.LprlMeE i¢Inp Guepal P.a]er.
ud:74 meeawm Neuse .-�a.no.e¢.i Alphebatimiy 1 i�Gof
I
ux u mro Chawnn a eq. nw na"r
IGo_v.
❑a.if..n ro at I 03-01-01 i en 1. nigr I vl ¢,
l�G"i�
nrmel p .pmalpn.e aal�rnh.almPeel
CIIhaN 6N phnliyjrolop , EeJ fv(
; ��Gpi M
Sno¢PasNpJoircof 5a.am Gam! ry nc(wl I p mnptlirl/
i
1,001 Y
oumptl prev.w. Durv�+vom
; Go!
Figure 1 North Carolina Waterbody Reports Web Page
E. STREAM CLASSIFICATION PROCESS
One of the options below may be used depending on the known initial project information.
)+ KNOWN BASIN WHERE CLOSEST DOWN SLOPE SURFACE WATER IS LOCATED
1. Select proper basin from the List all Waterbodies in i
Neuse Basin sorted
Hydrologically
report. Sort hydrologically as this will provide the proper location
descriptions if multiple runs.
2. Locate the name of the identified waterbody (from General Directions) on the list.
FORM: WSCA 10-06 Page 2 of 5 Attachment Order 3-a

3. For multiple listings of the same waterbody name in the report, select and verify the location
description. The term "source" in the description means the beginning of the waterbody segment
(most upstream point).
4. Record all Basins, Stream Index Numbers and Classifications applicable to the project in
Watershed Classification Attachment (FORM: WSCA 10-06).
�B KNOWN COUNTY WHERE CLOSEST DOWN SLOPE SURFACE WATER IS
LOCATED
1. Select the proper county from the List all Waterbodies in chow an county,
hydrologically report.
2. Locate the name of the identified waterbody (from General Directions) on the list.
3. For multiple listings of the same waterbody name in the report, select and verify the location
description. The term "source" in the description means the beginning of the waterbody segment
(most upstream point).
4. Record all Basins, Stream Index Numbers and Classifications applicable to the project in
Watershed Classification Attachment (FORM: WSCA 10-06).
e UNKNOWN BASIN WHERE CLOSEST DOWN SLOPE SURFACE WATER IS
LOCATED
1. Use the Clickable basin map to hydrologically sorted list report.
2. Click on the approximate project location to bring up the hydrologically sorted list.
3. Locate the name of the identified waterbody (from General Directions) on the list.
4. For multiple listings of the same waterbody name in the report, select and verify the location
description. The term "source" in the description means the beginning of the waterbody segment
(most upstream point).
5. Record all Basins, Stream Index Numbers and Classifications applicable to the project in
Watershed Classification Attachment (FORM: WSCA 10-06).
F. NOTES ON INDEX NUMBER AND UNNAMED STREAMS
Unnamed Streams 15A NCAC 02B .0301U
• Any stream which is not named in the schedule of stream classifications carries the same
classification as that assigned to the stream segment to which it is tributary (at the point of entry)
except:
(A) unnamed streams specifically described in the schedule of classifications;
(B) unnamed freshwaters tributary to tidal saltwaters will be classified "C'; or
(C) after November 1, 1986, any newly created areas of tidal saltwater which are connected to
Class SA waters by approved dredging projects will be classified "SC" unless case -by -case
reclassification proceedings are conducted.
• The following river basins have different policies for unnamed streams entering other states or
for specific areas of the basin (Table 1: Unnamed Tributaries Entering Other States or for
Specific Basin Areas.)
FORM: WSCA 10-06 Page 3 of 5 Attachment Order 3-a

Table 1: Unnamed Tributaries Entering Other States or for Specific Basin Areas
Hiwassee River Basin
Streams entering Georgia or Tennessee shall be
classified "C Tr."
Streams entering Georgia or Tennessee shall be
Little Tennesse River Basin And Savannah River
classified "C Tr." Such streams in the Savannah
Drainage Area
River drainage area entering South Carolina shall
be classified "B Tr."
French Broad River Basin
Streams entering Tennessee will be classified "B."
Watauga River Basin
Streams entering the State of Tennessee are
classified "C."
Broad River Basin
Streams entering South Carolina are classified "C."
New River Basin
Streams entering the State of Tennessee are
classified "C."
Catawba River Basin
Streams entering South Carolina are classified "C."
Streams entering Virginia are classified "C," and
Yadkin -Pee Dee River Basin
such streams entering South Carolina are classified
11C "
Lumber River Basin
Streams entering South Carolina are classified "C
Sw."
Streams entering Virginia are classified "C."
Except that all backwaters of John H. Kerr
Reservoir and the North Carolina portion of
streams tributary thereto not otherwise named or
Roanoke River Basin
described shall carry the classification "B," and all
backwaters of Lake Gaston and the North Carolina
portion of streams tributary thereto not otherwise
named or described shall carry the classification
"C and B."
Chowan River Basin
Streams entering Virginia are classified "C."
All drainage canals not noted in the schedule are
Tar -Pamlico River Basin
classified "C Sw," except the main drainage canals
to Pamlico Sound and its bays which shall be
classified "SC."
Pasquotank River Basin
All drainage canals not noted in the schedule are
classified "C."
Contact the appropriate Division of Water Quality regional office for assistance with these
instructions.
FORM: WSCA 10-06 Page 4 of 5 . Attachment Order 3-a

WATERSHED CLASSIFICATION ATTACHMENT (FORM: WSCA 10-06)
Applicant's name: IBEX Thunderbird, LLC. Santeetlah Lakeside
Site/Field
ID
County
Latitude
Longitude
Location
Datum
Location
Method
Code
Location
Accuracy
Waterbody Subbasin and
Stream Index No.
Current and
Proposed Class
Site 1
Graham
350 21' 54"
830 51' 32"
NAD83
MAP
f 1 second
Little Tennessee, 2-190-(5)
B; Tr
I, Harry B. Buckner jattastjt��,t this attachment form has been prepared by me and is accurate and complete to the best of my knowledge. I understand that
if all required parts`�f`tlI t Ark ,are not completed and that if all required supporting information is not included, this application package will be returned
as incomplete. �O .. •. �!/
Signature . - Date
22541
F
FORM: WSCA ��:� Pa e 5 of 5
.......... g Attachment Order 3-a
BUG��.�°

SANTEETLAH LAKESIDE RECLAIMED WASTEWATER SYSTEM
IBEX THUNDERBIRD, L.L.C.
GRAHAM COUNTY, NORTH CAROLINA
NC -TN
WASTEWATER DISPOSAL SYSTEM
AND DISPOSAL SYSTEM LOCATION
QUAD SANTEETLAH CREEK,
SCALE 1 =
McGiR,
ASSOCIATES�
ENGINEERING -PLANNING -FINANCE
-1
r
55 BROAD STREET ASHEVILLE, NC PH. [phone] yr• r

NCDENR-DWISONOFWATER QUALITY
.0303 LITTLE TENNESSEE RIVER BASIN
2B .0300
Class
Name of Stream
Description
Class
Date
Index No.
Cheoah River, Santeetlah
From Mountain Creek to
B;Tr
07/01/73
2-190-(5)
Lake below elevation 1940
Santeetlah Dam
MSL
Mountain Creek
From source to Santeetlah
C;Tr
07/01/61
2-190-6
Lake; Cheoah River
Basin Branch
From source to Mountain
C
07/01/62
2-190-6-1
Creek
Green Creek
From source to Mountain
C
07/01/61
2-190-6-2
Creek
Shepherd Creek
From source to Mountain
C
07/01/62
2-190-6-3
Creek
Pinhook Branch
From source to Mountain
C
07/01/61
2-190-6-4
Creek
Massey Branch
From source to Santeetlah
C
07/01/62
2-190-7
Lake, Cheoah River
Cooloska Branch
From source to Santeetlah
B;Tr
07/01/73
2-190-8
Lake, Cheoah River
Snowbird Creek
From source to Polecat
C;Tr,HQW
08/01/90
2-190-9-(0.5)
Branch
Bearpen Branch
From source to Snowbird
C;HQW
08/01/90
2-190-9-1
Creek
Rockbar Branch
From source to Snowbird
C;HQW
08/01/90
2-190-9-2
Creek
Meadow Branch
From source to Snowbird
C;HQW
08/01/90
2-190-9-3
Creek
Pantherflat Branch
From source to Snowbird
C;HQW
08/01/90
2-190-9-4
Creek
Flat Branch
From source to Snowbird
C;HQW
08/01/90
2-190-9-5
Creek
Littleflat Branch
From source to Snowbird
C;HQW
08/01/90
2-190-9-6
Creek
Mouse Knob Branch
From source to Snowbird
C;HQW
08/01/90
2-190-9-7
Creek
Sassafras Creek
From source to Snowbird
C;HQW
08/01/90
2-190-9-8
Creek
Fall Branch
From source. to Sassafras
C;HQW
08/01/90
2-190-9-8-1
Creek
Indian Camp Branch
From source to Snowbird
C;HQW
08/01/90
2-190-9-9
Creek
Owlcamp Branch
From source to Snowbird
C;HQW
08/01/90
2-190-9-10
Creek
Belding House Branch
From source to Snowbird
C;HQW
08/01/90
2-190-9-11
Creek
4ildcat Branch -
From source to Snowbird
C;HQW
08/01/90
2-190-9-12
Creek

Section C — Permit Fee
The permit application fee of $5,013.00 was submitted to and received by the Division under
separate cover on March 2, 2007.

�ra.t E 1
y � t
March 27, 2007
Mr. Nathaniel Thomburg, Environmental Engineer II
North Carolina Department of Environment and Natural Resources
Division of Water Quality Aquifer Protection Section
Land Application Unit -
2728 Capital Boulevard
Raleigh, North Carolina 27604
RE: Request for Permit for the Construction,
Operations, and Maintenance of a
Reclaimed Water Non -Conjunctive
Treatment and Disposal System
Santeetlah Lakeside
Graham County, North Carolina
Dear Mr. Thornburg:
McGill Associates is pleased to submit this permit application package requesting
approval for the construction, operation, and maintenance of a reclaimed water non -conjunctive
treatment and disposal system for Santeetlah Lakeside, a small residential development located
on the shores of Lake Santeetlah in Graham County, North Carolina. In support of this
application, please find enclosed the following information:
• One original and three copies of the completed and executed Application Form.
• One original and three copies of the completed executed Watershed Classification
Attachment and Location Map.
• Four copies of the deed for the property.
• One original and three copies of the necessary Operational Agreement.
• Four copies of the Soils Evaluation.
• Four copies of the completed and accurate Water Balance.
• Four copies of the completed Agronomists Evaluation.
• Four sets of standard size Plans and two sets of 11"x17" plans.
• Four copies of the Site Map complying with 15A NCAC 2T .0905(d).
• Four copies of Project Specifications.
• Four copies of the Engineering Calculations.
• Four copies of the Operations and Maintenance Plan.
• Four copies of a letter of acceptance for Residuals Management.
• Four copies of the Flood Map of the project area
We look forward to working with you as you review this request over the next month
and, should you have any questions or concerns, please do not hesitate to call me or Mr. David
Honeycutt, EI, of our office at any time. McGill Associates and our sub -consultants have
E n g i n e e r i n g P l a n n i n g F i n a n c e
McGill Associates, P.A. • P.O. Box 2259. Asheville, NC 28802 55 Broad Street, Asheville, NC 28801
828-252-0575 • Fax: [phone]

already blocked out our upcoming planned meeting times on -site on April 3, 2007, and again at
your office on April 11, 2007. Of course, if we can answer any questions beforehand, we will be
happy to do so as well.
We look forward to your favorable review and approval.
Sincerely,
cc: Jose Rosado
David Honeycutt, EI
p:\200T07712\misc\applicatio¢ submittal package.doc

Mar 26 2007 11:02AM MCKINNEY&TALLRNT RL/EST
8204788970 _ p.2
V 2
7N51!.id COuirryac 04/20/2001
< $3528.00
�I :Fi'TH te. _
a I': "U.`I :. - Real E Stall.
I% :.
'r1 Cis. TO';-M' WITNTN Di.SCRIBED I.NNDS ARE NOT
CLRT::PJ:SC DY VRED II W=Y. 0%. OR
HcKEEVER. EDWARDS, DAVIS 5 HAYS, P.A.
UNLESS A WRITTEN TITLE OPINION IS RENDERED.
Frepared by: Fred H. Moody, Jr.
�WY,�oyaf o0o.,- I-r%
r-PSTATE OF NORTH CAROLINA
COUNTY OF GRAHAM
NORTH CAROLINA, GRAHAM COUNTY
THE FOREPING CE TIFICATE OF
Notary Public/Notaries Public is/areG rtifled to t correct.
This ipstrument was filed for registration on the da
(/ r Y
—"o'clock
f� M., and recorded In this office in
Regis e(1of Deeds,
GENEM- WARRANTY DEED cJ
THIS DEED made this day of kri'l
2001, by.and between
ARTHUR J. GRIFFITH and wife, AURA GRIFFITH
hereinafter referred to as Grantor, and
IBEX THUNDERBIRD, L.L.C.
169 MIRACLE MILE, SUITE R-10
CORAL GABLES, FL 33134
hereinafter referred to as Grantee. The designation Grantor and
Grantee as used herein shall include said parties, their heirs,
successors, and assigns, and shall include singular, plural,
masculine, feminine or neuter as required by context.
W I T N E S S E T H:
That the Grantor, for a valuable consideration paid by the
Grantee, the receipt of which is hereby acknowledged, has and by
these presents does grant, bargain, sell and convey unto the
Grantee in fee simple, all' that certain lot or parcel of land
situated in the Yellow Creek Township, Graham County,. North
Carolina and,more particularly described as follows:
**'SEE DESCRIPTION CONTAINED ON SCHEDULE "A" ATTACHED
HERETO AND MADE A PART HEREOF BY EXPRESS REFERENCE"
TO HAVE AND TO HOLD the aforesaid lot or parcel of land and
all. privileges and appurtenances thereto belonging to the Grantee
in fee simple.
And the Grantor covenants with the Grantee, that Grantor is
seized of the premises in fee simple, has the right to convey the
�03/26/2007 MON�09!48 [TX/RX NO 82651 IA002

.ti.'aJ[tC �1il LCC b1�1111J1C Li10.�L Ll L1C 1�lU0.iltG l.6L�C a1iU L1 c�G a11U uJ. �i Vl
all encumbrances, and that Grantor will warrant and defend the
title against the -lawful claims of all persons whomsoever except
Eor the exceptions hereinafter stated.
Title to the property hereinabove described is subject to the
following exceptions:
Exceptions and reservations as set forth herein.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Grantor has hereunto set his hand and
seal, the day and year first above written.
w)
kr�)
03/26/2067 51014 00:48 [T$/R% NO 82651 Z 009

Mar 26 2007 11:02RM MCKINNEYaTRLLRNT RL/EST 8284798970 p.3
62
SCHEDULE "A"
LYING AND BEING IN THE TOWN Of SANTEETLAH, CHEOAI-1 TOWNSHIP,
GRAHAM COUNTY, NORTH CAROLINA,
BEGTNNNG ai an existing iron pipe, said iron pipe being located N. 78-09-17 W.
6,781.02 feet From NCGS Horizontal Control Monument "Buffalo" Y=189631.338,
X=170263.174, and said iron pipe being also located S. 65-47-57 W. 81.08 feet from an
exisline iron pipe and runs thence from said 'beginning point S. 53-16-16 W. 110.35 feet'
to "11 existing iron pipe; then S. 55-21-42 E. 125.71 feel to an existing iron pipe; then S,
77-49-59 E. 40.81 feet to a set nail in an asphalt road; then S. 77-49-59 E. 21.97 feet to a
point in the IS 17 foot contour level of Lake Santeetlah; then with contour line 1817 the
following courses and distances: S. 16-27-52 E. 12.62 feet S. 42-31-43 E. 50.84 feet, S.
47-36-1 1 E. 37.55 feet, S. 41-36-41 E. 29.73 feet, S- 41-20-33 E. 14.95 feet, S. 26-09-55
E. 50.28 feet, S. 18-52-14 E. 24.92 feet, S. 14-37-53 E. 55.23 feet, S. 6-33-10 E. 40.40
feet, S. 4-40-1l W. 34.90 feet, S. 10-51 31 W. 32.09 feet, S. 1-38-23 W. 37.86 feet, S.
00-53-26 W. 29.95 feet, S. 29-01-58 W. 19.18 feet, S. 59-08-35 W. 28.40 feet, S. 72-22-
07 W.42.35 feet, S. 83-17-56 W. 27.43 feet, S. 77-23-17 W. 33 feet, S. 76-16-24 W.
46.32 feet, S. 86-09-40 W. 29.72 feet, S. 79-53-51 W. 32.46 feet, S. 61-34-44 W. 23.36
feet, S. 63-21-57 W. 44.28 feet S. 26-01-10 W. 38.07 feet, S. 56-40-37 W. 30.52 feet, N.
87-09-40 W. 26.21 feet, N. 28-00-16 W. 20.11 feet, N. 18-30-15 W. 25.03 feet, N. 42-20-
45 W. 41.46 feet, N. 61-37-54 W. 26.48 feet, N. 75-48-07 W. 32.55 feet, N. 88-09-00 W,
25.44 feet, N. 82-44-25 W 22.87 feet, N. 69-19-19 W. 18.02 feet, N. 38-23-07 W. 8.95'
feet; N. 16-48-22 W. 25.29 feet, N. 27-44-38 W. 18.53 feet, N. 53-41-03 W. 30.64 feet:
03/26/2007 A10N .09:48 tTX/RX NO 82651 004

1. 80-58-24 W, 17.52 Feet, S. 62-50-55 W. 19,69 feet, S. 38-33-35 W. 18.07 feet, S. 52-
23-59 W. 17.23 feet, S, 68-22-19 W. 20.49 feet, N. 86-24-48 W. 6.54 feet, Ni. 78-33-04
W. 43.86 feet, N. 69-55-36 W. 42.40 feet, N. 66-16-20 W. 25.43 feet, N. 64-50-50 W.
32.66 feet, N. 77-56-42 W. 45.77 feet, S. 86-34-01 W. 9.85 feet, and S. 8 1 -07-08 W.
16.18 feet; then leaving said contour line, N. 12-05-56 W. 3 feet to a set re -bar; then N.
12-05-56 W. 56.42 feet to an existing iron pipe; then N. 47-10-01 E. 159.77 feet to an .
existing iron pipe, said existing iron pipe being located S. 15-42-50 E. 64.79 feet from an
existing aluminum pipe, corner No. 2 of US Forest Service Tract 1047-H; then N. 47-10-
01 E. 28.81 feet to a point in the south margin of SR 1147; then with the south margin'of
said road, the l'ollowing courses and distances: S. 82-48-53 E. 35.04 feet, S. 83-03-30 E.
45.67 feet, S. 82-32-57 E. 42.68 feet, S. 83-36-47 E. 24.60 feet, S. 87-01-28 E: 22.63 feet;
N. 87-29-40 E. 26.34 feet, N. 80-45-53 E. 27.63 feet, N. 72-21-35 E. 21_53) feet, N. 65-
49-05 E. 21.04 feet, N. 58-27-11 E. 28.43 feet, N. 51-39-46 E. 25.62 feet, N. 4.5-02-55 E.
25.18 fe::t, N. 35-49-38 E 29.25 feet, N. 26-02-00 E. 30.64 feet, N. 18-24-40 E. 29.94
feet, N. 13-19-52 E. 28.95 feet, N. 10-49-18 E. 36.14 feet, N. 10-07-17 E. 41.73 feet, N,
10-02-57 E. 32.64 feet, N. I I -12-16 E. 45,71 feet, N. 14-23-14 E. 27.32 feet, N. 20-13-54
E, 28.81 feet, N. 29-40-51 E. 25.47 feet, N. 43-21-59 E. 19,62 feet, N. 55-42-45 E. 29.59
feet, N. 71-59-55 E. 28.84 feet, N. 84-49-31 E. 33.74 feet, and N. 89-57-00 E. 10.09 feet -
to a set nail in the south margin of said SR 1147; then S. 01-56-49 W. 91.34 feet to the
nlace of het=inning and containing 7.10 acres_ more or less. as surveved by Terry R.
03/26/2007 51014 99:48 [TX/RX NO S265t Q 005

Mar 26 2007 11:02AN MCKINNEY&TRLLRNT RL/EST 8284798970 p.4
2.4
STATE OF NORTH CAROLINA
COUNTY OF �LUCC/y�/jjd0
I, &Xj , a Notary Public of the
County and State aforesAld7kkertify that ARTHUR J. GRIFFITH and
wife, AURA GRIFFITH personally appeared before me this day and
acknowledged the execution of the foregoing instrument.
fitness my hand and
2001
, My commission expires:
S-d14-d..00 3
official stamp or seal, this 1� day of
Aw, &��
Not Public 10
03/26/2007 MON 09:48 [T%/RY N0 8265i 1a006

Section F — Environmental Assessment
This project does not include any public funds or public lands. and does not require the
completion of an Environmental Assessment.

Section G — Certificates of Public Conveyance and Necessity
This project does not include any Certificates of Public Conveyance and Necessity since it does
not establish a public utility.

ZOO in IP9ZS ON PI/Y11 9P:60 NON LOOT./9Z/till
STATE d:uF NORbS .-AROLJNA
COUNT'1? OF 6' RA N 4 N.
Pcrmit No.
OPEI? 'k f10NAL AGREEM> N7'
This AGREEMENT made pursuant to (IS. 143 -215.1 (di),andenteried .into this
day of
- , by and between the North Carolina Fnvirotamental Maniagement
Commission, an agency of the State of North Carolina, hereinafter known as the COMMSSION; and
/ 59-k. -rmv.) D c L-a mr- U.L- _. , a corporation/general parliturship registered/licensed to do
businessiio the State of North Carolina, hereinafter known as the.DFVELOPFIZ
WITNESSETI-1:
1. Thu: DEVELOPER is the owner of the certain lands lying .in qi Rd- WA � ` _ County,'upoo
which it is erecting and will erect dwelling units and other improvements, said development to be known
as S/W'f44r baA L44 £S r c>E.
(hereinafter the Development).
2. The DEVELOPER desires, to construct. a wastewater collection system with pumps, wa_stewatcr treatment
works, and/or disposal facilities (hereinafter Disposal System) to provide sanitary sewage disposal, to serve
the. Development on said lands.
3. The DEVELOPER has applied to the COMMISSION for the issuance of a pernut pursuant to G.S. 143-
215.1 to construct, maintain, and operate the Disposal System.
4. Thu, DEVELOPER .has created or shall create unit ownership in said dwellings units, other improvements
and lands through filing of a Declaration of Unit Ownership (hereinafler Declaration), pursuant to Chapter
47C of the North Carolina General Statutes.
5. The, DEVELOPER has caused to be formed or will cause to be formed at the time of filing of the
Declaration, the (Unit Owners' Association) S&-IrilLI&ArLA44EsreL wft" Assocr4,nwJ(hereinafter
Association), a non-profit corporation organizedand existing under and by the virtue of the laws of the
Stke of North Carolina, for the purpose, among others, of handling the property, affairs and business of
the. Development; of operating, maintaining, re -constructing and repairing the common elements of the
lands and improvements subject to unit ownership, including the Disposal System.; and of collecting dues
an'd assessments to provide funds for such. operation. maintenance, re -construction and repair.
6. The COMMISSION desires to assure that the Disposal System of the Development is properly
constructed, maintained and operated in accordance wish law and permit provisions in order to protect the
quality of the waters of the State and the public interest therein.
NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the promises and the benefits to be derived by each of the patties
hereto, the COMM1SSION and DEVELOPER do hereby mutually agree as follows:
1. The DEVELOPER shall construct the Disposal System. in accordance with the permit and plans and
specifications hereafter issued and approved by the COMMISSION, and shall thereafter properly operate
and maintain such systems and facilities in accordance with applicable permit provisions and law.
2. The DEVELOPER shall not transfer ownersbip and/or control of the Disposal System to the Association
until construction bas been completed in accordance with the permit and approved plans, and the staff of
thy. Division of Water Quality has inspected and approved of the facilities. In order to change the name of
the permit holder, the DEVELOPER must request that the permit be reissued to the Association.'. The
request must include a copy of the Association Bylaws and Declaration.
3. Ilte DEVELOPER shall not transfer, convey, assign or otherwise relinquish or release its responsibility
for the operation and maintenance of its Disposal System until a permit has been reissued to the
DiEVELOPE•R's successor.
r
FORM:, DEV 09-06 Page 1 of
ZOIn soIddo aaissmFT P9SP6LPM YFd Vh:OT L00-cc/W/6O

£00VgzR UN m/Yd.1 Sb 00 &folk, 400Z/0Z/C0
4. THo DL=.VF.T.OPER shall provide in the Declaration and Association Bylaws that the Disposal System and
appurtenances thereto are part of the common elements and shall thereafter be properly maintained and
op.:aated in conformity with law and the provisions of the permit for construction, operation, repair, and
maintenance of the system and facilities. The Declaration and Bylaws shall identify the entire wastewater
treatment, collection and disposal system as a common element, which will receive the highest priority for
exPeaditures by the Association except for Federal, State, and local taxes and. insurance. .
5. The DEVELOPER shall provide in the Declaration and Association Bylaws that the Disposal System v4.11
be, maintained out of the common expenses. In order to assure that there shall be funds readily available to
repair, maintain or construct the Disposal System, beyond the routine operation and maintenance
expenses, the Declaration and Association .Bylaws shall provide that a Rind be created out of the common
expenses. Such fund shall be separate from the routine maintenance funds allocated for the facility and
shall be part of the yearly budget
6. iui the event the common expense allocation and separate fund are not adequate for the construction,
repair, and .maintenance of the Disposal System, the Declaration and Association Bylaws shall provide for
special assessments to cover such necessary costs. There shall be no limit on the amount of such
assessments, and the Declaration and Bylaws shall provide that such special assessments can be. made as
nex.essary at any time.
7. Ifa:i wastewater collection system and wastewater, treatment and/or disposal facility provided by any citrv,
town, village, county, water and sewer authorities, or other unit of governtnertt shall hereinafter become:
available,to serve -the Development, the DEVELOPER shall. take such action as is necessary to cause the
existing and future wastewater of the Development to be accepted and discharged into said governmental
system, and shall convey or transfer as much of the Disposal System and such necessary easements as the
governmental unit may require as condition of accepting the Development's wastewater.
8. M cognizing that it would be contrary to the public interest and to the public health, safety and welfare for
tho Association to enter into voluntary dissolution without having made adequate provision for the
continued proper maintenance, repair and operation of its Disposal System, the DEVELOPER shall
provide in. the Association Bylaws that the Association shall not enter into voluntary dissolution without
first having transferred its said system and facilities to some person, corporation or other entity acceptable
to and approved by dte COMMISSION by the issuance of a permit.
9. The agreements set forth in numbered paragraphs 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8 above shall be conditions of any
permit issued by the COMMISS.tON to the DEVELOPER for the construction, maintenance, repair and
o aeration of the Disposal System.
10. A copy of this agreement shall be filed at the Register of Deeds in. the Couoty(ies) where the Declaration is
filed and in the offices of the Secretary of State of North. Carolina with. the Articles of Incorporation of the
Asociati.on.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this agreement was executed in duplicate originals by the duty authorized
representative of the parties hereto on the day and year written as indicated by each of the parties named below:
FOR TTIE ENVIRONMENTAL
MANAGEMENT COMMISSION
AlanW. Klimek, P.E., Director
Divisicin of Water Quality
(Date)
/31-X-rHuvcsattaa, Lac --
Nazne P of
Bv: �
(Signature)
✓�GTr� F. RoLADo V,CE FRES,D C..f
Print Name and Title
3/Z6/0 -7
(Date)
_ FORIvt; DEV 09-06 Page 2 of 2
coo 3o Iddo aais3Hv'I POSPG!hSZS Yea CP:OT LOOZ/0Z/Co

Section I —Analysis of Wastewater
This project does not include an analysis of wastewater because the flow is 100% domestic
waste.

SOUTHEAST SOIL SCIENCE, Inc.
JOHN B. ALLISON, President
• NORTH CAROLINA LICENSED Certified Soil Scientist Since 1981
• ARPACS and NSCSS CERTIFIED
SEPTIC SYSTEM EVALUATIONS & MANAGEMENT • WETIAND DELINEATION • BIOSOLMS APPLICATION MANAGEMENT • TRAINING & EDUCATION
February 23, 2007
Mr. Jose Rosado
IBEX Thunderbird, LLC
169 Miracle Mile
Suite R10
Coral Gables, FL 33134
Mr. Rosado,
Southeast Soil Science, Inc. conducted saturated soil hydraulic conductivity
measurements of the surface horizon at Santeetlah Lakeside in Graham County, NC. The
purpose of the measurements was to determine a surface drip irrigation loading rate for a
Large Subsurface Wastewater System (LSWS). 4 Saturated Soil Hydraulic Conductivity
(K-sat) measurements were made at 4 sites across the investigated area. K-sat results are
reported in Table 1. This work supplements Southeast Soil Science, Inc June 21, 2001
report and is attached for your convenience.
K-sats were obtained using a Constant Head Soil Permeameter next to pits 3, 11, 16,
and 18.
K-sat measurements are made to determine how readily water will move through the soil
profile. In the final analysis 10 percent of each K-sat value is used to confirm or adjust
field estimates of the Long Term Acceptance Rate (LTAR) for non -pretreated
wastewater. Up to 20 percent of the K-sat valued is used to assign an LTAR to septic
systems that pretreat the wastewater. The full value is used to determine water volumes
leaving the soil column by deep percolation or conveyance capacity.
DEEP PERCOLATION / CONVEYANCE CAPACITY
The average slope is 48..0 percent. The sideslope has an average soil depth to bedrock of
more than 42 inches. K-sat measurements taken 0 to 46 inches below the surface are
given in Table 1 of both reports. The average of these K-sats is 12.57 GFD.
533 CRABTREE MOUNTAIN ROAD • CANTON NC 28716 • PRONE 828-778-7080

Drip irrigating on the surface and using Darcy's Law to calculate deep percolation,
Q = KTWS where:
Q = flow capacity in gallons per day
K = the average of K-sat values measured in the soil horizons included in "T"
T = thickness of soil between the trench bottom and the top of the SHWT or
weathered bedrock, whichever is shallower
W = width of the treated water exit window of the septic field
S = average land slope
Q =12.57 GFD x 3.5 feet' x 390 feet x 0.48 slope
Q = 8,236 gallons per day
By calculation 8,236 gallons of water could be conveyed out from under the proposed
drip field per day.
SURFACE HORIZON HYDRAULIC CONDUCTIVITY
The average of the 4 surface K-sats is 16.28 GPD. The anaerobic LTAR is 10 percent of
the full value or 1.63 GPD. The aerobic LTAR is 20 percent or 3.26 GPD.
MANAGEMENT CONCERNS AND RECOMMENDATIONS
1. The drip field has a wide exit window. When designing subfields be sure to use
the entire width of the zone to meet conveyance capacity.
Thank you for this opportunity to provide you soils information. Please call with any
questions you may have.
Sincerely,
John B. Allison
Consulting Soil Scientist
1 Average depth to top of weathered bedrock minus trench depth.

References:
Ammozegar, Aziz. Undated. Compact Constant Head Permeameter Users Manual. K-sat, Inc. P.O.
Box 30813, Raleigh, NC, 27622. 45pp.
2. Ammozegar, Aziz, and K.C. Martin. 1997. "Mounding Analysis in the Vadose Zone for Designing
Large Septic Systems ", Site Characterization and Design of On -Site Septic Systems, ASTM-STP 1324.
M.S. Bedinger, J.S. Flemming, and AI. Johnson, Eds. American Society for Testing and Materials.
3. EPA. 1981. Process Design Manual, Land Treatment of Municipal Wastewater. USEPA Center for
Environmental Research Information, Cincinnati, OH 45368.

TABLE 1
SATURATED SOIL HYDRAULIC CONDUCTIVITY MEASUREMENTS
SANTEETLAH LAKESIDE
GRAHAM -COUNTY, NC
Pit
Number
Horizon
Depth
Field
Texture
Centimeters
per Hour
Inches er
Day
GFD*
10%
20%
Field
LTAR
Pit 3
A
0-6
Loam
2.79
26.36
16.37
1.63
3.26
0.7
Pit 11
A
0-6
Loam
0.77
0.30
4.50
0.45
0.9
0.6
Pit 16
A
0-6
Loam
4.19
1.65
24.60
2.46
4.92
0.7
Pit 18
A
0-6
Loam
3.75
1.47
19.68
1.97
3.94
0.7
GFD* = Gallons square foot per day

SOUTHEAST SOIL SCIENCE, Inc.
JOHN B. ALLISON, President
• NORTH CAROLINA LICENSED Certified Soil Scientist Since 1981
• ARPACS and NSCSS CERTIFIED
SEPTIC SYSTEM EVALUATIONS & MANAGEMENT • WETLAND DELINEATION • DIOSOLIDS APPLICATION MANAGEMENT • TRAINING & EDUCATION
June 21, 2001
Mr. Jose Rosado
IBEX Thunderbird, LLC
169 Miracle Mile
Suite R10
Coral Gables, FL 33134
Email ifrosado(a)aol.com
Dear Mr. Rosado,
On May 8, 9, and 31, June 5, and July 10, 2001 John B. Allison of Southeast Soil Science, Inc.
conducted a detailed soil and site evaluation on a portion of the Thunderbird Lodge property in
Graham County, NC. The purpose of the evaluation was:
1. To determine if there was more provisional soil in addition to what the Graham
County Health Department identified.
2. To determine through saturated soil hydraulic conductivity tests if the soil was
capable of accepting a doubled application rate resulting from pretreatment.
3. To lay out septic field drain lines over provisionally suitable soil to determine
available space.
10 backhoe-dug pits and 16 hand auger borings were examined. Complete soil profile
descriptions are enclosed for each pit and boring. A map is also enclosed showing the locations
of the pits and borings, the gravel drainfield, and management zones 1, 2, and 3. Pits and
borings are flagged on site.
Fieldwork was conducted from backhoe-dug pits and a 3-inch soil auger to examine the soil,
Munsell Soil Color Charts, 1998 revised edition, to measure soil color, a Suunto clinometer to
determine slope, and compact constant head permeameters to measure hydraulic conductivity.
The drain lines were laid out with a CST/berger LASER ONE laser level.
533 CRABTREE MOUNTAIN ROAD • CANTON NC 28716 • PHONE [phone]

Recommendations are based on, but not limited to, observations made and data collected on
topography, landscape position, parent material, underlying geology, and soil characteristics.
Soil characteristics include depth to a seasonal high water table (SHWT), depth to a restrictive
horizon, total soil depth, soil horizonation, soil structure, soil color, clay mineralogy, bulk
density, consistence, plasticity, stone content, and percent sand, silt, clay, and mica. They follow
the guidelines set forth in the North Carolina Laws and Rules for Sewage Treatment and
Disposal Systems, laws amended effective January 1, 1999, and rules amended effective January
1999. Grading which occurs subsequent to this fieldwork renders the soil investigation in the
graded area null and void.
DISCUSSION
The main non -soil issue to be resolved is repair exemption. The sideslope soils to the east of
the lodge and restaurant were thoroughly investigated to determine their suitability for septic
systems. The repair exempt status of septic systems installed on the sideslope is a separate
issue. After much discussion with Alicia Parham and James Boyer it was decided that the
sideslope has 1 repair exemption by virtue of being 1 lot. The Thunderbird Motel is built
across 2 other lots. If it is torn down and replaced with residences, 2 more repair exemptions
are allowed for these 2 lots currently occupied by the motel. Therefore, 3 septic systems
installed on the sideslope are repair exempt. Additional systems must have a set aside repair
area.
2. The second non -soil issue to be resolved is available space. It is shown below that the
sideslope has soils capable of treating the effluent from fifteen 2-bedroom residences. The
drainlines for these houses would be installed upslope of the 50-foot setback from the lake.
However, 15 residences would generate 3,600 gallons of wastewater. North Carolina Septic
Rules classify systems treating more than 3,000 gallons as Large Subsurface Wastewater
Systems (LSWS). These systems are required to have a 100-foot setback from surface water
(see map). In addition, your next door neighbor has a spring used for drinking water. A
50-foot setback is not a concern for the proposed drainfield but 100-foot setback is (see map).
The sideslope is capable of accommodating more than 3,000 gallons of wastewater per day
but obviously the 100-foot setback requirement would take up too much space. The
answer then, as dictated by LSWS rules, is to design for just under 3,000 gallons per day.
At 240 gallons of wastewater per day for a 2-bedroom house, 12 houses would generate
2,880 gallons, 13 houses would generate 3,120 gallons. Twelve 2-bedroom residences are
the maximum the sideslope can accommodate. 3 of them would be repair exempt.
The area represented by borings 23, 24, 25, and 26 are in the drainfield for the motel. These
borings reveal shallow depth to bedrock and areas of deep fill dirt. Due to the disturbed and
variable nature of the soil in this drainfield, doubling the hydraulic load resulting from
pretreatment will increase the possibility of system failure. Alicia Parham and James Boyer
have assigned lots [1, 2, 3], 14, 15, 17, 19, 20, 21, and [22, 23] to this drainfield. Based on
the soil properties of that area no more should be added.

4. The hydraulic conductivity of the soils on the sideslope was measured to determine if they
could accommodate the increased hydraulic load resulting from pretreatment.
The field estimated LTAR is 0.6 gallons per square foot per day (GFD). 10 percent of each
K-sat measurement taken below the 6-inch trench depth for drip lines are given on the K-sat
chart below. Omitting the high and low values, the average 10 percent of each K-sat is 1.07
GFD. This supports the recommended LTAR of 0.3 GFD.
K-SAT CHART
SATURATED SOIL HYDRAULIC CONDUCTIVITY MEASUREMENTS
THUNDERBIRD LODGE, ROBBINSVILLE, NC
Pit
Number
Horizon
Depth
Field.
Texture
Centimeters
per Hour''X
Inches
er Day
Gallons per Day
er S uare Foot
10%
Field
LTAR
Boring
Bw
18-24
Loam
2.1.li(2
21.40
17.00
1.70
0.60
BC
34-40
Loam
1.09090.429
10.30
6.40
0.64
0.50
Bw
18-24
Loam
1.76 o.b93
16.62
10.30
16
Bw
30-36
Loam
2.05 Dg,
193712.00
BC
40-46
Loam
2.631.n
24.85
15.40
al.030.60Pit
Boring 17
Bt
30-36
Loam
0.440.11'5
416
2.60
Bt
40-46
Loam
1.60 o. bao
15.19
9.40
5. Zone 1, represented by borings and pits 1, 2, 3, 18, 19, 20, and 21, contains the drainfield for
the lodge and restaurant. Based on excavations, this drainfield has 3 gravel lines, each
200 feet long. There is between 12 and 30 inches of soil covering the gravel. This means
that the trench bottom is 24 to 42 inches below the surface. The 12-inch regulated soil depth
extends 36 to 54 inches deep. The borings and pits that represent this area have bedrock that
ranges 2 to 40 inches deep. Average depth to weathered bedrock is 24 inches.
It appears that this drainfield is installed in unsuitable soil and should not be used for lot
[4, 51. However, the Graham County Health Department is the final authority on the use of
this drainfield.
Abandoning the gravel drainfield, this area can be used for a pretreatment drip irrigation
drainfield. There is enough room for forty 150-foot long lines on 2-foot centers, or 6,000
linear feet of drip line. At an aerobic LTAR of 0.3 GFD, this is equal to fifteen 2-bedroom
residences, more than enough for the 12 houses discussed in item 2 above.
6. Zone 2, represented by pits and borings 4, 5, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 16, 17, and 22, is provisionally
suitable for a 10-inch Large Diameter Pipe (LDP) drainfield. The gravel drainlines extend
into this area about 30 feet each and are not practical to use. There is enough room for six
60-foot long 10-inch LDP drainlines. Using an LTAR of 1.0 GFD with pretreatment and set -
aside repair area, this area can accommodate two 2-bedroom residences.
It is more -efficient to utilize drip irrigation in this area for the 12 residences discussed in
item 2 above.

Zone 3, represented by pits and borings 6, 7, 8, 9, 14, and 15 is provisionally suitable for a
drip irrigation drainfield. Weathered bedrock ranges from 16 to 42 inches below the surface
and averages 32 inches deep. Combining Zones 2 and 3 yields an area large enough to
accommodate a pretreatment drip irrigation drainfield for 15 residences at an aerobic LTAR
of 0.3 GFD, more than enough room for the recommended twelve 2-bedroom houses.
RECOMMENDATIONS
1. Abandon the 600 feet of gravel drain line.
2. Use a drip irrigation septic system with pretreatment at an LTAR of 0.3 GFD and a trench
depth of 6 inches.
3. Since 12 houses is the maximum based on available space and there is room for
15 residences, repair exemption for 3 houses as discussed in item 2 above is moot.
4. Zones 2 and 3 combined have space for forty 125-foot long drip lines or 5,000 feet of
drainfield. twelve 2-bedroom houses need 4,800 feet. Install the primary septic system in
this area.
5. Zone 1 has space for forty 150-foot long drip lines, or 6,000 feet of drainfield. Set aside this
area for the repair septic system.
Thank you for this opportunity to provide you with soils data and interpretation. Please call me,
or have Ms. Alicia Parham, Environmental Health Supervisor, Graham County Health
Department, contact me if you have questions about this report.
Sincerely,
John B. Allison
Consulting Soil Scientist
c.c: Alicia Parham
James A. Boyer
Harry Buckner

References:
1. Ammozegar, Aziz. Undated. Compact Constant Head Permeameter Users Manual. K-sat, Inc. P.O. Box
30813, Raleigh, NC, 27622. 45pp.
2. National Resources Conservation Service, National Soil Survey Center. 1998. Field Bookfor Describing and
Sampling Soils. United States Department of Agriculture. Lincoln, Nebraska.
3. North Carolina Department of Environment, Health, and Natural Resources, Division of Environmental Health,
On -Site Wastewater Section. 1996. On -Site Wastewater Management., Guidance Manual P.O. Box 27687,
Raleigh, NC, 27611-7687.
4. North Carolina Department of Environment, Health, and Natural Resources, Division of Environmental Health,
On -Site Wastewater Section. 1998. Laws and Rulesfor Sewage Treatment and Disposal Systems. P.O. Box
27687, Raleigh, NC, 27611-7687.
5. North Carolina Department of Environment, Health, and Natural Resources, Division of Environmental Health,
On -Site Wastewater Section. 1996. Procedures and Information Required for.4pproval of Large Subsurface
Wastewater Systems. P.O. Box 27687, Raleigh, NC, 27611-7687.
6. Parham, Alicia, Graham County, North Carolina Health Department and James A. Boyer, North Carolina
Department of Environment and Natural Resources. April 12, 2001. Correspondence to Jose Rosado.

Southeast Soil Science, Inc.
533 Crabtree Mountain Road
Canton, NC 28716
[phone]
PROJECT: Jose Rosado
DATE: May 9, 2001
Thunderbird Mountain Resort
Graham County, NC
CLAY MINERALOGY: Slightly expansive
PIT NUMBER: 1
SOIL DEPTH: 2 inches to weathered bedrock
SOIL GROUP: 2
RESTRICTIVE HORIZON: 2 inches to weathered bedrock
PERCENT SLOPE: 31
SEASONAL HIGH WATER TABLE: >36 inches
LANDSCAPE POSITION: Sideslope
TYPE OF WATER TABLE: NIA
TOPOGRAPHY: Uniform
CLASSIFICATION: Unsuitable
PARENT MATERIAL: Residuum
RECLASSIFIED: N/A
FIELD FRTIMATFR
HORIZON
DEPTH
(inches)
MOIST COLOR
MATRIX MOTTLES TEXTURE STRUCTURE CLAY -CONV.
N LTAR
A
0-2
5 YR 4/4
—
Loam
Granular
—
0.7
Cr
2-36
RLWB+
MCS' = Multi -colored saprolite
RLWB+ = Restrictive layer— Weathered bedrock
'CONV. LTAR = Conventional Long Term Acceptance Rate
in gallons per square foot per day
SOIL SCIENTIST: John B. Allison © 2001 Southeast Soil Science, Inc. NC Revised 512000

Southeast Soil Science, Inc.
533 Crabtree Mountain Road
Canton, NC 28716
[phone]
PROJECT: Jose Rosado
DATE: May 9, 2001
Thunderbird Mountain Resort
Graham County, NC
CLAY MINERALOGY: Slightly expansive
PIT NUMBER: 2
SOIL DEPTH: 24 inches to weathered bedrock
SOIL GROUP: 2
RESTRICTIVE HORIZON: 24 inches to weathered bedrock
PERCENT SLOPE: 37
SEASONAL HIGH WATER TABLE: >24 inches
LANDSCAPE POSITION: Sideslope
TYPE OF WATER TABLE: N/A
TOPOGRAPHY: Uniform
CLASSIFICATION: Unsuitable
PARENT MATERIAL: Residuum
RECLASSIFIED: N/A
1. This pit is provisionally suitable for a drip irrigation system.
FIELD FRTIMATFR
HORIZON
DEPTH
(inches)
- - - ---- - -- —r
MOIST COLOR
MATRIX MOTTLES TEXTURE STRUCTURE CLAY 'CONV.
N LTAR
A
0-2
7.5 YR 4/6
—
Loam
Granular
—
0.7
Bw
2-24
5 YR 4/6
—
Loam
Blocky
—
0.6
Cr
24
RLWB+
MCS' = Multi -colored saprolite
RLWB+= Restrictive layer— Weathered bedrock
'CONV. LTAR = Conventional Long Term Acceptance Rate
in gallons per square foot per day
SOIL SCIENTIST: John B. Allison © 2001 Southeast Soil Science, Inc. NC Revised 5/2000

Southeast Soil Science, Inc.
533 Crabtree Mountain Road
Canton, NC 28716
[phone]
PROJECT: Jose Rosado
DATE: May 9, 2001
Thunderbird Mountain Resort
Graham County, NC
CLAY MINERALOGY: Slightly expansive
PIT NUMBER: 3
SOIL DEPTH: 23 inches to weathered bedrock
SOIL GROUP: 2
RESTRICTIVE HORIZON: 23 inches to weathered bedrock
PERCENT SLOPE: 37
SEASONAL HIGH WATER TABLE: >23 inches
LANDSCAPE POSITION: Sideslope
TYPE OF WATER TABLE: N/A
TOPOGRAPHY: Uniform
CLASSIFICATION: Unsuitable
PARENT MATERIAL: Residuum
RECLASSIFIED: N/A
1. This pit is provisionally suitable for a drip irri ation system I
GIM r1 CCTIKAATCc
HORIZON
DEPTH
(inches)
MOIST COLOR
MATRIX MOTTLES TEXTURE STRUCTURE CLAY 'CONV.
N LTAR
A
0-6
7.5 YR 4/6
—
Loam
Granular
-,
0.7
Bw
6-23
5 YR 5/6
—
Loam
Blocky
20
0.6
Cr
23
RLWB+
MCS' = Multi -colored saprolite "CONV. LTAR = Conventional Long Term Acceptance Rate
RLWB+ = Restrictive layer —Weathered bedrock in gallons per square foot per day
SOIL SCIENTIST: John B. Allison 02001 Southeast Soil Science, Inc. NC Revised 5/2000

Southeast Soil Science, Inc.
533 Crabtree Mountain Road
Canton, NC 28716
[phone]
PROJECT: Jose Rosado
DATE: May 9, 2001
Thunderbird Mountain Resort
Graham County, NC
CLAY MINERALOGY: Slightly expansive
BORING NUMBER: 4
SOIL DEPTH: 36 inches to weathered bedrock
SOIL GROUP: 2
RESTRICTIVE HORIZON: 36 inches to weathered bedrock
PERCENT SLOPE: 46
SEASONAL HIGH WATER TABLE: >39 inches
LANDSCAPE POSITION: Sideslope
TYPE OF WATER TABLE: N/A
TOPOGRAPHY: Uniform
CLASSIFICATION: Provisionally suitable
PARENT MATERIAL: Residuum
RECLASSIFIED: Unsuitable
1. Reclassified unsuitable because of slope soil depth correction.
2. This boring would be provisionally suitable for a drip irrigation system
FIR n FSTIMGTFS
HORIZON
DEPTH
(inches)
MOIST COLOR
MATRIX MOTTLES TEXTURE STRUCTURE CLAY •CONV.
N LTAR
A
0-5
7.5 YR 4/6
—
Loam
Granular
-
0.7
Bw
5-29
5 YR 4/8
—
Loam
Blocky
20
0.6
BC
29-36
5 YR 5/6
—
Loam
Blocky
—
0.5
Cr
36-39
RLWB+
MCS' = Multi -colored saprolite
RLWB+ = Restrictive layer —Weathered bedrock
`CONV. LTAR = Conventional Long Term Acceptance Rate
in gallons per square foot per day
SOIL SCIENTIST: John B. Allison © 2001 Southeast Soil Science, Inc. NC Revised 5/2000

Southeast Soil Science, Inc.
533 Crabtree Mountain Road
Canton, NC 28716
[phone]
PROJECT: Jose Rosado
DATE: May 9, 2001
Thunderbird Mountain Resort
Graham County, NC
CLAY MINERALOGY: Slightly expansive
BORING NUMBER: 5
SOIL DEPTH: >54 inches
SOIL GROUP: 2
RESTRICTIVE HORIZON: >54 inches
PERCENT SLOPE: 53
SEASONAL HIGH WATER TABLE: >54 inches
LANDSCAPE POSITION: Sideslope
TYPE OF WATER TABLE: N/A
TOPOGRAPHY: Uniform
CLASSIFICATION: Provisionally suitable
PARENT MATERIAL: Residuum
RECLASSIFIED: N/A
FIELD ESTIMATES
HORIZON
DEPTH
(inches)
MOIST COLOR —�
MATRIX MOTTLES TEXTURE STRUCTURE CLAY 'CONV.
N LTAR
A
0-4
5 YR 4/4
—
Loam
Granular
—
0.7
Bt
4-29
2.5 YR 5/8
—
Loam
Blocky
25
0.6
BC
29-54
5 YR 4/8
—
Loam
Blocky
20
0.5
MCS' = Multi -colored saprolite
RLW B+ = Restrictive layer — Weathered bedrock
'CONV. LTAR = Conventional Long Term Acceptance Rate
in gallons per square foot per day
SOIL SCIENTIST: John B. Allison © 2001 Southeast Soil Science, Inc. NC Revised 5/2000

Southeast Soil Science, Inc.
533 Crabtree Mountain Road
Canton, NC 28716
[phone]
PROJECT: Jose Rosado
DATE: May 9, 2001
Thunderbird Mountain Resort
Graham County, NC
CLAY MINERALOGY: Slightly expansive
BORING NUMBER: 6
SOIL DEPTH: 38 inches to weathered bedrock
SOIL GROUP: 2
RESTRICTIVE HORIZON: 38 inches to weathered bedrock
PERCENT SLOPE: 51
SEASONAL HIGH WATER TABLE: >38 inches
LANDSCAPE POSITION: Sideslope
TYPE OF WATER TABLE: N/A
TOPOGRAPHY: Uniform
CLASSIFICATION: Provisionally suitable
PARENT MATERIAL: Residuum
RECLASSIFIED: Unsuitable
1. Reclassified unsuitable because of slope soil depth correction.
FIELD ESTIMATES
HORIZON
DEPTH
(inches)
MOIST COLOR —'
MATRIX MOTTLES TEXTURE STRUCTURE CLAY 'CONV.
N LTAR
A
0-6
7.5 YR 4/4
—
Loam
Granular
—
0.7
Bw
6-32
5 YR 4/6
—
Loam
Blocky
20
0.6
BC
32-38
5 YR 4/6
MCS'
Loam
Blocky
—
0.5
Cr
38
RLWB+
MCS' = Multi -colored saprolite
RLWB+ = Restrictive layer — Weathered bedrock
'CONV. LTAR = Conventional Long Term Acceptance Rate
in gallons per square foot per day
SOIL SCIENTIST: John B. Allison 0 2001 Southeast Soil Science, Inc. NC Revised 512000

- Southeast Soil Science, Inc.
533 Crabtree Mountain Road
Canton, NC 28716
[phone]
PROJECT: Jose Rosado
May, 2001
Thunderbird Mountain Resort
Graham County, NC
Slightly expansive
BORING NUMBER: 7
33 inches to weathered bedrock
USEASONAL
SOIL GROUP: 2
HORIZON: 33 inches to weathered bedrock
PERCENT SLOPE: 50
IGH WATER TABLE: >33 inches
LANDSCAPE POSITION: Sideslope
ER TABLE: N/A
TOPOGRAPHY: Uniform
CLASSIFICATION: Unsuitable
PARENT MATERIAL: Residuum
RECLASSIFIED: N/A
1. This pit is provisionally suitable for a drip irrigation system
FIELD ESTIMATES
MOIRT r0I r1R
HORIZON
DEPTH MATRIX
(inches)
MOTTLES
TEXTURE
I STRUCTURE
CLAY 'CONV.
N LTAR
A
0-2 7.5 YR 4/4
—
Loam
Granular
—
0.7
St
2-33 5 YR 4/8
—
Loam
Blocky
25
0.6
Cr
33 RLWB+
MCS' = Multi -colored saprolite
RLWB+ = Restrictive layer —Weathered bedrock
SOIL SCIENTIST: John B. Allison
'CONV. LTAR = Conventional Long Term Acceptance Rate
in gallons per square foot per day
© 2001 Southeast Soil Science, Inc. NC Revised 5/2000

Southeast Soil Science, Inc.
533 Crabtree Mountain Road
Canton, NC 28716
[phone]
PROJECT: Jose Rosado
DATE: May g, 2001
Thunderbird Mountain Resort
Graham County, NC
CLAY MINERALOGY: Slightly expansive
BORING NUMBER: 8
SOIL DEPTH: 16 inches to weathered bedrock
SOIL GROUP: 2
RESTRICTIVE HORIZON: 16 inches to weathered bedrock
PERCENT SLOPE: 57
SEASONAL HIGH WATER TABLE: >16 inches
LANDSCAPE POSITION: Sideslope
TYPE OF WATER TABLE: N/A
TOPOGRAPHY: Uniform
CLASSIFICATION: Unsuitable
PARENT MATERIAL: Residuum
RECLASSIFIED: N/A
FIFI r1 FCTIKAATCC
HORIZON
DEPTH
(inches)
MOIST COLOR
MATRIX MOTTLES TEXTURE STRUCTURE CLAY •CONV.
LA LTAR
A
0-2
7.5 YR 4/4
—
Loam
Granular
—
0.7
Bw
2-16
7.5 YR 4/6
—
Loam
Blocky
—
0.6
Cr
16
RLWB+
MCS' = Multi -colored saprolite 'CONV. LTAR = Conventional Long Term Acceptance Rate
RLWB+ =Restrictive layer —Weathered bedrock in gallons per square foot per day
SOIL SCIENTIST: John B. Allison © 2001 Southeast Soil Science, Inc. NC Revised 5/2000

Southeast Soil Science, Inc.
533 Crabtree Mountain Road
Canton, NC 28716
[phone]
PROJECT: Jose Rosado
DATE: May 9, 2001
Thunderbird Mountain Resort
Graham County, NC
CLAY MINERALOGY: Slightly expansive
BORING NUMBER: 9
SOIL DEPTH: 42 inches to weathered bedrock
SOIL GROUP: 2
RESTRICTIVE HORIZON: 42 inches to weathered bedrock
PERCENT SLOPE: 50
SEASONAL HIGH WATER TABLE: >42 inches
LANDSCAPE POSITION: Sideslope
TYPE OF WATER TABLE: N/A
TOPOGRAPHY: Uniform
CLASSIFICATION: Provisionally suitable
PARENT MATERIAL: Residuum
RECLASSIFIED: N/A
FIELD ESTIMATES
HORIZON
DEPTH
(inches)
MOIST COLOR --�
MATRIX MOTTLES TEXTURE STRUCTURE CLAY 'CONV.
N LTAR
A
0-3
7.5 YR 4/4
—
Loam
Granular
—
0.7
Bw
3-29
5 YR 4/6
—
Loam
Blocky
20
0.6
BC
2942
7.5 YR 5/6
MCS•
Loam
Blocky
—
0.5
Cr
42
RLWB+
MCS' = Multi -colored saprolite
RLWB+ = Restrictive layer —Weathered bedrock
'CONV. LTAR = Conventional Long Term Acceptance Rate
in gallons per square foot per day
SOIL SCIENTIST: John B. Allison © 2001 Southeast Soil Science, Inc. NC Revised 5/2000

Southeast Soil Science, Inc.
533 Crabtree Mountain Road
Canton, NC 28716
[phone]
PROJECT: Jose Rosado
DATE: May 9, 2001
Thunderbird Mountain Resort
Graham County, NC
CLAY MINERALOGY: Slightly expansive
PIT NUMBER: 10
SOIL DEPTH: >54 inches
SOIL GROUP: 2
RESTRICTIVE HORIZON: >54 inches
PERCENT SLOPE: 51
SEASONAL HIGH WATER TABLE: >54 inches
LANDSCAPE POSITION: Sideslope
TYPE OF WATER TABLE: N/A
TOPOGRAPHY: Uniform
CLASSIFICATION: Provisionally suitable
PARENT MATERIAL: Residuum
RECLASSIFIED: N/A
1. Pit located 40 feet beyond end of drain line 1 (upper most line)
FIFI n FRTIhAATGC
HORIZON
DEPTH
(inches)
MOIST COLOR
MATRIX MOTTLES TEXTURE STRUCTURE CLAY 'CONV.
N LTAR
A
0-4
5 YR 4/4
—
Loam
Granular
—
0.7
Bw1
4-27
5 YR 4/6
—
Loam
Blocky
20
0.6
Bw2
27-54
7.5 YR 5/6
—
Loam
Blocky
20
0.6
MCS' = Multi -colored saprolite
RLW B+ = Restrictive layer —Weathered bedrock
'CONV. LTAR = Conventional Long Term Acceptance Rate
in gallons per square foot per day
SOIL SCIENTIST: John B. Allison
© 2001 Southeast Soil Science, Inc. NC Revised 5/2000

Southeast Soil Science, Inc.
533 Crabtree Mountain Road
Canton, NC 28716
[phone]
PROJECT: Jose Rosado
DATE: May 9, 2001
Thunderbird Mountain Resort
Graham County, NC
CLAY MINERALOGY: Slightly expansive
PIT NUMBER: 11
SOIL DEPTH: >54 inches
SOIL GROUP: 2
RESTRICTIVE HORIZON: >54 inches
PERCENT SLOPE: Not taken
SEASONAL HIGH WATER TABLE: >54 inches
LANDSCAPE POSITION: Sideslope
TYPE OF WATER TABLE: N/A
TOPOGRAPHY: Uniform
CLASSIFICATION: Provisionally suitable
PARENT MATERIAL: Residuum
RECLASSIFIED: N/A
1. Pit located 7 feet beyond end of drain line 1.
FIFI r) FCTInAATCC
HORIZON
DEPTH
(inches)
MOIST COLOR
MATRIX MOTTLES TEXTURE STRUCTURE CLAY *CONV.
N LTAR
A
0-6
7.5 4/6
—
Loam
Blocky
—
0.6
Bw
6-54
5 YR 4/8
—
Loam
Blocky
25
0.6
MCS* = Multi -colored saprolite
RLW B+ = Restrictive layer —Weathered bedrock
*CONV. LTAR = Conventional Long Term Acceptance Rate
in gallons per square foot per day
SOIL SCIENTIST: John B. Allison
0 2001 Southeast Soil Science, Inc. NC Revised 5/2000

Southeast Soil Science, Inc.
533 Crabtree Mountain Road
Canton, NC 28716,
[phone]
PROJECT: Jose Rosado
DATE: May 9, 2001
Thunderbird Mountain Resort
Graham County, NC
CLAY MINERALOGY: Slightly expansive ,
PIT NUMBER: 12
SOIL DEPTH: 42 inches to weathered bedrock
SOIL GROUP: 2
IRESTRICTIVE HORIZON: 42 inches to weathered bedrock
PERCENT SLOPE: 54
SEASONAL HIGH WATER TABLE: >42 inches
LANDSCAPE POSITION: Sideslope
TYPE OF WATER TABLE: N/A
TOPOGRAPHY: Uniform
CLASSIFICATION: Provisionally suitable
PARENT MATERIAL: Residuum
RECLASSIFIED: N/A
1. Pit located at end of drain line 2 (middle drain line).
I
PIPI h FS.TIhAATCC
HORIZON
DEPTH
(inches)
MOIST COLOR —~
MATRIX MOTTLES TEXTURE STRUCTURE CLAY 'CONV.
N LTAR
A
0-4
5 YR 4/4
—
Loam
Granular
—
0.7
Bt
4-42
5 YR 4/8
—
Loam
Blocky
25
0.6
Cr
42
RLWB+
MCS' = Multi -colored saprolite 'CONV. LTAR = Conventional Long Term Acceptance Rate
RLWB+ = Restrictive layer — Weathered bedrock in gallons per square foot per day
SOIL SCIENTIST: John B. Allison 02001 Southeast Sol] Science, Inc. NC Revised 5/2000

Southeast Soil Science, Inc.
533 Crabtree Mountain Road
Canton, NC 28716
[phone]
PROJECT: Jose Rosado
DATE: May 9, 2001
Thunderbird Mountain Resort
Graham County, NC
CLAY MINERALOGY: Slightly expansive
BORING NUMBER: 13
SOIL DEPTH: 48 inches to weathered bedrock
SOIL GROUP: 2
RESTRICTIVE HORIZON: >54 inches
PERCENT SLOPE: 50
SEASONAL HIGH WATER TABLE: >54 inches
LANDSCAPE POSITION: Sideslope
TYPE OF WATER TABLE: N/A
TOPOGRAPHY: Uniform
CLASSIFICATION: Provisionally suitable
PARENT MATERIAL: Residuum
RECLASSIFIED: N/A
FIELD ESTIMATES
MOIST COLOR
MUKIZON DEPTH MATRIX MOTTLES
(inches)
TEXTURE
I STRUCTURE
CLAY
(%)
'CONV.
LTA
A 0-5 5 YR 4/6 —
Loam
Bt 5-25 2.5 YR 4/8 —
Loam
BC 25-48 7.5 YR 5/8 —
Loam
yGanar7'�
CB 48-54 MCS' 7.5 YR 5/8
Loam
MCS' = Multi -colored saprolite
RLW B+ = Restrictive layer —Weathered bedrock
SOIL SCIENTIST: John B. Allison
'CONV. LTAR = Conventional Long Term Acceptance Rate
in gallons per square foot per day
© 2001 Southeast Soil Science, Inc. NC Revised 5/2000

Southeast Soil Science, Inc.
533 Crabtree Mountain Road
Canton, NC 28716
[phone]
PROJECT: Jose Rosado
DATE: May 9, 2001
Thunderbird Mountain Resort
Graham County, NC
CLAY MINERALOGY: Slightly expansive
BORING NUMBER: 14
SOIL DEPTH: 34 inches to weathered bedrock
SOIL GROUP: 2
RESTRICTIVE HORIZON: 34 inches to weathered bedrock
PERCENT SLOPE: 53
SEASONAL HIGH WATER TABLE: >34 inches
LANDSCAPE POSITION: Sideslope
TYPE OF WATER TABLE: N/A
TOPOGRAPHY: Uniform
CLASSIFICATION: Unsuitable
PARENT MATERIAL: Residuum
RECLASSIFIED: N/A
1. This boring is provisionally suitable for a drip irrigation system
FIFI n FSTIMATFC
HORIZON
DEPTH
(inches)
MOIST COLOR
MATRIX MOTTLES TEXTURE STRUCTURE CLAY 'CONV.
N LTAR
A
0-5
5 YR 4/4
—
Loam
Granular
—
0.7
Bt
5-24
5 YR 418
—
Loam
Blocky
25
0.6
BC
24-34
7.5 YR 5/6
— j!Loa!mtBiEocky—
0.5
Cr
34
RLWB+
MCS' = Multi -colored saprolite
RLWB+ = Restrictive layer — Weathered bedrock
'CONV. LTAR = Conventional Long Term Acceptance Rate
in gallons per square foot per day
SOIL SCIENTIST: John B. Allison ©2001 Southeast Soil Science, Inc. NC Revised 5/2000

Southeast Soil Science, Inc.
533 Crabtree Mountain Road
Canton, NC 28716
[phone]
PROJECT: Jose Rosado
DATE: May 9, 2001
Thunderbird Mountain Resort
Graham County, NC
CLAY MINERALOGY: Slightly expansive
PIT NUMBER: 15
ISOIL DEPTH: 32 inches to weathered bedrock
SOIL GROUP: 2
RESTRICTIVE HORIZON: 32 inches to weathered bedrock
PERCENT SLOPE: 60
SEASONAL HIGH WATER TABLE: >32 inches
LANDSCAPE POSITION: Sideslope
TYPE OF WATER TABLE: N/A
TOPOGRAPHY: Uniform
CLASSIFICATION: Unsuitable
PARENT MATERIAL: Residuum
RECLASSIFIED: N/A
1. This pit is provisionally suitable for a drip irrigation system.
FIFI n FRTIMATFC
HORIZON
DEPTH
(inches)
MOIST COLOR —'
MATRIX MOTTLES TEXTURE STRUCTURE CLAY 'CONV.
N LTAR
A
0-4
5 YR 414
—
Loam
Granular
—
0.7
Bt
4-32
2.5 YR 4/8
—
Loam
Blocky
25
0.6
Cr
32
RLWB+
MCS' = Multi -colored saprolite 'CONV. LTAR = Conventional Long Term Acceptance Rate
RLWB+ = Restrictive layer — Weathered bedrock in gallons per square foot per day
SOIL SCIENTIST: John B. Allison © 2001 Southeast Soil Science, Inc. NC Revised 5/2000

Southeast Soff Science, Inc.
533 Crabtree Mountain Road
Canton, NC 28716
[phone]
PROJECT: Jose Rosado
DATE: May 9, 2001
Thunderbird Mountain Resort
Graham County, NC
CLAY MINERALOGY: Slightly expansive
PIT NUMBER: 1.6
SOIL DEPTH: >60 inches
SOIL GROUP: 2
IRESTRICTIVE HORIZON: >60 inches
PERCENT SLOPE: 56
SEASONAL HIGH WATER TABLE: >60 inches
LANDSCAPE POSITION: Sideslope
TYPE OF WATER TABLE: N/A
TOPOGRAPHY: Uniform
CLASSIFICATION: Provisionally suitable
PARENT MATERIAL: Residuum
RECLASSIFIED: N/A
1. Pit located 40 feet beyond drain line 1 (lower line).
FIELD ESTIMATES
HORIZON
DEPTH
(inches)
MOIST COLOR
MATRIX MOTTLES TEXTURE STRUCTURE CLAY •CONV.
N LTAR
A
0-6
5 YR 4/6
—
Loam
Granular
—
0.7
Bw
6-36
2.5 YR 4/8
—
Loam
Blocky
20
0.6
BC
36-60
7.5 YR 5/8
—
Loam
Blocky
—
0.5
MCS' = Multi -colored saprolite
RLW B+ = Restrictive layer — Weathered bedrock
'CONV. LTAR = Conventional Long Term Acceptance Rate
in gallons per square foot per day
SOIL SCIENTIST: John B. Allison 0 2001 Southeast Soil Science, Inc. NC Revised 5/2000

Southeast Soil Science, Inc.
533 Crabtree Mountain Road
Canton, NC 28716
[phone]
PROJECT: Jose Rosado
DATE: May 31. 2001
Thunderbird Mountain Resort
Graham County, NC
CLAY MINERALOGY: Slightly expansive
BORING NUMBER: 17
SOIL DEPTH: 48 inches to weathered bedrock
SOIL GROUP: 2
RESTRICTIVE HORIZON: 48 inches to weathered bedrock
PERCENT SLOPE: 40
SEASONAL HIGH WATER TABLE: >48 inches
LANDSCAPE POSITION: Sideslope
TYPE OF WATER TABLE: N/A
TOPOGRAPHY: Uniform
CLASSIFICATION: Provisionally suitable
PARENT MATERIAL: Residuum
RECLASSIFIED: N/A
PIR r1 FCT111AATFC
HORIZON
DEPTH
(inches)
MOIST COLOR
MATRIX MOTTLES TEXTURE STRUCTURE CLAY 'CONV.
(a/c) LTAR
A
0-6
5 YR 4/6
—
Loam
Granular
—
0.7
Bt
6-48
2.5 YR 5/6
—
Loam
Blocky
—
0.6
Cr
48
RLWB+
MCS' = Multi -colored saprolite- 'CONV. LTAR = Conventional Long Term Acceptance Rate
RLWB+ = Restrictive layer —Weathered bedrock in gallons per square foot per day
SOIL SCIENTIST: John B. Allison © 2001 Southeast Soil Science, Inc. NC Revised 5/2000

Southeast Soil Science, Inc.
533 Crabtree Mountain Road
Canton, NC 28716
[phone]
PROJECT: Jose Rosado
DATE: May 31, 2001
Thunderbird Mountain Resort
Graham County, NC
CLAY MINERALOGY: Slightly expansive
BORING NUMBER: 18
SOIL DEPTH: 29 inches to weathered bedrock
SOIL GROUP: 2
RESTRICTIVE HORIZON: 29 inches to weathered bedrock
PERCENT SLOPE: 52
SEASONAL HIGH WATER TABLE: >29 inches
LANDSCAPE POSITION: Noseslope
TYPE OF WATER TABLE: N/A
TOPOGRAPHY: Uniform
CLASSIFICATION: Unsuitable
PARENT MATERIAL: Residuum
RECLASSIFIED: Provisionally suitable
1. This boring is provisionally suitable for a drip irrigation system
FIELD FSTIMATFS
HORIZON
DEPTH
(inches)
- -- -►
MOIST COLOR
MATRIX MOTTLES TEXTURE STRUCTURE CLAY •CONV.
N LTAR
A
0-3
5 YR 4/4
—
Loam
Granular
—
0.7
Bw
3-29
5 YR 5/6
—
Loam
Blocky
20
0.6
Cr
29
RLWB+
MCS' = Multi -colored saprolite
RLW B+ = Restrictive layer —Weathered bedrock
'CONV. LTAR = Conventional Long Term Acceptance Rate
in gallons per square foot per day
SOIL SCIENTIST: John B. Allison 0 2001 Southeast Soil Science, Inc. NC Revised 5/2000

Southeast Soil Science, Inc.
533 Crabtree Mountain Road
Canton,NC 28716
[phone]
PROJECT: Jose Rosado
DATE: May 31, 2001
Thunderbird Mountain Resort
Graham County, NC
CLAY MINERALOGY: Slightly expansive
PIT NUMBER: 19
SOIL DEPTH: 24 inches to weathered bedrock
SOIL GROUP: 2
RESTRICTIVE HORIZON: 24 inches to weathered bedrock
PERCENT SLOPE: 39
SEASONAL HIGH WATER TABLE: >24 inches
LANDSCAPE POSITION: Noseslope
TYPE OF WATER TABLE: N/A
TOPOGRAPHY:, Uniform
CLASSIFICATION: Unsuitable
PARENT MATERIAL: Residuum
RECLASSIFIED: Provisionally suitable
1. This pit is provisionally suitable for a drip irrigation system'
FIFI r) CC71RAAT=0
HORIZON
DEPTH
(inches)
- _ -_ ........ MOIST COLOR -- --.-1
MATRIX MOTTLES TEXTURE STRUCTURE CLAY 'CONV.
N LTAR
A
0-3
5 YR 4/4
—
Loam
Granular
—
0.7
Bw
3-24
5 YR 5/6
—
Loam
Blocky
20
0.6
Cr
24
RLWB+
MCS' = Multi -colored saprolite 'CONV. LTAR = Conventional Long Term Acceptance Rate
RLWB+ = Restrictive layer -Weathered bedrock in gallons per square foot per day
SOIL SCIENTIST: John B. Allison © 2001 Southeast Soil Science, Inc. NC Revised 5/2000

Southeast Soil Science, Inc.
533 Crabtree Mountain Road
Canton, NC 28716
[phone]
PROJECT: Jose Rosado
DATE: May 31, 2001
Thunderbird Mountain Resort
Graham County, NC
CLAY MINERALOGY: Slightly expansive
BORING NUMBER: 20
SOIL DEPTH: 40 inches to weathered bedrock
SOIL GROUP: 2
RESTRICTIVE HORIZON: 40 inches to weathered bedrock
PERCENT SLOPE: 57
SEASONAL HIGH WATER TABLE: >40 inches
LANDSCAPE POSITION: Sideslope
TYPE OF WATER TABLE: N/A
TOPOGRAPHY: Uniform
CLASSIFICATION: Provisionally suitable
PARENT MATERIAL: Residuum
RECLASSIFIED: N/A
a FIFI n FRTIMATFR
HORIZON
DEPTH
(inches)
MOIST COLOR -
MATRIX MOTTLES TEXTURE STRUCTURE CLAY 'CONV.
(°/,) LTAR
A
0-5
5 YR 414
—
Loam
Granular
—
0.7
Bw
5-40
5 YR 5/6
—
Loam
Blocky
20
0.6
Cr
40
RLWB+
MCS' = Multi -colored saprolite
RLWB+ = Restrictive layer - Weathered bedrock
'CONV. LTAR = Conventional Long Term Acceptance Rate
in gallons per square foot per day
SOIL SCIENTIST: John B. Allison 0 2001 Southeast Soil Science, Inc. NC Revised 5/2000

Southeast Soil Science, Inc.
533 Crabtree Mountain Road
Canton, NC 28716
[phone]
PROJECT: Jose Rosado
DATE: May 31, 2001
Thunderbird Mountain Resort
Graham County, NC
CLAY MINERALOGY: Slightly expansive
BORING NUMBER: 21
SOIL DEPTH: 30 inches to weathered bedrock
SOIL GROUP: 2
RESTRICTIVE HORIZON: 30 inches to weathered bedrock
PERCENT SLOPE: 62
SEASONAL HIGH WATER TABLE: >30 inches
LANDSCAPE POSITION: Sideslope
TYPE OF WATER TABLE: N/A
TOPOGRAPHY: Uniform
CLASSIFICATION: Unsuitable
PARENT MATERIAL: Residuum
RECLASSIFIED: Provisionally suitable
1. 3 borings attempted at this site — all have weathered bedrock at 30 inches
2. This boring is provisionally suitable for a drip irrigation system
FIELD ESTIMATES
HORIZON
DEPTH
(inches)
MOIST COLOR ---�
MATRIX MOTTLES TEXTURE STRUCTURE CLAY 'CONV.
N LTAR
A
04
7.5 YR 4/4
—
Loam
Granular
—
0.7
Bt
4-30
2.5 YR 5/6
—
Loam
Blocky
25
0.6
Cr
30
RLWB+
MCS' = Multi -colored saprolite
RLWB+ = Restrictive layer — Weathered bedrock
'CONV. LTAR = Conventional Long Term Acceptance Rate
in gallons per square foot per day
SOIL SCIENTIST: John B. Allison 02001 Southeast Soil Science, Inc. NC Revised 5/2000

Southeast Soil Science, Inc.
533 Crabtree Mountain Road
Canton, NC 28716
[phone]
PROJECT: Jose Rosado
DATE: May 31, 2001
Thunderbird Mountain Resort
Graham County, NC
CLAY MINERALOGY: Slightly expansive
PIT NUMBER: 22
SOIL DEPTH: 44 inches to weathered bedrock
SOIL GROUP: 2
RESTRICTIVE HORIZON: 44 inches to weathered bedrock
PERCENT SLOPE: 63
SEASONAL HIGH WATER TABLE: >44 inches
LANDSCAPE POSITION: Sideslope
TYPE OF WATER TABLE: N/A
TOPOGRAPHY: Uniform
CLASSIFICATION: Unsuitable
PARENT MATERIAL: Residuum
RECLASSIFIED: Provisionally suitable
FIFA) FRTIMGTFC
HORIZON
DEPTH
(inches)
MOIST COLOR
MATRIX MOTTLES TEXTURE STRUCTURE CLAY 'CONV.
(o/,) LTAR
A
0-6
5 YR 4/4
—
Loam
Granular
—
0.7
Bw
6-44
2.5 YR 5/6
—
Loam
Blocky
20
0.6
Cr
44
RLWB+
MCS' = Multi -colored saprolite
RLWB+ = Restrictive layer —Weathered bedrock
'CONV. LTAR = Conventional Long Term Acceptance Rate
in gallons per square foot per day
SOIL SCIENTIST: John B. Allison 0 2001 Southeast Soil Science, Inc. NC Revised 5/2000

Southeast Soil Science, Inc.
533 Crabtree Mountain Road
Canton, NC 28716
[phone]
PROJECT: Jose Rosado
DATE: June 5, 2001
Thunderbird Mountain Resort
Graham County, NC
CLAY MINERALOGY: N/A
BORING NUMBER: 23
FILL DEPTH: 21 inches
SOIL GROUP: N/A
RESTRICTIVE HORIZON: 21 inches to weathered bedrock
PERCENT SLOPE: 47
SEASONAL HIGH WATER TABLE: >21 Inches
LANDSCAPE. POSITION: Sideslope
TYPE OF WATER TABLE: N/A
TOPOGRAPHY: Uniform
CLASSIFICATION: Unsuitable
PARENT MATERIAL: Fill dirt
RECLASSIFIED: N/A
FIELD ESTIMATES
HORIZON
DEPTH
(inches)
MOIST COLOR
MATRIX MOTTLES TEXTURE STRUCTURE CLAY 'CONV.
(%) LTAR
Fill dirt
0-21
—
—
—
—
—
—
Cr
21
RLWB+
MCS* = Multi -colored saprolite
RLWB+= Restrictive layer— Weathered bedrock
'CONV. LTAR = Conventional Long Tenn Acceptance Rate
in gallons per square foot per day
SOIL SCIENTIST: John B. Allison 0 2001 Southeast Soil Science, Inc. NC Revised 5/2000

Southeast Soil Science, Inc.
533 Crabtree Mountain Road
Canton, NC 28716
[phone]
PROJECT: Jose Rosado
DATE: June 5, 2001
Thunderbird Mountain Resort
Graham County, NC
CLAY MINERALOGY: Slightly expansive
BORING NUMBER: 24
SOIL DEPTH: 19 inches
SOIL GROUP: 2
RESTRICTIVE HORIZON: >60 inches
PERCENT SLOPE: 45
SEASONAL HIGH WATER TABLE: >54 inches
LANDSCAPE POSITION: Sideslope
TYPE OF WATER TABLE: N/A
TOPOGRAPHY: Uniform
CLASSIFICATION: Unsuitable
PARENT MATERIAL: Residuum
RECLASSIFIED: Provisionally suitable
1. Provisionally suitable if soil/saprolite rule .1956(6)(d) is applied.
2. Truncated profile.
FIELD ESTIMATES
HORIZON
DEPTH
(inches)
MOIST COLOR
MATRIX MOTTLES TEXTURE STRUCTURE CLAY 'CONV.
N LTAR
Bw
0-19
5 YR 5/6
—
Loam
Blocky
20
0.6
C
19-54
MCS'
—
Sandy loam
Massive
—
0.5
MCS' = Multi -colored saprolite
RLW B+ = Restrictive layer — Weathered bedrock
'CONY. LTAR = Conventional Long Term Acceptance Rate
in gallons per square foot per day
SOIL SCIENTIST: John B. Allison © 2001 Southeast Soil Science, Inc. NC Revised 5/2000

Southeast Soil Science, Inc.
533 Crabtree Mountain Road
Canton, NC 28716
[phone]
PROJECT: Jose Rosado
DATE: June 5, 2001
Thunderbird Mountain Resort
Graham County, NC
CLAY MINERALOGY: N/A
BORING NUMBER: 25
FILL DEPTH: 32 inches to top of drainline
SOIL GROUP: N/A
RESTRICTIVE HORIZON: >60 inches
PERCENT SLOPE: 42
SEASONAL HIGH WATER TABLE: >32 inches
LANDSCAPE POSITION:.Sideslope
TYPE OF WATER TABLE: N/A
TOPOGRAPHY: Uniform
CLASSIFICATION: N/A
PARENT MATERIAL: Fill dirt
RECLASSIFIED: N/A
NOTES:
1. Boring located in a drainfield.
FIELD ESTIMATES
HORIZON
DEPTH
(inches)
MOIST COLOR
MATRIX MOTTLES TEXTURE STRUCTURE CLAY 'CONV.
N LTAR
Fill dirt
0-32
—
32
Stopped by rock
fragment
Probed to
60 inches
MCS' = Multi -colored saprolite
RLW B+ = Restrictive layer — Weathered bedrock
'CONV. LTAR = Conventional Long Term Acceptance Rate
in gallons per square foot per day
SOIL SCIENTIST: John B. Allison © 2001 Southeast Soil Science; Inc. NC Revised 5/2000

Southeast Soil Science, Inc:
533 Crabtree Mountain Road
Canton, NC 28716
[phone]
PROJECT: Jose Rosado
DATE: June 5, 2001
Thunderbird Mountain Resort
Graham County, NC
CLAY MINERALOGY: N/A
BORING NUMBER: 26
FILL DEPTH: >60 inches
SOIL GROUP: N/A
RESTRICTIVE HORIZON: >60 inches
PERCENT SLOPE: 42
SEASONAL HIGH WATER TABLE: >60 inches
LANDSCAPE POSITION: Sideslope
TYPE OF WATER TABLE: N/A
TOPOGRAPHY: Uniform
CLASSIFICATION: Unsuitable
PARENT MATERIAL: Fill dirt
RECLASSIFIED: N/A
FIELD FSTIMATFS
HORIZON
DEPTH
(inches)
MOIST COLOR ~
MATRIX MOTTLES TEXTURE STRUCTURE CLAY *CONV.
N LTAR
Fill dirt
0-54
Probed to
60 inches
MCS* = Multi -colored saprolite
RLW B+ = Restrictive layer — Weathered bedrock
*CONV. LTAR = Conventional Long Term Acceptance Rate
in gallons per square foot per day
SOIL SCIENTIST: John B. Allison © 2001 Southeast Soil Science, Inc. NC Revised 5/2000

parry D. OUCKner, r.t. IVICUIII HSSOC11t@S
SEA
E 2 54GIN
1
J
•• is ��• �6P 4.
WaterBudget_DWQ_VerS_Final.xls Project Id Version 5 December 2004

I
f nter Data
Calculate the precipitation for an
:lick on each step box.
Step q��
Mean Monthl
Month
Precipitation
�
�.•
inches,
'
January
5.24
February
4.96
Marchi5.63
April
4.54
May
5,69
June
;5.76
j .
Jul
5.42
August
4,08
September
3.97
'
October
2.76
I
November
`4'.61
December
4.86
TOTALS = 57.51
1
I
,-.
Precipitation Data
Percent of Mean
Annual Precipitation
percent
9.11
8.63
9.78
7.90
9.88
10.01
9.42
7.09
6U8.45
91
100.00
Precipitation Worksheet FYI
'wet" year, based on long term data (approx. 30 years orgreater).
step I. Step 31- Precipitation Datasoucre `^'
Monthly
a
Inches
Location of Precipita IStation 318492 Tapoco, Nc:
5.46Staring Year of Data Record: 1976.'
6.19 r
5.00 j Ending Year of Data Record: 2006� ��
s.zs j Step 4
Values shown in yellow
6.I calls are linked to other Period of Record (Years) = 30
5:96 i locations within the Water - fl�ti
4.49 i Balance Program _ Source of Data:/
4.37 ( Slete Climate Office of North Carolina (Frttp:/Iwww.nc-
3.04 1 climato.ncsu.edun
sm
caldu�
I
WaterBudget_DWQ_Ver5_Final.xls Precip Version December2O04

Enter Data __> Potential Evapo-Transpiration (PET) Worksheft
I
i Choose PET Method: 'D+ Thomthwaite Method --Click on. CheckBox ❑Manually Entered PET i
Click on each step box - PET Data I FYI.T.. ^
Thornthwaite PET Calculation used in
Sr Water 1
Step 1 I •^- Step 2. Balance - 'FYI
I Mean monthly Daylight �. Calculated
Month temp. hours 112 Heal lode[ PET Sity LatiNtlo
(tlegrees Fl � � Inches degrees I _ _ _ �
January " 38.6 0.87 0.63 0.23 — -- !
�SJt om
Feb..,4.1.31 .0.47
'I
March 4%9 1.03 2.81 1.23 withinrengo I
SteP6
APrll 58:2 1.09 S.OJ 233
May 66.2 1.21 710 ]-]0�
June 71.8 1.31 9.48 4.88 t q 88 1 Valuesahown in
hIY ]Sil :1..2 1a.]0 6.60 om' yellow eell6areAugust ]4:2 10.36 9.11 S1linked to other ,
September 63.5 8.48 3.71 locations within the
3']1 'r WaterBalanwOctober '58.6 6.taM1 21Program
November SDA Z8] 1.04 104 1
December 41:r Lit 0.40 f 0.40
I Jill
I
� TOTALS 65.16 J0.82 _ Jo.82 I
Source of Temperature Data Source of PET Data j
f S Step 3 Step
I Location of Precipitation Data: Stat1on318492 Taporo,NO
Staring Year of Data Recortl t9]6
Ending Year of Data RecoFl 2005
{ Period of Recortl (Years) = 30
i
Source of Data: 1
1 State C iimato lmce of North Carol.. lhnp;lAvww.no- "' 1
WaterBudget_DWQ_VerS_Finat.xls PET Version 5 December2004

Influent Lagoon Storage 8le a =�ste a r; s e' a, . zone 1 zone z z0
t r Dotal Flow o be -
and Zine Setup Work0h 1- Area ar Dealgn Dolly Olsposod TOUI Flow to „Daily Flow to Wetletl Daily Flow to Wenetl Daily Flow to
•.j- Lag n Flow tlnnuantl (Annual �' AIIZonae Zonoi Pcreaga 2ane2 Acreage Zone
, Averaged) 5
r
:elculale lho adjusted loll nl loatling by inclutling the gains acres gaIld y galal0ay acres gala/say galsftldy
antllosacs frtli u.ta llorage Lagoon, and sal uplhe Spmy _ r-
--+ Zones areas and lndbldual Zone rlawndaas 1000 t 4;]g0 galsltlay '� galsltlay :by,41�0, U46 "'q03' ., 900u,. t:.2
lick on each step box i V t `at 4,120
_ .. '.;
should ba
nter Data I > j'*y,� Pan Evap. Gala Pmclp lagoon Gains B Lasses should t Im Rate 2.35 Irt Rate Irr. Rate
o u01
,-. a �••.. 4 ,+J (INwk1= (InPvk1• IINwk1=
_ II .. n.. ,r .., 'F ,. _.
Days Pan
per Evaporation Adjusted
Month month pats Pan Data
InchesI Inches
land., 31 z T 0.00
obmary 20 0,00
March 31 y=£ 1 0.00
April 30 "-*+ 0.00
May 31 0.00
June 30 0.00
July 31 - - Q00
;.gust 31 O.OD
plumber 30 ,. O.OD
Totals: 066 , 0.00 0.00
t je,
Source of PAN Evap. Data
Other (ListHelowl
Zone 1 Zone 2
(LaOoon aE
Oeslgn Influent '' Total: Influ nt '� Zono 1 pe.lgn 2ana 3 Design Zone 3
Gains tram Volume par LaOoon Gains Volume to be Irrlgalian per Volume to ho Irrigation per Volume to be
Pmclp • Pmcip. Month Lasses plaposetl month Dlspoaetl month Disposed
Inch.. gallons gallons gallons gallon. °
i •; r: u emlana manna gallons Inane. gallons
6.77 o 0 12rdxo 121,72o - 127,720 f io.dr 0
6.08 0 0 116,360 116,360 " 116,380 _9.40 0 0.00' 0
6.19 D 0 127,720 127720 127,720 1D.41 0 :000 0
'.
6.00 0 0 123,600 133600 123.600 10.0]. 0 "--0.00 0
8.26 0 0 127.720 127.720 - - 127,720 -10.41 0 0.00� 0
6.]3 p 0 12],600 > 123,600 - 123 00 10.07 D s0.00 ,.,. p
5.96 0 0 12r,720 E 127720 t,',^ t t 1} 1271720 1041 0 0.00 0
4.49 0 0 137,73p i 1x7,720 �• < 1271720 _ 10.41. 0 0.00 _ g
4.37 0 0 123.600 1236D0 ;+ ,,_ 123,6p0 10.07 0 _ 0.00
3.p4 0 0 127,720 127720 ''I' 127,720
I 10.41 0 j 0.00.
6,Or 0 0 123.000 12],600 i `.'
•'r.. 1x3,600 t 10.07 o I " 0.00 ` D
6A4 0 0 127,720 127720 'c " 127,720 f-.10.41 0 J'. _0.00 0
fi1.361 0 0 1,50],600 t,6W Bp0 .d t,6p],800 U25] D 0.00 0
]
IV
1
WaterBudge1_DWD_Vef5_FInaI.x1s Influent+Zones Setup Version 5 December 2004

Soils and Water Balance for Zone I" Soils Series Information for Zone 1 Potential site limitations
I
Zone 1 Description: . Prfma Disposal Field Water table depth risk of Is bedrock a
P ry P Series Name Drainage class (BLS) perching 60"BLS 7 '.BLS = below land surface
Calculate Sol[ Drainage ! 'Jilnaldska5 " well >3.0 moderate no
Ste 1 Este 2' f-x Ksat
In -situ saluratetl venical Soil
hydraulic conductivity Dralna a Drain;
e LJ
(Keel) factor lB Raleg _ - - _.
. - _ .... I
Click the
INhr In/day are In/day Copied from Influent a Zones Setup Sheet "CALCULATE"
0.71 17.04 * AA29: 0.48 Daily Flow = 4,120 galslday button after making
k,°j112 chan
L- Zone 1 Area es. = 0.45 acres g
COlculaletl Manual gctual Us ad I
Override Cummulative
Days per Zone 1 Maximum Ma%Imam Ma%imam Storage Actual
Month Y P PET Soil Zone 1 preci Allowable Allowable Allowable Required for Monthl
month ❑ Drainage
Total Loss P Design Irrigation Monthly Y
9 Irriga0on lrrlgatlon Irtigadan er Month E%cess Irtfgelion IrdgaOon Rate
I February 28 10.47s i1779 I1J02 15.46s 19.37s Inches - I8.37s 1940e d.OJa' r-• 1=cch=s_' Inches I January J7 0.23 14.79 16.02 5.77 9.25 9.25 10.41 1.15 1 1.71 1 9.25 {
2.74
_ 9a7 i
! March 31 1.2J 14.79 16.02 6.19 8.84 9.84 10.41 -0.57 ( 3.31
APtlI 30 2.32 14.37 16.64 5.00 11.64 ,
i64
11.64 70.07 1.54 0 Oil - _ f 12.15 {
May 31 3.70 14.79 18.50 6.25 12.24 12.24 10.4Y 1.84 l _ 0.00- 12.15 _ E June 30 4.88 14.31 19.20 6.33 12.87 12.87 10.07 2.80 I o.ah I 10.07 `
JuIY 31 5.60 14.79 20.19 5.9fi 14.47 -� 14.43 10.41 4.02 �0,00 I 10.41 • ^l
I August 71 5.11 14.79 18.90 4.49 15.42 i 15.42 10.41 5.of f 0,0 10.41
September 30 3.71 1431 18.02 4.37 73.fi5 13.65 10.07 3.50 g.pp l 70.07 I
October023
12.11 14.79 �15.36
.90 3.04 7387 -13.87 L41 3.46 r O,pp y10.4FYIw0 104 74.71 5.07 10291028 007 0.22 r1 5p0 70.07
December1 0.40 74.79 .19 5.34 B.85 9.85 70.41 -0.56 r 0.56 '9.85 )
_.
L J
Totals: 365 IF-30 174.15 204.97 6326 141.71 - 741.11 1225J i i
Maximum Monthly StorageRequired for the,frrigatlon of Zone 1: -
Inches acres gallons )
•- 3.31 over 0.45 _ 40,fi78
WaterBudget-DWQ_Ver5-Fina1.xls Z1 Version 5 December 2004

_ - -- - r� ,. _ _ _ Zonal Storege summations,' OSJSDT: Tq op]Cnl is ine minimumwe(wediner 6l r go iequiree fore multiplb ionetl spray urlDdtlon ells. '777
.: t Zane 7 Zane 2 Zona 3 ZOOD 4 Zone 5 Zone S Zone 7 Zane 8¢anD 9 r Zane 10
Totals
Primary Disposal Field
3 n.D��.�
�Junalu,- ,�1�1 jjI��`�I
basis. 0., ill
u
PledpmN ISW
C�1
I x 1 0
land) •
Tonal
r III—'�-1I�aI� �.�
L� •�. _..
'a,130 -
aanY Flan lD IDnea>
_ aPd
C�a
D Pa ed 4.13°
lapal
FEB
D00.
O.OD DDD
T I la Das
C 1 al 61 sa C ulalM 6t p L mm 1 11 91 3 C I IH 51 p C 11 e5i B L 11 SI ae C Me 91euB C lallve EI 0 C m 11 Slauae C III 51
ft q d Requlmd eB
�.
daloone
E mul•11 e61oro0o
me^nlM1 y q P V I d
P q dallona
q Iredala
qulratlalO
qulntlallpane
q malo
Pequl ed '
I—'�
l
10A0ft
hy� 1 M1 . .Ilay. 1 M1e. II In,l,e �•�� I-ealo ns na IenaOa. sae
In00pa
na In0A0P
- a .Ines
Janu fl ll )t 0.. a -
•ApP an
Ope 0
ieerva xe La. ))100 000 0 000 0 OAp 0 p.p0 0 O.no 0 OW 0 .,a, 0 0.0a 0 naraM1 )1 ).)1 ao01e
21,0IB '
000 0 000 0 OA0 0 GAe. • OAO a 000 0 •l •.pp 0 CAS p
1.n ft a3a e.0o 0 ea0
4D.6T6
a 0a0 a a.oe 0 000 0 OAO p 0 0.00 0 A00
Ala )1 O.Oa 0 p.00 00O 0 0
-- 31,43D
0.00 0 - 0A0 a p-00 0 •AO 0 e0p
Juv a0 OAO a 0.00 0 000 0 0.00 0 OAD 0
- 0
040 0 as. 0 000 0 000 0
Jul )1 OAO 0 0.00 p 0.00
0
0 000 p 000 co0 0 000 0 OAO OAO 0 pA0 0
A 04p a OAo 0 •AO a 0.00 a
0
'01 sea 0 a,00 0 00e 0 0000 • OAO 0 0.00 o
me.r
sa a aaa o o.Do p p.op • '
D
op • e •.•p • ppo 0 se. p pAa o
anab . 31 o.ao a op0 0 oao o e•o
-' o
a •.p• o aoo. a •.po • ,as a apa a po0 1
30 •.a• -
o o - opo
a ,
a •.pp • O o.•p o p.po 0 ono o h o.pp o o.00 • o.00 a
Dsn,wr 31 esa nea OAO p •m p
.AO
0
ow p e.p• p •.pp. p. apd 0 ena- a ..as - a. •.pp �p
_ _fi,e09
C . u
r.. - i
4
D
' Mnlm mSID Storage 40,BTfi" , gallons clinched by 4130 Dpd 9.9
des -
..d,
.k
• e I �..a`I �' �e
KFYI MIXimum pegbRed'
_ kFYl2"s
r
r � a
`slartp
j ,
WalerDUJaei Dwo_vpls Final.als Zonal Sums
Velslon 5 December 3D04

Soil & Environmental
3817-E Las idale Drive • Greensboro. North Carolina 27455
, w .SWWECsom
Consultants, PA
)hone: (336) 540-8:34 • F= [phone]
March 26, 2007
Agronomist's Report
Lake Santeelah Project
Near Robbinsville in Graham County, NC
Summary and Information
This report is to detail the findings of fertility samples pulled on the aforementioned site
and an associated agronomy recommendations based on recommendations from a private
lab in Virginia, A&L Eastern Laboratories, Inc. Samples were pulled in accordance with
standard soil science practices. S&EC, PA did not calculate the drainfield size, location,
LTAR, septic system type, nor did S&EC, PA conduct any type of soil/site evaluation.
This report is an agronomist report based on information provided by client McGill
Associates.
Aerobically treated effluent from the proposed 4120 gpd system known as the Lake
Santeelah Project, in Graham Co., North Carolina, was evaluated to determine its
suitability for agronomic application to a 33,000 square foot tract of land. This proposed
spray area will be a naturally wooded area consisting of mature hardwoods.
A dual Bioclere® Trickling Filter System with pressure dosed sandfilter is proposed to
pre -treat the wastewater from the previously mentioned site. An estimated chemical
analysis of the treated effluent was provided to S&EC by the project engineer. The total
nitrogen concentration of the treated effluent is estimated to be 15 mg/L or less. Total
phosphorus concentration is estimated to be 6 mg/L or less.
The effluent constituent that will limit the annual application rate is nitrogen, assuming
all nitrogen will be converted to plant available forms (nitrate and ammonium) by the
pretreatment system. According to NCDA, 50% of the organic N will be plant available
during the first year, while another 10-15% will become plant available annually in
subsequent years. In determining total N loading, it is assumed that all of the organic N
and the inorganic N will eventually become plant available. While some nitrogen will be
lost to volatilization at the spray nozzle, no reduction of nitrogen was utilized in these
calculations.
Approximately .76 acre (33,000 square feet) of useable wooded area, consisting of
mature hardwoods (mostly oak) will be utilized for the drip irrigation field. This area

L4120/• 45 x SIPS
3,3 ` I I-r
9,II /ac-re
will meet all buffers and other minimum requirements. The resulting application rate for
this area will be 4120 gallons per day of flow or 4120/.76 * 365=1,978,684 gallons per
acre per year. This application rate will supply nitrogen for timber production at the
following rates: 1.979 MgaUyr/ac x 15 mg/1 N x 8.34 = 247 lbs/ac/yr N or 188 lbs in the
wetted area.
According to research conducted by the USDA Forest Service and scientists at North
Carolina State University's Forest Nutrition Cooperative (NCSFNC), loblolly pine forests
on Piedmont acid crystalline soils require over 100 lbs/acre/yr of available N for fully
stocked stands to support maximum growth. Subsequent research by the NCSFNC
indicates that an application rate of 180 lbs N/acre applied biannually is essential for
optimum growth. Now based on Ref 59 of the NCSU Nutrient Management manual,
Pines required less nitrogen than the hardwoods. Therefore, the proposed application rate
of approximately 188 lbs/acre/yr of elemental N is below optimum levels supported by
research.
Heavy metal loading and plant toxicities are not expected to be an agronomic concern,
since they are not likely to be present in significant levels in domestic sewage.
A. Soil Conditions of Proposed Sites
The soils of the proposed application sites are described in a soil scientist's report dated
06-21-01 and 02-23-2007 by Southeast Soil Science, Inc. Any questions related to these
reports should be directed to Southeast Soil Science, Inc.
Attachment 2 contains a soil analysis report based on soil samples taken in the spray
areas. Attachment 3 shows the soil sample locations.
The soil conditions at this site are suitable for surface applications of effluent on
permanently wooded areas (mature hardwoods). The mean surface and subsurface CEC
of all the sampled soils are relatively low (1.1 ranging to 4.3 meq/100g), but adding lime
at the recommended rates (25-30 lbs/1000 square feet) should increase the pH dependant
CEC and ensure nutrient availability for optimum plant uptake. Heavy compaction and
removal of topsoil should be avoided in these areas.
Potash (K2O) is not expected to be present in domestic effluent in significant amounts.
Additional K will need to be supplied with a commercial fertilizer (4 lb K20/1000 square
feet) as per A&L Lab soil test recommendations to maintain the area of mature
hardwoods (Attachment 2). In order to reduce salt injury, half of the K20 should be
applied in the spring and half in the fall.
Current available soil phosphorus levels are categorized as very low (7-11 mg available
P/kg soil) in the surface horizons of the proposed spray areas. Since the treated effluent
has a projected total P analysis of 6.0 mg/L, this will account for an annual loading of
1.979 MgaUyr/ac x 6 mg/1 N x 8.34 = 99 lbs/ac/yr P or 75 lbs in the wetted area. From
the lab analysis, 4.71bs per 1000 square feet or 155 lbs of P will be needed in the wetted

area. This will require an additional 80 lbs P205 in the wetted area in a single or split
application will need to be supplied with a commercial fertilizer as per A&L Lab soil test
recommendations to maintain the area of mixed mature hardwoods (Attachment 2).
Maintaining adequate soil P will be especially important as P is commonly a limiting
nutrient in forest productivity on these soils.
Liming should be performed as recommended in the attached soil test report to raise pH.
These soils are sandy and very subject to leaching of nutrients. Follow A&L
Laboratories Recommendations for Zinc, Boron and Sulfur application. Lime should be
applied at a rate of 25-30 lb/1000 square feet or .5 ton/acre.
B. Salt Loading Evaluation
Domestic effluent is not expected to pose problems regarding salt loading (SAR)
C. Crop Management and Evaluation
33,000 square feet of the proposed site will be permanently wooded with hardwoods. If
the effluent application occurs as proposed, additional nitrogen fertilization should not be
required.
Lanes will be established through the wooded areas to accommodate the drip lines.
These lanes should be mowed or cleared periodically to ensure the irrigation system
functions properly. As succession of the forest takes place, there may be a need to
reevaluate the forest species composition and corresponding nutrient requirements. Soil
samples should be taken every 3-4 years to monitor nutrient status, soil pH and heavy
metal content.
Sincerely,
SEAI
Robert Edwin Stott, R.S.
NC Licensed Soil Scientist

Report Nu:
R07074-0055 A&L Eastern Laboratories Inc.
Account Number:
46376 7621 Whitepine Road Richmond, Virginia 23237 [phone]
Fax No. [phone] Email: [e-mail]
Send To: SOIL & ENVIRONMENTAL Grower: MCG ILL ASSOCIATES Submitted By: STEVEN PRICE
CONSULTANTS PA
236 LE PHILLIP CT - STE C
CONCORD, NC 28025'
Sample Number: BOR 7 Lab Number: 6118 Date Received: 3/15/2007 Date Reported: 3/19/2007
sx=
k ::�TESTr •�i ^�*a Ps' ' �,� '`I( +° e€ yl* � '� 3 ° Ca,=4x � �' :`'�. t` � r -'� ` iT- ` ,, t , ,"c t'' e t .a. - n r* s;
� •r�Z�rri�, Mn�,,
� ,'=
},u�,Fe ,- ;�,� Curl` =r t�B��'; �+,- Ne���.;Soluble
>...a,a
L,�s u�:.�.,>ny3r,�,,
i;RESULTSL.r n.s,{,.r . : sri ri. ��-:,.,:t.v r # 4'.� Y
Phosphorus ; Polassiums,5 4Magnesrum Calc um/: Sulfut� Zi eas Man lro ^'
d..,,..,
_ _ ,. anese
r,.. . _.<,. c . s OoPP.eS, 4 Boron,r k Sotlliim, , E Salts
Ppm 9 79 75 1 190 22 2.0 76 129 1 2.4 0.1
pH ° ; gCIDITYGC C, PERCENT BASE`SgT�1�RATION' ORGA`NICrMATTER"NITRATE "A, �,A
,CHL++ORIDEI 'Y
E Ri
.H w1 I •' des -s < rt S .M#! r y
i $011 a
,Y
t rl( L.aa
..
..c1eG/1n 'r ..•A "'5 •..r- Y'� i � !'�., t�, i
[
5.4 07 25 82 1 252 1 38.3 283 34
114
J' _
" ,' R �:.•='¢s � { c r� �aa ` z�nSOIL`FERTIL
f TYAE�tECOIVJMENDATIONS '"
t , NS+aCROPh '+a " ylL)1 "�yf�� •. POUNDS PER 1,000 SOUARExFEETi r
; a } ,
sF I Y' 3a
N }P2O5ei
.r GOA x b rLue
. K2O
Nitrogen "Phosphae`
_ i j Pofa h""' Ma nesim?� s SulfurZine i
an"ganese k £Iron 'Copper n t
- , Bo or
Y0.01
Oak Tree 25.0 3.5 4.7 4 0.00 0.12 0.01 0.00 0.00 0.00

ReportNui
R07074-0055 A&L EASTERN LL...JRATORIES, INC.
Account Number: 7621 Whitepine Road • Richmond, Virginia 23237
46376 [phone] • Fax No. [phone] LAt
Send To: SOIL & ENVIRONMENTAL -, Grower: MCGILL ASSOCIATES Submitted By: STEVEN PRICE
CONSULTANTS PA
236 LE PHILLIP CT - STE C
CONCORD, NC 28025'
Sample Number: BOR 7
Lab Number: 6118
Comments:
Date Received: 3/1512007 Date Reported: 3/1912007
Sample BOR 7: Apply the amount of lime recommended in first page to raise pH
Sample BOR 7: This soil is very sandy and subject to heavy leaching loss of nutrients specially nitrogen, sulfer and boron . To minimize loss,
make sure apply these leachable nutrients close to planting time in the Spring. Split application if possible.
Sample BOR 7: For best result, if there are no existing plants, broadcast all lime then till and mix 6 inches into the soil. Limit the lime application to
50 pounds per 1000 sq. ft. for existing plants, apply every 4-6 months until the recommended amount is fulfilled.
Sample BOR 7: Phosphate is more efficient if applied near the plant, apply all phosphate beside the row. Broadcast N and/or K20 then mix into
the soil. If there is no fertilizer meets the ratio, you can use single element fertilizer such as Urea, Triplesuper Phosphate and Muriate of Potash to
achieve the requirements. Consult the enclosed instruction sheet on lime and fertilizer application.
Sample BOR 7: All recommended fertilizers are on actual elemental basis. To convert to product basis, divide the recommended quantity in the
first page by the percentage of the active ingredient then multiply by 100. See attached sheet.
Sample BOR 7: Use Ammonium Sulfate as N source to supply sulfur.
Sample BOR 7: Broadcast zinc sulfate and mix into the soil to raise zinc level. Zinc may be applied more efficiently in the band near the plant.
Sample BOR 7: Broadcast boron using Borax and mix into the soil to raise boron level. Note boron should not be applied in the band near the
plant.
aul Chu, Ph.D.

Report Nui
R07074-0055 A&L Eastern Laboratories, Inc.
Account Number: S
46376 7621 Whitepine Road Richmond, Virginia 23237 [phone]
Fax No. [phone] Email: [e-mail]
Send To: SOIL & ENVIRONMENTAL Grower: MCGILL ASSOCIATES Submitted By: STEVEN PRICE
CONSULTANTS PA
236 LE PHILLIP CT - STE C
CONCORD, NC 28025'
Sample Number: PIT 11 Lab Number: 6119 Date Received: 3/15/2007 Date Reported: 3/19/2007
r ,. b, '^
o
2 p u ,r, �gg
RAN
'eH
TEST s s P K r N
�..�
x , Pitos liorus Potassiumlagpesiurri; i ="i
,;. . v ,., a ! afcium Su1Jur Zuio Man" ese ' Iron xCopper f
aM.-,_ .t 9 Sodium Salts
...,.F.A _ tBoron
ppm 7 1 43 110 1 450 17 24.4 1 82 152 1.7 0.1
p ACIDITY CEIC PERCENTBgSESyTUR4riON7 'ORGANICMATTER s` ', i1
,NITRATE{'rCHLORIDE z f ENRi',
� i .ra ,� , b _n ,
Soil a)J 14 k ✓ YI SI Y 45 #
}, K
C 11 y 4 <a Mg Ca, Na A H t�03 IJ : GI s ;,
Ibs(A Af.
5.6 10 43 26 1 215 1 527 1 233 2.4
92
x h
Zinc Maw
Sulfu( anese Iron ryCo erBor
G19 .. i o
Oak Tree 25.0 3.5 4.7 4 0.00 0.23 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.01

Report Nui
R07074-0055
Account Number:
46376
A&L EASTERN LA )RATORIES, INC.
7621 Whitepine Road • Richmond, Virginia 23237
[phone] • Fax No. [phone]
Send To: SOIL & ENVIRONMENTAL Grower: MCGILL ASSOCIATES Submitted By: STEVEN PRICE
CONSULTANTS PA
236 LE PHILLIP CT - STE C
CONCORD, NC 28025'
Sample Number: PIT 11 Lab Number: 6119 Date Received: 3/15/2007 Date Reported: 3/19/2007
Comments:
Sample PIT 11: Apply the amount of lime recommended in first page to raise pH
Sample PIT 11: For best result, if there are no existing plants, broadcast all lime then till and mix 6 inches into the soil. Limit the lime application to
50 pounds per 1000 sq. ft. for existing plants, apply every 4-6 months until the recommended amount is fulfilled.
Sample PIT 11: Phosphate is more efficient if applied near the plant, apply all phosphate beside the row. Broadcast N and/or K20 then mix into
the soil. If there is no fertilizer meets the ratio, you can use single element fertilizer such as Urea, Triplesuper Phosphate and Muriate of Potash to
achieve the requirements. Consult the enclosed instruction sheet on lime and fertilizer application.
Sample PIT 11: All recommended fertilizers are on actual elemental basis. To convert to product basis, divide the recommended quantity in the
first page by the percentage of the active ingredient then multiply by 100, See attached sheet.
Sample PIT 11: Use Ammonium Sulfate as N source to supply sulfur.
Sample PIT 11: Broadcast boron using Borax and mix into the soil to raise boron level. Note boron should not be applied in the band near the
plant.
aul Chu, Ph.D.

Report Nw
R07074-00oo A&L Eastern Laboratories, Inc. ,
46376 Account Number: 7621 Whitepine Road Richmond, Virginia 23237 [phone]
Fax No. [phone] Email: [e-mail]
Send To: SOIL & ENVIRONMENTAL Grower: MCGILL ASSOCIATES Submitted By: STEVEN PRICE
CONSULTANTS PA
236 LE PHILLIP CT - STE C
CONCORD, NC 28025-
Sample Number: PIT 16 Lab Number: 6120 Date Received: 3115/2007 Date Reported: 3/19/2007
i
y
rim
TEST, € y r (w,? a az r M} ✓�
�.^vq i S%Casr w) Y75 �" Y � Yi1�
MJ � 4i
k"3gP .°F 4.3:1{u A r-. :S .'v4 1) '�Znl�'� �MnKI$fl
� Fe1 Y^ t-tS�.R /�uti$�'.'
V r 4 B Naf t
RESULTS" k .d f, Soluble ;
Phosphgrusr a ryPotassium*) nMa nesi�m `" Calciumx Sa Z <: a; w
9_ 0 5- 6lfurrw
s , „ .. s u c ,, Manganese Iron , x , Coppers°, 4 Boron Sodwm x SaltsGx ;
ppm 7 39 20 60 62 1.3
93 110 1.6 0.1
pH `ACIpITY ^C EC RCENT BA`SESATURATIOYNr s-ORGA`NEICxflIATTER_ NIT4R4rE` +CHL`ORIDEi ''.
Nt ENRI
i{4 Scil yy d t� .0 ��� - �' r• a
� r K % 1F v'NO3 `"
�) ire �''k,�� v ,�,��� �'<M9t �. G2 4�� r' Na4 ei;� y.1eH+�" f r -' 4 7 3 Nr + f a "(il �'� � a �'"r i a � _
y.; ..-�< �*.. Y..
o'r_PFIw}3h�i<eA1,7QOgct, C�x4fnCQi100 9 ' " #aa)y s/A f
..+5?PPi::' �...PI?f�l 4 5 i3 ,� :•: r 1 C' -sb. r ...
_
4.7 0.6 1 1.1 8.8 14.7 26.5 50.0
2.2 92
/ § FCn-'.L}j FT'i�i'•oC'��L'Y'i' 4�1T IP kn 1�� V1kf3 h�(nf2: �, ih%V. `�, \ yi1� Y :iw l CIF t rvY 9Y� s$'" S�^4 .ti H:'nK t
UARE
`
yy
Y S,�.d 3f1 Pk C Y.II, CJdi '`.:.M'+n`'Y'Af§. °y'{V\w.E t• 4� tt ��'d 1�� `d J'�
t�_ .Magneswm < Sulfur ,Zinc r; Iron :Copper Boron
- _ f ...-_ ,araganese ,
Oak Tree 30.0 3.5 4.7 4 1.07 0.00 0.02 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.01

Report Nu
R07074-0055 A&L EASTERN U.. 311ATORIES, INC.
Account Number: 7621 Whitepine Road • Richmond, Virginia 23237
46376 [phone] • Fax No. [phone]
Send To: SOIL & ENVIRONMENTAL Grower: MCGILL ASSOCIATES Submitted By: STEVEN PRICE
CONSULTANTS PA
236 LE PHILLIP CT - STE C
CONCORD, NC 28025'
Sample Number: PIT 16
Lab Number: 6120
Comments:
Date Received: 3/1512007 Date Reported: 3/19/2007
Sample PIT 16: Apply the amount of lime recommended in first page to raise pH
Sample PIT 16: This soil is very sandy and subject to heavy leaching loss of nutrients specially nitrogen, sulfer and boron . To minimize loss, make
sure apply these leachable nutrients close to planting time in the Spring. Split application if possible.
Sample PIT 16: Apply dolomitic lime to raise pH and improve the magnesium level.
Sample PIT 16: If dolomitic lime is not used, apply required magnesium with magnesium oxide. Epsom Salts, K-Mag or Sul-PO-Mag.
Sample PIT 16: For best result, if there are no existing plants, broadcast all lime then till and mix 6 inches into the soil. Limit the lime application to
50 pounds per 1000 sq. ft. for existing'plants, apply every 4-6 months until the recommended amount is fulfilled.
Sample PIT 16: Phosphate is more efficient if applied near the plant, apply all phosphate beside the row. Broadcast N and/or K20 then mix into
the soil. If there is no fertilizer meets the ratio, you can use single element fertilizer such as Urea, Triplesuper Phosphate and Muriate of Potash to
achieve the requirements. Consult the enclosed instruction sheet on lime and fertilizer application.
Sample PIT 16: All recommended fertilizers are on actual elemental basis. To convert to product basis, divide the recommended quantity in the
first page by the percentage of the active ingredient then multiply by 100. See attached sheet.
Sample PIT 16: Broadcast zinc sulfate and mix into the soil to raise zinc level. Zinc may be applied more efficiently in the band near the plant.
Sample PIT 16: Broadcast boron using Borax and mix into the soil to raise boron level. Note boron should not be applied in the band near the
plant.
aul Chu, Ph.D.

Report Nu
R07074-0055 A&L Eastern Laboratories, Inc. 99S.
Account Number:46376 7621 Whitepine Road Richmond, Virginia 23237 804 743-9401
Fax No. [phone] Email: [e-mail]
Send To: SOIL & ENVIRONMENTAL Grower: MCGILL ASSOCIATES Submitted By: STEVEN PRICE
CONSULTANTS PA
236 LE PHILLIP CT - STE C
CONCORD, NC 28025
Sample Number: PIT 18 Lab Number: 6121 Date Received: 3/15/2007 Date Reported: 3/19/2007
'5.��� Ind Gli��.
4�Y-�
:}♦ .� A1C.
�_
�AEi4nd?rE:i��Y@u�.f, z4h'i!',U
Ca 41- S+ s Zn + t Mn
CU
v ESULTS, r ;
w
t -, S uble
w k
_Phosphorus., Potassium _ •Wgneswm.. Calcium_[.. Su"Ifur' Zinc Manganese Iron,
L f
Copper„ Sodium
_.
BoronSalts,
ppm 11 50
30 60 26 1.1 35 94
1.4 0.3
fai pH ACIDITYfr RGEN�'`B'ASESATURgTION>� nORGAYNIC MATTEf2+ NITRATES `
CHLORIDE
r3 +ENRr'
Soil H i K
Mg]
•• sjr i -, r ; r,.. f
NO3 N
Y r it r , rf 'r a -`' f..
CI
6 e , ♦ ,''Jj , ,..
- Ibs/A�
J
pm
4.8 0.6 1 1.3 10.1
1 19.7 1 23.6 1 1 46.6 2.6
100
r r
f *'SOIL EC FL'IT,YuROMMENDATIONS
ERTIPOUNDS ' `" -"" ""
„CROR' YIELD-
'• -
PER 1,OOOzSOUARE;FEETI}
.�' e` x3 e c3 >Fs
y , , f p ^er a h 'w ,
Lime N P2O5,
` F? GOAD
nl
,., Nitrogen°� Ph'osphate`PoEash' AgagM�smm` �' $uSlfur. Lnc Maa anese �' Irom Cbu er Bon 9 PP
Oak Tree
30.0
3.5
4.6
4
0.86
0.00
0.02
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00

Report Nu
R07074-0055 A&L EASTERN LI! =ORATORIES5 INC.
Account Number: 7621 Whitepine Road • Richmond, Virginia 23237 A
�
46376 [phone] • Fax No. [phone]
Send To: SOIL & ENVIRONMENTAL Grower: MCGILL ASSOCIATES Submitted By: STEVEN PRICE
CONSULTANTS PA
236 LE PHILLIP CT - STE C
CONCORD, NC 28025'
Sample Number: PIT 18
Lab Number: 6121
Comments:
Date Received: 3/15/2007 Date Reported: 3/19/2007
Sample PIT 18: Apply the amount of lime recommended in first page to raise pH
Sample PIT 18: This soil is very sandy and subject to heavy leaching loss of nutrients specially nitrogen, sulfer and boron . To minimize loss, make
sure apply these leachable nutrients close to planting time in the Spring. Split application if possible.
Sample PIT 18: If dolomitic lime is not used, apply required magnesium with magnesium oxide. Epsom Salts, K-Mag or Sul-PO-Mag.
Sample PIT 18: For best result, if there are no existing plants, broadcast all lime then till and mix 6 inches into the soil. Limit the lime application to
50 pounds per 1000 sq. ft. for existing plants, apply every 4-6 months until the recommended amount is fulfilled.
Sample PIT 18: Phosphate is more efficient if applied near the plant, apply all phosphate beside the row. Broadcast N and/or K20 then mix into
the soil. If there is no fertilizer meets the ratio, you can use single element fertilizer such as Urea, Triplesuper Phosphate and Muriate of Potash to
achieve the requirements. Consult the enclosed instruction sheet on lime and fertilizer application.
Sample PIT 18: All recommended fertilizers are on actual elemental basis. To convert to product basis, divide the recommended quantity in the
first page by the percentage of the active ingredient then multiply by 100. See attached sheet.
Sample PIT 18: Broadcast zinc sulfate and mix into the soil to raise zinc level. Zinc may be applied more efficiently in the band near the plant.
Sample PIT 18: Broadcast boron using Borax and mix into the soil to raise boron level. Note boron should not be applied in the band near the
plant.
jai. d"-
aul Chu, Ph.D.

SCALE 1 "=40'
'% ,
Sample locations
\\
\\\ \\ \ 1 ` \\.` II \�\ •Ill `\
� \ <°� 1 \\�111 \ \ 11 \ 1 I,..�.1 • �11I�I1� �II1I�\\\
1.101
\\ ,s9 �/ ,'F �� ��I I I I I 1 l I ►I , i 11 I II I l
`��\\ o ��� ;/i"��`�',�,//,(/II�'r � lrl ii_ �l,I��III�'�►�

Section M — Hydroar eologic Report
This project does not include a Hydrogeologic Report because the design flow is less than 25,000
gallons per day.

Section N—Detailed Plans
Plans for this project are provided separately.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SANTEETLAH LAKESIDE
PHASE II WASTEWATER SYSTEM
IBEX THUNDERBIRD L.L.C.
GRAHAM COUNTY, NORTH CAROLINA
gMcGill
Engineering • Planning • Finance
55 Broad Street
Asheville, North Carolina 28801
March 2007
07712

PHASE II WASTEWATER SYSTEM
SANTEETLAH LAKESIDE
IBEX THUNDERBIRD, L.L.C.
GRAHAM COUNTY, NORTH CAROLINA
The engineering material contained in these specifications was prepared
under the responsible charge of the registered engineers listed below:
ENGINEER
Harry B. Buckner, P.E.
McGill Associates, P.A.
All design except as noted
Phillip A. Fisher, P.E.
McGill Associates, P.A.
Electrical design
SEAL
22541
111111111\\

SANTEELAH LAKESIDE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
01200 SPECIAL CONDITIONS
01705 MOBILIZATION
DIVISION
02211 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
02220 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
03301 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION
06192 PREFABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES
11210
SUBMERSIBLE TURBINE PUMPS
11253
TURBIDITY MONITORING SYSTEM
11300
DRIP IRRIGATION SYSTEMS
11302
RECLAIMED WATER SYSTEMS
11312
SUBMERSIBLE SEWAGE PUMPS
11398
ULTRAVIOLET LIGHT DISINFECTION SYSTEM
11700
BIOCLERE TRICKLING FILTERS
°.DIVISION 1'5 MECHANICAL
15002 ELECTRIC MOTOR ACTUATORS
15400 PLUMBING
16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
16051 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING
16073 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
16120 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
3119107 TOCA PROJECT # 07712

SANTEELAN LAKESIDE
16130
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
16231
PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS
16289
TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION
16410
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
16415
TRANSFER SWITCHES
16442
PANELBOARDS
16511
INTERIOR LIGHTING
16990
HVAC SYSTEMS
3/19107 TOC-2 PROJECT # 07712

SECTION 01200 SPECIAL CONDITIONS
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK
The project generally consists of the installation of a wastewater treatment
and irrigation system. The wastewater treatment system includes: one (1)
5,000 gallon septic tank, one (1) duplex flow equalization pump station,
two (2) Aquapoint Bioclere Units in series, two (2) automatic backwash
sand filters, 'two (2) Ultraviolet Light Disinfection Systems, a 24' x 12'
building and all related appurtenances. The irrigation system includes:
dosing pump station with duplex submersible turbine pumps, drip
hydraulic unit, and 4 drip irrigation zones totaling approximately 5,000 ft of
surface drip tubing and all related appurtenances.
1.02 PROJECT MEETINGS
A. Preconstruction Conference: A preconstruction conference will be
scheduled by the Engineer after issuance of the Notice of Award. The
Contractor and his major subcontractors shall attend the meeting, which
will be chaired by the Engineer or his representative. The purpose of the
pre -construction conference will be to discuss administration of the
Contract and the execution of work, and to answer any questions relative
to performance of work under these Contract Documents. All decisions,
instructions and interpretations made at this conference shall be binding
and conclusive. The proceedings of this conference will be recorded and
copies of the proceeding minutes will be issued to the Contractor for his
use and distribution to his subcontractors.
B. Progress Meetings: The Contractor and any subcontractors, material
suppliers or vendors whose presence is necessary or requested shall
attend meetings, referred to as Progress Meetings, when requested by
the Engineer or his representative for the purpose of discussing the
execution of work. Each meeting will be held at the time and place
designated by the Engineer or his representative. Any decisions,
instructions and interpretations at these meetings shall be binding and
conclusive on the Contractor and such decisions, instructions and
interpretations shall be confirmed in writing by the Engineer or his
representative. The proceedings of these meetings will be recorded and
the Contractor will be furnished with a reasonable number of copies for his
use and for his distribution to the subcontractors, material suppliers and
vendors involved.
Rev. 3/19/07 PROJECT # 07712 01200 - Page 1

1.03 PROJECT PAYMENTS AND RETAINAGE
A. The Owner may retain a portion of the amount otherwise due the
Contractor. Except as provided elsewhere, the amount retained by the
Owner shall be limited to the following:
1. Withholding of not more than 10% of the payment claimed until
work is 50% complete.
2. When work is 50% complete, reduction of the withholding to 5% of
the dollar value of all work satisfactorily completed to date,
provided that the Contractor is making satisfactory progress and
there is not specific cause for greater withholding.
3. When the work is substantially complete (operational or beneficial
occupancy), the withheld amount shall be further reduced below
5% to only that amount necessary to assure completion.
4. The Owner may reinstate up to 10% withholding if the Owner
determines, at its discretion, that the Contractor is not making
satisfactory progress or there is other specific cause for such
withholding.
5. The Owner may accept securities negotiable without recourse,
conditions or restrictions, a release of retainage bond or an
irrevocable letter of credit provided by the Contractor in lieu of all or
part of the cash retainage.
B. For unit price projects, the Contractor may use the "Unit Bid Item
Summary" form included at the end of this section, or a similar form that
.provides the required information.
C. Sales Tax Statement: When requested by the Owner, each request for
progress payment submitted by the Contractor shall include a sales tax
reimbursement statement. The Contractor shall utilize the form provided
at the end of this section, or a similar form that provides the required
information and certification.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. General: All transmittals from the Contractor shall be accompanied by a
transmittal cover form that includes pertinent information related to the
project and the particular transmittal. The Contractor shall use the
"Transmittal Form" provided at the end of this section, or a similar form
that includes the required information.
Rev. 3119/07 PROJECT # 07712 01200 - Page 2

B. Construction Schedule: The Contractor shall, within ten (10) days after
receipt of the Notice of Award, prepare and submit to the Engineer for
approval a practicable construction schedule showing the order in which
the Contractor proposes to carry on the work, the date on which he will
start the several salient features and the contemplated dates for
completing such salient features. The schedule may be in any form at the
option of the Contractor, but shall maintain current with each submittal for
progress payment, at least the following information.
1. The various classes and area of work broken down into times
projected for submittals, approvals and procurement; times for
installation and erection; and times for testing and inspection.
2. The work completed and the work remaining to complete the
project.
3. Any items of work which will delay the start or completion of other
major items of work so as to delay completion of the whole project.
C. Schedule of Values: For lump sum projects, the Contractor shall, within
thirty (30) days after the Notice of Award and prior to submitting the first
Application for Payment, submit to the Engineer for approval a Schedule
of Values for the project. The Schedule of Values shall establish the
actual value of the components of the work and, after approval by the
Engineer, shall be the basis for the Contractor's Applications for Payment.
The Schedule of Values shall include separate line items for all major
portions of the work.
D. Material Suppliers and Subcontractor Listings: As soon as possible, but in
no case more than 30 days after receipt of the Notice of Award, the
.Contractor shall supply the names and addresses of all major material
suppliers and subcontractors to the Engineer.
E. Shop Drawings and Samples: The Contractual requirements for shop
drawings and samples are specified in the General Conditions and in the
individual specification sections for each item. The Contractor shall
submit shop drawings and samples accompanied by the "Submittal and
Routing Form" included at the end of this section. Resubmissions, where
required, shall be in accordance with the procedures established for the
initial submittal.
F. Record Documents: Record drawings will not be required of the
Contractor; however, to enable the Owner to prepare record drawings, the
Contractor shall keep a complete and accurate record of changes and/or
deviations from the Contract Documents and shop drawings, indicating
the work as actually installed. Changes shall be neatly and correctly
Rev. 3/19/07 PROJECT # 07712 01200 - Page 3

shown on the respective portion of the affected document, using prints of
the Drawings affected, or the Specifications, with appropriate
supplementary notes. The record set of marked -up Drawings, shop
drawings, and Specifications shall be kept at the job site during
construction and be available for inspection by the Engineer and the
Owner. These marked prints shall be included in the package of final
documentation submitted before final payment is required.
1.05 TYPES AND LIMITS OF INSURANCE
A. Certificates of Insurance: Satisfactory certificates of insurance shall be
filed with the Owner through the Engineer prior to starting any construction
work on this contract. The Owner will be named as an additional insured
on all policies of insurance and all certificates shall contain a 60-day
Notice of Cancellation. In connection with the provisions set forth in the
General Conditions Article 2.7, the Notice to Proceed will not be issued
until satisfactory certificates of insurance are filed.
1. Worker's Compensation and Employer's Liability: This insurance
shall protect the Contractor and Owner against all claims under
applicable state workmen's compensation laws. The Contractor
and Owner shall also be protected against claims for injury,
disease, or death of employees which, for any reason, may not fall
within the provisions of a workmen's compensation law. This policy
shall include an "all states" endorsement.
The liability limits shall be not less than:
a. Worker's Compensation............ Statutory
b. Employer's Liability ................... $100,000 each occurrence
2. Comprehensive Automobile Liability: This insurance shall be written
in comprehensive form and shall protect the Contractor and Owner
against all claims for injuries to members of the public and damage
to property of others arising from the use of motor vehicles, and
shall cover operation on or off the site of all motor vehicles licensed
for highway use, whether they are owned, non -owned or hired.
The liability limits shall be not less than:
a. Bodily Injury .......................... $100,000 each person
$300,000 each occurrence
b. Property Damage ................... $100,000 each occurrence
$100,000 aggregate
Rev. 3/19/07 PROJECT # 07712 01200 - Page 4

3. Comprehensive General Liability: This insurance shall be written in
comprehensive form and shall protect the Contractor and Owner
against all claims arising from injuries to persons other than his
employees or damage to property of the Owner or others arising
out of any act or omission of Contractor or his agents, employees,
or Subcontractors. The policy shall also include protection against
claims insured by usual personal injury liability coverage and shall
include a "protective liability" endorsement to insure the contractual
liability assumed by the Contractor under the indemnification
provisions in the General Conditions, and "Completed Operations
and Products Liability" coverage (to remain in force during the
correction period).
To the extent that the Contractor's work, or work under his
direction, may require blasting, explosive conditions, or
underground operations, the comprehensive general liability
coverage shall contain no exclusion relative to blasting, explosion,
collapse of building, or damage to underground property.
a. Bodily Injury .......................... $100,000 each person
$300,000 each occurrence
b. Property Damage ................... $100,000 each occurrence
$100,000 aggregate
4. Umbrella Liability Policy: This insurance shall protect the Contractor
against all claims in excess of the limits provided under the
workmen's compensation and employer's liability, comprehensive
automobile liability, and general liability policies. The liability limits
of the umbrella liability policy shall not be less than $5,000,000.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for delivery, storage and handling of
all materials and equipment, unless otherwise noted. All material and
equipment shall be shipped to arrive at the job site on the dates indicated
on the purchase order. The following information shall be supplied:
1. The contents and bill of lading, number of shipments.
2. The method of shipments.
3. The date of shipment.
4. The name of the construction project.
B. Prior to shipment, all items shall be properly prepared to protect all critical
areas from the effects of weather, normal expected transport and on site
handling.
Rev. 3/19/07 PROJECT # 07712 01200 - Page 5

C. Items shall be tagged and marked with equipment and/or motor numbers
as per the manner stipulated in the purchase order.
D. All spare parts and expendable supplies shall be properly crated, marked,
and shipped to the job site on the date specified.
1.07 ENCROACHMENT AGREEMENTS
A. The Owner has been granted a right-of-way encroachment agreement
from the North Carolina Department of Transportation for all work
occurring within their right-of-way. All provisions of these arrangements
are in accordance with the policies and procedures of each agency and
are incorporated into the plans and specifications.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL STANDARDS
A. All equipment and materials of construction described in this specification
shall meet the more stringent requirements of the applicable codes listed
below:
1. OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Administration.
2. ASTM - American Society for Testing Materials.
3. ANSI - American National Standards Institute.
4. AGMA - American Gear Manufacturers Association.
5. AISC - American Institute of Steel Construction.
6. AWS -American Welding Society.
7. NEC - National Electric Code.
8. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
9. API -American Petroleum Institute.
2.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All equipment shall, after installation by the Contractor, shall be inspected,
tested and started up by a qualified representative of the equipment
manufacturer. The Contractor and the manufacturer's representative
shall complete the "Equipment Start-up Form" provided at the end of this
section and submit the completed form to the Engineer.
B. The listing of a manufacturer in the specifications does not necessarily
imply that the manufacturer's standard equipment meets the requirements
Rev. 3/19107 PROJECT # 07712 01200 - Page 6

of the specifications, but that the manufacturer listed has the capability to
meet the requirements of the specifications.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Limits of Construction: The Contractor shall confine all operations and
personnel to the limits of construction as shown on the plans. There shall
be no disturbance whatsoever of any areas outside the limits of
construction nor shall the workmen be allowed to travel at will through the
surrounding private property.
B. Construction Superintendent: The Contractor shall place in charge of the
work a competent and reliable superintendent, who shall have the
authority to act for the Contractor and who shall be accountable to the
Engineer. The Contractor shall, at all times, employ labor and equipment
sufficient to accomplish the several classes of work to full completion in
the manner and time specified.
C. Site Conditions:
1. The Contractor shall maintain the work and project grounds free
from rubbish, debris and waste materials during all phases of the
work.
2. Immediately upon completion of the work and prior to final
acceptance, the Contractor shall remove all rubbish, debris,
temporary structures, equipment, excess or waste materials and
shall leave the work and project grounds in a neat and orderly
condition that is satisfactory to the Engineer and Owner.
D. Right of Entry: The Engineer and his representative will at all times have
access to the work. In addition, authorized representatives and agents of
any participating Federal or State agency shall be permitted to inspect all
work, materials, payrolls, records of personnel, invoices of materials, and
other relevant data and records.
E. Temporary Construction Services and Facilities: The Contractor shall
obtain all necessary permits, licenses, etc. and shall pay all costs incident
to the furnishing, installing and maintenance of temporary utility services
and facilities required for the duration of the work.
Rev. 3119107 PROJECT # 07712 01200 - Page 7

F. Control of Erosion, Siltation, and Pollution:
1. Surface drainage from cuts and fills within the construction limits,
whether or not completed, and from borrow and waste disposal
areas, shall, if turbidity producing materials are present, be graded
to control erosion within acceptable limits. Temporary erosion and
sediment control measures such as berms, dikes or drains, if
required to meet the above standards, shall be provided and
maintained until permanent drainage and erosion control facilities
are completed and operative. The area of bare soil exposed at any
one time by construction operations should be held to a minimum.
Fills and waste areas shall be constructed by selective placement
to eliminate silts or clays on the surface that will erode and
contaminate adjacent streams.
2. The Contractor shall take whatever measures are necessary to
minimize soil erosion and siltation, water pollution, and air pollution
caused by his operations. The Contractor shall also comply with
the applicable regulations of all legally constituted authorities
relating to pollution prevention and control. The Contractor shall
keep himself fully informed of all such regulations which in any way
affect the conduct of the work, and shall at all times observe and
comply with all such regulations. In the event of conflict between
such regulations and the requirements of the specifications, the
more restrictive requirements shall apply.
3. The Engineer shall have the authority to limit the area over which
clearing and grubbing, excavation, borrow, and embankment
operations are performed whenever the Contractor's operations do
not make effective use of construction practices and temporary
measures which will minimize erosion, or whenever construction
operations have not been coordinated to effectively minimize
erosion, or whenever permanent erosion control features are -not
being completed as soon as permitted by construction operations.
4. The Contractor shall control dust throughout the life of the project
within the project area and at all other areas affected by the
construction of the project, including, but not specifically limited to,
unpaved secondary roads, haul roads, access roads, disposal
sites, borrow and material pits, and production sites. Dust control
shall not be considered effective where the amount of dust creates
a potential or actual unsafe condition, public nuisance, or condition
endangering the value, utility, or appearance of any property.
Rev. 3/19/07 PROJECT # 07712 01200 - Page 8

5. The Contractor will not be directly compensated for any dust
control measures necessary, as this work will be considered
incidental to the work covered by the various contract items.
G. Disposal of Materials: Debris and waste materials, including all
combustibles, shall be removed by the Contractor from the construction
area unless otherwise approved in writing by the Owner or his
Representative.
H. Quantities of Estimate: The estimated quantities of work to be done and
materials to be furnished under this Contract shown in any of the
documents, including the proposal, are given for use in comparing bids
and to indicate approximately the total amount of the contract; and the
right is especially reserved, except as herein otherwise specifically limited
to, to increase or diminish the quantities as may be reasonably necessary
or desirable by the Owner to complete the work contemplated by this
Contract.
Utility Coordination: The Contractor shall make all necessary
arrangements with private and public utility companies to avoid any
possible damage to or interruption of utility equipment or service. The
Contractor shall be responsible for all inquiries concerning locations of
utility lines. Repair of any damage to public or private utilities resulting
from this work shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
J. Construction Surveying: All work shall be constructed in accordance with
the lines, grades and elevations shown on the plans or as given by the
Engineer in the field. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for
maintaining alignment and grade. All principal controlling points and base
lines for locating the principal components of the work together with a
suitable number of benchmarks adjacent to the work will be provided by
the Engineer. From this information, the Contractor shall verify
benchmarks and develop and make all detail surveys needed for
construction. The Contractor shall protect and safeguard all points,
stakes, grade marks, monuments, and benchmarks at the site of the work
and shall re-establish, at his own expense, any marks which are removed
or destroyed due to his construction operations.
K. Laving Out Work:
1. It is imperative that the Contractor work within the shown rights of
way or easements at all times, unless approved otherwise by the
property owner and the Engineer.
2. The Contractor shall, at his expense, provide competent
engineering survey services and shall provide and maintain
accurate, detailed, survey work.
Rev. 3119107 PROJECT # 07712 01200 - Page 9

3. The plans and supplementary drawings shall not be scaled and the
Contractor must verify all dimensions and elevations at the site
prior to proceeding with the work. The Contractor shall also verify
existing utility locations prior to purchasing materials affected by
these locations.
L. Use of Explosives:
1. If the use of explosives is necessary for the execution of the work,
the Contractor shall exercise the utmost care not to endanger life or
property. The Contractor shall be responsible for any and all
damage or injury to persons or property resulting from the use of
explosives. Such responsibility shall include, but shall in no way be
limited to, all damages arising from all forms of trespass to adjacent
property as a result of blasting by the Contractor.
2. All explosives shall be stored in a secure manner, in compliance
with all laws, and all such storage places shall be marked clearly
"DANGEROUS EXPLOSIVES".
M. Use of Chemicals: All chemicals used during project construction, whether
herbicide, pesticide, disinfectant, polymer, reactant or of other
classification, must show approval of either EPA or USDA. Use of all
such chemicals and disposal of residues shall be in conformance with
instructions.
N. Safety and Health Regulations:
1. The Contractor shall comply with all Federal, State and Local
Safety and Health Regulations including the Department of Labor
Safety and Health Regulations for construction promulgated under
the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (P.L. 91 - 596) and
under Section 107 of the Contract Work Hours and Safety
Standards Act (P.L. 91-54).
2. The Contractor shall provide continuous, safe access to all
properties, both public and private, along the project in all cases
where such access will be provided by the completed facility and
shall conduct his operations in such a manner that inconvenience
to the property owners will be held to a minimum.
O. Equipment and Material Storage: The Contractor shall plan his activities
so that all materials and equipment can be stored within the project limits.
There shall be no disturbance whatsoever of any areas outside the
project limits without the prior approval of the Engineer.
P. Disturbed Areas: All areas disturbed as a result of the work of the
Contractor shall be restored to the original or better condition.
Rev. 3/19/07 PROJECT # 07712 01200 - Page 10

Reasonable care shall be taken during construction to avoid damage to
the Owner's property or that of any adjacent property owner(s).
Q. Tree and Plant Protection: No trees or shrubs -except those specifically.
indicated, shall be removed or trimmed without prior approval from the
Engineer. All trees and shrubs within the construction limits to be retained
by the Owner shall be properly protected by fencing, posts or other means
approved by the Engineer. Where any trees or shrubs are damaged or
where limbs are required to be trimmed or removed because of operations
under this Contract a qualified horticulturist shall be consulted and the
trimming performed in the proper manner. Any landscape plantings
severely damaged or which die as a result of the Contractor's operations
shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner.
R. Temporary Sanitary Facilities: The Contractor shall be solely responsible
for furnishing and maintaining temporary sanitary facilities during the
construction period. Such facilities shall include but not be limited to,
potable water supply and toilet facilities. Such facilities shall be in
compliance with all applicable state and local laws, codes, and ordinances
and shall be placed convenient to work stations and secluded from public
observation. Once the project is completed all temporary sanitary
facilities shall be removed by the Contractor.
S. Traffic Maintenance
1. The Contractor shall provide, erect, and maintain all necessary
barricades, suitable and sufficient warning lights, danger signals,
and signs, shall provide a sufficient number of flagmen to direct the
traffic and shall take all necessary precautions for the protection of
the work and the safety of the public.
2. All barricades and obstructions or hazardous conditions shall be
illuminated as necessary to provide for safe traffic conditions.
3. Warning and caution signs shall be posted throughout the length of
any portion of the project where traffic flow is restricted.
T. Special Provisions: NC Department of Transportation:
1. All Contractors doing work within the Department of Transportation
right of way are to have a copy of the approved encroachment
agreement, plans and special provisions on the job site.
2. The travelling public shall be warned of the construction with
signing that is in accordance with the latest Manual on Uniform
Traffic Control Devices.
3. Contact the appropriate utility company(ies) involved and make
satisfactory arrangements to adjust utilities in conflict with the
proposed work prior to construction.
Rev. 3/19/07 PROJECT # 07712 01200 - Page 11

4. Materials and workmanship shall conform ' to the North Carolina
Department of Transportation's Standards and Specifications
Manual.
5. Strict compliance with the Policies and Procedures for
Accommodating Utilities on Highway Rights of Way Manual shall
be required.
6. All earth areas disturbed shall be regraded and seeded in
accordance with the North Carolina Department of Transportation
standards and specifications.
7. Complete restoration including reestablishing ditch line, fertilizing,
seeding, mulching, tacking of straw and all areas disturbed during
construction will follow within a maximum of thirty (30) working days
of the initial disturbing activity.
8. All open cuts shall conform to the North Carolina Department of
Transportation Policies and Procedures for Accommodating
Utilities on Highwav Rights of Wav Manual (pages 37-39).
9. All roadway signs which are removed due to installation will be
reinstalled on the same day or as soon as possible.
10. The Contractor shall notify the local North Carolina Department of
Transportation office at least 24 hours prior to construction.
3.02 WEATHER DELAYS
A. Extensions of Contract Time for Abnormal Weather:
1. If the basis exists for an extension of time in accordance with article
12.03 of the Standard General Conditions of the Construction
Contract, an extension of time on the basis of Abnormal Weather
may be granted only for the number of Weather Delay Days in
excess of the number of days listed as the Standard Baseline for
the period of the contract.
2. In the event adverse weather other than those conditions described
in Section C, "Adverse Weather and Rain Delay Days", delays
construction activity, such as temperature extremes. The baseline
must be adjusted to reflect the number of expected days as
described in Section D, "Development of Adverse Weather
Baseline".
3. In order to determine precipitation at the contract site the contractor
shall maintain a rain gauge on site. The rain gauge should be read
daily and documentation of Adverse Weather Days should be
coordinated with the Engineer's Representative.
Rev. 3/19107 PROJECT # 07712 01200 - Page 12

C.
Standard Baseline for Average Climactic Range:
1. The Engineer has reviewed weather data available from the
National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA) and
determined a Standard Baseline of average climatic range for the
City of Asheville, North Carolina. In the event that the standard
baseline for the construction site differs significantly from the
Asheville, North Carolina Standard Baseline it will be the
Contractor's responsibility to provide documentation of said
differences.
2. Standard Baseline shall be regarded as the normal and
anticipatable number calendar days for each month during which
construction activity shall be expected to be prevented and
suspended by cause of adverse weather. Suspension of
construction activity for the number of days each month as listed in
the Standard Baseline is included in the Work and is not eligible for
extension of Contract Time.
3. Standard Baseline is as follows:
Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun
8 6 6 7 5 8
Adverse Weather and Rain Delay Days:
Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec
7 5 6 3 5 7
1. Adverse Weather is defined as the occurrence of one or more of
the following conditions which prevents exterior construction activity
or access to the site within twenty-four (24) hours:
a. Precipitation (rain, snow, and/or ice) in excess of two -tenths
inch (0.20") liquid measure.
b. Standing snow in excess of one inch (1.00").
2. Adverse Weather may include, if appropriate, "dry -out" or "mud"
days:
a. For rain days above the standard baseline,
b. Only if there is a hindrance to site access or site work such
as excavation, backfill, footings; and,
C. At a rate no greater than 1 make-up day for each day or
consecutive days of rain beyond the standard baseline that
total 1.0 inch or more, liquid measure, unless specifically
recommended otherwise by the Engineer.
Rev. 3/19/07 PROJECT # 07712 01200 - Page 13

3. A Weather Delay Day may be counted if adverse weather prevents
work on the project for fifty percent (50%) or more of the
Contractor's scheduled work day, including a weekend day or
holiday if the Contractor has scheduled construction activity for that
day.
D. Development of Adverse Weather Baseline:
1. Development of Adverse Weather Data — This is the process of
collecting, compiling and analyzing the raw weather data (NOAA
and other sources) that forms the baseline for estimating
anticipated delays and project durations and determining the
occurrence of unusually severe weather. The following actions
make up the development process:
a. Analyze the project scope and site geography to determine
which weather parameters (temperature, precipitation, wind,
etc.) are applicable. The parameters selected should
present adverse conditions that could potentially delay
construction activities.
b. Review the technical specifications to determine the
numerical values that will be assigned to each parameter in
order to establish the anticipated adverse weather. Usually
when two or more construction phases are affected by the
same parameter, the less severe numerical value should be
used (i.e. if roofing work is delayed by temperatures below
40 degrees and concrete work is delayed by temperatures
below 32 degrees, then the numerical value used to define
adverse weather should be 40 degrees unless some other
factor renders the roofing phase insignificant in terms of
schedule criticality).
C. Compile the number of days per month that the anticipated
weather is expected to be adverse by analysis of NOAA or
other weather data. When at ail possible, the last 10 years
of consecutive data should be used to establish the
baseline. However, in the absence of 10 years of data, a
shorter period may be used. It may be necessary to
extrapolate the number of calendar days that the
temperature is expected to fall below the selected numerical
value (say, 40 degrees) from raw data.
d. Adverse weather data must be periodically updated in order
to reflect changes in the 10-year averages and incorporate
any necessary corrections derived from actual field
experience. It is recommended that data used for
Rev. 3/19107 PROJECT # 07712 01200 - Page 14

3.03
establishing adverse weather baselines be reviewed
annually.
PROJECT CLOSE-OUT
A. Final Documentation: Prior to final payment, and before the issuance of a
final certificate for payment in accordance with the provisions of the General
Conditions, the Contractor shall file with the Engineer the documents listed
hereinafter:
Guarantees: The Contractor's one (1) year guarantee required by the
General -Conditions and all other guarantees stated in the
Specifications.
2. Affidavit and Waiver of Liens: As required by General Conditions.
The Contractor shall utilize the form provided at the end of this
section.
3. Consent of Surety Company to Final Payment.
4. Certified Final Sales Tax Statement (as required)
5. Certified Payroll Records (as required)
6. Proiect Record Documents: Record documents shall be as specified
in Section 01200-1.04.F.
7. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Submit at least three (3) sets
of operation and maintenance manuals for all equipment, electrical
valve actuators, electrical devices, and all other materials or devices
with special operating and maintenance requirements.
B. Submittals: The above records shall be arranged in order, in accordance
with the various sections of the Specifications, and properly indexed. At
the completion of the work, the Contractor shall certify by endorsement
thereof that each of the revised and marked -up prints of the Drawings and
Specifications is complete and accurate.
C. No review or receipt of such records by the Engineer or the Owner shall be
a waiver of any change from the Contract Documents or the shop drawings,
or in any way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to perform the work
as required by the Contract Documents, and the shop drawings to the
extent they are in accordance with the Contract Documents.
END OF SECTION
(Recommended Standard Forms follow)
Rev. 3/19107 PROJECT # 07712 01200 - Page 15

UNIT BID ITEM SUMMARY
ITEM
#
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
MEAS.
CONTRACT
BID UAN.
CONTR.
UNIT BID
TOTAL WORK
LAST APPL.
WORK THIS
APPL.
TOTAL WORK
TO DATE
PAYMENT
EARNED
A
B
C
D
E
F (H FROM LAST
APPL)
G
H
F&G)
I
(EXH)
nnhidmr..r
dog

Shop Drawings
Printed Materials
Other
REFERENCE:
Project
Owner
Address
Location
FROM:
Name
Company
Address
telephone/fax
TRANSMITTAL FORM
Transmittal Date:
Return Date:
FOR: ( ) Transmittal Only
( ) Approval
( ) Approved as noted
( ) Revise & Resubmit
Name
McGill Associates, P.A.
Company
P.O. Box 2259, Asheville, NC 28802
Address
telephone/fax
Project Ref. No. By:
Signature
transmit.doc

EIMcGill
ATTENTION: CONSTRUCTION ADMINISTRATION
SUBMITTAL AND ROUTING FORM
(TO BE USED WITH EACH INDIVIDUAL PLAN SUBMITTAL OR SHOP DRAWING)
SUBMITTAL AND APPROVAL (Contractor to complete)
Project Name: McGill Project #:
Contractor: Submittal #:
Contract for: Specification Section:
Submittal Title:
Sheetlitem numbers:
Subcontractor: Supplier:
Date Transmitted: Date Needed:
Change from Contract Documents? Yes No _Attached documentation:
Complete Submittal? Yes No
The Contractor must review and approve this submittal for all requirements and
conformance to Contract documents prior to submittal to McGill Associates. Submittals
forwarded without the Contractor's approval will be returned without review or comment.
Reviewed by: Date:
McGILL ASSOCIATES SUBMITTAL ROUTING (McGill to complete)
Date Received: Logged by: To: Return by:
REVIEW CODES: 1= Approved: 2 = Approved as Noted: 3 = Revise & Resubmit: 4 = Not Approved
Reviewed by
(in order)
Review
Code
COMMENTS
Date
Initials
Project Engineer's approval: Date

CONTRACTOR'S FINAL AFFIDAVIT AND WAIVER OF LIEN
PROJECT:
CONTRACT AMOUNT:
STATE OF:
COUNTY OF:
OWNER:
CONTRACTOR:
CONTRACT DATE:
DATE:
This is to certify that all claims for labor, material, services and any other just claims arising out
of the performance of this Contract have been satisfied, except for payment to subcontractors to
be made out of retainage presently being held by the Owner, and that no claims or liens exist
against this Contractor in connection with this contract; that to the best of our knowledge no
claims or liens exist, and if any such claims or liens appear after payment of the retained amount
due on the Contract, this Contractor shall save the Owner harmless on account thereof. After
payment of the retained amount the undersigned does hereby waive, release and relinquish any
and all claims or rights of lien presently held or hereafter accruing upon the above project.
CONTRACTOR:
TITLE:
Sworn to and subscribed before me this
day of 200
(Notary Public)
My Commission expires:
relolien.doc

APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
PROJECT:
ENGINEER: McGill Associates, P.A.
Asheville, North Carolina
CONTRACTOR:
Contractors Addres
Application No.:
Date Notice Proceed:
Completion Date:
Days Remaining in Contract:
- Percent Complete:
CONTRACT: ORIGINAL CONTRACT AMOUNT
APPROVED CHANGE ORDER AMOUNT
REVISED CONTRACT AMOUNT
SUMMARY: TOTAL WORK COMPLETED TO DATE
TOTAL MATERIALS STORED ON SITE
TOTAL EARNED THIS APPLICATION
LESS % RETAINAGE
SUBTOTAL
LESS PREVIOUS PAYMENTS
CURRENT PAYMENT DUE
SIGNATURES:
CONTRACTOR:
Name
VERIFICATION:
Title
Federal ID #
Date
IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CONTRACT AND THIS APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT, THE
CONTRACTOR HAS COMPLETED THE WORK STATED ABOVE AND IS ENTITLED THE
FULL PAYMENT IN THE AMOUNT SHOWN.
ENGINEER: McGill Associates, P.A.
Name
APPROVAL:
Title
THIS APPLICATION IS HEREBY APPROVED FOR PAYMENT:
OWNER:
Name Title
Date
Date
AP-7

SECTION 01705
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
MOBILIZATION
A. The work covered by this section consists of preparatory work and
operations, including but not limited to those necessary for the movement
of personnel, equipment, supplies, and incidentals to the project site; for
the establishment of all offices, building, and other facilities necessary for
work on the project; and for all other work and operations which must be
performed or costs incurred prior to beginning work on the various items
on the project site. Included in this item will be the erection of all
construction signs and signals, traffic warning devices, project sign and
other preparatory signs.
PART 2: NOT USED
PART 3: NOT USED
END OF SECTION
Rev. 3/19/07 PROJECT # 07712 01705 - Page 1

SECTION 02211
PART1: GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
CLEARING AND GRUBBING
A. Clearing and grubbing shall consist of the removal and satisfactory
disposal of all trees, brush, stumps, logs, grass, weeds, roots, decayed
vegetable matter, posts, fences, stubs, rubbish and all other objectionable
matter resting on or protruding through the original ground surface and
occurring within the construction limits or right-of-way of any excavation,
borrow area, or embankment.
PART 2: NOT USED
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Clearing and grubbing operations shall be completed sufficiently in
advance of grading operations as may be necessary to prevent any of the
debris from the clearing and grubbing operations from interfering with the
excavation or embankment operations. All work under this section shall
be performed in a manner which will cause minimum soil erosion. The
Contractor shall perform such erosion control work, temporary or
permanent, as may be directed by the Engineer in order to satisfactorily
minimize erosion resulting from clearing and grubbing operations.
1. Clearing:
a. The work of clearing shall be performed within the limits
established by the plans, specifications, or the Engineer.
b. Clearing shall consist of the felling and cutting up, or the
trimming of trees, and the satisfactory disposal of the trees
and other vegetation together with the down timber, snags,
brush and rubbish occurring within the areas to be cleared.
Trees and other vegetation, except such individual trees,
groups of trees, and vegetation, as may be indicated on the
plans to be left standing, and all stumps, roots and brush in
the areas to be cleared shall be cut off six inches above the
original ground surface.
Rev. 3/19/07 - PROJECT # 07712 02211 - Page 1

C. Individual trees and groups of trees designated to be left
standing within cleared areas shall be trimmed of all
branches to such heights and in such manner as may be
necessary to prevent interference with construction
operations. All limbs and branches required to be trimmed
shall be neatly cut close to the whole of the tree or to main
branches, and the cuts thus made shall be painted with an
approved tree wound paint. Individual trees, groups of trees,
and other vegetation, to be left standing shall be thoroughly
protected from damage incident to construction operations
by the erection of barriers or by such other means as the
circumstances require.
d. The Engineer will designate all areas of growth or individual
trees which are to be preserved due to their desirability for
landscape or erosion control purposes. When the trees to
be preserved are located within the construction limits, they
will be shown on the plans or designated by the Engineer.
e. Clearing operations shall be conducted so as to prevent
damage by falling trees to trees left standing, to existing
structures and installations, and to those under construction,
and so as to provide for the safety of employees and others.
When such damages occur, all damaged areas shall be
repaired, removed or otherwise resolved utilizing generally
accepted practices at the Contractor's expense.
2.. Grubbing:
a. Grubbing shall consist of the removal and disposal of all
stumps, roots and matted roots from all cleared areas,
except as herein specified.
b. In embankment areas, when the depth of embankment
exceeds T-6" in height sound stumps shall be cut off not
more than 6" above the existing ground level and not
grubbed. Unsound or decayed stumps shall be removed to a
depth of approximately two feet below the natural ground
surface.
C. All depressions excavated below the natural ground surface
for or by the removal of stumps and roots shall be refilled
with suitable material and compacted to make the surface
conform to the surrounding ground surface.
Rev. 3/19/07 PROJECT # 07712 02211 - Page 2

3. Disposal of Cleared and Grubbed Material: Saw logs, pulp wood,
cord wood or other merchantable timber removed incidental to
clearing and grubbing shall remain the property of the Owner. -All
combustible matter shall be deposited at locations approved by the
Engineer. Combustible matter may be burned or may be disposed
of as stated above. Debris shall not be burned unless written
permission or permit is issued by the Fire Marshall having
jurisdiction in the area if applicable. The Contractor shall adhere to
all limitations and conditions set forth in the permit. Burning shall
be done at such time and such manner as to prevent fire from
spreading and to prevent any damage to adjacent cover and shall
further be subject to all requirements of State or Federal
Governments pertaining to the burning. Disposal by burning shall
be kept under constant attendance until all fires have burned out or
have been extinguished.
END OF SECTION
Rev. 3/19/07 PROJECT # 07712 02211 - Page 3

SECTION 02220 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. General:
1. The work covered by this section shall consist of furnishing all
materials, labor, equipment and services for the excavation and
backfill at all areas within the limits of the project. Work is limited to
the areas of construction, and includes (but is not necessarily
limited to) stockpiling of topsoil, site grading, excavation of footings
and trenches, filling, backfilling, compaction, finish grading,
spreading of topsoil, disposal of waste material, and proof rolling.
2. Perform all excavation, dewatering, sheeting, bracing, and
backfilling in such a manner as to eliminate all possibility of
undermining or disturbing the foundations of existing structures.
3. Requirements of the General and Supplemental Conditions apply
to all work in this section. Provide all labor, materials, equipment,
and services indicated on the drawings, or specified herein, or
reasonably necessary for or incidental to a complete job.
4. Excavations shall provide adequate working space and clearances
for the work to be performed therein and for installation and
removal of concrete forms. In no case shall excavation faces be
undercut for extended footings.
5. Subgrade surfaces shall be clean and free of loose material of any
kind when concrete is placed thereon.
6. Backfilling during freezing weather shall not be done except by
permission of the Engineer. No backfill, fill, or embankment
materials shall be installed on frozen surfaces, nor shall frozen
materials, snow, or ice be placed in any backfill, fill, or
embankment.
Rev. 3/19107 PROJECT 9 07712 02220 - Page 1

1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Excavation, General: Excavation consists of the removal and disposal of
all materials encountered for footings, foundations, pipework, and other
construction as shown on the drawings. Perform all excavation work in
compliance with applicable requirements of governing authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards: Unless otherwise indicated, all referenced
standards shall be the latest edition available at the time of bidding. Any
requirements of these specifications shall in no way invalidate the
minimum requirements of the referenced standards. Comply with the
provisions of the following codes and standards, except as otherwise
shown or specified.
1. ASTM C33: Standard Specifications for Concrete Aggregate
2. ASTM D698: Standard Test Methods for Moisture -Density
Relations of Soils and Soil -Aggregate Mixtures Using 5.5 lb.
Rammer and 12" Drop.
3. ASTM D3282: Standard Recommended Practice for Classification
of Soils and Soil -Aggregate Mixtures for Highway Construction
Purposes.
4. Standard Specifications for Roads and Structures, North Carolina
Department of Transportation, January 1, 2002 edition.
.5. Erosion and Sediment Control Planning and Design Manual.
B. Unauthorized Excavation: Except where otherwise authorized, indicated,
or specified, all materials excavated below the bottom of concrete walls,
footings, slabs on grade, and foundations shall be replaced, by and at the
expense of the Contractor, with concrete placed at the same time and
monolithic with the concrete above.
C. Existing Utilities:
1. Locate existing underground utilities in the area of work. If utilities
are to remain in place, provide adequate means of protection
during earthwork operations.
2. Should uncharted or incorrectly charted piping or other utilities be
encountered during excavation, consult the Engineer immediately
Rev. 3119107 PROJECT # 07712 02220 - Page 2

for directions as to procedure. Cooperate with Owner and utility
companies in keeping respective services and facilities in
operation. Repair damaged utilities to .the satisfaction of utility
companies.
1.04 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Site Information: No test borings or related subsurface information is
available for the project area. Test borings and other exploratory
operations may be undertaken by the Contractor at his own expense
provided such operations are acceptable to the Owner.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Classification of Excavated Materials: Classification of excavated
materials will be made as follows:
1. All materials excavated for this project, regardless of its nature or
composition shall be classified as Unclassified Excavation, and
shall be part of the lump sum price. No separate payment will be
made for the excavation of rock or any unsuitable materials.
B. Classification of Other Materials:
1. Satisfactory Subgrade Soil Materials: Soils complying with ASTM D
3282, soil classification Groups A -I, A-2-4, A-2-5, and A-3.
2. Unsatisfactory Subgrade Soil Materials: Soils described in ASTM D
3282, soil classification groups A-2-6, A-2-7, A-4, A-5, A-6, and
A-7; also peat and other highly organic soils, unless otherwise
acceptable to the Engineer.
3. Cohesionless Soil Materials: Gravels, sand -gravel mixtures, sands,
and gravelly -sands.
4. Cohesive Soil Materials: Clayey and silty gravels, sand -clay
mixtures, gravel -silt mixtures, clayey and silty sands, sand -silt
mixtures, clays, silts, and very fine sands.
5. Backfill and Fill Materials: Provide satisfactory soil materials for
backfill and fill, free of masonry, rock, or gravel larger than 4" in any
dimension, and free of metal, gypsum, lime, debris, waste, frozen
materials, vegetable, and other deleterious matter. Use only
excavated material that has been sampled, tested, and certified as
satisfactory soil material.
Rev. 3/19107 PROJECT # 07712 02220 - Page 3

6. Select Backfill: Select backfill is defined as backfill and fill material
that is transported to the site from outside the project limits, and
which meets the soil requirements specified above under "Backfill
and Fill Materials." Material excavated in conjunction with the
construction of this project cannot be considered as "select backfill'
for payment purposes.
7. Pipe Bedding: Crushed stone or crushed gravel meeting the
requirements of ASTM C 33, Gradation 67.
8. Inundated Sand: Sand for inundated sand backfill shall be clean
with not more than 25% retained on a No. 4 sieve and not more
than 7% passing a No. 200 sieve and shall have an effective size
between 0.10 mm and 0.30 mm. Sand shall be deposited in, or
placed simultaneously with application of, water so that the sand
shall be compacted by a mechanical probe type vibrator.
Inundated sand shall be compacted to 70% relative density as
determined by ASTM D4253 and D4254.
9. Graded Gravel: Gravel for compacted backfill shall conform to the
following gradation:
Sieve Size
Percent Passin g ' b 1Nei ht
y g
1"
100
3/4"
85 - 100
3/8"
50 - 80
No. 4
35 - 60
No. 40
15 - 30
No. 200
05 -.10
The gravel mixture shall contain no clay lumps or organic matters.
The fraction passing the No. 4 sieve shall have a liquid limit not
greater than 25 and a plasticity index not greater than 5. Gravel
backfill shall be deposited in uniform layers not exceeding 12" in
uncompacted thickness. The backfill shall be compacted by a
suitable vibratory roller or platform vibrator to not less than 70%
relative density as determined by ASTM D4253 and D4254.
2.01 EQUIPMENT
A. Mechanical Excavation:
1. The use of mechanical equipment will not be permitted in locations
where its operation would cause damage to trees, buildings,
culverts, or other existing property, utilities, or structures above or
Rev. 3/19/07 PROJECT # 07712 02220 - Page 4

below ground. In all such locations, hand excavating methods shall
be used.
2. Mechanical equipment used for trench excavation shall be of a
type, design, and construction and shall be controlled, that uniform
trench widths and vertical sidewalls are obtained at least from an
elevation one foot above the top of the installed pipe to the bottom
of the trench, and that trench alignment is such that pipe when
accurately laid to specified alignment will be centered in the trench
with adequate clearance between the pipe and sidewalls of the
trench. Undercutting the trench sidewall to obtain clearance will not
be permitted.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Dewaterino:
1. The Contractor shall provide and maintain adequate dewatering
equipment to remove and dispose of all surface water and
groundwater entering excavations, trenches, or other parts of the
work. Each excavation shall be kept dry during subgrade
preparation and continually thereafter until the structure to be built,
or the pipe to be installed therein, is completed to the extent that no
damage from hydrostatic pressure, flotation, or other cause will
result.
2. All excavations for concrete structures or trenches that extend
down to or below groundwater shall be dewatered by lowering and
keeping the groundwater level beneath such excavations 12" or
more below the bottom of the excavation.
3. Surface water shall be diverted or otherwise prevented from
entering excavated areas or trenches without causing damage to
adjacent property.
4. The Contractor is responsible for obtaining any required permits or
permissions necessary for the disposal of groundwater that is
removed. Any discharged groundwater shall be clean and free of
sediment.
5. The Contractor shall be responsible for the condition of any pipe or
conduit which he may use for drainage purposes, and all such
pipes or conduits which he may use for drain age_purposes, and all
such pipes or conduits shall be left clean and free of sediment.
Rev. 3/19/07 PROJECT # 07712 02220 - Page 5

6. Where trench sheeting is left in place, such sheeting shall not be
braced against the pipe, but shall be supported in a manner which
will preclude concentrated loads or horizontal thrusts on the pipe.
Cross braces installed above the pipe to support sheeting may be
removed after pipe embedment has been completed.
B. Stabilization:
1. Subgrades for concrete structures and trench bottoms shall be firm,
dense, and thoroughly compacted and consolidated; free from mud
and muck; and sufficiently stable to remain firm and intact under
the feet of the workmen.
2. Subgrades for concrete structures or trench bottoms, which are
otherwise solid but which become mucky on top due to
construction operations, shall be reinforced with one or more layers
of crushed rock or gravel. The stabilizing material shall be spread
and compacted to a depth of not less than 6" below the bottom of
the structure or pipe. Not more than 1/2" depth of mud or muck
shall be allowed to remain on stabilized trench bottoms when the
pipe bedding material is placed thereon. The finished elevation of
stabilized subgrades for concrete structures shall not be above
subgrade elevations indicated on the drawings.
C. Cutting Concrete or Asphalt Surface Construction:
1. All pavement cutting and repair shall be done in accordance with
local ordinances. Cuts in concrete and asphaltic concrete shall be
no larger than necessary to provide adequate working space for
proper installation of pipe and appurtenances. Cutting shall be
performed with a concrete saw in a manner which will provide a
clean groove the complete thickness of the surface material along
each side of the trench and along the perimeter of cuts for
structures.
2. Concrete and asphaltic concrete over trenches excavated for
- pipelines shall be removed so that a shoulder not less than 12" in
width at any point is left between the cut edge of the surface and
the top edge of the trench. Trench width at the bottom shall not be
greater than at the top and no undercutting will be permitted. Cuts
shall be made to and between straight or accurately marked curved
lines which, unless otherwise required, shall be parallel to the
center line of the trench.
Rev. 3/19107 PROJECT # 07712 02220 - Page 6

3. Pavement or other surfaces removed for connections to existing
lines or structures shall not be of greater extent that necessary for
the installation..
4. Where the trench parallels the length of concrete walks and the
trench location is all or partially under the walk, the entire walk shall
be removed and replaced. Where the trench crosses drives, walks,
curbs, or other surface construction, the surface construction shall
be removed and replaced between existing joints or between saw
cuts as specified for payment.
D. Site Grade:
1. General: Uniformly grade areas within limits of grading under this
section, including adjacent transition areas. Smooth finish the
surface within specified tolerances; compact with uniform levels or
slopes between points where elevations are shown, or between
such points and existing grades.
2. Ground Surface Preparation: Remove vegetation, debris,
unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and deleterious
materials from ground surface prior to placement of fills. Plow,
strip, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4
horizontal so that fill material will bond with existing surface. Shape
the subgrade as indicated on the drawings by forking, furrowing, or
plowing so that the first layer of new material placed thereon will be
well bonded to it.
3.02 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Alignment. Grade, and Minimum Cover:
1. Vertical and horizontal alignment of pipes, and the maximum joint
deflection used in connection therewith, shall be in conformity with
requirements of the section covering installation of pipe.
2. Where pipe grades or elevations are not definitely fixed by the
contract drawings, trenches shall be excavated to a depth sufficient
to provide a minimum depth of backfill cover over the top of the
pipe cover depths may be necessary on vertical curves or to
provide necessary clearance beneath existing pipes, conduits,
drains, drainage structures, or other obstructions encountered at
normal pipe grades. Measurement of pipe cover depth shall be
made vertically from the outside top of pipe to finished ground or
pavement surface elevation except where future surface elevations
are indicated on the drawings.
Rev. 3119/07 PROJECT # 07712 02220 - Page 7

B Limiting Trench Widths: Trenches shall be excavated to a width that will
provide adequate working space and sidewall clearances for proper pipe
installation, jointing, and embedment. For the purposes of quantity
measurements and payments, maximum trench widths shall be no greater
than the pipe outside diameter plus 24" (12" either side of pipe).
3.03 PROTECTION
A. Temporary Protection: Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements,
and other facilities from damages caused by settlement, lateral
movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by
earthwork operations.
B. Sheeting and Bracing: Make all excavations in accordance with Federal,
State, and Local health and safety rules and regulations, including those
promulgated by the Department of Labor, Occupation Safety and Health
Administration, "Safety and Health Regulations for Construction".
Furnish, put in place, and maintain such sheeting, bracing, etc., as may
be necessary to support the sides of the excavation to comply with the
above mentioned rules and regulations.
C. Blasting:
1. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damage caused by
blasting operations. Suitable methods shall be employed to confine
all materials lifted by blasting within the limits of the excavation or
trench.
2. All rock which cannot be handled and compacted as earth shall be
kept separate from other excavated materials and shall not be
mixed with backfill or embankment materials except as specified or
directed.
D. Care and Restoration of Property:
1. Enclose the trunks of trees which are to remain adjacent to the
work with substantial wooden boxes of such height as may be
necessary to protect them from piled material, equipment or
equipment operation. Use excavating machinery and cranes of
suitable type and operate the equipment with care to prevent injury
to remaining tree trunks, roots, branches and limbs.
2. Do not cut branches, limbs, and roots except by permission of the
Engineer. Cut smoothly and neatly without splitting or crushing. In
case of cutting or unavoidable injury to branches, limbs, and trunks
Rev. 3119/07 PROJECT # 07712 02220 - Page 8

of trees, neatly trim the cut or injured portions and cover with an
application of grafting wax and tree healing paint as directed.
3. Protect by suitable means all cultivated hedges, shrubs and plants
that might be injured by the Contractor's operations. Promptly heel
in any such trees or shrubbery necessary to be removed and
replanted. Perform heeling in and replanting under the direction of
a licensed and experienced nurseryman. Replant in their original
position all removed shrubbery and trees after construction
operations have been substantially completed and care for until
growth is reestablished.
4. Replace cultivated hedges, shrubs, and plants injured to such a
degree as to affect their growth or diminish their beauty or
usefulness, by items of kind and quality at least equal to the kind
and quality existing at the start of the work.
5. Do not operate tractors, bulldozers or other power -operated
equipment on paved surfaces if the treads or wheels of the
equipment are so shaped as to cut or otherwise injure the surfaces.
6. Restore all surfaces, including lawns, grassed, and planted areas
that have been injured by the Contractor's operations, to a
condition at least equal to that in which they were found
immediately before the work was begun. Use suitable materials
and methods for such restoration. Maintain all restored plantings
by cutting, trimming, fertilizing, etc., until acceptance. Restore
existing property or structures as promptly as practicable and do
not leave until the end of construction period.
E. Protection of Streams: Exercise reasonable precaution to prevent the
silting of streams. Provide at Contractor's expense temporary erosion and
sediment control measures to prevent the silting of streams and existing
drainage facilities. The Contractor shall size structures and conform fully
with the North Carolina Sedimentation Pollution Control Act.
F. Air Pollution:
1. Comply with all pollution control rules, regulations, ordinances, and
statutes which apply to any work performed under the Contract,
including any air pollution control rules, regulations, ordinances and
statutes, or any municipal regulations pertaining to air pollution.
2. During the progress of the work, maintain the area of activity,
including sweeping and sprinkling of streets as necessary, so as to
minimize the creation and dispersion of dust. If the Engineer
Rev. 3/19/07 PROJECT # 07712 02220 - Page 9

decides that it is necessary to use calcium chloride or more
effective dust control, furnish and spread the material, as directed,
and without additional compensation.
3.04 TRENCH EXCAVATION
A. Length of Trench:
1. No more trenches shall be opened in advance of pipe laying than is
necessary to expedite the work. One block or 400 feet (whichever
is the shorter) shall be the maximum length of open trench on any
line under construction.
2. Except where tunneling is indicated on the drawings, is specified,
or is permitted by the Engineer, all trench excavation shall be open
cut from the surface.
B. Trench Excavation:
1. General: Perform all excavation of every description and of
whatever substance encountered so that the pipe can be laid to the
alignment and depth shown on the drawings.
2. Brace and shore all trenches, where required, in accordance with
Federal, State, and Local health and safety rules and regulations,
including those promulgated by the Department of Labor,
Occupation Safety and Health Administration, "Safety and Health
Regulations for Construction".
3. Make all excavations by open cut unless otherwise specified or
indicated on the drawings.
4. Width of Trenches: Excavate trenches sufficiently wide to allow
proper installation of pipe, fittings and other materials.
Measurement and payment quantities will be based on a maximum
trench width of not more than 12" clear of pipe on either side at any
point. Do not widen trenches by scraping or loosening materials
from the sides.
5. Trench Excavation in Earth: Earth excavation includes all
excavation of whatever substance encountered. In locations where
pipe is to be bedded in earth excavated trenches, fine grade the
bottoms of such trenches to allow firm bearing for the bottom of the
pipe on undisturbed earth. Where any part of the trench has been
excavated below the grade of the pipe, fill the part excavated below
Rev. 3/19/07 PROJECT # 07712 02220 - Page 10

such grade with pipe bedding material and compact at the
Contractor's expense.
6. Trench Excavation in Fill: If pipe is to be laid in embankments or
other recently filled material, first place the fill material to the finish
grade or to a height of at least one foot above the top of the pipe,
whichever is the lesser. Take particular care to ensure maximum
consolidation of material under the pipe location. Excavate the
pipe trench as though in undisturbed material.
7. Trench Bottom in Poor Soil: Excavate and remove unstable or
unsuitable soil to a width and depth, as directed by the Engineer,
and refill with a thoroughly compacted gravel bedding.
8. Bell Holes: Provide bell holes at each joint to permit the joint to be
made properly and to provide a continuous bearing and support for
the pipe.
C. Trench Backfill:
1. General: Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the drawings,
use suitable material for backfill which was removed in the course
of making the construction excavations. Do not use frozen material
for the backfill and do not place backfill on frozen material.
Remove previously frozen material before new backfill is placed.
Start backfilling as soon as practicable after the pipes have been
laid, or the structures have been built and are structurally adequate
to support the loads, including construction loads to which they will
be subjected, and proceed until its completion.
2. With the exception mentioned below in this paragraph, do not
backfill trenches at pipe joints until after that section of the pipeline
has successfully passed any specified tests required. Should the
Contractor wish to minimize the maintenance of lights, and
barricades, and the obstruction of traffic, he may, at his own risk,
backfill the entire trench as soon as practicable after installation of
pipe, and the related structures have acquired a suitable degree of
strength. He shall, however, be responsible for removing and later
replacing such backfill, at his own expense, should he be ordered
to do so in order to locate and repair or replace leaking or defective
joints or pipe.
3. Material: The nature of the materials will govern both their
acceptability for backfill and the methods best suited for their
placement and compaction in the backfill. Both are subject to the
approval of the Engineer. Do not place stone or rock fragments
Rev. 3119/07 PROJECT # 07712 02220 - Page 11

larger than 4" in greatest dimension in the backfill. Do not drop
large masses of backfill material into the trench in such a manner
as to endanger the pipeline. Use a timber grillage to break the fall
of material dropped from a height of more than 5 feet. Exclude
pieces of bituminous pavement from the backfill unless their use is
expressly permitted.
4. Zone Around Pipe: Place bedding material to the level shown on
the Drawings and work material carefully around the pipe to insure
that all voids are filled, particularly in bell holes. For backfill up to a
level of 2 feet over the top of the pipe, use only selected materials.
containing no rock, clods or organic materials. Place the backfill
and compact thoroughly under the pipe haunches and up to the
mid -line of the pipe in layers not exceeding 6" in depth. Place each
layer and tamp carefully and uniformly so as to eliminate the
possibility of lateral displacement. Place and compact the
remainder of the zone around the pipe and to a height of one foot
above the pipe in layers not exceeding 6" and compact to a
maximum density of at least 100 % as determined by ASTM
D0698.
5. Tamping: Deposit and spread backfill materials in uniform, parallel
layers not exceeding 12" thick before compaction. Tamp each
layer before the next layer is placed to obtain a thoroughly
compacted mass. Furnish and use, if necessary, an adequate
number of power driven tampers, each weighing at least 20 pounds
for this purpose. Take care that the material close to the bank, as
well as in all other portions of the trench, is thoroughly compacted.
When the trench width and the depth to which backfill has been
placed are sufficient to make it feasible, and it can be done
effectively and without damage to the pipe, backfill may, on
approval of the Engineer, be compacted by the use of suitable
rollers, tractors, or similarly powered equipment instead of by
tamping. For compaction by tamping (or rolling), the rate at which
backfilling material is deposited in the trench shall not exceed that
permitted by the facilities for its spreading, leveling and compacting
as furnished by the Contractor.
6. Wet the material by sprinkling, if necessary, to insure proper
compaction by tamping (or rolling). Perform no compaction by
tamping (or rolling) when the material is too wet either from rain or
applied water to be compacted properly.
7. Trench Compaction: Compact backfill in .pipe trenches to the
maximum density as shown on the drawings, or as listed in the
subsection entitled COMPACTION, with a moisture content within
Rev. 3/19107 PROJECT # 07712 02220 - Page 12

the range of values of maximum density as indicated by the
moisture -density relationship curve.
3.05 SITE GRADE
A. Placement and Compaction:
1. Place backfill and fill material in layers not more than 8" in loose
depth. Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as
necessary to provide the optimum moisture content. Compact
each layer to the required percentage of maximum density for each
area classification. Do not place backfill or material on surfaces
that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice.
2. In areas not accessible to rollers or compactors, compact the fill
with mechanical hand tampers. If the mixture is excessively
moistened by rain, aerate the material by means of blade graders,
harrows, or other approved equipment, until the moisture content of
the mixture is satisfactory. Finish the surface of the layer by
blading or rolling with a smooth roller, or a combination thereof, and
leave the surface smooth and free from waves and inequalities.
3. Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures, to the
required elevations. Take care to prevent wedging action of backfill
against structures. Carry the material uniformly around all parts of
the structure to approximately the same elevation in each lift.
4. When existing ground surface has a density less than that
specified under the subsection entitled COMPACTION for the
particular area classification, break up the ground surface,
pulverize, moisture -condition to the optimum moisture content, and
compact to required depth and percentage of maximum density.
B. Grading Outside Building Lines: Grade to drain away from structures to
prevent ponding of water. Finish surface free from irregular surface
changes.
C. Planting Areas: Finish areas to receive topsoil to within not more than one
inch (1") above or below the required subgrade elevations, compacted as
specified, and free from irregular surface changes.
D. Walks: Shape the surface of areas under walks to -line, grade, and
cross-section, with the finish surface not more than 0" above or 1" below
the required subgrade elevation, compacted as specified, and graded to
prevent ponding of water after rains.
Rev. 3119/07 PROJECT # 07712 02220 - Page 13

E. Pavements:
1. Shape the surface of the areas under pavement to line, grade and
cross section, with finish surface not more than 1/2" above or below
the required subgrade elevation, compacted as specified, and
graded to prevent ponding of water after rains. Include such
operations as plowing, discing, and any moisture or aerating
required to provide the optimum moisture content for compaction.
2. Fill low areas resulting from removal of unsatisfactory soil
materials, obstructions, and other deleterious materials, using
satisfactory soil material.
3. Shape to line, grade, and cross section as shown on the drawings.
F. Protection of Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic and
erosion, and keep free of trash and debris. Repair and re-establish
grades in settled, eroded, and rutted areas to specified tolerances.
G. Reconditioning Compacted Areas: Where completed compacted areas
are disturbed by subsequent construction operations or adverse weather
prior to acceptance of work, scarify surface, reshape, and compact to
required density prior to further construction.
H. Unauthorized Excavation:
1. Unauthorized excavation consists of the removal of materials
beyond indicated elevations without the specific direction of the
Engineer. Under footings, foundations, bases, etc., fill
unauthorized excavation by extending the indicated bottom
elevation of the concrete to the bottom of the excavation, without
altering the required top elevation. Lean concrete fill may be used
to bring elevations to proper position only when acceptable to the
Engineer.
2. For pipe trenches and elsewhere, backfill and compact
unauthorized excavations as specified for authorized excavations
of the same classification, unless otherwise directed by the
Engineer.
3.06 BACKFILL AROUND STRUCTURES
A. General: Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the drawings, use
suitable material for backfill which was removed in the course of making
the backfill and do not place backfill which was removed in the course of
making the construction excavations. Do not use frozen material for the
Rev. 3119107 PROJECT # 07712 02220 - Page 14

backfill and do not place backfill upon frozen material. Remove previously
frozen material before new backfill is placed.
B. Material: Approved selected materials available from the excavations may
be used for backfilling around structures. Obtain material needed in
addition to that of construction excavations from off -site borrow pits
selected by the Contractor. Furnish all borrow material needed on the
work. Place and compact all material, whether from the excavation or
borrow, to make a dense, stable fill. Use fill material which contains no
vegetation, masses of roots, individual roots over 18" long or more than
1/2" in diameter, stones over 4" in diameter, or porous matter. Organic
matter must not exceed negligible quantities.
C. Placing Backfill: Do not place backfill against or on structures until they
have attained sufficient strength to support the loads (including
construction loads) to which they will be subjected, without distortion,
cracking, or other damage. Make special leakage tests, if required, as
soon as practicable after the structures are structurally adequate and
other necessary work has been done. Use the best of the excavated
materials in backfilling within 2 feet of the structure. Avoid unequal soil
pressures by depositing the material evenly around the structure.
3.07 COMPACTION
A. General: Control soil compaction during construction providing at least the
minimum percentage of density specified for each area classification.
B. Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: After compaction, all fill
will be tested in accordance with Method "C" of ASTM D-698, unless
specified otherwise. Except as noted otherwise for the zone around pipe,
.provide not less than the following percentages of maximum density of
soil material compacted at optimum moisture content, for the actual
density of each layer of soil material -in -place:
UNPAVED AREAS
Com act Full De th to 92%
DRIVES AND PARKING
Top 24" - 100%
TRENCH BACKFILL PAVED AREAS
Compact full depth to 100%
TRENCH BACKFILL UNPAVED AREAS
Compact full depth to 95%
ALL OTHER BACKFILL
Compact full depth to 95%
C. Moisture Control: Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be
moisture conditioned before compaction, uniformly apply water to surface
of subgrade, or layer of soil material, to prevent free water appearing on
surface during or subsequent to compaction operations. Remove and
replace, or scarify and air dry, soil material that is too wet to permit
compaction to specified density. Soil material that has been removed
Rev. 3/19/07 PROJECT # 07712 02220 - Page 15

because it is too wet to permit compaction may be stockpiled or spread
and allowed to dry. Assist drying by discing, harrowing or pulverizing, until
moisture content is reduced to a satisfactory value, as determined by
moisture -density relation tests.
D. Disposal of Surface Material: Upon approval of the Engineer, haul all
surplus materials not needed or acceptable for backfill off -site.
3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Soil Testing and Inspection Service: Compaction tests of all fill areas will
be made by an independent testing laboratory. Such tests will be
provided and paid for by the Owner, except that tests that reveal non-
conformance with the specifications and all succeeding tests for the same
area shall be at the expense of the Contractor until conformance with the
specifications is established. The Owner will be responsible for paying for
only the successful tests.
END OF SECTION
Rev. 3119107 PROJECT # 07712 02220 - Page 16

SECTION 03301 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION
PART1: GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This section covers concrete
reinforcement therefore.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
construction, complete, including
A. Reinforcing: Bar reinforcement shall be intermediate grade new billet. steel
conforming to the requirements of ASTM A-615. Unless otherwise noted,
all reinforcing bars shall be grade 60. Wire fabric reinforcement shall
consist of steel wire conforming to the requirements of ASTM A-185,
latest revision.
B. Concrete: All concrete shall be equivalent to ready mix concrete
manufactured and delivered in accordance with the requirements of
ASTM C-94, latest revision and having a compressive strength at 28 days
of 4000 psi, except as noted herein. The concrete manufacturer shall
assume the responsibility of the design of the concrete mix in accordance
with Alternate No. 2 of ASTM C-94. Air entrained concrete shall be used
for all concrete exposed to the elements.
a. Cement shall be Type 1 or Type 1A 'Portland" cement conforming
to ASTM C-150, latest revision or ASTM C-175, latest revision
respectively.
b.. Aggregates shall conform to ASTM C-33, latest revision. Coarse
aggregate shall be crushed rock or gravel and graded from 3/4" to
#4 sieve for walls and slabs and from 2" to #4 sieve for mass or
foundation concrete. Fine aggregate shall be natural sand.
C. Mixing water shall be proportioned so that slump when measured
with standard slump cone does not exceed the following:
i. Slabs in grade.........................................Max. 4", Min. 3"
ii. Footings..................................................Max. 5", Min. 3"
iii. All others.................................................Max. 6", Min. 3"
Rev. 3119107 PROJECT # 07712 03301 - Page 1

d. Premolded joint filler strips shall be resilient compressive,
bituminous and fiber material saturated, with at least 35% and not
over 50% by weight of asphalt. Poured type joint composition for
expansion joints shall be elastic compound made up of asphalt and
colloidal mineral fillers.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 FORMS
A. Forms shall be wood, metal, structural hardboard or other suitable
material that will produce the required surface finish. Forms placed for
successive pours for continuous surfaces shall be fitted to accurate
alignment to assure a smooth completed surface free from irregularities,
and shall be sufficiently tight to prevent the loss of mortar. No forms shall
be left permanently in place without approval of the Engineer. Holes
resulting from removal of form ties shall be filled solid within 12 hours after
removal of forms with cement mortar.
3.02 PLACEMENT
A. Concrete shall be placed as nearly as possible in its final position.
Runways for wheeled equipment shall not be supported on the
reinforcement. Concrete shall be placed and compacted in layers not
over 18 inches deep. Vibrators may be used provided they are used
under experienced supervision and the mixture is dry enough to prevent
segregation. Form vibrators shall not be used. Vibration shall not be
used for transporting or moving concrete inside the forms. No more
concrete shall be placed than can be consolidated and finished the same
day as placed. Free fall of concrete shall be limited so that no
.segregation of materials occurs.
3.03 JOINTS
A. Construction of joints not indicated on drawing shall be approved by the
Engineer in advance of pour. Joints in foundation walls shall be keyed.
Before depositing of concrete is resumed, the hardened surface shall be
roughened, cleaned and wetted surfaces shall be slushed with a coating
of neat cement grout against which the new concrete shall be placed
before the new grout has attained its set.
3.03 FINISHING
A. After stripping forms, all voids and honeycombs shall be patched by
chipping and scarifying the defective area and treating it with an approved
bonding tended that all such voids be patched, not merely plastered.
Rev. 3/19/07 PROJECT # 07712 03301 - Page 2

Grout mixture shall consist of one part Portland cement and one part
sand. Immediately following removal of forms, all fins and irregular
projections shall be removed from all surfaces except from those which
are not to be exposed or waterproofed.
B. Slabs shall be struck off and consolidated by approved machine or hand
methods, so that upon completion, the surface shall be true to grade as
shown on drawings and free of surface voids. All floors shall have
monolithic steel trowel finish unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.
Exterior walks shall be compacted, screeded and floated to a true even
surface with wood floats and then broomed.
END OF SECTION
Rev. 3/19107 PROJECT # 07712 03301 - Page 3

SECTION 06192 PREFABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
1.02
1.03
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install prefabricated metal -plate -
connected wood trusses at the locations shown on the drawings and as
specified herein.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standards: Comply with N.F.P.A. "National Design Specification for Wood
Construction" and with TPI standards including "Quality Standard for
Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses," "Commentary and
Recommendations for Handling and Erecting Wood Trusses,"
"Commentary and Recommendations for Bracing Wood Trusses," and the
following:
"Design Specification for Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses."
B. Single -Source Engineering Responsibility: Provide trusses engineered by
the metal plate connector manufacturer to support superimposed dead
and live loads indicated, with design approved and certified by a
professional engineer legally authorized to practice in North Carolina.
C. Fabricator's Qualifications: A firm that participates in a recognized quality
assurance program that involves inspection by SPIB; Timber Products
Inspection, Inc.; Truss Plate Institute; or other independent inspection and
testing agency acceptable to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Current Evaluation/Research Reports: Provide products for which model
code evaluation/research reports exist that are acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction and that evidence compliance of metal framing anchors
for application indicated with the building code in effect for this Project.
E. Allowable Design Loads:
from empirical data or
through comprehensive
laboratory.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Rev. 3119/07
As published by manufacturer and determined
by rational engineering analysis and verified
testing by a qualified independent testing
Eight (8) copies of shop drawings for the material being furnished under
this specification shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval and shall
PROJECT # 07712 06192 - Page 1

include at least the following information:
1. Shop drawings showing sizes, design, values, materials, and
dimensional relationships of components as well as bearing and
anchorage details.
2. Provide shop drawings that have been signed and stamped by a
professional engineer legally authorized to practice in North
Carolina.
3. Design calculations for truss from metal plate connector
manufacturer.
4. Product certificate, signed by officer of fabricating firm, certifying
that metal -plate -connected wood trusses supplied for Project
comply with specified requirements.
5. Research reports or evaluation reports of the model code
organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction evidencing
compliance of fire -retardant -treated wood with specified
requirements and building code in effect for Project.
1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Handle and store trusses with care and comply with TPI
recommendations to avoid damage from bending, overturning or other
cause. Trusses shall be protected during storage so that no damage or
deterioration will occur during shipment or storage.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. The manufacturer shall warrant all materials to be free from defects in
material and workmanship for a period of one (1) year.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Lumber: Provide dressed lumber S4S, grade marked, complying with PS
20 and requirements indicated.
1. Moisture Content: Seasoned, with 19 percent maximum moisture
content at time of dressing and shipment.
2. Grade for Chord Members: "No. 2." (minimum)
Rev. 3/19/07 PROJECT # 07712 06192 - Page 2

3. Grade for Web Members: "No. 3" (minimum)
4. Species: Southern Pine graded under SPIB rules.
B. Metal Connector Plates: Metals and thickness as indicated, but not less
than thickness indicated below:
1. Hot -Dip Galvanized Sheet Steel: ASTM A 446, Grade A, G60,
minimum thickness of 0.036".
C. Fasteners: Of size and type indicated that comply with the following
requirements. Where trusses are exposed to weather or to high relative
humidities, provide hot -dip zinc -coated fasteners per ASTM A 153 or AISI
Type 304 stainless steel fasteners.
1. Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: FS FF-N-105.
2. Power Driven Fasteners: National Evaluation Report NER-272.
3. Wood Screws: ANSI B18.6.1.
4. Lag Bolts: ANSI B18.2.1.
5. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with
ASTM A 563 hex nuts and where indicated, flat washers.
D. Metal Framing Anchors: Provide metal framing anchors of type, size,
metal, and finish indicated that comply with requirements specified
including the following:
1. Current Evaluation/Research Reports: Provide products for which
model code evaluation/research reports exist that are acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction and that evidence compliance of
metal framing anchors for application indicated with the building
code in effect for this Project.
2. Allowable Design Loads: As published by manufacturer and
determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis
and verified through comprehensive testing by a qualified
independent testing laboratory.
3. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Zinc -coated by hot -dip process to comply
with ASTM A 525, Coating Designation G60, and complying with
ASTM A 446, Grade A; ASTM A 526; or ASTM A 527.
Rev. 3/19/07 PROJECT # 07712 06192 Page 3

2.02 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate and assemble trusses to provide units of configuration
indicated, with closely fitted joints and connector plates securely fastened
to wood members.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install trusses to comply with TPI referenced standards and other
indicated requirements.
END OF SECTION
Rev. 3119107 PROJECT 4 07712 06192 - Page 4

SECTION 11210 SUBMERSIBLE TURBINE PUMPS
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. DESCRIPTION
Furnish and install a duplex submersible turbine pump system for a drip
irrigation system as indicated on the plans and as'described herein.
The pump system shall each include two (2) submersible turbine pumps of
stainless steel construction, valves, internal piping, motor starter equipment
and control equipment as necessary to provide a complete installation ready
for operation.
B. SHOP DRAWINGS
Submit six (6) sets of complete shop drawings to the Engineer for approval,
including pump curves.
C. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
Five (5) copies of printed instructions for all preventive maintenance
operations shall be furnished to the Engineer with the shop drawings. Parts
lists showing each component part of each different pump, power, or drive
unit shall be furnished. Five (5) copies of all operation manuals for each type
of unit shall be furnished to the Engineer with the shop drawings.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. HYDROSTATIC TESTS
Each pump shall be tested hydrostatically in the manufacturer's shop at a
pressure equal to not less than twice the shut-off head specified. The casing
and heads shall show no undue deflection or sign of weakness under the test
pressure and there shall be no seating through porous metal or leakage
through cracks or other defects. The pump suction vessel shall be tested to a
hydrostatic test pressure of 275 psi in the manufacturer's shop for a minimum
of 10 minutes. Five (5) certified copies of the test results shall be furnished
the Engineer for approval before the pumps are installed.
Rev. 2127/06 PROJECT # 02715 11210 - Page 1

B. SHOP PERFORMANCE TESTS
Shop performance tests shall be run on one pump of each size so specified.
Five (5) certified copies of the test results shall be furnished the Engineerfor
approval before the pumps are installed. Results of the shop performance
test shall be inclusive insofar as meeting the specified performance
requirements. Final acceptance of pumping units shall depend upon the
satisfactory operation as demonstrated by the final field tests.
1.03 MANUFACTURER AND SUPPLIER INFORMATION
A. MANUFACTURER NAMEPLATE
A manufacturer's nameplate shall be securely and permanently mounted to
each individual piece of equipment furnished under this Section. The
nameplate shall be constructed of a durable, non -corrosive material. Critical
information shall be clearly engraved or otherwise permanently stamped on
the nameplate, and shall be fully legible. The information contained on the
manufacturer nameplate shall include at least the following:
• Manufacturer's Serial Number
• Name, address and telephone number of equipment manufacturer
• Model and/or Part Number, including pump impeller sizes, when
applicable
• Performance Criteria (i.e., capacity, design point, etc.)
• Motor size, speed and voltage
• Enclosure Type or Rating
• Any other pertinent information
Note: All equipment shall include a nameplate with a manufacturer serial
number validating the equipment as new. Failure to meet these
requirements will be cause for rejection of the equipment.
B. SUPPLIER AND SERVICE INFORMATION
A durable nameplate, stamp or sticker shall be adhered to each individual
piece of equipment containing the name, address, and telephone number of
the local business that supplied the equipment, and the name, address and
telephone number of the local business that can provide service and
replacement parts for the equipment. A 24-hour emergency service
telephone number should also be included.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
No shipment shall be made until the equipment is approved by the Engineer.
Rev. 2/27106 PROJECT # 02715 11210 - Page 2

All equipment shall be properly protected so that no damage or deterioration
shall occur during shipment or storage. All storage and handling shall be in
strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations..
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 EQUIPMENT
A. GENERAL
Furnish and install submersible well pumps as shown on the plans. Each
pump shall be equipped with a submersible electric motor connected for
operation at 120 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz service, with a minimum of 50 ft.
jacketed cable suitable for submersible pump applications. Pump shall meet
the following design applications:
The pumps shall be capable of operating at in either of the two operating
conditions specified below with a maximum of 314 hp motor and maximum
3500 rpm.
At 15.5 gpm pump shall produce a MINIMUM TDH of 121 ft and at 12.7
gpm pump shall produce a,MAXIMUM TDH of 139 ft.
Note: If a pump cannot be supplied to meet the above conditions a Pressure
Reducing Valve can be utilized as an alternate to adjust the output pressure
as necessary to meet the conditions.
B. PUMP CONSTRUCTION
1. Provide check valve with full -flow, non -clog, non -slamming design.
2. Diffuser, chambers shall be stainless steel and be integral fabricated units
designed to eliminate up thrust and shall contain diffuser guide vanes and
intermediate thrust bearings
3. Shaft, straps, cable'guard, split cones, impellers and screen shall be
constructed of stainless steel
4. Impeller seal rings shall be abrasion resistant rubber
5. Priming inducer shall properly lubricate the pump and prevent dry
running.
6. Pump shaft coupling shall be splined or keyed stainless steel to assure
positive non -slip action
'Rev. 2127/06 PROJECT # 02715 11210 -Page 3

C. PUMP MOTOR
1. Provide submersible type motor of canned rotor design and with
maximum 3/4 HP and 3500 RPM.
2. All parts that are in contact with the medium being pumped shall be
constructed of corrosion resistant stainless steel.
3. Shaft and seal shall be tungsten carbide running on tungsten carbide.
The upper seal ring shall be molded into a rubber diaphragm, which shall
be spring loaded and act as a relief valve for excess motor fluid.
4. Upper radial bearings shall be water lubricated diamond hard ceramic
running against a tungsten carbide shaft journal
5. Motor Circulation Pump shall be stainless steel and circulate the water in
the rotor can chamber to ensure effective bearing lubrication and winding
heat dissipation.
6. Stator shall be hermetically sealed in stainless steel and encapsulated in
thermal plastic resin for maximum heat transfer and resistance to
moisture penetration
7. Lower radial bearing shall be water lubricated diamond hard ceramic
running against a tungsten carbide shaft journal
8. Thrust bearing shall be an adjustable Mitchell type design constructed of
ceramic running against self -aligning metal impregnated carbon pads.
9. Cable shall be neoprene jacketed RHW insulated wire, impervious to
moisture and having a high abrasion resistance.
10. The cable shall be protected where it passes through the bowl assembly.
11. Cable shall be of such size that the voltage drop does not exceed three
percent between the starter and motor.
12. Stainless steel cable clamps shall be provided to support the cable along
the column of pipe at intervals not to exceed 10 feet.
13. Motor shall be non -overloading through entire range.
D. VERIFICATION OF PERFORMANCE
All pumps shall be site tested after installation to demonstrate satisfactory
Rev. 2/27/06 PROJECT # 02715 11210 - Page 4

operation without excessive noise, vibration, cavitation or over -heating. The
manufacturer along with the authorized representative shall conduct site
tests. Tests shall include checking for correct rotation, maximum motor
amperage draws within nameplate specifications, balanced voltages on each
power leg with the pump operating to within manufacturers tolerances, and
demonstrated compatibility of the pump/motor with the controls supplied.
Test results shall be in printed form and signed by the manufacturer or his
Representative and supplied to the owner.
2.02 WARRANTY
A. All complete pumping units including electric motors, auxiliary units, and
mounts shall be warranted by the Contractor against all defects in materials
and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of final
acceptance. The Contractor shall be obligated to replace all parts and
accessory construction proved defective within one (1) year at no cost to the
Owner.
B. The performance of all pumps, motors and auxiliary units shall be guaranteed
at the specified pumping conditions. The total horsepower required by the
pumps shall not be in excess of that indicated by the results of the
manufacturer's show test.
END OF SECTION
Rev. 2127/06 PROJECT # 02715 11210 - Page 5

SECTION 11253 TURBIDITY MONITORING SYSTEM
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
The Contractor shall furnish and install a .complete turbidity monitoring system as
shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
Unless otherwise noted, all materials and equipment supplied under this Section
shall be new, of good quality, and in good condition. ,
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
There shall be furnished and installed necessary equipment for continuous
measurement and recording of turbidity as follows:
A. EFFLUENT TURBIDITY
One effluent turbidity low range analyzer and transmitter.
B. TURBIDITY RECORDERS
1. One 4-Pen Recorder for recording effluent turbidities; high turbidity
alarm for turbidity levels. in excess of 10 NTU's.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
All equipment shall be manufactured by a reputable company with at least five
(5) years experience in the manufacture of turbidity monitoring equipment. All
equipment in the system shall be provided by a single supplier.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. SHOP DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall submit six(6) copies of complete shop drawings,
including manufacturer's catalogue cut sheets, to the. Engineer for review.
B. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
The contractor shall provide eight ' (8) copies of operation and
maintenance manuals to the Engineer for review prior to start-up.
Rev. 3/20/2007 PROJECT # 07712 11253 - Page 1

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
All equipment shall be delivered, stored and handled in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
1.06 WARRANTY
The manufacturer shall warrant the turbidimeter against defects in materials and
workmanship for one (1) year from date of start-up.
1.07 MANUFACTURER AND SUPPLIER INFORMATION
A. MANUFACTURER NAMEPLATE
A manufacturer's nameplate shall be securely and permanently mounted
to each individual piece of equipment furnished under this Section. The
nameplate shall be constructed of a durable, non -corrosive material.
Critical information shall be clearly engraved or otherwise permanently
stamped on the nameplate, and shall be fully legible. The information
contained on the manufacturer nameplate shall include at least the
following:
• Manufacturer's Serial Number
• Name, address and telephone number of equipment manufacturer
• Model and/or Part Number, including pump impeller sizes, when
applicable
• Performance Criteria (i.e., capacity, design point, etc.)
• Motor size, speed and voltage
• Enclosure Type or Rating
• Any other pertinent information
Note: All equipment shall include a nameplate with,a manufacturer serial
number validating the equipment as new. Failure to meet these
requirements will be cause for rejection of the equipment.
B. SUPPLIER AND SERVICE INFORMATION
A durable nameplate, stamp or sticker shall be adhered to each individual
piece of equipment containing the name, address, and telephone number
of the local business that supplied the equipment, and the name, address
and telephone number of the local business that can provide service and
replacement parts for the equipment. A 24-hour emergency service
telephone number should also be included.
Rev. 3/20/2007 PROJECT # 07712 11253 - Page 2

PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 EQUIPMENT
A. LOW RANGE TURBIDITY ANALYZERS (Filtered Water Turbidity)
1. The turbidimeter shall be a continuous -reading, on-line instrument
using the nephelometric method of measurement. It shall be an
EPA -approved design utilizing a single silicon photodiode to detect
90 degree scattered light.
2. A tungsten -filament light source operating at a color temperature of
approximately 2700 degrees Kelvin shall be used. An auto -ranging
digital display shall read from 0-20 NTU. Accuracy shall be better
than 1% of reading. Resolution shall be to 0.001 NTU. Calibration
shall be based on formazin, the primary turbidity standard. Routine
standardization shall be via comparison to a laboratory turbidimeter
or with secondary reflectance rods (furnished as a standard
accessory). The Turbidimeter shall consist of two main component
parts: a turbidimeter body and a control unit.
3. All optical and hydraulic components shall be housed in the
turbidimeter body. The light source shall be directed through the
surface of the water sample, eliminating the use of a glass window
or flow cell. Optical components shall be mounted on an optical
head assembly which can be easily removed for servicing without
disturbing sample flow. The turbidimeter body also shall
incorporate a built-in bubble trap to effectively purge the sample of
entrapped air prior to measurement. The Turbidimeter body shall
be constructed of corrosion -resistant structural plastic. It shall be
powered from the control unit and require no separate power
source.
4. The Control Unit shall provide a digital L.E.D. display with 4 digits
and automatic decimal positioning. The Control Unit also shall
provide a linear output signal which can be programmed to span all
or any portion of the 0-20 NTU range. A 4-20 mA current output
and selectable voltage outputs of 0-10 mV, 0-100 mV and 0-1 Vdc
shall be provided. Two set -point alarm systems shall be fully
adjustable over the entire range of the instrument and actuate
SPDT n.o/n.c. dry relay contacts. A bubble rejection circuit shall be
provided to eliminate spikes in measurement due to transient
sample conditions. The instrument shall be capable of offsetting
the turbidity of pure water to achieve a reading of 0.000 on particle
free water. Self test diagnostics shall be provided to automatically
indicate possible instrument malfunctions.
Rev. 3/2012007 PROJECT # 07712 11253 - Page 3

5. Set point alarms shall be set to signal automatically actuated valves
diverting flow to the effluent or reject storage. Turbidity readings
over 10.0 NTU shall cause the valve to the effluent storage to close
and the reject storage valve to open. Turbidity reading below 9.9
NTU shall cause the valve to effluent storage to reopen and the
valve to reject storage to close.
6. The Control Unit shall be housed in a NEMA 12 industrial plastic
enclosure. Power requirement shall be selectable 115/230 Vac,
50/60 Hz.
7. Turbidity analyzer shall be HACH 1720 E or equal as manufactured
by Roberts Filter or equal.
B. TURBIDITY RECORDERS
1. Circular chart recorder shall be capable of recording up to four
points on a 10" chart. The unit shall be fully programmable in order
that the recorder can be configured to accept do voltages,
thermocouple, and RTD inputs. All non -linear inputs shall be
linearized and provision must be made for special linearizations. In
addition to recording, the unit shall have provisions for individual 16
character tags and messages per channel, and up to four
intergrators which shall be selectable either as reset or non -reset
type. Each channel, and up to four integrators which shall be
selectable either as reset or non -reset type. Each channel shall be
fitted with two alarms selectable as absolute, rate of change, or
deviation. The recorder shall also be capable of adding up to 2 PID
controllers, and serial bi-directional communications. The recorder
shall be suitable for panel mounting and shall be a NEMA 3
enclosure. The recorder shall be Chessel Model 390 or equal as
manufactured by Honeywell or equal.
2. Instruments shall be 115 Vac. Signal input shall be 4-20 ma.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
All equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and as shown on the drawings.
3.02 QUALITY CONTROL AND FIELD TESTING
Rev. 3/20/2007 PROJECT # 07712 11253 - Page 4

A. QUALITY CONTROL
The instrument supplier shall furnish the services of a qualified technical
service representative to perform start-up, field testing, calibration, and
training of the new turbidimeters. A minimum of two (2) days of services
shall be provided.
B. FIELD TESTING
The Contractor and the manufacturer's representative shall demonstrate
to the owner and the Engineer that all equipment is performing as
specified.
3.03 SPARE PARTS
The Contractor shall furnish one (1) compete set of recommended spare parts to
be conveyed to the owner.
END OF SECTION
Rev. 3/20/2007 PROJECT # 07712 11253 - Page 5

SECTION 11300 DRIP IRRIGATION SYSTEM
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. GENERAL
A completewastewater disposal system using drip technology shall
be furnished and installed in accordance with these specifications.
The system will be generally located as shown on the plans. The
disposal system consists of all materials and equipment from (and
including) the submersible turbine pumps to the disposal field
dripper lines. The equipment includes submersible turbine pumps,
automatic disk filter assembly, electronic actuated control valves,
check valves, air and vacuum relief valves, distribution headers,
return headers with automatic flushing valve, pressure
compensating dripper lines, flow meter, system controller and any
appurtenance necessary to provide a complete functional system
as per the plans and specifications. The filtration and control
system shall be a complete pre -manufactured skid mounted system
for package installation.
B. SUBMITTALS
The manufacturer shall supply a minimum of six (6)
sets of standard Submittal Drawings, Operating and
Maintenance Instruction Manuals and Parts List.
Standard submittals will consist of:
a) System Outline Drawing
b) Control Data
c) Detailed Assembly and Maintenance Guides
d) Typical Installation Guides
e) Technical Manuals
f) Parts List
1.02 QUALIFICATION OF MANUFACTURERS

The complete disposal system with appurtenances shall be the "Perc-
Rite"® Model ASD124-D124 wastewater dispersal system provided by
American Manufacturing Company Inc. of Elkwood, Virginia.
1.03 FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS
A single manufacturer shall furnish a complete drip irrigation system and be
responsible for its proper design and subsequent operation. The
manufacturer shall be responsible for coordination with other portions of the
project, be the prime supplier of equipment and materials in the system, and
provide all the manufacturers service as required for a complete and
operable system.
1.04 INSTALLATION AND TESTING PROCEDURES
A. System Installer Qualifications: The system installer shall have a
minimum of 5 years of installing surface effluent drip systems and a
minimum of 10 surface effluent system installations; said systems must
be of comparable capacity to the proposed system. Verification
documents and contact lists for qualifications will be required.
B. System Description: The management system shall be operated via a
PLC based control panel to allow scheduled dosing to occur at pre-
determined times and must be equipped with a back-up power supply
to maintain correct time and program variables in the event of power
failures. This controller will monitor, via mercury float switches, the
liquid level within the pumping chambers for Low Water, Dose Enable
and High Water conditions. If the Low Water and or Dose Enable
sensor are disabled the controller will not allow automatic pumping to
start. If the Low Water and Dose Enable sensors are enabled, this
shall ensure that there is sufficient liquid level in the pumping chamber
for the system to complete a dosing cycle of the largest zone within the
disposal area. Should the Dose Enable sensor become disabled during
a normal pumping cycle the system shall continue until the cycle is
complete and not allow another cycle to start until the sensor is
,enabled. Should the Low Water sensor become disable during a
normal pumping cycle the system will shut down to prevent damage to
the pumps. The high water sensor shall be placed at the level indicated
on the plans and, if engaged, shall cause an on -site audible/visual
indicator and signal the remote dialing device.
The controller must be capable of monitoring flow rate (in gallons per
minute) into each disposal field. The controller shall be capable of
storing the following daily operational records in memory for later
retrieval: total daily flow to each zone individually, total accumulated

daily flow into all zones combined, total number of daily ,filter flushing
cycles and all alarm conditions encountered. This information should
be stored for a period of no less than thirty days. The controller shall
also be capable of storing the following monthly operational records in
memory for later retrieval: total monthly flow to each zone individually,
total accumulated monthly flow into all zones , combined and total
number of monthly filter flushing cycles. This information should be
stored for a period of no less than thirty months.
The controller, on a predetermined basis as designed, will
automatically dose the individual dripper zones. The controller shall be
capable of dosing a single zone or two zones simultaneously. The
dosing volumes and the time between doses shall be as engineered
and shall be easily adjustable. The flow rate (gallons per minute) within
each zone shall be monitored continuously during a dosing cycle. Any
variance in flow rate above or below the preset design conditions shall
cause a visual alarm indication and signal the remote dialing device. If
the flow variance is determined to be outside a predetermined
acceptable range, the system shall automatically shut down until reset
by an operator.
The filtration unit must automatically back -flush on the following basis:
upon a preset accumulated flow through the filters and/or upon a
preset pressure difference across the filters. The controller shall back
flush only one filter at a time and all back flushing flow shall be
returned to the pretreatment system as indicated in the plans.
C. Equipment
1. Submersible Turbine Pumps: See specification Section 11210.
2. "System Controller: The system shall use a Siemens@ PLC for
operation of the complete system including: flow monitoring, all
electrically actuated valves, submersible turbine pumps, and
backwash cycles. The unit shall be equipped with a modem
allowing remote system communication, including but not limited to
simple polling and system operation reprogramming. All controls to
be enclosed in a NEMA 4X enclosure.
3. Filtration Package: The automatic filter assembly shall consist of
115-micron automatic disc filters rated at a minimum of 20 gpm.
Automatic back flush valves and controls shall be on a pre -
assembled header and frame. The filters shall be hydraulically
operated by pressure and electrically actuated via the system
controller. Automatic disk filters shall be manufactured by ARKALO

4. Flow Meter: The effluent flow meter shall be a velocity type,
magnetic drive, sealed housing, flanged tube meter for 150 psi
working pressure. It shall comply with the applicable provisions of
AWWA C708. The meter shall be of appropriate size with a sealed
indicator having a minimum range of 0 gpm to 1.25 times the flow
capacity of the filtration system. It shall also have a six digit
totalizer and shall be accurate within ± 2% of true flow within a
minimum range of 0 gpm to 1.25 times the capacity of the filtration
system. The meter shall have a GPM indicator hand and a sweep
test hand. The flow meter shall be a 3/4-Inch MASTER METER
flanged multi -jet meter.
5. Pump Master Control Valve: The pump master control valve shall
be a hydraulic valve with an integral diaphragm, electrically
actuated and operated by pressure to control the irrigation pumps
discharge. The valve body shall be cast iron (ASTM A125 CI.B).
The valve shall have threaded end connections ANSI (NPT) female
and have an inlet pressure range of 35 to 230 psi. The valve shall
also have a slow drip -tight closure to help prevent water hammer.
6. Drip Emitter Line: The drip emitter lines shall be pressure
compensating type "Bio-Line" polyethylene tubing with minimum
wall thickness of 45 mil as provided by Netafim, USA. The emitter
rate of 0.6 gallons per hour with a flow variance not to exceed +\-
5% at internal tubing pressures of 10 to 60 pounds per square inch.
Tubing diameter shall be 17 mm.
a. Individual drip lines shall be designed and installed level,
following the naturally occurring ground contour. Solvent
welded heavy duty flexible''/z-inch or 3%-inch PVC tubing shall be
used to connect common drip lines installed at varying depths or
locations (eg: in step downs or to connect looped drip line
segments). These connection lines shall be made to the drip
lines by specially manufactured pressure rated barbed
couplings, and connected to the manifolds with any reductions
made directly at the manifold.
b. The field shall consist of a minimum of two separately dosed
zones. Each zone shall be equipped with an individual control
valve.
c. Field appurtenances include an air release/vacuum valve at the
mid point of the supply manifold to each zone, air
release/vacuum valve and check valve at the high point of the
return flush manifold to each zone and a cleanout at the end of

the supply and return manifolds. Valves shall be provided with
protective vaults or boxes.
7. Air / Vacuum Relief Valves: Air/Vacuum relief valves shall be
installed at the high -points of irrigation header lines, where shown
on the drawings or as required. Valves shall be 2" diameter
combined air release valve which operates to release or admit air
from or into the lines. Valves shallbe high strength plastic with
operating parts of non corrosive materials and be suitable for
working pressure in the lines. The Valve shall be A.R.I.® Model.
Number 65ARI-2.
8. Check Valves: Check valves shall be constructed of heavy duty
cast brass with screw cap and swing type disk with integral seat.
Valves shall prevent backflow while offering.full flow performance
with a minimum of turbulence or pressure loss and must be rated
for 200 psi W.O.G. (working pressure non shock).
9. Polyvinyl Chloride Piping: All polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe shall
meet requirements of ASTM 2241, Class 200/SDR 21. All schedule
40 PVC fittings must meet ASTM D 2466.
10. Field Control Valves: All valves shall be properly sized to meet flow
and friction loss specifications. Valves shall be hydraulic with an
integral diaphragm, electrically actuated via 24 VAC and operated
by water pressure to control the flow to each field. The valves
operating pressure shall be 15-140 psi. The valve shall be a
DOROTO 61 BPLHP.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Effluent irrigation pumps shall be installed at the irrigation control
building where indicated on the drawings.
1. Pumps shall be skid mounted as provided by Waste Water
Systems Inc.
2. Pumps shall be installed such that no vibration occurs when in
operation.

B. Effluent pump controls shall be installed in accordance with applicable
codes and ordinances.
C. Filters shall be installed in the irrigation building where indicated on the
drawings.
1. Automatic filters shall be pre -assembled, skid mounted, fully
supported, with adequate piping supports, piping and electrical
connections as indicated on the drawings.
D. Irrigation header piping shall be installed where indicated on the
approved drawings.
1. Buried header piping shall be installed in accordance with drawings
and details.
2. Install air relief valves after testing is complete where indicated on
approved shop drawings, or as needed.
3. Install force main piping with a minimum of 12 inches of cover.
4. All PVC pressure pipe SDR 21 class 200, conforming to ASTM
D2241.
5. Trenches shall be excavated wide enough to allow proper
installation of pipe and fittings.
E. Drip irrigation tubing shall be installed where indicated on approved
drawings. Drip irrigation tubing shall be installed at grade "on contour"
and shall be stapled into position as necessary to prevent movement.
F. All electrical wiring from computer/controller to the field control valves
shall be U.L. listed suitable for direct burial.
3.02 QUALITY CONTROL AND FIELD TESTING
A. American Manufacturing Company Inc. of Elkwood, Virginia shall
provide supervisory services and technical support during the
installation of the drip disposal systems.
Services to be provided are as follows:
1. Supervise/inspect installation of pumping and filtration system.
2. Supervisory and technical support for installation of Computer
controller and starters.
3. Supervise/inspect installation of subsurface wastewater drip tubing.
4. Supervise installation and hook-up of automatic valves.
5. Start-up technical support and hands-on control of initial start-up.
6. Operator training.
7. Supervise/inspect cables or tubing to field control valves.

B. Field Testing:
1. Each pump shall be field tested by the manufacturer's
technical representative to demonstrate that the pump
performance meets the requirements of the drawings and
specifications. The manufacturer shall provide and install any
gauges, meters or other devices needed for the field tests.
3.03 SPARE PARTS
A. The Contractor shall furnish one (1) complete set of spare parts as
recommended by the manufacturer. At a minimum spare parts shall
include 100 ft of drip tubing, one (1) fieldcontrol valve and misc.
fittings. Spare parts shall be conveyed to the Owner.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 11302 RECLAIMED WATER SYSTEMS
PART1:GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. DESCRIPTION
This Section .describes materials
reclaimed /reuse water -systems.,
B. SUBMITTALS
and, appurtenances necessary in
Shop drawings or submittals shall be required for the following: .
1. All sizes and types of pipe on, the project.
2. Pipe fittings and appurtenances.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
All materials within the reclaimed/reuse water system shall meet all requirements
of specification Section 02660 with the exception of the modifications described
below:
A. All reclaimed/reuse water valves, storage facilities and outlets shall be
tagged or labeled to warn the public or employees that the water is not
intended for drinking. Where appropriate, such warning shall inform the
public or employees to avoid contact with the water.
B. All reclaimed/reuse water piping, valves, outlets and other appurtenances
shall be color -coded, taped, or otherwise marked to identify the source of
the water as being reclaimed/reuse water.
1. " All reclaimed/reuse water piping and appurtenances shall be either
colored purple (Pantone 522) and embossed or integrally stamped or
marked "CAUTION: RECLAIMED WATER — DO NOT DRINK" or be
installed with a purple (Pantone 522) identification tape or
polyethylene vinyl wrap. The warning shall be stamped on opposite
sides of the pipe and" repeated every 3 feet or less.
Rev. 3/1912007 PROJECT # 07712 11302 _ Page 1

2. Identification tape shall be at least 3 inches wide and have white or
black lettering on purple (Pantone 522). field stating "CAUTION:
RECLAIMED WATER — DO NOT DRINK". Identification tape shall
be installed on top of reclaimed water pipelines, fastened at least
every 10 feet to each pipe length and run continuously the entire
length of the pipe.
3. Existing underground distribution systems retrofitted for the purpose
of distributing reclaimed/reuse water shall be taped or otherwise
identified as described in items 1 and 2 above. This identification
need not extend the entire length of the distribution system but shall
be incorporated within 10 feet of crossing any potable water supply
line or sanitary sewer line.
C. All reclaimed/reuse water valves and outlets shall be of a type, or secured
in a manner, that permits operation by authorized personnel only.
D. Above ground hose bibs (spigots or other hand operated connections) shall
not be present. Hose bibs shall be located in locked, below grade vaults
which shall be clearly labeled as being of non -potable quality. As hose bib
services, hose bibs which can only be operated by a special tool may be
placed in non -lockable underground service boxes clearly labeled as non -
potable water.
E. Tank Trucks:
1. Tank trucks and other equipment used to distribute reclaimed/reuse
water shall be clearly identified with advisory signs.
.2. Tank trucks used to transport reclaimed/reuse water shall not be
used to transport potable water that is used for drinking or other
potable purposes.
3. Tank trucks used to transport reclaimed/reuse water shall not be
filled through on -board piping or removable hoses that may
subsequently be used to fill tanks with water from a potable water
supply.
F. Cross -Connection Control:
1. There shall be no direct cross -connections between the
reclaimed/reuse water and potable water systems.
2. Where both reclaimed/reuse water and potable water are supplied to
a reclaimed/reuse water use area, a reduced pressure principle
Rev. 3/1912007 PROJECT # 07712 11302 — Page 2

backflow prevention device or an approved air gap separation shall
be installed at the potable water service connection to the use area.
The installation of the reduced pressure principle backflow
prevention device shall allow proper testing.
3. Where potable water is used to supplement a reclaimed/reuse water
system, there shall be an air gap separation, approved and regularly
inspected by the potable water supplier, between the potable water
and reclaimed/reuse water systems.
ENb OF SECTION
Rev. 3/19/2007 PROJECT # 07712 11302 - Page 3

SECTION 11312 SUBMERSIBLE NON -CLOG SEWAGE PUMPS
WITH FLOW EQUALIZATION CONTROLS
PART1: GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A . The work covered by this section consists of furnishing and installing 2 non -
clog submersible sewage pumps, flow , equalization controls and
accessories.
B. The pump station shall include duplex submersible pumps with motors
installed on lift -out rail systems, access hatch, controls, piping, valves and
other necessary appurtenances as shown on the drawings and in
accordance with the specifications herein stated.
C. Unless otherwise noted, all materials and equipment supplied under this
Section shall be new, of good quality, and in good condition.
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A: Pump Design: Each pump shall be of the submersible non -clog type with 2-
vane enclosed impeller and submersible motor. Pump shall be designed
for automatic connection to the discharge connection elbow, guided by no
less than two guide bars extending from the top of the station to the
discharge elbow.
Pumping conditions shall be as follows:
30 GPM @ 12 TDH
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: The pumps and all appurtenances shall be supplied by
reputable manufacturers with at least ten (10) years of experience.
B. Factory Tests:
1. General: The pumps shall be tested at the factory under simulated
field conditions for excessive vibration, leaks, and operation of all
automatic systems. The controls shall be adjusted to start and stop
the pumps to satisfy field conditions. For each unit, a pump
performance curve shall be produced from the factory testing. Its
veracity shall be certified and the curves shall be identifiable by serial
numbers of pumps and motors. Manufacturer shall submit six (6)
copies of a certified curve for each pump to the Engineer prior
Rev. 3/19/07 PROJECT # 07712 11312 -Page 1

to the shipment of the pump. Engineer will judge adequacy of
performance and distribute copies of curves appropriately.
2. Pump Test: The pump manufacturer shall perform the following
inspections and tests on each pump before shipment from factory:
a. Impeller, motor rating and electrical connections shall first be
checked for compliance to the customer's purchase order.
b. A motor and cable insulation test for moisture content or
insulation defects shall be made.
C. Prior to submergence, the pump shall be run dry to establish
correct rotation and mechanical integrity.
d. The pump shall be run submerged in water to a minimum of
six (6) feet.
e. After operational test No. 4, the insulation test (No. 2) is to be
performed again.
A written statement indicating the foregoing steps have been
done with each pump shall be supplied to the Engineer prior to
shipment of the pump.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: The manufacturer, shall supply a minimum of five (5) sets
of standard Submittal Drawings and Parts List. Standard submittals will
consist of:
1.
Pump Outline Drawing
2.
Control Data
3.
Access Frame
4.
Typical Installation Guides
5.
Technical Manuals
6.
Parts List
B. Verification of Pumping Application: As part of the shop drawing submittal,
the manufacturer shall supply a letter certifying that the manufacturer has
reviewed the Contract drawings and specifications, including all
addendums, and that the equipment and related accessories included in
the shop drawing submittal are suitable for installation in the pumping
applications proposed for the project.
Rev. 3119/07 PROJECT # 07712 11312 - Page 2

C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: The manufacturer shall furnish three
(3) complete sets of operation and maintenance manuals for the pumps
supplied.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. The equipment and materials shall be delivered, stored and handled in
strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Pump Warranty: The pump manufacturer shall warrant the units being
supplied to the owner against defects in workmanship and material for a
period of five (5) years or 10,000 hours under the Municipal
Wastewater -Permanent Installation Warranty Policy or one (1) year under
the Industrial -Permanent Installation Warranty Policy under normal use,
operation and service. The warranty shall be in printed form and apply to all
similar units.
B. Appurtenances Warranty: All accessories and appurtenances shall be
warranted against defects in workmanship and materials for a period of one
(1) year.
1.07 PUMP PREQUALIFICATION SPECIFICATION
A. Manufacturers wishing to supply equipment for this project must submit a
prequalification submittal for approval to the Engineer. The prequalification
submittal must be received by the Engineer at least fourteen (14) days prior
to the bid opening date to receive consideration. The submittal shall
demonstrate that the proposed equipment meets the requirements of the
Contract Specifications and Drawings. The Engineer will issue an
addendum prior to the bid date listing the approved manufacturers. The
prequalification submittal shall include, as a minimum, the following
information:
1. Literature and cut sheets from manufacturers) describing equipment
2. Pump operating curves
3. Proposed motor sizes and speeds
4. Copy of warranties
5. List of at least five (5) references for similar installations, including
contact names and current telephone numbers
6. A written statement from the manufacturer indicating that the
manufacturer has reviewed the proposed application as detailed in
the Contract Drawings and Specifications, and that all equipment,
Rev. 3119/07 PROJECT # 07712 11312 - Page 3

materials and systems proposed to be supplied are appropriate and
compatible for this specific application.
B. Note: The submittal of prequalification information does not omit the
requirement for the Contractor and manufacturers to submit complete shop
drawing submittals to the Engineer in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
1.08 MANUFACTURER AND SUPPLIER INFORMATION
A. Manufacturer Nameplate: A manufacturer's nameplate shall be securely
and permanently mounted to each individual piece of equipment furnished
under this Section. The nameplate shall be constructed of a durable, non-
corrosive material. Critical information shall be clearly engraved or
otherwise permanently stamped on the nameplate, and shall be fully
legible. The information contained on the manufacturer nameplate shall
include at least the following:
1. Manufacturer's Serial Number
2. Name, address and telephone number of equipment manufacturer
3. Model and/or Part Number, including pump impeller sizes, when
applicable
4. Performance Criteria (i.e., capacity, design point, etc.)
5. Motor size, speed and voltage
6. Enclosure Type or Rating
7. Any other pertinent information
Note: All equipment shall include a nameplate with a manufacturer serial
number validating the equipment as new. Failure to meet these
requirements will be cause for rejection of the equipment.
B. Supplier and Service Information: A durable nameplate, stamp or sticker
shall be adhered to each individual piece of equipment containing the
name, address, and telephone number of the local business that supplied
the equipment, and the name, address and telephone number of the local
business that can provide service and replacement parts for the
equipment. A 24-hour emergency service telephone number should also
be included.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 EQUIPMENT
Rev. 3/19107 PROJECT # 07712 11312 - Page 4

A. Pumps: Pumps shall be installed in such a way that solids are fed in an
upflow direction to the impeller with no feet, rails or other obstructions below
inlet. All openings in pump impeller and volute case shall be large enough
to pass a 2" diameter sphere. Impeller shall be of the 2 vane non -clog
enclosed type to provide an unobstructed passage through the volute and
shall be cast iron and shall be driven by a stainless steel shaft key. Impeller
shall be locked with a screw and washer.
B. Motor Design:
1. Motor shall be sealed; submersible type rated at 0.4 horsepower
each and shall be for 115 volt, 60 Hz, single phase with 1.15 service
factor.
2. Stator winding shall be of the open type with insulation good for 1800
C (356' F). Winding shall operate in clean high dielectric oil that
lubricates bearings and seals and transfers heat from windings to
outer shell: Motor shall be heat shrunk into housing for proper
alignment and superior heat transfer.
3. Motor shall have two heavy duty ball bearings to support pump shaft
and take radial and thrust loads and a sleeve guide bushing directly
above the lower seal to take radial load and act as a flame path for
seal chamber. Ball bearings shall be designed for a minimum B10
life of 30,000 hours.
4. A heat sensor thermostat shall be imbedded in top of winding and be
connected in series with the motor starter coil in control box to stop
motor if temperature rises in motor to over 2200 F for any reason.
Thermostat to reset automatically when temperature drops to a safe
limit. Motors shall also be equipped with a moisture sensor which
signals an alarm if moisture is present between the two seals.
5. Pump motor cables shall be suitable for submersible pump
applications. Cable sizing shall conform to NEC requirements for the
full load currents of the motors.
C. Lift -Out Rail System:
1. Rail system shall consist of a seal fitting that mounts vertically into a
stationary discharge casting. A simple downward motion shall
connect pump and seal fitting to the stationary discharge casting.
Seal fitting shall seal with two "O" rings and a tapered rubber seal
ring into funnel of discharge case. Discharge casting shall be
furnished with flanged discharge pipe connections for a duplex
system. Valve casting and discharge casting shall be painted with a
Rev. 3/19107 PROJECT # 07712 11312 - Page 5

high quality, lead free, alkyd enamel finish. An upper guide plate
shall be attached to pump to support life -out fitting and guide pump
on rails. Lifting lugs shall be cast into the motor housing and a
stainless steel chain and clevice shall be furnished for lifting pump.
2. Two hold down brackets shall be provided to prevent pump and seal
fitting from rising on rails. Guide rails shall be 1-1/2" stainless steel
pipe.
3. Rail support and mounting bushing shall be mounted to basin wall
and shall not be attached to basin cover or cover frame.
4. Guide rail support shall be adjustable so that perfect vertical
alignment of the rails can be obtained. Pump hatch shall have
minimum dimensions shown on the drawings. Hatch cover shall be
of the water tight, diamond pattern, no -skid type and shall be
provided with lock hasp and hold open arm. Hatch shall be made of
aluminum. Aluminum hatch frame to be cast -in -place into concrete
top slab.
D. Controls:
1. Furnish and install one (1) duplex automatic pump control center, in
a NEMA 3R enclosure for 115 volt, 3 phase, 60 hertz power supply.
For each pump motor, there shall be included: a combination circuit
breaker/overload unit providing overload protection, short-circuit
protection, reset and disconnect for all phases; across -the -line
magnetic contactors; equalization pump timer, hand/off/automatic
pump operations selector switch; elapsed time meters; lightning
protection overload device to be precalibrated to match motor
characteristics, and factory sealed to insure trip setting is tamper
proof; four (4) float level sensors shall be provided for pump
operation(see description below; 120 volt single phase control panel
pilot circuitry. A 115 volt control circuit transformer with disconnect
circuit breaker and overload protection, for external pilot circuitry
shall be included with an automatic electric alternator for two pumps.
Terminal board for connection of line, pump and level sensors shall
be provided. Pump casing moisture and high temperature indicator
alarms and reset push buttons shall be provided. An audible and
visual high water alarm shall be provided. A 110-volt convenience
outlet shall be provided at the control center.
2. A separate battery backed telephone alarm dialer shall be provided..
The dialer shall have at least twelve -points with alarm inputs as
indicated on the drawings:
Rev. 3/19107 PROJECT # 07712 11312 - Page 6

3. Float Switch Functions
a. Low Level Alarm Float: The low level alarm float will act as a
redundant pump shut off and will activate an audio/visual
alarm signal when the float switch is in the extended position
(open circuit).
b. Lead Pump Enable: In the extended position this float switch
shall create an open circuit and prevent operation of the
pumps. When the circuit is closed the float switch shall allow
activation of the timer and the pumps shall alternate between
cycles, transferring wastewater to the downstream treatment
reactor(s).
C. Lag Pump On: Upon closure the Lag Pump On, switch shall
activate the lag pump and the two pumps shall draw down the
liquid in the equalization tank until the Lag Pump On is open.
Upon this occurrence, a counter shall be triggered to alert the
operator that a high level condition has occurred and that the
timer "on" setting may need adjusting.
d. High Level Float: The high level float switch shall activate the
audio/visual alarm when the circuit is closed.
E. Access Frame and Cover: Furnish and install one (1) water tight access
door with frame in aluminum material, complete with hinged and flush
locking mechanism, upper guide holder and level sensor(s) cable holder.
Frame shall be securely placed, mounted above the pump(s). Frame shall
be provided with sliding nut rails to attach the accessories required. Doors
shall be of skid proof design.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. All equipment and materials shall be installed in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
3.02 QUALITY CONTROL AND FIELD TESTING
A. Quality Control: The pump supplier shall furnish the services of a technical
representative for two (2) days to inspect the installation and provide start-
up and operator training.
B. Field Testing:
Rev. 3/19/07 PROJECT # 07712 11312 - Page 7

1. Each pump shall be field tested by the manufacturer's technical
representative to demonstrate that the pump performance meets the
requirements of the drawings and specifications. The manufacturer
shall provide and install any gauges, meters or other devices needed
for the field tests.
2. Pump start-up and testing shall be done in the presence of the
Engineer and shall demonstrate conformance to the conditions
shown on the contract drawings.
3.03 SPARE PARTS
A. The Contractor shall furnish one (1) complete set of spare parts as
detailed below for each pump supplied on this contract. Spare parts shall
be conveyed to the Owner.
Upper and Lower Mechanical Seal
Motor Cable
Cable Grommet
Inspection Plug Washer
Upper Bearing
Lower Bearing
Wear Ring
Cable Entry Washer
O-Ring Kit
Impeller Bolt
Impeller Key
END OF SECTION
Rev. 3119/07 PROJECT # 07712 .11312 - Page 8

SECTION 11398 ULTRAVIOLET LIGHT DISINFECTION SYSTEM
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install one (1) complete ultraviolet light
disinfectant system as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
B. Unless otherwise noted, all materials and equipment supplied under this
Section shall be new, of good quality, and in good condition.
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. The disinfection system shall employ ultraviolet light as a means of
disinfecting sewage effluent to a total coliform count of less than 14 per
100 ml at the treatment plant design peak flow of 40 gpm. The system
shall be of the open channel type consisting of a number of modular
components as herein specified.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The manufacturer
systems and shall
manufacturer shall
drawings.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
shall be experienced in the manufacture of similar
have at least five (5) successful installations. The
submit at least five (5) references with the shop
A. Shop Drawings: The Contractor shall submit six (6) copies of complete
shop drawings for the equipment and all accessories.
B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: The Contractor shall furnish at least
three (3) sets of operation and maintenance manuals for the equipment.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
0
All equipment shall be. delivered, stored and handled in strict accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations.
Rev. 3119/07 PROJECT # 07712 11398 - Page 1

1.06 WARRANTY
A. All equipment shall be warranted by the manufacturer to be free from
defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one (1) year after
start-up.
1.07 MANUFACTURER AND SUPPLIER INFORMATION
A. Manufacturer Nameplate: A manufacturer's nameplate shall be securely
and permanently mounted to each individual piece of equipment furnished
under this Section. The nameplate shall be constructed of a durable, non-
corrosive material. Critical information shall be clearly engraved or
otherwise permanently stamped on the nameplate, and shall be fully
legible. The information contained on the manufacturer nameplate shall
include at least the following:
1. Manufacturer's Serial Number
2. Name, address and telephone number of equipment manufacturer
3. Model and/or Part Number, including pump impeller sizes, when
applicable
4. Performance Criteria (i.e., capacity, design point, etc.)
5. Motor size, speed and voltage
6. Enclosure Type or Rating
7. Any other pertinent information
Note: All equipment shall include a nameplate with a manufacturer serial
number validating the equipment as new. Failure to meet these
requirements will be cause for rejection of the equipment.
B. Supplier and Service Information: A durable nameplate, stamp or sticker
shall be adhered to each individual piece of equipment containing the
name, address, and telephone number of the local business that supplied
the equipment, and the name, address and telephone number of the local
business that can provide service and replacement parts for the
equipment. A 24-hour emergency service telephone number should also
be included.
Rev. 3f19/07 PROJECT # 07712 11398 - Page 2

PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 EQUIPMENT
A. Ultraviolet Modules:
1. Each UV module shall have two (2) UV lamps each contained
inside a high quality quartz sleeve mounted in a stainless steel
frame. Modules shall be designed for indoor or outdoor use under
all weather conditions and capable of being completely submerged.
UV modules shall be installed in a stainless steel channel with
flanged plate inlet and outlet connections. Stainless steel channel
shall include an outlet weir to maintain submergence of the UV
lamps. The UV modules shall be capable of removal without
system shutdown.
2. All quartz sleeves shall be protected by a special compound which
eliminates any coating of the sleeves. The modules shall be
oriented parallel to the flow with no tools or special equipment
required for removal. The wiring for each UV module shall be
separate from the other modules with a conduit and cable duct to
the power control module in the control box.
B. Power Control Module:
1. Each power control module shall be mounted in a control box and
shall contain the ballasts, related electronics and monitoring
devices for a single UV module. A set of light emitting diodes
which are visible through the front panel of the control box shall be
provided which indicate the status of each UV lamp and the power
to the power control module.
2. Each power control module shall be completely self-contained and
capable of being completely removed from the control box by
disconnecting one power plug and the related UV module. Solid
state electronics shall be used throughout the power Control
module. All power control modules shall be mounted in a
completely weatherproof control box.
C. Control Box: The control box shall be of weatherproof construction
suitable for outdoor installation. The unit shall be sized by the system
manufacturer to contain all of the controls and wiring for the entire system. .
The control box shall contain ground fault detectors for each UV and
power control module plus one spare outlet and shall be supplied with an
integral cooling fan and air ventilator. A window shall be provided on the
front cover for easy status monitoring of the UV and power control
modules and shall be pedestal mounted suitable for anchorage to a
Rev. 3/19107 - PROJECT # 07712 11398 - Page 3

concrete surface. A main switch which powers the total system shall be
included as a part of the control box.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. The equipment shall be installed as shown on the drawings and in strict
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
3.02 QUALITY CONTROL AND FIELD TESTING
A. Quality Control: The manufacturer shall furnish the services of a qualified
technician to inspect the installation and provide start-up and operator
training services. At least three (3) days of services shall be furnished by
the manufacturer at no cost to the Owner.
B. Field Testing: The manufacturer's representative shall demonstrate to the
Owner and the Engineer that the system is operating as designed and
according to the performance requirements of the specifications. At least
three (3) consecutive days of successful tests shall be included in the field
test.
3.03 SPARE PARTS
A. The Contractor shall furnish one (1) complete set of recommended spare
parts and convey the spare parts to the Owner.
END OF SECTION
Rev. 3119107 PROJECT # 07712 11398 - Page 4

SECTION 11700 BIOCLERE TRICKLING FILTERS
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Contractor shall furnish and installa factory built, fixed film aerobic
process type sewage treatment facility(ies) with all needed
equipment for efficient operation. The units shall include a trickling
filter situated over final settling tank.
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. System shall consist of two (2) units each containing a trickling filter
situated over a final settling tank and two automatic backwash sand
filters. Each trickling filter unit shall contain three (3) pumps, two (2)
dosing, and one (1) sludge return, and a ventilation fan. The units
shall be complete with electrical control panels for operation of all
components.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. SHOP DRAWINGS
The manufacturer shall supply a minimum of five (5) sets of standard
Submittal Drawings and Parts List. Standard submittals will_ consist
of
1.
Detail Drawings
2.
Control Data
3.
Typical Installation Guides
4.
Technical Manuals
5.
Parts List
B. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
The manufacturer shall furnish three (3) complete sets of operation
and maintenance manuals for the equipment supplied.
1.03 WARRANTY
A. The pump manufacturer shall warrant the units being "supplied to the
owner against defects in workmanship and materials for a period of
Rev. 3/19/2007 PROJECT # 07712 11700 - Page 1

one (1) year from the date of installation under normal use, operation
and service. The warranty shall be in printed form and apply to all
similar units.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Trickling Filter Units
The treatment system shall consist of a Model 24/20 followed in series
by a Model 24%24 Bioclere units. The units shall be delivered complete
from supplier and shall include: random packed PVC manufactured
media, ventilation fan, dosing pumps, sludge return pump, internal
piping, wiring and controls. The trickling filter portion of the tank shall
have fiberglass inner and outer skins with the cavity between filled with
polyurethane foam insulation. The remainder of the plant shall be
constructed of fiber reinforced plastic (FRP) or {Mastic. All internal
piping shall be schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe. The treatment plant shall
withstand normal pressures from the interior hydrostatic load and from
the soil. The flange connection joining the Bioclere filter section to the
Bioclere sump section shall be factory sealed with FRP to provide a
permanent watertight seal. The internal shipping supports shall be
removed, made from, or encapsulated with non -biodegradable
material.
The Bioclere units shall be leak tested for zero percent 24-hour
leakage by filling the clarifier with clean water to the outlet invert.
B. Trickling Filter Media
The PVC randomly packed filter media shall have a void ratio of >95%.
It shall be UV resistant and resistant to a wide range of aqueous
solutions, acids, alkalis, oxidizing agents, oils, fats, and alcohols.
C. Final Settling Tank
A cone shaped settling tank shall have 60 degree sloped sides to
prevent the accumulation of biological and inorganic suspended solids
and shall contain the necessary internal baffling to prohibit short-
circuiting of the wastewater.
D. Electrical Components
Rev. 3/19/2007 PROJECT # 07712 11700 - Page 2

E.
F.
16
Each unit shall have a ventilation fan, two (2) alternating dosing
pumps, a sludge return pump, and a low level float switch with the
following characteristics.
The ventilation fan shall be a 115v/1ph/60hz, painted metal, ball
bearing fan with a factory rated airflow rate of 240 cubic feet per
minute. The two (2) alternating dosing pumps and recycle pump shall
be 115v/1ph/60hz stainless steel submersible pumps. All pumps shall
have an internal high temperature shut off switch. The alternating
dosing pumps shall be controlled such that when one pump fails the
remaining will complete both dosing cycles. The low level
115v/1ph/60hz float switch shall be installed to prevent the recycle
pump from operating when water levels are abnormally low in the
Bioclere (i.e. during primary tank pumping).
Floats and controls for the dose counter and high water level alarm
located in the siphon dosing tank shall be included in the Bioclere
electrical equipment.
Power Supply
Each unit shall have a dedicated 30 amp, 115v/1ph/60hz, power
supply.
Wiring
The electrical contractor shall complete the wiring between the
Bioclere control panel and the terminal strip within the Bioclere fan
module meeting all local, state, and federal codes. All fittings,
connections, etc. shall be weatherproof and water tight construction.
Ground terminals are provided in both'the main panel and the junction
box for each unit. Each ground terminal shall be wired to an earth
ground. The junction box for the Bioclere unit shall be located outside
of the fan module in a separate NEMA 4X enclosure. Care shall be
taken to match the wires between the control panel and the terminal
strip within the Bioclere fan module located on each unit.
Control Panel
A control panel shall be furnished with an audio and visual alarm for
pump failure and tripped circuit breaker conditions, an exterior alarm
silence button, and an on/off/test power/alarm toggle switch. Within the
NEMA 4X enclosure: pump timers, pump run timers for each pump
(elapsed time meters), relays, terminal strip, on/off/test switches, run
lights, dosing pump alternator, circuit breakers and current sensors
Rev. 3/19/2007 PROJECT # 07712 11700 - Page 3

shall be provided. Control panel shall accept a single feeder at 120
vac, 30 amperes. Control panel completed assembly shall be UL
labeled as an "Enclosed Industrial Control Panel". Control components
shall be NEMA rated. IEC rated components are hot acceptable.
H. Automatic Backwash Sand Filter
Two (2) automatic backwash sand filters with 0.5 hp feed pumps and 1
hp backwash pumps shall be provided. Each filter shall have a forward
feed rate of 15.7 gpm and a backwash rate of 48 gpm. Filter media
shall be a minimum of 300 Ibs of #20430 Silica Sand over 310 pounds
of 1/8" gravel. The footprint of each skid mounted unit shall be a
maximum of 38" x 48" including filter tank, feed and backwash pumps,
control panel, and air compressor.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. All equipment and materials shall be installed in strict accordance with
the manufacturer's recommendations.
3.02 QUALITY CONTROL AND FIELD TESTING
A. QUALITY CONTROL
A technical representative of the manufacturer shall be on site for
testing and commissioning of the trickling filter units upon
substantial completion of site work by the General Contractor.
The manufacturer shall install the randomly packed PVC media and
pumps into the trickling filter units therefore completing unit setup.
The manufacturer shall provide onsite operator training and.instruct
the Owner on the trickling filter unit operation.
B. TESTING
Each pump and ventilation fan shall be field tested by the
manufacturer's technical representative to demonstrate that the pump
or fan performance meets the requirements of the drawings and
specifications.
PART 4: NOT USED
END OF SECTION
Rev. 3/19/2007 PROJECT # 07712 11700 - Page 4

SECTION 15002 ELECTRIC MOTOR ACTUATOR
PART1: GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
The contractor shall furnish and install electric motor actuators as indicated in
the drawings and as specified herein. This specification covers open/close
service motor actuators.
The contractor shall furnish and install
1. Two (2) modulating actuator for two 4 inch ball valves.
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Electric motor operators shall comply with AWWA C504, latest revision. Where
new valves are furnished, the actuator supplier shall secure and install valves on
the actuators and shall accept total unit responsibility for the valve/actuator
combination. Valves shall be as specified in Section 02640. The valve actuators
shall be capable of fully opening and closing the valves under the maximum
load. The actuator shall be self locking under normal operating conditions in
order to hold the valve in an intermediate position. The actuator shall be
designed for indoor or outdoor service and shall be capable of mounting in any
position. The actuators shall include in one complete unit the motor, power
gearing, travel limit switches, torque limit switches, handwheel, terminals for
motor power and controls and separable worm gear operator. Actuators shall be
selected to open or close the valve in 60-120 seconds. Actuators shall utilize a
solid state starter capable of a minimum of 60 starts/hour for open close service
and 1200 starts/hour for modulating service. The actuators shall be
manufactured by Auma Actuators, Inc. or Rotork Controls, Inc.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
The electrical actuators shall be supplied by a local authorized manufacturer's
representative. Actuators shall be manufactured by a reputable company with at
least five (5) years experience in the manufacture of electric valve actuators
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. SHOP DRAWINGS
The Contractor, shall submit at least six (6) copies of complete shop
drawings to the Engineer for approval.
Rev. 3/22/07 PROJECT # 07712 15002 - Page 1

B. OPERATION AND MAINTENACE MANUALS
The Contractor shall submit at least three (3) sets of operation and
maintenance manuals to the Engineer.
C. TEST CERTIFICATE
Each actuator provided shall be tested and the test certificate shall be
supplied for record. The certificate shall include, as a minimum, no load
current, current at maximum torque setting, stall current, stall torque, test
voltage, motor flash test, and actuator output speed.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
All materials and equipment shall be delivered, stored and handled in strict
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
1.06 WARRANTY
Each actuator shall be warranted for a minimum of 24 months of operation or up
to a maximum of 36 months from shipment. This warranty shall be held in effect
regardless of precommissioning conditions in a typical indoor or outdoor
environment as long as the actuators are not left disassembled or are not
physically abused.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 EQUIPMENT
A. ENCLOSURE
The entire actuator enclosure shall be 'O' ring sealed, watertight according
to the Standard NEMA 6. It shall at the same time have an inner
watertight and dustproof 'O' ring seal between the terminal compartment
and the internal electrical elements of the actuator to fully protect the
motor and all other internal electrical elements of the actuator from
ingress of moisture and dust when the terminal cover is removed on site
for cabling. Enclosure must allow for temporary site storage without the
need for electrical supply connection. All external fasteners shall be
stainless steel. The terminal compartment and limit switch compartment
covers shall be fastened to the gear housing by stainless steel bolts which
are "captured" to prevent loss when covers are removed.
Rev. 3/22/07 PROJECT # 07712 15002 - Page 2

B. HOUSING
The gear housing and all load bearing enclosures shall be constructed of
cast iron. The non -load bearing enclosures and covers may be made of
aluminum, cast iron or steel. All housings shall be designed,
manufactured and inspected to guarantee against the ingress of moisture.
C. GEARING
1. All power gearing shall be constructed of hardened steel or bronze,
shall operate in a lubricant and shall be suitable for operation at
any angle. Lubricant shall be standard gear oil, or equal. There
shall be not limitations on mounting position of the actuator
resulting from the type of lubricant used. Gearing shall be designed
to withstand the stall torque of the motor without failing. The
finaldrive shall be of the self-locking worm and wheel type to
prevent creeping of the valve disc in an intermediate position.
2. The drive nut shall be separable from the gear assembly to
facilitate rapid mounting of the operator on the valve.
3. A lost motion device shall be provided to allow motor to reach full
speed before the load is engaged.
4. All limit switch gearing and feedback potentiometer reduction
gearing shall be made of steel or bronze and adequately lubricated.
All rotating shafts shall be supported by anti -friction bearings.
D. MOTOR
1. The drive motor shall be designed for actuator service and shall be
characterized by high starting torque, low stall torque and low
inertia, rated 120 VAC, single phase.
2. The motor shall be capable of starting against the rated load either
the open or closed direction when voltage to the motor terminals is
plus or minus 10% of the nameplate rating.
3. The motor shall be induction type with Class F - tropicalized
insulation. Modulating actuators shall have class H insulation.
Three thermal switches shall to be imbedded 120' apart in the
windings to insure safe motor shut -down during periods of high
current draw resulting in a high temperature condition.
Rev. 3/22/07 PROJECT # 07712 15002 - Page 3

4. The motor housing shall be totally enclosed and non -ventilated with
cooling fins to dissipate heat. Motor housing shall be constructed
of aluminum or cast iron.
5. The motor shall be capable of operating in any position. It shall be
properly sealed from the lubricant filled gearcase to allow the motor
to be mounted in any position relative to the gearcase. Removal of
the motor shall not result in loss of lubricant.
E. MOTOR PROTECTION
Protection shall be provided for the motor as follows
1. The motor shall be de -energized in the event of stall when
attempting to unseat a jammed valve.
2. A thermostat to protect against overheating which senses motor
temperature shall be provided.
3. Single phasing protection shall be provided.
F. HANDWHEEL
A handwheel with a positive declutch mechanism shall be permanently
attached for manual operation. The handwheel shall be stationary during
power operation. Motor operation shall always take priority over manual
operation. An inoperable motor or gearing will not prevent manual
operation. The handwheel selector lever must be padlockable.
G. TORQUE AND TURNS LIMITATIONS
1. Torque limit switches shall be provided to de -energize the motor
control circuit when the valve encounters an obstruction during
travel. Each actuator shall have an open direction torque switch
and a close direction torque switch.
2. Torque switches shall be adequately rated to carry the control
current. The contacts are to be completely sealed.
3. Should the valve become jammed in the closed position, the
actuator motor contactor must open after a maximum of 10
seconds.
H. TRAVEL LIMIT SWITCHES
1. Travel limit switches shall be provided to de -energize the motor
control circuit when the actuator reaches the limits of travel in the
open and close directions.
Rev. 3122/07 PROJECT # 07712 15002 - Page 4

2. Limit switches and -the limit switch drive shall be an integral part of
the actuator.
3. The limit switch drive shall be of the counter gear type and "in step"
with the actuator output drive at all times in either the electrical or
manual modes of operation.
4. A minimum of four (4) contacts, two (2) normally open and two (2)
normally closed shall be supplied at each end of valve travel. The
contacts shall be made of silver and adequately rated to carry the
control current. All contacts shall be completely sealed in a NEMA
4 enclosure to prohibit electrical shock while adjusting, eliminate
shorting out and ensure that contaminants do not foul the contacts.
5. Limit switches shall be fully adjustable when power is applied to the
actuator.
CONTROLS
The actuator electrical compartment shall include all devices
required for valve operation, including but not limited to, solid state
reversing contactor, six limit switches adjustable over the entire
range of valve motion, motor overload protection, control fusing,
electronic positioner module, valve position transmitter, and
terminal blocks for connection of all external wiring.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
All actuators shall be installed in strict accordance with the actuator and valve
manufacturers' recommendations.
3.02 QUALITY CONTROL AND FIELD TESTING
A. QUALITY CONTROL
The actuator manufacturer's representative shall furnish the services of a
manufacturer's •certified factory representative for at least two (2) days to
inspect the installations and provide start-up and operator training
services.
B. FIELD TESTING
Rev. 3/22/07 PROJECT # 07712 15002 - Page 5

The Contractor shall demonstrate to the Owner and the Engineer that the
actuators are operating as specified.
3.03 SPARE PARTS
The Contractor shall furnish and convey to the Owner one (1) actuator of each
size installed on this project.
END OF SECTION
Rev. 3/22107 PROJECT # 07712 15002 - Page 6

SECTION 15400 PLUMBING
PART 1: GENERAL.
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Under these specifications, the Contractor shall furnish a plumbing
system, complete, fully adjusted, and ready for use. Completeness shall
mean not only that all materials and equipment has been installed
properly, but that all material and equipment has been installed and has
been adjusted, and that, in the opinion of the Engineer, all material and
equipment is operating as intended.
B. Unless otherwise noted, all materials and equipment supplied under this
Section shall be new, of good quality, and in good condition.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. For "multiple prime" contracts, the plumbing contractor shall install proper
roughing for equipment furnished by other contractors as noted on the
plans, including waste, vent, water, gas, etc. All final connections when
equipment is set in place will be made by the contractor who provides the
equipment. Plumbing Contractor is to terminate piping at machines with a
gate valve above finished floor.
B. For a "single prime" contract, and for a "multiple prime' project that does
not include a separate plumbing contract, the General Contractor or his
plumbing subcontractor shall perform all work referenced in this section to
be performed by the plumbing contractor.
C. Electrical Connections:
1. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install all wiring except
equipment control wiring. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish
and install all power wiring complete from power source to motor or
equipment junction box, including power wiring through starters.
Electrical Contractor shall install all starters not factory mounted on
equipment.
2. The Plumbing Contractor shall, regardless of voltage, furnish and
install all equipment control wiring for the equipment that the
Plumbing Contractor furnishes. The Plumbing Contractor shall
provide and be responsible for the heater in all starters that the
Plumbing Contractor furnishes.
Rev. 3/19/07 PROJECT # 07712 15400 - Page 1

3. After all circuits are energized and completed, the Electrical
Contractor shall be responsible for all power wiring, and all control
wiring shall be the responsibility of the Plumbing Contractor.
4. Each trade shall determine the locations and size of all chases and
openings required for the proper installation of their work, and shall
see that such are provided. Where it is necessary to run pipes or
ducts through walls or footings, the trade performing the work shall
notify the General Contractor so that proper provisions can be
made for same. Each trade shall furnish and set all inserts,
sleeves, hangers, and supports required for their work and shall be
responsible for their proper and permanent locations. No
waterproofing shall be cut for any purpose, except on written
approval of the Engineer. No cutting of any part of the supporting
structure or finish of the building shall be done without the approval
of the. Engineer.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. North Carolina State Building Code, Volume 2, Plumbing, latest edition, is
hereby incorporated into and made a part of these specifications and their
provisions shall be carried out by the Contractor. Installation shall also
meet local plumbing inspection approval. All materials used shall be new
unless otherwise shown or called for, and shall be furnished in
accordance with the standard specification of the American Society of
Testing Materials, the American Society of Mechanical Engineers, and
other guide specifications.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor shall submit six (6) copies of complete shop drawings to
the Engineer for approval.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. All materials shall be delivered, stored and handled in a manner to protect
the materials from damage and deterioration and in strict accordance with
the manufacturer's instructions.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. All materials shall be warranted to be free from defects in workmanship
and materials for one (1) year after acceptance.
Rev. 3119107 PROJECT 9 07712 15400 - Page 2

1.07 MANUFACTURER AND SUPPLIER INFORMATION
A. Manufacturer Nameplate: A manufacturer's nameplate shall be securely
and permanently mounted to each individual piece of equipment furnished
under this Section. The nameplate shall be constructed of a durable, non-
corrosive material. Critical information shall be clearly engraved or
otherwise permanently stamped on the nameplate, and shall be fully
legible. The information contained on the manufacturer nameplate shall
include at least the following:
1. Manufacturer's Serial Number
2. Name, address and telephone number of equipment manufacturer
3. Model and/or Part Number, including pump impeller sizes, when
applicable
4. Performance Criteria (i.e., capacity, design point, etc.)
5. Motor size, speed and voltage
6. Enclosure Type or Rating
7. Any other pertinent information
Note: All equipment shall include a nameplate with a manufacturer serial
number validating the equipment as new. Failure to meet these
requirements will be cause for rejection of the equipment.
B. Supplier and Service Information: A durable nameplate, stamp or sticker
shall be adhered to each individual piece of equipment containing the
name, address, and telephone number of the local business that supplied
the equipment, and the name, address and telephone number of the local
business that can provide service and replacement parts for the
equipment. A 24-hour emergency service telephone number should also
be included.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. All back bent piping 2" or less, shall be standard weight galvanized steel
with malleable iron screw type fittings.
B. All soil and waste lines, mains, stacks, branches inside of building, and all
vents 2-1/2" and larger shall be standard weight, tarred cast iron, hub and
spigot pipe with equivalent fittings or PVC waste piping.
Rev. 3119/07 PROJECT # 07712 15400 - Page 3

C. From a point 3'-0" outside the building all pipe for exterior sanitary sewers
shall be service weight, tarred cast iron, hub and spigot pipe with
equivalent fittings.
D. All hot water piping, hot water return, and cold water piping shall be Type
L hard copper tubing with wrought copper sweated fittings. Copper pipe
shall conform to ASTM Specifications B-88 and fittings shall conform to
ASA Specifications B-16-22.
E. All cold water piping underground shall be type "K" seamless soft type
copper tubing.
2.02 EQUIPMENT
A. General:
1. All fixtures specified hereinafter, or shown on Drawings, unless
noted otherwise, are the products of Kohler Plumbing Company,
which is used as a guide. Fixtures by other manufacturers may be
acceptable, provided they are of the same type, quality, and
operations. Any fixtures substituted shall be subject to the written
approval of the Engineer.
2. All fixtures shall be of the best of their respective makes and shall
be properly handled, carefully uncrated, erected and set in place.
On completion, all fixtures shall be properly cleaned and adjusted
and left in readiness for use. The Contractor shall assume all
responsibility for the proper protection of all fixtures to insure that
they shall be in good condition for acceptance.
3. Exposed metal parts of all fittings, unless otherwise note, shall be
polished chromium finish or nickel -plated brass. All service sinks
shall be cast iron enameled fixtures in acid -resisting enamel. All
fixtures shall have individual keytype cut-off stops on cold and/or
hot water lines. Where they are not specified as a part of the
fittings, they shall be installed in supply lines as close to fixture as
possible.
4. Fittings, unless specified otherwise, shall be the products of the
manufacturer whose fixtures are used. All fittings shall be plainly
marked with the manufacturer's name or trademark for purposes of
easy identification. No slip joints will be permitted on the sewer
side of any fixture trap. Flush valves shall be complete with an
integral shut-off and factory supplied approved vacuum breaker.
Rev. 3119/07 PROJECT # 07712 15400 - Page 4

B. Electric Water Heater:
1. Provide an automatic water heater with.a glass lined steel tank
having extra thick fiberglass insulation and encased in a steel
enclosing jacket. Tank shall be hydrostatically tested at 300
pounds per square inch. Each electric heating element shall be
provided with a thermostat to control water temperatures. The hot
water heater shall be electric with automatic controls and approved
by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. The storage capacity and
recovery capacity shall be as shown on the drawings.
2. Tank shall be heavy gauge steel with inner lining of improved glass
or copper. Tank shall have insulation completely around tank, top
and bottom. There shall be a hose thread drain valve at bottom of
tank and any pipe nipples used in water connections shall have
interior surface to match interior surface or tank. Dielectric unions
shall be used to connect glass -coated galvanized pipe nipples to
copper water pipe. The water heater shall have a jacket of cold
rolled steel with white baked -on enamel finish. Jacket shall have
provisions for access to all controls and heating elements. The
heater shall be equipped with an ASME relief valve, approved for
pressure and load, piped to drain if available, or to 4" above the
floor. Controls shall allow adjustment of temperature up to 1600
degrees. The electric heating element shall be copper sheeted
immersion type element and shall be installed with thermostat hot
water tap, and cold water inlet baffle.
3. The electric hot water heater shall be set dead level in both
directions, and shall have piping connections as shown on the
drawings. The electric hot water heater shall be protected during
construction and all solder or solder flux removed from the top. It
shall be cleaned and all construction dirt removed at the completion
of the project.
C. Dielectric Unions: Provide dielectric unions on the inlet and outlet
connection to water heaters storage tanks, and at all places where
dissimilar metals join in piping and plumbing systems.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. The piping shown on the drawings shall be installed, complete, and shall
be of the size shown on the drawings. When a pipe size is not indicated,
the plumbing contractor shall request the pipe size from the Engineer
through the General Contractor. All piping shall be installed parallel or
Rev. 3/19/07 PROJECT # 07712 15400 - Page 5

perpendicular to the building construction. All piping shall be installed so
as to allow for expansion.
B. Contractor shall provide metal sleeves for pipes which will pass through
floors, ceiling, masonry, or partition walls. Sleeves shall be the full length
of wall thickness, and shall be installed during the building construction so
as to prevent any unnecessary cutting of brick or concrete after it is in
place. Sleeve shall be of sufficient size to accommodate insulation where
applicable. After piping is installed, caulk around piping to seal off sleeves
to the exterior, using oakum and a bituminous mastic at least 1" in depth.
C. Pipe Sleeves shall be used in all masonry work and in all poured concrete
floor and wall construction. Sleeves shall be of a size large enough to
accommodate all piping insulation. Pipe sleeves shall be
factory -fabricated with not less than 26-gauge metal with tight fitting round
cropped tops; or if shop fabricated shall not be less than 22-gauge metal.
Pipe sleeves through the floor shall extend 1" above floor level. Sleeves
in walls shall flush with both sides of the wall.
D. In general, all pipe in finished spaces shall be run concealed in floors,
walls, partitions, and above ceilings. Where possible concealment of
piping and covering of same shall not be done until authorized by the
Engineer, after proper tests have been made. This applies to all interior
work and exterior work.
E. Cast iron pipe joints in hub and spigot cast iron pipe, or between cast iron
pipe and threaded pipe or caulking ferrules, shall be firmly packed with a
layer of oakum and caulked with lead at least 1" deep, made with one
continuous pouring. Threaded joints in all pipe shall have American
National Taper Screw threads with graphite and oil compound applied to
the male thread only. Joints in copper tubing to be rearmed, cleaned,
fluxed, and soldered within 95% tin and 5% antimony solder.
F. All piping, whether exposed or concealed, shall be substantially supported
and made secure, and shall have provision of expansion. Hangers in
horizontal runs of pipe shall be installed at all points where piping changes
direction and 5'-0" apart for cast iron, waste and soil pipe, and T-0" apart
for all other piping.
G. In all finished spaces, rods shall be fitted with approved type chrome
plated cast brass plates with setscrews.
H. Gate, Globe and Check valves shall be installed where indicated or on all
hot and cold water lines and shall be first quality products. Check valves
shall be all bronze swing check type designed for 125 psi working
pressure.
Rev. 3/19107 PROJECT # 07712 15400 - Page 6

I. Hose bibbs or capped nipples shall be provided at all low points in the
water system to allow for complete drainage of the system. Install metal
cleanouts in iron pipe where indicated on plumbing diagram and at all
risers and changers in direction of piping. Cleanouts shall be so installed
as to provide satisfactory rodding of the entire sewage and waste system.
J. Vacuum breakers shall be provided on each hose outlet. This includes
hose bibbs, service sinks, wall hydrants, etc. Air chambers shall be
provided on the water supply to each plumbing fixture. Air chambers shall
be one pipe size larger than the line in which they occur and shall extend
vertically 18" up and cap. Vent pipes shall extend approximately 9" above
roof. Flashing shall be of 4 pound sheet lead with flange extending 8" in
all directions from the pipe under the roofing material and carried up and
turned down into the pipe to form a watertight joint.
3.02 TESTING
A. Complete connections for all fixtures, traps, wastes, vents, hot and cold
water and other plumbing items shall be provided regardless as to each
item being specifically referred to or specified, and all left in first class
sanitary conditions, ready for use.
B. All soil, waste, vent and water piping shall be tested by the Contractor in
the presence of the Engineer or his representative, and shall be approved
by the Engineer before acceptance. All piping located underground or
concealed in building construction shall be tested before backfilling or
concealing pipe. all tests required for equipment shall be furnished by the
Contractor without additional cost to the Owner.
C. The entire drainage and venting system shall have all necessary openings
plugged to permit the entire system to be filled with water to the level of
the highest vent stack above the roof or a minimum of 10'-0". Where a
portion of the system is to be tested, the test shall be conducted in the
same _manner as described for the entire system, except that a vertical
stack 10'-0" above the highest horizontal line to be tested shall be
installed and filled with water to maintain sufficient pressure. Under any
test, the pressure shall remain constant for not less than 30 minutes
without any further addition of water or air. Contractor shall notify the
Engineer 48 hours in advance when test is to be performed.
D. Upon completion of roughing -in and before setting fixtures, the entire hot
and cold water system shall be tested at a hydrostatic pressure of not less
than 100 pounds per square inch gauge, and proven tight at this pressure.
Where a portion of the water system is to be concealed before
Rev. 3119107 PROJECT # 07712 15400 - Page 7

completion, this portion shall be tested separately in the same manner as
described for the entire system.
E. Where any leaks are discovered at joints, a new joint will be made. No
caulking of any faulty joints will be permitted. Tests for the entire system
will be repeated after new joints are made.
END OF SECTION
C
1.
Rev. 3/19/07 PROJECT # 07712 15400 - Page 8

SECTION 16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to
this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Supporting devices for electrical components.
2. Electricity metering equipment.
3. Cutting and patching for electrical construction.
4. Touchup painting.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.04 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, sleeves, and openings with general
construction work and arrange in building structure during progress of
construction to facilitate the electrical installations that follow.
1. Set inserts and sleeves in poured -in -place concrete, masonry work,
and other structural components as they are constructed.
B. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and
equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installing large
equipment requiring positioning before closing in the building.
C. Coordinate electrical service connections to components furnished by
utility companies.
Rev. 3/22/07 PROJECT # 07712 16050 - Page 1

1. Coordinate installation and connection of exterior underground
utilities and services, including provision for electricity -metering
components and pad -mounted transformer foundations.
2. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and of
utility company providing electrical power and other services.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 SUPPORTING DEVICES
A. Material: Hot -dip galvanized steel.
B. Slotted -Steel Channel Supports: Flange edges turned toward web, and
9/16-inch- diameter slotted holes at a maximum of 2 inches o.c., in webs.
1. Channel Thickness: Selected to suit structural loading.
2. Fittings and Accessories: Products of the same manufacturer as
channelsupports.
C. Raceway and Cable Supports: Manufactured clevis hangers, riser
clamps, straps, threaded C-clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers,
wall brackets, and spring -steel clamps or click -type hangers.
D. Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized
steel, plain ends.
E. Expansion Anchors: Carbon -steel wedge or sleeve type.
F. Toggle Bolts: All -steel springhead type.
2.02 TOUCHUP PAINT
A. For Equipment: Equipment manufacturer's paint selected to match
installed equipment finish.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc -rich paint recommended by item manufacturer.
Rev. 3/22/07 PROJECT # 07712 16050 - Page 2

PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are
not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide
the maximum possible headroom.
B. Materials and Components: Install level, plumb, and parallel and
perpendicular to other building systems and components, unless
otherwise indicated.
C. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or
replacement of components. Connect for ease of disconnecting, with
minimum interference with other installations.
D. Right of WaV: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required
slope.
3.02 ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICE APPLICATION
A. Hot -dip galvanized materials or nonmetallic, U-channel system
components.
B. Selection of Supports: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Strength of Supports: Adequate to carry present and future loads, times a
safety factor of at least four; minimum of 200-lb design load.
3.03 SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Install support devices to securely and permanently fasten and support
electrical components.
B. Install individual and multiple raceway hangers and riser clamps to support
raceways. Provide U-bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware
necessary for hanger assemblies and for securing hanger rods and
conduits.
C. Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze- or
bracket -type hangers.
D. Size supports for multiple raceway installations so capacity can be
increased by a 25 percent minimum in the future.
Rev. 3/22107 PROJECT # 07712 16050 - Page 3

E. Support individual horizontal raceways with separate, malleable -iron pipe
hangers or clamps.
F. Install 1/4-inch- diameter or larger threaded steel hanger rods, unless
otherwise indicated.
G. Arrange supports for conduits installed on the interior of exterior walls to
provide a minimum clearance from the wall surface of/4°.
H. Separately support cast boxes that are threaded to raceways and used for
fixture support.
Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnect
switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, and other devices
unless components are mounted directly to structural elements of
adequate strength.
J. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of concrete slabs and
walls unless core -drilled holes are used. Install sleeves during erection of
concrete and masonry walls.
K. Securely fasten electrical items and their supports to the building structure,
unless otherwise indicated. Perform fastening according to the following
unless other fastening methods are indicated:
1. Masonry: Toggle bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion
bolts on solid masonry units.
2. New Concrete: Concrete inserts with machine screws and bolts.
3. Existing Concrete: Expansion bolts.
4. Steel: Welded threaded studs or spring -tension clamps on steel.
a. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.
5. Welding to steel structure may be used only for threaded studs, not
for conduits, pipe straps, or other items.
6. Fasteners: Select so the load applied to each fastener does not
exceed 25 percent of its proof -test load.
3.04 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, ceilings, and other surfaces
required to permit electrical installations. Perform cutting by skilled
mechanics of trades involved.
B. Repair and refinish disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match
adjacent undisturbed surfaces. Install new fireproofing where existing
Rev. 3/22107 - PROJECT # 07712 16050 - Page 4

firestopping has been disturbed. Repair and refinish materials and other
surfaces by skilled mechanics of trades involved.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect installed components for damage and faulty work, including the
following:
1. Supporting devices for electrical components.
2. Cutting and patching for electrical construction.
3. Touchup painting.
3.06 REFINISHING AND TOUCHUP PAINTING
A. Refinish and touch up paint. Paint materials and application requirements
are specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."
3.07 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. On completion of installation inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt,
paint spots, and construction debris.
B. Protect equipment and installations and maintain conditions to ensure that
coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at
time of Substantial Completion.
END -OF SECTION
Rev. 3/22107 - PROJECT # 07712 16050 - Page 5

SECTION 16051 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Electrical equipment coordination and installation.
2. Common electrical installation requirements.
1.03 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment:
1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights
that reduce headroom are indicated.
2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum
interference to other installations.
3. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope.
4. So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will
be clear of obstructions and of the working and access space of other
equipment.
PART 2: PRODUCTS (not used)
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1.
Rev. 3/22/07 PROJECT # 07712 16051 - Page 1

B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and
to center of unit for wall -mounting items.
C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not
indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum
possible headroom consistent with these requirements.
D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement
of components of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations.
Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum
interference with other items in the vicinity.
E. Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope.
END OF SECTION
Rev. 3/22/07 PROJECT # 07712 16051 - Page 2

SECTION 16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING
PART1:GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes methods and materials for grounding systems and
equipment.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Other Informational Submittals: Plans showing dimensioned as -built locations
of grounding features specified in Part 3 "Field Quality Control' Article, including
the following:
1. Ground rods.
C. Field quality -control test reports.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components. Devices and Accessories: Listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 CONDUCTORS
A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless
otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.
Rev. 3/22107 PROJECT # 07712 16060 - Page 1

B. Bare Copper Conductors:
1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.
2. - Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.
3. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.
4. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with
copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick.
2.02 CONNECTORS
A. Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific
types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.
B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted
pressure -type, with at least two bolts.
1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.
C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic -welding kits of types recommended by kit
manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions.
2.03 GROUNDING ELECTRODES
A. Ground Rods: steel; 3/4 inch by10 feet (19 mm by 3 m) in diameter.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 APPLICATIONS
A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded
conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare copper conductor, No.
2/0 AWG minimum.
1. Bury at least 24 inches (600 mm) below grade. .
C. Conductor Terminations and Connections:
1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted
connectors.
2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors.
Rev. 3/22107 PROJECT # 07712 16060 - Page 2

3.02 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch
circuits.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible,
unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or
placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.
B. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches (50 mm) below finished floor or
final grade, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade
and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or
damaging coating, if any.
2. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least
one -rod length from each other and located at least the same distance
from other grounding electrodes, and connect to the service grounding
electrode conductor.
C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and
maintenance, except where routed through short lengths of conduit.
1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care
not to penetrate any adjacent parts.
2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and
Supports: Install so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted
equipment.
3. Use exothermic -welded connectors for outdoor locations, but if a
disconnect -type connection is required, use a bolted clamp.
D. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:
1. Metal Piping: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit,
from building's main service equipment to main metal water piping
entrance to pump building. Connect grounding conductors to pipes, using
a bolted clamp connector or by bolting a lug -type connector to a pipe
flange, using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main
water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of
fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at
each end.
Rev. 3/22/07 PROJECT # 07712 16060 - Page 3

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits
have been energized, test for compliance with requirements.
2. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum
ground -resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure
grounding terminal, at ground test wells, and at individual ground rods.
Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected.
a. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after last trace
of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other
than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or
other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance.
b. Perform tests by fall -of -potential method according to IEEE 81.
3. Prepare dimensioned drawings locating each test well, ground rod and
ground rod assembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by
letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and
observations. Include the number of rods driven and their depth at each
location, and include observations of weather and other phenomena that
may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results.
B. Report measured around resistances that exceed the following values:
1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity 500 kVA and
Less: 10 ohms.
C. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified
values, notify Engineer promptly and include recommendations to reduce
ground resistance.
END OF SECTION
Rev. 3/22107 PROJECT # 07712 16060 - Page 4

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16073 SYSTEMS
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.
2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
B. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.
1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of
supported equipment and connected systems and components.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Steel slotted support systems.
1.06 . QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with NFPA 70.
Rev. 3/22/07 PROJECT # 07712 16073 - Page 1

1.07 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor -bolt inserts into
bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in
Division 3.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory -fabricated
components for field assembly.
1. Metallic Coatings: Hot -dip galvanized after fabrication and applied
according to MFMA-4.
2. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.
B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.
C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated
fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.
D. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M,
steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
E. Mounting Anchoring and Attachment Components: Items for fastening
electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following:
1. Mechanical -Expansion Anchors: Insert -wedge -type, zinc -coated stainless
steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear,
and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building
materials in which used.
2. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable -iron, slotted support system units
similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.
3. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type
suitable for attached structural element.
4. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with
ASTM A 325.
5. Toggle Bolts: All -steel springhead type.
6. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.
Rev. 3/22/07 PROJECT # 07712 16073 - Page 2

PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 APPLICATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for
electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are
stricter.
B. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze -type supports fabricated with
steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25
percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits.
1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two -bolt conduit
clamps.
3.02 SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as
specified in this Article.
B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, IMC,
and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as
permitted in NFPA 70..
C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of
components so strength will be adequate to carry` present and future static
loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for
strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 Ib'(90
kg).
D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface -Mounted Equipment and Components:
Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural
elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:
1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.
2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.
3. To Masonry: Approved toggle -type bolts on hollow masonry units and
expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units.
4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.
5. To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with
lock washers and nuts Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27)
complying with MSS SP-69.
6. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.
Rev. 3/22.107 PROJECT # 07712 16073 - Page 3

7. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces:
Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures,
pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted -
channel racks attached to substrate.
E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that
avoid reinforcing bars.
3.03 CONCRETE BASES
A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches
(100 mm) larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a
minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base.
B. Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive -strength concrete. Concrete
materials, reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in
Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete."
C. Anchor equipment to concrete base.
1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment
manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and
directions furnished with items to be embedded.
2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to
supported equipment.
3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor -bolt manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.04 PAINTING
A. Touchup: Clean field welds -and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed
areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as
used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up
field -painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0
mils (0.05 mm).
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and
apply galvanizing -repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION
Rev. 3/22/07 PROJECT # 07712 16073 - Page 4

-)ECTION 16120 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less.
2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Field quality -control test reports.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed' and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70.
B. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THHN-THWN.
Rev. 3/22107 PROJECT # 07712 16120 - Page 1

2.02 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
A. Description: Factory -fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating,
material, type, and class for application and service indicated.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 CONDUCTOR INSULATION APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS
A. Service Entrance: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
B. Feeders: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
C. Branch Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
D. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.
E. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Use manufacturer -approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary;
compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed
manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure
values.
B. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket -weave
wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.
C. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed
structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.
D. Support cables according to Division 16 Section "Hangers And Supports For
Electrical Systems."
E. Identify and color -code conductors and cables to match existing color coding or
as required by Code.
3.03 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's
published torque -tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not
indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
Rev. 3122107 PROJECT # 07712 16120 - Page 2

B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that
possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than
unspliced conductors.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. After installing -conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has
been energized, test conductors for compliance with requirements.
2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated
in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test
parameters.
C. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:
1. Test procedures used.
2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action
taken to achieve compliance with requirements.
D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
END OF SECTION
Rev. 3/22107 PROJECT # 07712 16120 - Page 3

SECTION 16130 ' RACEWAYS AND BOXES
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for
electrical wiring.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
B. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
C. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components. Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING
1.
A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.
B. IMC: ANSI C80.6.
C. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.
Rev. 3122/07 PROJECT # 07712 16130 - Page 1

D. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Tvpes and Liquidtight): NEMA FB 1; listed for
type and size raceway with which used, and for application and environment in
which installed.
E. Joint Compound for Rigid Steel Conduit or IMC: Listed for use in cable
connector assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect
threaded raceway joints from corrosion and enhance their conductivity.
2.02 METAL WIREWAYS
A. Description: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 250, Type 3R,
unless otherwise indicated.
B. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints,
adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with
wireways as required for complete system.
C.
D.
2.03
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F
Wirewav Covers: Screw -cover type.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.
BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
Cast -Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with
gasketed cover.
Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
Cast -Metal Access. Pull, and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, galvanized, cast
iron with gasketed cover.
Hinged -Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous -hinge cover
with flush latch, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's
standard enamel.
Cabinets:
1. NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized -steel box with removable interior panel
and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard
enamel.
2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.
3. Key latch to match panelboards.
Rev. 3/22/07 PROJECT # 07712 16130 - Page 2

4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.
2.04 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING
A. Description: Comply with SCTE 77
1. Color of Frame and Cover: Gray.
2. Configuration: Units shall be designed for flush burial and have open
bottom, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper -resistant locking devices and
having structural load rating consistent with enclosure.
4. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of
0.50.
5. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC."
6. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit -terminating fittings shall mate with
entering ducts for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall.
7. Handholes 12 inches wide by 24 inches long (300 mm wide by 600 mm
long) and larger shall have inserts for cable racks and pulling -in irons
installed before concrete is poured.
B. Polymer -Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer -Concrete Cover:
Molded of sand and aggregate, bound together with polymer resin, and
reinforced with steel or fiberglass or a combination of the two.
2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL FOR UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURES
A. Handhole and Pull -Box Prototype Test: Test prototypes of handholes and
boxes for compliance with SCTE 77. Strength tests shall be for specified tier
ratings of products supplied.
1. Tests of materials shall be performed by a independent testing agency.
2. Strength tests of complete boxes and covers shall be by either an
independent testing agency or manufacturer. A qualified registered
professional engineer shall certify tests by manufacturer.
3. Testing machine pressure gages shall have current calibration certification
complying with ISO 9000 and ISO 10012, and traceable to NIST
standards.
Rev. 3122/07 PROJECT # 07712 16130 - Page 3

PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 RACEWAY APPLICATION
A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise
indicated:
1. Exposed Conduit: Rigid steel conduit or IMC.
2. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC- 40-PVC, direct buried.
3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic,
Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor -Driven Equipment): LFMC.
4. Boxes and Enclosures. Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
5. Application of Handholes and Boxes for Underground Wiring:
a. Handholes and Pull Boxes in Driveway, Parking Lot, and Off -
Roadway Locations, Subject to Occasional, Nondeliberate Loading
by Heavy Vehicles: Polymer concrete, SCTE 77, Tier 15 structural
load rating.
B. Comply with the following indoor applications unless otherwise indicated:
1. Exposed: Rigid steel conduit or IMC.
2. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic
Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid or Motor -Driven Equipment): LFMC.
3. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250,
Type 4, stainless steel in damp or wet locations.
C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch (21-mm) trade size.
D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.
1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit
fittings, unless otherwise indicated.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products
specified in Part 2 except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are
stricter.
B. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
C. Support raceways as specified in Division 16 Section "Hangers And Supports
For Electrical Systems."
Rev. 3122107 PROJECT # 07712 16130 - Page 4

D. Arrange stub -ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished
slab.
E. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run
F. Threaded Conduit Joints Exposed to Wet Damp Corrosive or Outdoor
Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before
making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.
G. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use
insulating bushings to protect conductors, including conductors smaller,than
No. 4 AWG.
H. Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches (1830 mm) of
flexible conduit for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or
movement; and for transformers and motors.
1. Use LFMC.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT
A. Direct -Buried Conduit:
1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit.
Prepare trench bottom as specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for
pipe less than 6 inches (150 mm) in nominal diameter.
2. Install backfill as specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work
toward end of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with
expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process.
Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting
strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches (300 mm) of
finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete
backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Division 2 Section
"Earthwork."
4. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub -ups at poles and
equipment and at building entrances.
a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this
purpose.
b. For stub -ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases,
extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches (1500 mm)
from edge of equipment pad or foundation. Install insulated
grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.
Rev. 3122/07 PROJECT # 07712 16130 - Page 5

3.04 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES
A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth
coordinated with connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections
required for proper entrances.
B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or
gravel, graded from 1/2-inch (12.5-mm) sieve to No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve and
compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.
C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished
grade. Set covers of other enclosures 1 inch (25 mm) above finished grade.
D. Install handholes and boxes with bottom below the frost line.
E. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable
arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and
conductors and as indicated. Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide
spare space for future cables, but short enough to preserve adequate working
clearances in the enclosure.
F. Field -cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written
instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut.
Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after
fittings are installed.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes,
and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial
Completion.
1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc -rich paint recommended
by manufacturer.
2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating
recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
Rev. 3122/07 PROJECT # 07712 16130 - Page 6

SECTION 16231 PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes packaged gas -engine generator sets with the following
features and accessories:
1. Battery charger.
2. Engine -generator set.
3. Muffler.
4. Outdoor enclosure.
5. Starting battery.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 16 Section 'Transfer Switches" for transfer switches including
sensors and relays to initiate automatic -starting and -stopping signals for
engine -generator sets.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Operational Bandwidth: The total variation from the lowest to highest value of a
parameter over the range of conditions indicated, expressed as a percentage of
the nominal value of the parameter.
B. Steady -State Voltage Modulation: The uniform cyclical variation of voltage
within the operational bandwidth, expressed in Hertz or cycles per second.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include the following:
1. Data on features, components, accessories ratings, and performance.
Rev. 3/22107 PROJECT # 07712 16231 - Page 1

2. Thermal damage curve for generator.
3. Time -current characteristic curves for generator protective device.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions,
weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components,
and location and size of each field connection.
1. Dimensioned outline plan and elevation drawings of engine -generator set
and other components specified.
2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Qualification Data: For Installer.
D. Certified summary of prototype -unit test report.
E. Certified Test Reports: For components and accessories that are equivalent,
but not identical, to those tested on prototype unit.
F. Certified Summary of Performance Tests: Demonstrate compliance with
specified requirement to meet performance criteria for sensitive loads.
G. Test Reports:
1. Report of factory test on units to be shipped for this Project, showing
evidence of compliance with specified requirements.
2. Report of sound generation.
3. Field quality -control test reports.
H. Certification of Torsional Vibration Compatibility: Comply with NFPA 110.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For packaged engine generators to include
in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.. In addition to items
specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures," include the following:
1. List of tools and replacement items recommended to be stored at the
Project for ready access. Include part and drawing numbers, current unit
prices, and source of supply.
J. Warran : Special warranty specified in this Section.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained
and approved for installation of units required for this Project.
Rev. 3/22/07 PROJECT # 07712 16231 - Page 2

1. Maintenance Proximity: Not more than four hours' normal travel time from
Installer's place of business to Project site.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer. Maintain, within 200
miles of Project site, a service center capable of providing training, parts, and
emergency maintenance repairs.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain packaged generator sets and auxiliary components
through one source from a single manufacturer.
D. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional
requirements of packaged generator sets and are based on the specific system
indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."
E. Electrical Components Devices and Accessories: Listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
F. Comply with NFPA 37.
G. Comply with NFPA 70.
H. Engine Exhaust Emissions: Comply with applicable state and local government
requirements.
I. Noise Emission: Comply with applicable state and local government
requirements for maximum noise level at adjacent property boundaries due to
sound emitted by generator set including engine, engine exhaust, engine
cooling -air intake and discharge, and other components of installation.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast -anchor -bolt inserts into
bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in
Division 3.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees
to repair or replace components of packaged engine generators and associated
auxiliary components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
Rev. 3122/07 PROJECT # 07712 16231 - Page 3

1.08 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12
months' full maintenance by skilled employees of manufacturer's designated
service organization. Include quarterly exercising to check for proper starting,
load transfer, and running under load. Include routine preventive maintenance
as recommended by manufacturer and adjusting as required for proper
operation. Maintenance agreements shall include parts and supplies as used in
manufacture and installation of original equipment.
1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that
are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels
describing contents.
1. Fuses: One for every 10 of each type and rating, but not less than one of
each.
2. Indicator Lamps: Two for every six of each type used, but not less than
two of each.
3. Filters: One set each of lubricating oil, fuel, and combustion -air filters.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 ENGINE -GENERATOR SET
A. Packaged engine -generator set shall be a coordinated assembly of compatible
components.
B. Power Output Ratings: Nominal ratings as indicated, with capacity as required
to operate as a unit as evidenced by records of prototype testing.
C. Output Connections: Three phase, four wire.
D. Safety Standard: Comply with ASME B15.1.
E. Nameplates: Each major system component shall be equipped with a
nameplate to identify manufacturer's name and address, and model and serial
number of component.
F. Fabricate engine -generator -set mounting frame and attachment of components
to resist generator -set movement during a seismic event when generator -set
mounting frame is anchored to building structure.
Rev. 3/22107 PROJECT # 07712 16231 - Page 4

G. Mounting Frame: Adequate strength and rigidity to maintain alignment of
mounted components without depending on concrete foundation. Mounting
frame shall be free from sharp edges and corners and shall have lifting
attachments arranged for lifting with slings without damaging components.
2.02 GENERATOR -SET PERFORMANCE
A. Retain this Article for loads involving sensitive electronic equipment, significant
nonlinear load elements, or uninterruptible power supply systems. Coordinate
with "Governor" and "Generator, Exciter, and Voltage Regulator" articles. See
Evaluations.
B. Steady -State Voltage Operational Bandwidth: 3 percent of rated output voltage
from no load to full load.
C. Transient Voltage Performance: Not more than 20 percent variation for 50
percent step -load increase or decrease. Voltage shall recover and remain
within the steady-state operating band within three seconds.
D. Steady -State Frequency Operational Bandwidth: 0.5 percent of rated frequency
from no load to full load.
E. Steady -State Frequency Stability: When system is operating at any constant
load within the rated load, there shall be no random speed variations outside
the steady-state operational band and no hunting or surging of speed.
F. Transient Frequency Performance: Less than 5 percent variation for 50 percent
step -load increase or decrease. Frequency shall recover and remain within the
steady-state operating band within five seconds.
G. Output Waveform: At no load, harmonic content measured line to line or line to
neutral shall not exceed 5 percent total and 3 percent for single harmonics.
Telephone influence factor, determined according to -NEMA MG 1, shall not
exceed 50 percent.
H. Sustained Short -Circuit Current: For a 3-phase, bolted short circuit at system
output terminals, system shall supply a minimum of 250 percent of rated full -
load current for not less than 10 seconds and then clear the fault automatically,
without damage to generator system components.
I. Below requires 10-second maximum start time under specific conditions and
includes startup only, not load assumption.
J. StartTime: Comply with NFPA 110, Type 10, system requirements.
Rev. 3/22107 PROJECT # 07712 16231 - Page 5

2.03 SERVICE CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Engine -generator system shall withstand the
following environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or
degradation of performance capability:
1. Ambient Temperature: Minus 15 to plus 40 deg C.
2. Relative Humidity: 0 to 95 percent.
3. Altitude: Sea level to 2200 feet.
2.04 ENGINE
A. Fuel: Diesel
B. Rated Engine Speed: 1800 rpm.
C. Maximum Piston Speed for Four -Cycle Engines: 2250 fpm.
D. Lubrication System: The following items are mounted on engine or skid:
1. Filter and Strainer: Rated to remove 90 percent of particles 5 micrometers
and smaller while passing full flow.
2. Thermostatic Control Valve: Control flow in system to maintain optimum
oil temperature. Unit shall be capable of full flow and is designed to be
fail-safe.
3. Crankcase Drain: Arranged for complete gravity drainage to an easily
removable container with no disassembly and without use of pumps,
siphons, special tools, or appliances.
E. Engine Fuel System:
1. Diesel System:
a. Carburetor.
b. Secondary Gas Regulators: Yes.
C. Fuel -Shutoff Solenoid Valves: Yes.
d. Flexible Fuel Connectors: Yes.
F. Coolant Jacket Heater: Electric -immersion type, factory installed in coolant
jacket system. Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 equipment for
heater capacity.
G. Governor: Adjustable isochronous, with speed sensing.
Rev. 3/22107 PROJECT # 07712 16231 - Page 6

2.05 ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
A. Description: Closed loop, liquid cooled, with radiator factory mounted on
engine -generator -set mounting frame and integral engine -driven coolant pump.
B. Radiator: Rated for specified coolant.
C. Coolant: Solution of 50 percent ethylene -glycol -based antifreeze and 50
percent water, with anticorrosion additives as recommended by engine
manufacturer.
D. Temperature Control: Self-contained, thermostatic -control valve modulates
coolant flow automatically to maintain optimum constant coolant temperature as
recommended by engine manufacturer.
E. Coolant Hose: Flexible assembly with inside surface of nonporous rubber and
outer covering of aging-, ultraviolet-, and abrasion -resistant fabric.
1. Rating: 50-psig maximum working pressure with coolant at 180 deg F,
and noncollapsible under vacuum.
2. End Fittings: Flanges or steel pipe nipples with clamps to suit piping and
equipment connections.
2.06 FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEM
A. Comply with NFPA 54 and NFPA 58.
2.07 ENGINE EXHAUST SYSTEM
A. Muffler: Critical type, sized as recommended by engine manufacturer; sound
level measured at a distance of 10 feet from exhaust discharge shall be 85 dBA
or less.
B. Condensate Drain for Muffler: Schedule 40, black steel pipe connected to
muffler drain outlet through a petcock.
C. Connection from Engine to Exhaust System: Flexible section of corrugated
stainless -steel pipe.
D. Connection from Exhaust Pipe to MufFler: Stainless -steel expansion joint with
liner.
Rev. 3/22/07 PROJECT # 07712 16231 - Page 7

2.08 COMBUSTION -AIR INTAKE
A. Description: Heavy-duty, engine -mounted air cleaner with replaceable dry -filter
element and "blocked filter" indicator.
2.09 STARTING SYSTEM
A. Description: 24-V electric, with negative ground and including the following
items:
1. Components: Sized so they will not be damaged during a full engine -
cranking cycle with ambient temperature at maximum specified in
"Environmental Conditions" Paragraph in "Service Conditions" Article.
2. Cranking Motor: Heavy-duty unit that automatically engages and releases
from engine flywheel without binding.
3. Cranking Cycle: As required by NFPA 110 for system level specified.
4. Battery: Adequate capacity within ambient temperature range specified in
"Environmental Conditions" Paragraph in "Service Conditions" Article to
provide specified cranking cycle at least three times without recharging.
5. Battery Cable: Size as recommended by engine manufacturer for cable
length indicated. Include required interconnecting conductors and
connection accessories.
6. Battery Compartment: Factory fabricated of metal with acid -resistant
finish and thermal insulation. Thermostatically controlled heater shall be
arranged to maintain battery above 10 deg C regardless of external
ambient temperature within range specified in "Environmental Conditions"
Paragraph in "Service Conditions" Article. Include accessories required to
.support and fasten batteries in place.
7. Battery -Charging Alternator: Factory mounted on engine .with solid-state
voltage regulation and 35-A minimum continuous rating.
8. Battery Charger: Current -limiting, automatic -equalizing and float -charging
type. Unit shall comply with UL 1236 and include the following features:
a. Operation: Equalizing -charging rate of 10 A shall be initiated
automatically after battery has lost charge until an adjustable
equalizing voltage is achieved at battery terminals. Unit shall then
be automatically switched to a lower float -charging mode and shall
continue to operate in that mode until battery is discharged again.
b. Automatic Temperature Compensation: Adjust float and equalize
voltages for variations in ambient temperature from minus 40 deg C
to plus 60 deg C to prevent overcharging at high temperatures and
undercharging at low temperatures.
Rev. 3/22/07 PROJECT # 07712 16231 - Page 8

C. Automatic Voltage Regulation: Maintain constant output voltage
regardless of input voltage variations up to plus or minus 10 percent.
d. Ammeter and Voltmeter: Flush mounted in door. Meters shall
indicate charging rates.
e. Safety Functions: Sense abnormally low battery voltage and close
contacts providing low battery voltage indication on control and
monitoring panel. Sense high battery voltage and loss of ac input or
do output of battery charger. Either condition shall close contacts
that provide a battery -charger malfunction indication at system
control and monitoring panel.
f. Enclosure and Mounting: NEMA 250, Type 1, wall -mounted cabinet.
2.10 CONTROL AND MONITORING
B. Functional Description: When mode -selector switch on the control and
monitoring panel is in the automatic position, remote -control contacts in one or
more separate automatic transfer switches initiate starting and stopping of the
generator set. When mode -selector switch is switched to the on position, the
generator set starts. The off position of the same switch initiates generator -set
shutdown. When generator set is running, specified system or equipment
failures or derangements automatically shut down the generator set and initiate
alarms. Operation of a remote emergency -stop switch also shuts down the
generator set.
C. Configuration: Operating and safety indications, protective devices, basic
system controls, and engine gages shall be grouped in a common control and
monitoring panel mounted on the generator set. Mounting method shall isolate
the control panel from generator -set vibration.
D. Indicating and protective devices and controls shall include -those required by
NFPA 110 for a Level 1 system, and the following:
1. AC voltmeter.
2. AC ammeter.
3. AC frequency meter.
4. DC voltmeter (alternator battery charging).
5. Engine -coolant temperature gage.
6. Engine lubricating -oil pressure gage.
7. Running -time meter.
8. Ammeter -voltmeter, phase -selector switch(es).
9. Generator -voltage adjusting rheostat.
Rev. 3122107 PROJECT # 07712 16231 - Page 9

10. Generator overload.
E. Supporting Items: Include sensors, transducers, terminals, relays, and other
devices and include wiring required to support specified items. Locate sensors
and other supporting items on engine or generator, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Connection to Data Link: A separate terminal block, factory wired to Form C
dry contacts, for each alarm and status indication is reserved for connections
for data -link transmission of indications'to remote data terminals.
G. Common Remote Audible Alarm: Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for
Level 1 systems. Include necessary contacts and terminals in control and
monitoring panel.
2.11 GENERATOR OVERCURRENT AND FAULT PROTECTION
A. Generator Disconnect Switch: Molded -case type, 100 percent rated.
1. Rating: Matched to generator output rating.
2. Shunt Trio: Connected to trip switch when signaled by generator protector
or by other protective devices.
B. Generator Protector: Microprocessor -based unit that continuously monitors
current level in each phase of generator output, integrates generator heating
.effect over time, and predicts when thermal damage of the alternator will
occur. When signaled by the protector or other generator -set protective
devices, a shunt -trip device in the generator disconnect switch shall open the
switch to disconnect the generator from the load circuits. Protector shall
perform the following functions:
1. Initiates a generator overload alarm when the generator has operated at
an overload equivalent to 110 percent of full -rated load for 60 seconds.
Indication for this alarm is integrated with other generator -set malfunction
alarms.
2. . Under single or three-phase fault conditions, regulates the generator to
300 percent of rated full -load current for up to 10 seconds.
3. As the overcurrent heating effect on the generator approaches the thermal
damage point of the unit, the protector switches the excitation system off,
opens the generator disconnect device, and shuts down the generator set.
4. Senses clearing of a fault by other overcurrent devices and controls
recovery of rated voltage to avoid overshoot.
2.12 GENERATOR, EXCITER, AND VOLTAGE REGULATOR
A. Comply with NEMA MG 1 and specified performance requirements.
Rev. 3/22107 PROJECT # 07712 16231 -Page 10

B. Drive: Generator shaft shall be directly connected to engine shaft. Exciter
shall be rotated integrally with generator rotor.
C. Electrical Insulation: Class H or Class F.
D. Stator -Winding Leads: Brought out to terminal box to permit future
reconnection for other voltages if required.
E. Construction shall prevent mechanical, electrical, and thermal damage due to
vibration, overspeed up to 125 percent of rating, and heat during operation at
110 percent of rated capacity.
F. Coordinate first paragraph below with "Generator -Set Performance" Article
selected.
G. Enclosure: Dripproof.
H. Delete first paragraph below for systems where instrument transformers are
housed in control and power panel.
I. Voltage Regulator: Solid-state type, separate from exciter, providing
performance as specified.
a. Adjusting rheostat on control and monitoring panel shall provide plus
or minus 5 percent adjustment of output=voltage operating band.
J. Strip Heater: Thermostatically controlled unit arranged to maintain stator
windings above dew point.
K. Windings: Two-thirds pitch stator winding and fully linked amortisseur
winding.
2.13. OUTDOOR GENERATOR -SET ENCLOSURE
A. Description: Vandal -resistant, weatherproof steel housing, wind resistant up
to 100 mph. Multiple panels shall be lockable and provide adequate access
to components requiring maintenance. Panels shall be removable by one
person without tools. Instruments and control shall be mounted within
enclosure.
2.14 FINISHES
A. Outdoor Enclosures and Components: Manufacturer's standard enamel over
corrosion -resistant pretreatment and compatible standard primer.
Rev. 3/22/07 PROJECT # 07712 16231 - Page 11

2.15 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Prototype Testing: Factory test engine -generator set using same engine
model, constructed of identical or equivalent components and equipped with
identical or equivalent accessories.
1. Consider requiring Level 1 compliance below for other than Level 1 instal-
lations to obtain benefits of specific standard requirements.
2. Tests: Comply with NFPA 110, Level 1 energy converters in Para-
graphs 3.2.1, 3.2.1.1, and 3.2.1.2.
3. Generator Tests: Comply with IEEE 115.
4. Components and Accessories: Items furnished with installed unit that are
not identical to those on tested prototype shall have been factory tested to
demonstrate compatibility and reliability.
B. Project -Specific Equipment Tests: Before shipment, factory test engine -
generator set and other system components and accessories manufactured
specifically for this Project. Perform tests at rated load and power factor.
Include the following tests:
1. Full load run.
2. Maximum power.
3. Voltage regulation.
4. Transient and steady-state governing.
5. Single-step load pickup.
6. Safety shutdown.
C. Report factory test results within 10 days of completion of test.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, equipment bases, and conditions, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting
packaged engine -generator performance.
B. Examine roughing -in of piping systems and electrical connections. Verify actual
locations of connections before packaged engine -generator installation.
Rev. 3122/07 PROJECT # 07712 16231 - Page 12

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.02 CONCRETE BASES
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Verify structural requirements
with structural engineer.
B. Concrete base is specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and
Methods," and concrete materials and installation requirements are specified in
Division 3.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with packaged engine -generator manufacturers' written installation and
alignment instructions and with NFPA 110.
B. Install packaged engine generators level on concrete base.
C. Install packaged engine generator to provide access, without removing
connections or accessories, for periodic maintenance.
D. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by equipment
manufacturers but not specified to be factory mounted.
3.04 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Sections. The
following are specific connection requirements:
1. Install fuel piping adjacent to packaged engine generator to allow service
and maintenance.
2. Connect fuel piping to engines with a gate valve and union.
B. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
C. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
D. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's
published torque -tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not
indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
Rev. 3/22107 PROJECT # 07712 16231 - Page 13

3.05 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components according to Division 15 Section "Mechanical
Identification" and Division 16 Section " Electrical Identification."
3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service
representative to inspect, test, and adjust field -assembled components and
equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing.
Report results in writing.
B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated
in NETAATS, Sections 7.15.2.1 and 7.22.1 (except for vibration baseline
test). Certify compliance with test parameters.
2. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer.
3. NFPA 110 Acceptance Tests: Perform tests required by NFPA 110 that
are additional to those specified here including, but not limited to, the
following:
a. Single-step full -load pickup test.
4. Battery Tests: Equalize charging of battery cells according to
manufacturer's written instructions. Record individual cell voltages.
a. Measure charging voltage and voltages between available battery
terminals for full -charging and float -charging conditions. Check
electrolyte level and specific gravity under both conditions.
b. Test for contact integrity of all connectors. Perform an integrity load
test and a capacity load test for the battery.
C. Verify acceptance of charge for each element of the battery after
discharge.
d. Verify that measurements are within manufacturer's specifications.
5. Battery -Charger Tests: Verify specified rates of charge for both equalizing
and float -charging conditions.
6. System Integrity Tests: Methodically verify proper installation, connection,
and integrity of each element of engine -generator system before and
during system operation. Check for air, exhaust, and fluid leaks.
C. Coordinate tests with tests for transfer switches and run them concurrently.
Rev. 3/22/07 PROJECT # 07712 16231 - Page 14

D. Test instruments shall have been calibrated within the last 12 months, traceable
to standards of the National Institute for Standards and Technology, and
adequate for making positive observation of test results. Make calibration
records available for examination on request.
E. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks
and retest until no leaks exist.
F. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to
confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.
G. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
controls and equipment.
H. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until
specified requirements are met.
J. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay
settings and measured insulation resistances, time delays, and other values
and observations. Attach a label or tag to each tested component indicating
satisfactory completion of tests.
3.07 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to perform startup service.
B. Inspect field -assembled components and equipment installation, including
piping and electrical connections. Report results in writing.
C. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.08 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's
maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain packaged engine
generators. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."
1. Coordinate this training with that for transfer switches.
END OF SECTION
Rev. 3/22107 PROJECT # 07712 16231 - Page 15

SECTION 16289 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section includes field -mounted TVSS for low -voltage (120 to 600 V) power
distribution and control equipment.
1.03 DEFINITIONS "
A. ATS: Acceptance Testing Specifications.
B. SVR: Suppressed voltage rating.
C. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor(s), both singular and plural; also,
transient voltage surge suppression.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities,
operating weights, electrical characteristics, furnished specialties, and
accessories.
B. Product Certificates: For TVSS devices, from manufacturer.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For TVSS devices to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.
D. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components. Devices. and Accessories: Listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, by a testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
Rev. 3/22107 PROJECT # 07712 16289 - Page 1

B. Comply with IEEE C62.41.2 and test devices according to IEEE C62.45.
C. Comply with NEMA LS 1.
D. Comply withUL 1449.
E. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Service Conditions: Rate TVSS devices for continuous operation under the
following conditions unless otherwise indicated:
1. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage: Not less than 115 percent of
nominal system operating voltage.
2. Operating Temperature: 30 to 120 deg F (0 to 50 deg C).
3. Humidity: 0 to 85 percent, noncondensing.
4. Altitude: Less than 20,000 feet (6090 m) above sea level.
1.07 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate location of field -mounted TVSS devices to allow adequate
clearances for maintenance.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees
to repair or replace components of surge suppressors that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Replaceable Protection Modules: One of each size and type installed.
Rev. 3/22/07 PROJECT # 07712 16289 - Page 2

PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 SERVICE ENTRANCE SUPPRESSORS
A. Surge Protection Devices:
1. Comply with UL 1449.
2. Modular design (with field -replaceable modules).
3. Short-circuit current rating complying with UL 1449, and matching or
exceeding the panelboard short-circuit rating and redundant suppression
circuits; with individually fused metal -oxide varistors.
4. Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring.
5. Redundant suppression circuits.
6. Redundant replaceable modules.
7. Arrangement with wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and
ground bus.
8. LED indicator lights for power and protection status.
9. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed.
10. Form-C contacts rated at 5 A and 250-V ac, one normally open and one
normally closed, for remote monitoring of protection status. Contacts shall
reverse on failure of any surge diversion module or on opening of any
current -limiting device. Coordinate with building power monitoring and
control system.
11. Four -digit transient -event counter set to totalize transient surges.
B. Peak Single -Impulse Surqe Current Rating: 320 kA per mode/640 kA per
phase.
C. Minimum single impulse current ratings, using 8-by-20-mic.sec waveform
described in IEEE C62.41.2:
1. Line to Neutral: 70,000 A.
2. Line to Ground: 70,000 A.
3. Neutral to Ground: 50,000 A.
D. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for grounded wye circuits with 480Y/277 V,
3-phase, 4-wire circuits shall be as follows:
1. Line to Neutral: 800 V for 480Y/277 V.
Rev. 3/22107 PROJECT # 07712 16289 - Page 3

2. Line to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277 V.
3. Neutral to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277 V.
2.02 ENCLOSURES
A. Indoor Enclosures: NEMA 250 Type 1.
B. Outdoor Enclosures: NEMA 250 Type 3R.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01
0
K1t6YA
/0
INSTALLATION
Install TVSS devices at service entrance on load side, with ground lead bonded
to service entrance ground.
1. Provide 60-A circuit breaker as a dedicated disconnecting means for
TVSS unless otherwise indicated.
STARTUP SERVICE
Do not energize or connect service entrance equipment to their sources until
TVSS devices are installed and connected.
B. Do not perform insulation resistance tests of the distribution wiring equipment
with the TVSS installed. Disconnect before conducting insulation resistance
tests, and reconnect immediately after the testing is over.
3.03 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to maintain TVSS devices.
END OF SECTION
Rev. 3/22/07 PROJECT # 07712 16289 - Page 4

SECTION 16410 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to
this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Molded -case circuit breakers (MCCBs).
2. Enclosures.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. NC: Normally closed.
B. NO: Normally open.
C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and
component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and
manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical
characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.
1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
2. Current and voltage ratings.
3. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate).
4. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual
overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components.
Rev. 3122107 PROJECT # 07712 16410 -Page 1

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent
protective devices, components, and accessories, within same product
category, from single source from single manufacturer.
B. Electrical Components, Devices. and Accessories: Listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended
location and application.
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the
following conditions unless otherwise indicated:
1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F (minus 30 deg C)
and not exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C).
2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2010 m).
B. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to
facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following
conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service
according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed
interruption of electric service.
2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service.
3. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Owner's written
permission.
4. Comply with NFPA 70E.
1.07 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components
with equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain ,required workspace
clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.
Rev. 3122107 PROJECT # 07712 16410 - Page 2

PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MOLDED -CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. General Requirements: Comply with UL489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3,
with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents.
B. Thermal -Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time -current element for low-level
overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits.
Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit -breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
C. Features and Accessories:
1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.
2. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and
conductor material.
2.02 ENCLOSURES
A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1,
NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed
location.
1. Indoor. Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.
2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit
breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance of the Work.
B. . Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install individual wall -mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform
height unless otherwise indicated.
B. Comply with NECA 1.
Rev. 3/22/07 PROJECT # 07712 16410 - Page 3

3.03 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and
lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.
B. Set field -adjustable circuit -breaker, trip ranges.
END OF SECTION
Rev. 3122/07 PROJECT # 07712 16410 - Page 4

SECTION 16415 TRANSFER SWITCHES
PART 1:- GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes transfer switches rated 600 V and less„ including the
following:
1. Automatic transfer switches.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A: Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities,
weights, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details showing
minimum clearances, conductor entry provisions, gutter space, installed
features and devices, and material lists for each switch specified.
C. Qualification Data: For manufacturer.
D. Field quality -control test reports.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each .type of product to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items
specified in Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the
following:
1. Features and operating sequences, both automatic and manual.
2. List of all factory settings of relays; provide relay -setting and calibration
instructions, including software, where applicable.
Rev: 3/22/07 PROJECT # 07712 16415 - Page 1

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Maintain a service center capable of providing
training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs within a response period of
less than four hours from time of notification.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain automatic transfer switches through one source
from a single manufacturer.
C. Electrical Components. Devices. and Accessories: Listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
D. Comply with NEMA ICS 1.
E. Comply with NFPA 70.
F. Comply with NFPA 110.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to
facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following
conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service:
1. Notify Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed
interruption of electrical service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Owner's
written permission.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor -bolt inserts into
bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in
Division 3.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL TRANSFER -SWITCH PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
A. Indicated Current Ratings: Apply as defined in UL 1008 for continuous loading
and total system transfer, including tungsten filament lamp loads not exceeding
30 percent of switch ampere rating, unless otherwise indicated.
Rev. 3/22107 PROJECT # 07712 16415 - Page 2

B. Tested Fault -Current Closing and Withstand Ratings: Adequate for duty
imposed by protective devices at installation locations in Project under the fault
conditions indicated, based on testing according to UL.1008.
1. Where transfer switch includes internal fault -current protection, rating of
switch and trip unit combination shall exceed indicated fault -current value
at installation location.
C. Solid -State Controls: Repetitive accuracy of all settings shall be plus or minus 2
percent or better over an operating temperature range of minus 20 to plus 70
deg C.
D. Resistance to Damage by Voltage Transients: Components shall meet or
exceed voltage -surge withstand capability requirements when tested according
to IEEE C62.41. Components shall meet or exceed voltage -impulse withstand
test of NEMA ICS 1.
E. Electrical Operation: Accomplish by a nonfused, momentarily energized
solenoid or electric -motor -operated mechanism, mechanically and electrically
interlocked in both directions.
F. Switch Characteristics: Designed for continuous -duty repetitive transfer of full -
rated current between active power sources.
1. Limitation: Switches using molded -case switches or circuit breakers or
insulated -case circuit -breaker components are not acceptable.
2. Switch Action: Double throw; mechanically held in both directions.
3. Contacts: Silver composition or silver alloy for load -current switching.
Conventional automatic transfer -switch units, rated 225 A and higher, shall
have separate arcing contacts.
G. Neutral Terminal: Solid and fully rated, unless otherwise indicated.
H. Heater: Equip switches exposed to outdoor temperatures and humidity, and
other units indicated, with an internal heater. Provide thermostat within
enclosure to control heater.
Factory Wiring: Train and bundle factory wiring and label, consistent with Shop
Drawings, either by color -code or by numbered or lettered wire and cable tape
markers at terminations.
1. Designated Terminals: Pressure type, suitable for types and sizes of field
wiring indicated.
2. Power -Terminal Arrangement and Field -Wiring Space: Suitable for top,
side, or bottom entrance of feeder conductors as indicated.
Rev. 3122/07 PROJECT # 07712 16415 - Page 3

3. Control Wiring: Equipped with lugs suitable for connection to terminal
strips.
J. Enclosures: General-purpose NEMA 250, Type 1, complying with NEMA ICS 6
and UL 508, unless otherwise indicated.
2.02 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES
A. Comply with Level 1 equipment according to NFPA 110.
B. Switching Arrangement: Double -throw type, incapable of pauses or
intermediate position stops during normal functioning, unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Manual Switch Operation: Under load, with door closed and with either or both
sources energized. Transfer time is same as for electrical operation. Control
circuit automatically disconnects from electrical operator during manual
operation.
D. Signal -Before -Transfer Contacts: A set of normally open/normally closed dry
contacts operates in advance of retransfer to normal source. Interval is
adjustable from 1 to 30 seconds.
E. In -Phase Monitor: Factory -wired, internal relay controls transfer so it occurs
only when the two sources are synchronized in phase. Relay compares phase
relationship and frequency difference between normal and emergency sources
and initiates transfer when both sources are within 15 electrical degrees, and
only if transfer can be completed within 60 electrical degrees. Transfer is
initiated only if both sources are within 2 Hz of nominal frequency and 70
percent or more of nominal voltage.
F. Automatic Transfer -Switch Features
1. Undervoltage Sensing for Each Phase of Normal Source: Sense low
phase -to -ground voltage on each phase. Pickup voltage shall be
adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of nominal, and dropout voltage is
adjustable from 75 to 98 percent of pickup value. Factory set for pickup at
90 percent and dropout at 85 percent.
2. Adiustable Time Delay: For override of normal -source voltage sensing to
delay transfer and engine start signals. Adjustable from zero to six
seconds, and factory set for one second.
3. Voltage/Frequency Lockout Relay: Prevent premature transfer to
generator. Pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of
nominal. Factory set for pickup at 90 percent. Pickup frequency shall be
adjustable from 90 to 100 percent of nominal. Factory set for pickup at 95
percent.
Rev. 3/22107 PROJECT # 07712 16415 - Page 4

4. Time Delay for Retransfer to' Normal Source: Adjustable from 0 to 30
minutes, and factory set for 10 minutes to automatically defeat delay on
loss of voltage or sustained undervoltage of emergency source, provided
normal supply has been restored.
5. Test Switch: Simulate normal -source failure.
6. Switch -Position Pilot Lights: Indicate source to which load is connected.
7. Source -Available Indicating Lights: Supervise sources via transfer -switch
normal- and emergency -source sensing circuits.
a. Normal Power Supervision: Green light with nameplate engraved
"Normal Source Available."
b. Standby Power Supervision: Red light with nameplate engraved
"Standby Source Available."
8. Unassigned Auxiliary Contacts: Two normally open, single -pole, double -
throw contacts for each switch position, rated 10 A at 240-V ac.
9. Transfer Override Switch: Overrides automatic retransfer control so
automatic transfer switch will remain connected to emergency power
source regardless of condition of normal source. Pilot light indicates
override status.
10. Engine Starting Contacts: One isolated and normally closed, and one
isolated and normally open; rated 10 A at 32-V do minimum.
11. Engine Shutdown Contacts: Time delay adjustable from zero to five
minutes, and factory set for five minutes. Contacts shall initiate shutdown
at remote engine -generator controls after retransfer of load to normal
source.
12. Engine -Generator Exerciser: Solid-state, programmable -time switch starts
engine generator and transfers load to it from normal source for a preset
time, then retransfers and shuts down engine after a preset cool -down
period. Initiates exercise cycle at preset intervals adjustable from 7 to 30
days. Running periods are adjustable from 10 to 30 minutes. Factory
settings are for 7-day exercise cycle, 20-minute running period, and 5-
minute cool -down period. Exerciser features include the following:
a. Exerciser Transfer Selector Switch: Permits selection of exercise
with and without load transfer.
b. Push-button programming control with digital display of settings.
C. Integral battery operation of time switch when normal control power
is not available.
Rev. 3/22107 PROJECT # 07712 16415 - Page 5

2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory test and inspect components, assembled switches, and associated
equipment. Ensure proper operation. Check transfer time and voltage,
frequency, and time -delay settings for compliance with specified requirements.
Perform'dielectric strength test complying with NEMA ICS 1.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Design each fastener and support to carry load. See Division 16 Section
"Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
B. Set field -adjustable intervals and delays, relays, and engine exerciser clock.
3.02 CONNECTIONS
A. Wiring to Remote Components: Match type and number of cables and
conductors to control and communication requirements of transfer switches as
recommended by manufacturer. Increase raceway sizes at no additional cost
to Owner if necessary to accommodate required wiring.
B. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
C. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service
representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and
equipment installations, including connections. Report results in writing.
B. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
1. After installing equipment and after electrical circuitry has been energized,
test for compliance with requirements.
2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated
in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test
parameters.
3. Measure insulation resistance phase -to -phase and phase -to -ground with
insulation -resistance tester. Include external annunciation and control
Rev. 3/22/07 PROJECT # 07712 16415 - Page 6

circuits. Use test voltages and procedure recommended by manufacturer.
Comply with manufacturer's specified minimum resistance.
a. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits.
b. Inspect for physical damage, proper installation and connection, and
integrity of barriers, covers, and safety features.
C. Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed.
d. Perform manual transfer operation.
4. After energizing circuits, demonstrate interlocking sequence and
operational function for each switch at least three times.
a. Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer
switches and of emergency source with normal source available.
b. Simulate loss of phase -to -ground voltage for each phase of normal
source.
C. Verify time -delay settings.
d. Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of
control settings.
e. Test bypass/isolation unit functional modes and related automatic
transfer -switch operations.
f. Perform contact -resistance test across main contacts and correct
values exceeding 500 microhms and values for 1 pole deviating by
more than 50 percent from other poles.
g. Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic engine
starting, transfer time delay, retransfer time delay on restoration of
normal power, and engine cool -down and shutdown.
C. Coordinate tests with tests of generator and run them concurrently.
D. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay
settings and measured insulation and contact resistances and time delays.
Attach a label or tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory
completion of tests.
E. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
Rev. 3/22107 PROJECT # 07712 16415 - Page 7

3.04 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's
maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain transfer switches and
related equipment as specified below.
B. Coordinate this training with that for generator equipment.
END OF SECTION
Rev. 3122/07 PROJECT # 07712 16415 - Page 8

SECTION 16442 PANELBOARDS
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1. Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Lighting and appliance branch -circuit panelboards.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A." SVR: Suppressed voltage rating
B. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent
protective device, transient voltage suppression device; accessory, and
component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on
features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes. -
B. Shoo Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.
1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show
tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.
2. Detail enclosure types and details for types.other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.
4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective
devices.
5. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices.
6. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual
overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components.
7. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
Rev. 3/22107 PROJECT # 07712 16442 - Page 1

8. Include time -current coordination curves for each type and rating of
overcurrent protective device included in panelboards. Submit on
translucent log -log graft paper; include selectable ranges for each type of
overcurrent protective device.
C. Field Quality -Control Reports:
1. Test procedures used.
2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results
that comply with requirements.
D. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions
after load balancing.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include
in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items
specified in Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the
following:
1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent
protective devices.
2. Time -current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of
overcurrent protective device that allows adjustments.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices,
components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer.
B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum
dimensions for panelboards including clearances between panelboards and
adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum
dimensions.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended
location and application.
D. Comply with NEMA PB 1.
E. Comply with NFPA 70.
Rev. 3/22107 PROJECT # 07712 16442 - Page 2

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install
temporary electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation.
B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NEMA PB 1.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations:
1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and
weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above
panelboards is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and
maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy
levels during the remainder of the construction period.
2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions
unless otherwise indicated:
a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding minus 22 deg F (minus 30
deg C) to plus 104 deg F (plus 40 deg C).
b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).
B. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows:
1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified.
2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).
1.08 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other
construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical
and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace
clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace
clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.
1.09 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees
to repair or replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials
or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
Rev. 3122107 PROJECT # 07712 16442 - Page 3

1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock.
2. Circuit Breakers Including GFCI and Ground Fault Equipment Protection
(GFEP) Types: Two spares for each panelboard.
3. u: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no
fewer than three of each size and type.
4. Fuses for Fused Power -Circuit Devices: Equal to 10 percent of quantity
installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and
type.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01
Q
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS
Enclosures: Flush- and surface -mounted cabinets.
1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.
a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.
b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3, Type 4X stainless steel.
C. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust Falling Dirtand Dripping
Noncorrosive Liquids: NEMA 250, Type 12.
2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface -mounted
fronts, match box dimensions; for flush -mounted fronts, overlap box.
3. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard
door within hinged trim cover.
4. Skirt for Surface -Mounted •Panelboards: Same gage and finish as
panelboard front with flanges for attachment to panelboard, wall, and
ceiling or floor.
5. Finishes:
a. Panels and Trim: Steel and galvanized steel, factory finished
immediately after cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's
standard two -coat, baked -on finish consisting of prime coat and
thermosetting topcoat.
Rev. 3122107 PROJECT # 07712 16442 - Page 4

b. Back Boxes: Same finish as panels and trim.
C. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for overcurrent
protective devices and other components.
6. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in metal frame with
transparent protective cover.
B. Incoming Mains Location: Top.
C. Phase, Neutral. and Ground Buses:
1. Material: Tin-plated aluminum.
2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch -circuit
equipment grounding conductors; bonded to box.
3. Isolated Ground Bus: Adequate for branch -circuit isolated ground
conductors; insulated from box.
4. Extra -Capacity Neutral Bus: Neutral bus rated 200 percent of phase bus
and UL listed as suitable for nonlinear loads.
5. Split Bus: Vertical buses divided into individual vertical sections.
D. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.
1. Material: Tin-plated aluminum.
2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Compression type.
3. Ground Lugs and Bus -Configured Terminators: Compression type.
4. Feed -Through Lugs: Compression type, suitable for use with conductor
material. Locate at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main
device.
5. Subfeed (Double) Lugs: Compression type suitable for use with conductor
material. Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device.
6. Gutter -Tap Lugs: Compression type suitable for use with conductor
material. Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device.
7. Extra -Capacity Neutral Lugs: Rated 200 percent of phase lugs mounted
on extra -capacity neutral bus.
E. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for
panelboards or load centers with one or more main service disconnecting and
overcurrent protective devices.
F. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and
necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices.
Rev. 3122107 PROJECT # 07712 16442 - Page 5

G. Panelboard Short -Circuit Current Rating: Rated for series -connected system
with integral or remote upstream overcurrent protective devices and labeled by
an NRTL. Include size and type of allowable upstream and branch devices,
listed and labeled for series -connected short-circuit rating by an NRTL.
H. Panelboard Short -Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical
short-circuit current available at terminals.
2.02 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH -CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,
but are not limited to, the following:
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler -Hammer Business Unit.
2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical
Distribution.
3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
4. Square'D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch -circuit type.
C. Mains: Circuit breaker or lugs only.
D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Plug-in circuit breakers, replaceable
without disturbing adjacent units.
E. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed
alike.
F. Column -Type Panelboards: Narrow gutter extension, with cover, to overhead
junction box equipped with ground and neutral terminal buses.
2.03 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,
but are not limited to, the following:
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler -Hammer Business Unit.
2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical
Distribution.
3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
Rev. 3/22107 - PROJECT # 07712 16442 - Page 6

B. Molded -Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB)• Comply with UL 489, with interrupting
capacity to meet available fault currents.
1. Thermal -Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time -current element for low-
level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits.
Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit -breaker frame sizes 250 A and
larger.
2. Adiustable Instantaneous -Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element
with front -mounted, field -adjustable trip setting.
3. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field -replaceable rating
plug or field-replicable electronic trip; and the following field -adjustable
settings:
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
a. Instantaneous trip.
b. Long- and short -time pickup levels.
C. Long- and short -time time adjustments.
d. Ground -fault pickup level, time delay, and 12t response.
Current -Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let -
through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.
GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two -pole configurations with Class A
ground -fault protection (6-mA trip).
Ground -Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B
ground -fault protection (30-mA trip).
Arc -Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI) Circuit Breakers: Comply with
UL 1699; 120/240-V, single -pole configuration.
Molded -Case Circuit -Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:
a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.
b. Lugs: Compression style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and
conductor materials.
C. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for
switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent
and high -intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits.
d. Ground -Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with
adjustable pickup and time -delay settings, push -to -test feature, and
ground -fault indicator.
e. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip
at 55 percent of rated voltage.
Rev. 3/22/07 PROJECT # 07712 16442 - Page 7

f. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated
voltage without intentional time delay.
g. Alarm Switch: Single -pole, normally open contact that actuates only
when circuit breaker trips.
h. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit -breaker
operation; key shall be removable only when circuit breaker is in off
position.
I. Zone -Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for
interlocking ground -fault protection function with other upstream or
downstream devices.
j. Multipole units enclosed in a single housing or factory assembled to
operate as a single unit.
k. Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit -
breaker handle in off position.
I. Handle Clamp: Loose attachment, for holding circuit -breaker handle
in on position.
C. Fused Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD; clips to accommodate specified fuses;
lockable handle.
1. Fuses, and Spare -Fuse Cabinet: Comply with requirements specified in
Division 16 Section "Fuses."
2. Fused Switch Features and Accessories: Standard ampere ratings and
number of poles.
2.04 PANELBOARD SUPPRESSORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,
but are not limited to, the following:
1. Current Technology; a subsidiary of Danahar Corporation.
2. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler -Hammer Business Unit.
3. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical
Distribution.
4. Liebert Corporation.
5. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
6. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B. Surge Protection Device: IEEE C62.41-compliant, integrally mounted, solid-
state, parallel -connected, non -modular type, with sine -wave tracking
Rev. 3122107 PROJECT # 07712 16442 - Page 8

suppression and filtering modules, UL 1449, second edition, short-circuit current
rating matching or exceeding the panelboard short-circuit rating, and with the
following features and accessories:
1. Accessories:
a. LED indicator lights for power and protection status.
b. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has
failed.
C. One set of dry contacts rated at 5 A and 250-V ac, for remote
monitoring of protection status.
C. Surge Protection Device: IEEE C62.41-compliant, integrally mounted, wired -in,
solid-state, parallel -connected, modular (with field -replaceable modules) type,
with sine -wave tracking suppression and filtering modules, UL 1449, second
edition, short-circuit current rating matching or exceeding the panelboard short-
circuit rating, and with the following features and accessories:
1. Accessories:
a. Fuses rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity.
b. Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring.
C. Integral disconnect switch.
d. Redundant suppression circuits.
e. Redundant replaceable modules.
f. Arrangement with wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and
ground bus.
g. LED indicator lights for power and protection status.
h. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has
failed.
I. Form-C contacts rated at 5 A and 250-V ac, one normally open and
one normally closed, for remote monitoring of system operation.
Contacts shall reverse position on failure of any surge diversion
module or on opening of any current -limiting device. Coordinate with
building power monitoring and control system.
j. Four -digit, transient -event counter set to totalize transient surges.
2. Peak Single -Impulse Surge Current Rating: 80 kA per mode/160 kA per
phase.
3. Minimum single -impulse current ratings, using 8-by-20-mic.sec. waveform
described in IEEE C62.41.2.
Rev. 3122/07 PROJECT # 07712 16442 - Page 9

a. Line to Neutral: 70,000 A.
b. Line to Ground: 70,000 A.
C. Neutral to Ground: 50,000 A.
4. Withstand Capabilities: 12,000 IEEE C62.41, Category C3 (10 kA), 8-by-
20-mic.sec. surges with less than 5 percent change in clamping voltage.
5. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for grounded wye circuits with
208Y/120-V, three-phase, four -wire circuits shall be as follows:
a. Line to Neutral: 400 V for 208Y/120.
b. Line to Ground: 400 V for 208Y/120.
C. Neutral to Ground: 400 V for 208Y/120.
6. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for 240/120-V, single-phase, three -
wire circuits shall be as follows:
a. Line to Neutral: 400 V.
b. Line to Ground: 400 V.
C. Neutral to Ground: 400 V.
7. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for 240/120-V, three-phase, four -wire
circuits with high leg shall be as follows:
a. Line to Neutral: 400 V, 800 V from high leg.
b. Line to Ground: 400 V.
C. Neutral to Ground: 400 V.
8. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for 240-, 480-, or 600-V, three-phase,
three -wire, delta circuits shall be as follows:
a. Line to Line: 2000 V for 480 V, 1000 V for 240 V.
b. Line to Ground: 1500 V for 480 V 800 V for 240 V.
2.05 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES
A. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent
protective device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.
B. Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without
removing from panelboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for
testing panelboard meters and switchboard class relays.
Rev. 3122/07 PROJECT # 07712 16442 - Page 10

PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1.
B. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged
or rusted or have been subjected to water saturation.
C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.
B. Equipment Mounting: Install panelboards on concrete bases, 4-inch (100-mm)
nominal thickness. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in
Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete."
1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless
otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers
around full perimeter of base.
2. For panelboards, install epoxy -coated anchor bolts that extend through
concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.
3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates,
diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be
embedded.
4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to
panelboards.
5. Attach panelboard to the vertical finished or structural surface behind the
panelboard.
C. Mount top of trim 72 inches height above finished floor unless otherwise
indicated.
D. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount
recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with
back box.
E. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory
installed.
Rev. 3122/07 PROJECT # 07712 16442 - Page 11

1. Set field -adjustable, circuit -breaker trip ranges.
F. Install filler plates in unused spaces.
G. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties.
H. Comply with NECA 1.
3.03 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field -installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components;
provide warning signs complying with Division 16 Section "Electrical
Identification."
B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard
loads; incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before
installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten
directories are not acceptable.
C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying
with requirements for identification specified in Division 16 Section"Electrical
Identification."
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service
representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and
equipment installations, including connections.
B. Perform tests and inspections.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service
representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment
installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.
C. Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component,
connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each circuit.
D. Tests and Inspections:
1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated
in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test
parameters.
Rev. 3122/07 PROJECT # 07712 16442 - Page 12

2. Correct malfunctioning units on -site, where possible, and retest to
demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare
reports:
a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more
than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of
each panelboard. Remove front panels so joints and connections
are accessible to portable scanner.
b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up
infrared scan of each panelboard 11 months after date of Substantial
Completion.
C. Instruments and Equipment:
1) Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure
temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal
values. Provide calibration record for device.
E. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections.
F. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies
panelboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of
deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial
action.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and
lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.
B. Set field -adjustable circuit -breaker trip ranges as indicated.
C. Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after
Final Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes.
1. Measure as directed during period of normal system loading.
2. Perform load -balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working
schedule of the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-
hour services such as fax machines and on-line data processing,
computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment.
3. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all
load readings before and after changes and submit test records.
Rev. 3/22107 PROJECT # 07712 16442 - Page 13

4. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within
a panelboard, is not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to
meet this minimum requirement.
D. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according
to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION
Rev. 3/22/07 PROJECT # 07712 16442 - Page 14

SECTION 16511
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
INTERIOR LIGHTING
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions -and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to
this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Interior lighting fixtures with lamps and ballasts.
2. Lighting fixtures mounted on exterior building surfaces.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture scheduled, arranged in
order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories,
finishes, and the following:
1. Physical description of fixture; including dimensions and verification
of indicated parameters.
2.' Fluorescent and high -intensity -discharge ballasts.
3. Lamps.
B. ' Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to
include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to
items specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures," include the
following:
1. Catalog data for each fixture. Include the diffuser, ballast, and
lamps installed in that fixture.
C. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
Rev. 3122/07 PROJECT # 07712 16511 - Page 1

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
A. Special Warranty for Fluorescent Ballasts: Manufacturer's standard form
in which ballast manufacturer agrees to repair or replace ballasts that fail
in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period for Electronic Ballasts: Five years from date of
Substantial Completion.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS, GENERAL
A. Refer to fixture schedule on drawings for fixture basis -of -design
requirements.
2.02 FLUORESCENT LAMP BALLASTS
A. Description: Include the following features, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated at full light
output.
B. Electronic ballasts for linear lamps shall include the following features,
unless otherwise indicated:
1. Comply with NEMA C82.11.
2. Ballast Type: Rapid start, unless otherwise indicated. Provide
instant start ballasts for all lighting fixtures on circuits without a
means of switching other than the circuit breaker.
3. Sound Rating: A.
4. Total harmonic distortion rating of less than 10 percent according
to NEMA C82.11.
5. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A.
6. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher.
Rev. 3/22/07 PROJECT # 07712 16511 - Page 2

2.03
2.04
2.05
C
7. Lamp Current Crest Factor: Less than 1.7.
S. Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts connected to
maintain full light output on surviving lamps if one or more lamps
fail.
Ballasts for Low -Temperature Environments:
1. Temperatures 0 deg F and Higher: Electronic or electromagnetic
type rated for 0 deg F minus 17 deg C starting temperature.
HIGH -INTENSITY -DISCHARGE LAMP. BALLASTS
A. General: Comply with NEMA C82.4 and UL 1.029. Shall include the
following features, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Type: Constant -wattage autotransformer or regulating high -power -
factor type.
2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22 deg F Minus 30 deg C
for single -lamp ballasts.
3. Normal Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F40 deg C.
4. Open -circuit operation that will not reduce average life.
B. High -Pressure -Sodium Ballasts: Solid-state igniter/starter with an average
life in pulsing mode of 10,000 hours at an igniter/starter-case temperature
of 90 deg C.
FLUORESCENT LAMPS (PERMANENT)
A. Low -Mercury Lamps: Comply with Federal toxic characteristic leaching
procedure test, and yield less than 0.2 mg of mercury per liter, when
tested according to NEMA ILL 1.
B. T8 rapid -start low -mercury lamps, rated 32 W maximum, 2800 initial
lumens (minimum),. CRI of 75 (minimum), color temperature of 3500 K,
and average rated life of 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated.
HIGH -INTENSITY -DISCHARGE LAMPS
A. High -Pressure -Sodium Lamps: NEMA C78.42, wattage and burning
position as scheduled, CRI 21 (minimum), color temperature 1900, and
average rated life of 24,000 hours.
Rev. 3/22/07 PROJECT # 07712 16511 - Page 3

2.06 FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS
A. Comply with Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods"
for channel- and angle -iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle
supports.
B. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch- minimum diameter, cadmium -plated, threaded
steel rod.
2.07 FINISHES
A. Fixtures: Manufacturers' standard, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Paint Finish: Applied over corrosion -resistant treatment or primer,
free of defects.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls.
3.02 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's
published torque -tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are
not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and
components.
B. Verify normal operation of each fixture after installation.
C. Corroded Fixtures: During warranty period, replace fixtures that show any
signs of corrosion.
END OF SECTION
Rev. 3/22/07 PROJECT # 07712 16511 - Page 4

SECTION 16990 HVAC SYSTEMS
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to
this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Electric Unit Heaters.
2. Exhaust Fans.
3. Control Dampers.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical. Components Devices and Accessories: Listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
B. Comply with the North Carolina State Building Code.
C. Comply with NFPA 90A,
1.04 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, and openings with general construction
work and arrange in building structure during progress of construction to
facilitate the HVAC installations that follow.
1. Set inserts and sleeves in poured -in -place concrete, masonry work,
and other structural components as they are constructed.
B. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing HVAC materials and
equipment for efficient flow of the Work.
Rev. 3/22/07 PROJECT # 07712 16990 - Page 1

PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS
A. General: Electric unit heaters shall be factory -packaged, with steel cabinets,
electric heating elements, fan and motor assemblies, and integral thermostat
control.
B. Cabinets: Cabinets shall be of welded sheet metal construction, with oven -
baked enamel exterior finish. An internal shroud shall be provided around
the heating elements to ensure uniform air flow and delivery temperature
across the entire face of the heater. The control compartment shall have a
hinged and latched access door. Louvers shall be individually adjustable for
directional control of air flow.
C. Heating Elements: Heating elements shall be coiled nickel chromium
resistance wire encased in MgO, with a copper -clad steel sheath with steel
fins. Fins shall be continuously brazed to the sheath.
D. Motors: Motors shall be totally -enclosed, permanently lubricated, matched to
the fan load.
E. Controls: Units shall have factory -installed integral thermostats, with a
temperature range of 40 to 90 degrees F. Units shall have automatic reset
limit control to cut-off power to the heater elements in an over -temperature
situation.
2.02 EXHAUST FANS
A. General: Exhaust fans shall be axial sidewall type, bearing AMCA Certified
Ratings Seals for both sound and air performance. Select fans according to
the schedule and wall openings indicated on the drawings.
B. Propellers: Propellers shall be constructed with fabricated steel or aluminum
blades and hubs. A standard square key and set screw or tapered bushing
shall lock the propeller to the motor shaft. Propellers shall be statically and
dynamically balanced.
C. Motors: Motors shall be permanently lubricated, heavy-dutytype, matched to
the fan load. Motor drive frame assemblies and fan panels shall be
galvanized or painted steel.
2.03 CONTROL DAMPERS
A. General: Control dampers shall have 5" x 1" x 16-gage galvanized steel hat
channel frames with reinforced corners, 16-gage galvanized steel parallel -
action blades, and exposed linkages and actuators. Actuators shall fully
Rev. 3/22/07 PROJECT # 07712 16990 - Page 2

open dampers when energized, and shall spring -return to the closed position
when de -energized.
B. Damper Operating Temperature Limits: -25 degrees F to +180 degrees F.
C. Actuator: Two -position, spring -return (when de -energized), 120VAC, with
torque rating sufficient for operating dampers. Operating temperature limits:
-40 degrees F to +135 degrees F.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 HVAC EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not
indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide the
maximum possible headroom.
B. Materials and Components: Install level, plumb, and parallel and
perpendicular to other building systems and components, unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or
replacement of components. Connect for ease of disconnecting, with
minimum interference with other installations.
D. Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required
slope.
E. Install support devices to securely and permanently fasten and support
HVAC components.
F. Install all conductors in raceway.
G. Install all equipment according to manufacturer's recommendations and
instructions.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect installed components for damage and faulty work. Replace defective
components.
3.03 REFINISHING AND TOUCHUP PAINTING
A. Refinish and touch up paint.
Rev. 3/22/07 PROJECT # 07712 16990 - Page 3

1. Clean damaged and disturbed areas and apply primer, intermediate,
and finish coats to suit the degree of damage at each location.
2. Follow paint manufacturer's written instructions for surface
preparation and for timing and application of successive coats.
3. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc -rich paint
recommended by manufacturer.
4. Repair damage to paint finishes with matching touchup coating
recommended by manufacturer.
3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. On completion of installation, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt,
paint spots, and construction debris.
B. Protect equipment and installations and maintain conditions to ensure that
coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time
of Substantial Completion.
Rev. 3/22/07
END OF SECTION
PROJECT # 07712 16990 - Page 4

DESIGN CALCULATIONS
SANTEETLAH LAKESIDE
PHASE II WASTEWATER SYSTEM
IBEX THUNDERBIRD L.L.C.
GRAHAM COUNTY, NORTH CAROLINA
PREPARED BY: DAVID L. HONEYCUTT, E.I.
REVIEWED BY: HARRY B. BUCKNER, P.E.
gMcGill
SEAL
Engineering • Planning • Finance 3 22541
Post Office Box 2259
Asheville, North Carolina 28801 %9�,0 946'; "1Z%
MARCH 2O07
07712
3,2?•Zw'7

Design Flow
The proposed system is intended to serve 13- 2 bedroom houses, a 1,500 SF food stand,
and a bathhouse facility to serve 25 persons.
Facility Type
Quantity
Flow/Unit
Units
Total
2 Bedroom Home
13 dwellings
120 gpd
Bedroom
3,120 gpd
Food Stand
1500 SF
50 gpd
100 SF
750 gpd
Bathouse
25 persons
10 gpd
Person
250 gpd
Total
4,120 gpd
Treatment System
Wastewater will be beneficially reused for irrigation of a natural area on the project site.
Therefore treatment must meet standards for NC beneficial reuse under 15A NCAC 2T
.0906 In order to use standard tank sizes and treatment units size treatment system for
5,000 gpd. Irrigation system will be sized based on the above design flow of 4,120 gpd.
Effluent Requirements
BODS < 10 mg/1 Monthly Average and < 15 mg/1 daily maximum
TSS < 5 mg/1 monthly average and <1.0 mg/1 daily maximum
NH3 < 4 mg/1 monthly average and < 6 mg/1 daily maximum
Fecal Coliform < 14/100 ml monthly average < 25/100 ml daily maximum
Proposed treatment system shall consist of a primary settling (septic) tank, flow
equalization basin, two bioclere treatment units, filter dosing tank, pressure dosed sand
filters, and UV disinfection.
Primary settling (septic) tank volume shall sized for V = Q or minimum 5,OOO gpd
Verify Aquapoint Bioclere Unit BOD and NH, removal
The proposed system involves the use of one model 24/20 and one model 24/24 Bioclere
unit. The first Bioclere Unit shall reduce the BOD5 to less than 50 mg/1 and oxidize 30%
of the influent ammonia. The second Bioclere unit shall further reduce the BODS to less
than 10 mg/1 and the ammonia to < 3 mg/l.
Q = 5,000 gpd
Assuming 20% removal of BOD in primary septic tank
Influent BODS = Si = 300 mg/l * .80 = 240 mg/1
Recirculation rate = 50%
Pg. 1

Calculate Organic Loading to Stage 1 Bioclere unit
Lbs BOD5 / day = influent from primary tank + recirculation
= 5,000 GPD * 8.34 Ibs/gal * 240 mg/1 / 1 x 106 mg / liter water + 0.50 * 5,000 gpd
8.34 * 10 mg/I (effluent concentration) / 1 x 106 =10.2 lbs of BODS / day
Bioclere Model 24/20 contains 247 ft3 of 42.8 ft2/ft3 surface area random packed plastic
media.
Loading rate =1bs BOD / day / ftZ media surface area
Loading rate = 10.2 / (247 *_ 42.8 / 1,000) = 0.9651bs / 1,000 ft2-day
Model BOD5 removal for stage 1 Bioclere unit
q = hydraulic loading rate (gpm / f1) = [k2o D O`-2°/ In (S; / Se)
(Ref. WEF Design of Municipal Wastewater Treatment Plants Volume 1 pg 733)
k2o = filter coefficient = kpN (6.1/D)03 * (150 / Si )o.s
where k2o = 0.203 (L/s)0 5 / m2 at D = 6.1m
Depth correction factor used is for filters less than 10 ft deep
(Ref. WEF Design of Municipal Wastewater Treatment Plants Volume 1 pg 726)
k2o = 0.203 * (6.1 / (6.083 / 3.281))0.3 * (150 / 240)0-5 = 0.229 (L/s)o.s / m2
k2o= 0.085 gpmo.s/ftZ
Ot-20 = temperature coefficient = 1.035-5 = 0.842
D = filter depth = 6.083 ft
q = [0.085 * 6.083 * 0.842 / In (240/50)12
q = 0.077 gpm/ft2
Calculate proposed hydraulic loading rate
q = Design flow / ft2 of filter area
= (5,000 gpd / 1,440 min/day) / 82 * 7n/4 = 0.069 gpm / ft2
Proposed design flow rate for stage 1 is lower than calculated flow rate therefore stage is
conservatively designed.
Calculate Organic Loading to Stage 2 Bioclere unit
Lbs BODS / day = influent from primary tank + recirculation
= 5,000 GPD * 8.34 lbs/gal * 50 mg/I / 1 x 106 mg / liter water+ 0.50 * 5,000 gpd * 8.34
* 10 mg/I (effluent concentration) / 1 x 106 = 2.291bs of BOD5 / day
Pg. 2

Bioclere Model 24/24 contains 318 ft3 of 66.2 ft2/ft surface area random packed plastic
media.
Loading rate = lbs BOD / day / ft2 media surface area
Loading rate = 2.29 / (318 * 66.2 / 1,000) = 0.109 lb / 1,000 ftZ-day
Model BOD5 removal for stage 2 Bioclere unit
q = hydraulic loading rate (gpm / ft2) = [k2o D 0t-20/ In (Si / Se)
(Ref. WEF Design of Municipal Wastewater Treatment Plants Volume 1 pg 733)
k20 = filter coefficient = k,20 (6.1/D)0.3 (depth)* (150 / Si) "' (loading)
where k 20 = 0.203 (L/s)0 5 / m2 at D = 6.1m
Depth correction factor used is for filters less than 10 ft deep
(Ref. WEF Design of Municipal Wastewater Treatment Plants Volume 1 pg 726)
k2o = 0.203 * (6.1 / (7.83 / 3.281))0 3 * (150 / 50)0 5 = 0.466 (L/s)o.5 / m2
kZo= 0.173 gpmo.5/ftz
0�-20 = temperature coefficient = 1.035-5
D = filter depth = 7.83 ft
q = [0.173 * 7.83 * 0.842 / In (50110)12
q = 0.502 gpm/ftz
Calculate proposed hydraulic loading rate
q = Design flow / ftz of filter area
= (5,000 gpd / 1,440 min/day) / 82 * 7c/4 = 0.074 gpm / ftz
Proposed design flow rate for stage 2 is lower than calculated flow rate therefore stage is
conservatively designed.
Model Nitrogen Removal in First Stage Bioclere
Determine the Specific TKN removal Rate (Metcalf and Eddy Wastewater Engineering
40i edition pg 924)
Assume 10% TN removal in the septic tank therefore influent to first stage Bioclere is 45
mg/l + recycle =.
R = 0.82(BOD/TKN)"0 44 = Rn = 0.82(240/45)-o 44 = 0.39 g/m2-d
Surface area = 7 in media at 140 m2/m3 = 980 m2
Nitrogen removal = 980 m2 * 0.39 g/m2-d = 382.2 g/day = 0.841bs/day
Pg. 3

0.84 / (0.005*8.34) = 2034 mg/1 removed
Therefore first stage effluent Nitrogen = 45 mg/l — 20.34 mg/1= 24.66 mg/1
Model Nitrogen Removal in Second Stage
R = 0.82(BOD/TKN)-044 = R„ = 0.82(50/24.66)-0.44 = 0.60 g/m2-d
Surface area = 9 m3 media at 230m2/m' = 2070 mZ
Nitrogen removal = 2070 in * 0.60 g/mZ-d = 1242 g/day = 2.741bs/day
2.741bs/day is greater than the remaining TKN in solution. Therefore trickling filters are
conservatively designed for ammonia of less than 4 mg/1.
Size Filter feed and backwash tanks
Per manufacturer each pump requires 300 gallons minimum for backwash and filter feed.
Therefore with duplex system each tank requires a minimum of 600 gallons.
Determine Solids Production
Per Metcalf and Eddy Wastewater Engineering 3rd Edition pg 773 Trickling Filter sludge
production is typically 0.6 lbs/1000 gallons.
4,120 gpd * 365 days/year * 0.6 lbs/1000 gallons = 902.28 lbs
Sludge will be digested anaerobically in the 5,000 gallon septic tank. Typically septic
tanks can accumulate solids up to 3-5% dependant on the type of sludge, effluent filters
used, etc. Use 3% solids for conservative value
902.28 lbs/ (0.03 * 7.48 * 1.05) = 3829.4 gallons of solids per year at 3% Therefore 5,000
gallon septic tank is more than adequate for sludge storage.
Irrigation Area
The drip field will consist of 4 zones with a total of 4,955 LF of drip lines.
4955 LF/ 2 LF/emitter = 2,477 emitters
2,477 emitters * 8 sq. ft. per emitter = 19,816 SF = 0.45 acres
Per Southeast Soil Science the average surface K-sat is 16.3 gpd/sf and the average
subsurface K-sat is 10.7 gpd/sf. The proposed system will utilize the 4,120 gpd of
im

wastewater flow projected to be produced for irrigation in this area. This will result in a
irrigation rate of 0.21 gpd/sf which is less than 2% of the K-sat.
Drip System Design
Since the system consists of 4 zones design for dosing two zones simultaneously and
flushing one zone.
Zone Physical Characteristics
Zone
Laterals
Drip Line
Length
Highest Lateral
Elevation
Lowest Lateral
Elevation
1
4
1,179 ft -
1852
1844
2
4
1,165 ft
1864
1856
3
5
1,346 ft
1876
1866
4
5
1,265 ft
1888
1878
Zone Hydraulic Characteristics from Dri net, output files attached
Zone
Dosing Flow
Dosing
Headloss
Flushing Flow
Flushing
Headloss
1
5.95 gpm
8.72 ft
12.57 gpm.
63.98 ft
2
5.88 gpm
8.54 ft
12.49 b m
62.84 ft
3
6.79 gpm
7.59 ft
15.54 gpm
59.62 ft
4
6.38 gpm
5.60 ft
14.63 gpm
49.87 ft
Ref. Dripnet2 Computer Modeling Program written by Steven Berkowitz, NCDENR
System will dose in groups of 2 zones (Zone 1 and Zone 3, Zone 2 and Zone 4).
Zone 1 and Zone 3 dosing flow rate = 5.95 gpm + 6.79 gpm = 12.74 gpm
Zone 2 and Zone 4 dosing flow rate = 5.88 gpm + 6.38 gpm = 12.26 gpm
Determine Dose Volume
Dose system a maximum of 6 times per day. 4,120 gpd/ 6 = 687 gallons per dose
Doses will be an average of 55 minutes long each. For a total of 5.5 hours of irrigation
time at design flow.
Store a minimum of 1 dose in the dosing tank. Dosing tank is 8' diameter precast tank.
8^2*pi/4 *7.48 gal/cf= 376 gallons per vertical foot. Provide 2' vertical storage for dose
volume.
Determine Pump Head Conditions
System headloss = filter headloss + supply headloss + zone headloss + return headloss
Pg. 5

Pump head conditions = Static head + system headloss + residual pressure required
Example for Zone 1
Per American Manufacturing maximum filter headloss = 10 psi
Supply headloss = 10.57 Ol.ss L
C,1.85 D4.87
Where Q = flow (gpm)
C = Friction coefficient
D = pipe diameter (in)
L = pipe length (ft)
Dosing Supply Headloss =
Dosing Supply Headloss = 8.40 ft
Flushing Supply Headloss =
Flushing Supply Headloss = 8.20 ft
10.57 12.7418' 340
120185 1.484.87
10.57 12.5718' 340
1201.85 1.484.87
Zone Headloss' are listed in the table above.
Return headloss = 10.57 Ol.ss L
C.1.85 D4.87
Return Dosing headloss = 0 because there is 0 flow in the return header during dosing
Return Flushing Headloss = 10.57 6.621.85 160
1201.85 0.914.87
Return Flushing Headloss = 12.58 ft
Limiting conditions are the maximum pressure during dosing at the beginning of the
lowest lateral and the minimum pressure required for flushing the highest lateral in a
zone. Pump shall be sized to provide the appropriate flow with these constraints on head.
For Zone 1 Maximum Dosing Pump Hydraulic Grade = lowest lateral elevation(1844) +
filter headloss(23.1) + Dosing Supply Headloss(8.40) + maximum pressure
allowable(138.6)
Zone 1 Maximum Dosing Pump Hydraulic Grade = 2014.10 ft
UM

For Zone 1 Minimum Flushing Pump Hydraulic Grade = highest lateral elevation(1852)
+ filter headloss (23.1) + flushing supply headloss(8.20) + zone flushing headloss (63.98)
+ minimum end of zone pressure (Greatest of Septic Tank WL - Zone high point or 23.1)
+ return flushing headloss (12.58)
Zone 1 Minimum Flushing Pump Hydraulic Grade=1997.86 ft
See attached table for Zones 1 - 4 hydraulics calculations.
Based on calculations presented in the attached table size pump for a minimum of
1996.08 hydraulic grade elevation at 15.54 gpm and a maximum of 2014.10 hydraulic
grade elevation at 12.74 gpm
Pump off Elevation in dosing tank = 1875.0'
Therefore pump heads required: 1996.08 - 1875.0=121.08' minimum at 15.54 gpm
2014.10—1875.0=139.10' maximum at 12.74 gpm
See attached spreadsheet for equalization pump headloss calculations.
Buoyancy Calculations
Septic Tank
Proposed septic tank is 16' x 8' x 6' h and weighs a total of 65,900 lbs. Displaced water
= 16' * 8' * 6' *62.4 lbs/cf = 47,923 lbs. Therefore Septic tank has a safety factor of
65,900/47,923, SF =1.38
Irrigation Storage Tanks
Irrigation Storage Tanks are 10' x 20' x 10.5'. Structures have 8" walls with 10" top and
bottom slabs. Weight of top and bottom slabs = 2 * 10' * 20' * 0.83' * 150 lbs/cf =
49,8001bs. Weight ofwalls = 0.66'* 10.5'*(10+10+20+20)*150lbs/cf=62,370lbs
Total Structure weight = 112,170 lbs, Structure will be completely buried with a
minimum of 4.5' of soil covering the structure. 4.5' * 10 * 20 * 120 lbs/cf soil = 108,000
lbs. Therefore Total weight = 220,170 lbs
Displaced water= 10' * 20' * 10.5' * 62.41bs/cf= 131,040
Safety factor = 220,170/131,040 =1.68
Reiect Storage Tanks
Reject Storage Tanks are 10' x 20' x 7.5'. Structures have 8" walls with 10" top and
bottom slabs. Weight of top and bottom slabs = 2 * 10' * 20' * 0.83' * 150 lbs/cf =
49,800lbs. Weight of walls =0.66'*7.5'*(10+10+20+20)*150lbs/ef=44,550lbs Total
Pg. 7

Structure weight = 94,350 lbs, Structure will be completely buried with a minimum of
4.5' of soil covering the structure. 4.5' * 10 * 20 * 120 lbs/cf soil = 108,000 lbs.
Therefore Total weight = 202,350 lbs
Displaced water = 10' * 20' * 7.5 * 62.4 lbs/cf = 93,600
Safety factor = 202,350/93,600 = 2.16
Aquapoint Bioclere Units are buoyant if installed in groundwater and are recommended
by the manufacturer to be encased on concrete for these installations. Due to the
topographic location and based on no water table being found during soil investigation it
has been assumed that the groundwater table is highly unlikely to be a factor in this
installation and therefore no protective action is necessary.
See attached spreadsheet for Equalization Pump Station, Filter Feed Tank,
Backwash Tank, and Dosing Pump Station
N

Santeetlah Lakeside
Flow Equalization Pumos Head Calruiatinnc
SYSTEM .CHARACTERISTICS
L, Force Main Length (ft)
351
Pump Off Elev. (ft)
1 1879.35
D, Force Main Diameter (in)
1 1889
Q, Peak Flow (gpm)
1 30.001
C, Friction Coefficient
1 120
Note: Hazen Williams Friction Coefficient Maximum per NC Design Criteria, DIP (Initial Service 125, End of
Service 100), PVC (Initial Service 140, End of Service 120), HDPE (Initial Service 140, End of Service 120).
For Force Mains with multiple pipe materials use a weighted average friction coefficient.
TDH = Head static + Head friction + Head minor
The friction loss in the force main can be represented as:
Head friction = 10.57 Q'-85 L / (C'-8' D4.87)
Friction Headloss (ft)
10.57 * Q (30.o0gpm)A1.85 * L (35 ft) / (C (120)A1.85
* D 2 inches)A4.87)
0;97
Static Head (ft)
High Point Elev. 1889 ft) -Pump Off Elev. (1879.35 ft)l
965
e minor osses ue to va ves an fittings can a represente as:
Head L = K VZ/2g
The following valves and fittings, and associated K values, are included in the flow path of the piping
system with one pump running:
Minor Losses
Quantity
K value
K * Quantity
90 degree bends
2
0.8
1.6
45 degree bends
6
0.4
2.4
Gate valves
0
0.2
0
Plug valves
0
0.2
0
Check Valves
1
2.5
2.5
Tee flow through run
0
0.61
0
Tee flow through branch)
1
1.8
1.8
Exit 1 1 1
Total K 9.3
Flow Velocity through Force Main (fps) Q 30.Ogpm / Area of 2 inch Force Main 106
Total Minor Headloss: (ft) Total K 9.3) * V 3.06)A2 / 2 1.36
Total Dynamic Head: (ft)
Friction Head (1.0 ft)+Static Head(9.7 ft)+ Minor
Headloss 1.4ft
1.198
Pump OperatingPoint: r 30 gO"m @ 1198 ft TDN

w�u
IBM
ME
off

iv Series SEA
.: " E
2" Spherical Solids Handling
www.cranepumps.com Manual & Automatil
1 % ", 2" & 3" Discharg(
DISCHARGE...............................2"
NPT, Female, Vertical, Bolt -on Flange
LIQUID TEMPERATURE............
1047 (40°C) Continuous
VOLUTE ......................................
Cast Iron ASTM A-48, Class 30
MOTOR HOUSING .....................
Cast Iron ASTM A-48, Class 30
SEAL PLATE .............................
Cast Iron ASTM A-48, Class 30
IMPELLER: Design ...................
2 Vane, open, with pump out vanes on
back side. Dynamically balanced, ISO G6.3
Material .................
Cast Iron ASTM A-48, Class 30
SHAFT .......................................
416 Stainless Steel
SQUARE RINGS .........................
Buna-N
HARDWARE ...............................
300 Series Stainless Steel
PAINT ..........................................
Air Dry Enamel
SEAL: Design ...................
Single Mechanical
Material ..................
Carbon/Ceramic/Buna-N
Hardware -300 Series Stainless
CORD ENTRY .............................
15 ft. (5m) Cord with plug on 120 volt &
.5HP, 240 volt, 1 phase. Quick connect
custom molded for sealing and strain relief
SPEED ........................................
1750 RPM (Nominal)
UPPER BEARING .......................
Single Row, Ball, Oil lubricated
Load .......................
Radial
LOWER BEARING ......................
Single Row, Ball, Oil lubricated
Load ....................... Radial & Thrust
MOTOR: Design ................... NEMA L -Single Phase, NEMA B -Three
phase Torque Curve, Oil Filled, Squirrel
Cage Induction
Insulation ...............
Class B
SINGLE PHASE ..........................
Permanent Split Capacitor (PSC)
Includes Overload Protection in Motor
THREE PHASE ...........................
200-2401480 is Tri-Voltage notor 600V.
Requires overload Protection to be
included in control panel
LEVEL CONTROL ......................
"A" -Wide Angle, PVC, Mechanical,
15 ft (5m) cord with Piggy -Back Plug, N/O
"AU"- Wide Angle, Polypropylene,
Mechanical, N/O Integral to pump.
ON and OFF Points are adjustable
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT............
Seal Material, Impeller Trims, Additional
cord, Normally Closed Temperature Sensors with cord for 3 phase pumps
(Requires relay in control panel),
Series: SE (SE51 & SE52)
.51 .75, 1.0HP5 1750RPM,
60Hz
MEMBER
C caus
CSA 108
UL 778
LR16567
Sample Specifications: Section 1 Page 5.
DESCRIPTION:
SUBMERSIBLE NON -CLOG SEWAGE PUMP
DESIGNED FOR TYPICAL RAW SEWAGE
APPLICATIONS
(;RQN E PUMPS & SYSTEMS SECTION 1
PAGE 13
® DATE 6ID4
ACrane Co. Company USA: [phone] Canada: [phone] International: [phone]..J

Series SE-L
2" Spherical Solids Handling
Manual & Automatic
z'; 2" & 3" Discharge
www.cranepymps.com
SE51, SE52, SE-L
SE51A, SE52A
SE51AU, SE52AU
Inches
12
12.(3
1163
(mm)
I�fi15 15o
(36)
(321) fi25 1.59
r (159) (36)
(321)
5
(1
(38)
I
4B8
(124)
4.86
(124)
a
(124)
-
- 9.75
9.75
9.75
(248)
(248)
-
-
(248)
O
p
O
(473
(4'%33
)
(]3) 1473)
I
6.66
(169)
6.66
(169)
i
(6fi9)
I
�
MODEL NO
PART NO
HI
VOLT/PH
Hz
RPM
NEMA
FULL
LOCKED
CORD
CORD
CORD
(Nora)
START
LOAD
ROTOR
SIZE
TYPE
O.D
CODE
AMPS
AMPS
inch(mm)
SE51
104871
1 0.5
12011
60
1750
F
11.6
21.3
1413
SJTOW
0.375 (9.5)
SE51A
104872
1 0.5
120/1
60
1750
F
11.6
21.3
1413
SJTOW
0.375 (9.5)
SE51AU
104873
1 0.5
120/1
60
1750
F
11.6
21.3
14/3
SJTOW
0.375 (9.5)
SE52
104874
1 0.5
24011
60
1750
J
5.9
14.9
14/3
SOW
0.530 (13.5)
SE52AU
104875
0.5
24011
60
1750
J
5.9
14.9
1 14/3
SOW
0.530 (13.5)
SE594L
104881
0.5
200-240/3
60
1750
H/L
3.2/3.0
9.8111.0
14/4
SOW
0.570 (14.5)
SE544L
0.5
48013
60
1750
K
1.5
5.3
14/4
SOW
0.570 (14.5)
SE554L
0.5
600/3
60
1750
H
1.0
3.4
1414
SOW
0.570 (14.5)
SE774L
0.75
200-240/1
60
1750
G/K
7.4/7.0
21.5/25.8
14/3
SOW
0.530 (13.5)
SE794L
0.75
200-240/3
60
1750
H/K
4.814.5
13.7/15.4
14/4
SOW
0.570 (14.5)
SE744L
]1048891.0
0.75
_ 480/3
60
1750
K
2.2
7.7
14/4
SOW
0.570 (14.5)
SE754L
0.75
600/3
60
1750
L
1.5
7.2
14/4
SOW
0.570 (14.5)
SE1074L
1.0
200-24011
60
1750
D/G
8.8/8.3
21.5/25.8
14/3
SOW
0.530 (13.5)
SE1094L
1.0
200-240/3
60
1750
E/H
5.1/4.9
13.7/15.4
1414
SOW
0.570 (14.5)
SE1044L
1.0
480/3
60
1750
H
2.4
7.7
1414
SOW
0.570 (14.5)
SE1054L
1.0
600/3
60
1750
J
1.9
7.2
14/4
SOW
0.570 (14.5)
Mechanical Switch on SE51A, cord 16/2, SJOW, 0.320 (8.tmm) O.D., Piggy -Back Plug
Mechanical Switch on SE -AU, cord 14/2, SJOW,
0.345 (8.8mm) O.D.
IMPORTANT!
1.) PUMP MAYBE OPERATED -DRY' FOR EXTENDED
PERIODS WITHOUT DAMAGE TO MOTOR AND/OR SEALS.
2.) THIS PUMP IS APPROPRIATE FOR THOSE APPLICATIONS SPECIFIED AS CLASS I DIVISION II HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS.
I 1 THIS PUMP IS NOTAPPROPMATE FOR TH
OSEAPPLICATIONS SPECIFIEDAS CLASS I DIVISION I HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS.
INSTALLATIONS SUCH AS DECORATIVE FOUNTAINS OR WATER FEATURES PROVIDED FOR VISUAL ENJOYMENT MUST BE INSTALLED INACCORDANCE
WITH THE NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE ANSI/NFPA 70 AND/OR THE AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION. THIS PUMP IS NOT INTENDED FOR USE IN
SWIMMING POOLS, RECREATIONAL WATER PARKS, OR INSTALLATIONS IN WHICH HUMAN CONTACT WITH PUMPED MEDIA ISA COMMON OCCURRENCE.
SECTION 113�RAIV
PAGE 14 PUMPS &SYSTEMS
DATE 6/04
A Crane Co. Company USA: [phone]
• Canada: [phone] • Intemational: [phone]

Santeetlah Lakeside
Flow Equalization Wet Well Buoyancy Calculations
Pump Station Diameter (ft.):
8
Wall Thickness in.):
8
Top Slab Thickness (in.):
8
Bottom Slab Thickness (in.:
8
Bottom Slab Extends in.):
10
Depth ft):
15.15
Density of Concrete (Iblc :
150
Density of Sat. Soil (lb/cf):
120
Outside Diameter (ft.) =
PS Diameter (8ft) + 2 * wall thickness (8 in/12)
=
9.33
Bottom Slab Diameter ft.) =
outside diameter 9.33 ft) + (2 x B.S. Extends (10 in/12))
=
11.00
Volume:
Top Slab (co =
Outside Diameter 9.33 ft ^2 * pi / 4 * T.S. Thickness (81n/12)
=
45.6
Bottom Slab (cf) =
B.S. Diameter 11.00 ft ^2 * pi / 4 * B.S. Thickness 8iN12)
=
63.4
Walls (co _
(OS Dia. (9.33 ft)^2 - PS Dia. (8 ft)^2) * pi / 4 * W. thickness
(8in/12) * Depth (15.15ft)
=
183.3
Weight of Pump Station:
Top Slab (Ibs.) =
Tob Slab Volume 45.6 cf) * Density of Conc. 150 Ib/cf)
=
6,841.7
Bottom Slab (Ibs.) =
Bottom Slab Volume 63.4 cf) * Density of Conc.(150 Ib/cf)
=
9,503.3
Walls (Ibs.) =
walls volume (183.3 Cf) * Density of Conc.(150 Ib/cf)
=
27,499.4
Total Weight lbs.) =
T.S, weight (6841.7 Ibs) + B.S. weight (9503.3 Ibs) + walls
weight (27499.4 Ibs)
=
43,844.4
Saturated soil over extended slab:
Volume (c =
(B.S. Dia.(11.00 ft)^2 - Outside Dia. (9.33 ft)^2) * pi / 4
Depth(15.15 ft)
=
403.2
Weight (Ibs.) =
soil volume (403.2 cf) * soil density (120lbs/cf)
=
48,388.4
Buoyancy Force of Displaced Volume:
Density of water Ibs/cf):
62.4
Volume Displaced (cf)=
O.S. Dia. (9.33 ft)^2 * pi/4 * (depth (15.15 ft) + B.S. Thickness (8
in/(12 in/ft)) * B.S. Dia. (11 ft)^2 * pi/4
=
1,099.9
Buoyancy Force lbs.) =
Displaced Volume 1099.9 cf) * density of water 62.4lbs/cf)
=
68,632.0
Safety Factor =
( P.S. weight (43844.4lbs) + Soil (48388.4)) / Buo. Force
(68632.0lbs)
=
1.34
If greater than 1, then not Buoyant

Santeetlah Lakeside
Filter Feed Tank Buoyancy Calculations
Pump Station Diameter ft):
5
Wall Thickness (in.):
5
Top Slab Thickness in.:
6
Bottom Slab Thickness in.):
6
Bottom Slab Extends in.:
8
Depth ft.):
12.5
Density of Concrete (lb/co:
150
Density of Sat. Soil Ib/c :
120
Outside Diameter ft.) =
PS Diameter 5ft + 2 * wall thickness 5 W12)
=
5.83
Bottom Slab Diameter ft. =
outside diameter 5.83 ft) + (2 x B.S. Extends (8 in/12))
=
7.17
Volume:
Top Slab (cf) =
Outside Diameter 5.83 ft)^2' i / 4 * T.S. Thickness 61n/12)
=
13.4
Bottom Slab c =
B.S. Diameter 7.17 ft)^2 * pi ! 4 * B.S. Thickness (6in/12)
=
20.2
Walls (c =
(OS Dia. (5.83 ft)^2 - PS Dia. (5 ft)^2) * pi / 4 ' W. thickness
(5in/12) * Depth (12.5ft)
=
36.9
Weight of Pump Station:
Top Slab (Ibs.) =
Tob Slab Volume (13.4 co * Density of Conc.(150 Ib/cf)
=
2,004.4
Bottom Slab Ibs.) =
Bottom Slab Volume (20.2 c * Density of Conc.(150 Ib/cf)
13,025.4
Walls lbs.) =
walls volume 36.9 c * Density of Conc. 150 Ib/cf)
=
5,539.4
Total Weight (Ibs.) =
T.S. weight (2004.4 Ibs) + B.S. weight (3025.4 Ibs) + walls
weight (5539.4 Ibs)
=
10,569.2
Saturated soil over extended slab:
Volume (co =
(B.S. Dia.(7.17 ft)^2 - Outside Dia. (5.83 ft)^2) * pi /4 '
Depth(12.5 ft)
=
170.2
Weight lbs.) =
soil volume 170.2 c * soil density 120lbs/c
=
20,420.4
Buoyancy Force of Displaced Volume:
Density of water Ibs/c :
62.4
Volume Displaced c =
O.S. Dia. (5.83 ft)^2 * pi/4 * (depth (12.5 ft) + B.S. Thickness (6
in/(12 in/ft)) * B.S. Dia. (7.17 ft)^2 * pi/4
=
354.2
Buoyancy Force Ibs. =
Displaced Volume 354.2 c * density of water (62.4lbs/cf)
=
22,104.4
Safety Factor =
( P.S. weight (10569.21bs) + Soil (20420.4)) / Buo. Force
(22104.41bs)
=
1.40
If greater than 1, then not Buoyant

Santeetlah Lakeside
Filter Backwash Tank Buoyancy
Pump Station Diameter (ft.):
5
Wall Thickness (in.):
5
Top Slab Thickness (in.):
6
Bottom Slab Thickness (in.):
6
Bottom Slab Extends in.:
8
Depth ft):
8.6
Density of Concrete (lb/cf):
150
Density of Sat. Soil Ib/cf):
120
Outside Diameter ft.) =
PS Diameter 5ft + 2 ` wall thickness 5 in/12)
=
5.83
Bottom Slab Diameter ft. =
outside diameter (5.83 ft) + (2 x B.S. Extends 8 in/12))
=
7.17
Volume:
Top Slab c =
Outside Diameter 5.83 ft ^2' i / 4 ` T.S. Thickness 6in/12
=
13.4
Bottom Slab c =
B.S. Diameter (7.17 ft)^2 ' pi / 4 ` B.S. Thickness 6in/12)
=
20.2
Walls c =
(OS Dia. (5.83 ft)^2 - PS Dia. (5 ft)^2) ' pi 14 ' W. thickness
(5in/12)' Depth (8.6ft)
=
25.4
Weight of Pump Station:
Top Slab (Ibs.) =
Tob Slab Volume 13.4 cf)' Density of Conc.(150 Ib/cf)
=
2,004.4
Bottom Slab lbs.) =
Bottom Slab Volume 20.2 cf)' Density of Conc.(150 Ib/cf)
=
3,025.4
Walls (Ibs.) =
walls volume 25.4 c ` Density of Conc. 150 Ib/cf)
=
3,811.1
Total Weight Ibs.) =
T.S. weight (2004.4 Ibs) + B.S. weight (3025.4 Ibs) + walls
weight (3811.1 Ibs)
=
8,840.9
Saturated soil over extended slab:
Volume cf) =
(B.S. Dia.(7.17 ft)^2 - Outside Dia. (5.83 ft)^2) ' pi / 4 '
Depth(8.6 ft)
=
117.1
Weight (Ibs.) =
soil volume 117.1 c ' soil density 120lbs/cf)
=
14,049.2
Buoyancy Force of Displaced Volume:
Density of water (Ibs/cf):
62.4
Volume Displaced c =
O.S. Dia. (5.83 ft)^2' pi/4' (depth (8.6 ft) + B.S. Thickness (6
in/(12 in/ft))' B.S. Dia. (7.17 ft)^2' pi/4
=
250.0
Buoyancy Force lbs. =
Displaced Volume 250.0 c ` density of water 62.4lbs/c
=
15,600.5
Safety Factor =
( P.S. weight (8840.9lbs) + Soil (14049.2)) / Buo. Force
(15600.51bs)
=
1.47
If greater than 1, then not Buoyant

Santeetlah Lakeside
Drip Dosing Wet Well Buoyancy Calculations
Pump Station Diameter ft.):
6
Wall Thickness in.:
6
Top Slab Thickness (in.:
8
Bottom Slab Thickness in.:
8
Bottom Slab Extends in.):
8
Depth (ft.:
18.5
Density of Concrete Ib/cf):
150
Density of Sat. Soil Ib/cf):
120
Outside Diameter ft.) =
PS Diameter 6ft+ 2 " wall thickness 6 in/12
=
7.00
Bottom Slab Diameter ft. =
outside diameter 7.00 ft + 2 x B.S. Extends 8 in/12)
=
8.33
Volume:
Top Slab cf) =
Outside Diameter 7.00 ft)^2 " i / 4 " T.S. Thickness (Bin/12)
=
25.7
Bottom Slab c =
B.S. Diameter 8.33 ft)^2 " pi / 4 ' B.S. Thickness (8in/12)
36.4
Walls (cp =
(OS Dia. (7.00 ft)^2 - PS Dia. (6 ft)^2) " pi 14 " W. thickness
(6in/12) " Depth (18.5ft)
=
94.4
Weight of Pump Station:
Top Slab (Ibs.) =
Tob Slab Volume 25.7 co " Density of Conc.(150 Ib/cf)
=
3,848.5
Bottom Slab (Ibs.) =
Bottom Slab Volume (36.4 cf) " Density of Conc.(150 Ib/cf)
=
5,454.2
Walls (Ibs.) =
walls volume (94.4 cf) " Density of Conc.(150 Ib/cf)
=
14,166.6
Total Weight Ibs.) =
T.S. weight (3848.5 Ibs) + B.S. weight (5454.2 Ibs) + walls
weight (14166.6 Ibs)
=
23,469.2
Saturated soil over extended
slab:
Volume (c =
(B.S. Dia.(8.33 ft)^2 - Outside Dia. (7.00 ft)^2) " pi / 4 "
Depth(18.5 ft)
=
297.1
Weight lbs.) =
soil volume 297.1 cf) " soil density 1201bs/cf)
=
35,646.6
Buoyancy Force of Displaced Volume:
Density of water (Ibs/co:
62.4
Volume Displaced c =
O.S. Dia. (7.00 ft)^2 " pi/4 " (depth (18.5 ft) + B.S. Thickness (8
in/(12 in/ft)) " B.S. Dia. (8.33 ft)^2 " pi/4
=
748.3
Buoyancy Force Ibs.) =
Displaced Volume 748.3 co " density of water 62.4lbs/cf)
=
46,695.4
Safety Factor =
( P.S. weight (23469.2lbs) + Soil (35646.6)) / Buo. Force
(46695.4lbs)
If greater than 1, then not Buoyant

SANTEETLAH LAKESIDE
Drip Irrigation System Calculations
Zone 1
Zone 2
Zone 3
Zone 4
Linear Feet of Drip Lines
1,179
1,165
1,346
1,265
Emitter Flow pm
5.95
5.88
6.79
6.38
Minimum Flushing Flow ( m)
12.57
12.49
15.54
14.63
Return Flushing Flow g m)
6.62
6.61
8.75
8.25
Zone Dosing Headloss ft
8.72
8.54
7.59
5.6
Zone Flushing Headloss (ft)
63.98
62.84
59.62
49.87
Zone Hi h oint Elevation
1852
1864
18761
1888
Zone Lowpoint Elevation
1844
1856
1866
1878
Supply Dosing Headloss ft
8.40
7.02
6.92
5.76
Supply Flushing Headloss ft
8.20
7.27
9.99
7.98
Return Flushing Headloss (ft)
12.58
10.19
4.26
3.13
Maximum Dosing Pump Head
2014.10
2024.72
2034.62
2045.46
Minimum Flushing Pump Head
1997.86
1993.40
1996.08
1995.18

„ Z10UT.ASC
"SUMMARY OF INPUTS:”
"NUMBER OF LATERALS — ,4,"INPUT FILE NAME ","","zl.asc"
"TOTAL LAT. LENGTH, FEET = ","","",1179,"OUTPUT FILE NAME :" "" "Z10ut. dsC"
"INSIDE DIAMETER, INCHES = ",,::::,.57,"EMITTER SPACING, FEET
"EMITTER FLOW, GPH = , .61,"MIN. SCOUR VEL. _","","",2
"INLET LAT. NUM. _ ","","",1,"OUTLET LAT. NUM
"PRECISION, HARDY CROSS = ","","",7.504728E-05,"OVERALL =
" "" "" 0005
"HEAD LOSS AD3. FACTORS
,SUP. MAN. = ","",1,"RET. MAN. = ",­',1,"LATS. _
"LATERAL -NETWORK DETAILS"
"LATNUM ","LENGTH ","NUMLPS ","INFLOW ","EMFLOW ","OUTFLOW ","OUTVEL "
1,294,0,3.141509,1.48433,1.657179,2.08187
2,298,0,3.133126,1.504663,1.628462,2.045794
3,296,0,3.138386,1.494497,1.64389,2.065175
4,291,0,3.154014,1.463997,1.690017,2.123124
11.1
"MANIFOLD NETWORK DETAILS"
1.11
"MANNUM ","INDIA ","INLEN ","INFLOW " "INVEL " "OUTDIA " ","OUTFLOW
"OUTFLOW
","OUTVEL " ,
1,1.48,8,9.425527,1.75637,.91,10,-1.657176,-.8168075
2,1.48,6,6.2924,1.172538,.91,5,-3.285635,-1.619461
3,1.48,4.5,3.154014,.5877249,.91,4.5,-4.929522,-2.429718
11.1
"SUMMARY OF OUTPUTS:"
"FLUSHING FLOW, SUPPLY SIDE,GPM=","","","",12.56704," EMITTER FLOW, GPM
,","","",5.952583 .
"RETURN FLUSHING FLOW, GPM=',"","","",6.614452
"MANIFOLD VOLUME, GALLS=","","","",2.31215," LATERAL VOLUME, GALLS
% 15.62873
"TOTAL NETWORK VOLUME, GALLS=","","","",17.94088," NETWORK FILL TIME, MINS.
_ "","","",1.427614
"LONGEST LATERAL DETENTION TIME WHEN FLUSHING, MINUTES.
"' "" "" 1.659221
"FLUSHING CONDITIONS:"
"SUPPLY MAN. HL., FEET = ","","","",.1215078," RETURN MAN. HL., FEET =
111.1. '"","",.2802851
"LAST LAT. HL., FEET = ","","","",63.84132," FIRST LAT. HL., FEET =
63.7112
"CLOCKWISE LOOP HL. _ "1""1""1"",63.96283," COUNTER -CLOCKWISE HL
","" "","",63.99148
"MEAN TOTAL HEAD LOSS = ","","","",63.97716," VARIANCE
111.,"","",4.478504E-04
11.1
"IRRIGATION CONDITIONS:"
"SUPPLY MAN. HEAD LOSS = ","","","",3.039989E-02," LONGEST LATERAL HL. _
"" "' 8.687368
"TOTAL NETWORK HL. = " "" "" "" 8.717769
,, ,,
"RUN DATA"
"TOTAL ITERATIONS "",24," INITIAL ITERATIONS
� "_
6
"NUM OF FLOW INCREMENTS = ","","","",1," TOTAL FLOW INCREMENT, GALLS. _
2464123
Page 1

Z20UT.ASC
"SUMMARY OF INPUTS:"
"NUMBER OF LATERALS = "","",4,"INPUT FILE NAME "" "z2.asc"
"TOTAL LAT. LENGTH, FEET = ," ',",1165,"OUTPUT FILE NAME :","","z2out.asc"
"INSIDE DIAMETER, INCHES = ","",".57,"EMITTER SPACING, FEET = ", , ,2
"EMITTER FLOW, GPH = ","","',.61,"MIN. SCOUR VEL. "" "" 2
"INLET LAT. NUM. _ ","","""OUTLET LAT. NUM=","","",4
"PRECISION, HARDY CROSS 1. "- = 1.743392E-04 "OVERALL
_
"HEAD"".0005 LOSS ADD. FACTORS "
SUP. MAN. = ","",1,"RET. MAN. _ ","",l,"LATS.
"LATERAL NETWORK DETAILS"
11.1
"LATNUM ","LENGTH ","NUMLPS ","INFLOW ","EMFLOW ","OUTFLOW ","OUTVEL "
1,286,0,3.130501,1.443664,1.686837,2.119129
2,295,0,3.11451,1.48433,1.630179,2.047951
3,296,0,3.113231,1.494497,1.618734,2.033572
4,288,0,3.136205,1.45383,1.682375,2.113523
"MANIFOLD NETWORK DETAILS"
"MANNUM ","INDIA ","INLEN ","INFLOW ","INVEL ","OUTDIA ","OUTLEN ","OUTFLOW
"OUTVEL
1,1.48,5.5,9.363944,1.744895,.91,12,-1.686834,-.8314257
2,1.48,5,6.249435,1.164531,.91,7.5,-3.311927,-1.63242
3,1.48,12,3.136205,.5844064,.91,9,-4.930657,-2.430278
"SUMMARY OF OUTPUTS:"
"
"FLUSHING FLOW, SUPPLY SIDE,GPM=","","","",12.49445," EMITTER FLOW, GPM
_,"',5.881417
'RETURN FLUSHING FLOW, GPM,,6.613029
"MANIFOLD VOLUME, GALLS=",,,,2.973702," LATERAL VOLUME, GALLS
„ 15.44315 „
"TOTAL NETWORK VOLUME, GALLS =", , ,18,41685," NETWORK FILL TIME, MINS.
,"","",1.474003
"LONGEST LATERAL DETENTION TIME WHEN FLUSHING, MINUTES.
"FLUSHING CONDITIONS:"
"SUPPLY MAN. HL., FEET = ","","","",.0992308," RETURN MAN. HL., FEET =
","","","",.4875072
"LAST LAT. HL., FEET = ","","","",62.75122 " FIRST LAT. HL., FEET =
,,"","",62.33158
"CLOCKWISE LOOP HL. = ","","","",62.85046," COUNTER -CLOCKWISE HL =
,"","","",62.81909
"MEAN TOTAL HEAD LOSS - ","","","",62.83477 VARIANCE
"",""'4.991574E-04 -
"IRRIGATION CONDITIONS:"
"SUPPLY MAN. HEAD LOSS = ","","","",2.470905E-02," LONGEST LATERAL HL. _
","",8.516918
"+OTAL NETWORK HL. _ ","","","",8.541627
"RUN DATA"
"TOTAL ITERATIONS = ","","";"",14," INITIAL ITERATIONS =
"
"NUM. OF FLOW INCREMENTS = "","","",1," TOTAL FLOW INCREMENT, GALLS. _
",I'll1.,111
11 '.2449889
Page 1

z30UT.ASC
"SUMMARY OF INPUTS:"
"NUMBER OF LATERALS = ,5,"INPUT FILE NAME :","","z3.asc"
"TOTAL LAT. LENGTH, FEET = "",.".,1346,"OUTPUT FILE NAME :',"","z3out.asc"
"INSIDE DIAMETER, INCHES = ","","",.57,"EMITTER SPACING, FEET
"EMITTER FLOW, GPH = ","","",.61,"MIN. SCOUR VEL. _","","",2
"INLET LAT. NUM. _ "," "",1,"OUTLET LAT. NUM=","","",5
"PRECISION, HARDY CROSS = ","","",2.355063E-05,"OVERALL =
11 ,,,. "" .0005
"HEAD LOSS ADJ. FACTORS "
„SUP. MAN. = " "" 1 "RET. MAN. = " ""
,,,, , 1, "CATS.
"LATERAL NETWORK DETAILS"
„„
"LATNUM ","LENGTH " "NUMLPS ","INFLOW ","EMFLOW ","OUTFLOW ","OUTVEL "
1,284,0,3.073661,1.433497,1.640164,2.060494
2,274,0,3.094633,1.382664,1.711969,2.150702
3,268,0,3.107981,1.352164,1.755817,2.205787
4,261,0,3.129922,1.311497,1.818424,2.284439
5,259,0,3.137525,1.301331,1.836194,2.306762
"MANIFOLD NETWORK DETAILS"
"MANNUM ","INDIA ","INLEN ","INFLOW
","INVEL ","OUTDIA
"OUTVEL
1,1.48,6.5,12.47006,2.323694,1.17,9,-1.64016,-.4890446
2,1.48,10,9.375424,1.747034,1.17,5,-3.352126,-.9994994
3,1.48,6,6.267447,1.167888,1.17,6,-5.10794,-1.523028
4,1.48,5.5,3.137525,.5846522,1.17,5,-6.921279,-2.063709
"SUMMARY OF OUTPUTS:"
"FLUSHING FLOW, SUPPLY SIDE,GPM=","","","",15.54372,"
_ "",rill,",6.791334
"RETURN FLUSHING FLOW, GPM=","","","",8.752388
"MANIFOLD VOLUME, GALLS=","","","",3.898591,"
'" "","","",17.84247
"TOTAL NETWORK VOLUME, GALLS=","","","",21.74106,"
"","",1.398704
"LONGEST LATERAL DETENTION TIME WHEN FLUSHING MINUTES.
„„
rill ,, „ rill
1.597294
"FLUSHING CONDITIONS:"
","OUTLEN ","OUTFLOW
EMITTER FLOW, GPM
LATERAL VOLUME, GALLS
NETWORK FILL TIME, MINS.
SUPPLY N. HL., FEET = ","","","",.2587481," RETURN MAN. HL., FEET =
","",rill,"',.1952147
"LAST LAT. HL., FEET = ", rill, rill, rill, 59.34795," FIRST LAT. HL., FEET =
","","","",59.43972
"CLOCKWISE LOOP HL. _ "1""1""1""159.6067," COUNTER -CLOCKWISE HL =
","","","",59.63494
"MEAN TOTAL HEAD LOSS = ",rill, rill, "",59.62082," VARIANCE
", rill , rill, "",4.736634E-04
"IRRIGATION CONDITIONS:"
"SUPPLY MAN. HEAD LOSS = ","","","",5.329656E-02," LONGEST LATERAL HL.
,"", rill, "",7.540358
TOTAL NETWORK HL. _ ","","","",7.593654
"RUN DATA"
�,,,,, ,�,�r„„ „ -
TOTAL ITERATIONS = 58 INITIAL ITERATIONS -
1. rill 24
"NUM. OF FLOW INCREMENTS = ","","","",2," TOTAL FLOW INCREMENT, GALLS. _
",rill,1.11.11
, 1.11 '.7923374
Page 1

z40UT.ASC
"SUMMARY OF INPUTS:"
"NUMBER OF LATERALS = ","","",5 "INPUT FILE NAME
„„ „z4.asc"
"TOTAL LAT. LENGTH, FEET = 1265, OUTPUT FILE NAME :","","z4out.asc"
"INSIDE DIAMETER, INCHES = "", .57,"EMITTER SPACING, FEET
"EMITTER FLOW, GPH = ,,.61,"MIN. SCOUR VEL. _","","",2
"INLET LAT. NUM. _ ","","",1,"OUTLET LAT. NUM ="
"PRECISION, HARDY CROSS = ","","",2.355063E-05 "OVERALL
"" .0005 =
"HEAD LOSS ADJ. FACTORS "
„SUP. MAN. = ","",l,"RET. MAN. _ ","",l,"LATS.
11.1
"LATERAL NETWORK DETAILS"
Ifil
"LATNUM ","LENGTH ","NUMLPS ","INFLOW ","EMFLOW ","OUTFLOW ","OUTVEL "
1,257,0,2.917392,1.291164,1.626228,2.042988
2,255,0,2.921098,1.280997,1.640101,2.060416
3,254,0,2.919803,1.280997,1.638805,2.058788
4,252,0,2.925438,1.270831,1.654607,2.078639
5,247,0,2.942694,1.240331,1.702363,2.138633
"MANIFOLD NETWORK DETAILS"
"MANNUM ","INDIA ","INLEN ","INFLOW ","INVEL ","OUTDIA " "OUTLEN ","OUTFLOW
","OUTVEL "
1,1.48,5.5,11.70903,2.181883,1.17,5.5,-1.621143,-.4833742
2,1.48,12,8.787934,1.63756,1.17,8,-3.256159,-.9708849
3,1.48,8,s.868133,1.093479,1.17,5,-4.89496,-1.459525.
4,1.48,6,2.942694,.5483471,1.17,4,-6.549566,-1.952876
IM
"SUMMARY OF OUTPUTS:"
"FLUSHING FLOW, SUPPLY SIDE,GPM=","","","",14.62643," EMITTER FLOW, GPM
"" "" "" 6.379583
"RETURN FLUSHING FLOW, GPM=,","","",$.246842
"MANIFOLD VOLUME, GALLS=","","","",4.071753," LATERAL VOLUME, GALLS
_ "","", ,16.76874
"TOTAL NETWORK VOLUME, GALLS=","","","",20.84049," NETWORK FILL TIME MINS.
_' "","","",1.424852
"LONGEST LATERAL DETENTION TIME WHEN FLUSHING, MINUTES.
1.499584
"FLUSHING CONDITIONS:"
"SUPPLY MAN. HL., FEET = ","","","",.242095 " RETURN MAN. HL. FEET =
' �
"" .1621982
"LAST LAT.HL., FEET = ","","","",49.61243," FIRST LAT. HL., FEET
1. ","",49.71694
"CLOCKWISE LOOP HL. _ ","","",""149.85452 " COUNTER -CLOCKWISE HL =
„ I'll'" I
,,"",49.87914
'MEAN TOTAL HEAD LOSS = ","","","",49.86683 VARIANCE
"' , 4.935631E-04
"IRRIGATION CONDITIONS:"
"SUPPLY MAN. HEAD LOSS = ","","","",5.126137E-02," LONGEST LATERAL HL. _
" I'll
"SUPPLY
TOTAL NETWORK HL. _ ","","","",5.606754
"RUN DATA"
"TOTAL ITERATIONS = ","","","",45," INITIAL ITERATIONS
"NUM. OF FLOW INCREMENTS = ","","","",1," TOTAL FLOW INCREMENT, GALLS. _
',"","",.2867932
Page 1

Section R — Reliability
This project is designed with a back-up power generator sized to operate the entire waste
treatment and disposal facility.

OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE PLAN
Phase II Wastewater System, Santeetlah Lakeside
IBEX Thunderbird, L.L.C.
Graham County, NC
System Description: Treatment system consists of a 5,000 gallon septic tank, flow
equalization pump station, two (2) Bioclere trickling filter/settling tanks in series, two (2)
automatic backwash sand filters and two (2) Ultraviolet Light Disinfection Systems. The
effluent will be disposed of by a surface drip irrigation system for a forested area on the
property. An auto -dialer is provided to notify the operator of high water alarms, drip
system failure, pump failures, or a power outage.
The influent wastewater enters the septic tank where solids, trash and grit will be settled
out and anaerobically digested. The septic tank will also act as sludge storage for the
system. The wastewater flows from the septic tank to the flow equalization pump station
by gravity and is pumped to the Bioclere trickling filters on a timed dose basis to
minimize peak flows. The chemical feed system is connected to the flow equalization
flow meter and should be adjusted as necessary to maintain pH at 7-8 in the effluent.
The Bioclere trickling filters consist of a baffled settling tank under a plastic media
trickling filter. Each Bioclere unit contains two dosing pumps that alternate pumping
flow to the trickling filter. A third pump in each unit returns sludge collected in the
settling tank to the septic tank. From the Bioclere Units the wastewater flows by gravity
into the automatic backwash filter feed tank. The sand filters use suction lift pumps to
draw water from the filter feed tank to the filters and then direct flow to the ultraviolet
light disinfection system. Backwash is initiated automatically for the sand filters when
the filter pressure is high. Backwash water is drawn from the filter backwash tank and is
directed to the septic tank for treatment.
The turbidimeter draws a continuous sample from the ultraviolet light system channel to
determine turbidity. If turbidity exceeds 10 NTU then the turbidimeter sends a signal to
the automatically actuated valves to direct flow to the reject storage tank. Treated
wastewater meeting the 10 NTU standard is directed to the filter backwash tank and
overflows by gravity to the drip system dosing tank.
The drip system dosing tank is connected to the effluent storage tanks (4 - 15,000 gallon
tanks) by a gravity line that allows flow to fill both the effluent storage tanks and the
dosing tank equally. The dosing tank will pump the flow through the drip system
hydraulic unit which contains automatically actuated valves controlled by the drip system
control panel. The drip hydraulic unit will direct flow to two (2) of the four (4) system
zones simultaneously when dosing and will record flow irrigated in the zones. The drip
system will automatically flush the drip lines one zone at a time based on the number of
doses discharged. Water flushed through the drip lines will be returned the septic tank for
treatment. Drip system shall not be utilized during freezing temperatures or precipitation
events.
General Maintenance:
All components of the system should be inspected at a minimum on a weekly basis.
Inspections shall include verification that all pumps are operational. Any pumps that are
not performing properly should be repaired or replaced as quickly as possible. Determine
Operations and Maintenance Plan Pg. I

if water levels are normal and storage capacity remaining. If water levels are abnormal
verify appropriate valves are open and lines are not clogged. pH levels should be
monitored and chemical feed system for pH adjustment calibrated as necessary to
maintain 7-8 pH in the system.
Treatment Units Maintenance Descriptions
A. Septic Tank Maintenance:
Septic tank shall be pumped by a septage hauler a minimum of one (1) time
per year. During septic tank pumping the effluent filter shall be removed
and inspected. Effluent filter should be cleaned or replaced as necessary.
B. Flow Equalization Pump Station Maintenance:
Pump flow rates should be monitored if any significant decrease in flow
occurs pump should be pulled and inspected for wear. Wetwell should be
pumped down and hosed out a minimum of once per year to prevent solids
accumulation.
C.- . Treatment System
Refer to manufacturer's recommendations for maintenance of Aquapoint
Bioclere Trickling Filters, Automatic Backwash Sand Filters, and
Ultraviolet Light Disinfection System.
D. Drip Irrigation System
Drip irrigation system shall be inspected visually a minimum of once per
week. Operator shall walk the field and check for any wet areas or other
signs of damaged lines a minimum of once per quarter. Operator should
-monitor flows to each zone carefully and note any increases that may
indicate damaged lines or decreases in flow that could indicate a clogging
problem.
Operations and Maintenance Plan Pg. 2

03/26/2007 09:22 8299263576 TOWN NIABGIE VALLEY PAGE 02
,[wn of Maggie „S Y _' i' S
phone [phone]/Fax[phone]Sow Ron d M-OeValtey,14f <aieA
office of the Town Manager
March 26, 2007
Mr. Jose Rosado, President
IBEX 1-hunderbird LLC
Sameetlah Lakeside Development
90 Old Lodge Road
Lake Santeetlali, North Carolina 28771
RE: Acceptance of Wastewater Residuals
Sautectlah Lakeside Development
Dear Mr. Ro,,ado:
By way of this letter, the Town of Maggie Valley hereby agrees to your request to accept
approximately 5000 gallons of septic tank and attached growth process residuals per year from
the treatment system built to serve your residential development. Our acceptance of these
residuals is conditional upon the following criteria:
• The quantity of residuals is limited to 5000 gallons per year at a concentration of no more
than 4% solids concentration.
• All deliveries of residuals must be coordinated with our treatment plant staff in order to
accommodate processing the residuals in a manner that coordinates with our on -going
treatment process. This may include receiving multiple deliveries throughout the year.
instead of a single delivery per year,
• All residuals received will be subject to the same usage fees and testing criteria as any
other sepiage waste received by the Town of Maggie Valley.
• Your operation will be responsible for all residuals transportation costs to our facility.
Should you have any questions concerning this residuals acceptance letter, please do not
hesitate to call me.
Sincerely,
-Z -Ecclt�
TIM BARTH, TOWN MANAGER
cc: Harry Buckner, PE, McGill Associates, PA
Mike Mebaffey, Maggie Valley Public Works Director
03/26/2007 51ON 09:22 [TX/RX NO 82611 ID002

Section U — General
The following general comments are made:
• This projected is not located within the Costal Area as defined in 15A NCAC 2H .0400:
• The design of this system complies to all State and Federal rules and regulations.
• There are no other approvals required for the completion of construction of this project.
• Please find attached on the following page a copy of the local flood map for the project
site. Please note that all facilities are located outside of the mapped flood boundary.
• An application for approval of the wastewater collection system will be applied for
separately from this application.

147
Snnleel/all
Dam
EA
S.4,VTEETL.4 H L 4 K
1147
ZONE C
147
EC
APPROXIMATE SCALE
2000 0 2000 FEET
C
NATIBNAL FLOOD INSURANCE PROGRAM
FIRM
FLOOD INSURANCE RATE MAP
GRAHAM COUNTY,
NORTH CAROLINA
(UNINCORPORATED AREAS)
PANEL 25-OF 100
COMMUNITY -PANEL NUMBER
370105 0025 B
EFFECTIVE DATE:
JULY 17, 1986
Federal Emergency Management Agency
: ints is an mnnai copy we pomon mine acme rerereneed rood map. m
ZONE A ;; was exbected using F-MITOn4Jne. This map does not reflect changes
.y...y or amendments which may have been made euterequent to the date on the
Y Hall For the latest product Information abeul National Flood liniment
Romm m flood macs check the FEMA Flood Mad Store at w .msc.(ema.i

Michael F. Easley, Governor
William G. Ross Jr., Secretary
North Carolina Department of Environment and Natural Resources
Alan W. Klimek, P.E. Director
Division of Water Quality
April 11, 2007
JOSS F. ROSADO —PRESIDENT
IBEX THUNDERBIRD, LLC
95 MERRICK WAY, #610
CORAL GABLES, FLORIDA 33134
Subject: Application No. WQ0031396
Additional Information Request
Santeetlah Lakeside — Phase H
Wastewater Treatment and
Reclaimed Utilization System
Graham County
Dear Mr. Rosado:
The Central and Regional Aquifer Protection Section's Express Reviewers have completed their review
of the subject permit application package. Additional information is required before we may continue our
review. Please address the following items no later than the close of business on April 25, 2007.
Please be aware that you are responsible for meeting all requirements set forth in North Carolina rules and
regulations. Any oversights that occurred in the review of the subject application package are still the
responsibility of the,applicant. In addition, any omissions made in responding to the above items may
result in future requests for additional information.
Please reference the subject application number when providing the requested information. Three (3)
copies of all revised and/or additional documentation should be signed, sealed, dated, and submitted to
the address below. One (1) copy of all revised and/or additional documentation should be signed, sealed,
dated, and submitted to Rich Hayes in the Raleigh Regional Office. Please note that failure to provide
this additional information on or before the above requested date may result in your application being
returned as incomplete.
If youhave any questions regarding this request, please do not hesitate to contact me at [phone].
Thank you for your cooperation.
Sincerely,
XZIX4, S`�6
Nathaniel D. Thornburg
Environmental Engineer Il
cc: Richard D. Hayes, LSS — Raleigh Regional Office, Aquifer Protection Section
Harry B. Buckner, PE — McGill Associates, PA
John B. Allison, LSS — Southeast Soils Science, Inc.
Edwin Stott, LSS — Soil and Environmental Consultants, PA
Permit Application File WQ0031396
NorthCarolina
Aaturdly
North Carolina Division of Water Quality 1636 Mail Service Center Raleigh, NC 27699-1636 Phone [phone] Customer Service
Internet: www.newaterquality.org 2728 Capital Boulevard Raleigh, NC 27604 FAX [phone]
An Equal Opportunity/Affirmative Action Employer — 50% Recycled/10% Post Consumer Paper

Mr. Jose Rosado
April 11, 2007
Page 2 of 10
Application:
1. Upon submittal of the additional information prior to the close of business on Wednesday, April 250',
please submit a check made payable to the Department of Environment and Natural Resources in the
amount of $1,253. Failure to provide this check by 5:00 pm on April 25"' shall result in the
immediate return of the application package. Failure to provide all requested additional information
items shall result in an automatic additional information request.
2. Application Item IV(2) states that beneficial reuse will be achieved by irrigating a common garden
and natural amenity areas. The Division was unable to find any information in the application
package concerning a common garden, nor any information that specifically demonstrated that this
water would be used in a beneficial manner such that waters of the State will be, conserved by
reducing the use of a water resource (i.e., potable water, surface water and groundwater) per Rule
15A NCAC 2T .0901. The Division will classify the subject disposal area as a reclaimed utilization
area if and only if the following changes are incorporated, thus making the utilization area a genuine
beneficial reuse as required in 15A NCAC 2T .0901. Therefore, the following issues shall be
addressed:
✓ The common area, walking trails etc. shall be classified as a recreational amenity to the
Santeetlah Lakeside Subdivision, and treated by the Homeowner's Association (HOA) as such.
✓ The plat map shall be delineated to include the exact location of the recreational amenity, noted
as the responsibility of the HOA and shall be recorded in the Graham County Register of Deeds.
✓ The agronomist's report shall be amended to include nutrient calculations (e.g., Nitrogen and
Phosphorus loading) for the proposed recreational amenity consisting of native species and those
to be planted. In addition, the reportshall include nitrogen uptake information for all proposed
vegetation.
✓ The irrigation area shall be expanded to include the entire recreational amenity (except for the
required setbacks), not just a portion of the proposed amenity.
✓ The Declaration of Covenants, Bylaws, etc. shall be amended to include information about the
proposed recreational amenity. At a minimum, this information shall include the residential
owners financial responsibilities to upkeep and maintain the recreational amenity through a
contracted landscaping company. In addition, a budget shall be provided showing how much
each residential owner must annually pay to maintain the recreational amenity. The Division
understands that these documents may not be available at the present time, therefore, the permit
will be issued as construction only, and the appropriate documents shall be submitted prior to the
Division approving operation of the subject facility.
✓ The Division is concerned that the recreational amenity has not been designed to (1) encourage
public use of the utilization area and to (2) protect the equipment from the public. If the public is
intended to have access to the entire utilization area, the Division strongly recommends that low
impact pop-up sprinklers be installed that can be programmed to irrigate during off -use hours. If
the Applicant insists on using drip irrigation tubing, how does the Applicant intend on preventing
the public from damaging the drip irrigation tubing? If drip irrigation tubing shall be used, the
Division strongly recommends that the Applicant consult a licensed North Carolina Landscape
Architect to properly design the layout of the utilization area such that the utilization equipment is
protected from the public, and vice versa.

Mr. Jose Rosado
April 11, 2007
Page 3 of 10
Application (continued):
✓ A specific landscape plan shall be provided showing the exact location and type of all native
trees, and the proposed vegetation. This plan shall correspond to the submitted plan sheets,
agronomist report and irrigation calculations. The number and species proposed in the landscape
plan should be such so that the utilization of the treated wastewater for irrigation will satisfy the
requirement in 15A NCAC 2T .0901 that the treated wastewater be used in a beneficial manner
for the purpose of conservation of the state's water resources by reducing the use of a water
resource.
✓ The Division recommends that a specific entrance point with a sign stating what the recreational
amenity is intended for be provided.
✓ Demonstrate that the proposed vegetative cover requires irrigation water in order to survive (i.e.,
irrigation is needed in addition to natural precipitation).
If the Applicant is unable to meet the above criteria, then the project shall be classified as a
Wastewater Irrigation System and shall meet the.requirements in 15A NCAC 2T .0500. .
3. Amend Application Item IV(5) to include the 100-year flood plain elevation and its source.
4. Application Item IV(8) states that there are four ultraviolet (LTV) disinfection banks and eight total
lamps. However, the plans and specifications cite two UV banks and 4 total lamps. Please clarify
and amend as necessary.
5. Amend Application Item V(2)(f) to include the specification page numbers for the relevant pumps. In
addition, amend this item to include information concerning the chemical feed pumps.
6. Application Item V(2)(g) states that no blowers are specified; however, Rule 15A NCAC 2T .0908(b)
requires that the flow equalization basin be aerated. How does the Applicant intend on complying
with this Rule? Please note that variances in the Express Review Program are not allowed, and Item
III(2) on'FORM APSERPR 12-06 states that this project does not include any variances to the 15A
NCAC 2T Subchapter.
7. Application Item VII(5) states that the Soil Scientist recommended loading rates are 0.72 in/hr and .
176 in/yr. However, the Division could not find these recommendations in the submitted reports from
Southeast Soil Scientist, Inc. dated February 23, 2007 and June 21, 2001. Please explain.
8. Amend Application Item VII(7), the plans and specifications to include information regarding public
warning signage. The utilization area shall include signs warning the public that the reclaimed water
is non -potable and not intended for human contact. Amend the plans to include a detail of the
proposed signs and provide their approximate location.
Amend Application Item VII(11) to include the soil series of the irrigation area. Provide references
for the removal rate of 360 lbs/acre of nitrogen and 205 lbs/acre of phosphorus (Note that these values
are not consistent with those provided by the Agronomist). In addition, provide the proposed
mineralization and volatilization rates (Note the volatilization rate should be minimal since this water
is drip irrigated). Finally, this item states that the site is nitrogen limited and requires a minimum
irrigation area of 22,748 fe; however, only 19,820 fe is proposed. Please explain.

Mr. Jose Rosado
April 11, 2007
Page 4 of 10
Property Ownership Documentation:
Per Rule 15A NCAC 2T .0905(f), provide the deed for the proposed 1,500 ftz food stand. If the
owner of this land is not the same as IBEX Thunderbird, LLC, either: (1) amend the application and
all applicable forms to include both entities as the Applicant or (2) change the deed ownership to
IBEX Thunderbird, LLC.
Soil Evaluation:
1. The submitted soil scientist reports, dated February 23, 2007 and June 21, 2001, are for a subsurface
disposal system. Please submit a new Soil Scientist Evaluation that has been prepared under the
requirements of Rule 15A NCAC 2T .0905(b), which is for non -conjunctive reclaimed surface
irrigation systems. Please ensure that a North Carolina licensed soil scientist signs, seals and dates
this report, and that all parts of the above -mentioned rule are addressed. Failure to complete the four
requirements under Rule 15A NCAC 2T .0905(b) shall result in another additional information
request.
2. The Division is concerned that at the currently designed irrigation rate, the irrigated water may move
down slope laterally in the soil and exit the cut slope above the access road at the base of the hill.
Please address this issue. Non -discharge permits do not allow any wastewater runoff to enter the
waters of the state.
3. Please submit copies of the KsAT data worksheets for review.
Water Balance:
Amend the water balance to include the field determined KsAT values from the updated Soil Scientist
Report. The existing water balance uses an average of all of the KsAT values from the subsurface
system's soils report. Please note that the KsAT used in the water balance shall be the geometric mean
(excluding outliers) of the most limiting horizon, not the average of all the tests. In addition, if the
KsAT reduction factor changes from the previous water balance, please provide justification for the
change.
2. Has the Applicant considered requesting that the permit include seasonal flows, and not an annual
flow? During the submittal meeting, it was mentioned that the development would most likely have
low flows during off-season months. The Division feels that it may be of benefit to the Applicant if
the permit is structured for seasonal flow. This would reduce the amount of storage necessary,
especially during the winter; reduce the irrigation rate; reduce the amount of nutrients irrigated; etc.
Agronomist Evaluation:
1. The conclusions in the report are based upon the assumption that 33,000 square feet are available for
irrigation while Application Item VII(10)(b) lists the total drip utilization design area as 19,820
square feet. Revise the report so that all calculations are based on the actual size and loading rate of
the drip irrigation areas.
2. The calculations for nitrogen only deal with total nitrogen. When revising calculations, break the
nitrogen down into its components (i.e. TKN, ammonia, nitrate, nitrite) and calculate the amount of
plant available nitrogen (PAN).

Mr. Jose Rosado
April 11, 2007
Page 5 of 10
Agronomist Evaluation (continued):
3. Please provide further documentation to support the loading rates recommended in the report. The
Division is concerned that the proposed application rate of nitrogen is too high and could lead to a
violation of 2L groundwater standards as well as impact Santeetlah Lake. Please note a publication
from the North Carolina Cooperative Extension Service recommends 70 to 100 lbs/acre/year of plant
available nitrogen for hardwood trees.
4. The vegetation in the proposed drip irrigation area consists almost entirely of hardwood trees. Please
address how nitrogen will be utilized during the winter months when these trees are dormant. What is
the maximum agronomic rate of nitrogen that can be applied during the growing season versus the
winter months? If evergreen plants are added to the landscaping plans please address how they will
affect the agronomic rate.
5. The report recommends that the low cation -exchange capacity of the soil be addressed by the addition
of 25-30 pounds of lime per 1000 square feet. Is a uniform surface application of lime feasible in a
wooded area that averages 48 percent slope? If lime is surface applied, how long will it take until the
ph of the major rooting zone of the hardwood trees is raised?
6. What impacts if any can be expected on the health of the hardwood forest by the addition of the
design annual loading rate of reclaimed water? (Currently 122.2 inches per year)
Detailed Plans:
➢ General Plans
1. Per Application Instruction N, amend the plans to include the location and details of the requited
precipitation / soil moisture sensor.
➢ Plan Sheet G3
1. Amend the hydraulic profile to include the elevation of the highest emitter.
2. The hydraulic profile shows the Bioclere recycle flow and sand filter backwash re-entering the
treatment system upstream of the septic tank. However, other plan sheets show these lines
directly entering the septic tank through knockouts. Please explain.
3. Amend the profile to include the drip irrigation system backwash line that returns to the septic
tank.
4. Amend the 5-day upset and wet weather storage tanks to include the interconnection piping
elevations.
5. Amend the recycle lines from the Bioclere units to the septic tank to include the recycle flow in
percent (i.e., 0.5Q or 50% of Q).
6. The flow equalization basin is listed as 2,000 gallons. Please amend to read 3,750 gallons.

Mr. Josh Rosado
April 11, 2007
Page 6 of 10
Detailed Plans (continued):
7. What is the rationale for designing the flow equalization tank downstream of the septic tank? Has
the Applicant considered placing the flow equalization upstream of the septic tank and installing
an overflow -weir prior to the septic tank that the equalization tank pumps to? The Division is
concerned'that due to high recycle rates and large flows during morning and early evening hours,
the amount of treatment time and treatment effectiveness in the septic tank will be reduced.
➢ Plan Sheet C1
1. Amend the plans to include the influent lines from the proposed food stand and marina bathhouse.
2. Lot 26 is proposed to be constructed on an existing distribution box and septic tank. How will the
distribution box and septic tank be abandoned? Will the system be capped or entirely removed.
Please explain.
3. Lots 19 and 20 proposed footprint lies on top of an existing septic drain field. Will this drain
field remain in service, or will its associated waste be tied into the proposed system?
4. Amend the plans to include the proposed property lines and structures for Lots 28, 29, 30, 33 and
34.
5. Amend the plans and details to include an access road to the proposed wastewater treatment plant.
6. Please explain the force main that terminated west of the proposed wastewater treatment plant.
7. Amend this sheet to include a legend.
8. Amend the wastewater treatment plant schematic to include the Bioclere recycle lines, the sand
filter backwash lines and the drip irrigation backwash line.
➢ Plan Sheet C2
1. Please explain the proposed chemical feed (i.e., what and where it is feeding, the intend of the
chemical, pumps, etc.)
2. Provide a detail showing how the two backwash lines are connected, and provide a detail showing
how the backwash line connects to the floor drain.
➢ Plan Sheet C3
1. The plans depict 8-inch diameter knockouts, however, Rule 15A NCAC 18A .1954(a)(4) requires
a maximum of 6-inch diameter knockouts and pipes. Please amend the septic tank and flow
equalization tank as necessary.
2. Verify how deep the effluent filter extends into the wastewater. Please note that Rule 15A NCAC
18A .1954(a)(6) requires the filter to extend into the water 25 to 40% of the liquid depth.
3. Rule 15A NCAC 18A .1954(a)(9) requires the baffle to terminate 2 inches below the tank lid;
however, the plans show that the gap is 3 inches. Please amend.
4. Rule 15A NCAC 18A .1954(a)(9) requires the baffle to be 4 inches in height and run the width of
the tank. The proposed design .utilizes five 6-inch holes. Please amend.

Mr. Jose Rosado
April 11, 2007
Page 7 of 10
Detailed Plans (continued):
5. Amend the septic tank detail to show where the Bioclere recycle line, filter backwash line and
drip irrigation backwash line enter the septic tank.
6. The Division recommends that the Applicant either (1) move the proposed influent flow meter
prior to the septic and flow equalization tanks or (2) install a second influent flow meter prior to
the septic tank. The proposed influent flow meter will not give a representative flow
measurement of wastewater entering the treatment.plant, since it will contain recycle flow and
two sources of backwash flow.
➢ Plan Sheet C4
1. Amend the Bioclere recycle line detail to include a pipe diameter for the recycle line.
2. The return line in the Bioclere recycle line plan and profile do not match. The plan view shows
the line entering near the tank inlet and the profile view shows the line entering near the outlet.
3. Amend the Bioclere recycle line detail to show a straight pipe entering the septic tank.
4. The Bioclere 24/20 General Arrangement detail shows a 6-inch PVC gravity inlet, however, it
should be a 2-inch PVC force main from the upstream pump. Please amend.
➢ Plan Sheet C5
1. Amend the application to include the information for the chemical pump and mixer.
2. The number of UV lamps and banks in the UV System detail does not match those proposed in
the application. Please amend.
3. Amend the plans to include the media specification for the sand filters.
➢ Plan Sheet C7
1. Provide separate plan and profile views for the 5-day upset and wet weather storage tanks. Please
also include the maximum operating water level in the tanks, and show the interconnecting pipe
elevations.
2. Amend the dosing tank profile to include the inlet pipe from the wet weather storage tanks.
3. How does the Applicant intend on retreating the 5-day upset tank water? As proposed, the water
does not return to the treatment plant headworks for re -treatment. In fact, there is no means
proposed to remove the water from the 5-day upset tanks. Amend the application, plans
(including hydraulic profile) and specifications as necessary.
➢ Plan Sheet DS1
1. Amend the plans to show the tank connection details for the wastewater treatment plant (i.e., turn"
on the piping layer).
2. What is the volume and frequency of the field -dosing backwash? Is the backwash line tied
directly to the septic tank?

Mr. Jose Rosado
April 11, 2007
Page 8 of 10
Detailed Plans (continued):
3. The drip irrigation lines are not spaced on 4 foot laterals as stated in the calculations and
application. It appears that the lateral spacing varies from as close as 2 feet up to 15 feet. What
effect does this have on the instantaneous and annual irrigation rates? The Division recommends
that the laterals be placed as close to the proposed 4 foot spacing as possible. Please amend the
irrigation zone design to better match the proposed lateral spacing of 4 feet.
4. Amend the plans to include the proposed property lines and structures for Lots 30, 33 and 34.
➢ Plan Sheet DS2
1. The line diameters for the Air Release and Cleanout details do not match those on previous plan
sheets. Please amend.
2. Amend the Drip Irrigation Zone Profile to include the final design lateral spacing.
Site Map:
1. Per 15A NCAC 2T .0905(d), provide four (4) copies of a standard size site map and two (2) copies of
an 11 by 17-inch site map that has been signed, sealed and dated by a North Carolina licensed Land
Surveyor and/or Professional Engineer. At a minimum, this site map shall include:
✓ Soil mapping units shown on all irrigation areas.
✓ The location of all wells (including usage and construction details if available), streams
(ephemeral, intermittent, and perennial), springs, lakes, ponds, and other surface drainage features
within 500 feet of all waste treatment, storage, and irrigation area(s).
✓ Delineation of the review and compliance boundaries — located at the wetted area boundary per
15A NCAC 2T .0910(a)(5).
✓ Setbacks as required by 15A NCAC 2T .0912.
✓ Site property boundaries within 500 feet of all waste treatment, storage, and disposal site(s).
✓ All habitable residences or places of public assembly within 500 feet of all waste -treatment,
storage, and disposal site(s).
Please note that some of these items may be on the submitted site map, but they are hard to
distinguish using the submitted orthophotography.
Specifications:
1. Provide specifications for the proposed septic tank, 5-day upset tanks and wet weather storage tanks.
Ensure that the specifications address each tanks appurtenances, as well as their tank connections and
quality assurance / quality control.
2. Amend the specifications to include information regarding the influent flow meter and the required
precipitation / soil moisture sensor.

Mr. Jose Rosado
April 11, 2007
Page 9 of 10
Engineering Calculations:
Rule 15A NCAC 18A .1952(b)(2)(D) states that the septic tank volume should be equal to the design
flow when that flow exceeds 4,500 gallons per day. As proposed, the septic tank will be receiving
4,120 GPD (average daily flow) + 2,060 GPD (recycle flow = 50% ADF) + an unknown volume of
filter backwash and drip irrigation backwash. Therefore, reevaluate the size of the proposed septic
tank, such that the tank can accommodate the average daily flow, recycle flow and backwash flows
without violating the above mentioned rule.
2. Please explain why there is a recycle flow from the Bioclere Units to the septic tank. Is this to
achieve denitrification? If so, provide calculations and removal efficiencies for the nitrate and nitrite
parameters.
3. Per Application Instruction Q and Rule 15A NCAC 2T .0905(c)(3), provide Total Suspended Solids
pollutant calculations for each treatment unit and verify that the standards in 15A NCAC 2T .0906
will be met.
4. Per Application Instruction Q, provide manufacturers information for every pump, flow meter, UV
system, drip tubing, etc.
Reliability:
1. Per 15A NCAC 2T .0908(h) and Application Instruction R, amend the plans to include the location of
the generator, the generator details and the automatic transfer switch.
Operation and Maintenance Plan:
Per 15A NCAC 2T .0913, please provide an Operation and Maintenance (O & M) Plan for the
wastewater treatment and drip irrigation system. This O & M plan shall include at a minimum:
✓ Describe the operation of the system in sufficient detail to show what operations are necessary for
the system to function and by whom the functions are to be conducted.
✓ Describe anticipated maintenance of the system.
✓. Include provisions for safety measures including restriction of access to the site and equipment.
✓ Include spill control provisions such as response to upsets and bypasses including control,
containment and remediation, as well as contact information for plant personnel, emergency
responders and regulatory agencies.
This information may be submitted with the engineering certification prior to operation of the subject
facility.
Residuals Management Plan:
1. Per Application Instructions and Rule 15A NCAC 2T .0914, how will fats, oils and greases be
reduced/removed from the system (especially from the proposed food stand)?

Mr. Jose Rosado
April 11, 2007
Page 10 of 10
General:
A spring located on the site map was acknowledged to have been a source of drinking water for an
adjacent residence. Please provide confirmation that this spring is no longer used as a source of
drinking water and that the home is connected to the municipal water system.
2. In order to reduce the amount of wastewater irrigated on the disposal field, has the Applicant pursued
a subsurface permit for the 1,500 `fe food stand?

April 24, 2007
Mr. Nathaniel Thornburg, Environmental Engineer II
North Carolina Department of Environment and Natural Resources
Division of Water Quality — Aquifer Protection Section
Land Application Unit
2728 Capital Boulevard
Raleigh, North Carolina 27604
Dear Mr. Thornburg:
5
200T
1ECEUVED
MAY 14 2007
Ashev!116 rj,9 i r, i ()I icy
RE: Application Number WQ0031396
Response to Additional Information Request
Santeetlah Lakeside Phase II
Reclaimed Utilization System
Graham County, North Carolina
On behalf of IBEX Thunderbird LLC,-please find attached our response to your comment
letter dated April 11, 2007. We have enclosed three (3) copies of all revised information and
included two (2) half-size plan sets for the subject project. Note that we have numbered our
responses to directly correlate with your comments, and have attached all the required back-up
documentation thereto.
Please be aware that a revised application form, as well as the additional $1,253.00
payment is being forwarded to your attention directly from the Owner and is scheduled to arrive
at your office on April 25, 2007.
As always, we look forward to your favorable and timely review of the enclosed
information and if you require additional information, please do not hesitate to contact me or
David Honeycutt, EI in our office.
Sincerely,
Me ILL SSOCIATES, P.A.
HAR, B. BUCKNER, PE
Enclosures
cc: d 0 Fer
s LSS, Raleigh Regional Office
Aquirotection Section (w/enclosures)
Victor Rosado
Edwin Stott, LSS
John B. Allison, LSS
07712-003 / nt24apr2007-response to coradients.doc
E n g i n e e r i n g P l a n n i n g F i n a n c e
McGill Associates, P.A. • P.O. Bar 2259, Asheville, NC 28802 • 55 Broad Street, Asheville, NC 28801
828-252-0575 • Fax: [phone]

�V
RE -
aid
Responses to Additional Information Request � � APR 2 5 2007
-Y 14 2007 Application Number WQ0031396
AshevHld, MTUhs iManteUlah Lakeside Wastewater Treatment and Utilization System--- - ' -
Aqui9e'r fpC01P t409�' Graham County, North Carolina
Please note that the following responses are numbered to correlate directly to the additional
information request dated April 11, 2007. The following information is attached to this response
as a reference:
• Three (3) copies of the deed to the 1500 square foot food stand property.
• Three (3) 24".x36" copies of revised engineering plans and two 92) copies of 11 "x17"
plans
• Three (3) copies of revised technical specifications
• Three (3) copies of revised design calculations
• Three (3) copies of the revised water balance
• Three (3) copies of the revised Soils Evaluation
• Three (3) copies of the revised Agronomist's Report
• Three (3) copies of the manufacture's cut sheets for all mechanical equipment on the
project
• Four (4) copies of the Site map in 24' x36 "format and two (2) copies in 11 ' z17 "format
• Three (3) copies of the garden planting plan for the re -use area.
Application
1. Additional Information Fee submitted by Owner under separate cover.
2. Please find enclosed: plat map showing exact location of recreational amenity, Covenants
Conditions and Restrictions for Santeetlah Lakeside are in process and will be delivered
before operation of the reclaimed water system if required.
3. Application Item IV (5) has been updated to include an estimated 100 year flood
elevation. FEMA FIRM maps do not define a flood elevation for Lake Santeetlah or any
of its influent waters. Lake Santeetlah is defined as a Zone A flood area and elevation has
been estimated based on the Zone A delineation and typical water levels.
4. Plan details are for a single UV system of which two are installed in parallel as noted on
plan sheet C5. Specification has been modified to clearly indicate that two UV systems
shall be installed.
5. Application Item V (2) (f) has been updated to include specification numbers for all
relevant pumps and information for chemical feed pump.
Page 1 of 7.

PV
6. The flow equalization basin is not aerated as it follows a sedimentation tank which will
remove settleable solids, contains less than 2,500 gallons of wastewater, and has a sloped
base 'to prevent solids accumulation. It is the applicant's assertion that the proposed
equalization complies with the intent of the rule to prevent settling and odors.
7. Please find attached revised soil science report.
8. Application Item VII (7), plans and specifications have been amended to include public
warning signage.
9. Please see revised agronomist report and item VII (11). Soil series has been included and
a thorough evaluation of nutrient uptake on the proposed irrigation is provided. Note that
nutrient uptake is considered on an aerial loading basis due to the root structure of the
existing and proposed vegetation.
Property Ownership Documentation
1. Please find enclosed deed for the land where the proposed food stand will be located. The
owner of this land is Santeetlah Properties, LLC and therefore all applicable forms have
been updated to include both entities.
Soil Evaluation
Please find attached revised soil science report prepared under the requirements of Rule
15A NCAC 2T .0905(b)
2. Please see attached revised soil science report for information regarding the cut bank
down slope of the irrigation area.
3. Please see revised soils report, including KsAT data worksheets.
Water Balance
Please find enclosed revised water balance. Revisions to the water balance include using
the geometric mean of the k-Sat values (0.60 in/hr) from the most restrictive horizon (>30
inches, a total of 5 tests), after throwing out the highest and lowest values (leaving three
values). The drainage factor was also revised to reflect the minimum value
recommended on the DENR provided form (4%).
2. Please find enclosed revised design calculations based upon an estimate of seasonal flows
to the facility.
Agronomist Evaluation
1. Please see the revised agronomist evaluation. Agronomic evaluation is based on an aerial
loading due to the root structure of the existing and proposed vegetation.
Page 2 of 7

PV
2. Please see the revised agronomist evaluation with the components of the total nitrogen
individually evaluated.
3. Please see the revised agronomist evaluation including additional thorough
documentation of the loading rates for the irrigated area.
4. Please see the revised agronomist evaluation with information regarding the seasonal
flows and seasonal uptake rates for the existing and proposed vegetation.
5. Please see the revised agronomist report with information concerning pH adjustment of
the re -use site.
6. Please refer to the revised agronomist report for comments regarding the proposed
loading rate of reclaimed water.
Detailed Plans:
General Plans
1. Please see revised sheet C2 for location of the precipitation sensor and freeze sensor to
prevent irrigation during precipitation events or sub -freezing temperatures.
Plan Sheet G3
1. Hydraulic profile has been amended to include the elevation of the highest emitter.
2. Bioclere recycle flow and sand filter backwash will enter the septic tank through
knockouts. The hydraulic profile has been updated for clarification.
3. Hydraulic profile has been amended to include the drip irrigation system backwash line.
4. Hydraulic profile has been amended to include the 5-day upset and effluent storage tanks
piping elevations.
5. Hydraulic profile has been amended to show the recycle flow percent.
6. The flow equalization basin normal working volume is 2,500 gallons between the lag
pump on level and lead pump enable level. The application has been updated to show
4,100 gallons which is the maximum volume of the flow equalization basin prior to
overflowing back to the septic tank.
7. The flow equalization tank is downstream of the septic tank to allow the septic tank to
settle solids and remove any trash from the influent prior to pumping from the flow
equalization basin. The size of the septic tank is justified based on the solids storage
required for the system. When considered as a primary sedimentation basin only the
Page 3 of 7

PV
septic tank is well oversized based on typical design criteria. From Metcalf and Eddy
Wastewater Engineering 3rd Edition pg 475 overflow rates are typically 600 — 800 gpd/sf
for average daily flow and 1,200 — 1,700 gpd/sf for peak hourly flow in primary
sedimentation with RAS. The proposed septic tank provides 92 SF in the first
compartment which at 600 gpd/sf equates to 55,200 gpd ADF or 110,400 gpd peak
hourly flow. Average daily flows to the septic tank including recycle from the Bioclere
Units will be 6,180 gpd. In a low pressure sewer system with 10-18 pump stations a
maximum of 4 pumps will run at any given time for a peak instantaneous flow of
approximately 60 gpm or 86,400. Peak hour flows would be expected to be much lower
or approximately 4 - 5Q (16,480 — 20,600 gpd).
Plan Sheet C1
1. Plan sheet Cl has been revised to show the approximately location of influent lines from
the proposed facilities.
2. The existing septic system on Lot 26 will be abandoned and removed entirely.
3. Lots 19 and 20 have been adjusted and no longer lie on top of the existing drain field. See
revised plan sheet.
4. See revised plan sheet with proposed property lines for lots 28, 29, 30, 33, and 34.
5. See revised plan sheet with access road to WWTP identified.
6. Force main that terminates west of the proposed wastewater treatment plant was installed
and permitted as a part of phase 1 and does not apply to the phase 2 -wastewater system.
7. Please see legend on sheet G2 with additional entities added for clarification.
8. Please see additional plan sheet for clarification of yard piping details.
Plan Sheet C2
1. The chemical feed system is a caustic feed system to adjust pH as necessary due to the
amount of nitrification required. System may not be needed if influent wastewater
alkalinity is high enough but has been included to be conservative.
2. Sand Filter backwash lines will be attached with typical PVC fittings and connected to
the floor drain below the slab with a wye as shown on revised plan sheet C2 as requested.
A detail for the floor drain has also been added to sheet D1 for further clarification.
Plan Sheet C3
Page 4 of 7

Or
1-5. Please see revised septic tank detail with revisions as requested. 8-inch diameter
knockouts are required for installation of 6-inch diameter pipes. Rule 15A NCAC 18A
.1954(a)(4) refers to knockouts for 6-inch pipe.
6. A second flow meter has been added to the influent line prior to the septic tank to
measure influent flow. The flow meter on the flow equalization is intended to allow the
operator to determine the flow rate to the Bioclere units.
Plan Sheet C4
1. Bioclere recycle line pipe diameter is specified in Bioclere 24/20 general arrangement.
Pipe diameter has been added to installation at septic tank detail for clarification.
2.-3. The return line will enter the septic tank near the tank inlet. Section lines have been
added to the details for clarification. The line enters the septic tank at the pre -designed
knockout and is installed vertically on the inside wall to lh the liquid depth to encourage
contact with the sludge blanket for denitrification as recommended by the Bioclere
manufacturer.
4. The 2-inch PVC force main will connect to the 6-inch PVC inlet with the proper fittings.
The details have been amended on the plans for clarification.
Plan Sheet C5
1.' Application has been amended with chemical pump and mixer information.
2. A single UV system detailed is typical of two systems to be installed in parallel as noted
on the drawing.
3. The type of media is specified in "Automatic Backwash Sand Filter Section". The weight
of media has been added to this section for additional clarification.
Plan Sheet C7
1. Separate details for effluent storage and 5-day upset tanks have been added to Sheet C7
with details as requested.
2. The dosing tank profile already includes the inlet pipe from the wet weather storage
tanks. It is labeled "6" SDR 35 PVC from Effluent Storage" and located at the dose
enable float elevation.
3. Please see revised detail on sheet C7 showing 5 day upset storage return pump and force
main on plan sheet C1.
Plan Sheet DSI
Page 5 of 7

Or
1. Please see revised plan sheet DS 1 with tank connection details for the WWTP.
2. Volume and frequency of the field dosing backwash has been added to the design
calculations. The backwash has been redirected to the flow equalization basin as the
solids content is anticipated to be relatively low and additional settling is not necessary
prior to treatment.
3. The drip irrigation laterals are spaced to be a minimum of 4 ft apart at the closest point.
From this point they are designed to follow contours to prevent drainage to one section of
line from occurring following a dose cycle.
4. Property lines and proposed structures for Lots 30, 33, and 34 are included on revised
sheet C I.
Plan Sheet DS2
1. Air Release and cleanout details have been revised to include the correct line sizes.
2. Drip Irrigation Zone Profile has been amended to clarify installation techniques for the
drip irrigation lines.
Site Map
1. Please find attached revised site map without orthophotography.
Specifications
1. Specification Section 03330 has been added to clarify requirements for all precast
concrete tankage.
2. An influent flow meter has been added to prior to the septic tank and is specified on the
drawings. Precipitation and Freeze Sensors have been added to sheet C2 and specification
section 11300.
Engineering Calculations
1. Rule 15A NCAC 18A .1900 section is applicable to "treatment and disposal of domestic
type sewage from septic tank systems privies, incinerating toilets, mechanical toilets,
composting toilets, recycling toilets, or other such systems serving single or multiple
family residences, places of business or places of public assembly, the effluent from
which is designed not to discharge to the land surface or surface waters." Therefore this
rule is not applicable to the proposed system.
Rule 15A NCAC 18A .1952(b)(2)(D) states that the septic tank volume should be equal
to the design sewage flow where design sewage flow is determined according to rule 15A
NCAC 18A .1949. The design of the septic tank is not dependent on the recycle flows but
Page 6 of 7

Or
the septic tank as designed is fully capable of handling them as described in response to
Plan Sheet G3 item 7.
2. The recycle flow from the Bioclere units to the septic tank is a return activated sludge
(RAS) flow from the clarifiers integral to the Bioclere treatment units. This RAS flow
will provide some denitrification but it is expected to be insignificant and is therefore
conservatively not included in the calculations. The trickling filter attached growth
process will provide denitrification due to the anaerobic zone formed adjacent to the
media.
3. Please see amended calculations including Total Suspended Solids calculations.
4. Please find attached manufacturer's information for all applicable equipment.
Reliability
1. Generator details and automatic transfer switch are located on Sheets El-E3 of the
electrical drawings. Generator location has been added to the civil sheets for clarity.
Operation and Maintenance Plan
1. Please find under application Item S, a preliminary operation and maintenance plan. A
complete operation and maintenance plan including manufacture's literature will be
compiled upon purchase of the equipment.
Residuals Management Plan
1. The proposed food stand will be required to have a grease trap to accept any kitchen
wastes. This grease trap will be pumped out by a commercial grease recycling company.
Most fats, grease, and oils that make it to the treatment system will be removed by the
septic tank.
General
1. The spring located on the site map is no longer a source of drinking water. This has been
confirmed verbally with the owner and from the physical observation of a water meter
serving the home.
2. The applicant has pursued a subsurface permit but due to the building's location adjacent
to the lake a suitable disposal area was not identified.
Page 7 of 7

Food Stand Deed
RECEIVED
mu 14 M7
MMvill� A'46jidfibl Offilp,�
--A

12:36 3054451015
FDA4T!E
ET IN UENCl S AS OF THIS
al_a Cct;` Tax Co1l�ctor
Cf Iswrd Die 92 20015
Y * 6W.00
sston of c7l` hwn
IN wth CUMIM Cou""I
Real Esssstat• Emj I Tall
Excise
Tax Lot No.
Verified by
by
Mail after recording to
IBEX
PAGE 02/04
F'I -I." FvrLion On
and rF.QiF-
te• 'Cl va ,,, i i ee of Register o,f
GrY!-am Luuzfv, iy.0 i9S gook
R02W,.er cr 0.:,pus
By— -- - — --
Assislant
NORTH CAROLINA GENERAL WARRANTY DEED
Record
Parcel Identifier No. 564204210002
County on the day of ,
This instrument was prepared by Mack D. Tallent, Attorney at Law
Brief description for the Index Lot 2, Sec 0, Thunderbird
THIS DEED made this 2nd day of
Betty L. Rathbone (widow of
James L. Rathbone)
L..__, in appropriate block for each party:
or partnership.
December
, 2005 ,by and between
Santeetlah Properties, LLC, a Florida Limited
Liability Company
{ 2332 Galiano Street
I Coral Gables, FL 33134
address, and, if appropriate, character of entity, e.q. corporation
The designation Grantor and Grantee as used herein shall include said parties, their heirs, successors, and assigns, and
shall include singular, plural, masculine, feminine o4I neuter as required by context.
WITNESSETH, that the Grantor, for a valuable corfsideration paid by the Grantee, the receipt of which is hereby
acknowledged, has and by these presents does grant, bargain, sell and convey unto the Grantee in fee simple, all that
certain lot or parcel of land situated in the City of T1wn of Lake Santeetlah , Cheoah Township,
Graham County, North Carolina land more particularly described as follows:
SEE ATTACHED SCHEDULE A FOR A MORE CC)MPLETE AND ACCURATE DESCRIPTION OF SAID PROPERTY,
WHICH IS INCORPORATED HEREIN AS IF FULLi( SET FORTH.
04/23/2007 MON 11:34 [TX/RX NO 85421 1@002

12:39 3054451015 IBEX PAGE 03/04
operty hereinabove described was acquired by Grantor by instrument recorded in
PF
d Book 213, Page 70, Graham County Registry
map showing the above described property is recorded in Plat Book
Deed (book 129, Page 169 and
page
-- -AVE AND TO HOLD the aforesaid lot or parcel of land and all privileges and appurtenances thereto belonging to
rantee in fee simple.
Y,no rhe'Grantor covenants with the Grantee, that Grantor is seized of the premises in fee simple, has the right to convey
the same in fee simple, that title is marketable and free and clear of all encumbrances, and that Grantor will warrant and
defend the title against the lawful claims of all persons whomsoever except for the exceptions hereinafter stated.
Title to the property hereinabove described is subject to the following exceptions:
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Grantor has hereunto set his hand and seal, or if corporate, has caused this
instrument to be signed in its corporate name by its duly authorized officers and its seal to be hereunto affixed by authority
of its Board of Directors, the day and year first above written.
USE BLACK INK ONLY
(SEAL)
(Corporate Name) Betty L. athbone
By
ATTEST:
President
Secretary (Corporate Seal)
(SEAL)
(SEAL)
(S EAL)
SEAL-STAM P+<<�;... NORTH CAROLINA, Graham County.
1, a.,.Notary Public of the County and State aforesaid, certify that Betty L. Rathbone
Grantor,
leck Y1<04': 7ip&r4;onally appeared before me this day and acknowledged the execution of the foregoing
r, : s• •ti''strument. Witness my hand and official stamp or seal, this �"� day of December
:. • :ice d65
%,�'' '� •-�'••'� fi My commission expires: Notary Public
;tee N otary
SEAL -STAMP NORTH CAROLINA, County.
I, a Notary Public of the County and State aforesaid, certify that
personally came before me this day and acknowledged that he is Secretary of
Use Black Ink a North Carolina corporation, and that by authority
duly given and as the act of the corporation, the foregoing instrument was signed in its name by
President, sealed with its corporate seal and attested by
as its Secretary._ --
Witness my hand and official stamp or seal, this day of
My commission expires: Notary Public
The foregoing Certificate(s) of
is/are certified be correct. This instrument and this certificate are duly registered. at the date and time and in the Book
and Page s n on first pages hereof.
REGISTER OF DEEDS FOR
By Deputy/Assistant — Register of Deeds
04/23/2007 MON 11:34 [TX/RX NO 85421 1a 003.

12:36 3054451015 IBEX
SCHEDULE r
AS PER plat of survey entitled "Survey of Lot 2, Section 0, also Parcel loc
Section 0, Thunderbird", being in the Town of .Lake Santeetlah, Cheoah To,,
Graham, County, North Carolina, by Terry R. James, PLS L-3998, dated Sep
5, 2005, revised September 14, 2005, said plat of survey being recorded
Cabinet DB, Slide /:37 Graham County Registry, and being referred
greater certainty and accuracy of description, and incorporation herein, anc
more particularly described by metes and bounds as follows: .
BEGINNING AT an existing mag nail in an asphalt drive, said existing In
lying South 80-52 West, 46.80 feet from the southwestern corner of the di
located upon the herein conveyed tract of real property, a tie, thence from sa
nail, along the line common with Lot 1, Section O, North 10-08-57 West, 47.
to an existing iron pin; thence with the line common with Lot 3, Section 0,
82-50-02 East, 113.34 feet to a set rebar; thence leaving the line common w
3, Section 0 and traveling South 00-49-11 West, 5.30 feet to an existing iri
South. 00-49-11 West, 78.61 feet to an existing iron pin; South 01-24-56
1.7.13 feet to a set niag nail in an asphalt road; South.00-39-08 West, 37.49 feet to
a set rebar on the 1817 contour elevation line of Lake Santeetlah, thence with the
1817 contour elevation line of Lake Santeetlah the following seven courses and
distances: North 61-20-44 West, 18.80 feet; North 83-06-27 West, 14.91 feet;
North 71.-35-08 West, 19.93 feet; North 63-11-45 West, 19.34 feet; North 81-36-06
West, 26.75 feet; South 79-46-07 West, 17.70 feet; South 74-41-16 West, 3.84
feet; thence leaving the 1817 contour elevation line of Lake Santeetlah and
traveling North 14-04-14 East, 2.60 feet to an existing rebar; North. 14-01-14 East,
51.13 feet back to the place and point of BEGINNING, containing a total of 0.28
acres, +/-, and being a combination of the tracts designated Lot 2, Section O and an
adjoining parcel in Section 0, Thunderbird Mountain. Resort.
FOR SOURCE of title see Deed.Book 129, Page 169, and Deed Book 213, Page
70, Graham County Registry.
SUBJECT TO the Restrictive Covenants for Thunderbird Mountain Resort as
recorded in Deed Book 62, Page 226, Graham County Registry.
SUBJECT TO the, rights. of others in. the use of the existing asphalt drives as shown
on the above referenced plat of survey.
SUBJECT TO the easements for the existing utilities as shown on, the above
referenced plat of survey.
SUBJECT TO the easement for the existing public street as shown on the above
reverenced plat of survey, and for existing utilities, said easements being reserved
by the Town of Lake Santeetlah in the Deed recorded at Deed Book 213, Page 70,
Graham County Registry. Said easement is twenty-five (25) feet in width (12.5
feet each side of center of the existing asphalt road) as specified in the Resolution
by the Town of Lake Santeetlah recorded at Deed Book 206, Page 209, Graham
County Registry.
04/23/2007 MON 11:34 [TX/RX NO 85421 IM004

]devised Water Balance
C f � V rt
M.0 14 2007
AsheVsr,i1 oqIe�
►J' APR 25 2001
11F,y!? ,4ALEi;;;----�-•- � , � .ter
- ___- Cl�l9ri! 7FF.,,C'--

WaterBudget_DWQ_Ver5_Final_rev4-20-07.xls Project Id
Version 5 December 2004

F
Enter Data
Calculafelhe
-Click or�'each
f
WaterBudget_DWQ_Ver5_Final_rev4-20-07.xls Precip Version 5 December 2004

��
Enter afa „> o en ia vapo- cans irat]on (PET
;hoose PET Method: ''El Thoriifhwaite Method " 0 Click on CheckBox
Month
tep box D,:,. , v
Thornthwa)te PET Calculation
Step S p
Mean m thl D
sheet "
on y ayhght ,� Calculated - ..
temp. hours 112 Heat Index PET Site Latitude
. . .
(degrees F) inches .. degrees 4.
_ �.�
January 38 & ��>4 - 0.87 0.63 0.23 = 0.23 _ ��-
3536r -). (n
February _ 427 -' 0.85 1.31 0.47
( - 0 47
March 499 1.03 2.83 ` 1.23 within range " - 123
April 58.2 1.09 1.03 2.32 -E
( 232
Me Y E 65.2 fix,' 121 7.20 3.70�
fu
June 71 8 1.21 9.48 4.88
.0 4.88 " Values �shown Ins:;
July 7S1 1.23 10.70 5.60 ' '� r 5,60 ,;K., :yellow cells are=
Mm
August 742 1.16 10.36 5.11 'S _ ^Ilnked.to other-`
5:11
September "` fib 9 ��.r 1.03 8.48 3.71 t
t 371 '.locations within the
October - 586 - 0.97 5.14 2.11 - "water Balance
( 2.11 I "` 'Program
November 501:� 0.86 2.87 1.04 `1:04
December '" 477:� 0.85 1.11 " 0.40e - 0�.40 j
Mill
TOTALS 6515 3082 30.82 '
Source of Temperature Data Source of PET Data
'a-m y'-.'--
„a°>-. re ,-x Step 3
Location of Precipitation Data:
� e
Staring Year of Data Record: , „t1976
-
Ending Year of Data Record:
WaterBudget_DWQ_Ver5_Final_rev4-20-07.xls PET Version 5 December 2004

Zone 1
Zone 2
Design
Zone 2
Design
Zone 1 Volume to be
' Irrigation per
Volume to be
Irrigation per
Disposed
month
Disposed
month
WaterBudget_DWQ_Ver5_Final_rev4-20-07.xls Influent+Zones Setup Version 5 December 2004

Calculated
Month
Days per
PET
Zone 1
Zone'1
Maximum
month
Soil
Total Loss
Precip
Allowable
raina
Drainage
9
Irrigation
C]
inches
inches
Inches
.: Inches
Inches
r January
31
0.23
17.86
18.08
5.77
12.32
February
s
28
0.47
16.13
16.60
5.46
11.14
March
31
1.23
17.8fi
19.09
6.19
12.90
April
30
2.32
17.28
19.60
5.00
14.61
May
31
3.70
17.86
21.56
6.25
15.31
June
30
4.88
17.28
22.16
6.33
15.83
July
31
5.60
17.86
23.46
5.96
17.50
August
31
5.11
17.86
22.97
4.49
18.48
September
30
3.71
17.28
20.99
4.37
16.62
October
31
2.11
17.86
19.97
3.04
16.93
November
30
1.04
17.28
18.32
5.07
13.26
December
31
0.40
17 86
18.25
5.34
12.91
Manual
Override
Maximum
Allowable
Irrigation
Actual Used
Maximum Allowable
Irrigation
Inches
Inches
12.32
11.14
12.90
.•: k
14.61
15.31
15.83
17.50
18.48
16.62
16.93
13.26
12.91
Cummulative
Storage
Actual
Design Irrigation
Monthly
Required for
Monthly
per Month
Excess
Irrigation
Irrigation Rate
,-
Inches
Inches
Inches
Inches
3.44
8.88
I 0.00 '
3.44
;
3.10
8.04
I 0.00
3.10
3.44
9.47
0.00
3.44
6.70
7.91
0.00
6.70
10.41
4.90
`"0.00'' "°:
10.41
10.07
5.76
0.00
10.07
10.41
7.09
F 6.66 1
10.41
10.41
8.08
r p Op
10.41
f
10.07
6.55
r 0- 00
10.07
10.41
6.52
r p p0 y
10.41
6.70
6.56
�:~ o op
s.7o
1, . y, FYI
�,.
3.44
9.48
i 0.00
3.44
,
;
WaterBudget_DWQ_Ver5_Final_rev4-20-07.xls Z1 i Version 5 December 2004

WalerSUdget DWD_Ver5 Final_reV4-20-07.xls Zonal Sums
Version 5 December 2004

An excerpt from the Waste Utilization page. Note the RYE for pines and hardwoods!
hq://www. soil.nesu. edtL/certification/Manual/a/chapter3A.htm
Values of realistic yield expectations for agricultural soils have been put together by
Natural Resource Conservation Service (NRCS) in conjunction with Cooperative
Extension Service (CES) and other technical specialists. These values are based on
inherent soil properties and long-term observations. They are intended to represent high
levels of management, but should be viewed as estimates only, since they may not reflect
irrigation, new cultivars, and improved management tools. Information on your soils may
be obtained through the county field office of NRCS.
[Table b3-5. Nitrogen Fertilization Guidelines
JCommodity
lb N/Realistic Yield Expectation
Corn (grain)
1.0 to 1.25 lb N/bu
Wheat (grain)
1.7 to 2.41b N/bu
JRye (gram)
1.7 to 2.4 lb N/bu
I Oats (grain)
1.0 to 1.3 lb N/bu
Barley (grain)
_..------------ .....-__._......................... ........................... ....._.............. ......
........... ............ ................ ......
...._......................... _._... __....................._..............
1.4 to 1.61b N/bu
... ........ _..__._.........__..._._.........................._...._.._.......
Soybean (grain)
3.5 to 4.0 lb N/bu
Triticale (grain)
1.4 to 1.6 lb N/bu
Sorghum (grain) -..._._..._._...._..........................._.__........._..._..__.._...__._....:...........:.:...........__............_....
__...
................ _.............................................. ......................... _.............
2.0 to 2.5 lb N/cwt
Corn (silage)
10 to 12 lb N/ton
Sorghum-sudangrass (hay')
45 to 55 lb N/dry ton
Pearl millet (hay')
45 to 55 lb N/dry ton
__..._.__._._....__......._......_._
lBermudagrass (hay')
...... ......_..._..__. _...............____..___.__..__...____....................__._..............__..._.__._..____._._.
._.__.._._.._..._.-
40 to 50 lb N/dry ton
Tall fescue (hay')
40 to 50 lb N/dry ton
Orchard grass (hay')
�
� 40 to 50 lb N/dry ton
..........__......................._.........................................................._..._..................__._....................................:............................_.................................._....__..........._........_......_..._.__._...._..._........................_.................
Timothy (hay')
40 to 50 lb N/dry ton
Small grain (hay')
50 to 60 lb N/dry ton
... . ...................................................... ......._............. ...... .:..................... _.................
Cotton
_._............... ......_....:......._.................................. __._..... ..............................
................................................. .._.._................................................
0.06 to 0.12 lb N/lb lint
Pine trees...__.._.......
......................
0 to 60 lb acre
...
....................._....................._............__........_...................
...............
Hardwood trees
€
70 to 100 lb N/acre/ ear
y
Reduce N rate by 25 percent when grazing.

WQ00313 9C - SANTEETLAH LAKESIDE EXPRESS REVIEW
SUBMITTAL MEETING — MARCH 28, 2007
REVIEW MEETING — APRIL 1 1, 2007
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MEETING — MAY 2, 2007` (TENTATIVE)
NAME
AFFILIATION
PHONE
FAX
EMAIL
NATHANIEL THORNBURG
DWQ
[phone]
[phone]
NATHANIEL.THORNBURG(2DNCMAIL.NET
LORI VEAL
DWQ
[phone]
[phone]
LORI.VEAL@,NCMAIL.NET
Qjw cv t'l
KcC,v... Adst c.
vic-rop. +C®s#.,bo
jttX MrN. GRP.
� S0 07-969 7
(30C)qqS'-101$-
VROSADO GE jSf kAbVlSojXS. coM
`
.SSROSADo O 113 HKAbV'504%,. CCPAO%

Ili,.
OF \NA ,,
O� QG �: State of North Carolina
�l l� APR 2 5
��Q� Department of Environment and Natural Resources
�� Division of Water Quality
?
- ECLAIMED WATER NON -CONJUNCTIVE SYSTEMS APPLICATION
DF1dRHtEiGt6r11aL �
INSTRUCTIONS FOR FORM: RWNCS 12-06
The Division of Water Quality (Division) will not accept this application package unless all the instructions are
followed. Plans, specifications and supporting documents shall be prepared in accordance with 15A NCAC 2T
.0100, 15A NCAC 2T .0900 and good engineering practices. Failure to submit all of the required items will lead to
additional processing and review time for the permit application.
For more information, links to fornss requested in this application, or for an electronic version of this forns, visit the Land Application
Unit (LAU) web site at: hqp://h2o.enr.state.nc.us/lauhnain.html
A. Application Form (All Application Packages):
✓ Submit one (1) original and three (3) copies of the completed and appropriately executed application form. The instructions
(Pages 1 through 4) need not be submitted. Any content changes made to this form will result in the application package
being returned. The Division will only accept application packages that have been fully completed with all applicable items
addressed.
✓ If the Applicant is a corporation or company, it must be registered for business with the NC Secretary of State
C29p://www.secretaKy.state.ne.us/Corporations/CSearch.aspx).
✓ If the Applicant is a partnership, sole proprietorship, trade name, or d/b/a, enclose a copy of the certificate filed with the
Register of Deeds in the county of business.
✓ The application must be signed appropriately in accordance with 15A NCAC 2T .0106(b). An alternate person may be
designated as the signing official, provided that a delegation letter is provided from a person who meets the referenced
criteria. You may download an example delegation letter at: hitp://h?o.enr.state.nc.us/lau/policies.html#Example.
✓ The facility name on all forms should be consistent with the facility name' on the plans, specifications, agreements, etc.
✓ If this project involves a modification of an existing reclaimed water non -conjunctive system, submit four (4) copies of the
most recently issued existing permit.
✓ If this project is for a renewal without modification, please use the most recent FORM: WWR, which can be downloaded at:
bttp:/fii2o.enr.state.nc.us/lau/Vplications.htin]#SIA.
B. Attachment (All New or Major Modification Application Packages):
✓ Submit a completed and properly executed Watershed Classification Attachment (FORM: WSCA), along with the 8.5" by
11" topographic map locating the facility, for each watershed within the facility location (including reclaimed water non -
conjunctive use areas). The most recent version of FORM: WSCA may be found at:
hqp://h2o.enr.state.ne.us/lau/gpplications.html#AGREEMENTS.
C. Application Fee (All New or Major Modification Application Packages):
✓ The appropriate application . fee can be determined from the Division's fee schedule found at:
http://h2o.enr.state.iie.us/lau/fees.hti-nl.
✓ Submit a check or money order in the appropriate amount made payable to: North Carolina Department of Environment and
Natural Resources (NCDENR).
D. Cover Letter (All Application Packages):
✓ Submit one (1) original and three (3) copies of a cover letter, which lists all items and attachments included in the application
package as well as a brief description of the requested permitting action.
✓ If necessary for clarity, include attachments to the application. Such attachments will be considered part of the application
package and should be numbered to correspond to the section to which they refer.
E.
Property Ownership Documentation (All New or Modification Application Packages involving new and/or relocated treatment
or reclaimed water non -conjunctive use components):
✓ Provide either:
✓ Legal documentation of the ownership (such as a contract, deed, article of incorporation, etc.) of the property, or
✓ Written notarized agreement signed by both parties indicating future purchase of the property by the permit applicant and
a plat or survey map showing the property, or
✓ Written notarized long term lease agreement signed by both parties specifically mdic—a mg m enaude of the
property and a plat or survey map showing the property addressed in the I ase. R E C F � V C-
MAY 14 2007
Asheville Regional Office
Aquifer Protection
FORM: RWNCS 12-06 Page 1

F. Environmental Assessments (Maybe required if public lands and/or monies are used —See 15A NCAC 1 C .0100 to .0400):
✓ Submit one (1) copy of the Findings of No Significant Impact (FONSI) or Environmental Impact Statement (EIS).
✓ Include information on any mitigating factor(s) from the Environmental Assessment (EA) that impact the design and/or
construction of the wastewater treatment and disposal system.
G. Certificates of Public Convenience and Necessity (All New Application Packages if the applicant is a Privately -Owned Public
Utility per determination by the NC Utilities Commission: http://www.ncuc.commerce.state.ne.uso:
✓ Submit four (4) copies of the Certificate of Public Convenience and Necessity, which demonstrates that the public utility is
authorized to hold the utility franchise for the area to be served by the wastewater system.
✓ If a Certificate of Public Convenience and Necessity has not been issued, provide four (4) copies of a letter from the NC
Utilities Commission's Public Staff that states that an application for a franchise has been received, that the service area is
contiguous to an existing franchised area, and/or that franchise approval is expected.
H. Operational Agreements (All New Application Packages if the applicant is a Homeowners' Association, or a Developer and lots
are to be sold):
✓ Submit one (1) original and three (3) copies of a properly executed operational agreement if the utilization site will be
serving, or currently serves, residential or commercial lots that are to be sold. Appropriate forms can be downloaded at:
httl):/Pn2o.enr.state.nc.us/lau/qpplicaiions.html#AGREENMNTS.
✓ If applicant is a HOMEOWNERS' ASSOCIATION, use the most recent version of FORM: HOA, and submit the following
information: articles of incorporation, bylaws, and current or proposed annual budget.
✓ If applicant is a DEVELOPER that intends to turn ownership and responsibility of the wastewater system over to a
homeowners' association, submit the most recent version of FORM: DEV.
I. Analysis of Wastewater (All New Application Packages or Modifications that are not 100% Domestic Waste):
✓ Submit four (4) copies of a complete chemical analysis of the effluent wastewater including but not limited to the following
parameters: Total Organic Carbon, 5-day Biochemical Oxygen Demand (BODs), Chemical Oxygen Demand (COD), Nitrate
Nitrogen (NOs-N), Ammonia Nitrogen (NH3-N), Total Kjeldahl Nitrogen (TKN), pH, Chloride, Total Phosphorus, Phenol,
Total Volatile Organic Compounds, Fecal Coliform, Calcium, Sodium, Magnesium, Sodium Adsorption Ratio (SAR), Total
Trihalomethanes, Toxicity Test Parameters and Total Dissolved Solids in compliance with 15A NCAC 2T.0904(g).
✓ A laboratory certified by the Division shall perform all testing.
J. Soil Evaluation (All New Application Packages or Modifications that include new utilization sites):
✓ Submit four (4) copies of a detailed soil evaluation in accordance with 15A NCAC 2T .0905(b) and current Division Policy
available at: h!Ltp://h2o.enr.state.nc.us/lau/policies.html.
K. Water Balance (All New Application Packages or Modifications that include new utilization sites):
✓ Submit four (4) copies of a completed and accurate water balance in accordance with 15A NCAC 2T .0905(k) and current
Division Policy available at: http://h2o.enr.state.nc.us/lau/policies.html.
L. Agronomist Evaluation (All New Application Packages or Modifications that include new utilization sites or new cropping
patterns for existing utilization sites):
✓ Submit four (4) copies of a detailed agronomist evaluation in accordance with 15A NCAC 2T .0905(i) and current Division
Policy available at: http://h2o.enr.state.nc.us/tau/policies.htinl.
M. Hydrogeologic Report (All New Application Packages with Design Flows over 25,000 GPD or Modifications involving
increasing the total design flow to over 25,000 GPD):
✓ Submit four (4) copies of a detailed hydrogeologic evaluation in accordance with 15A NCAC 2T .0905(e) and current
Division Policy available at: http://h2o.enr.state.ne.us/lau/policies.html.
N. Detailed Plans (All New or Modification Application Packages):
✓ Submit four (4) sets of standard size plans and two (2) sets of 11" by 17" plans (electronic format is acceptable - Adobe PDF
only) that have been signed, sealed, and dated by a NC licensed Professional Engineer in accordance with 15A NCAC 2T
.0905(c) and (d). For Modifications, submit plans specific to the modification(s) only.
✓ . Plans must include the following minimum items:
✓ A general location map, a vicinity map and a topographic map.
✓ Plan and profile views of all treatment/storage/disposal units, piping, valves, and equipment (i.e., pumps, blowers,
mixers, diffusers, flow meters, etc.) including dimensions and elevations of all treatment/storage/disposal units.
✓ Hydraulic profile from the treatment plant headworks to the highest disposal point.
✓ Highest spray nozzle or drip emitter, locations within the utilization system of air releases and system drains, locations
within the utilization system of all control valves, and other essential equipment.
✓ For automated spray/drip utilization systems, the design must include equipment to prevent spray/drip utilization during
precipitation events or when the soil is in a condition that the reclaimed water could not be assimilated.
FORM: RWNCS 12-06 Page 2,

✓ A map showing the entire utilization area with an overlay of the suitable utilization area depicted by the soil scientist's
evaluation. The plans shall show each nozzle/emitter and wetted area (when applicable). Clearly label spray/drip
utilization zones as they will be operated.
✓ Plans must depict a completed design and not be labeled with preliminary phrases (e.g., FOR REVIEW ONLY, NOT
FOR CONSTRUCTION, etc.) that indicate that they are anything other than final plans. However, the plans may be
labeled with the phrase: FINAL DESIGN - NOT RELEASED FOR CONSTRUCTION.
✓ All requirements in Rule 15A NCAC 2T .0909.
O. Site Map (All New or Modification Application Packages):
✓ Submit four (4) copies of a standard size site map and two (2) copies of an I1" by 17" site map (electronic format is
acceptable - Adobe PDF only) that have been signed, sealed, and dated by a NC licensed Professional Engineer and/or
Professional Land Surveyor in accordance with 15A NCAC 2T .0905(d). For Modifications, submit an updated site map
specific to the modification(s) only.
✓ The site map shall include the following minimum items:
✓ A scaled map with topography of the site showing all facility -related structures and fences within the treatment, storage
and utilization areas.
✓ Soil mapping units shown on all disposal sites.
✓ The location of all wells (including usage and construction details if available), streams (ephemeral, intermittent, and
perennial), springs, lakes, ponds, and other surface drainage features within 500 feet of all waste treatment, storage, and
utilization site(s).
✓ Delineation of the review/compliance boundary.
✓ Setbacks as required by 15A NCAC 2T .0909(h), (i), 0) and .0912.
✓ Site property boundaries within 500 feet of all waste treatment, storage, and utilization site(s).
✓ All habitable residences or places of public assembly within 500 feet of all waste treatment, storage, and utilization
site(s).
P. Specifications (All New or Modification Application Packages):
✓ Submit four (4) sets of specifications that have been signed, sealed, and dated by a NC licensed Professional Engineer in
accordance with 15A NCAC 2T .0905(c). For Modifications, submit specifications specific to the modification(s) only.
✓ Specifications must include the following minimum items:
✓ Detailed specifications for each treatment/storage unit, utilization site, piping, valves, equipment (i.e., pumps, blowers,
mixers, diffusers, flow meters, etc.), nozzles/emitters (if applicable), precipitation/soil moisture sensor (if applicable),
audible/visual high water alarms, etc.
✓ Site Work (i.e., earthwork, clearing and grubbing, excavation and backfill, fencing, seeding, etc.)
✓ Materials (i.e., concrete, masonry, steel, method of construction, etc.)
✓ Mechanical and Electrical (i.e., control panels, transfer switches, generator, etc.)
✓ Means for ensuring quality and integrity of the finished product including leakage and pressure testing.
✓ Specifications must represent a completed design and not be labeled with preliminary phrases (e.g., FOR REVIEW
ONLY, NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION, etc.) that indicate that they are anything other than final specifications.
However, the specifications may be labeled with the phrase: FINAL DESIGN - NOT RELEASED FOR
CONSTRUCTION.
✓ All requirements in Rule 15A NCAC 2T .0909.
Q. Engineering Calculations (All New or Modification Application Packages):
✓ Submit four (4) copies of all design calculations that have been signed, sealed, and dated by a NC licensed Professional
Engineer in accordance with 15A NCAC 2T .0905(c). For Modifications, submit calculations specific to the modification(s)
only.
✓ Calculations must include the following minimum items:
✓ Hydraulic and pollutant loading calculations for each treatment unit (Note: "black box" calculations are unacceptable).
✓ Sizing criteria for each treatment unit and associated equipment.
✓ Friction/total dynamic head calculations and system curve analysis for each pump used.
✓ Pump selection information including pump curves.
✓ Manufacturer's information for all packaged treatment units, pumps, blowers, mixers, diffusers, flow meters, etc.
✓ Flotation calculations for all tanks constructed partially or entirely below grade.
✓ Submit the selected utilization system information including manufacturer's information and recommended installation
guidelines.
✓ Utilization pump capacity should consider reasonable operational control, address multiple zones of the utilization
system, address variability of nozzle sizing as necessary, and include the ability to utilize all areas in an appropriate
amount of time.
FORM: RWNCS 12-06 Page 3

R. Reliability (All New or Major Modification Application Packages):
✓ Submit documentation of system reliability in accordance with 15A NCAC 2T .0908(h).
✓ Ensure that the plans and specifications detail the generator, the automatic transfer switch, and how these items interact with
the system instrumentation/controls.
✓ All generators must be capable of powering all essential treatment units.
S. Operation and Maintenance Plan (All New or Major Modification Application Packages):
✓ Submit four (4) copies of an operation and maintenance plan in accordance with 15A NCAC 2T .0913 that shall be
maintained for all systems and include at a minimum:
✓ Description of the operation of the system in sufficient detail to show what operations are necessary for the system to
function and by whom the functions are to be conducted.
✓ Description of anticipated maintenance.
✓ Include safety measures including restriction of access to the site and equipment.
✓ Spill prevention provisions such as response to upsets and bypasses including how to control, contain and remediate.
✓ Contact information for plant personnel, emergency responders and regulatory agencies.
T. Residuals Management Plan (All New or Modification Application Packages that include new treatment systems or an
expansion of the treatment system):
✓ Submit a detailed explanation describing how the residuals (including trash, sediment and grit) that are generated by the
wastewater treatment system will be stored, treated, and disposed, in accordance with 15A NCAC 2T .0908(n) and .0914.
✓ An evaluation of the residuals storage requirements for the treatment facility based upon the maximum anticipated residuals
production rate and ability to remove residuals.
✓ A permit for residuals utilization or a written commitment to the Permittee of a Department approved residuals
disposal/utilization program accepting the residuals which demonstrates that the approved program has adequate capacity to
accept the residuals, or that an application for approval has been submitted
✓ If oil or grease removal and collection is a designed unit process, please submit an oil/grease disposal plan.
✓ If an on -site restaurant or other business with food preparation is contributing waste to this system an oil/grease disposal plan
will be necessary. Please note that operation and maintenance of all grease traps will be the responsibility of the permittee.
U. General (All New or Modification Application Packages):
✓ Please ensure that any systems within the Coastal Area as defined in 15A NCAC 2H .0400 meet all requirements required by
that Section.
✓ Note that all designs and documentation must conform to all state and federal rules and regulations.
✓ Note that if other approvals are necessary for the construction of these facilities (i.e. Wetlands, Stormwater, Dam Safety, etc)
the Division may hold approval of this application package to coordinate with other approvals.
✓ Provide documentation of floodway compliance in accordance with 15A NCAC 2T .0105(c)(8)
✓ Sewers tributary to the subject facilities must"be applied for separately from this application in accordance with the Surface
Water Protection Section's requirements(http://h2o.enr.state.nc.us/peresn.
THE COMPLETED APPLICATION PACKAGE, INCLUDING ALL SUPPORTING INFORMATION AND MATERIALS,
SHOULD BE SENT TO THE FOLLOWING ADDRESS:
NORTH CAROLINA DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENT AND NATURAL RESOURCES
DIVISION OF WATER QUALITY
AQUIFER PROTECTION SECTION
LAND APPLICATION UNIT
By U.S. Postal Service:
1636 MAIL SERVICE CENTER
RALEIGH, NORTH CAROLINA 27699-1636
TELEPHONE NUMBER: [phone]
By Courier/Special Delivery:
2728 CAPITAL BOULEVARD
RALEIGH, NORTH CAROLINA 27604
FAX NUMBER: [phone]
FORM: RWNCS 12-06 Page 4

WATf; p
State of North Carolina
G Department of Environment and Natural Resources
>_ Division of Water Quality
RECLAIMED WATER NON -CONJUNCTIVE SYSTEMS APPLICATION
FORM: RWNCS 12-06
(THIS FORM MAYBE PHOTOCOPIED FOR USE AS AN ORIGINAL)
Application Number: (to be completed by DWQ)
I. 'GENERAL INFORMATION:
1. Applicant's name (See Instruction A): IBEX Thunderbird LLC Santeetlah Properties LLC
Applicant type: 0 Individual ® Corporation ❑ General Partnership ❑ Privately Owned Public Utility
❑ Federal ❑ State ❑ Municipal ❑ County
Signature authority's name: Jose F. Rosado (per 15A NCAC 2T .0106) Title: President
Applicant's mailing address: 95 Merrick Way, #610
City: Coral Gables State: Florida Zip: 33134-
Telephone number: 305) 447-8697 Fax number: 305) 445-1015 Email Address: [e-mail]
'2. Facility name (name of the subdivision, shopping center, etc.): Santeetlah Lakeside
Facility's physical address: 90 Old Lodge Road
City: Lake Santeetlah State: North Carolina Zip: 28771- County: Graham
Wastewater Treatment Facility: Latitude: 35' 21' 49" Longitude: -830 51' 43" USGS Map Name: Robbinsville
3. Consulting Engineer's name: Harry B. Buckner, PE License Number: 22541 Firm: McGill Associates, PA
Engineer's mailing address: 55 Broad Street
City: Asheville State: North Carolina Zip: 28801-
Telephone number: 828) 252-0575 Fax number: 828) 252-2518 Email Address: hbbucknergmc illengineers corn
4. Consulting Soil Scientist's name: John B. Allison License Number: 1066Firm: Southeast Soils Science, Inc.
Soil Scientist's mailing address: 533 Crabtree Mountain Road
City: Canton State: North Carolina Zip: 28716-
Telephone number: 828) 232-4700 Fax number: [phone] Email Address: [e-mail]
5. Consulting Geologist's name: n/a < 25,000 god License Number: Fes:
Geologist's mailing address:
City: State: Zip: -
Telephone number: (_) _- Fax number: (_) = Email Address:
6. Consulting Agronomist's name: Edwin Stott Firm: Soil and Environmental Consultants
Agronomist's mailing address: 3817 E Lawndale Drive
City: Greensboro State: North Carolina Zip: 27455-
Telephone number: [phone] Fax number: 336) 540-8235 Email Address: estottQsandec.com
FORM: RWNCS 12-06 Page 5

II. PERMIT INFORMATION:
1. Project is: ® New ❑ Major Modification ❑ Minor Modification
2. Fee submitted: $5,013.00 (See Instruction Existing Permit No.: WQ00 , issue date:
3. Facility status: E:l Existing ® Proposed
" Was this system approved for reclaimed disposal under 15A NCAC 2H .0219(k)? El Yes or F-1 No
4. Does this project utilize: Elpublic funds and/or ® private funds; Elpublic lands and/or ® private lands
5. What is the status of the following appropriate permits/certifications?
Permit/Certification
Submitted
Approved
Permit/Certification No.
Agency Reviewer
Erosion & Sedimentation
Control Plan
n/a
Nationwide 12 or 404
n/a
Wetlands 401
n/a
Stormwater Management Plan
n/a
Dam Safety
n/a
Sewer System
5/l/07
Other:
6. Does the project comply with all setbacks found in the river basin rules (15A NCAC 2B .0200)? ® Yes or ❑ No
If no, list non -compliant setbacks:
FORM: RWNCS 12-06 Page 6

III. INFORMATION ON WASTEWATER GENERATION:
1. What is the origin of the wastewater (i.e., school, subdivision, hospital, municipality, shopping center, industry, apartments,
condominiums, etc.)? Subdivision
2. Volume of wastewater flow for this project: 4120 gallons per day (GPD)
3. Explanation of how wastewater flow was determined (15A NCAC 2T .0114(c)):
Type of Establishment
Basis of Flow
Flow Per Unit
Number of Units
Total
Residential Dwelling
Gallons/Bedroom
120
26
3,120
Bathhouse
Gallons/Person
10
25
250
Food Stand
Gallons/100
Square Feet
50
1500
750
Gallons/
Gallons/
Gallons/
Gallons/
Total
4,120
4. Nature of wastewater: ® 100% Domestic Waste (residential, commercial, etc)
❑ 100% Industrial
❑ Combination of Industrial and Domestic Waste: % Domestic % Industrial
❑ MI unicipal waste (town, city, etc.)
� Is there a Pretreatment Program in effect? ❑ Yes or ❑ No
5. Wastewater characteristics (See 15A NCAC 2T .0906(a)):
Estimated Influent
Designed Effluent
Designed Effluent
Parameter
Concentration
Concentration
Concentration
;(monthlyBiochavera a
_(dailymaximum)
Oxygen Demand
(BODemical
300 mg/I
10 mg/1
15 mg/1
Total Suspended Solids (TSS)
250 mg/1
5 mg/1
10 mg/1
Ammonia Nitrogen (NH3-N)
25 mg/1
4 mg/I
6 mg/1
Nitrate Nitrogen (NO3-N)
0 mg/l
9 mg/l
g
`k
.
Nitrite Nitrogen (NO2-N)
0 mg/l
1 mg/l
Total Nitrogen
40 mg/l
15 mg/1
� a
Total Phosphorus
P
7 m g /1
6 mg/1
fit"1 Eru
Total Kjeldahl Nitrogen
a k e t $ a
�
5 mg/l
f
Turbidity
td �
<lONTU
FecalColiforms'Nti°`
``
14 100
per ml
25 per 100 ml
FORM: RWNCS 12-06 Page 7

IV. GENERAL PROJECT INFORMATION:
1. Brief project description: Santeetlah Lakeside is a planned residential community comprised of 13 tw6-bedroom homes and a
single building with a foodstand bath house.
2. In accordance with 15A NCAC 2T .0901 and .0910, what is the intended beneficial utilization of this reclaimed water?
Irrigation of common garden and natural ameni1y areas
3. In accordance with 15A NCAC 2T .0912, provide the minimum distance in feet from the facility's utilization system and
treatment/storage units to each parameter (distances greater than 500 feet may be left blank):
Setback Parameter
Utilization System
Treatment/Storage
Units
Any habitable residence or place of assembly under separate ownership or not
g"
to be maintained as of the site
Fr
100 ft
part project
Any private or public water supply source
Surface waters (streams — intermittent and perennial, perennial waterbodies,
and wetlands) not classified SA
40 ft
150 ft
Surface waters (streams — intermittent and perennial, perennial waterbodies,
and wetlands) classified SA
Any well with exception of monitoring wells
Any property lines''
zxr E
50 ft
k;
4. The treatment and disposal facilities must be secured to prevent unauthorized entry. Details and notations of restricted access
measures shall be shown on submitted plans and specifications. Briefly describe the measures being: Locked access hatches
and secure enclosed buildings
5. What is the 100-year flood elevation? z1820 feet mean sea level. Source: Estimated based on FEMA FIRM Zone A
✓ Are any treatment units or utilization areas located within the 100-year flood plain? ❑ Yes or ® No
If yes, briefly describe which treatment units and/or utilization areas are affected: , and the measures being taken to
protect them against flooding:
If yes, does the Applicant have documentation of compliance with § 143 Article 21 Part 6? ❑ Yes or ❑ No
6. Method to provide system reliability per 15A NCAC 2T .0908(h) (See Instruction R): Standby Generator
7. A certified operator of a grade equal or greater than the facility classification is on call 24 hrs/day? ® Yes or ❑ No
8. What is the specified method of disinfection? Ultraviolet Light Radiation
✓ If chlorine, specify detention time provided: minutes (30 minutes minimum required). Please indicate in what
part of the wastewater system chlorine contact time occurs (i.e. chlorine contact chamber):
✓ If ultraviolet (UV), specify the number of banks: 4, total lamps: 8 and maximum capacity: 40 gpm.
9. How many days of residuals storage are provided (15A NCAC 2T .0908(n))? 365
10. Is duality provided for all treatment units per 15A NCAC 2T .0908(c)? ® Yes or ❑ No
11. is there continuous online monitoring and recording of effluent for turbidity? ® Yes or ❑ No
12. Is lined 5-day upset storage provided? ® Yes or ❑ No
13. Does the 5-day upset storage have restricted access? ® Yes or ❑ No
14. Is aerated flow equalization of at least 25% average daily flow provided? ® Yes or ❑ No
FORM: RWNCS 12-06 Page 8

V. DESIGN INFORMATION FOR NEW OR MODIFIED PORTIONS OF THE WASTEWATER TREATMENT FACILITY
1. Type of treatment system (fixed film, suspended growth, etc): Fixed Film
2. Provide the number and dimensions of each treatment unit, and provide their location in the specifications and plans. If an
item is not applicable, do not fill in the requested information:
a. PRELIMINARY TREATMENT (i.e., physical operations such as large solids screening and equalization to remove
problem characteristics such as abrasive grit and clogging rags, as well as to dampen high flows):
Treatment Unit
Number
of Units
Manufacturer
or Material
Dimensions (ft)
/ Spacings (in)
Volume
( allons
Plan Sheet
Number
Specification
Page Number
Flow Equalization
1
Precast Concrete
8' Diameter
3,750
C3
11312
Select
Select
Select
Select
b. PRIMARY TREATMENT (i.e., physical operations such as fine screening and sedimentation to remove floating and
settable solids):
Treatment Unit
Number
Manufacturer
Dimensions (ft)
Volume
Plan Sheet
Specification
I
of Units
or Material
/ Spacings (mm)
(gallons)
Number
PaLre Number
Stay -Right
Septic Tank
1
Precast or
8' x 16' x 6'H
5,000
C3
n/a
Approved Equal
Select
Select
c. SECONDARY / TERTIARY TREATMENT (i.e., biological and chemical processes to remove organics and nutrients)
Treatment Unit
Number
Manufacturer
Dimensions (ft)
Volume
Plan Sheet
Specification
of Units
or Material
(allons
Number
Pa a Number
Aquapoint
1847, 1st
Trickling Filter
2
Bioclere
Stage, 2377
C4
11700
2nd Stage
Clarifier
2
Aquapoint
Bioclere
8.5' Dia.
1600
C4
11700
Select
Select
Select
Select
Select
Select
FORM: RWNCS 12-06 Page 9

d. DISINFECTION
Treatment Unit
Number
Manufacturer
Dimensions (ft)
Volume
Plan Sheet
Specification
of Units
or Material
(gallons)
Number
Page Number
Ultraviolet
2
Tipton or Approved Equal
0.58' x 4'
C5
11398
Select
Select
e. RESIDUAL TREATMENT
Treatment Unit
Number
Manufacturer
Dimensions (ft)
Volume
Plan Sheet
I
Specification
of Units
or Material
(gallons)
Number
Pa a Number
Stay -Right
Septic Tank
1
Precast or
8' x 16' x 6'H
5,000
C3
n/a
Approved Equal
Select
Select
f. PUMPS
Location
Number
Purpose
Manufacturer /
Capacity
Plan Sheet
Specification
GPM
TDH
of Pumps
Type
Number
Page Number
Equalize
Equalization
q
2
flow to
Bioclere
Submersible
Centrifugal
30
10.50
C3
11312
Units
Bioclere Dosing
4
Flow to
Trickling
Submersible
10
C4
11210
Filter
Centrifugal
Bioclere Recycle
2
Return
solids from
Submersible
35
C4
11700
Bioclere
Centrifugal
Sand Filter Feed
2
Feed Sand
Centrifugal Self
15.7
C5
11700
Filter
Priming
Sand Filter
2
Backwash
Centrifugal Self
Backwash
Sand Filter
Priming
48
CS
11700
Chemical Feed
I
pH
Diaphragm
0.001-
Pumps
Adjustment
Chemical Feed
0.16
C5
11700
Reject Return
1
Return
Reject
Submersible
20
10
C7
11312
Water
Centrifugal
g. BLOWERS
Location
No. of
glowers
Units Served
Manufacturer /
Type
Capacity
(CFM).
Plan Sheet
I Number
Specification
Page Number
FORM:. RWNCS 12-06 Page 10

h. MIXERS
Location
No. of
Mixers
Units Served
Manufacturer /
Type
Power
(h)
Plan Sheet
Number
Specification
I Pa a Number
Chemical Feed Tank
1
1
Neptune Model
CSA -1.0 direct
drive
1/4
CS
11700
i. RECORDING DEVICES & RELIABILITY
Device
Number
Maximum
Manufacturer
Location
Plan
Sheet
Specification
Page
of Units
Capacity
Number
Number
Turbidimeter
I
Continuous,
Hach
Controls/Filter
C2
11253
<100 NTU
Building
Influent Flow Measuring Device
I
80 gpm
Endress and
Flow
Equalization
C3
n/a
Hauser
Force Main
Drip Irrigaton
Effluent Flow Measuring Device
1
20 gpm
Master Meter
Hydraulic
C6
11300
Unit
Select
Select
FORM: RWNCS 12-06 Page 11

VI. DESIGN INFORMATION FOR STORAGE IMPOUNDMENTS
1. Provide the number of earthen impoundments in the system: 0
2. Are any impoundments designed to receive adjacent surface runoff? ❑ Yes or ® No
If Yes, please specify which impoundment: and the drainage area: ft2.
3. Are impoundment(s) designed to include a discharge point (pipe, emergency spillway, etc)? ❑ Yes or ® No
4. Provide the design measures proposed for impoundment liner protection from wind driven wave action: Concrete storage
tanks are being provided ,
5. Provide the location of each design element in the specifications and engineering plans for each storage unit:
Storage Impoundment
Plan Sheet
Specification
Number
Page Number
Liner material (15A NCAC 2T .0908(f) and (g))?
❑ Synthetic I ❑ Clay
C7
® Concrete ❑ Steel
Liner installation and testing requirements
k b W
Inside berm surface dimensions (L x W x H)
10 ft
20 ft 10.5 ft
C7
Bottom dimensions (L x W)
loft
20 ft
C7
Embankment side slope
Mean seasonal high water table depth *
ft
Finished grade elevation
ft
Depth from bottom to top of embankment
ft
Total volume
ft3
15,000 gallons
C7
Design freeboard
0.5 ft
C7
Depth of minimum liquid level (above permanent
liquid level)
0 ft
C7
4 Tanks at
Effective volume provided **
ft3
15,000 gallons
C7
each
Effective storage time provided
14 days
C7
iw i n: i ne imer snail oe,proieciea from impacts or the seasonal nigh water table as necessary.
** NOTE: The storage volume should be calculated between the top of any permanent liquid level (as indicated by outlet
pipe) and maximum allowable liquid level in the impoundment.
6. Provide the number of 5-day upset impoundments in the system: 1
7. Are any 5-day upset impoundments designed to receive adjacent surface runoff? ❑ Yes or ® No
If Yes, please specify which impoundment: and the drainage area: ft2.
8. Are the 5-day upset impoundment(s) designed to include a discharge point (pipe, emergency spillway, etc)? ❑ Yes or ® No
9. Provide the design measures proposed for the 5-day upset impoundment liner protection from wind driven wave action: A
concrete storage tank is being provided
FORM: RWNCS 12-06 Page 12

10. Provide the location of each design element in the specifications and engineering plans for each storage unit:
5-day Upset Impoundment
Plan Sheet
Number
Specification
Pa a Number
Liner material (15A NCAC 2T,.0908(f))?'
El Syn thetic
❑ Clay
C7
® Concrete
❑ Steel
Liner installation and testing requirements'
Inside berm surface dimensions (L x W x H)
ft
C7
Bottom dimensions (L x W)
ft
:!10
f207.5
ft
C7
Embankment side slope
Mean seasonal high water table depth *
ft
Finished grade elevation
ft
Depth from bottom to top of embankment
ft
Total volume
ft3
10,500 gallons
C7
Design freeboard
0.5 ft
C7
Depth of minimum liquid level (above permanent
liquid level)
0 ft
C7
Effective volume provided **
ft3
2- tanks at
10,300 gallons
Each
C7
Effective storage time provided
5 days
C7
iw i r,: i ne imer snaii be protected from impacts of the seasonal high water table as necessary.
* * NOTE: The storage volume should be calculated between the top of any permanent liquid level (as indicated by outlet
pipe) and maximum allowable liquid level in the impoundment.
FORM: RWNCS 12-06 Page 13

VII. DESIGN INFORMATION FOR UTILIZATION SYSTEM
1. The utilization system is: ❑ Spray Irrigation ® Drip Irrigation
2. Utilization system is: ❑ existing ® proposed.
3. If applicable, provide the location of each design element in the specifications and engineering plans:
Utilization Pump Tank
Plan Sheet
Specification
Number
Page Number
Internal dimensions (L x W x H or cp x H)
ft
6 ft cp
16.5 ft H
C7
11300, 11210
Total volume
466.5 ft' 3489.6 gallons
C7
11300, 11210
Dosing volume
92 ft' 687 gallons
C7
11300, 11210
Audible & visual alarms
'a'� d , ,�
C7
1 130011210
AQ
Equipment to prevent utilization during rain events
P g
s
C7
11300 11210
r,F
4. List any equipment (note sheet number of the plans or page number in the specifications) not specifically mentioned above
(pump hoist, odor control equipment, etc.):
5. Loading rates recommended by the Soil Scientist Evaluation:
Fields within
Recommended Loading
Recommended Loading
Loading
If Seasonal,
list
Soil Series
Soil Area
Rate
(in7hr)
Rate
(in/yr)
Recommended
appropriate
months
Junaluska
Zones 1-4
0.60
177.80
® Annual
❑ Seasonal
❑ Annual
❑ Seasonal
❑ Annual
❑ Seasonal
❑ Annual
❑ Seasonal
❑ Annual
❑ Seasonal
6. Design loading rates are equal or less than the loading rates recommended by Soil Scientist? ® Yes or ❑ No
If No, explain why 15A NCAC 2T .0908(m) is not met:
7. In accordance with 15A NCAC 2T .0910(a)(1) and (b)(1), how will the public and/or employees be notified of the use of
reclaimed water? Access to the utlization area will be limited to pro e�rty owners and their guests Signs informing the public
that reclaimed water is non -potable and not intended for human contact will be posted at the entrance to the area
8. In accordance with 15A NCAC 2T .0910(a)(3), what education materials will be provided to property owners of utilization
sites not owned by the generator? No sites not owned by the generator are proposed for utilization of reclaimed water.
FORM: RV NCS 12-06 Page 14

9. Provide the following location information for the approximate center of each utilization field / zone:
Field / Zone
E Latitude
Longitude
Zone 1
35 °
_]7
21 '
S4 "
-83 °
51'
3211
Zone 2
35 °
21 '
54 "
-83 °
51'
32 "
Zone 3
35 °
21 '
54 "
-83 °
51'
3211
Zone 4
35 °
21 '
54 "
-83 °
51'
3211
°
°
,
It
°
,
°
,
°
°
,
°
If
°
,
°
,
It
_ °
,
if
°
It
_ °
,
it
°
°
°
°
°
°
It
°
°
„
°
°
,
if
°
it
_ °
,
it
°
It
_ °
,
it
°
,0
it
°
°
,
It
°
°
,
It
°
°
if
°
,
It
_ °
If
°
,
It
_ O
it
°
,
it
_ °
IF
°
,
it
_ °
It
°
It
_ °
„
✓ Level of accuracy? +- 1 second
✓ Method of measurement? Electronic Mapping
✓ Datum? NAD83
FORM: RVJNCS 12-06 Page 15

10. Utilization Design (fill in the appropriate information for either a spray or drip utilization system):
a. Spray Utilization:
Field / Zone
Design Area (ft)
Number of
Nozzles
Maximum Precipitation
Rate in/hr)
Design Annual Loading
Rate (in/ r
Total
, p�� r ay �' F
k,
{ f
<a` � 3
f
I� F 3 k fax
Ez
Spray Utilization Design Element
Plan Sheet
Number
Specification
Page Number
Wetted diameter of nozzles
ft
Wetted area of nozzles
ft2
Nozzle capacity
gpm
Nozzle manufacturer / model
/
Elevation of highest nozzle
ft
FORM: RWNCS.12-06 Page 16

b. Drip Utilization:
Field/ Zone
Design Area (ft)
Number of
Nozzles
Maximum Precipitation
Rate in/hr
Design Annual Loading
Rate (in/ r)
Zone 1
4,716
590
0.12
88.57
Zone 2
4,660
583
0.12
88.57
Zone 3
5384
.673
0.12
88.57
Zone 4
5060
633
0.12
88.57
Total
,
Drip Utilization Design Element
Plan Sheet
Number
ation
:PaLeNumber,
Wetted area of emitters
8 ft2
F DS2
11300
Distance between laterals
4 ft
DS2
11300
Distance between emitters
2 ft
DS2
11300
Emitter capacity
0.01 gpm
DS2
11300
Emitter manufacturer / model
Netafim / Bioline
DS2
11300
Elevation of highest emitter
1888 ft
DS2
11300
FORM: RWNCS 12-06 Page 17

11. Cover crop information:
Use the Nutrient Management in North Carolina's Realistic Yield Expectations webpage
(http://www.soil.ncsu.edu/nmp/ncninwg/Aields/index.php#couii ) to determine the PAN (lbs/acre) and Phosphorus removal
(lbs/acre) rates for each cover crop.
Cover Crop
Soil Series
% Slope
Nitrogen Removal Rate
lbs/acre)
Phosphorus Removal
Rate (lbs/acre)
Hardwoods
Junaluska
35-45%
360+
204
Rhododendron
Junaluska
35-45%
113
204
✓ Proposed mineralization rate• n as nd volatilization ratets
✓ Utilization area based upon the nitrogen balanc . .� ` WS #'t2
✓ Utilization area based upon the phosphorus balance: 15,937 ft2
✓ Utilization area based upon the water balance: 13,707 ft
✓ Utilization sites are: ❑ hydraulically limited ® nutrient limited
FORM: RWNCS 12-06 Page 18

Professional Engineer's Certification:
attest that this application for IBEX Thunderbird, LLC, Santeetlah Lakeside
/ has been reviewed by me and is accurate, complete
d co nt wi he information supplied in the engineering plans, calculations, and all other supporting documentation to the best
of my wledge. I further attest that to the best of my knowledge the proposed design has been prepared in accordance with this
application package and its instructions as well as all applicable regulations and statutes. Although other professionals may have
developed certain portions of this submittal package, inclusion of these materials under my signature and seal signifies that I have
reviewed this material and have judged it to be consistent with the proposed design. Note: In accordance with NC General Statutes
143-215.6A and 143-215.613, any person who knowingly makes any false statement, representation, or certification in any application
package shall be guilty of a Class 2 misdemeanor, which may include a fine not to exceed $10,000 as well as civil penalties up to
$25,000 per violation.
North Carolina Profe fsional) jngineer's seal, signature, and date:
e SEAL
z 22541
.��,=
''�0d,�roe�r,����` � •2�•1,a�1
Applicant's Certification (signing authority must be in compliance with 15A NCAC 2T .0106(b)):
I, Jose F. Rosado President
(signing authority name) (title)
attest that this application for IBEX Thunderbird LLC Santeetlah Lakeside
(facility name)
has been reviewed by me and is accurate and complete to the best of my knowledge. I understand that any discharge of wastewater
from this non -discharge system to surface waters or the land will result in an immediate enforcement action that may include civil
penalties, injunctive relief, and/or criminal prosecution. I will make no claim against the Division of Water Quality should a condition
of this permit be violated. I also understand that if all required parts of this application package are not completed and that if all
required supporting information and attachments are not included, this application package will be returned to me as incomplete. I
further certify that the applicant or any affiliate has not been convicted of an environmental crime, has not abandoned a wastewater
facility without proper closure, does not have an outstanding civil penalty where all appeals have been exhausted or abandoned, are
compliant with any active compliance schedule, and do not have any overdue annual fees under Rule 2T .0105. Note: In accordance
with NC General Statutes 143-215.6A and 143-215.613, any person who knowingly makes any false statement, representation, or
certification in any applicationpe age sh 1 be g - ty of a Class 2 misdemeanor, which may include a fine not to exceed $10,000 as
well as civil penalties up to 5,00 er vat'
Signature: Date: q/2q/o7
FORM: RWNCS 12-06 Page 19

Revised Agronomist's Report

Environmental
Consultants, PA
?hone. [phone] - Fax: [phone]
April 23, 2007
Revised Agronomist's Report
Lake Santeelah Project
Near Robbinsville in Graham County, NC
4-1769
Summary and Information
This report is in response to the questions addressed in the April 11'' letter from
NCDWQ. Specifically, this report addresses questions raised regarding agronomist
recommendations. This serves as an amendment .to the original Agronomist Report dated
March 26th, 2007. This report is an agronomist report based on information provided by
client McGill Associates.
For the purposes of this report, equivalent rate means the rate or concentration for the
application site. Since the site is less than one acre, there seems to have been confusion
over some mathematical calculations. For example, on the nutrient loading worksheet, in
January for example, the amount of wastewater generated is 1360 gpd. There are 31 days
in January for a total flow of 1360 * 31 = 42,160 gallons per month. Now if this site was
one acre in size, the equivalent application rate would be 42160 gallons / 1 acre / month =
42,160 gallons/ac/mo. If the site was 10 acres, the equivalent application rate would be
42160 gallons / 10 acres / month = 4,216 gal/ac/mo. As the land area increased, the
amount of water applied per unit area decreased. Since the site is .76 acres, we get an
equivalent application rate of 42160 gallons/ .76 acres / mo = 55,473.68
gallons/acre/month. We haven't created water; rather, this is a concentration
representation. Again this calculation is just for clarity as the waste disposal site is less
than one acre in size.
In order to stay in order with the comments on the NCDWQ letter, I will address each
point in order as follows:
Page 3: Application: 2. Check 3: Nutrient calculations were included in the first report,
but have been revised as shown on the sheet titled "Nutrient Loading Calculations
Santeetlah Lakeside Job 4-1769". These calculations were performed to accommodate
the changes in loading/flow rates to allow for lack of use in the winter months as
provided by McGill Associates. The annual application rate of total N is 179 lbs/ac with
PAN of 107.36 lb/ac. Per A&L Laboratories, a recommended rate of 152 lb/ac is shown

on the enclosed data sheets. This is an equivalent rate in this spray field of 115 lb/ac
since the spray field is .76 ac. Also during winter months when these trees are dormant,
the application rate has been significantly reduced. During these months, based on the \,cap
soil fertility analysis and the soil profile descriptions (Southeast Soils Science, Inc), the
ammonia in the wastewater will be lost in two ways. One will be "M-IM ,,u,n s�� rd`�
ammonia is a volatile gas and two will be through fixation. The Junaluska soil series has
large amounts of mica in the soil solum. This mica given the pH of the soil will fix some
of the ammonium ions in the interlayers in much the same way that K is fixed by mica as
the ions are very similar in size. Furthermore due to the sandy highly aerobic soil
conditions and the fact that we are managing for a target pH of 6, nitrification will be the
largest driver for ammonia conversion. Some ammonia will be lost to volatilization,
some to fixation after mineralization, and the rest of the ammonia will undergo
nitrification to nitrate under these conditions. Nitrate will be the most plant available
form of Nitrogen especially in this particular situation and growing environment. After
reviewing the wastewater concentrations by design, ammonia (not plant available)
accounted for 4 mg/1 of the 15 mg/l, nitrate 9mg/1(plant available), nitrite lmg/l (not
plant available), and organic N 1 mg/1(not plant available).
Now to be conservative, let us assume that all nitrogen applied to the soil will eventually
be plant available. According to NCDA, 50% of the organic N will be plant available
during the first year, while another 10-15% will become plant available annually in
subsequent years. In determining total N loading, we will assume that all of the organic
N and the inorganic N will eventually become plant available. During the oak tree's
growing season of April -October, by design, 138 lb/ac equivalent rate of nitrogen will be
applied to the site. A&L recommends a rate of 3.5 lbs per 1000 sf for the oaks or an
equivalent rate of 115 lbs/ac in this field ((3.51 / 1000 sf * 43,560 sf) * .76 ac = 115 lb/
ac. Assuming that no N is lost which is not the case, we will place an equivalent rate of
138 lbs in the area during these months for a slight excess of 23 lbs annually. Now
during the dormant months, the landscaping species listed in this report will also be
utilizing nitrogen. A&L recommends rates of 2.6 lb / 1000 square feet or an equivalent
rate of 2.6 * 43.6 * .76 = 86 lb / ac annually. We will need an additional 63 lbs of
nitrogen to satisfy the requirements for these plant species. During November — March
an additional 40.62 lbs/ac equivalent will be applied to the site by design making a minor
net deficit of 23 lbs annually. Again this is assuming that no nitrogen is lost which is not
the case. The site does not appear to need additional nitrogen at this time.
Phosphorus concentrations are to be less than 6 mg/l. This would account for an annual
loading of 72 lb/ac which would be a deficit of 83.53 lbs per A&L Laboratories. A&L
recommends approximately 155.1 lb/ac equivalent rate.
Page 3 : Application: 2. Check 9: The soils are very well drained with a low water
holding capacity. Based on -the Ksat information provided by Southeast Soil Science,
Inc., these soils are very permeable. As far as needing additional irrigation, this is an
existing stand of oak trees that formed under natural conditions without any irrigation
other than rainfall. Scientifically, I can not prove that the existing vegetation needs more
water. The new plant species will however need some irrigation water and nutrients in

order to grow. Due to the low water holding capacity of the soils, some irrigation water
would be needed for the new plants.
Page 3: Application: 9. ' As per our first meeting, we discussed the area calculation for
the surface drip dispersal field. The attached map shows the boundary of the irrigation
field that was used for all agronomic calculations. As was discussed, vegetative cover
root systems are dispersed throughout the area.
Page 4: Agronomist Evaluation: 2. These calculations are provided on the sheet titled
"Nutrient Loading Calculations Santeetlah Lakeside Job 4-1769".
Page 5: Agronomist Evaluation: 3 and 4. I think the issue here was from a higher
concentration calculation based on a disposal area of 19,000 square feet instead of 33,000
square feet.
Page 5: Agronomist Evaluation: 5: Using equipment to broadcast lime on this slope is
not feasible; however, use of a small push spreader or hand operated spreader can be
accomplished. Using the following formula 30 lbs/1000 sf * 33000 sf / 1000 = 9901bs of
lime or 20 50 lb bags. Due to the low CEC, and low buffer capacity, liming should be
able to raise the pH fairly quickly.
Page 5: Agronomist Evaluation: 6: Based on the Ksat data obtained by Southeast Soil
Science, Inc., these soils are very permeable and can move twice the design flow based
on the February 23, 2007 Deep Percolation/Conveyance Capacity. I am assuming that
the volume of water to be applied to the site will move off of the site as shown by this
analysis and will not adversely affect the health of the natural vegetation.
This report addresses the concerns/questions raised at the first express review meeting.
Should you have any other questions or concerns, please do not hesitate to give me a call.
Sincerely,
Robert Edwin Stott, R.S., L.S
Branch Manager
S&EC, PA Greensboro
336-209-1265 mobile
336-540-8234 office
336-540-8235 fax

LOCATION JUNALUSKA NC+GA TN VA
Established Series
Rev. JDV:SAB:AG:MKC
04/2001
JUNALUSKA SERIES
The Junaluska series consists of moderately deep, well drained, moderately permeable
soils on ridges and side slopes of the Southern Appalachian Mountains. They formed in
residuum that is affected by soil creep in the upper part, and is weathered from low grade
metasedimentary rocks, such as phyllite, slate, and low grade, thinly bedded
metasandstone. Slope ranges from 3 to 95 percent. Mean annual temperature is 56
degrees F., and mean annual precipitation is about 60 inches near the type location.
TAXONOMIC CLASS: Fine -loamy, mixed, subactive, mesic Typic Hapludults
TYPICAL PEDON: Junaluska fine sandy loam on a 20 percent, southwest facing
mountain side slope --forested. (Colors are for moist soil unless otherwise stated)
Oi--2 to 0 inches; partially decomposed organic matter and deciduous leaves, twigs, and
roots.
A1--0 to 2 inches; brown (7.5YR 5/4) fine sandy loam; weak medium granular structure;
very friable; common fine, medium and coarse roots; 5 percent metasandstone channers
by volume; common fine mica flakes; extremely acid; clear wavy boundary.
A2--2 to 11 inches; strong brown (7.5YR 5/6) fine sandy loam; weak medium granular
structure; very friable; common fine, medium and coarse roots; 5 percent metasandstone
charmers by volume; common fine mica flakes; very strongly acid; clear wavy boundary.
(Combined thickness of the A horizons is 1 to 11 inches thick.)
Bt--11 to 21 inches; yellowish red (5YR 5/8) sandy clay loam; common coarse distinct
red (2.5YR 4/8) mottles; moderate medium subangular blocky structure; friable, slightly
sticky, slightly plastic; few medium roots; few faint clay films on faces of peds; 5 percent
by volume metasandstone channers; common fine mica flakes; strongly acid; clear wavy
boundary. (10 to 25 inches thick)
C/B--21 to 26 inches; thin parallell layers of yellowish red (5YR 5/8) and red (2.5YR
4/8) fine sandy loam saprolite, and sandy clay loam B horizon material; saprolite is
massive and the B horizon material has weak medium subangular block structure; friable;
5 percent by volume metasandstone charmers; common fine mica flakes; strongly acid;
clear irregular boundary. (0 to 8 inches thick)

Cr--26 to 31 inches; multicolored, weathered, low grade metasandstone; partially
consolidated but can be dug with difficulty with a spade.
TYPE LOCATION: Cherokee County, North Carolina; west from Murphy on U.S.
Highway 64 to State Road 1301; west to State Road 1302; northwest to State Road 1303;
northeast to USFS Road 307; 0.5 mile west of intersection of USFS Road 307 and USFS
Road 6068 on USFS Road 307; 0.1 mile S of USFS Road 307 in woods.
(525,880N;465,790E)
RANGE IN CHARACTERISTICS: Solum thickness ranges from 15 to 39 inches.
Depth to a Cr horizon of weathered bedrock is 20 to 40 inches. The upper boundary of
the Cr horizon represents a paralithic contact. Depth to hard bedrock is greater than 40
inches. The soil is extremely acid to moderately acid unless limed. Content of mica flakes
ranges from few to common. Content of rock fragments ranges up to 35 percent by
volume in the A, B, and C horizons.
The A horizon has hue of 1 OYR to 5YR, value of 3 to 5, and chroma of 3 to 8. A horizons
that have value and chroma of 3 are less than 6 inches thick. The E horizon, where
present, has hue of 5YR to 1 OYR, value of 4 to 6, and chroma of 3 to 8. The A and E
horizons are loam, fine sandy loam, or silt loam in the fine -earth fraction.
The Bt horizon, and the BA and BC horizons, where present, have hue of 2.5YR to
7.5YR, value of 4 to 6, and chroma of 4 to 8. At least part of the Bt horizon has hue of
2.5YR or 5YR. The Bt horizon is loam, clay loam, silty clay loam, or sandy clay loam in
the fine- earth fraction. The BA and BC horizons are loam, fine sandy loam, or silt loam
in the fine -earth fraction.
The C horizon, where present, is multicolored saprolite that is fine sandy loam, loam,
sandy loam, or loamy fine sand in the fine -earth fraction. Where present, the C/B horizon
consists of thin parallel layers of saprolite and Bt horizon material that has formed along
the fracture planes. It is reddish in color and the C and B parts have the texture range
stated for these horizons.
The Cr horizon is multicolored, weathered and fractured, low grade metasedimentary
rock, such as phyllite, slate, and low grade, thinly bedded metasandstone. It is partially
consolidated but can be dug with difficulty with a spade.
COMPETING SERIES: These include the Albemarle, Alleghany, Allenwood, Arcola,
Arendstville, Aura, Bedington, Birdsboro, Brasstown, Bucks, Butano, Chester,
Che nd, Chilin Cl mer, Collin on, Cowee, Ed emont, Edneytown, Elsinboro,
Eubanks, Fernhaven(T), Frankstown, Freehold, Gilpin, Gladstone(T), Gleneli?, Leek Kill,
Lonon, Matapeake, Meadowville, Murrill, Nixon, Pineville, Quakertown, Rayne,
Shelocta, Shouns, Syenite, Tate, Thurmont, Ungers, and Whiteford series in the same
family, and the Ashe, Chestnut, and Evard series in closely related families.

Albemarle soils have a Cr horizon of weathered arkosic sandstone. Ashe and Chestnut
soils are coarse -loamy, lack Bt horizons, and have granite or gneiss bedrock at depths of
20 to 40 inches. Arcola soils formed from siltstone and sandstone in the Piedmont Plateau
and contain fragments of those rocks. Cowee soils formed from igneous and high grade
metamorphic rocks such as granite, gneiss, and hornblende gneiss, and contain fragments
of those rocks. Gilpin soils have soft bedrock of sandstone, siltstone, or shale 20 to 40
inches below the surface. None of the other competing series have bedrock within a depth
of 20 to 40 inches.
Note: The above section has not been updated to reflect the 8th Edition of Keys to Soil
Taxonomy.
GEOGRAPHIC SETTING: Junaluska soils are on strongly sloping to very steep ridges
and side slopes of the Southern Appalachian Mountains. Elevation ranges from 1,400 to
3,500 feet. Slopes are typically 15 to 50 percent but range from 3 to 95 percent. Junaluska
soils formed in residuum that is affected by soil creep in the upper part, and is weathered
from metasedimentary rocks, such as.phyllite, slate, thinly bedded metasandstone, and
quartzite. Mean annual temperature is 56 degrees F., and mean annual precipitation is
about 60 inches near the type location.
GEOGRAPHICALLY ASSOCIATED SOILS: These are include the competing
Brasstown series and the Cataska, Santeetlah, Soco, Spivey, Stecoah, Sylco, and Tsali
soils. All of these soils except for Brasstown and Tsali have a cambic horizon. Also, they
are all on ridges and side slopes except for Santeetlah and Spivey which are in coves.
Cataska and Tsali soils are shallow to paralithic contact with a Cr horizon. Cataska,
Spivey, and Sylco soils are loamy -skeletal. Santeetlah, Spivey, and Stecoah are deeper
than 40 inches to bedrock. This soil is usually mapped in complex with Brasstown or
Tsali soils.
DRAINAGE AND PERMEABILITY: Well drained; very little runoff where forest
litter has not been disturbed. Medium to very rapid runoff where litter has been removed;
moderate permeability.
USE AND VEGETATION: Most of the soil is in forest. Common trees are chestnut
oak, white oak, scarlet oak, black oak, northern red oak, and hickory with some eastern
white pine, Virginia pine, pitch pine, shortleaf pine, blackgum, and red maple. The
understory includes flowering dogwood, rhododendron, mountain laurel, sourwood,
blueberry, buffalo nut. A small acreage is cleared and used for pasture and hayland.
DISTRIBUTION AND EXTENT: North Carolina, Georgia, Tennessee, and Virginia.
The series is of moderate extent.
MLRA OFFICE RESPONSIBLE: Lexington, Kentucky
SERIES ESTABLISHED: McDowell County, North Carolina; 1989. The name is from
Junaluska Gap in Clay County, North Carolina.

REMARKS: The Junaluska series describes soils that were previously mapped in the
Sylco series. However, Junaluska soils have an argillic horizon and average less than 35
percent by volume rock fragments. The 6/99 revision updates the classification to the 8th
Edition of Keys to Soil Taxonomy. The soil is placed in the subactive CEC activity class
based upon NSSL lab data from the typifying pedon.
Laboratory data from the typifying pedon were obtained from the National Soil Survey
Laboratory, sample number S85NC-039-003.
This soil has the following diagnostic horizons and features:
Ochric epipedon - the zone from the surface of the soil to a depth of 11 inches (A1 and
A2 horizons)
Argillic horizon --the zone from 11 to 21 inches below the surface (Bt horizon)
Paralithic contact - the occurrence of weathered bedrock at a depth of 26 inches. (The
upper boundary of the Cr horizon)
MLRA: 130 SIR: NCO 181
National Cooperative Soil Survey
U.S.A.

Nutrient Loading Calculations Santeetlah Lakeside Job 4-1769
'`concentrations from Manufacturer of Bioclere per Design Engineer
Month
Adjusted Daily Flow
Equivalent App. Rate
Total N
Nitrate
Nitrite
Ammonia Organic N
PAN
Phosphorus
Gallons
gal/ac/mo
Ib/ac
Ib/ac
Ib/ac
Ib/ac Ib/ac
Ib/ac
Ib/ac
mo
mo
mo
mo mo
mo
mo
January
1360
55,473.68
6.94
4.16
0.46
1.85
0.46
4.16
2.78
February
1360
50,105.26
6.27
3.76
0.42
1.67
0.42
3.76
2.51
March
1360
55,473.68
6.94
4.16
0.46
1.85
0.46
4.16
2.78
April
2740
108,157.89
13.53
8.12
0.90
3.61
0.90
8.12
5.41
May
4120
168,052.63
21.02
12.61
1.40
5.61
1.40
12.61
8.41
June
4120
162,631.58-
20.35
12.21
1.36
5.43
1.36
12.21
8.14
July
4120
168,052.63
21.02
12.61
1.40
5.61
1.40
12.61
8.41
August
4120
168,052.63
21.02
12.61
1.40
5.61
1.40
12.61
8.41
September
4120
162,631.58
20.35
12.21
1.36
5.43
1.36
12.21
8.14
October
4120
168,052.63
21.02
12.61
1.40
5.61
1.40
12.61
8.41
November
2740
108,157.89
13.53
8.12
0.90
3.61
0.90
8.12
5.41
December
1360
55,473.68
6.94
4.16
0.46
1.85
0.46
4.16
2.78
1,430,315.79
178.93
107.36
71.57
wetted area .76 acre 0.76
Ref 59 recommended rates of 70-100 lb per acre for hardwoods
per A&L reccomended rate of 3.5 Ibs per 1000 sf or 115.71
per A&L reccomended rate of 4.7 Ibs per 1000 sf or 155.382
31
28
31
30
31
30
31
31
30
31
30
31

Report Nu
R07074-00 A&L Eastern1laboratories, Inc. a'? 'K.
$b
Account Number: 7621 Whitepine Road Richmond, Virginia 23237. [phone]
46376 Fax No. [phone] Email: [e-mail]°
Send To: SOIL & ENVIRONMENTAL Grower: MCGILL ASSOCIATES Submitted By:' STEVEN PRICE
CONSULTANTS PA
236 LE PHILLIP CT - STE C
CONCORD, NC 28025
Sample Number: BOR 7
Lab Number: 6118
Date Received: 3/15/2007 Date Reported: 3/19/2007
3P"11,11 IA
W „-
w a m
, R1 rt�p.
s l
4 N
n,
"I
t';? ,.✓o " s ,�� .tt+: 4`e'.{: ' S"a t � � ^; z 3� sK'
„
tr �
�A� om
,'J,a,..�. 7dYa.�f FT L �ah .:. dN',ryS , s.c ;, it y�'�t,)i.. a u:ica»�� ,'w�•,..TA1k., -�$' '�•,`A'1 A'tdz` tiYj,$M S` 1• *Xl� ,A `'xt 'p
un
.. 9.•. 7< ... .�. Y ., ...., .. t .,.......Y ..,., �,... _>_ ><..,¢ :'s„,».3'w rvrw.,'z'aa:;;¢.� ,3 < �;. xi.,, ,,...._'f-�. «" 3 h a?+' 3 '�. } E b C�'&,.., r� � h...» °� N
... .a. . x
b. ��
RESULTS, b.
pofss u
p r m Ma n�siGm
Co
� ... ,,, ..h.Galci�m �
n
er rBoron�. � �� x�..
ppm 9 79 75 1,90 22 2.0 76 129 2.4 0.1
[,_. ... vi,.c s... & ,•, ,:.,:, rn.. x.. .., p.. '.. <. .� :.,.: ca. x k• x , ram! , G,` S _ < ,• Y. ". x. � .0 <"¢i 3: a .. 6r�-- i "
� E C � PtERC.ENTaB SE¢S�+►TU ,. F,
NITRA TE HLQRIDE 1=NR
< ,� . w. g _ >: d .. , � <a..w �t
�s
,x..r.:...,., , ,... ¢ .a o, '•. .> ;. .>.e tv -Ryi, xs,........ .am. .. a. e\i .. " ,. wf;�.A> < '�
m.. ,..... ., > ...,.:
.. , «k3 , r.>.. -.x , r-:. _>, ,. <m ,.... ,: ., ?i`..,
v
x. r a I{f
5.4 0.7 2.5 8.2 25.2 38.3 28.3 1 3.4 114
. �...sx3 ,%.<. ->_ d 2 N �-sb.x.""., s.i ..,:. Y ..., ,, k"Y, e`".k-..,.:: ,.,.v r ,R ¢_..._. .. ,.. .^�°.:u<> -: ->,>. d ,_ < ,x... ,.. ,.^Y"" a .a'.e yS a\• .m.^5..^ k...-
,..,,... x � � 3 g , x- ,, , . 'x ,A>.ha •-�_:`. ,z,x ,
,, .< .:: , . W, ,r. , .,:....,. a h ..3,�a
-�,�� �„x:SOIL,<FER�TILr;.,�. �. ITY,RECCOM EST
Odo'$,�7:T�J RG�.`.�':.,'
,:,,,. :+u ,, ,...a R m i _. _,-h....,"rte :�s.. ..,.ti r._nu'<.._ �..- $_., f G
,.., er,:, .. _. . - «
>.;. I4 ::: at .a•, k ., ,., er <'l"..,. ,.. .. ..fl... °en.<,u , .,..si'e,. .,,.4 s'ax'.. w r ,i,
d:¢ ,__.<..>. ., ,: ,:, r .=r ..-., .r'.... -«,q
,. YIELD__ � :x � ., F�<_�� , : ,;e. :.. �::<
vx .. .,.,cw. r.., .. ,.rti' ak , �>..A+',,.�' . ._ �.,,. ... ,. $ �'� .." .,.., 1 ,Y x r
'+: �s �a..z.., o- ,. ...: •� r <. ,. �,.,'s. a i ' '.
�w
, ,.... <..., ...>,,
.. _ ...c "x <,..... . >.A»,.." , . ax,x� ,;. >.: x:. <�w ,.,. , . .. .'�.x.... .... , 'd ,;•tat ,..xn ,-_.: � , n " . .. o�
�
«. >. m. ..,, ': ., e•-': ,'P-'.
,.ml
....
r Nifra en. w Phos , ate :,x'
�H Iron
ohs
� �,Ca�pper
Oak Tree 25.0 3.5. 4.7 4 0.00 0.12 0.01 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.01
1

Report Nu A&L EASTERN LAOORATORIES INC.
R07074-005
Account Number: 7621 Whitepine Road Richmond, Virginia 23237Ego
46376 [phone] • Fax No. [phone]
Send To: SOIL & ENVIRONMENTAL Grower: MCGILL ASSOCIATES Submitted By: STEVEN PRICE
CONSULTANTS PA
236 LE PHILLIP CT - STE C
CONCORD, NC 28025
Sample Number: BOR 7 Lab Number: 6118 Date Received: 3/15/2007 Date Reported: 3/19/2007
Comments:
Sample BOR 7: Apply the amount of lime recommended in first page to raise pH
Sample BOR 7: This soil is very sandy and subject to heavy leaching loss of nutrients specially nitrogen, sulfer and boron . To minimize loss,
make sure apply these leachable nutrients close to planting time in the Spring. Split application if possible.
Sample BOR 7: For best result, if there are no existing plants, broadcast all lime then till and mix 6 inches into the soil. Limit the lime application to
50 pounds per 1000 sq. ft. for existing plants, apply every 4-6 months until the recommended amount is fulfilled.
Sample BOR 7: Phosphate.is more efficient if applied near the plant, apply all phosphate beside the row. Broadcast N and/or K20 then mix into
the soil. If there is no fertilizer meets the ratio, you can use single element fertilizer such as Urea, Triplesuper Phosphate and Muriate of Potash to
achieve the requirements. Consult the enclosed instruction sheet on lime and fertilizer application.
Sample BOR 7: All recommended fertilizers are on actual elemental basis. To convert to product basis, divide the recommended quantity in the
first page by the percentage of the active ingredient then multiply by 100. See attached sheet.
Sample BORT Use Ammonium Sulfate as N source to supply sulfur.
Sample BOR 7: Broadcast zinc sulfate and mix into the soil to raise zinc level. Zinc may be applied more efficiently in the band near the plant.
Sample BOR 7: Broadcast boron using Borax and mix into the soil to raise boron level. Note boron should not be applied in the band near the
plant.
-+° u=
aul Chu, Ph.D.

Report Nu
R07074-00
0
Account Number:
46376
A&L Eastern aboratories- Inc.
7621 Whitepine Road Richmond, Virginia 23237 [phone]
Fax,No. [phone] Email: [e-mail]
Send To: SOIL & ENVIRONMENTAL
CONSULTANTS PA
236 LE PHILLIP CT - STE C
CONCORD, NC 28025
Sample Number: PIT 11
Grower: MCGILL ASSOCIATES Submitted By: STEVEN PRICE
Lab Number: 6119 Date Received: 3/15/2007 Date Reported: 3/19/2007
Z
h
4
M, R
a. mNP� st..
"M
.. •x5�d:
. - _ _ pt . ¢. � :"�
w �-,s` w��.r. •� : � . , ,�'�:� s mb
.. ., ,.
. . .F.. ...,..
nF.:.. , x::: �', ., x.. .. ,2
.... x.> H~ ..... r:: _.. ,u-..:.4. n W.. ..,. ........ a+ 5...< "� ....4` v.. ,...i 1 ,,, :.::
..x `2, < :... _.. .. ,..�
,... ...&J nv.a i
,,,,fr..
>. -, ,. -
.C, tt, tr8�*ia 5, v.X F
H..
., ¢, 0. E,a�.,
w
.",:..:Y i",. ¢Na.
<.:.:, ,�.
> x... , a .. *
zx .. ,i ..
&` -» "":"ii "?F,T;$... ?
it' "s,"
,.._ ,' :.�. A
� a
.3`.... x. .� ..,.9 YaY. ._vfx,:
ice'.,..'» "3
�•.
Y
�'.'n
�
�
<�.
_� St € k , .sY.. .< ,:,, ,�, S ✓�ti+:+. .� > �':...,.e .. , . . r.,>r� a:+�l� � �+. , _ < : 1-:: r &� xY
.sYa•_� ,
� ;E .SY"7r,>,- i a�, w �
4 f w£ ,�
S
.far . .. ... :.. -:.. :��....�.
Pbos horns,
3.
,x. .� «..
,.,. Y,b
Potassrurri
.w i
. .:. .H¢ .. ., ,. ., J� F .t. ,o >r .::y� 'd...... ':': .t
\..�. 3. w. A..,., '.w ah'it� k:.. , 3`-, ., .+;. ..� . •i 2-.
.. .. ;<,X .... ".n r:..,..>.3 - .. „?n„ _.:,-< .... .:. f.. ,...., ;?«V..,.< >:. r
x.. <:a .. 4 .i.. x.•,.. .. ky^
Ma Ca�o����„
.. � .Z
.yy..
,:.' 3:-,
.. ,
, . , P .,
.,z-x. ,
.... .. f. ,_.
,..a ✓... .,...
... x ,.�
• , „J ..v ;., ..
¢m ,r. x.¢�. <. ..., ::, .. ,..... n.. „I .;:::;.i
.. .: '�>. ,. ....«3. .,,.:'z. - -. ,,..h !,. >...... .} x ,:. ..
n�sium,< ., , � ,5u urn � _, x ..,x. _ ... ,.-, ._ � ..
� � If zinc Man anew..., Iron , , ,,. Ca .er
� ,r �,< . i .., ,,, � <
ppm 7
43
110 450 17 24.4 82 152 1.7 0.1
r
r � ...1
W.:, o-a,r,..
�«. ,,.,. . ,R.rt ._,, .<.>. ec
...�i.,,, J•.....,..
r..
, .� ..,<,, ._.F:,-.x .. .,.. ... p.'.
.r'.:
..:
ACIDITY.: C.,E C � PFBRCEN.
�,..�. _. � � t b�r,¢ _ _..� .,� �. ,�>. ,. ..�_�.....r�
, .� r. ¢ ;� ....a
BASl1.SA.T.l1.RaTION� �..
,�� <,. _ ,a . �._�
x•.U; E ....:. ,w
,ORGANIC,,MATTER r
��x
...,�.
NITRATE
o£,. .,��
x.>_. ..
..CHLO .
� RID
...
...:._ ". -K.>
._ ...
N.,
r
$' ,.., ax.-
gg .. °, t_...
� a.. »s<i ,a�3 .., J. .r• n .�.,.... �
�
>
.. en , m ^i:
i
_x
.. ,. a ¢ wx .,sxy ,.x '3-
7 •;.
..._ ... ..: r .. ..
_..a. TII .-...
:. ... tt... ..
.....•.u_
-.,_ .:. F .: . .-
x. s
.. .-.. £ � ...„�;ti � , . .. A.x £'.
..e.. x..
..- 4 v.¢.., a
H
s .... a
x. , <p:.r„ .¢' .- <x•. Fx. ,
x � c..
,r3� _...
,. a.. a..
S >:...
xfl.,.. 4. ... ..0
Ar,. ,it. ..
.ef._ a
� __,..
-..
... _m^... ,v .� .a,•....
_.. .3. ,?D ¢... Tf ,�
a-.... ,. Ne
-.a ,... : 6. ,...
.,x ,.
�.� e� N. �ft `-�
.... '•`, d r-v 1, i
, '. ,..,C .2. a'.:,c $ �'';; R. :: •l',� x
„2...v �...
,.
,... t ¢. ..'.
.:,>'a...
.n ..., r ... .. .s
5.6
1.0 1 4.3 1 2.6
21.5
52.7
23.3
2.4
92
, <... ¢�' 5+.,. .a
,..
,
£ i•
,.... .¢ ?. y, � § .>xx<tr,> >r �
iC.....e, „ ,,,,:.rvu.
, , �, T
<e �:K,�., f'w .::.:
{
x
3.r.,. .S .,.,: ,... .. ,....,.. <,
.,. "2 ,� ew ,. t
s a , �%' ,.»z, � •,:.
:.. f F
3..� „ ... .r
.. . ..,. ,..._
>.y... ..
.. i �c�•y
cw ,, 4;
F ....y,...
,>u.. .<'.-.
.,
h4... r ..'..v5
i,:._ v ,. , ¢a? d
„... v .. , �.,
,.. � ,:`..
�,.
•.-:. :�;` $x '� �.;5 ,;
�<., ?.
k,. �
'�&N�„`°�`
..
, r.; s; .:.':>: :. :, ..... ,.
..,. „ .-.. ,. i,: P". ,¢ �•.. a
x ... t- .., ...._ .4 �'.
, ,..�>.: t ,...A .,
.,, .. ,.
re:, &
>- .,b
,. .....
aA,. x.. ,., r
... . - .
.. „n x;>:.
,..... , s'
,s .... ,
.yn.,,.md ....
f.. ,d`a ,..
.. : w ...¢. Ya a
-:."F
.�v.
...`=F°
fi
a k •.._
�.
.. . ....... ., ..:, e ,,...,
z::-,.fit 3 e. .e
u:,,, b.., ,. $ ,, ;v � `�
..:"x i• ns'+ : a
.. t' t
s-
f �
tr
aw y. ,:.. �
�` :, F- •zF s . ,
da .,
. i _ >.,,;
.s
d ...,,. <: `�-m.... 1 h
..
k.... , x
,, y. ..-,.. ,.,.
c ': ,
>g
z•&.
., un .,
__
..
,.£.. .'=' ....
,,�
er _
; �C3o�'
Oak Tree
25.0
3.5
4.7
4
0.00
0.23 0.00
0.00
0.00 0.00
0.01

Report Nur A&L EASTERN LA )RATORIES INC.
R07074-00;. _ !
Account Number: 7621 Whitepine Road - Richmond, Virginia 23237 LA
46376 [phone] - Fax No. [phone] fIT
Send To: SOIL & ENVIRONMENTAL Grower: MCGILL ASSOCIATES Submitted By: STEVEN PRICE
CONSULTANTS PA
236 LE PHILLIP CT - STE C
CONCORD, NC 28025
Sample Number: PIT 11
Lab Number: 6119
Comments:
Date Received: 3/15/2007 Date Reported: 3/19/2007
Sample PIT 11: Apply the amount of lime recommended in first page to raise pH .
Sample PIT 11: For best result, if there are no existing plants, broadcast all lime then till and mix 6 inches into the soil. Limit the lime application to
50 pounds per 1000 sq. ft. for existing plants, apply every 4-6 months until the recommended amount is fulfilled.
Sample PIT 11: Phosphate is more efficient if applied near the plant, apply all phosphate beside the row. Broadcast N and/or K20 then mix into
the soil. If there is no fertilizer meets the ratio, you can use single element fertilizer such as Urea, Triplesuper Phosphate and Muriate of Potash to
achieve the requirements. Consult the enclosed instruction sheet on lime and fertilizer application.
Sample PIT 11: All recommended fertilizers are on actual elemental basis. To convert to product basis, divide the recommended quantity in the
first page by the percentage of the active ingredient then multiply by 100. See attached sheet.
Sample PIT 11: Use Ammonium Sulfate as N source to supply sulfur.
Sample PIT 11: Broadcast boron using Borax and mix into the soil to raise boron level. Note boron should not be applied in the band near the
plant.
auI Chu, Ph.D.
...1

Distributed in furtherance
of the Acts of Congress
of May 8 and June 30, 1914.
Employment and program
opportunities are offered to
all people regardless of
race, color, national origin,
sex, age, or disability. North
Carolina State University,
North Carolina A&T State
University, U.S. Department
of Agriculture, and local
governments cooperating.
So:dFacts
Poultry Manure ay,a
Fertilizer Source
Poultry manure is an excellent source of nutrients and can be incorporated into most
fertilizer programs. Those using manures must practice sound soil fertility management
to prevent nutrient imbalances and associated animal health risks, as well as surface -
water and groundwater contamination. The key to successful management is to match
the nutritional requirements of the crop with nutrients available in the manure. The
value of poultry manure varies not only with its nutrient composition and availability,
but also with management and handling costs.
Nutrient Composition and
Sampling Procedure
The nutrient composition of poultry manure
varies with the type of bird, the feed ration,
the proportion of litter to droppings, the
manure handling system, and the type of litter.
Consequently, all manures should be sampled
and analyzed for specific nutrient content
before you apply them to the land. Waste
samples can be analyzed for $4 by the North
Carolina Department of Agriculture (NCDA),
Agronomic Division, Plant Analysis Lab, P.O.
Box 27647, Blue Ridge Road Center, Raleigh,
NC 27611.Other qualified private laborato-
ries can also perform the analysis (fees vary).
Collecting a representative manure sample
is essential to reliable nutrient analysis. The
nutrient value of litter varies greatly within
the poultry house. To reduce sample variabil-
ity, collect subsamples of broiler, turkey, and
duck litter in 6 to 12 areas of the house.
Samples taken around waterers, feeders, and
brooders should be proportionate to the space
these areas occupy in the house. At each
location, collect litter by digging an area
down to the earth; be careful, however, not to
include soil. Place the subsamples in a plastic
bucket, mix thoroughly, and put 2 to 3 pounds
of the mixture in a sample container. Samples
from stockpiled litter should be taken from at
least 6 locations around the pile, all at depths
of at least 18 inches. Subsamples should be
Table 1. Average Nutrient Composition of Broiler Manures
Manure Type
Total
N
Ammonium
NH4
Phosphorus
P205
Potassium
KO
lb/ton
Fresh (no litter)
26
10
17
11
Broiler house litter'
72
11
78
46
Roaster house litter'
73
12
75
45
Breeder house litter'
31
7
54
31
Stockpiled litter'
36
8
80
34
'Annual manure and litter accummulation; typical litter base is sawdust, wood shavings, or peanut hulls.
Source: Biological and Agricultural Engineering Department, NCSU.
s' North Carolina
-"�' 3 Cooperative Extension Service
d NORTH CAROLINA STATE UNIVERSITY
q.,, COLLEGE OF AGRICULTURE & LIFE SCIENCES

Hacts
mixed and submitted as suggested
for litter from poultry houses.
To increase sample uniformity in
poultry manure slurries and lagoon
sludges, stir them before sampling.
Within an anaerobic lagoon, liquids
are relatively uniform above the
sludge zone; nevertheless, take
several subsamples and combine
them. .
If you cannot have the manure
analyzed, use the mean nutrient
values for your specific type of
poultry manure found in Tables 1
through 4. Table 5 gives the average
values for the secondary and micro -
nutrients ordinarily listed in the
manure analysis report.
When using mean values for
manure nutrient composition, exer-
cise caution to avoid over- or under -
fertilization. Also, after several
years, elements such as copper or
zinc may accumulate and reach very
high levels. To avoid these problems,
take an annual plant tissue and a
biennial soil sample to monitor
nutrient levels.
Nutrient Availabilities
Except for nitrogen, the availability
of most nutrients in poultry manures
is fairly consistent. Nitrogen can
occur in several forms, each of which
can be lost when subjected to differ-
ent management or environmental
conditions.
Nitrogen in poultry wastes comes
from uric acid, ammonia salts, and
organic (fecal) matter. The predomi-
nant form is uric acid, which readily
transforms to ammonia (NH3), a
gaseous form of nitrogen that can
evaporate if not mixed into the soil.
When it is thoroughly mixed, the
ammonia changes to ammonium
(NH,+), which can be temporarily
held on clay particles and organic
matter. Thus, soil mixing can reduce
nitrogen losses and increase the
amount available to plants.
Table 6 lists the first -year nutri-
ent availability coefficients for
2
Table 2. Average Nutrient Composition of Layer Manures
Manure Total Ammonium Phosphorus
Potassium
Type N NHS- N PA
K2O
lb/ton
Fresh (no litter) 26 6 22
11
Undercage scraped' 28 14 31
20
Highrise stored' 38 18 56
30
Ib/1,000 gallons
Liquid slurry' 62 42 59
37
Anaerobic
lagoon sludge 26 8 92
13
lb/acre-inch
Anaerobic
lagoon liquid 179 154 46
266
'Manure collected within two days.
AAnnual manure accummulation on unpaved surfaces.
3Six-12 months' accummulation of manure, excess water usage, and storage -surface
rainfall surplus; does not include fresh water for flushing.
Source: Biological and Agricultural Engineering Department, NCSU.
Table 3. Average Nutrient Composition of Turkey Manures
Manure Total Ammonium Phosphorus
Potassium
Type N NHS N P.O.
K2O
lb/ton
Fresh (no litter) 27 8 25
12
Brooder house litter' 45 9 52
32
Grower house litter' 57 16 72
40
Stockpiled litter3 36 8 72
33
'Based on cleanout after each flock.
2Based on annual cleanout after full production.
3Based on annual house accummulation removed to uncovered stockpile to be
spread within six months.
Source: Biological and Agricultural Engineering Department, NCSU.
Table 4. Average Nutrient Composition of Duck Manures
Manure
Type
Total
N
Ammonium
NH; N
Phosphorus
P2O"
Potassium
K2O
lb/ton
Fresh (no litter)
28
5
23
17
House litter'
19
3
17
14
Stockpiled litter'
24
5
42
22
'Annual manure and litter accummulation; typical litter base is wood shavings.
AAnnual house accummulation removed to uncovered stockpile to be spread within
six months.
Source: Biological and Agricultural Engineering Department, NCSU.

Poultry Manure as a Fertilizer Source
Table S. Average Secondary and Micronutrient Content of Poultry Manures
Manure Type
Ca
Mg
S
Na
Fe
Mn
B
Mo
Zn
Cu
lb/ton
Layer
Undercage scraped
43.0
6.1
7.1
4.5
0.52
0.27
0.050
0.00390
0.32
0.036
Highrise stored
86.0
6.0
8.8
5.0
1.8
0.52
0.046
0.00038
0.37
0.043
Broiler Litter
Broiler house
41.0
8.0
15.0
13.0
1.3
0.67
0.054
0.00085
0.63
0.45
Roaster house
43.0
8.5
14.0
13.0
1.6
0.74
0.049
0.00082
0.68
0.51
Breeder house
94.0
6.8
8.5
8.6
1.3
0.57
0.035
0.00048
0.52
0.21
Stockpiled
54.0
6.0
12.0
6.2
1.5
0.59
0.041
0.00069
0.55
0.27
Turkey Litter
Brooder house
28.0
5.7
7.6
5.9
1.4
0.52
0.047
0.000B1
0.46
0.36
Grower house
42.0
7.0
10.0
8.4
1.3
0.65
0.048
0.00092
0.64
0.51
Stockpiled
42.0
6.8
9.5
6.4
1.5
0.62
0.047
0.00095
0.56
0.34
Duck Litter
Duck house
22.0
2.7
3.1
2.8
.98
0.31
0.021
0.00040
0.26
.056
Stockpiled
27.0
4.4
5.6
8.8
1.2
0.47
0.030
0.00030
0.47
.050
Ib/1,000 gallons
Layer
Liquid slurry
35.0
6.8
8.2
5.3
2.9
0.42
0.040
0.018
0.43
0.080
Lagoon sludge
71.0
7.2
12.0
4.2
2.2
2.3
0.082
0.014
0.80
0.14
lb/acre-inch
Layer
Lagoon liquid
25.0
7.4
52.0
51.0
2.0
0.24
0.37
0.020
0.70
0.19
various poultry manures. Determine
the available nutrients by multiplying
these values by the nutrient composi-
tion values listed on the waste analy-
sis report or in Tables 1 through 4.
The NCDA's Agronomic Division
calculates available nutrients and
lists them in its report.
Application Rate
Land application rates are generally
determined by matching the avail-
able nitrogen or phosphorus content
of the waste to the nutrient require-
ments of the crop. In most cases,
nitrogen requirements determine the
application rate, unless the area is
designated "nutrient sensitive" and
indicates that phosphorus movement
off -site can lead to eutrophication of
surface waters. In nondesignated
areas, phosphorus movement can be
adequately controlled with conserva-
tion measures such as grass field
borders, grassed waterways, contour
planting, and reduced tillage, which
minimize soil and residual manure
movement. Leaching of phosphorus
is extremely limited on mineral soils
and should not contribute to ground-
water contamination.
Nitrogen recommendations for
various crops are listed in Table 7.
Use these rates as guidelines with
realistic yield capabilities for the
crop and field. With feed and forage
crops, excessive manure application
can produce high nitrate concentra-
tions, which can harm livestock
(through nitrate poisoning) and
promote nutrient imbalances that
may lead to grass tetany. If loading
rates are to be based on phosphorus,
apply the amount suggested by soil -
test recommendations. Because the
manure may not supply adequate
amounts of all the other nutrients
required by the crop, be sure to take
a soil test and, if necessary, supple-
ment with commercial fertilizer.
In addition to monitoring nutri-
ents, be sure to maintain an adequate
soil pH, which will help to maximize
crop yields and nutrient availability
3

SoilFacts
and promote the decomposition of
organic matter. The biological
Table 6. First -Year Nitrogen Availability Coefficients for
conversion of organic matter to
Different Poultry Manures
nitrate is an acid-forming process.
Manure
Soil
Take annual or biennial soil samples
Type Injection'
Incorporation2 Broadcast3 irrigation
to monitor pH changes. When live-
stock wastes are applied at agro-
P205 and K20 availability coefficients
nomic rates, high salinity (excess
All manure types 0.8
0.8 0.7 0.7
salt) has not been a problem, given
N availability coefficient
normal amounts of rainfall in North
Carolina.
All poultry litters5 -
0.6 0.5 -
A worksheet to help you deter-
Layers (no litter) -
0.6 0.4 -
mine land application rates is in-
Layer anaerobic
cluded at the end of the text.
lagoon sludge 0.6
0.6 0.4 0.4
Layer anaerobic
Timing and Uniformity of
liquid slurry 0.8
0.7 0.4 0.3
Manure Applications
Layer liquid lagoon 0.9
0.8 0.5 0.5
To minimize nitrogen losses, apply
'Manure injected directly into soil and covered immediately.
manure as near as possible to plant-
2Surface-spread manure plowed or disked into soil within two days.
ing time or to the crop growth stage
3Surface-spread manure uncovered
for one month or longer.
during which nitrogen is most
°Sprinkler -irrigated liquid uncovered
for one month or longer.
needed. Surfacewater and groundwa-
5lncludes in-house and stockpiled litters.
ter contaminations are greater in
areas of high rainfall and when
manures for spring crops are applied
in fall or winter. For coarse -textured
Table 7. Nitrogen Fertilization Guidelines
soils, manures should be applied
Commodity
lb N/RYE'
frequently and at low rates through-
out the growing season because such
Corn (grain)
1.0 -1.25 lb N/bu
soils have a high water infiltration
Corn (silage)
10 - 20 lb N/ton
rate and a low ability to hold nutri-
Cotton
0.06 - 0.12 lb N/Ib lint
ents. Unused nitrogen can therefore
Sorghum (grain)
2.0 - 2.5 lb N/cwt
be lost by leaching.
Wheat (grain)
1.7 - 2.4 lb N/bu
Eapplying
Exercise caution when a PP y g
lagoon liquid by irrigation on crops
Rye (grain)
1.7 - 2.4 lb N/bu
undergoing stress (for example, com
Barley (grain)
1.4 -1.6 lb N/bu
during an extended drought). A
Triticale (grain)
1.4 -1.6 lb N/bu
heavy coating of manure solids on
pats
1.0 - 1.3 lb N/bu
the leafy vegetation can cause am-
Bermudagrass (hay2.3)
40 - 50 lb N/dry ton
monia burn. Except in extreme cases,
Tali fescue (hay2.3)
40 - 50 lb N/dry ton
this damage is usually short term and
does not significantly reduce yields.
Orchardgrass (hay23)
40 - 50 lb N/dry ton
With concentrated lagoon liquids,
Small grain(hay2.3) .
50 - 60 lb N/dry ton
use several small applications rather
Sorghum-sudangrass (hay2.3)
45 - 55 lb N/dry ton
than one large dose.
Millet (hay2.3)
45 - 55 lb N/dry ton
Whether poultry waste is applied
Pine and hardwood trees°
40 60 lb N/acre/year
by manure spreaders or irrigation
systems, you must apply it uni-
'RYE = Realistic Yield Expectation
formly. A lack of uniformity leads to
2Annual maintenance guidelines
nutrient excesses and deficiencies,
3Reduce N rate by 25 percent when
grazing.
lower yields, and variable crop
'On trees less than 5 feet tall, N will
stimulate undergrowth competition.
moisture at harvest time.
4

Poultry Manure as a Fertilizer Source
Table 8. Minimum Amount of Land Needed to Apply Poultry Manure as a Nitrogen Fertilizer
Source (Based on the Nitrogen Rate Required by the Crop)
Manure Handling
and Production Unit
100
Soil Incorporated' Surface Broadcast'
lb N/acre/year
200 300 400 100 200 300
Annual acres/1,000 bird single capacity
400
Layer
Undercaged scraped
4.80
2.40
1.60,
1.20
3.00
1.50
1.00
0.75
Highrise scraped
4.30
2.15
1.43
1.07
2.60
1.30
0.87
0.65
Liquid manure/slurry
6.70
3.35
2.23
1.68
4.00
2.00
1.33
1.00
Anaerobic lagoon sludge
0.71
0.35
0.24
0.18
0.56
0.28
0.19
0.14
Anaerobic lagoon liquid
0.87
0.43
0.29
0.22
0.84
0.42
0.28
0.21
Broiler Utter
Broiler house
2.40
1.20
0.80
0.60
1.96
0.98
0.65
0.49
Roaster house
4.30
2.15
1.43
1.08
3.60
1.80
1.20
0.90
Breeder house
4.70
2.35
1.57
1.18
3.20
1.60
1.07
0.80
Stockpiled
1.20
0.60
0.40
0.30
0.92
0.46
0.31
0.23
Turkey Utter
Poult house
1.40
0.70
0.47
0.35
1.08
0.54
0.36
0.27
Brooder house
8.10
4.05
2.70
2.02
5.60
2.80
1.87
1.40
Grower hen house
5.70
2.85
1.90
1.43
4.00
2.00
1.33
1.00
Grower tom house
8.60
4.30
2.87
2.15
6.00
3.00
2.00
1.50
Stockpiled
Poult
0.94
0.47
0.31
0.23
0.76
0.38
0.25
0.19
Hen
3.00
1.50
1.00
0.75
2.40
1.20
0.80
0.60
Tom
4.50
2.25
1.50
1.13
3.60
1.80
1.20
0.90
Duck Litter
Duck house
3.00
1.50
1.00
0.75
2.20
1.10
0.73
0.55
Stockpiled
1.50
0.75
0.50
0.38
1.08
0.54
0.36
0.27
'Incorporated within two days
2Not incorporated for at least 1 month
Acreage Requirements
for New Facilities
Whenever manure or lagoon liquid
samples are available for analysis,
they should be used to determine
application rates and acreage require-
ments. When you are planning new
facilities, however, the average
values can help determine approxi-
mate acreage requirements for a
poultry operation of a given size.
Table 8 gives minimum acreage
requirements for various nitrogen
fertilization rates. This table can be
used to estimate the minimum
acreage required to use all of the
manure.
Suppose that a producer is
interested in building two broiler
houses with a combined 50,000 bird
capacity/growout. The producer is
planning to spread this litter on a
bermudagrass hay field capable of
producing 6 dry tons per acre. From
Table 7, the bermudagrass will
require 300 lb nitrogen per acre (6
tons x 50 lb N/dry ton). How many
acres of bermudagrass would be.
needed for the entire year's waste?
Using Table 8, under surface broad-
cast column 300, we find that each
1,000-bird capacity would require
0.65 acres for land application of
broiler litter. For a 50,000-bird
growout operation (0.65 x 50), the
5

IFSoilFacts
producer would need 32.5 acres for a
year's worth of litter.
Value of Manure
When comparing manure to com-
mercial fertilizers, convert total
manure nutrients to available nutri-
ents by using the availability coeffi-
cients. Consider the following ,
example. Analysis of the available
nitrogen, phosphorus (P20), and
potassium (K20) content in a broiler
litter sample that will be incorporated
shows that it contains 43 pounds of
nitrogen per ton, 62 pounds of
phosphate per ton, and 37 pounds of
potash per ton. The current fertilizer
prices for nitrogen, phosphate, and
potash are as follows: $0.23 per
pound of nitrogen; $0.22 per pound
of phosphate; and $0.12 per pound of
potash as potassium chloride. One
ton of broiler litter would be worth
the following:
(43 x $0.23) + (62 x $0.22) +
(37 x $0.12) = $27.97 per ton
This value does not cover haul-
ing, handling, or application costs,
nor does it include the value of other
essential nutrients available in the
manure. In addition, it assumes that
the soil test has recommended each
nutrient, when, in fact, many may not
be needed. Nutrients not needed
should not be considered when you
assess the manure's value.
Land Application
Worksheet
Farmer Jones is preparing to spread
broiler litter on a field and incorpo-
rate it within two days to supply
nutrients to his corn crop. Last year,
he grew soybeans in the field.
His corn -yield goal is 140 bush-
els per acre, and he has decided to
apply the equivalent of 140 pounds
of nitrogen per acre (Table 7). His
land is not subject to erosion, is not
in a nutrient -sensitive watershed, and
has grassed borders and waterways
to further reduce the potential of
6
Table 9. Estimated Residual Nitrogen Provided by Legumes
Grown in Rotation
Legume'
Residual Nitrogen Available
lb/acre
Alfalfa2
80 -100
Harry vetch2
80 -100
Crimson clover2
60 - 75
Austrian winter peat
50 - 60
Soybeans3 harvested for seed
15 - 30
Peanuts3 harvested for seed
20 - 40
'Assumes good stand.
2Killed before planting current spring crop.
'Legume planted in previous year or season. More nitrogen available if fall -planted
crop immediately follows legume; less nitrogen available with spring -planted crop.
Figure 1. One way to apply poultry manure is to use a litter spreader.
runoff.
Farmer Jones used a starter fer-
tilizer on his corn crop at a rate to
supply 10 pounds of nitrogen per
acre and 34 pounds of phosphorus
per acre. He intends to supply the
rest of his nitrogen needs by apply-
ing broiler litter with a litter spreader
(Figure 1) and incorporating it within
two days.
How much litter does he need to
spread in order to meet the nitrogen
needs of his corn crop? Will he need
to supplement the crop with addi-
tional potash or phosphate to satisfy
his soil -test recommendations of 50
pounds per acre of each nutrient?
The answers are given in the follow-
ing worksheet. Use Table 9 to esti-
mate available nitrogen carry-over
from legumes.

Worksheet: Determining the Nutrient Needs of Your Crop
Poultry Manure as a Fertilizer Source
Example Your Farm
1. Crop to be grown
corn
2. Total nutrients required
a. N (Table 7) (lb/acre)
140
b. P2O5 (soil test) (lb/acre)
50
c. KO (soil test) (lb/acre)
50
3. Pounds of starter or preplant fertilizer used
a. N (Ib/acre)
10
b. P205 (lb/acre)
34
c. K2O (Ib/acre)
0
4. Residual N credit from legumes (fable 9) (lb/acre)
20
5. Net nutrient needs of crop (lb/acre)
Nitrogen: total need (item 2a) minus additional N from starter
(item 3a) minus legume residual (item 4)
a. N: 140 —10 — 20 (lb/acre)
110
Phosphorus and potassium: total need (items 2b and 2c) minus
additional nutrients from starter (items 3b and 3c)
b. P2O5: 50 — 34 (lb/acre)
16
c. K20: 50 — 0 (lb/acre)
50
6. Nutrient totals in manure. If analysis report already
gives available nutrients, skip this item.
a. Total N (Tables 1-4 or waste samples) (lb/ton)
72
b. P2O5 (lb/ton)
78
c. K2O (lb/ton)
46
7. Nutrients available to crop (items 6a, 6b, and 6c) times
availability coefficients (Table 6). If analysis report already
gives available nutrients, fill in those numbers.
a. Available N: 72 x 0.6 (lb/ton)
43.2
b. Available P2O5: 78 x 0.8 (lb/ton)
62.4
c. Available KzO: 46 x 0.8 (lb/ton)
36.8
8. Application rate to supply priority nutrient
a. Priority nutrient
nitrogen
b. Amount of priority nutrient needed (lb/acre from item 5a)
110
c. Rate of manure needed to supply priority nutrient (item 8b)
divided by (item 7a): 110/43.2 (tons/acre)
2.55
7

Distributed in furtherance
of the Acts of Congress
of May 8 and June 30, 1914.
Employment and program
opportunities are offered to
all people regardless of
race, color, national origin,
sex, age, or disability. North
Carolina State University,
North Carolina A&T State
University, U.S. Department
of Agriculture, and local
governments cooperating.
SoiiFacts
Dairy manure and wastewater are excellent sources of nutrients for most agro-
nomic, horticultural, and silvicultural crops. Proper management of these manures
as nutrient sources is critical to promoting optimum plant growth and yield while
protecting the environment. Optimum management of this resource includes
■ Handling and treating waste properly
■ Testing soil and manure regularly
■ Setting realistic yield goals
■ Applying manure in a uniform and timely fashion
■ Practicing soil conservation and environmental sustainability.
Nutrient Content of Dairy
Manures
Tables 1 and 2 show average nutrient values
for four dairy manure types. Table 1 also
shows the range in concentrations that make
up the average. Note the variability! Because
nutrient values vary considerably over time,
it is important to have a manure sample
analyzed for nutrient content before applying
the manure to the land. Because of the nature
of manure slurry systems, it may not always
be possible to have a sample analyzed before
land application. However, analysis results
received after the slurry application will
indicate whether there is a need for supple-
mental fertilizer. Samples can be sent to the
North Carolina Department of Agriculture
(NCDA), Agronomic Division, Plant and
Table 1. Nutrient Composition of Dairy Manure
Manure Type
Total Nitrogen
N
Ammonium
NH,-N
Phosphorus
P 2 0 5
Potassium
K20
Lot -scraped manure (lb/ton)
10
3
6
9
range
(3 to 20)
(2 to 15)
(0.6 to 13)
(2 to 20) ,
Liquid manure slurry (lb/1,000
gal) 22
9
14
21
range
(8 to 50)
(4 to 13)
(0.2 to 38)
(0.7 to 50)
Anaerobic lagoon
sludge* (lb/1,000 gail)
15
6
22
8
range
(3 to 42)
(1 to 12)
(2 to 64)
(2 to 20)
Anaerobic lagoon
liquid (lb/acre-inch)
137
88
77
195
range
(17 to 268)
(22 to 130)
(10 to 233)
(13 to 571)
Source: Biological & Agricultural Engineering Department, North Carolina State University,1980 to 1990.
'No manure solids removed before lagoon input
`$ North Carolina
Cooperative Extension Service
NORTH CAROLINA STATE UNIVERSITY
"; COLLEGE OF AGRICULTURE & LIFE SCIENCES

Harts
ble 2. Average Secondary and Micronutrient Content of Dairy Manure
Manure
Ca
Mg
Se
Na
Fe
Mn
B
Zn
Cu
Cl
Lot -scraped manure (lb/ton)
5
2.2
1.7
1.3
0.9
0.1
0.01
0.1
0.02
3.3
Liquid manure (lb/1,000 gal)
10
4.8
3.1
3.2
1.8
0.2
0.02
0.2
0.05 -
6.1
Lagoon sludge* (lb/1,000 gal)
12
4.5
3.6
1.4
1.5
0.3
NR
0.4
0.4
2.3
Lagoon liquid (lb/acre-inch)
69
35
25
48
12'
1.3
0.15
2.0
0.3
67
Note: Ca = Calcium, Mg = Magnesium, Se = Selenium, Na = Sodium, Fe = Iron, Mn = Manganese, B= Boron, Zn = Zinc,
Cu = Copper, Cl = Chloride
NR = Not reported.
Source: Biological & Agricultural Engineering Department, North Carolina State University.
*No manure solids removed before lagoon input.
Waste Analysis Lab, P.O. Box
27647, Blue Ridge Road Center,
Raleigh, NC 27611; phone: (919)
733-2655. The current charge is $4
per sample. Many private laborato-
ries can also perform manure
analyses.
Because the accuracy of the
analysis depends on a representative
sample, take several subsamples
from different locations in the
manure pile or the lagoon and mix
them together in a plastic bucket.
After mixing the subsamples in the
bucket, place approximately 3/4 of a
pint of the manure material in a
nonmetallic, flexible container,
leaving some air space for gas
expansion. If possible, refrigerate or
ice the sample, and deliver it to the
lab promptly.
Samples of liquid manure
slurries are more difficult to obtain
because the manure basin must be
thoroughly agitated before a
representative sample can be taken.
For liquid manure slurry systems
take samples as the slurry material
is being pumped out of the lagoon.
The agitation caused by the removal
of the slurry will provide a represen-
tative sample. Record the analysis
results to develop a representative
farm average as a guide for future
slurry applications.
2
Land Application
Nutrient Availability
Only a portion of the nutrients in
dairy manure are available immedi-
ately after application for use by the
crop. Some of the nutrients are part
of the manure's organic structure
and require microbial decomposi-
tion to release them. In general, only
about 50 percent of the organically
bound nitrogen (N) and 70 to 80
percent of the other nutrients
become available to a crop during
the year of application. With solid
and slurry manures, the remaining
organically bound nitrogen can be
released in subsequent years and
should be accounted for in fields
where manure is applied annually.
Ammonium and urea are readily
available forms of nitrogen that are
present in many manures. Both of
these forms, however, can change
into ammonia, which evaporates
readily. When surface -applied
manure is not incorporated for one
month or longer, as much as 75
percent'of the ammonia can be lost
to the atmosphere. Incorporating the
manure within 48 hours reduces
losses to about 25 percent; with
direct soil injection all but 5 percent
of the ammonia is retained.
Coefficients are used to estimate
nutrient availabilities and to account'
for different manure types and
methods of land application. These
"availability coefficients" are
multiplied by the total nutrient
concentration for each element as
reported in the manure analysis
report or, if no sample was taken or
no analysis is available, they are
multiplied by the average manure
values,listed in Table 1. The sum of
these values is the nutrient concen-
trations available to plants. Avail-
ability coefficients are listed in
Table 3. If manure samples are sent
to the NCDA Agronomic Division,
analysis results will report both total
nutrient concentrations and plant -
available nutrients using these same
availability coefficients.
Application Rate
Land application rates should be
based on the nutrient requirements
of the crop being grown. Manure
can be applied at a rate to supply
any of the recommended nutrients.
Be careful, however, that the
application rate chosen to meet one
specific nutrient requirement does
not result in either excessive or
inadequate application of other
nutrients that can negatively impact
water quality or the crop's health. If

Dairy Manure as a Fertilizer Source
Table 3. Dairy Manure First -Year Availability Coefficients
Disking in Surface
Manure Type Injection within 48 hours Spread Irrigation
P20, and K20 availability coefficients
All manure types 0.8 0.8 0.7 0.7
Lot -scraped manure -
Liquid manure slurry 0.7
Anaerobic lagoon liquid 0.8
Anaerobic lagoon sludge 0.7
N availability coefficients
0.6
0.4
-
0.6
0.4
0.4
0.7
0.5
0.5
0.6
0.4
0.4
Table 4. Suggested Nitrogen Fertilization Rates Based on
Realistic Yield Expectations
Crop Suggested Nitrogen Application Rates
Wheat (grain)
1.7 to 2.4 lb N/bu
Barley (grain)
1.4 to 1.6 lb N/bu
Oats (grain)
1.0 to 1.3 lb N/bu
Rye (grain)
1.7 to 2.4 lb N/bu
Triticale (grain)
1.4 to 1.6 lb N/bu
Corn (grain)
1.0 to 1.25 lb N/bu
Corn (silage)
10.0 to 12.0 lb N/ton
Sorghum (grain)
2.0 to 2.5 lb N/cwt
Cotton
0.06 to 0.12 lb N/lb lint
Sorghum-sudangrass (hay-2)
45.0 to 55.0 lb N/dry ton
Bermudagrass (hay',9
40.0 to 50.0 lb N/dry ton
Tall fescue (hay'-2)
40.0 to 50.0 lb N/dry ton
Orchardgrass (hay'•2)
40.0 to 50.0 lb N/dry ton
Annual ryegrass (hay'.2)
25.0 to 30.0 lb N/dry ton
Small grain (hay'.2)
50.0 to 60.0 lb N/dry ton
Millet (hay'.2)
45.0 to 55.0 lb N/dry ton
Pine and hardwood trees3
40.0 to 60.0 lb N/acre/year
'Annual maintenance guidelines.
2Reduce nitrogen rate by 25 percent when grazed only.
30n trees less than 5 feet tall, nitrogen will stimulate undergrowth competition.
manure is applied to supply any
nutrient other than nitrogen, apply
the amount suggested by soil -test
recommendations or crop removal
rates (See Extension Service publi-
cation AG-439-16, Nutrient Re-
moval by Crops in North Carolina.)
Because manure usually does not
contain the optimum nutrient
balance required for each field, be
sure to check the soil recommenda-
tions for each nutrient and, if
necessary, supplement with com-
mercial fertilizer as needed. If
annual applications continue to over
apply nutrients, environmental
impacts can occur. Alternative
management strategies should be
implemented before this occurs.
In most cases, dairy producers
use manure to supply the nitrogen
requirements of their crops. Nitro-
gen recommendations for various
crops are listed in Table 4. Adjust
the application rate to match the
yield capability of each field.
Applying more nitrogen than is
required for the crop usually does
not increase yield and can poten-
tially contribute to nitrate contami-
nation of groundwater and to
elevated nitrate concentrations in
forages. Nitrogen recommendations
given on North Carolina soil test
reports are not based on the soil
sample submitted or the yield
capabilities of an individual field or
farm. Soils test report recommenda-
tions reflect a wide range of yield
conditions across the state. To
customize your nitrogen application
rates use the values in Table 4. A
worksheet with an example is
included at the end of this fact sheet
to help you determine the amount of
dairy manure needed for different
crops and fields.
Besides monitoring nutrients,
maintain an adequate soil pH.
Optimum soil pH promotes good
yields, nutrient availability, and
manure decomposition. When dairy
manure is applied at agronomic
rates, high salinity (excess salt) has
not been a problem, given the
amounts of rainfall normally
recieved in North Carolina.
The most recently applied
manure is not the only source of
nutrients; in most fields, some
nutrients are available from previous
manure applications or previous
legume crops. With the exception of
nitrogen, updated soil tests are the
best means of determining nutrient
reserves from these sources. Table 5
can be used to estimate the available
nitrogen carryover from legumes.
Nitrogen carryover from manure is

Soffacts
more difficult to estimate. If manure
has been applied to a field for
several years in succession, reduce
the nitrogen rate below the sug-
gested guidelines in Table 4. Table
6 provides an estimate of the
potential nitrogen from residual
carryover after 5 and 10 years of
continuous manure applications. To
use these numbers effectively, you
need an estimate of the average
nitrogen content of the manure and
the application rate over the period.
An example is included in the
following worksheet to show how
this number can be used to adjust
application rates.
Plant tissue analysis is another
excellent tool that you can use to.
fine tune manure application rates.
The NCDA Agronomic Division
also provides this service.
Timing and Uniformity
of Manure Applications
To minimize nitrogen losses, apply
manure as close as possible to
planting time or to the stage of crop
development requiring maximum
nitrogen uptake. Good timing
increases the amount of nitrogen
used by the crop and thus reduces
the amount of nitrate that may leach
into groundwater. Contamination of
surface water and groundwater is
greater when manure is applied in
the fall or early winter for spring
crops in the absence of a cover crop.
Whether dairy manure is applied
with a manure spreader or by
irrigation, it is important that it be
applied uniformly. Nonuniform
application leads to nutrient ex-
cesses and deficiencies, reduced
yields, and uneven crop growth.
Calibrating Manure
Application Equipment
Spreaders can apply manure at
varying rates and patterns, depend-
ing on forward travel speed, power
takeoff (PTO) speed, gear box
settings, gate openings, spread
Table 5. Estimated Residual Nitrogen Provided by a Good
Stand of Legumes Grown in Rotation
Residual Nitrogen Available
Legume
(lb/acre)
Alfalfa'
80 to 100
Harry vetch'
80 to 100
Crimson clover'
60 to 75
Austrian winter pea'
50 to 60
SoybeanV
15 to 30
Peanuts2
20 to 40
'Killed before planting current spring crop.
21-egume planted in previous year. More nitrogen will be available If the fall -planted
crop immediately follows the legume. On sandy soils and in years with normally high
precipitation, less nitrogen will be available
to spring -planted crops.
Table 6. Estimates of Residual Manure Nitrogen that Is Avail-
able after 5 and 10 Years of Continuous Application
Manure Years of
Total Nitrogen
Type Application
Carryover (qa)
Solid 5
15.
10
20
Slurry 5
10.
10
15
widths, and overlaps. Spreader
calibration is the process of deter-
mining the combination of settings
and travel speed needed to apply
manure at the desired rate and
uniformity.
Spreader Capacity
The capacity of liquid spreaders is
normally rated by the manufacturer
in gallons. Multiply the capacity in
gallons by 0.0042 to find the
capacity in tons. Solid and semi-
solid spreaders are rated by the
manufacturer either in bushels or
cubic feet. (Multiply bushels by
1.25 to get cubic feet.) Most
Spreader Load (tons) =
spreaders have two rating capacities:
(1) struck, or level full, and (2)
heaped. Because manures and litters
have different densities, perform an
on -farm test. Fill a 5-gallonbucket
level full with material to be spread.
Do not pack the material into the
bucket but ensure that it settles as
it would in a loaded spreader.
Weigh the bucket full and then
empty. Multiply the weight of the
contents by 1.5 to find the weight
in pounds per cubic feet. Multiply
this value by the capacity of the
spreader in cubic feet and divide
the result by 2,000 to find the
weight in tons of the material in a
spreader load.
Manure Weight (pounds) X 1.5 X Spreader Capacity (cubic feet)
2,000
4

.,..libration Method l
This method is most useful for
liquid spreaders but can be used for
all types. Spread at least one full
load of manure, preferably in a
square or rectangular field pattern
for ease of measuring, with normal
overlaps. Measure the length and .
width of the area covered, recogniz-
ing that the outer fringe areas of the
coverage will receive much lighter
applications than the overlapped
areas. Multiply the length by the
width and divide by 43,560 to
determine the coverage area in
acres. Divide the number of tons of
manure in the spreader by the acres
covered to determine the application
rate in tons per acre. (Refer to the
box at the right.)
Repeat the procedure at
different speeds and spreader
settings until the desired application
rate is achieved.
Calibration Method 2
This method is often used for solid
and semisolid spreaders. Use a
tarpaulin or plastic sheet of about
100 square feet (approximately 9
feet by 12 feet or 10 feet by 10 feet).
To determine its exact surface area
multiply the tarp's length by its
width. After measuring, weigh the
tarp using a set of spring -tension or
platform scales, and then spread and
pin it on the field surface. Operate
the spreader at its normal settings,
speed, and overlap. With a rear
discharge spreader, make three
passes: the first directly over the
center of the sheet and the other two
on opposite sides of the center at the
normal spreader overlap spacing.
Reweigh the sheet, including the
collected manure. Subtract the
weight of the empty sheet from the '
total weight to find the weight of the
collected manure. Multiply the
weight of the collected manure in
pounds by 21.8 and divide the result
by the collection area of the sheet in
square feet to find the application
rate in tons per acre. (Refer to the
box at the right.)
Dairy Manure as a Fertilizer Source
CALIBRATION METHOD 1
Application Rate (tons/acre) =
Amount of Manure in Spreader (tons)
[Length Covered (feet) X Width Covered (Feet)]/43,560
CALIBRATION METHOD 2
Application Rate (tons/acre) =
Amount of Manure Collected (pounds) x 21.8
Collection Area (square feet)
Repeat the procedure using
different settings or speeds to obtain
the desired application rate.
Spreader Pattern Uniformity
To determine the uniformity of
spread and the amount of overlap
needed, evenly place (2 to 4 feet
apart) a line of small pans or trays
across the spreader path. The pans
should be a minimum of 12 inches
by 12 inches or 15 inches in
diameter, no more than 24 inches
square, and 2 inches to 4 inches
deep. Make one spreading pass
directly over the center pan. Weigh
the contents caught in each pan or
pour the contents into equal -sized
glass cylinders or clear plastic tubes
and compare the amount in each.
Find the effective spread width by
locating the point on either side of
the path center where the manure
contents caught in the containers is
half of the amount collected in the
center. The distance between these
points is the effective spread width.
Overlap the outer fringes of the
coverage area beyond these points
on the next path to ensure a uniform
application rate over the entire field.
Flat -top, pyramid, or oval patterns
are most desirable and give the most
uniform rate of application. Make
adjustments for unsatisfactory M,
W, steeple, or lopsided patterns.
Acreage Requirements
for New or Expanding
Facilities
When planning a new or expanded
dairy operation, producers need to
determine if there is adequate land
to properly apply the manure. If an'
existing operation is expanding, it
would be useful to use the average
manure nutrient analysis from the
farm if records have been main-
tained. When using farm records,
allow for 4.1 tons per head per year'.
for calves, 12 tons for heifers, and
17 tons for milk cows. When
records do not exist, state average
figures can be used. Table 7 has
been developed using average
manure nutrient values from Table
1, availability coefficients from
Table 3, and the nitrogen sugges-
tions from Table 4.
Value of Manure
To compare the economic worth of
manure to that of commercial
fertilizers, convert total manure
nutrient concentrations to plant -
available nutrients by using the
coefficients in Table 3. For ex-
ample, using the average total
nutrient concentrations of lot
scraped manure from Table 1 (10
pounds of nitrogen per ton, 6 pounds
of phosphate per ton, 9 pounds of
5

F
SoilFacis
Table 7. Minimum Amount of Land Needed to Apply Dairy Manure as a Nitrogen Fertilizer Based
on the Nitrogen Rate Required by the Crop for Two Methods of Application
Manure Handling
and Production
Units (lb N/acre/year)
100
Method of Application
Soil Incorporated' Surface Broadcast2
200 300 400 100 200 300
(acres/animal unit capacity)
400
Lot -scraped manure
Calf
0.23
0.12
0.077
0.058
0.18
0.089
0.059
0.044
Herter
0.68
0.34
0.23
0.17
0.52
0.26
0.17
0.13
Milk cow
0.96
0.48
0.32
0.24
0.73
0.37
0.24
0.18
Liquid manure slurry
Calf
0.25
0.13
0.085
0.064
0.19
0.093
0.062
0.046
Heifer
0.75
0.38
0.25
0.19
0.55
0.27
0.18
0.14
Milk cow
1.1
0.53
0.35
0.26
0.76
0.3B
0.25
0.19
Anaerobic lagoon liquid
Calf
0.076
0.038
0.025
0.019
0.057
0.029
0.019
0.014
Heifer
0.22
0.11
0.074
0.055
0.17
0.084
0.056
0.042
Milk cow
0.31
0.16
0.10
0.078
0.24
0.12
0.078
0.059
Anaerobic lagoon sludge
Calf
0.041
0.021
0.014
0.010
0.030
0.015
0.010
0.0075
Heifer
0.12
0.061
0.040
0.030
0.088
0.044
0.029
0.022
Milk cow
0.17
0.085
0.057
0.042
0.12
0.062
0.041
0.031
' Incorporated within two days. 2Not incorporated for one month or longer; lagoon liquid irrigated.
potash per ton) and the availability
coefficients for soil incorporation
within 48 hours (0.6 for nitrogen
and 0.8 for phosphorus and potas-
sium), there are 6 pounds of plant -
available nitrogen, 4.8 pounds of
plant -available phosphate and 7.2
pounds of plant -available potash per
ton of manure. At a value of $0.25,
$0.22, and $0.15 per pound for
commercial nitrogen, phosphate,
and potash, respectively, one ton of
lot -scraped manure would be worth
$3.64:
(6 X $0.25) + (4.8 X $0.22) +
(7.2 X $ 0.15) = $3.64
This sum does not include the
value of the secondary or micronu-
trients that are present in manures,
nor does it include the cost of labor,
transportation, or spreading costs to
apply the manure. In addition, it
6
assumes that a soil test calls for
applications of phosphorus and
potassium, when in fact many soils
may already have adequate supplies.
Nutrients not needed should not be
considered in assessing the financial
value of the manure.
Land Application
Worksheet
Bill Jones is a dairy producer using
a manure basin to store his manure
before applying it to land. He plans
to plant corn for silage in a field that
had 10 years of continuous manure
applications, and he anticipates a
yield of about 18 tons of silage per
acre. Because he applies this
manure as a slurry, which requires
agitation, he decides to use the
average nutrient values in Table 1 to
determine the application rate. He
does not plan to use any preplant or
starter fertilizer. His fields have
grass borders to help reduce erosion
and the potential for nutrient and
pesticide runoff. He plans to
incorporate the manure within 24
hours after application. In the past
10 years he has applied an average
of about 10,000 gallons of manure
per acre. How much liquid manure
slurry will he need to apply per acre
to meet the nitrogen needs of his
silage crop? Will he need to
supplement his slurry application
with commercial fertilizers to meet
the soil test recommendations of 50
pounds of phosphate and 80 pounds
of potash per acre, or will he have a
surplus of these nutrients? The
answers to these questions are given
in the worksheet that follows. Use
the same worksheet to determine the
manure rates to apply on your farm.

Dairy Manure as a Fertilizer Source
Worksheet: Determining the Nutrient Needs of Your Crop
Example Your Farm
1. Crop to be grown
corn silage
2. Total nutrients required
a. nitrogen
(a) yield goal (tons)'
18
(a) lb N/unit production (Table 4) (lb/ton)
12
(a) N needed (lb/acre) (2a, x 2a2) _ (18 x 12)
216
b. P2O5 (soil test) (lb/acre)
50
c. K2O (soil test) (lb/acre)
80
3. Pounds of starter or preplant fertilizer used
a. N (lb/acre)
0
b. P2O5 (lb/acre)
0
c. K2O (lb/acre)
0
4. Residual N credit from legumes (Table 5) (lb/acre)
0
5. Net nutrient needs of crops
Nitrogen: total need (item 2a) minus additional N
from starter (item 3a minus N from legume (item 4)
a. N: 216 - 0 : 0 (lb/acre)
216
Phosphate and potash: total need (item 2b, 2c) minus
additional nutrients from preplant fertilizer (3b, 3c)
b. P2O5: 50 - 0 (lb/acre)
50
c. K2O: 80 - 0 (lb/acre)
80
RATE OF MANURE TO APPLY
6. Nutrient totals in manure (from Table 1 as waste samples).
If analysis report already gives available nutrients, skip this item.
a. Total N (lb/1,000gallons)2 22
b. P2O5 (lb/1,000 gallons)2 14
c. K2O (lb/1,000 gallons)2 21
7. Nutrients available to crop (6a, 6b, 6c) times availability coefficients
(Table 3) or as reported on manure analysis if present.
a. Available N: 22 x 0.6 (lb/1,000 gallons)2 13.2
b. Available P2O5: 14 x 0.8 (lb/1,000 gallons)2 11.2
c. Available K2O: 21 x 0.8 (lb/1,000 gallons)2 16.8
7

Uacts
Worksheet: Determining the Nutrient Needs of Your Crop (continued)
Example Your Farm
8. Residual N available to crop. Average application rate in past years
times average N concentration (Table 1 or from manure analysis reports)
times percent residual N (Table 6) times availability coefficient (fable 3).
If units are lb/1,000 gallons divide answer by 1,000.
From example:
Average rate applied = 10,000 gal/acre
Average N concentration = 22 lb/1,000 gal
(10,000 X 22 X 0.15 X 0.6)/1,000 = 19.8
9. Application rate to supply primary nutrient:
a. Priority nutrient nitrogen
b. Amount of priority nutrient needed:
(lb/acre from 5a) 196.2
c. Rate of manure needed to supply priority nutrient:
(9b / 7a)
multiply by 1,000 if units are lb/1,000 gal
(196.6 / 13.2) x 1,000 (gal/acre) = 14,864
10. Pounds per acre of all nutrients supplied at the application rate
required to meet the needs for the priority nutrient. For each nutrient
multiply the available nutrients (7a, 7b, 7c) times the manure rate (9c).
Divide by 1,000 if units are lb/1,000 gal.
a. N supplied: 13.2 x 14,864 / 1,000 (lb/acre) 196.2
b. P2O. supplied: 11.2 x 14,864 / 1,000 (lb/acre) 166.5
c. K2O supplied: 16.8 x 14,864 / 1,000 (Ib/acre) 249.7
11. Nutrient Balance: net nutrient need (-) or excess (+) after application
of manure at calculated rate. Amount of nutrient applied by manure
(10a, 10b, 10c) minus net amount needed by crop (9b, 5b, 5c).
a. N balance: 196.2 -196.2
b. P2O. balance: 166.5 - 50
c. K2O balance: 249.7 - 80
0
+116.5
+169.7
Note: Calculation format modified from Pennsylvania Department of Environmental Resources, Field Application of Manure, October
1986.
'Substitute appropriate yield units. 2Substitute appropriate manure units.
Prepared by
J. P. Zublena, Extension Soil Science Specialist
J. C. Barker, Extension Agricultural Engineering Specialist
D. P. Wesen, Extension Dairy Science Specialist
5,000 copies of this public document were printed at a cost of $1,050, or $.21 per copy.
Printed on recycled paper.
Published by
NORTH CAROUNA COOPERATIVE EXTENSION SERVICE
2/94-5M—DWD-240071
AG-439-28 ;
WQWM-122

Distributed in furtherance
of the Acts of Congress
of May 8 and June 30, 1914.
Employment and program
opportunities are offered to
all people regardless of
race, color, national origin,
sex, age, or disability. North
Carolina State University,
North Carolina A&T State
University, U.S. Department
of Agriculture, and local
governments cooperating.
SoilFacts
Swine Manure as a
Fertilizer Source
Swine manure can be an excellent source of nutrients for crop production. The key,
to proper management is determining the nutrient content of the manure, the
percentages of those nutrients that are available to the plant, and the nutrient
requirements of the plant. Considered together, these three factors will help you
apply the proper amount.
Nutrient Content of the Manure
Because the nutrient content of swine ma-
nure varies among operations and over time,
the manure must be analyzed before you
apply it to the land. Waste samples can be
analyzed for $4.00 by contacting the North
Carolina Department of Agriculture
(NCDA), Agronomic Division, Plant and
Waste Analysis Lab, P.O. Box 27647, Blue
Ridge Road Center, Raleigh, NC 27611.
Other qualified private laboratories are also
available (fees vary).
Samples collected for analysis should be
representative of the pit or lagoon. If the
waste is to be applied as a slurry, the storage
pit or basin should be agitated before sam-
pling. Collect approximately 3/4 of a pint of
material in an expandable container, being
sure to leave air space.
If you cannot have a sample analyzed,
determine the application rate by using the'
average nutrient values for different swine
manure systems shown in Table 1. Table 2
shows the average amounts of secondary and
Table 1. Nutrient Composition of Swine Manure
Manure
Total
Ammonium Phosphorus
Potassium
Type
N
NH4 N Pz05
Kz0
lb/ton
Fresh
12
7 9
9
Scraped'
13
7 12
9
Ib/1,000 gallons
Liquid slurryz
31
19 22
17
Anaerobic
lagoon sludge
22
6 49
7
lb/acre-inch
Anaerobic
lagoon liquid
136
ill 53
133
Source: Abridged from North Carolina Agricultural Chemicals Manual.
'Collected within 1 week.
2Six-12 months accumulation of manure, urine, and excess water usage; does not include fresh water for
flushing or lot runoff.
North Carolina
a Cooperative Extension Service
NORTH CAROLINA STATE UNIVERSITY
s' COLLEGE OF AGRICULTURE & LIFE SCIENCES

i/
Vacts
micronutrients present in swine
manures. These values can be used
as planning guidelines, as long as
you realize that they are not as
accurate as a sample analysis.
Nutrient Availabilities
The total nutrient content reported
on a manure analysis report (or the
levels shown in Tables l and 2) is
not immediately available to the
crops when the manure is applied.
Some elements are released when
the organic matter is decomposed by
soil microorganisms. Other elements
can combine with soil constituents
and be made unavailable. Nitrogen
may also be lost to the atmosphere
through volatilization or denitrifica-
tion, depending on the application
method and soil moisture levels.
Table 3 lists the proportion of
nutrients available for crop use
during the first year of application
for given application methods.
When determining the application
rate, refer to the availability coeffi-
cient for the appropriate application
method, and then multiply that
number by the corresponding nutri-
ent value on the waste analysis
report (or by the values shown in
Tables 1 and 2). Waste analysis
reports from the NCDA's Agro-
nomic Division show the nutrient
availabilities for the first crop.
The most recently applied waste
is not the only source of nutrients;
they are also available from previ-
ous applications of manures or from
Table 3. First -Year Availability Coefficients for Swine Manure
Manure Soil
Type Injection' Incorporation Broadcast3 Irrigation
P2O. and KO availability coefficients
All manure types 0.8 0.8 0.7 0.7
N availability coefficient
Scraped
paved surface - 0.6 0.4 -
Liquid
manure slurry 0.8 0.7 0.4 0.3
Anaerobic
lagoon liquid 0.9 0.8 0.5 0.5
Anaerobic
lagoon sludge 0.6 0.6 0.4 0.4
'Manure injected directly into soil and immediately covered.
2Surface-spread manure plowed or disked into soil within two days.
3Surface-spread manure uncovered for one month or longer.
°Sprinkler -irrigated liquid uncovered for one month or longer.
legumes crops. With the exception
of nitrogen, updated soil tests are
the best means of determining
nutrient reserves from manure
applications. Table 4 can be used to
estimate available nitrogen carry-
over from legumes.
Application Rates
Land application rates of manure are
generally determined by matching
the available nitrogen or phosphorus
content of the wastes to the nutrient
requirements of the crops. In most
cases, nitrogen determines the
application rate unless the area is
designated "nutrient sensitive" and
indicates that phosphorus movement
Table 2. Secondary and Micronutrient Content of Swine Manures
off -site could contaminate surface
waters. In areas not designated as
nutrient sensitive, phosphorus
movement can be adequately con-
trolled with conservation methods
that minimize soil and nutrient
runoff. The conservation methods
include grass field borders, grassed
waterways, contour planting, and
reduced tillage. Leaching of phos-
phorus is extremely limited on
mineral soils and should not contrib-
ute to groundwater contamination.
Nitrogen recommendations for
various crops are listed in Table 5.
Use these rates as guidelines with
the realistic yield capabilities for
each crop and field. With feed and
forage crops, excessive manure
ManureType
Ca
Mg
S
Na
Fe Mn
B
Mo
Zn
Cu
lb/ton
Fresh
Paved lot scraped
7.9
12.0
1.7
2.3
1.8
2.2
1.6
1.6
0.39 0.04
1.03 0.19
0.074
0.015
0.00066
0.00007
0.12
0.35
0.029
0.15
Ib/1,000 gallons
Liquid slurry
Lagoon sludge
8.6
15.8
2.9
4.5
4.7
8.3
3.7
2.9
0.69 0.15
1.8 0.28
0.069
0.023
0.0011
0.0095
0.39
0.67
0.11
0.23
lb/acre-inch
Lagoon liquid
25.5
8.3
10.0
57.7
2.4 _ .34
0.18
0.0045
1.5
0.3
Source: Biological and Agricultural Engineering Department, NCSU.

Table 4. Estimated Residual Nitrogen Provided by a Good
Stand of Legumes. Grown In Rotation
Legume Residual Nitrogen Available
(Ib/acre)
Alfalfa'
80-100
Harry vetch'
80-100
Crimson clover'
60-75
Austrian winter pea'
50-60
Soybeans2
15-30
Peanuts2
20-40
'Killed before planting current spring crop.
21-egume planted in previous year or season. More nitrogen will be available if the
fall -planted crop immediately follows the legume. On sandy soils and in years with
normally high precipitation, less nitrogen will be available to spring -planted crops.
Table 5. Nitrogen Fertilization Guidelines
Commodity lb N/RYE'
Corn (grain)
1.0 - 1.25 lb N/bu
Corn "(silage)
10 - 20 lb N/ton
Cotton
0.06 - 0.12 lb N/lb lint
Sorghum (grain)
2.0 - 2.5 lb N/cwt
Wheat (grain)
1.7 - 2.4 lb N/bu
Rye (grain)
1.7 - 2.4 lb N/bu
Barley (grain)
1.4 - 1.6 lb N/bu
Triticale (grain)
1.4 - 1.6 lb N/bu
Oats
1.0 - 1.3 lb N/bu
Bermudagrass (hay")
40 - 50 lb N/dry ton
Tall fescue (hay2.3)
40 - 50 lb N/dry ton
Orchardgrass (hay'.3)
40 - 50 lb N/dry ton
Small grain(hay2-3)
50 - 60 lb N/dry ton
Sorghum-sudangrass (hay2.3)
45 - 55 lb N/dry ton
Millet (hay2.3)
45 - 55 lb N/dry ton
Pine and hardwood trees'
40 - 60 lb N/acre/year
'RYE = Realistic Yield Expectation
2Annual maintenance guidelines
3Reduce N rate by 25 percent when grazing
'On trees less than 5 feet tall, N will stimulate undergrowth competition
application can produce high nitrate
concentrations, which can harm
livestock (through nitrate poisoning)
and promote nutrient imbalances,
that may lead to grass tetany. If
loading rates are based on phospho-
rus, apply the amount suggested by
soil test recommendations. Other
nutrients such as potassium, magne-
sium, and the micronutrients manga-
nese, zinc, and copper may not be
supplied in sufficient quantities for
normal crop production. In such
cases, apply the supplemental
nutrients with a commercial ferti-
lizer as recommended by a current
soil test. -
In addition to the supply of
nutrients, proper soil pH is required
to promote organic matter decompo-
sition, improve crop yields, and
ensure nutrient availability. The
biological conversion of organic
matter to nitrate is an acid-forming
process that will continue to reduce
soil pH unless you follow an ade-
quate sampling and liming program.
To help you determine land
application rates, a worksheet is
provided at the end of this publica-
tion.
Timing of Manure
Applications
In addition to carefully calculating
the application rate, you must also
minimize the delay between apply-
ing the manure and planting the
crop. Precise timing increases the
amount of nitrogen used by the crop -
and thus reduces leaching. The risk'
of surface water and groundwater
contamination is greater in areas of
high rainfall and where manures are
applied in the fall or winter for
spring crops. On sandy -textured
soils, apply manures at low rates
throughout the growing season,
wherever possible, to reduce nitro-
gen leaching caused by the soil's
low nutrient -holding capacity.
Exercise caution when applying,
lagoon liquid through irrigation onto
standing crops that are undergoing
stresses.
Acreage Requirements
for New Facilities
Whenever samples of manure or
lagoon liquid are available for
analysis, the specific results should
be used to determine application
rates and acreage requirements.
However, when you are planning
new facilities, average values can
help determine the approximate
acreage requirements for a given
size swine operation. Table 6 can be
used to determine the minimum
acreage a new unit will need for
manure use.
An example will make these
methods clear. A producer is inter-
ested in starting a 500-sow farrow-

LV-111,1311 V�eration using an anaero-
bic lagoon collection system. The
producer is considering spraying the
lagoon liquid effluent on bermu-
dagrass being grown for hay. The
realistic yield expected for this field
is 6 dry tons per acre. How many
acres of bermudagrass would be
needed?
Using Table 5, the maximum
nitrogen (N) rate required is 300 lb
per acre (6 tons x 50 lb N/ton). Go
now to Table 6 under surface broad-
cast column 300, and you will find
Swine Manure as a Fertilizer Source
that each sow would require 0.0867
acres to utilize its waste. A 500-sow
operation would thus require 43.4
acres (0.0867 x 500 = 43.4).
Value of Manure
To compare the value of manure to
commercial fertilizer, convert the
manure nutrients to available nutri-
ents by using their availability
coefficients., In the example that
follows, the amount of available
nitrogen (N), phosphorus (P205), and
potassium (K20) in each inch of
lagoon liquid is approximately 68,
37, and 93 pounds per acre, respec-
tively. At $0.225 per pound of
nitrogen, $0.22 per pound of phos-
phate, and $0.12 per pound of
potash, the manure's gross worth is
(68 x $.225) + (37 x $.22) +
(93 x $.12)
or
$15.30 + $8.14 + $11.16 = $34.60
per acre for each inch of lagoon
liquid.
Table 6. Minimum Amount of Land Needed to Apply Swine Manure as a Nitrogen Fertilizer
Based on the Nitrogen Rate Required by the Crop.
Soil Incorporated'
Surface Broadcast2
lb N/acre/year
100
200
300 400
100 200
300
400
Manure Handling
and Production Unit
Acres/animal unit capacity
Paved Lot Scraped Manure
Weanling-to-feeder per head
0.025
0.012
0.0082 0.0062
0.0158 0.0074
0.0049
0.0037
Feeder -to -finish per head
0.12
0.061
0.041 0.030
0.073 0.036
0.024
0.018
Farrow-to-weanling per sow
0.29
0.14
0.095 0.071
0.17 0.085
0.057
0.043
Farrow -to -feeder per sow
0.34
0.17
0.11 0.086
0.21 0.10
0.069
0.051
Farrow -to -finish per sow
1.4
0.70
0.47 0.35
0.84 0.42
0.28
0.21
Liquid Manure Slurry
Weanling-to-feeder per head
0.031
0.015
0.010
0.0077
0.019
0.0095
0.0063
0.0047
Feeder -to -finish per head
0.15
0.076
0.051
0.038
0.094
0.0470
0.031
0.023
Farrow-to-weanling per sow
0.36
0.18
0.12
0.089
0.22
0.11
0.073
0.055
Farrow -to -feeder per sow
0.43
0.21
0.14
0.11
0.26
0.13
0.088
0.066
Farrow -to -finish per sow
1.7
0.87
0.58
0.44
1.1
0.54
0.36
0.27
Anaerobic Lagoon Sludge
Weanling-to-feeder per head
0.0019
0.0010
0.0006
0.0005
0.0016
0.0008
0.0005
0.0004
Feeder -to -finish per head
0.0094
0.0047
0.0031
0.0024
0.0078
0.0039
0.0026
0.0019
Farrow-to-weanling per sow
0.015
0.0074
0.0049
0.0037
0.018
0.0091
0.0061
0.0046
Farrow -to -feeder per sow
0.018
0.0089,
0.0059
0.0044
0.022
0.011
0.0073
0.0055
Farrow -to -finish per sow
0.11
0.054
0.036
0.027
0.089
0.045
0.030
0.022
Anaerobic Lagoon Liquid
Weanling-to-feeder per head
0.0075
0.0038
0.0025
0.0019
0.0048
0.0024
0.0016
0.0012
Feeder -to -finish per head
0.037
0.018
0.012
0.0092
0.023
0.012
0.0078
0.0058
Farrow-to-weanling per sow
0.084
0.042
0.028
0.021
0.054
0.027
0.018
0.013
Farrow -to -feeder per sow
0.10
0.051
0.034
0.025
0.065
0.032
0.022
0.016
Farrow -to -finish per sow
0.41
0.21
0.14
0.10
0.26
0.13
0.088
0.066
'Incorporated within 2 days
2Not incorporated for 1 month or longer; lagoon liquid irrigated.

This value does not include
labor or irrigation equipment costs,
nor does it include the value of any
secondary or micronutrients avail-
able in the manure. In addition, it
assumes that the soil test has indi-
cated a need for each nutrient,
when, in fact, many nutrients may
not be needed. Nutrients not needed
should not be considered in assess-
ing the financial value of the ma-
nure.
Swine Manure as a Fertilizer Source
Land Application
Worksheet
Farmer Jones has a swine operation
in which lagoon liquid is applied
through a travel gun to fertigate a
field for corn. His yield goal is
about 120 bushels per acre, and he
decides to apply the equivalent of
120 pounds of nitrogen per acre
(Table 5). His land is not subject to
erosion, nor is it in a nutrient sensi-
Worksheet: Determining the Nutrient Needs of Your Crop
tive watershed. The corn crop will
be planted in the same field that had
soybeans last year. He has grass
borders on his field to further reduce
the potential of nutrient or pesticide
runoff.
Farmer Jones uses a starter
fertilizer on his corn crop at a rate to
supply 10 pounds of nitrogen per
acre and 34 pounds of P,OS per acre.
He intends to supply the remainder
of nitrogen from liquid swine lagoon
Example Your Farm
1. Crop to be grown corn
2. Total nutrients required
a. N (Table 5) (lb/acre) 120
b. PZOS (soil test) (lb/acre) 50
c. KZO (soil test) (lb/acre) 50
3. Pounds of starter or preplant fertilizer used
a. N (lb/acre) 10
b. P2O5 (lb/acre) 34
c. K2O (lb/acre) 0
4. Residual N credit from legumes (Table 4) (lb/acre) 20
5. Net nutrient needs of crop (lb/acre)
Nitrogen: Total need (item 2a) minus additional N from
starter (item 3a), minus legume (item 4)
a. N: 120 —10 — 20 (lb/acre) 90
Phosphorus and potassium: Total need (items 2b and 2c)
minus additional nutrients from starter (items 3b and 3c)
b. P2O5: 50 —34 (lb/acre) 16
c. KO: 50 — 0 (lb/acre) 50
RATE OF MANURE TO APPLY
6. Nutrient totals in manure (from Table 1 or waste samples). If analysis
report already gives available nutrients, skip this item.
a. Total N (lb/acre-inch) 136
b. P2O1 (lb/acre-inch) 53
c. K2O (lb/acre-inch) 133

dFacts
eument. now much effluent does he
need to apply to meet the nitrogen
needs of his corn crop? How much
Worksheet (continued)
will be needed to supplement the of 50 pounds of each nutrient per
crop with additional K20 or P205 to acre? The answers are given in the
satisfy his soil test recommendations worksheet.
Example Your Farm
7. Nutrients available to crop (items 6a, 6b, and 6c) times availability
coefficients (fable 3)
a. Available N: 136 x 0.5 (lb/acre-inch)
68
b. Available P.O.: 53 x 0.7 (lb/acre-inch)
37
c. Available K20: 133 x 0.7 (lb/acre-inch)
93
8. Application rate to supply priority nutrient
a. Priority nutrient
nitrogen
b. Amount of priority nutrient needed (lb/acre from item 5a) 90
c. Rate of manure needed to supply priority nutrient
(item 8b)/(item 7a): 90/68 (acre -inch) 1.32
9. Pounds per acre of all nutrients supplied at the application rate
required to meet the needs for the priority nutrient. For each nutrient,
multiply the available nutrients (items 7a, 7b, and 7c) by manure rate (item 8c).
a. N supplied: 68 x 1.32 (lb/acre) 90
b. PZO5 supplied: 37 x 1.32 (lb/acre) 49
c. K20 supplied: 93 x 1.32 (lb/acre) 123
10. Nutrient Balance: Net nutrient need (—) or excess (+) after application
of manure at calculated rate. Subtract the net nutrient needs of the crop
(items 5a, 5b, and 5c) from the nutrient rate applied (items 9a, 9b, and 9c).
a. N balance: 90 — 90 (lb/acre) 0
b. P20, balance: 49 —16 (lb/acre) +33
c. K20 balance: 123 — 50 (lb/acre) +73
Source: Calculation format modified from Pennsylvania Department of Environmental Resources, Field Application of Manure,
October1986.
Prepared by
J. P. Zublena, Extension Soil Science Specialist
J. C. Barker, Extension Agricultural Engineering Specialist
J. W. Parker, Extension Area Swine Specialist (retired)
C. M. Stanislaw, Extension Swine Specialist
The authors wish to acknowledge the assistance and cooperation of the North Carolina Department of Agriculture's
Agronomic Division in the analysis of samples and the development of the data base used in this publication.
10,000 copies of this public document were printed at a cost of $1,422.00, or $.14 per copy.
Published by
NORTH CAROLINA COOPERATIVE EXTENSION SERVICE
6/93-1 oM_—MOC—Woodard (Revised) AG-439-4
WQWM-39

- BRASSTOWN Series http://ortho.ftw.nres.usda.gov/osd/dat/B/BRASSTOWN.html
LOCATION BRASSTOWN NC+TN
Established Series
Rev. DJT-JDV-AG-MKC
04/2001
BRASSTOWN SERIES
The Brasstown series consists of deep, well drained, moderately permeable soils on ridges and side
slopes of the Southern Appalachian Mountains. These soils formed in residuum that is affected by soil
creep in the upper part, and is weathered from metasedimentary rocks such as phyllite, slate, quartzite
and thinly bedded metasandstone. Slope ranges from 2 to 95 percent. Near the type location, mean
annual air temperature is 56 degrees F., and mean annual precipitation is 60 inches.
TAXONOMIC CLASS: Fine -loamy, mixed, subactive, mesic Typic Hapludults
TYPICAL PEDON: Brasstown channery fine sandy loam on a 24 percent south -facing mountain side
slope, elevation 1732 feet --forest. (Colors are for moist soil unless otherwise stated.)
Oi--1 to 0 inches, partially decomposed deciduous leaves, twigs, and roots.
A- 0 to 6 inches, dark brown (7.5YR 4/4) channery fine sandy loam; reddish yellow (7.5YR 6/6) dry;
moderate fine granular structure; very friable; common fine and medium roots; 25 percent by volume
metasandstone and phyllite channers; few fine flakes of mica; very strongly acid; clear wavy
boundary. (2 to 10 inches thick)
BA--6 to 10 inches, yellowish red (5YR 5/6) channery sandy clay loam; weak medium subangular
blocky structure; very friable; common fine and medium roots; 20 percent by volume metasandstone
and phyllite channers; common fine flakes of mica; very strongly acid; abrupt wavy boundary. (0 to 8
inches thick)
Bt--10 to 29 inches, red (2.5YR 4/8) channery sandy clay loam; moderate medium subangular blocky
structure; friable; 25 percent by volume metasandstone and phyllite channers; common fine flakes of
mica; few fine and medium roots; strongly acid; gradual wavy boundary. (10 to 45 inches thick)
BC--29 to 37 inches, red (2.5YR 4/6) channery fine sandy loam; weak medium subangular blocky
structure; very friable; 25 percent by volume phyllite channers; common fine flakes of mica; strongly
acid; gradual wavy boundary. (0 to 15 inches thick)
C--37 to 46 inches, multicolored phyllite saprolite that has channery very fine sandy loam texture;
massive; very friable; 30 percent by volume phyllite channers; common fine flakes of mica; strongly
acid; gradual wavy boundary.
Cr--46 to 60 inches, multicolored, weathered, and fractured interbedded metasandstone and phyllite;
partially consolidated but can be dug with difficulty with a spade.
TYPE LOCATION: Cherokee County, North Carolina; west from Murphy on US 64 to SR 1301;
west on SR 1301 to SR 1302; northwest on SR 1302 to SR 1303; northeast on SR 1303 to USFS 307;
/of 3 3/30/2007 10:41 AM

- BRASSTOWN Series http://ortho.ftw.nres.usda.gov/osd/datBBRASSTOWN.html
0.5 mile west of USFS 6068 on USFS 307 in woods.
RANGE IN CHARACTERISTICS: Thickness of the solum ranges from 26 to 59 inches. Depth to a
paralithic contact with soft weathered bedrock is 40 to 60 in, Depth to hard bedrock is more than
60 inches. Content of rock fragments ranges up to 35 percent by volume. Fragments are dominantly
channers or gravel in the A, E, Bt, and BC horizons. They range from channers to flagstones in the C
horizon. Content of mica flakes is few to common throughout. Reaction is extremely acid to
moderately acid.
The A horizon has hue of 1 OYR to 5YR, value of 2 to 5, and chroma of 2 to 8. A horizons that have
value of 3 are thinner than 6 inches. This horizon is fine sandy loam, very fine sandy loam, loam, or
silt loam in the fine -earth fraction.
The E horizon, where present, has hue of 5YR to 1 OYR, value of 4 to 6, and chroma of 3 to 8. It has
the same textures as the A horizon.
The BA or BE horizons, where present, have hue of 2.5YR to 7.5YR, value of 4 to 6, and chroma of 4
to 8. They are loam, fine sandy loam, very fine sandy loam, sandy clay loam, or silt loam in the
fine -earth fraction.
The Bt horizon has hue of 2.5YR to 7.5YR, value of 4 to 6, and chroma of 4 to 8. At least part of the
Bt horizon has hue of 2.5YR or 5YR. It is loam, sandy clay loam, clay loam, silt loam, or silty clay
loam in the fine -earth fraction.
The BC or CB horizons, where present, are similar in color and texture to the BA and BE horizons.
The C horizon is similar in color to the BC horizon or is multicolored. It is multicolored saprolite that
is fine sandy loam, very fine sandy loam, sandy loam, loam, or silt loam in the fine -earth fraction.
The Cr horizon is multicolored, fractured, and weathered metasedimentary rocks such as phyllite,
slate, quartzite and thinly bedded metasandstone. It is partly consolidated but can be dug with
difficulty with a spade.
COMPETING SERIES: These are the Albemarle, Allegheny, Allenwood, Arcola, Arendstville,
Aura, Bedington, Birdsboro, Bucks, Butano, Chester, Chetwynd, Chilmark, Clymer, Collington,
Cowee, Edgemont, Edneytown, Elsinboro, Eubanks, Fernhaven, Frankstown, Freehold, Gilpin,
Gladstone, Glenel , Junaluska, Leck Kill, Matapeake, Meadowville, Murrill, Nixon, Pineville,
Quakertown, Rayne, Shelocta, Shouns, Syenite, Tate, Thurmont, Un ers, and Whiteford soils in the
same family.
Except for Junaluska, none of the competing series formed in residuum weathered from
metasedimentary rocks such as phyllite, slate, quartzite, and metasandstone, or contain fragments of
those rocks. Junaluska soils have a Cr horizon of weathered bedrock at depths of 20 to 40 inches.
Note: The above section has not been updated to reflect the 8th Edition of Keys to Soil Taxonomy.
GEOGRAPHIC SETTING: Brasstown soils are on gently sloping to very steep ridges and side
slopes of the Southern Appalachian Mountains. Elevation ranges from about 1500 to 3500 feet. Slopes
are typically 15 to 50 percent, but range from 2 to 95 percent. Brasstown soils formed in residuum that
is affected by soil creep in the upper part, and is weathered from metasedimentary rocks such as
/ d 3 3/30/2007 10:41 AM

- JUNALUSKA Series http://www2.ftw.nres.usda.gov/osd/dat/J/JJNALUSKA.html
JUNALUSKA
Established Series
Rev. JDV:SAB:AG:MKC
04/2001
NC+GA TN VA
JUNALUSKA SERIES
The Junaluska series consists of moderately deep, well drained, moderately permeable soils on ridges
and side slopes of the Southern Appalachian Mountains. They formed in residuum that is affected by
soil creep in the upper part, and is weathered from low grade metasedimentary rocks, such as phyllite,
slate, and low grade, thinly bedded metasandstone. Slope ranges from 3 to 95 percent. Mean annual
temperature is 56 degrees F., and mean annual precipitation is about 60 inches near the type location.
TAXONOMIC CLASS: Fine -loamy, mixed, subactive, mesic Typic Hapludults
TYPICAL PEDON: Junaluska fine sandy loam on a 20 percent, southwest facing mountain side
slope --forested. (Colors are for moist soil unless otherwise stated)
Oi--2 to 0 inches; partially decomposed organic matter and deciduous leaves, twigs, and roots.
A1--0 to 2 inches; brown (7.5YR 5/4) fine sandy loam; weak medium granular structure; very friable;
common fine, medium and coarse roots; 5 percent metasandstone charmers by volume; common fine
mica flakes; extremely acid; clear wavy boundary.
A2--2 to 11 inches; strong brown (7.5YR 5/6) fine sandy loam; weak medium granular structure; very
friable; common fine, medium and coarse roots; 5 percent metasandstone channers by volume;
common fine mica flakes; very strongly acid; clear wavy boundary. (Combined thickness of the A
horizons is 1 to 11 inches thick.)
Bt--11 to 21 inches; yellowish red (5YR 5/8) sandy clay loam; common coarse distinct red (2.5YR
4/8) mottles; moderate medium subangular blocky structure; friable, slightly sticky, slightly plastic;
few medium roots; few faint clay films on faces of peds; 5 percent by volume metasandstone
channers; common fine mica flakes; strongly acid; clear wavy boundary. (10 to 25 inches thick)
CB--21 to 26 inches; thin parallell layers of yellowish red (5YR 5/8) and red (2.5YR 4/8) fine sandy
loam saprolite, and sandy clay loam B horizon material; saprolite is massive and the B horizon
material has weak medium subangular block structure; friable; 5 percent by volume metasandstone
channers; common fine mica flakes; strongly acid; clear irregular boundary. (0 to 8 inches thick)
Cr--26 to 31 inches; multicolored, weathered, low grade metasandstone; partially consolidated but can
be dug with difficulty with a spade.
TYPE LOCATION: Cherokee County, North Carolina; west from Murphy on U.S. Highway 64 to
State Road 1301; west to State Road 1302; northwest to State Road 1303; northeast to USFS Road
307; 0.5 mile west of intersection of USFS Road 307 and USFS Road 6068 on USFS Road 307; 0.1
mile S of USFS Road 307 in woods. (525,880N;465,790E)
f o f 3 3/30/2007 10:39 AM

- JUNALUSKA Series http://www2.ftw.nres.usda.gov/osd/dat/J/fUNALUSKA.html
RANGE IN CHARACTERISTICS: Solum thickness ranges from 15 to 39 inches. Depth to a Cr
horizon of weathered bedrock is 20 to 40 inches. The upper boundary of the Cr horizon represents a
paralithic contact. Depth to hard bedrock is greater than 40 inches. The soil is extremely acid to
moderately acid unless limed. Content of mica flakes ranges from few to common. Content of rock
fragments ranges up to' 35 percent by volume in the A, B, and C horizons.
The A horizon has hue of 1 OYR to 5YR, value of 3 to 5, and chroma of 3 to 8. A horizons that have
value and chroma of 3 are less than 6 inches thick. The E horizon, where present, has hue of 5YR to
1 OYR, value of 4 to 6, and chroma of 3 to 8. The A and E horizons are loam, fine sandy loam, or silt
loam in the fine -earth fraction.
The Bt horizon, and the BA and BC horizons, where present, have hue of 2.5YR to 7.5YR, value of 4
to 6, and chroma of 4 to 8. At least part of the Bt horizon has hue of 2.5YR or 5YR. The Bt horizon is
loam, clay loam, silty clay loam, or sandy clay loam in the fine- earth fraction. The BA and BC
horizons are loam, fine sandy loam, or silt loam in the fine -earth fraction.
The C horizon, where present, is multicolored saprolite that is fine sandy loam, loam, sandy loam, or
loamy fine sand in the fine -earth fraction. Where present, the CB horizon consists of thin parallel
layers of saprolite and Bt horizon material that has formed along the fracture planes. It is reddish in
color and the C and B parts have the texture range stated for these horizons.
The Cr horizon is multicolored, weathered and fractured, low grade metasedimentary rock, such as
phyllite, slate, and low grade, thinly bedded metasandstone. It is partially consolidated but can be dug
with difficulty with a spade.
COMPETING SERIES: These include the Albemarle, Alleghany, Allenwood, Arcola, Arendstville,
Aura, Bedington, Birdsboro, Brasstown, Bucks, Butano, Chester, Chetwynd, Chilmark, Clymer,
Collington, Cowee, Edgemont, Edneytown, Elsinboro, Eubanks, Fernhaven(T), Frankstown, Freehold,
Gilpin, Gladstone(T), Glenel , Leck Kill, Lonon, Matapeake, Meadowville, Murrill, Nixon, Pineville,
Quakertown, Rayne, Shelocta, Shouns, Syenite, Tate, Thurmont, Un ers, and Whiteford series in the
same family, and the Ashe, Chestnut, and Evard series in closely related families.
Albemarle soils have a Cr horizon of weathered arkosic sandstone. Ashe and Chestnut soils are
coarse -loamy, lack Bt horizons, and have granite or gneiss bedrock at depths of 20 to 40 inches.
Arcola soils formed from siltstone and sandstone in the Piedmont Plateau and contain fragments of
those rocks. Cowee soils formed from igneous and high grade metamorphic rocks such as granite,
gneiss, and hornblende gneiss, and contain fragments of those rocks. Gilpin soils have soft bedrock of
sandstone, siltstone, or shale 20 to 40 inches below the surface. None of the other competing series
have bedrock within a depth of 20 to 40 inches.
Note: The above section has not been updated to reflect the 8th Edition of Keys to Soil Taxonomy.
GEOGRAPHIC SETTING: Junaluska soils are on strongly sloping to very steep ridges and side
slopes of the Southern Appalachian Mountains. Elevation ranges from 1,400 to 3,500 feet. Slopes are
typically 15 to 50 percent but range from 3 to 95 percent. Junaluska soils formed in residuum that is
affected by soil creep in the upper part, and is weathered from metasedimentary rocks, such as
phyllite, slate, thinly bedded metasandstone, and quartzite. Mean annual temperature is 56 degrees F.,
and mean annual precipitation is about 60 inches near the type location.
GEOGRAPHICALLY ASSOCIATED SOILS: These are include the competing Brasstown series
2 of 3 3/30/2007 10:39 AM

iption - JUNALUSKA Series http://www2.ftw.nics.usda.gov/osd/dat/J/JUNALUSKA.html
and the Cataska, Santeetlah, Soco, Spivey, Stecoah, Sylco, and Tsali soils. All of these soils except for
Brasstown and Tsali have a cambic horizon. Also, they are all on ridges and side slopes except for
Santeetlah and Spivey which are in coves. Cataska and Tsali soils are shallow to paralithic contact
with a Cr horizon. Cataska, Spivey, and Sylco soils are loamy -skeletal. Santeetlah, Spivey, and
Stecoah are deeper than 40 inches to bedrock. This soil is usually mapped in complex with Brasstown
or Tsali soils.
DRAINAGE AND PERMEABILITY: Well drained; very little runoff where forest litter has not
been disturbed. Medium to very rapid runoff where litter has been removed; moderate permeability.
USE AND VEGETATION: Most of the soil is in forest. Common trees are chestnut oak, white oak,
scarlet oak, black oak, northern red oak, and hickory with some eastern white,pine, Virginia pine,
pitch pine, shortleaf pine, blackgum, and red maple. The understory includes flowering dogwood,
rhododendron, mountain laurel, sourwood, blueberry, buffalo nut. A small acreage is cleared and used
for pasture and hayland.
DISTRIBUTION AND EXTENT: North Carolina, Georgia, Tennessee, and Virginia. The series is
of moderate extent.
MLRA OFFICE RESPONSIBLE: Lexington, Kentucky
SERIES ESTABLISHED: McDowell County, North Carolina; 1989. The name is from Junaluska
Gap in Clay County, North Carolina.
REMARKS: The Junaluska series describes soils that were previously mapped in the Sylco series.
However, Junaluska soils have an argillic horizon and average less than 35 percent by volume rock
fragments. The 6/99 revision updates the classification to the 8th Edition of Keys to Soil Taxonomy.
The soil is placed in the subactive CEC activity class based upon NSSL lab data from the typifying
pedon.
Laboratory data from the typifying pedon were obtained from the National Soil Survey Laboratory,
sample number S85NC-039-003. .
This soil has the following diagnostic horizons and features:
Ochric epipedon - the zone from the surface of the soil to a depth of 11 inches (Al and A2 horizons)
Argillic horizon - the zone from 11 to 21 inches below the surface (Bt horizon)
Paralithic contact - the occurrence of weathered bedrock at a depth of 26 inches. (The upper boundary
of the Cr horizon)
MLRA: 130 SIR: NCO181
National Cooperative Soil Survey
U.S.A.
3 of 3 3/30/2007 10:39 AM

IV
Ash�Rkogll6hh�61,0,ffice
Revised Technical SpecificationsAdn -.r._
Tj
APR 2 5 2007
1':

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SANTEETLAH LAKESIDE
PHASE II WASTEWATER SYSTEM
IBEX THUNDERBIRD L.L.C.
GRAHAM COUNTY, NORTH CAROLINA
McGill
ASSOCIATES
Engineering • Planning • Finance
55 Broad Street
Asheville, North Carolina 28801
March 2007
07712

PHASE II WASTEWATER SYSTEM
SANTEETLAH LAKESIDE
IBEX THUNDERBIRD, L.L.C.
GRAHAM COUNTY, NORTH CAROLINA
The engineering material contained in these specifications was prepared
under the responsible charge of the registered engineers listed below:
.ENGINEER
Harry B. Buckner, P.E.
McGill Associates, P.A.
All design except as noted
Phillip A. Fisher, P.E.
McGill Associates, P.A.
Electrical design
SEAL
q�Z�CI
1
w SEAL
22541 _
"BuCj�`�``\\

SANTEELAH LAKESIDE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
01200 SPECIAL CONDITIONS
01705 MOBILIZATION
02211 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
02220 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
03301 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION
06192 PREFABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES
11210
SUBMERSIBLE TURBINE PUMPS
11253
TURBIDITY MONITORING SYSTEM
11300
DRIP IRRIGATION SYSTEMS
11302
RECLAIMED WATER SYSTEMS
11312
SUBMERSIBLE SEWAGE PUMPS
11398
ULTRAVIOLET LIGHT DISINFECTION SYSTEM
11700
BIOCLERE TRICKLING FILTERS
V hECHA�NICA,�L'�...`
15002
ELECTRIC MOTOR ACTUATORS
15400
PLUMBING
16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
16051 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING
16073 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
16120 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
3/19/07 TOC-1 PROJECT # 07712

SANTEELAH LAKESIDE
16130
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
16231
PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS
16289
TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION
16410
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
16415
TRANSFER SWITCHES
16442
PANELBOARDS
16511
INTERIOR LIGHTING
16990
HVAC SYSTEMS
3119107
TOC-2
PROJECT # 07712

1.03 PROJECT PAYMENTS AND RETAINAGE
A. The Owner may retain a portion of the amount otherwise due the
Contractor. Except. as provided elsewhere, the amount retained by the
Owner shall be limited to the following:
C
1
2
3.
4.
5.
Withholding of not more than 10% of the payment claimed until
work is 50% complete.
Whe
n work is 50% complete, reduction of the withholding to date,
of
the dollar value. of all : work satisfactorily completed toss and
provided that the Contractor use for greateklwgSCAL
hholdingtory progress
there is not specific
When the work is substantially complete (op
erationaI or beneficial
occupancy), the withheld amount t shall b assure completion.
further
educed below
5% to only that amount. necessary
the
ner
The Owner may reinstate up to y Cont acto 9 is not Oki g
determines, at its discretion, that the
ma
satisfactory progress or there is other specific cause for such
withholding.
The Owner may accept securities negotiable without recourse,
,conditions or restrictions, a provided release the Contractor bond or an
in lieu of all or
irrevocable letter of credit Y
part of the cash retainage;
For unit price projects, the Contractor may use the "Unit Bid Item
Summary" form included at the end of this section, or a similar form that
provides the required information.
Sales Tax Statement: When requested by the Owner, each
a sales tax
request for
Sa the Contractor shall include.
progress payment submitted by
reimbursement statement. The Contractor that III provides the requiredze the form provided
at the end of this section, or a similar formm p
information and. certification.
i _n4 SUBMITTALS
J
A. Ge_ neral: All transmittals from the dContractor
infobmationo a ated to the
transmittal cover form that In pertinent
project and the particular transmittal. The
Contrat or a cor all usef the
"Transmittal Form", provided at the end of this sect
rm
that includes the required information. •J
Rev. 3119/07 PROJECT. # . 07712
01200 -Page 2

B. Construction Schedule: The Contractor shall, within ten (10) days after
receipt of the Notice of Award, prepare and submit to the Engineer for
approval a practicable construction schedule showing the order in which
the Contractor' proposes to carry on the work, the date on which he will
start the several salient features and the contemplated dates for
completing such salient features. The schedule may be in any form, at the
option of the Contractor, but shall maintain current with each submittal for
progress payment, at least the following information.
1. The various classes and area of work broken down into times
projected for submittals, approvals and procurement; times for
installation and erection; and times for testing and inspection.
2. The work completed and the work remaining to complete the
project.
3. Any items of work which will- delay the start or completion of other
major items of work so as to delay completion of the whole project.
C. Schedule of Values: For lump sum projects, the Contractor shall, within
thirty (30) days after the Notice of Award and prior to submitting the first
Application for Payment, submit to the Engineer for approval a Schedule
of Values for the project. The Schedule of Values shall establish the
actual value of the components of the work and, after approval by the
Engineer, shall be the basis for the Contractor's Applications for Payment.
The Schedule of Values shall include separate line items for all major
.portions of the work.
D. Material Suppliers and Subcontractor Listings: As soon as possible, but in
no case more than 30 days after receipt of the Notice of Award, the
Contractor shall supply the names and addresses of all major material
suppliers and subcontractors to the Engineer.
E. _Shop Drawings and Samples: The Contractual requirements for shop
drawings and samples are specified in the General Conditions and in the
individual specification sections for each item. The Contractor shall
submit shop drawings and samples accompanied by the "Submittal and
Routing Form" included at the end of this section. Resubmissions, where
required, shall be in accordance with the procedures established for the
initial submittal.
F. Record Documents: Record drawings will not be required of the
Contractor; however, to enable the Owner to prepare record drawings, the
Contractor shall keep a complete and accurate record of changes and/or
deviations from the Contract Documents and shop drawings, indicating
the work as actually installed. Changes shall be ' neatly and correctly
Rev. 3119/07 PROJECT # 07712 01200 - Page 3

shown on the respective portion of the affected document, using prints of
the Drawings affected, or the Specifications, with appropriate
supplementary notes. The record set of marked -up Drawings, shop
drawings, and Specifications shall be kept at the job site during
construction and be available for inspection by the Engineer and the
Owner. These marked prints shall be included in the package of final
documentation submitted before final payment is required.
1.05 TYPES AND LIMITS OF INSURANCE
A. Certificates of Insurance: Satisfactory certificates of insurance shall be
filed with the Owner through the Engineer prior to starting any construction
work on this contract. The Owner will be named as an additional insured
on all policies of insurance and all certificates shall contain a 60-day
Notice of Cancellation. In connection with the provisions set forth in the
General Conditions Article 2.7, the Notice to Proceed will not be issued
until satisfactory certificates of insurance are filed.
1. Worker's Compensation and Employer's Liability: This insurance
shall protect the Contractor and Owner against all claims under
applicable state workmen's compensation laws. The Contractor
and Owner shall also be protected against claims for injury,
disease, or death of employees which, for any reason, may not fall
within the provisions of a workmen's compensation law. This policy
shall include an "all states" endorsement.
The liability limits shall be not less than:
a. Worker's Compensation............ Statutory
b. Employer's Liability ................... $100,000 each occurrence
2. Comprehensive Automobile Liability: This insurance shall be written
in comprehensive form and shall protect the Contractor and Owner
against all claims for injuries to members of the public and damage
to property of others arising from the use of motor vehicles, and
shall cover operation on or off the site, of all motor vehicles licensed
for highway use, whether they are owned, non -owned or hired.
The liability limits shall be not less than:
a. Bodily Injury .......................... $100,000 each person
$300,000 each occurrence
b. Property Damage ................... $100,000 each occurrence
$100,000 aggregate
Rev. 3/19/01 PROJECT # 07712 01200 - Page 4

3. Comprehensive General Liability: This insurance shall be written in
comprehensive form and shall" protect the Contractor and Owner
against all claims arising from injuries to persons other than his
employees or damage to property of the Owner or others arising
out of any act or omission of Contractor or his agents, employees,
or Subcontractors. The policy shall also include protection; against
claims insured by usual personal injury liability coverage and shall
include a "protective liability" endorsement to insure the contractual
liability - assumed by the Contractor under the indemnification
provisions in the General Conditions, and "Completed Operations
and Products Liability" coverage '(to remain in force during the
correction period).
To the extent that the Contractor's work, or work under his
direction, may require blasting, explosive conditions, or
underground operations, the comprehensive general liability
coverage shall contain no exclusion relative to blasting, explosion,
collapse of building, or damage to underground property.
a. Bodily Injury ........................... $100,000 each person
$300,000 each occurrence
b. Property Damage ................... $100,000 each occurrence
$100,000 aggregate
4. Umbrella Liability Policy: This insurance shall protect the Contractor
against all claims in excess of the limits provided under the
workmen's compensation and employer's liability, comprehensive
automobile liability, and general liability policies. The liability limits
of the umbrella liability policy shall not be less than $5,000,000.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for delivery, storage and handling of
all materials and equipment, unless otherwise noted. All material and
equipment shall be shipped to arrive at the job site on the dates indicated
on the purchase order. The following information shall be supplied:
1. The contents and bill of lading, number of shipments.
2. The method of shipments.
3. The date of shipment.
4. The name of the construction project.
B. Prior to shipment, all items shall be properly prepared to protect all critical
areas from the effects of weather, normal expected transport and on site
handling.
Rev. 3119107 PROJECT # 07712 01200 - Page 5

C. Items shall be tagged and marked with equipment and/or motor numbers
as per the manner stipulated in the purchase order.
D. All spare parts and expendable supplies shall be properly crated, marked,
and shipped to the job site on the date specified.
1.07 ENCROACHMENT AGREEMENTS
A. The Owner has been granted a right-of-way encroachment agreement
from the North Carolina Department of Transportation for all work
occurring within their right-of-way. All provisions of these arrangements
are in accordance with the policies and procedures of each agency and
are incorporated into the plans and specifications.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL STANDARDS
A. All equipment and materials of construction described in this specification
shall meet the more stringent requirements of the applicable codes listed
below:
1. OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Administration.
2. ASTM - American Society for Testing Materials.
3. ANSI - American National Standards Institute.
4. AGMA - American Gear Manufacturers Association.
5. AISC - American Institute of Steel Construction.
6. AWS - American Welding Society.
7. NEC - National Electric Code.
8. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
9. API -American Petroleum Institute.
2.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All equipment shall, after installation by the Contractor, shall be inspected,
tested and started up by a qualified representative of the equipment
manufacturer. The Contractor and the manufacturer's representative
shall complete the "Equipment Start-up Form" provided at the end of this
section and submit the completed form to the Engineer.
B. The listing of a manufacturer in the specifications does not necessarily
imply that the manufacturer's standard equipment meets the requirements
Rev. 3119/07 PROJECT # 07712 01200 - Page 6

of the specifications, but that the manufacturer listed has the capability to
meet the requirements of the specifications.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 . SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Limits of Construction: The Contractor shall confine all operations and
personnel to the limits of construction as shown on the plans. There shall
be no disturbance whatsoever of any areas outside the limits of
construction nor shall the workmen be allowed to travel at will through the
surrounding private property.
B. Construction Superintendent: The Contractor shall place in charge of the
work a competent and reliable superintendent, who shall have the
authority to act for the Contractor and who shall be accountable to the
Engineer. The Contractor shall, at all times, employ labor and equipment
sufficient to accomplish the several classes of work to full completion in
the manner and time specified.
C. Site Conditions:
1. The Contractor' shall maintain the work and project grounds free
from rubbish, debris and waste materials during all phases of the
work:
2. Immediately upon completion of the work and prior to final
acceptance, the Contractor shall remove all rubbish, debris,
temporary structures, equipment, excess or waste materials and
shall leave the work and project grounds in a neat and orderly
condition that is satisfactory to the Engineer and Owner.
D. Right of Entry: The Engineer and his representative will at all times have
access to the work. In addition, authorized representatives and agents of
any participating Federal or State agency shall be permitted to inspect all
work, materials, payrolls, records of personnel, invoices of materials, and
other relevant data and records.
E. Temporary Construction Services and Facilities: The Contractor shall
obtain all necessary permits, licenses, etc. and shall pay all costs incident
to the furnishing, installing and maintenance of temporary utility services
and 'facilities required for the duration of the work..
Rev. 3119/07 PROJECT # 07712 01200 - Page 7

F. Control of Erosion, Siltation, and Pollution:
1. Surface drainage from cuts and fills within the construction limits,
whether or not completed, and from borrow and waste disposal
areas, shall, if turbidity producing materials are present, be graded
to control erosion within acceptable limits. Temporary erosion and
sediment control measures such as berms, dikes or drains, if
required to meet the above standards, shall be provided and
maintained until permanent drainage and erosion control facilities
are completed and operative. The area of bare soil exposed at any
one time by construction operations should be held to a minimum.
Fills and waste areas shall be constructed by selective placement
to eliminate silts or clays on the surface that will erode and
contaminate adjacent streams.
2. The Contractor shall take whatever measures are necessary to
minimize soil erosion and siltation, water pollution, and air pollution
caused by his operations. The Contractor shall also comply with
the applicable regulations of all legally constituted authorities
relating to pollution prevention and control. The Contractor shall
keep himself fully informed of all such regulations which in any way
affect the conduct of the work, and shall at all times observe and
comply with all such regulations. In the event of conflict between
such regulations and the requirements of the specifications, the
more restrictive requirements shall apply.
3. The Engineer shall have the authority to limit the area over which
clearing and grubbing, excavation, borrow, and embankment
operations are performed whenever the Contractor's operations do
not make effective use of construction practices and temporary
measures which will minimize erosion, or whenever construction
operations have not been coordinated to effectively minimize
erosion, or whenever permanent erosion control features are not
being completed as soon as permitted by construction operations.
4. The Contractor shall control dust throughout the life of the project
within the project area and at all other areas affected by the
construction of the project, including, but not specifically limited to,
unpaved secondary roads, haul roads, access roads, disposal
sites, borrow and material pits, and production sites. Dust control
shall not be considered effective where the amount of dust creates
a potential or actual unsafe condition, public nuisance, or condition
endangering the value, utility, or appearance of any property.
Rev. 3/19/07 PROJECT # 07712 01200 - Page 8

5. The Contractor will not be directly compensated for any dust
control measures necessary, as this work will be considered
incidental to the work covered by the various contract items.
G. Disposal of Materials: Debris and waste materials, including all
combustibles, shall be removed by the Contractor from the construction
area unless otherwise approved in writing by the Owner or his
Representative.
H. Quantities of Estimate: The estimated quantities of work to be done and
materials to be furnished under this Contract shown in any of the
documents, including the proposal, are given for use in comparing bids
and to indicate approximately the total amount of the contract; and the
right is especially reserved, except as herein otherwise specifically limited
to, to increase or diminish the quantities as may be reasonably necessary
or desirable by the Owner to complete the work contemplated by this
Contract.
Utility Coordination: The Contractor shall make all necessary
arrangements with private and public utility companies to avoid any
possible damage to or interruption of utility equipment or service. The
Contractor shall be responsible for all inquiries concerning locations of
utility lines. Repair of any damage to public or private utilities resulting
from this work shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
J. Construction Surveying: All work shall be constructed in accordance with
the lines, grades and elevations shown on the plans or as given by the
Engineer in the field. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for
maintaining alignment and grade. All principal controlling points and base
lines for locating the principal components of the work together with a
suitable number of benchmarks adjacent to the work will be provided by
the Engineer. From this information, the Contractor shall verify
benchmarks and develop and make all detail surveys needed for
construction. The Contractor shall protect and safeguard all points,
stakes, grade marks, monuments, and benchmarks at the site of the work
and shall re-establish, at his own expense, any marks which are removed
or destroyed due to his construction operations.
K. Layinq Out Work:
1. It is imperative that the Contractor work within the shown rights of
way or easements at all times, unless approved otherwise by the
property owner and the Engineer.
2. The Contractor shall, at his expense, provide competent
engineering survey services and shall provide and maintain
accurate, detailed, survey work.
Rev. 3119/07 PROJECT # 07712 01200 - Page 9

3. The plans and supplementary drawings shall not be scaled and the
Contractor must verify all dimensions and elevations at the site
prior to proceeding with the work. The Contractor shall also verify
existing utility locations prior to purchasing materials affected by
these locations.
L. Use of Explosives:
If the use of explosives is necessary for the execution of the work,
the Contractor shall exercise the utmost care not to endanger life or
property. The Contractor shall be responsible for any and all
damage or injury to persons or property resulting from the use of
explosives. Such responsibility shall include, but shall in. no way be
limited to, all damages arising from all forms of trespass to adjacent
property as a result of blasting by the Contractor.
2. All explosives shall be stored in a secure manner, in compliance
with all laws, and all such storage places shall be marked clearly
"DANGEROUS EXPLOSIVES".
M. Use of Chemicals: All chemicals used during project construction, whether
herbicide, pesticide, disinfectant, polymer, reactant or of other
classification, must show approval of either EPA or USDA. Use of all
such chemicals and disposal of residues shall be in conformance with.
instructions.
N. Safety and Health Regulations:
The Contractor shall comply with all Federal, State and Local
Safety and Health Regulations including the Department of Labor
Safety and Health Regulations for construction promulgated under
the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (P.L. 91 - 596) and
under Section 107 of the .Contract Work Hours and Safety
Standards Act (P.L. 91-54).
2. The Contractor shall provide continuous, safe access to all
properties, both public and private, along the project in all cases
where such access will be provided by the completed facility and
shall conduct his operations in such a manner that inconvenience
to the property owners will be held to a minimum.
O. Equipment and Material Storage: The Contractor shall plan his activities
so that all materials and equipment can be stored within the project limits.
There shall be no disturbance whatsoever of any areas outside the
project limits without the prior approval of the Engineer.
P. Disturbed Areas: All areas disturbed as a result of the work of the
Contractor shall be restored to the original or better condition.
Rev. 3/19/07 PROJECT # 07712 01200 - Page 10

Reasonable care shall be taken during construction to avoid damage to
the Owner's property or that of any adjacent property owner(s).
Q. Tree and Plant Protection: No .trees or shrubs except those specifically.
indicated, shall be removed or trimmed without prior approval from the
Engineer. All trees and shrubs within the construction limits to be retained
by the Owner shall be properly protected by fencing, posts or other means
approved by the Engineer.. Where any trees or shrubs are damaged or
where limbs are required to be trimmed or removed because of operations
under this Contract a qualified horticulturist shall be consulted and the
trimming performed in the proper manner. Any landscape plantings
severely damaged or which die as a result of the Contractor's operations
shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner.
R. Temporary Sanitary Facilities: The Contractor shall be solely responsible
for furnishing . and maintaining temporary sanitary facilities during the
construction period. Such facilities shall include but not be limited to,
potable water supply and toilet facilities. Such facilities shall be in
compliance with all applicable state and local laws, codes, and ordinances
and shall be placed convenient to work stations and secluded from public
observation. Once the project is completed all- temporary sanitary
facilities shall be removed by the Contractor.
S. Traffic Maintenance:
The Contractor shall provide, erect, and maintain all necessary
barricades, suitable and sufficient warning lights, danger signals,
and signs, shall provide a sufficient number of flagmen to direct the
traffic and shall take all necessary precautions for the protection of
the work and the safety of the public.
2. All barricades and obstructions or hazardous conditions shall be
illuminated as necessary to provide for safe traffic conditions.
3. Warning and caution signs shall be posted throughout the length of
any portion of the project where traffic flow is restricted.
T. Special Provisions: NC Department of Transportation:
1. All Contractors doing work within the Department of Transportation
right of way are to have a copy of the approved encroachment
agreement, plans and -special provisions on the job site.
2. The travelling public shall be warned of the constructionwith
signing that is in accordance with the latest Manual on Uniform
Traffic Control Devices.
3. Contact the appropriate utility company(ies) involved and make
satisfactory arrangements to adjust utilities in conflict with the
proposed work prior to construction..
Rev. 3/19/07 - PROJECT # 07712 01200 - Page 11

4. Materials and workmanship shall conform to .the North Carolina
Department of Transportation's Standards and Specifications
Manual.
5. Strict, compliance with the Policies and Procedures for
Accommodating Utilities on Highway Rights of Way Manual shall
be required.
6. All earth areas disturbed shall be regraded and seeded in
accordance with the North Carolina Department of Transportation
standards and specifications.
7. Complete restoration including reestablishing ditch line, fertilizing,
seeding, mulching, tacking of straw and all areas disturbed during
construction will follow within a maximum of thirty (30) working days
of the initial disturbing activity.
8. All open cuts shall conform to the North .Carolina Department of
Transportation Policies and Procedures for Accommodating
Utilities on Highway Rights of Way Manual (pages 37-39).
9. All roadway signs which are removed due to installation will be
reinstalled on the same day or as soon as possible.
10. The Contractor shall notify the local North Carolina Department of
Transportation office at least 24 hours prior to construction.
3.02 WEATHER DELAYS
A. Extensions of Contract Time for Abnormal Weather:
If the basis exists for an extension of time in accordance with article
12.03 of the Standard General Conditions of the Construction
Contract, an extension of time on the basis of Abnormal Weather
may be granted only for the number of Weather Delay Days in
excess of the number of days listed as the Standard Baseline for
the period of the contract.
2. In the event adverse weather other than those conditions described
in Section C, "Adverse Weather and Rain Delay Days", delays
construction activity, such as temperature extremes. The baseline
must be adjusted to reflect the number of expected days as
described in Section D, "Development of Adverse Weather
Baseline".
3. In order to determine precipitation at the contract site the contractor
shall maintain a rain gauge on site. The rain gauge should be read
daily and documentation of Adverse Weather Days should be
coordinated with the Engineer's Representative.
Rev. 3119/07 PROJECT # 07712 01200 - Page 12

B. Standard Baseline for Average Climactic Range:
1. The Engineer has reviewed weather data available from the
National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA) and
determined a Standard Baseline of average climatic range for the
City of Asheville, North Carolina. In the event that the standard
baseline for the construction site differs significantly from the
Asheville, North Carolina Standard Baseline it will be the
Contractor's responsibility to provide documentation of said
differences.
2. Standard Baseline shall be regarded as the normal and
anticipatable number calendar days for each month during which
construction activity shall be expected to be prevented and
suspended by cause of adverse weather. Suspension of
construction activity for the number of days each month as listed in
the Standard Baseline is included in the Work and is not eligible for
extension of Contract Time.
3. Standard Baseline is as follows:
Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec
8 6 6 7 5 8 7 5 6 3 5 7
C. Adverse Weather and Rain Delay Days:
1. Adverse Weather is defined as the occurrence of one or more of
the following conditions which prevents exterior construction activity
or access to the site within twenty-four (24) hours:
a. Precipitation (rain, snow, and/or ice) in excess of two -tenths
inch (0.20") liquid measure.
b. Standing snow in excess of one inch (1.00").
2. Adverse Weather may include, if appropriate, "dry -out or "mud"
days:
a. For rain days above the standard baseline,
b. Only. if there is a hindrance to site access or site work such
as excavation, backfill, footings; and,
C. At a rate no greater than 1 make-up day for each day or
consecutive days of rain beyond the standard baseline that
total 1.0, inch or more, liquid measure, unless specifically
recommended otherwise by the Engineer.
Rev. 3/19/07 PROJECT # 07712 01200 - Page 13

3. A Weather Delay Day may be counted if adverse weather prevents
work on the project for fifty percent (50%) or more of the
Contractor's scheduled work day, including a weekend day or
holiday if the Contractor has scheduled construction activity for that
day.
D. Development of Adverse Weather Baseline:
1. Development of Adverse Weather Data — This is the process of
collecting, compiling and analyzing the raw weather data (NOAA
and other sources) that forms the baseline for estimating
anticipated delays and project durations and determining the
occurrence of unusually severe weather. The following actions
make up the development process:
a. Analyze the project scope and site geography to determine
which weather parameters (temperature, precipitation, wind,
etc.) are applicable. The parameters selected should
present adverse conditions that could potentially delay
construction activities.
b. Review the technical specifications to determine the
numerical values that will be assigned to each parameter in
order to establish the anticipated adverse weather. Usually
when two or more construction phases are affected by the
same parameter, the less severe numerical value should be
used (i.e. if roofing work is delayed by temperatures below
40 degrees and concrete work is delayed by temperatures
below 32 degrees, then the numerical value used to define
adverse weather should be 40 degrees unless some other
factor renders the roofing phase insignificant in terms of
schedule criticality).
C. Compile the number of days per month that the anticipated
weather is expected to be adverse by analysis of NOAA or
other weather data. When at all possible, the last 10 years
of consecutive data should be used to establish the
baseline. However, in the absence of 10 years of data, a
shorter period may be used. It may be necessary to
extrapolate the number of calendar days that the
temperature is expected to fall below the selected numerical
value (say, 40 degrees) from raw data.
d. Adverse weather data must be periodically updated in order
to reflect changes in the 10-year averages and incorporate
any necessary corrections derived from actual field
experience. It is recommended that data used for
Rev. 3/19107 PROJECT # 07712 01200 - Page 14

establishing
annually.
3.03 PROJECT CLOSE-OUT
adverse weather baselines be reviewed
A. Final Documentation: Prior to final payment, and before the issuance of a
final certificate for payment in accordance with the provisions of the General
Conditions, the Contractor shall file with the Engineer the documents listed
hereinafter:
Guarantees: The Contractor's one (1) year guarantee required by the
General Conditions and all other guarantees stated in the
Specifications.
2. Affidavit and Waiver of Liens: As required by General Conditions.
The Contractor shall utilize the form provided at the end of this
section.
3. Consent of Surety Company to Final Payment.
4. Certified Final Sales Tax Statement (as required)
5. Certified Payroll Records (as required)
6. Proiect Record Documents: Record documents shall be as specified
in Section 01200-1.04.F.
7. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Submit at least three (3) sets
of operation and maintenance manuals for all equipment, electrical
valve actuators, electrical devices, and all other materials or devices
with special operating and maintenance requirements.
B. Submittals: The above records shall be arranged in order, in accordance
with the various sections of the Specifications, and properly indexed. At
the completion of the work, the Contractor shall certify by endorsement
thereof that each of the revised and marked -up prints of the Drawings and
Specifications is complete and accurate.
C. No review or receipt of such records by the Engineer or the Owner shall be
a waiverof any change from the Contract Documents or the shop drawings,
or in any way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to perform the work
as ' required by the Contract Documents, and the shop drawings to the
extent they are in accordance with the Contract Documents.
END OF SECTION
(Recommended Standard Forms follow)
Rev. 3119/07 PROJECT # 07712 01200 - Page 15

UNIT BID ITEM SUMMARY
ITEM
#
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
MEAS.
CONTRACT
BID QUAN.
CONTR.
UNIT BID
TOTAL WORK
LAST APPL.
WORK THIS
APPL.
TOTAL WORK
TO DATE
PAYMENT
EARNED
A
B
C
D
E
F (H FROM LAST
APPL.)
G
H
(F&G)
I
(EXH)
unbidsum.doc

TRANSMITTAL FORM
Shop Drawings Transmittal Date:
() Printed Materials Return Date:
() Other
REFERENCE: FOR: ( ) Transmittal Only
Project
( ) Approval
Owner
( ) Approved as noted
Address
FROM:
( ) Revise & Resubmit
Location
TO
Name
Company
Address
Name
McGill Associates, P.A.
Company
P.O. Box 2259, Asheville, NC 28802
Address
telephone/fax telephone/fax
Project Ref. No.
ransmit.doc
Signature

McGill
ASSOCIATES
ATTENTION: CONSTRUCTION ADMINISTRATIO
SUBMITTAL AND ROUTING FORM
(TO BE USED WITH EACH INDIVIDUAL PLAN SUBMITTAL OR SHOP DRAWING)
SUBMITTAL AND APPROVAL (Contractor to complete)
Project Name:
McGill Project #:
Contractor:
Submittal #:
Contract for:
Specification Section:
Submittal Title:
Sheet/item numbers:
Subcontractor:
Supplier:
Date Transmitted:
Date Needed:
Change from Contract Documents? Yes
No Attached documentation:
Complete Submittal? Yes
No
The Contractor must review and approve this submittal for all requirements and
conformance to Contract documents prior to submittal to McGill Associates. Submittals
forwarded without the Contractor's approval
will be returned without review or comment.
Reviewed by:
Date:
McGILL ASSOCIATES SUBMITTAL ROUTING (McGill to complete)
Date Received: Logged by: To: Return by:
REVIEW CODES: 1 = Approved: 2 = Approved as Noted: 3 = Revise & Resubmit: 4 = Not Approved
Reviewed by
(in order)
Review
Code
COMMENTS
Date
Initials
Project Engineer's approval: Date

CONTRACTOR'S FINAL AFFIDAVIT AND WAIVER OF LIEN
PROJECT:
CONTRACT AMOUNT:
STATE OF:
COUNTY OF:
OWNER:
CONTRACTOR:
CONTRACT DATE:
DATE:
This is to certify that all claims for labor, material, services and any other just claims arising out
of the performance of this Contract have been satisfied, except for payment to subcontractors to
be made out of retainage presently being held by the Owner, and that no claims or liens exist
against this Contractor in connection with this contract; that to the best of our knowledge no
claims or liens exist, and if any such claims or liens appear after payment of the retained amount
due on the Contract, this Contractor shall save the Owner harmless on account thereof. After
payment of the retained amount the undersigned does hereby waive, release and relinquish any
and all claims or rights of lien presently held or hereafter accruing upon the above project.
CONTRACTOR:
TITLE:
Sworn to and subscribed before me this
day of 200
(Notary Public)
My Commission expires:
relolien.doc

APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
'ROJECT: Application No.:
Date Notice Proceed:
Completion Date:
Days Remaining in Contract:
Percent Complete:
ENGINEER: McGill Associates, P.A.
Asheville, North Carolina
CONTRACTOR: Federal ID #
Contractor's Address:
CONTRACT: ORIGINAL CONTRACT AMOUNT $
APPROVED CHANGE ORDER AMOUNT $
REVISED CONTRACT AMOUNT $
SUMMARY: TOTAL WORK COMPLETED TO DATE $
TOTAL MATERIALS STORED ON SITE $
TOTAL EARNED THIS APPLICATION $
LESS % RETAINAGE $
SUBTOTAL $
LESS PREVIOUS PAYMENTS $
CURRENT PAYMENT DUE $
IGNATURES:
CONTRACTOR:
Name Title Date
VERIFICATION:
IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CONTRACT AND THIS APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT, THE
CONTRACTOR HAS COMPLETED THE WORK STATED ABOVE AND IS ENTITLED THE
FULL PAYMENT IN THE AMOUNT SHOWN.
ENGINEER: McGill Associates, P.A.
Name
APPROVAL:
Title
THIS APPLICATION IS HEREBY APPROVED FOR PAYMENT:
OWNER:
flame
Title
Date
Date
AP-1

SECTION 01705
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
MOBILIZATION
A. The work covered by this section consists of preparatory work and
operations, including but not limited to those necessary for the movement
of personnel, equipment, supplies, and incidentals to the project site; for
the establishment of all offices, building, and other facilities necessary for
work on the project; and for all other work and operations which must be
performed or costs incurred prior to beginning work on the various items
on the project site. Included in this item will be the erection of all
construction signs and signals, traffic warning devices, project sign and
other preparatory signs.
PART 2: NOT USED
PART 3: NOT USED
END OF SECTION
Rev. 3/19107 PROJECT # 07712 01705 - Page 1

SECTION 02211
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
CLEARING AND GRUBBING
A. Clearing and grubbing shall consist of the removal and satisfactory
disposal of all trees, brush, stumps, logs, grass, weeds, roots, decayed
vegetable matter, posts, fences, stubs, rubbish and all other objectionable
matter resting on or protruding through the original ground surface and
occurring within the construction limits or right-of-way of any excavation,
borrow area, or embankment.
PART 2: NOT USED
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Clearing and grubbing operations shall be completed sufficiently in
advance of grading operations as may be necessary to prevent any of the
debris from the clearing and grubbing operations from interfering with the
excavation or embankment operations. All work under this section shall
be performed in a manner which will cause minimum soil erosion. The
Contractor shall perform such erosion control work, temporary or
permanent, as may be directed by the Engineer in order to satisfactorily
minimize erosion resulting from clearing and grubbing operations.
1. Clearinq:
a. The work of clearing shall be performed within the limits
established by the plans, specifications, or the Engineer.
b. Clearing shall consist of the felling and cutting up, or the
trimming of trees, and the satisfactory disposalof the trees
and other vegetation together with the down timber, snags,
brush and rubbish occurring within the areas to be cleared.
Trees and other vegetation, except such individual trees,
groups of trees, and vegetation, as may be indicated on the
plans to be left standing, and all stumps, roots and brush in
the areas to be cleared shall be cut off six inches above the
original ground surface.
Rev. 3/19/07 PROJECT # 07712 _ 02211 - Page 1

C. Individual trees and groups of trees designated to be left
standing within cleared areas shall be - trimmed of all
branches to such heights and in such manner as may be
necessary to prevent interference with construction
operations. All limbs and branches required to be trimmed
shall be neatly cut close to the whole of the tree or to main
branches, and the cuts thus made shall be painted with an
approved tree wound paint. Individual trees, groups of trees,
and other vegetation, to be left standing shall be thoroughly
protected from damage incident to construction operations
by the erection of barriers or by such other means as the
circumstances require.
d. The Engineer will designate all areas of growth or individual
trees which are to be preserved due to their desirability for
landscape or erosion control purposes. When the trees to
be preserved are located within the construction limits, they
will be shown on the plans or designated by the Engineer.
e. Clearing operations shall be conducted so as to prevent
damage by falling trees to trees left standing, to existing
structures and installations, and to those under construction,
and so as to provide for the safety of employees and others.
When such damages occur, all damaged areas shall be
repaired, removed or otherwise resolved utilizing generally
accepted practices at the Contractor's expense.
2. Grubbing:
a. Grubbing shall consist of the removal and disposal of all
stumps, roots and matted roots from all cleared areas,
except as herein specified.
b. In embankment areas, when the depth of embankment
exceeds 3'-6" in height sound stumps shall be cut off not
more than 6" above the existing ground level and not
grubbed. Unsound or decayed stumps shall be removed to a
depth of approximately two feet below the natural ground
surface.
C. All depressions excavated below the natural ground surface
for or by the removal of stumps and roots shall be refilled
with suitable material and compacted to make the surface
conform to the surrounding- ground surface.
Rev. 3119/07 PROJECT # 07712 02211 - Page 2

3. Disposal of Cleared and Grubbed Material: Saw logs, pulp wood,
cord wood or other merchantable timber removed incidental to
clearing and grubbing shall remain the property of the Owner. -All
combustible matter shall be deposited at locations approved by the
Engineer. Combustible matter 'may be burned or may be disposed
of as stated above. Debris shall not be burned unless written
permission or permit is issued by " the Fire Marshall having
jurisdiction in the area if applicable. The Contractor shall adhere to
all limitations and conditions set forth in the permit. Burning shall
be done at such time and such manner as to prevent fire from
spreading and to prevent any damage to adjacent cover and shall
further be subject to all requirements of State or Federal
Governments pertaining to the burning. Disposal by burning shall
be. kept under constant attendance until all fires have burned out or
have been extinguished.
END OF SECTION
Rev. 3/19107 PROJECT # 07712 02211 - Page 3

SECTION 02220 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. . General:
1. The work covered by this section shall consist of furnishing all
materials, labor, equipment and services for the excavation and
backfill at all areas within the limits of the project. Work is limited to
the areas of construction, and includes (but is not necessarily
limited to) stockpiling of topsoil, site grading, excavation of footings
and trenches, filling, backfilling, compaction, finish grading,
spreading of topsoil, disposal of waste material, and proof rolling.
2. Perform all excavation, dewatering, sheeting, bracing, and
backfilling in such a manner as to eliminate all possibility of
undermining or disturbing the foundations of existing structures.
3. Requirements of the General and Supplemental Conditions apply
to all work in this section. Provide all labor, materials, equipment,
and services indicated on the drawings, or specified herein, or
reasonably necessary for or incidental to a complete job.
4. Excavations shall provide adequate working space and clearances
for the work to be performed therein and for installation and
removal of concrete forms. In no case shall excavation faces be
undercut for extended footings.
5. Subgrade surfaces shall be clean and free of loose material of any
kind when concrete is placed thereon.
6. Backfilling during freezing weather shall not be done except by
permission of the Engineer. No backfill, fill, or embankment
materials shall be installed on frozen surfaces, nor shall frozen
materials, snow, or ice be placed in any backfill, fill, or
embankment.
Rev. 3/19/07 PROJECT # 07712 02220 - Page 1

1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Excavation, General: Excavation consists of the removal and disposal of
all materials encountered for footings, foundations, pipework, and other
construction as shown on the drawings. Perform all excavation work in
compliance with applicable requirements of governing authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards: Unless. otherwise indicated, -all referenced
standards shall be the latest edition available at the time of bidding. Any
requirements of these specifications shall in no way invalidate the
minimum requirements of the referenced standards. Comply with the
provisions of the following codes and standards, except as otherwise
shown or specified.
1. ASTM C33: Standard Specifications for Concrete Aggregate
2. ASTM D698: Standard Test Methods for Moisture -Density
Relations of Soils and Soil -Aggregate Mixtures Using 5.5 lb.
Rammer and 12" Drop.
3. ASTM D3282: Standard Recommended Practice for Classification
of Soils and Soil -Aggregate Mixtures for Highway Construction
Purposes.
4. Standard Specifications for Roads and Structures, North Carolina
Department of Transportation, January 1, 2002 edition.
5. Erosion and Sediment Control Planning and Design Manual.
B. Unauthorized Excavation: Except where otherwise authorized, indicated,
or specified, all materials excavated below the bottom of concrete walls,.
footings, slabs on grade, and foundations shall be replaced, by and at the
expense of the Contractor, with concrete placed at the same time and
monolithic with the concrete above.
C. Existinq Utilities:
1. Locate existing underground utilities in the area of work. If utilities
are to remain in place, provide adequate means of protection
during earthwork operations.
2. Should uncharted or incorrectly charted piping or other utilities be
encountered during excavation, consult the Engineer immediately
Rev. 3119107 PROJECT # 07712 02220 - Page 2

for directions as to procedure. Cooperate with Owner and utility
companies in keeping respective services and facilities in
operation. Repair damaged utilities to the satisfaction of utility
companies.
1.04 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Site Information: No test borings or related subsurface information is
available for the project area. Test borings and other' exploratory
operations may be undertaken by the Contractor at his own expense
provided such operations are acceptable to the Owner.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Classification of Excavated Materials: Classification of excavated
materials will be made as follows:
1. All materials excavated for this project, regardless of its nature or
composition shall be classified as Unclassified Excavation, and
shall be part of the lump sum price. No separate payment will be
made for the excavation of rock or any unsuitable materials.
B. Classification of Other Materials:
1. Satisfactory Subgrade Soil Materials: Soils complying with ASTM D
3282, soil classification Groups A -I, A-2-4, A-2-5, and A-3.
2. Unsatisfactory Subgrade Soil Materials: Soils described in ASTM D
3282, soil classification groups A-2-6, A-2-7, A-4, A-5, A-6, and
A-7; also peat and other highly organic soils, unless otherwise
acceptable to the Engineer.
3. Cohesionless Soil Materials: Gravels, sand -gravel mixtures, sands,
and gravelly -sands.
4. Cohesive Soil Materials: Clayey and silty gravels, sand -clay
mixtures, gravel -silt mixtures, clayey and silty sands, sand -silt
mixtures, clays, silts, and very fine sands.
5. Backfill and Fill Materials: Provide satisfactory soil materials for
backfill and fill, free of masonry, rock, or gravel larger than 4" in any
dimension, and free of metal, gypsum, lime, debris, waste, frozen
materials, vegetable, and other deleterious matter. Use only
excavated material that has been sampled, tested, and certified as
satisfactory soil material.
Rev. 3/19/07 PROJECT # 07712 02220 - Page 3

6. Select Backfill: Select backfill is defined as backfill and fill material
that is transported to the site from outside the project limits, and
which meets the soil requirements specified above under "Backfill
and Fill Materials." Material excavated in conjunction with the
construction of this project cannot be considered as "select backfill"
for payment purposes.
7. Pipe Bedding_ Crushed stone or crushed gravel meeting the
requirements of ASTM C 33, Gradation 67.
8. Inundated Sand: Sand for inundated sand backfill shall be clean
with not more than 25% retained on a No. 4 sieve and not more
than 7% passing a No. 200 sieve and shall have an effective size
between 0.10 mm and 0.30 mm. Sand shall be deposited in, or
placed simultaneously with application of, water so that the sand
shall be compacted by a mechanical probe type vibrator.
Inundated sand shall be compacted to 70% relative density as
determined by ASTM D4253 and D4254.
9. Graded Gravel: Gravel for compacted backfill shall conform to the
following gradation:
See Size
Percent `Prism b UVea' ht V.1"
100
3/4"
85 - 100
3/8"
50 - 80
No. 4
35 - 60
No. 40
15 - 30
No. 200
05 -. 10
The gravel mixture shall contain no clay lumps or organic matters.
The fraction passing the No. 4 sieve shall have a liquid limit not
greater than 25 and a plasticity index not greater than 5. Gravel
backfill shall be deposited in uniform layers_ not exceeding 12" in
uncompacted thickness. The backfill shall be compacted by a
suitable vibratory roller or platform vibrator to not less than 70%
relative density as determined by ASTM D4253 and D4254.
2.01 EQUIPMENT
A. Mechanical Excavation:
1. The use of mechanical equipment will not be permitted in locations
where its operation would cause damage to trees, buildings,
culverts, or other existing property, utilities, or structures above or
Rev. 3119/07 PROJECT # 07712 02220 - Page 4

below ground. In all such locations, hand excavating methods shall
be used.
2. Mechanical equipment used for trench excavation shall be of a
type, design, and construction and shall be controlled, that uniform
trench widths and vertical sidewalls are obtained at least from an
elevation one foot above the top of the installed pipe to the bottom
of the trench, and that trench alignment is such that pipe when
accurately laid to specified alignment will be centered in the trench
with adequate clearance between the pipe and sidewalls of the
trench. Undercutting the trench sidewall to obtain clearance will not
be permitted.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Dewatering:
1. The Contractor shall provide and maintain adequate dewatering
equipment to remove and dispose of all surface water and
groundwater entering excavations, trenches, or other parts of the
work. Each excavation shall be kept dry during subgrade
preparation and continually thereafter until the structure to be built,
or the pipe to be installed therein, is completed to the extent that no
damage from hydrostatic pressure, flotation, or other cause will
result.
2. All excavations for concrete structures or trenches that extend
down to or below groundwater shall be dewatered by lowering and
keeping the groundwater level beneath such excavations 12" or
more below the bottom of the excavation.
3. Surface water shall be diverted or otherwise prevented from
entering excavated areas or trenches without causing damage to
adjacent property.
4. The Contractor is responsible for obtaining any required permits or
permissions necessary for the disposal of groundwater that is
removed. Any discharged groundwater shall be clean and free of
sediment.
5. The Contractor shall be responsible for the condition of any pipe or
conduit which he may use for drainage purposes, and all such
pipes or conduits which he may use for drainage_purposes, and all
such pipes or conduits shall be left clean and free of sediment.
Rev. 3119107 PROJECT # 07712 02220 - Page 5

6. Where trench sheeting is left in place, such sheeting shall not be
braced against the pipe, but shall be supported in a manner which
will preclude concentrated loads or horizontal thrusts on the pipe.
Cross braces installed above the pipe to support sheeting may be
removed after pipe embedment has been completed.
B. Stabilization:
1. Subgrades for concrete structures and trench bottoms shall be firm,
dense, and thoroughly compacted and consolidated; free from mud
and muck; and sufficiently stable to remain firm and intact under
the feet of the workmen.
2. Subgrades for concrete structures or trench bottoms, which are
otherwise solid but which become mucky on top due to
construction operations, shall be reinforced with one or more layers
of crushed rock or gravel. The stabilizing material shall be spread
and compacted to a depth of not less than 6" below the bottom of
the structure or pipe. Not more than 1/2" depth of mud or muck
shall be allowed to remain on stabilized trench bottoms when the
pipe bedding material is placed thereon. The finished elevation of
stabilized subgrades for concrete structures shall not be above
subgrade elevations indicated on the drawings.
C. Cutting Concrete or Asphalt Surface Construction:
1. All pavement cutting and repair shall be done in accordance with
local ordinances. Cuts in concrete and asphaltic concrete shall be
no larger than necessary to provide adequate working space for
proper installation of pipe and appurtenances. Cutting shall be
performed with a concrete saw in a manner which will provide a
clean groove the complete thickness of the surface material along
each side of the trench -and along the perimeter of cuts for
structures.
2. Concrete and asphaltic concrete over trenches excavated for
pipelines shall -be removed so that a shoulder -not less than 12" in
width at any point is left between the cut edge of the surface and
the top edge of the trench. Trench width at the bottom shall not be
greater than at the top and no undercutting will be permitted. Cuts
shall be made to and between straight or accurately marked curved
lines which, unless otherwise required, shall be parallel to the
center line of the trench.
Rev. 3/19/07 PROJECT # 07712 02220 - Page 6

3. Pavement or other surfaces removed for connections to existing
lines or structures shall not be of greater extent that necessary for
the installation..
4. Where the trench parallels the length of concrete walks and the
trench location is all or partially under the walk, the entire walk shall
be removed and replaced. Where the trench crosses drives, walks,
curbs, or other surface construction, the surface construction shall
be removed and replaced between existing joints or between saw
cuts as specified for payment.
D. Site Grade:
1. General: Uniformly grade areas within limits of grading under this
section, including adjacent transition areas. Smooth finish the
surface within specified tolerances; compact with uniform levels or
slopes between points where elevations are shown, or between
such points and existing grades.
2. Ground Surface Preparation: Remove vegetation, debris,
unsatisfactory. soil materials, obstructions, and deleterious
materials from ground surface prior to placement of fills. Plow,
strip, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4
horizontal so that fill material will bond with existing surface. Shape
the subgrade as indicated on the drawings by forking, furrowing, or
plowing so that the first layer of new material placed thereon will be
well bonded to it.
3.02 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Alignment, Grade, and Minimum Cover:
Vertical and horizontal alignment of pipes, and the maximum joint
deflection used in connection therewith, shall be in conformity with
requirements of the section covering installation of pipe.
2. Where pipe grades or elevations are not definitely fixed by the
contract drawings, trenches shall be excavated to a depth sufficient
to provide a minimum depth of backfill cover over the top of the
pipe cover depths may be necessary on vertical curves or to
provide necessary clearance beneath existing pipes, conduits,
drains, drainage structures, or other obstructions encountered at
normal pipe grades. Measurement of pipe cover depth shall be
made vertically from the outside top of pipe to finished ground or
pavement surface elevation except where future surface elevations
are indicated on the drawings.
Rev. 3119107 PROJECT # 07712 02220 - Page 7

B Limiting Trench Widths: Trenches shall be excavated to a width that will
provide adequate working space and sidewall clearances for proper pipe
installation, jointing, and embedment. For the purposes of quantity
measurements and payments, maximum trench widths shall be no greater
than the pipe outside diameter plus 24" (12" either side of pipe).
3.03 PROTECTION
A. Temporary Protection: Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements,
and other facilities from damages caused by settlement, lateral
movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by
earthwork operations.
B. Sheetinq and Bracing: Make all excavations in accordance with Federal,
State; and Local health and safety rules and regulations, including those
promulgated by the Department of Labor, Occupation Safety and Health
Administration, "Safety and Health Regulations for Construction".
Furnish, put in place, and maintain such sheeting, bracing, etc., as may
be necessary to support the sides of the excavation to comply with the
above mentioned rules and regulations.
C. Blastinq:
1. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damage caused by
blasting operations. Suitable methods shall be employed to confine
all materials lifted by blasting within the limits of the excavation or
trench.
2. All rock which cannot be handled and compacted as earth shall be
kept separate from other excavated materials and shall not be
mixed with backfill or embankment materials except as specified or
directed.
D. Care and Restoration of Property::
1. Enclose the trunks of trees which are to remain adjacent to the
work with substantial wooden boxes of such height as may be
necessary to protect them from piled material, equipment or
equipment operation. Use excavating machinery and cranes of
suitable type and operate the equipment with care to prevent injury
to remaining tree trunks, roots, branches and limbs.
2. Do not cut branches, limbs, and roots except by permission of the
Engineer. Cut smoothly and neatly without splitting or crushing. In
case of cutting or unavoidable injury to branches, limbs, and trunks
Rev. 3119/07 PROJECT # 07712 02220 -.Page 8

of trees, neatly trim the cut or injured portions and cover with an
application of grafting wax and tree healing paint as directed.
3. Protect by suitable means all cultivated hedges, shrubs and plants
that might be injured by the Contractor's operations. Promptly heel
in any such trees or shrubbery necessary to be removed and
replanted. Perform heeling in and replanting under the direction of
a licensed and experienced nurseryman. Replant in their original
position all removed shrubbery and trees after construction
operations have been substantially completed and care for until
growth is reestablished.
4. Replace cultivated hedges, shrubs, and plants injured to such a
degree as to affect .their growth or diminish their beauty or
usefulness, by items of kind and quality at least equal to the kind
and quality existing at the start of the work.
5. Do not operate tractors, bulldozers or other power -operated
equipment on paved surfaces if the treads or wheels of the
equipment are so shaped as to cut or otherwise injure the surfaces.
6. Restore all surfaces, including lawns, grassed, and planted areas
that have been injured by the Contractor's operations, to a
condition at least equal to that in which they were found
immediately before the work was begun. Use suitable materials
and methods for such restoration. Maintain all restored plantings
by cutting, trimming, fertilizing, etc., until acceptance. Restore
existing property or structures as promptly as practicable and do
not leave until the end of construction period.
E. Protection of Streams: Exercise reasonable precaution to prevent the
silting of streams. Provide at Contractor's expense temporary erosion and
sediment control measures to prevent the silting of streams and existing
drainage facilities. The Contractor shall size structures and conform fully
with the North Carolina Sedimentation Pollution Control Act.
F. Air Pollution:
1. Comply with all pollution control rules, regulations, ordinances, and
statutes which apply to any work performed under the Contract,
including any air pollution control rules, regulations, ordinances and
statutes, or any municipal regulations pertaining to air pollution.
2. During the progress of the work, maintain the area of activity,
including sweeping and sprinkling of streets as necessary, so as to
minimize the creation and dispersion of dust. If the Engineer
Rev. 3119107 PROJECT # 07712 02220 - Page 9

decides that it is necessary to use calcium chloride or more
effective dust control, furnish and spread the material, as directed,
and without additional compensation.
3.04 TRENCH EXCAVATION
A. Lenqth of Trench:
1. No more trenches shall be opened in advance of pipe laying than is
necessary to expedite the work. One block or 400 feet (whichever
is the shorter) shall be the maximum length of open trench on any
line under construction.
2. Except where tunneling is indicated on the drawings, is specified,
or is permitted by the Engineer, all trench excavation shall be open
cut from the surface.
B. Trench Excavation:
General: Perform all excavation of every description and. of
whatever substance encountered so that the pipe can be laid to the
alignment and depth shown on the drawings.
2. Brace and shore all trenches, where required, in accordance with
Federal, State, and Local health and safety rules and regulations,
including those promulgated by the Department of Labor,
Occupation Safety and Health Administration, "Safety and Health
Regulations for Construction".
3. Make all excavations by open cut unless otherwise specified or
indicated on the drawings.
4. Width of Trenches: Excavate trenches sufficiently wide to allow
proper installation of pipe, fittings and other materials.
Measurement and payment quantities will be.based on a maximum
trench width of not more than 12" clear of pipe on either side at any
point. Do not widen trenches by scraping or loosening materials
from the sides.
5. Trench Excavation in Earth: Earth excavation includes all
excavation of whatever substance encountered. In locations where
pipe is to be bedded in earth excavated trenches, fine grade the
bottoms of such trenches to allow firm bearing for the bottom of the
pipe on undisturbed earth. Where any part of the trench has been
excavated below the grade of the pipe, fill the part excavated below
Rev. 3119107 PROJECT # 07712 02220 - Page 10

such grade with pipe bedding material and compact at the
Contractor's expense.
6. Trench Excavation in Fill: If pipe is to be laid in embankments or
other recently .filled material, first place the fill material to the finish
grade or to a height of at least one foot above the top of the pipe,
whichever is the lesser. Take particular care to ensure maximum
consolidation of material under the pipe location. Excavate the
pipe trench as though in undisturbed material.
7. Trench Bottom in Poor Soil: Excavate and remove unstable or
unsuitable soil to a width and depth, as directed by the Engineer,
and refill with a thoroughly compacted gravel bedding.
8. Bell Holes: Provide bell holes at each joint to permit the joint to be
made properly and to provide a continuous bearing and support for
the pipe.
C. Trench Backfill: '
General: Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the drawings,
use suitable material for backfill which was removed in the course
of making the construction excavations. Do not use frozen material
for the backfill and do not place backfill on frozen material.
Remove previously frozen material before new backfill is placed.
Start backfilling as soon as practicable after the pipes have been
laid, or the structures have been built and are structurally adequate
to support the loads, including construction loads to which they will
be subjected, and proceed until its completion.
2. With the exception mentioned below in this paragraph, do not
backfill trenches at pipe joints until after that section of the pipeline
has successfully passed any specified tests required. Should the
Contractor wish to minimize the maintenance of lights, and
barricades, and the obstruction of traffic, he may, at his own risk,
backfill the entire trench as soon as practicable after installation of
pipe, and the related structures have acquired a suitable degree of
strength. He shall, however, be responsible for removing and later
replacing such backfill, at his own expense, should he be ordered
to do so in order to locate and repair or replace leaking or defective
joints or pipe.
3. Material: The nature of the materials will govern both their
acceptability for backfill and the methods best suited for their
placement and compaction in the backfill. Both are subject to the
approval of the Engineer. Do not place stone or rock fragments
Rev. 3119/07 PROJECT # 07712 02220 - Page 11

larger than 4" in greatest dimension in the backfill. Do not drop
large masses of backfill material into the trench in such a manner
as to endanger the pipeline. Use a timber grillage to break the fall'
of material dropped from a height of more than 5 feet. Exclude
pieces of bituminous pavement from the backfill unless their use is
expressly permitted.
4. Zone Around Pipe: Place bedding material to the level shown on
the Drawings and work material carefully around the pipe to insure
that all voids are filled, particularly in bell holes. For backfill up to a
level of 2 feet over the top of the pipe, use only selected materials.
containing no rock, clods or organic materials. Place the backfill
and compact thoroughly under the pipe haunches and up to the
mid -line of the pipe in layers not exceeding 6" in depth. Place each
layer and tamp carefully and uniformly so as to eliminate the
possibility of lateral displacement. Place and compact the
remainder of the zone around the pipe and to a height of one foot
above the pipe in layers not exceeding 6" and compact to a
maximum density of at least 100 % as determined by ASTM
D0698.
5. Tamping: Deposit and spread backfill materials in uniform, parallel
layers not exceeding 12" thick before compaction. Tamp each
layer before the next layer is placed to obtain a thoroughly
compacted mass. Furnish and use, if necessary, an adequate
number of power driven tampers, each weighing at least 20 pounds
for this purpose. Take care that the material close to the bank, as
well as in all other portions of the trench, is thoroughly compacted.
When the trench width and the depth to which backfill has been
placed are sufficient to make it feasible, and it can be done
effectively and without damage to the pipe, backfill may, on
approval of the Engineer, be compacted by the use of suitable
rollers, tractors,. or similarly powered equipment instead of by
tamping. For compaction by tamping (or rolling), the rate at which
backfilling material is deposited in the trench shall not' exceed that
permitted by the facilities for its spreading, leveling and compacting
as furnished by the Contractor.
6. Wet the material by sprinkling, if necessary, to insure proper
compaction by tamping (or rolling). Perform no compaction by
tamping (or rolling) when the material is too wet either from rain or
applied water to be compacted properly.
7. Trench Compaction: Compact backfill in .pipe trenches to the
maximum density as shown on the drawings, or as listed in the
subsection entitled COMPACTION, with a moisture content within
Rev. 3119/07 PROJECT # 07712 02220 - Page 12

the range of values of maximum density as indicated by the
moisture=density relationship curve.
3.05 SITE GRADE
A. Placement and Compaction: -
Place backfill and fill material in layers not more than 8" in loose
depth. Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as
necessary to provide the optimum moisture content. Compact
each layer to the required percentage of maximum density for each
area classification. Do' not place backfill or material on surfaces
that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice.
2. In areas not accessible to rollers or compactors, compact the fill
with mechanical hand tampers. If the mixture is excessively
moistened by rain, aerate the material by means of blade graders,
harrows, or other approved equipment, until the moisture content of
the mixture is satisfactory. Finish the surface of the layer by
blading or rolling with a smooth roller, or a combination thereof, and
leave the surface smooth and free from waves and inequalities.
3. Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures, to the
' required elevations. Take care to prevent wedging action of backfill
against structures. Carry the material uniformly around all parts of
the structure to approximately the same elevation in each lift.
4. When existing ground surface has a density less than that
specified under the subsection entitled COMPACTION for the
particular area classification, break up the ground surface,
pulverize, moisture -condition to the optimum moisture content, and
compact to required depth and percentage of maximum density.
B. Gradinq Outside Building Lines: Grade to drain away from structures to
prevent ponding of water. Finish surface free from irregular surface
changes.
C. Plantinq Areas: Finish areas to receive topsoil to within not more than one
inch (1 ") above or below the required subgrade elevations, compacted as
specified, and free from irregular surface changes.
D. Walks: Shape the surface of areas under walks to - line, grade, and
cross-section, with the finish surface not more than 0" above or 1" below
the required subgrade elevation; compacted as specified, and graded to
prevent ponding of water after rains. '
Rev. 3119/07 PROJECT # 07712 02220 - Page 13

E. Pavements:
1. Shape the surface of the areas under pavement to line, grade and
cross section, with finish surface not more than 1/2" above or below
the required subgrade elevation, compacted as specified, and
graded to prevent ponding of water after rains. Include such
operations as plowing, discing, and any moisture or aerating
required to provide the optimum moisture content for compaction.
2. Fill low areas resulting from removal of unsatisfactory soil
materials, obstructions, and other deleterious materials, using
satisfactory soil material.
3. Shape to line, grade, and cross section as shown on the drawings.
F. Protection of Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic and
erosion, and keep free of trash and debris. Repair and re-establish
grades in settled, eroded, and rutted areas to specified tolerances.
G. Reconditioning Compacted Areas: Where completed compacted areas
are disturbed by subsequent construction operations or adverse weather
prior to acceptance of work, scarify surface, reshape, and compact to
required density prior to further construction.
H. Unauthorized Excavation:
1. Unauthorized excavation consists of the removal of materials
beyond indicated elevations without the specific direction of the
Engineer. Under footings, foundations, bases, etc., fill
unauthorized excavation by extending the indicated bottom
elevation of the concrete to the bottom of the excavation, without
altering the required top elevation. Lean concrete fill may be used
to bring elevations to proper position only when acceptable to the
Engineer.
2. For pipe trenches and elsewhere, backfill and compact
unauthorized excavations as specified for authorized excavations
of the same classification, unless otherwise directed by the
Engineer.
3.06 BACKFILL AROUND STRUCTURES
A. General: Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the drawings, use
suitable material for backfill which was removed in the course of making
the backfill and do not place backfill which was removed in the course of
making the construction excavations. Do not use frozen material for the
Rev. 3/19/07 PROJECT # 07712 02220 - Page 14

backfill and do not place backfill upon frozen material. Remove previously
frozen material before new backfill is placed.
B. Material: Approved selected materials available from the excavations may
be used for backfilling around structures. Obtain material needed in
addition to that of construction excavations from off -site borrow pits
selected by the Contractor. Furnish all borrow material needed on the
work. Place and compact all material, whether from the excavation or
borrow, to make a dense, stable fill. Use fill material which contains no
vegetation, masses of roots, individual roots over 18" long or more than
1/2" in diameter, stones over 4" in diameter, or porous matter. Organic
matter must not exceed negligible quantities.
C. Placing Backfill: Do not place backfill against or on structures until they
have attained sufficient strength to support the loads (including
construction loads) to which they will be subjected, without distortion,
cracking, or other damage. Make special leakage tests, if required, as
soon as practicable after the structures are structurally adequate and
other necessary work has been done. Use the best of the excavated
materials in backfilling within 2 feet of the structure. Avoid unequal soil
pressures by depositing the material evenly around the structure.
3.07 COMPACTION
A. General: Control soil compaction during construction providing at least the
minimum percentage of density specified for each area classification.
B. Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: After compaction, all fill
will be tested in accordance with Method "C" of ASTM D-698, unless
specified otherwise. Except as noted otherwise for the zone around pipe,
provide not less than the following. percentages of maximum density of
soil material compacted at optimum moisture content, for the actual
density of each layer of soil material -in -place:
UNPAVED AREAS
Compact Full Depth to 92%
DRIVES AND PARKING
Top 24" - 100%
TRENCH BACKFILL PAVED AREAS
Compact full depth to 100%
TRENCH BACKFILL (UNPAVED AREAS)
Compact full depth to 95%
ALL OTHER BACKFILL
I Compact full depth to 95%
C. Moisture Control: Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be
moisture conditioned before compaction, uniformly apply water to surface
of subgrade, or layer of soil material, to prevent free water appearing on
surface during or subsequent to compaction operations. Remove and
replace, or scarify and air dry, soil material that is too wet to permit
compaction to specified density. Soil material that has been removed
Rev. 3/19/07 PROJECT # 07712 02220 - Page 15

because it is too wet to permit compaction may be stockpiled or spread
and allowed to dry. Assist drying by discing, harrowing or pulverizing, until
moisture content is reduced to a satisfactory value, as determined by
moisture -density relation tests.
D. Disposal of Surface Material: Upon. approval of the Engineer, haul all
surplus materials not needed or acceptable for backfill off -site.
3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Soil Testing and Inspection Service: Compaction tests of all fill areas will
be made by an independent testing laboratory. Such tests will be
provided and paid for by . the Owner, except that tests that reveal non-
conformance with the specifications and all succeeding tests for the same
area shall be at the expense of the Contractor until conformance with the
specifications is established. The Owner will be responsible for paying for
only the successful tests.
END OF SECTION
Rev. 3/19107 PROJECT # 07712 02220 - Page 16

SECTION 03301 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION
PART -1: GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This section covers concrete
reinforcement therefore.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
construction, complete, including
A. Reinforcing: Bar reinforcement shall be intermediate grade new billet. steel
conforming to the requirements of ASTM A-615. Unless otherwise noted,
all reinforcing bars shall be grade 60. Wire fabric reinforcement shall
consist of steel wire conforming to the requirements of ASTM A-185,
latest revision.
B. Concrete: All concrete shall be equivalent to ready mix concrete
manufactured and delivered in accordance with the requirements of
ASTM C-94, latest revision and having a compressive strength at 28 days
10 of 4000 psi, except as noted herein. The concrete manufacturer shall
assume the responsibility of the design of the concrete mix in accordance
with Alternate No. 2 of ASTM C-94. Air entrained concrete shall be used
for all concrete exposed to the elements.
a. Cement shall be Type 1 or Type 1A "Portland" cement conforming
to ASTM C-150, latest revision or ASTM C-175, latest revision
respectively.
b.. Aggregates shall conform to ASTM C-33, latest revision. Coarse
aggregate shall be crushed rock or gravel and graded from 3/4" to
#4 sieve for walls and slabs and from 2" to #4 sieve for mass or
foundation concrete. Fine aggregate shall be natural sand.
C. Mixing water shall be proportioned so that slump when measured
with standard slump cone does not exceed the following:
i. Slabs in grade.........................................Max. 4", Min. 3"
ii. Footings ..................................................Max. 5", Min. 3"
iii. All others.................................................Max. 6", Min. 3"
Rev. 3119/07 PROJECT # 07712 03301 - Page 1

d. Premolded joint filler strips shall be resilient compressive,
bituminous and fiber material saturated, with at least 35% and not
over 50% by weight of asphalt. Poured type joint composition for
expansion joints shall be elastic compound made up of asphalt and
colloidal mineral fillers.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 FORMS
A. Forms shall be wood, metal, structural hardboard or other suitable
material that will produce the required surface finish. Forms placed for
successive pours for continuous surfaces shall be fitted to accurate
alignment to assure a smooth completed surface free from irregularities,
and shall be sufficiently tight to prevent the loss of mortar. No forms shall
be left permanently in place without approval of the Engineer. Holes
resulting from removal of form ties shall be filled solid within 12 hours after
removal of forms with cement mortar. -
3.02 PLACEMENT
A. Concrete shall be placed as nearly as possible in its final position.
Runways for wheeled equipment shall not be supported on the
reinforcement. Concrete shall be placed and compacted in layers not
over 18 inches deep. Vibrators may be used provided they are used
under experienced supervision and the mixture is dry enough to prevent
segregation. Form vibrators shall not be used. Vibration shall not be
used for transporting or moving concrete inside the forms. No more
concrete shall be placed than can be consolidated and finished the same
day as placed. Free fall of concrete shall be limited so that no
segregation of materials occurs.
3.03- JOINTS
A. Construction of joints not indicated on drawing shall be approved by the
Engineer in advance of pour. Joints in foundation walls shall be keyed.
Before depositing of concrete is resumed, the hardened surface shall be
roughened, cleaned and wetted surfaces shall be slushed with a coating
of neat cement grout against which the new concrete shall be placed
before the new grout has attained its set.
3.03 FINISHING
A. After stripping forms, all voids and honeycombs shall be patched by
chipping and scarifying the defective area and treating it with an approved
bonding tended that all such voids be patched, not merely plastered.
Rev. 3/19/07 PROJECT # 07712 03301 - Page 2

10
Grout mixture shall consist of one part Portland cement and one part
sand. Immediately following removal of forms, all fins and irregular
projections shall be removed from all surfaces except from those which
are not to be exposed or waterproofed.
B. Slabs shall be struck off and consolidated by approved machine or hand
methods, so that upon completion, the surface shall be true to grade as
shown on drawings and free of surface voids. All floors shall have
monolithic steel trowel finish unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.
Exterior walks shall be compacted, screeded and floated to a true even
surface with wood floats and then broomed.
END OF SECTION
Rev. 3119/07 PROJECT # 07712 03301 - Page 3

SECTION 03330 PRECAST CONCRETE TANKS
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
The work to be accomplished under this section shall include all of the labor,
equipment, materials, etc. necessary to install a precast pump tank system as
shown on the drawings and specified herein.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review and approval detailed
drawings of the pump tank unit with appropriate certificate of approval from the
State of North Carolina.
1.03 WARRANTY
The manufacturers shall warrant all components of the system to be free from
defects in workmanship and materials for a period of one (1) year after being put
into operation.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. STORAGE TANKS
1. Storage tanks installed under this contract shall be constructed of
precast concrete and shall be watertight, structurally sound and not
subject to excessive corrosion or decay. Storage tanks shall meet
HS-20 traffic load rating.
2. Pipe penetrations of the tank must be through flexible watertight
seals conforming to ASTM C-923 or approved equal.
B. SEPTIC TANKS
1. Septic tanks installed under this contract shall be constructed of
precast concrete and shall be watertight, structurally sound and not
subject to excessive corrosion or decay. Septic tanks shall meet
HS-20 traffic load rating. Tanks shall be of the two compartment
design in conformance, with the minimum standards for
Rev. 4/20/07 PROJECT # 07712 03330 - Page 1

prefabricated septic tanks set forth in North Carolina Administrative
Code Title 15A Chapter-18 Subchapter 18A, Section .1954.
2. Pipe penetrations of the tank must be through flexible watertight
seals conforming to ASTM C-923 or approved equal.
C. MANHOLES
Precast concrete manhole bases and risers used for constructing a
pump tank shall conform to ASTM C 478, latest revision of Precast
Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections. A flat slab top will be
required for the top of the pump tank. A frame which will
accommodate an aluminum access hatch shall be cast into.slab
tops for access into the pump tank. The dimensions of the hatch
shall comply with the drawings.
2. Minimum compressive strength of concrete shall be 4,000 psi and
the maximum permissible absorption shall be 6.5%. Risers shall
be reinforced with a single cage of steel placed within the center
third of the wall. The tongue or the groove of the joint shall contain
one (1) line of circumferential reinforcement equal in area to that in
the barrel of the manhole riser. The minimum cross -sectional area
of steel per linear foot shall be 0.12 square inches for larger sizes.
Precast manhole section shall fit together readily and shall have a
self-contained "O" ring rubber gasket conforming to ASTM C-443.
3. The quality of materials, the process of manufacture, and the
finished manhole sections shall be subject to inspection and
approval by the Engineer and his inspector. The manhole sections
shall be perpendicular to their longitudinal axis within the limits
listed in ASTM C 478.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 QUALITY CONTROL
All concrete structures which will retain water or wastewater under normal
operating conditions shall be filled with water prior to backfilling and final
exterior painting and tested for leaks. Unless otherwise specified by the
Engineer, the tank shall remain filled with water for a period of seven (7)
days. Any leaks, damp spots, or other defects found shall be repaired
and made water tight to the satisfaction 'of the Engineer. The first 48
hours of the test are utilized to allow the concrete to absorb water. After
the first 48 hours of the test, the water level shall be noted and monitored
for the remaining five (5) days. A reduction in water greater than 0.1 % per
Rev. 4/20/07 PROJECT # 07712 03330 - Page 2

24 hours shall be considered excessive and shall constitute failure of the
leak test. (NOTE: Rainfall and evaporation must be considered during
calculation of water loss. Rainfall shall be added to and evaporation shall
be deducted from the measured loss to determine net liquid loss.)
END OF SECTION
Rev. 4/20107 PROJECT # 07712
03330 -Page 3

SECTION 06192 . PREFABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install prefabricated metal -plate -
connected wood trusses at the locations shown on the drawings and as
specified herein.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standards: Comply with N.F.P.A. "National Design Specification for Wood
Construction" and with TPI standards including "Quality Standard for
Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses," "Commentary and
Recommendations for Handling and Erecting Wood Trusses,"
"Commentary and Recommendations for Bracing Wood Trusses," and the
following:
"Design Specification for Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses."
B. Single -Source Engineering Responsibility: Provide trusses engineered by
the metal plate connector manufacturer to support superimposed dead
and live loads indicated, with design approved and certified by a
professional engineer legally authorized to practice in North Carolina.
C. Fabricator's Qualifications: A firm that participates in a recognized quality
assurance program that involves inspection by SPIB; Timber Products
Inspection, Inc.; Truss Plate Institute; or other independent inspection and
testing agency acceptable to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Current Evaluation/Research Reports: Provide products for which model
code evaluation/research reports exist that are acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction and that evidence compliance of metal framing anchors
for application indicated with the building code in effect for this Project.
E. Allowable Design Loads: As published by manufacturer and determined
from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and verified
through comprehensive testing by a qualified independent testing
laboratory.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Eight (8) copies of shop drawings for the. material being furnished under
this specification shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval and shall
Rev. 3119107 PROJECT # 07712 06192 - Page 1

include at least the following information:
1. Shop drawings showing sizes, design values, materials, and
dimensional relationships of components as well as bearing and
anchorage details.
2. Provide shop drawings that have been signed and stamped by a
professional engineer legally authorized to practice in North
Carolina.
3. Design calculations for truss from metal plate connector
manufacturer.
4. Product certificate, signed by officer of fabricating firm, certifying
that metal -plate -connected wood trusses supplied for Project
comply with specified requirements.
5. Research reports or evaluation reports of the model code
organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction evidencing
compliance of fire -retardant -treated wood with specified
requirements and building code in effect for Project.
1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Handle and store trusses with care and comply with TPI
recommendations to avoid damage from bending, overturning or other
cause. Trusses shall be protected during storage so that no damage or
deterioration will occur during shipment or storage.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. The manufacturer shall warrant all materials to be free from defects in
material and workmanship for a period of one (1) year.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Lumber: Provide dressed lumber S4S, grade marked, complying with PS
20 and requirements indicated.
1. Moisture Content: Seasoned, with 19 percent maximum moisture
content at time of dressing and shipment.
2. Grade for Chord Members: "No. 2." (minimum)
Rev. 3/19/07 PROJECT # 07712 06192 - Page 2

3. Grade for Web Members: "No. 3" (minimum)
4. Species: Southern Pine graded under SPIB rules.
B. Metal Connector Plates: Metals and thickness as indicated, but not less
than thickness indicated below:
1. Hot -Dip Galvanized Sheet Steel: ASTM A 446, Grade A, G60,
minimum thickness of 0.036".
C. Fasteners: Of size and type indicated that comply with the following
requirements. Where trusses are exposed to weather or to high relative
humidities, provide hot -dip zinc -coated fasteners per ASTM A 153 or AISI
Type 304 stainless steel fasteners.
1. Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: FS FF-N-105.
2. Power Driven Fasteners: National Evaluation Report NER-272.
3. Wood Screws: ANSI B18.6.1.
4. Lag Bolts: ANSI B18.2.1.
5. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with
ASTM A 563 hex nuts and where indicated, flat washers.
D. Metal Framing Anchors: Provide metal framing anchors of type, size,
metal, and finish indicated that comply with requirements specified
including the following:
1. Current Evaluation/Research Reports: Provide products for which
model code evaluation/research reports exist that are acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction and that evidence compliance of
metal framing anchors for application indicated with the building
code in effect for this Project:
2. Allowable Design Loads: As published by manufacturer and
determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis
and verified through comprehensive testing by a qualified
independent testing laboratory.
3. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Zinc -coated by hot -dip process to comply
with ASTM A 525, Coating Designation G60, and complying with
ASTM A 446, Grade A; ASTM A 526; or ASTM A 527.
Rev. 3/19/07 PROJECT # 07712 06192 - Page 3

2.02 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate and assemble trusses to provide units of configuration
indicated, with closely fitted joints and connector plates securely fastened
to wood members.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install trusses to comply with TPI referenced standards and other
indicated requirements.
EN® OF SECTION
Rev. 3/19/07 PROJECT # 07712 06192 - Page 4

SECTION 11210 SUBMERSIBLE TURBINE PUMPS
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. DESCRIPTION
Furnish and install a duplex submersible turbine pump system for a drip
irrigation system as indicated on the plans and as"described herein.
The pump system shall each include two (2) submersible turbine pumps of
stainless steel construction, valves, internal piping, motor starter equipment
and control equipment as necessary to provide a complete installation ready
for operation.
B. SHOP DRAWINGS
Submit six (6) sets of complete shop drawings to the Engineer for approval,
including pump curves.
C. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
Five (5) copies of printed instructions for all preventive maintenance
operations shall be furnished to the Engineer with the shop drawings. Parts
lists showing each component part of each different pump, power, or drive
unit shall be furnished. Five (5) copies of all operation manuals for each type
of unit shall be furnished to the Engineer with the shop drawings.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. HYDROSTATIC TESTS
Each pump shall be tested hydrostatically in the manufacturer's shop at a
pressure equal to not less than twice the shut-off head specified. The casing
and heads shall show no undue deflection or sign of weakness under the test
pressure and there shall be no seating through porous metal or leakage
through cracks or other defects. The pump suction vessel shall be tested to a
hydrostatic test pressure of 275 psi in the manufacturer's shop for a minimum
of 10 minutes. Five (5) certified copies of the test results shall be furnished
the Engineer for approval before the pumps are installed.
Rev. 2/27/06 PROJECT # 02715 11210 Page 1

B. SHOP PERFORMANCE TESTS
Shop performance tests shall be run on one pump of each size so specified.
Five (5) certified copies of the test results shall be furnished the Engineer for
approval before the pumps are installed. Results of the shop performance
test shall be inclusive insofar as meeting the specified performance
requirements. Final acceptance of pumping units shall depend upon the
satisfactory operation as demonstrated by the final field tests.
1.03 MANUFACTURER AND SUPPLIER INFORMATION
A. MANUFACTURER NAMEPLATE
A manufacturer's nameplate shall be securely and permanently mounted to
each individual piece of equipment furnished under this Section. The
nameplate shall be constructed of a durable, non -corrosive material. Critical
information shall be clearly engraved or otherwise permanently stamped on
the nameplate, and shall be fully legible. The information contained on the
manufacturer nameplate shall include at least the following:
• Manufacturer's Serial Number
• Name, address and telephone number of equipment manufacturer
• Model and/or Part Number, including pump impeller sizes, when
applicable
• Performance Criteria (i.e., capacity, design point, etc.)
• Motor size, speed and voltage
• Enclosure Type or Rating
• Any other pertinent information
Note: All equipment shall include a nameplate with a manufacturer serial
number validating the equipment as new. Failure to meet these
requirements will be cause for rejection of the equipment.
B. SUPPLIER AND SERVICE INFORMATION
A durable nameplate, stamp or sticker shall be adhered to each individual
piece of equipment containing the name, address, and telephone number of
the local business that supplied the equipment, and the name, address and
telephone number of the local business that can provide service and
replacement parts for the equipment. A 24-hour emergency service
telephone number should also be included.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
No shipment shall be made until the equipment is approved by the Engineer.
Rev. 2/27/06 PROJECT # 02716 11210 - Page 2

All equipment shall be properly protected so that no damage or deterioration
shall occur during shipment or storage. All storage and handling shall be in
strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 EQUIPMENT
A. GENERAL
Furnish and install submersible well pumps as shown on the plans. Each
pump shall be equipped with a submersible electric motor connected for
operation at 120 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz service, with a minimum of 50 ft.
jacketed cable suitable for submersible pump applications. Pump shall meet
the following design applications:
The pumps shall be capable of operating at in either of the two operating
conditions specified below with a maximum of 3/4 hp motor and maximum
3500 rpm.
At 15.5 gpm pump shall produce a MINIMUM TDH of 121 ft and at 12.7
gpm pump shall produce a MAXIMUM TDH of 139 ft.
Note: If a pump cannot be supplied to meet the above conditions a Pressure
Reducing Valve can be utilized as an alternate to adjust the output pressure
as necessary to meet the conditions.
B. PUMP CONSTRUCTION
1. Provide check valve with full -flow, non -clog, non -slamming design.
2. Diffuser chambers shall be stainless steel and be integral fabricated units
designed to eliminate up thrust and. shall contain diffuser guide vanes and
intermediate thrust bearings
3. Shaft, straps, cable guard, split cones, impellers and screen shall be
constructed of stainless steel
4. Impeller seal rings shall be abrasion resistant rubber
5. Priming inducer shall properly lubricate the pump and prevent dry
running.
6. Pump shaft coupling shall be splined or keyed stainless steel to assure
positive non -slip action
Rev. 2/27/06 PROJECT # 02715 11210 - Page 3

C. PUMP MOTOR
1. Provide submersible type motor of canned rotor design- and with
maximum 3/4 HP and 3500 RPM.
2. All parts that are in contact with the medium being pumped shall be
constructed of corrosion resistant stainless steel.
3. Shaft and seal shall be tungsten carbide running on tungsten carbide.
The upper seal ring shall be molded into a rubber diaphragm, which shall
be spring loaded and act as a relief valve for excess motor fluid.
4. Upper radial bearings shall be water lubricated diamond hard ceramic
running against a tungsten carbide shaft journal
5. Motor Circulation Pump shall be stainless steel and circulate the water in
the rotor can chamber to ensure effective bearing lubrication and winding
heat dissipation.
6. Stator shall be hermetically sealed in stainless steel and encapsulated in
thermal plastic resin for maximum heat transfer and resistance to
moisture penetration
7. Lower radial bearing shall be water lubricated diamond hard ceramic
running against a tungsten carbide shaft journal
8. Thrust bearing shall be an adjustable Mitchell type design constructed of
ceramic running against self -aligning metal impregnated carbon pads.
9. Cable shall be neoprene jacketed RHW insulated wire, impervious to
moisture and having a high abrasion resistance.
10. The cable shall'be protected where it passes through the bowl assembly.
11. Cable shall be of such size that the voltage drop does not exceed three
percent between the starter and motor. .
12. Stainless steel .cable clamps shall be provided to support the cable along
the column of pipe at intervals not to exceed 10 feet.
13. Motor shall be non -overloading through entire range.
D. VERIFICATION OF PERFORMANCE
All pumps shall be site tested after installation to demonstrate satisfactory
Rev. 2127/06 PROJECT # 02715 - 11210 - Page 4

operation without excessive noise, vibration, cavitation or over -heating. The
manufacturer along with the authorized representative shall conduct site
tests. Tests shall include checking for correct rotation, maximum motor
amperage draws within nameplate specifications, balanced voltages on each
power leg with the pump operating to within manufacturers tolerances, and
demonstrated compatibility of the pump/motor with the controls supplied.
Test results shall be in printed form and signed by the manufacturer or his
Representative and supplied to the owner.
2.02 WARRANTY
A. All complete pumping units including electric motors, auxiliary units, and
mounts shall be warranted by the Contractor against all defects in materials
and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of final
acceptance. The Contractor shall be obligated to replace all parts and
accessory construction proved defective within one (1) year at no cost to the
Owner.
B. The performance of all pumps, motors and auxiliary units shall be guaranteed
at the specified pumping conditions. The total horsepower required by the
pumps shall not be in excess of that indicated by the results of the
manufacturer's show test.
END OF SECTION
Rev. 2127106 PROJECT # 02715 11210 - Page 5

SECTION 11253 TURBIDITY MONITORING SYSTEM
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
The Contractor shall furnish and install a complete turbidity monitoring system as
shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
Unless otherwise noted, all materials and equipment supplied under this Section
shall be new, of good quality, and in good condition.
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
There shall be furnished and installed necessary equipment for continuous
measurement and recording of turbidity as follows:
A. EFFLUENT TURBIDITY
One effluent turbidity low range analyzer and transmitter:
B. TURBIDITY RECORDERS
1. One 4-Pen Recorder for recording effluent turbidities; high turbidity
alarm for turbidity levels in excess of 10 NTU's.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
All equipment shall be manufactured by a reputable company with at least five
(5) years experience in the manufacture of turbidity monitoring equipment. All
equipment in the system shall be provided by a single supplier.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. SHOP DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall submit six (6) copies of complete shop drawings,
including manufacturer's catalogue cut sheets, to the Engineer for review.
B. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
The contractor shall provide eight (8) copies of operation and
maintenance manuals to the Engineer for review prior to start-up.
Rev. 3/20/2007 PROJECT # 07712 11253 - Page 1

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
All equipment shall be delivered, stored and handled in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
1.06 WARRANTY
The manufacturer shall warrant the turbidimeter against defects in materials and
workmanship for one (1) year from date of start-up.
1.07 MANUFACTURER AND SUPPLIER INFORMATION
A. MANUFACTURER NAMEPLATE
A manufacturer's nameplate shall be securely and permanently mounted
to each individual piece of equipment furnished under this Section. The
nameplate shall, be constructed of a durable, non -corrosive material.
Critical information shall be clearly engraved Or otherwise permanently
stamped on the nameplate, and shall be fully legible. The information
contained on the manufacturer nameplate shall include at least the
following:
• Manufacturer's Serial Number
• Name, address and telephone number of equipment manufacturer
• Model and/or Part Number, including pump impeller sizes, when
applicable
• Performance Criteria (i.e., capacity, design point, etc.)
• Motor size, speed and voltage
• Enclosure Type or Rating
• Any other pertinent information
Note: All equipment shall include a nameplate with �a manufacturer serial
number validating the equipment as new. Failure to meet these
requirements will be cause for rejection of the equipment.
B. SUPPLIER AND SERVICE INFORMATION
A durable nameplate, stamp or sticker shall be adhered to each individual
piece of equipment containing the name, address, and telephone number
of the local business that supplied the equipment, and the name, address
and telephone number of the local business that can provide service and
replacement parts for the equipment. A 24-hour emergency service
telephone number should also be included.
Rev. 3/20/2007 PROJECT # 07712 11253 - Page 2

PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 EQUIPMENT
A. LOW RANGE TURBIDITY ANALYZERS (Filtered Water Turbidity)
1. The turbidimeter shall be a continuous -reading, on-line instrument
using the nephelometric method of measurement. It shall be an
EPA -approved design utilizing a single silicon photodiode to detect
90 degree scattered light.
2. A tungsten -filament light source operating at a color temperature of
approximately 2700 degrees Kelvin shall be used. An auto -ranging
digital display shall read from 0-20 NTU. Accuracy shall be better
than 1 % of reading. Resolution shall be to 0.001 NTU. Calibration
shall be based on formazin, the primary turbidity standard. Routine
standardization shall be via comparison to a laboratory turbidimeter
or with secondary reflectance rods (furnished as a standard
accessory). The Turbidimeter shall consist of two main component
parts: a turbidimeter body and a control unit.
3. All optical and hydraulic components shall be housed in the
turbidimeter body. The light source shall be directed through the
surface of the water sample, eliminating the use of a glass window
or flow cell. Optical components shall be mounted on an optical
head assembly which can be easily removed for servicing without
disturbing sample flow. The turbidimeter body also shall
incorporate a built-in bubble trap to effectively purge the sample of
entrapped air prior to measurement. The Turbidimeter body shall
be constructed of corrosion -resistant structural plastic. It shall be
powered from the control unit and require no separate power
source.
4. The Control Unit shall provide a digital L.E.D. display with 4 digits
and automatic decimal positioning. The Control Unit also shall
provide a linear output signal which can be programmed to span all
or any portion of the 0-20 NTU range. A 4-20 mA current output
and selectable voltage outputs of 0-10 mV, 0-100 mV and 0-1 Vdc
shall be provided. Two set -point alarm systems shall be fully
adjustable over the entire range of the instrument and actuate
SPDT n.o/n.c. dry relay contacts. A bubble rejection circuit shall be
provided to eliminate spikes in measurement due to transient
sample conditions. The instrument shall be capable of offsetting
the turbidity of pure water to achieve a reading of 0.000 on particle
free water. Self test diagnostics shall be provided to automatically
indicate possible instrument malfunctions.
Rev. 3/20/2007 PROJECT # 07712 11253 - Page 3

5. Set point alarms shall be set to signal automatically actuated valves
diverting flow to the effluent or reject storage. Turbidity readings
over 10.0 NTU shall cause the valve to the effluent storage to close
and the reject storage valve to open. Turbidity reading below 9.9
NTU shall cause the valve to effluent storage to reopen and the
valve to reject storage to close.
6. The Control Unit shall be housed in a NEMA 12 industrial plastic
enclosure. Power requirement shall be selectable 115/230 Vac,
50/60 Hz.
7. Turbidity analyzer shall be HACH 1720 E or equal as manufactured
by Roberts Filter or equal.
B. TURBIDITY RECORDERS
1. Circular chart recorder shall be capable of recording up to four
points on a 10" chart. The unit shall be fully programmable in order
that the recorder can be configured to accept do voltages,
thermocouple, and RTD inputs. All non -linear inputs shall be
linearized and provision must be made for special linearizations. In
addition to recording, the unit shall have provisions for individual 16
character tags and messages per channel, and up to four
intergrators which shall be selectable either as reset or non -reset
type. Each channel, and up to four integrators which shall be
selectable either as reset or non -reset type. Each channel shall be
fitted with two alarms selectable as absolute, rate of change, or
deviation. The recorder shall also be capable of adding up to 2 PID
controllers, and serial bi-directional communications. The recorder
shall be suitable for panel mounting and shall be a NEMA 3
enclosure. The recorder shall be Chessel Model 390 or equal as
manufactured by Honeywell or equal.
2. Instruments shall be 115 Vac. Signal input shall be 4-20 ma.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
All equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and as shown on the drawings.
3.02 QUALITY CONTROL AND FIELD TESTING
Rev. 3/20/2007 PROJECT # 07712 11253 - Page 4

A. QUALITY CONTROL
The instrument supplier shall furnish the services of a qualified technical
service representative to perform start-up, field testing, calibration, and
training of the new turbidimeters. A minimum of two (2) days of services
shall be provided.
B. FIELD TESTING
The Contractor and the manufacturer's representative shall demonstrate
to the owner and the Engineer that all equipment is performing as
specified.
3.03 SPARE PARTS
The Contractor shall furnish one (1) compete set of recommended spare parts to
be conveyed to the owner.
END OF SECTION
Rev. 3/20/2007 PROJECT ## 07712 11253 - Page 5

SECTION 11300 DRIP IRRIGATION SYSTEM
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. GENERAL
A complete wastewater disposal system using drip technology shall
be furnished and installed in accordance with these specifications.
The system will be generally located as shown on the plans. The
disposal system consists of all materials and equipment from (and
including) the submersible turbine pumps to the disposal field
dripper lines. The equipment includes submersible turbine pumps,
automatic disk filter assembly, electronic actuated control valves,
check va(ves, air and vacuum relief valves, distribution headers,
return headers with automatic flushing valve, pressure
compensating dripper lines, flow meter, system controller and any
appurtenance necessary to provide a complete functional system
as per the plans and specifications. The filtration and control
system shall be a complete pre -manufactured skid mounted system
for package installation.
B. SUBMITTALS
The manufacturer shall supply a minimum of six (6)
sets of standard Submittal Drawings, Operating and
Maintenance Instruction Manuals and Parts List.
Standard submittals will consist of:
a) System Outline Drawing
b) Control Data
c) Detailed Assembly and Maintenance Guides
d) Typical Installation Guides
e) Technical Manuals
f) Parts List
Rev. 4120/07 PROJECT # 07712 11300 - Page 1

1.02 QUALIFICATION OF MANUFACTURERS
The complete disposal system with appurtenances shall be the "Perc-
Rite"O Model ASD124-D124 wastewater dispersal system provided by
American Manufacturing Company Inc. of Elkwood, Virginia.
1.03 FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS
A single manufacturer shall furnish a complete drip irrigation system and be
responsible for its proper design and subsequent operation. The
manufacturer shall be responsible for coordination with other portions .of the
project, be the prime supplier of equipment and materials in the system, and
provide all the manufacturers service as. required for a complete and
operable system.
1.04 INSTALLATION AND TESTING PROCEDURES
A. System Installer Qualifications: The system installer shall have a
minimum of 5 years of installing surface effluent drip systems and a
minimum of 10 surface effluent system installations; said systems must
be of comparable capacity to the proposed system. Verification
documents and contact lists for qualifications will be required.
B. System Description: The management system shall be operated via a
PLC based control panel to allow scheduled dosing to occur at pre-
determined times and must be equipped with a back-up power supply
to maintain correct time and program variables in.the event of power
failures. This controller will monitor, via mercury float switches, the
liquid level within the pumping chambers for Low Water, Dose Enable
and High Water conditions. If the Low Water and or Dose Enable
sensor are disabled the controller will not allow automatic pumping to
start. If the Low Water and Dose Enable sensors are enabled, this
shall ensure that there is sufficient liquid level in the pumping chamber
for the system to complete a dosing cycle of the largest zone within the
disposal area. Should the Dose Enable sensor become disabled during
a normal pumping cycle the system shall continue until the cycle is
complete and not allow. another cycle to start until the sensor is
enabled. Should the Low Water sensor become disable during a
normal pumping cycle the system will shut down to prevent damage to
the pumps. The high water sensor shall be placed at the level indicated
on the plans and, if engaged, shall cause an on -site audible/visual
indicator and signal the remote dialing device.
The controller shall be capable of monitoring flow rate (in gallons per
minute) into each disposal field. The controller shall be capable of
Rev. 4120107 PROJECT # 07712 11300 - Page 2

storing the following daily operational records in memory for later
retrieval: total daily flow to each zone individually, total accumulated
daily flow into all zones combined, total number of daily filter flushing
cycles and all alarm conditions encountered. This information should
be stored for a period of no less than thirty days. The controller shall
also be capable of storing the following monthly operational records in
memory for later retrieval: total monthly flow to each zone individually,
total accumulated monthly flow into all zones combined and total
number of monthly filter flushing cycles. This information should be
stored for a period of no less than thirty months.
The controller, on a predetermined basis as designed, will
automatically dose the individual dripper zones. The controller shall be
capable of dosing a single zone or two zones simultaneously. The
dosing volumes and the time between doses shall be, as engineered
and shall be easily adjustable. The flow rate (gallons per minute) within
each zone'shall be monitored continuously during a dosing cycle. Any
variance in flow rate above or below the preset design conditions shall
cause a visual alarm indication and signal the remote dialing device. If
the flow variance is determined to be outside a predetermined
acceptable range, the system shall automatically shut down until reset
by an operator.
The system shall include UL Listed precipitation and freeze sensors
and shall automatically shut down the system during rainfall events or
sub -freezing temperatures. Precipitation sensor shall be constructed of
high impact thermoplastic and aluminum and shall operate as a
normally open switch. The precipitiation sensor shall be mounted as
shown on the drawings and shall be a Mini-Clik sensor as
manufactured by Hunter Industries Inc. or approved equal. Freeze
sensor shall be normally open for temperatures above 3° C and closed
for temperatures below 3° C. Freeze sensor shall be Freeze-Clik as
manufactured by Hunter Industries Inc. or approved equal.
The filtration unit must automatically back -flush on the following basis:
upon a preset accumulated flow through the filters and/or upon a
preset pressure difference across the filters. The controller shall back
flush only one filter at a time and all back flushing flow shall be
returned to the pretreatment system as indicated in the plans.
C. Equipment
1. Submersible Turbine Pumps: See specification Section 11210.
2. System Controller: The system shall use a Siemens® PLC for
operation of the complete system including: flow monitoring, all
Rev. 4/20107 PROJECT # 07712 11300 - Page 3

electrically actuated. valves, submersible turbine pumps, and
backwash cycles. The unit shall be equipped with a modem
allowing remote system communication, including but not limited to
simple polling and system operation reprogramming. All controls to
be enclosed in a NEMA 4X enclosure.
3. Filtration Package: The automatic filter assembly shall consist of
115-micron automatic disc filters rated at a. minimum of 20 gpm.
Automatic back flush valves and controls shall be on a pre -
assembled header and frame. The filters shall be hydraulically
operated by pressure and electrically actuated via the system
controller. Automatic disk filters shall be manufactured by ARKALO
4. Flow Meter: The effluent flow meter shall be a velocity type,
magnetic drive, sealed housing, flanged tube meter for 150 psi
working pressure. It shall comply with the applicable provisions of
AWWA C708. The meter shall be of appropriate size with a sealed
indicator having a minimum range of 0 gpm to 1.25 times the flow
capacity of the filtration system. It shall also have a six digit
totalizer and shall be accurate within ± 2% of true flow within a
minimum range of 0 gpm to 1.25 times the capacity of the filtration
system. The meter shall have a GPM indicator hand and a sweep
test hand. The flow meter shall be a 3/4-Inch MASTER METER
flanged multi jet meter.
5. Pump Master Control Valve: The pump master control valve shall
be a hydraulic valve with an integral diaphragm, electrically
actuated and operated by pressure to control the irrigation pumps
discharge. The valve body shall be cast iron (ASTM A125 CI.B).
The valve shall have threaded end connections ANSI (NPT) female
and have an inlet pressure range of 35 to 230 psi. The valve shall
also have a slow drip -tight closure to help prevent water hammer.
6. Drip Emitter Line: The drip emitter lines shall be pressure
compensating type "Bio-Line" polyethylene tubing with minimum
wall thickness of 45 mil as provided by Netafim, USA. The emitter
rate of 0.6 gallons per hour with a flow variance not to exceed +\-
5% at internal tubing pressures of 10 to 60 pounds per square inch.
Tubing diameter shall be 17 mm.
a. Individual drip lines shall be designed and installed level,
following the naturally occurring_ ground contour. Solvent
welded heavy duty flexible'/ -inch or 3%-inch PVC tubing shall be
used to connect common drip lines installed at varying depths or
locations (eg: in step downs or to connect looped drip line
segments). These connection lines shall be made to the drip
Rev. 4120/07 PROJECT # 07712 11300 - Page 4

lines by specially manufactured pressure rated barbed
couplings, and connected to the manifolds with any reductions
made directly at the manifold.
b. The field shall consist of a minimum of two separately dosed
zones. Each zone shall be equipped with an individual control
valve.
c. Field appurtenances include an air release/vacuum valve at the
mid point, of the supply manifold to each zone, air
release/vacuum valve and check valve at the high point of the
return flush manifold to each zone and a cleanout at the end of
the supply and return manifolds. Valves shall be provided with
protective vaults or boxes.
7. Air / Vacuum Relief Valves: Air/Vacuum relief valves shall be
installed at the high -points of irrigation header lines, where shown
on the drawings or as required. Valves shall be 2" diameter
combined air release valve which operates to release or admit air
from or into the lines. Valves shall be high strength plastic with
operating parts of non corrosive materials and be suitable for
working pressure in the lines. The Valve shall be A.R.I.® Model
Number 65ARI-2.
8. Check Valves: Check valves shall be constructed of heavy duty
cast brass with screw cap and swing type disk with integral seat.
Valves shall prevent backflow while offering full flow performance
with a minimum of turbulence or pressure loss and must be rated
for 200 psi W.O.G. (working pressure non shock).
9. Polyvinyl Chloride Piping: All polyvinyl chloride (PVC). pipe shall
meet requirements of ASTM 2241, Class 200/SDR 21. All schedule
40 PVC fittings must meet ASTM D 2466.
10. Field Control Valves: All valves shall be properly sized to meet flow
and friction loss specifications. Valves shall be hydraulic with an
integral diaphragm, electrically actuated via 24 VAC and operated
by water pressure to control the flow to each field. The valves
operating pressure shall be 15-140 psi. The valve shall be a
DOROTO 61 BPLHP.
PART 3: EXECUTION
Rev. 4/20/07 PROJECT # 07712 11300 - Page 5

3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Effluent irrigation pumps shall be installed at the irrigation control
building'where indicated on the drawings.
1. Pumps shall be skid mounted as provided by Waste Water
Systems Inc.
2. Pumps shall be installed such that no vibration occurs when in
operation.
B. Effluent pump controls shall be installed in accordance with applicable
codes and ordinances.
C. Filters shall be installed in the irrigation building where indicated on the
drawings.
1. Automatic filters shall be pre -assembled, skid mounted, fully
supported, with adequate piping supports, piping and electrical
connections as indicated on the drawings.
D. Irrigation header piping shall be installed where indicated on the
approved drawings..
1. Buried header piping shall be installed in accordance with drawings
and details.
2. Install air relief valves after testing is complete where indicated on
approved shop drawings, or as needed.
3. Install force main piping with a minimum of 12 inches of cover.
4. All PVC pressure pipe SDR 21 class 200; conforming to ASTM
D2241.
5. Trenches shall be excavated wide enough to allow proper
. installation of pipe and fittings.
E. Drip irrigation tubing shall be installed where indicated on approved
drawings. Drip irrigation tubing shall be installed at grade "on contour"
and shall be stapled into position as necessary to prevent movement.
F. All electrical wiring from computer/controller to the field control valves
shall be U.L. listed suitable for direct burial.
3.02 QUALITY CONTROL AND FIELD TESTING
Rev. 4/20/07 PROJECT # 07712 11300 - Page 6

A. American Manufacturing Company Inc. of Elkwood, Virginia shall
provide supervisory services and technical support during the
installation of the drip disposal systems.
Services to be provided are as follows:
1. Supervise/inspect installation of pumping and filtration system.
2. Supervisory and technical support for installation of Computer
controller and starters.
3. Supervise/inspect installation of subsurface wastewater drip tubing.
4. Supervise installation and hook-up of automatic valves.
5. Start-up technical support and hands-on control of initial start-up.
6. Operator training.
7. Supervise/inspect cables or tubing to field control valves.
B. Field Testing:
1. Each pump shall be field tested by the manufacturer's
technical representative to demonstrate that the pump
performance meets the requirements of the drawings and
specifications. The manufacturer shall provide and install any
gauges, meters or other devices needed for the field tests.
3.03 SPARE PARTS
A. The Contractor shall furnish one (1) complete set of spare parts as
recommended by the manufacturer. At a minimum spare parts shall
include 100 ft of drip tubing, one (1) field control valve and misc.
fittings. Spare parts shall be conveyed to the Owner.
END OF SECTION
Rev. 4/20107 PROJECT # 07712 11300 - Page 7

SECTION 11302 RECLAIMED WATER SYSTEMS
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. DESCRIPTION
This Section describes materials and appurtenances necessary in
reclaimed /reuse water systems.
B. SUBMITTALS
Shop drawings or submittals shall be required for the following:
1. All sizes and types of pipe on the project.
2. Pipe fittings and appurtenances.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
All materials within the reclaimed/reuse water system shall meet all requirements
of specification Section 02660 with the exception of the modifications described
below:
A. All reclaimed/reuse water valves,. storage facilities and outlets shall be
tagged or labeled to Warn the public or employees that the water is not
intended for drinking. Where appropriate, such warning shall inform the
public or employees to avoid contact with the water.
B. All reclaimed/reuse water piping, valves, outlets and other appurtenances
shall be color -coded, taped, or otherwise marked to identify the source of
the water as being reclaimed/reuse water.
1. All reclaimed/reuse water piping and appurtenances shall be either
colored purple (Pantone 522) and embossed or integrally stamped or
marked "CAUTION: RECLAIMED WATER — DO NOT DRINK" or be
installed with a purple (Pantone 522) identification tape or
polyethylene vinyl wrap. The warning shall be stamped on opposite
sides of the pipe and' repeated every 3 feet or less.
Rev. 3/19/2007 PROJECT # 07712 11302 7 Page 1

2. Identification tape shall be at least 3 inches wide and have white or
black lettering on purple (Pantone 522) field stating "CAUTION:
RECLAIMED WATER — DO NOT DRINK'. Identification tape shall
be installed on top of reclaimed water pipelines, fastened at least
every 10 feet to each pipe length and run continuously the entire
length of the pipe.
3. Existing underground distribution systems retrofitted for the purpose
of distributing reclaimed/reuse water shall be taped or otherwise
identified as described in items 1 and 2 above. This identification
need not extend the entire .length of the distribution system but shall
be incorporated within 10 feet of crossing any potable water supply
line or sanitary sewer line.
C. All reclaimed/reuse water valves and outlets shall be of a type, or secured
in a manner, that permits operation by authorized personnel only.
D. Above ground hose bibs (spigots or other hand operated connections) shall
not be present. Hose bibs shall be located in locked, below grade vaults
which shall be clearly labeled as being of non -potable quality. As hose bib
services, hose bibs which can only be operated by a special tool may be
placed in non -lockable underground service boxes clearly labeled as non -
potable water.
E. Tank Trucks:
Tank trucks and other equipment used to distribute reclaimed/reuse
water shall be clearly identified with advisory signs.
2. Tank trucks used to transport reclaimed/reuse water shall not be
used to transport potable water that is used for drinking or other
potable purposes.
3. -Tank trucks used to transport reclaimed/reuse water shall not be
filled through on -board piping or removable hoses that may
subsequently be used to fill tanks with water from a potable water
supply.
F. Cross -Connection Control:
1. There shall be no direct cross -connections between the
reclaimed/reuse water and potable water systems.
2. Where both reclaimed/reuse water and potable water are supplied to
a reclaimed/reuse water use area, a reduced pressure principle
Rev. 3/19/2007 PROJECT # 07712 11302 — Page 2

back -flow prevention device or an approved air gap separation shall
be installed at the potable water service connection to the use area.
The installation of the reduced pressure principle backflow
prevention device shall allow proper testing.
3. Where potable water is used to supplement a reclaimed/reuse water
system, there shall be an air gap separation, approved and regularly
inspected by the potable water supplier, between the potable water
and reclaimed/reuse water systems.
EN® OF SECTION
Rev. 3/19/2007 PROJECT # 07712 11302 — Page 3

SECTION 11312 SUBMERSIBLE NON -CLOG SEWAGE PUMPS
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The work covered by this section consists of furnishing and installing 2 non -
clog submersible sewage pumps for flow equalization, 1 non -clog
submersible sewage pump for reject return, controls and accessories.
B. The pump station shall include duplex submersible pumps with motors
installed on lift -out rail systems, access hatch, controls, piping, valves and
other necessary appurtenances as shown on the drawings and in
accordance with the specifications herein stated.
C. Unless otherwise noted, all materials and equipment supplied under this
Section shall be new, of good quality, and in good condition.
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Pump Design: Each pump shall be of the submersible non -clog type with 2-
vane enclosed impeller and submersible motor. Pump shall be designed
for automatic connection to the discharge connection elbow, guided by no
less than two guide bars extending from the top of the station to the
discharge elbow.
Pumping conditions shall be as follows:
Flow Equalization 30 GPM @ 12' TDH
Reject Return 20 GPM @ 10' TDH
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: The pumps and all appurtenances shall be supplied by
reputable manufacturers with at least ten (10) years of experience.
B. Factory Tests:
1. General: The pumps shall be tested at the factory under simulated
field conditions for excessive vibration, leaks, and operation of all
automatic systems. The controls shall be adjusted to start and stop
the pumps to satisfy field conditions. For each unit, a pump
performance curve shall be produced from the factorytesting: Its
veracity shall be certified and the curves shall be identifiable by serial
numbers of pumps and motors. Manufacturer shall submit six (6)
copies of a certified curve for each pump to the Engineer prior
Rev. 4123/07 PROJECT # 07712 11312 - Page 1

to the shipment of the pump. Engineer will judge adequacy of
performance and distribute copies of curves appropriately.
2. Pump Test: The pump manufacturer shall perform the following
inspections and tests on each pump before shipment from factory:
a. Impeller, motor rating and electrical connections shall first be
checked for compliance to the customer's purchase order.
b. A motor and cable insulation test for moisture content or
insulation defects shall be made.
c. , Prior to submergence, the pump shall be run dry to establish
correct rotation and mechanical integrity.
d. The pump shall be run submerged in water to a minimum of
six (6) feet. _
e. After operational test No. 4, the insulation test (No. 2) is to be
performed again.
A written statement indicating the foregoing steps have been
done with each pump shall be supplied to the Engineer prior to
shipment of the pump.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: The manufacturer,' shall supply a minimum of five (5) sets
of standard Submittal Drawings and Parts List. Standard submittals will
consist. of:
1. Pump Outline Drawing
2. Control Data
3. Access Frame
4. Typical Installation Guides
5. Technical Manuals
6. Parts List
B. Verification of Pumping Application: As part of the shop drawing submittal,
the manufacturer shall supply a letter certifying that the manufacturer has
reviewed the Contract drawings and specifications, including all
addendums, and that the equipment and related accessories included in
the shop drawing submittal are suitable for installation in the pumping
applications proposed for the project.
Rev. 4/23107 PROJECT # 07712
11312 -Page 2

C: Operation and Maintenance Manuals: The manufacturer shall furnish three
(3) complete sets of operation and maintenance manuals for the pumps
supplied.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. 'The equipment. and materials shall be delivered, stored and handled in
strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Pump Warranty: The pump manufacturer shall warrant the units being
supplied to the owner against defects in workmanship and material for a
period of five (5) years or 10,000 hours under the Municipal
Wastewater -Permanent Installation Warranty Policy or one (1) year under
the Industrial -Permanent Installation Warranty Policy under normal use,
operation and service. The warranty shall be in printed form and apply to. all
similar units.
B. Appurtenances Warranty: All accessories and appurtenances shall be
warranted against defects in workmanship and materials for a period of one
(1) year.
1.07 PUMP. PREQUALIFICATION SPECIFICATION
A. Manufacturers wishing to supply equipment for this project must submit a
prequalification submittal for approval to the Engineer. The prequalification
submittal must be received by the Engineer at least fourteen (14) days prior
to the bid opening date to receive consideration. The submittal shall
demonstrate that the proposed equipment meets the requirements of the
Contract Specifications and Drawings. The Engineer will issue an
addendum prior to the bid date listing the approved manufacturers. The
prequalification submittal shall include, as a minimum, the following
information:
1. Literature and cut sheets from manufacturer(s) describing equipment
2. Pump operating curves
3. Proposed motor sizes and speeds
4. Copy of warranties
5. List of at least five (5) references for similar installations, including
contact names and current telephone numbers
6. A written statement from the manufacturer indicating that the
manufacturer has reviewed the proposed application as detailed in
the Contract Drawings 'and Specifications, and that all equipment,
Rev. 4/23107 PROJECT # 07712
11312 -Page 3

materials and systems proposed to be supplied are appropriate and
compatible for this specific application. '
B. Note: The submittal of prequalification information does not omit the
requirement for the Contractor and manufacturers to submit complete shop
drawing submittals to the Engineer in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
1.08 MANUFACTURER AND SUPPLIER INFORMATION
A. _Manufacturer Nameplate: A manufacturer's nameplate shall be securely
and permanently mounted to each individual piece of equipment furnished
under this Section. The nameplate shall be constructed of a durable, non-
corrosive material. Critical information shall be clearly engraved or
otherwise permanently stamped on the nameplate, and shall be fully
legible. The information contained on the manufacturer nameplate shall
include at least the following:
1. Manufacturer's Serial Number
2. Name, address and telephone number of equipment manufacturer
3. Model and/or Part Number, including pump impeller sizes, when
applicable
4. Performance Criteria (i.e., capacity, design point, etc.)
5. Motor size, speed and voltage
6. Enclosure Type or Rating
7. Any other pertinent information
Note:- All equipment shall include a nameplate with a manufacturer serial
number validating the equipment as new. Failure to meet these
requirements will be cause for rejection of the equipment.
B. Supplier and Service Information: A durable nameplate, stamp or sticker
shall be adhered to each individual piece of equipment containing the
name, address, and telephone number of the local business that supplied
the equipment, and the name, address and telephone number of the local
business that can provide service and replacement parts for the
equipment. A 24-hour emergency service telephone number should also
be included.
Rev. 4/23/07 PROJECT # 07712 11312 - Page 4

PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 - EQUIPMENT
A. Pumps: Pumps shall be installed in such a way that solids are fed in an
upflow direction to the impeller with no feet, rails or other obstructions below
inlet. All openings in pump impeller and volute case shall be large enough
to pass a 2" diameter sphere. Impeller shall be of the 2 vane non -clog
enclosed type to provide an unobstructed passage through the volute and
shall be cast iron and shall be driven by a stainless steel shaft key. Impeller
shall be locked with a screw and washer.
B. Motor Design:
1. Motor shall be sealed; submersible type rated at 0.4 horsepower for
flow equalization and 1 hp for reject return and shall be for 115 volt,
60 Hz, single phase with 1.15 service factor.
2. Stator winding shall be of the open type with insulation good for 1800
C (356' F). Winding shall operate in clean high dielectric oil that
lubricates bearings and seals and transfers heat from windings to
outer shell. Motor shall be heat shrunk into housing for proper
alignment and superior heat transfer.
3. Motor shall have two heavy duty ball bearings to support pump shaft
and take radial and thrust loads and a sleeve guide bushing directly
above the lower seal to take radial load and act as a flame path for
seal chamber. Ball bearings shall be designed for a minimum B10
life of 30,000 hours.
4. A heat sensor thermostat shall be imbedded in top of winding and be
connected in series with the motor starter coil in control box to stop
motor if temperature rises in motor to over 2200 F for any reason.
Thermostat to reset automatically when temperature drops to a safe
limit. Motors shall also be equipped with a moisture sensor which
signals an alarm if moisture is present between the two seals.
5. Pump motor cables shall be suitable for submersible pump
applications. Cable sizing shall conform to NEC requirements for the
full load currents of the motors.
C. Lift -Out Rail System:
Rail system shall consist of a seal fitting that mounts vertically into a
stationary discharge casting. A simple downward motion shall
connect pump and seal fitting to the stationary discharge casting.
Rev. 4123107 PROJECT # 07712
11312 -Page 5

Seal fitting shall seal with two "O" rings and a tapered rubber seal
ring into funnel of discharge case. Discharge casting shall be
furnished with flanged discharge pipe connections for a duplex
system. Valve casting and discharge casting shall be painted with a
high quality, lead free, alkyd enamel finish. An upper guide plate
shall be attached to pump to support life -out fitting' and guide pump
on rails. Lifting lugs shall be cast into the motor housing and a
stainless steel chain and clevice shall be furnished for lifting pump.
2. Two hold down brackets shall be provided to prevent pump and seal
fitting from rising on rails. Guide rails shall be 1-1/2" stainless steel
pipe.
3. Rail support and mounting bushing shall be mounted to basin wall
and shall not be attached to basin cover or cover frame.
4. Guide rail support shall be adjustable so that perfect vertical
alignment of the rails can be obtained. Pump hatch shall have
minimum dimensions shown on the drawings. Hatch cover shall be
of the water tight, diamond pattern, no -skid type' and shall be
provided with lock hasp and hold open arm. Hatch shall be made of
aluminum. Aluminum hatch frame to be cast -in -place into concrete
top slab.
D. Controls:
Furnish and install one (1) duplex automatic pump control center, in
a NEMA 3R enclosure for 115 volt, 3 phase, 60 hertz power supply.
For each pump motor, there shall be included: a combination circuit
breaker/overload unit providing overload protection, short-circuit
protection, reset and disconnect for all phases; across -the -line
magnetic contactors; equalization pump timer, hand/off/automatic
pump operations selector switch; elapsed time meters; lightning
protection overload device to be precalibrated to match motor
characteristics, and factory sealed to insure trip setting is tamper
proof; four (4) float level sensors shall be provided for pump
operation(see description below; 120 volt single phase control panel
pilot circuitry. A 115 volt control circuit transformer with disconnect
circuit breaker and overload protection, for external pilot circuitry
shall be included with an automatic -electric alternator for two pumps.
Terminal board for connection of line, pump and level sensors shall
be provided. Pump casing moisture and high temperature indicator
alarms' and reset push buttons shall be provided. An audible and
visual high water alarm shall be provided. A 110-volt convenience
outlet shall be provided at the control center.
Rev. 4/23/07 PROJECT # 07712
11312 -Page 6

2. A separate battery backed telephone alarm dialer shall be provided.'
The dialer shall have at least twelve -points with alarm inputs as
indicated on the drawings:
3. Float Switch Functions
a. Low Level Alarm Float: The low level alarm float will act as a
redundant pump shut off and will activate an audio/visual
alarm signal when the float switch is in the extended position
(open circuit).
b. Lead Pump Enable: In the extended position this float switch
shall create an open circuit and prevent operation of the
pumps. When the circuit is closed the float switch shall allow
activation of the timer and the pumps shall alternate between
Cycles, transferring wastewater to the downstream treatment
reactor(s).
C. Lag Pump On: Upon closure the Lag Pump On, switch shall
activate the lag pump and the two pumps shall draw down the
liquid in the equalization tank until the Lag Pump On is open.
Upon this occurrence, a counter shall be triggered to alert the
operator that a high level condition has occurred and that the
timer "on" setting may need adjusting.
d. High Level Float: The high level float switch shall activate the
audio/visual alarm when the circuit is closed.
4. Reject Return Pump Controls
Reject return pump shall be manually controlled by on/off switch and
low water pump off float to prevent pump damage.
E. Access Frame and Cover: Furnish and install one (1) water tight access
door with frame in aluminum material, complete with hinged and flush
locking mechanism, upper guide holder and level sensor(s) cable holder.
Frame shall be securely placed, mounted above the pump(s). Frame shall
be provided with sliding nut rails to attach the accessories required. Doors
shall be of skid proof design.
Rev. 4123107 PROJECT # 07712 1 11312 - Page 7

PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. All equipment and materials shall be installed in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
3.02 QUALITY CONTROL AND FIELD TESTING
A. Quality Control: The pump supplier shall furnish the services of a technical
representative for two (2) days to inspect the installation and provide start-
up and operator training.
B. Field Testing:
1. Each pump shall be field tested by the manufacturer's technical
representative to demonstrate that the pump performance meets the
requirements of the drawings and specifications. The manufacturer
shall provide and install any gauges, meters or other devices needed
for the field tests.
2. Pump start-up and testing shall be done in the presence of the
Engineer and shall demonstrate conformance to the conditions
shown on the contract drawings.
3.03 SPARE PARTS
A. The Contractor shall furnish one (1) complete set of spare parts as
detailed below for each pump supplied on this contract. Spare parts shall
be conveyed to the Owner.
Upper and Lower Mechanical Seal
Motor Cable
Cable Grommet
Inspection Plug Washer
Upper Bearing
Lower Bearing
Wear Ring
Cable Entry Washer
O-Ring Kit
Impeller Bolt
Impeller Key
END OF SECTION
Rev. 4/23/07 PROJECT # 07712 11312 -Page 8

SECTION 11398 ULTRAVIOLET LIGHT DISINFECTION SYSTEM
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install two (2) complete ultraviolet light
disinfection systems as shown on the drawings .and as specified herein.
B. Unless otherwise noted, all materials and equipment supplied under this
Section shall be new, of good quality, and in good condition.
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. The disinfection systems shall employ. ultraviolet light as a means of
disinfecting sewage effluent to a total coliform count of less than. 14 per
100 ml at the treatment plant design peak flow of 40 gpm. The system
shall be of the open channel type consisting of a number of modular
- components as herein specified.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The manufacturer shall be experienced in the manufacture of similar
systems and shall have at least five (5) successful installations. The
manufacturer shall submit at least five (5) references with the shop
drawings.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: The Contractor shall submit six (6) copies of complete
shop drawings for the equipment and all accessories.
B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: The Contractor shall furnish at least
three (3) sets of operation and maintenance manuals for the equipment.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. All equipment shall be delivered, stored and handled in strict accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations.
Rev. 4/20107 PROJECT # 07712 11398 - Page 1

1.06 WARRANTY
A. All equipment shall be warranted by the manufacturer to be free from
defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one (1) year after
start-up. .
1.07 MANUFACTURER AND SUPPLIER INFORMATION
A. Manufacturer Nameplate: A manufacturer's nameplate shall be securely
and permanently mounted to each individual piece of equipment furnished
under this'Section. The nameplate shall be constructed of a durable, non-
corrosive material. Critical information shall be clearly engraved or
otherwise permanently stamped on the nameplate, and shall be fully
legible. The information contained on the manufacturer nameplate shall
include at least the following:
1. Manufacturer's Serial Number
2. Name, address and telephone number of equipment manufacturer
3. Model and/or Part Number, including pump impeller sizes, when
applicable
4. Performance Criteria (i.e., capacity, design point, etc.)
5. Motor size, speed and voltage
6. Enclosure Type or Rating
7. Any other pertinent information
Note: All equipment shall include a nameplate with a manufacturer serial
number validating the equipment as new. Failure to meet these
requirements will be cause for rejection of the equipment.
B. Supplier and Service Information: A durable nameplate; stamp or sticker
shall be adhered to each individual piece of equipment containing the
name, address,, and telephone number of the local business that supplied
the equipment, and the name, address and telephone number of the local
business that can provide service and replacement parts for the
equipment.., A 24-hour emergency service telephone number should also
be included.
Rev. 4/20/07 PROJECT # 07712 11398 - Page 2

PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 EQUIPMENT
A. Ultraviolet Modules:
Each UV system shall consist of two (2) UV modules. Each UV
module shall have two (2) UV lamps each contained inside a high
quality quartz sleeve mounted in a stainless steel frame. Modules
shall be designed for indoor or outdoor use under all weather
conditions and capable of being completely submerged. UV
modules shall be installed in a stainless steel channel with flanged
plate inlet and outlet connections. Stainless steel channel shall
include an outlet weir to maintain submergence of the UV lamps.
The UV modules shall be capable of removal without system
shutdown.
2. All quartz sleeves shall be protected by a special compound which
eliminates any coating of the sleeves. The modules shall be
oriented parallel to the flow with no tools or special equipment
required for removal. The wiring for each UV module shall be
separate from the other modules with a conduit and cable duct to
the power control module in the control box.
B. Power Control Module:
Each power control module shall be mounted in a control box and
shall contain the ballasts, related 'electronics and monitoring
devices for a single UV module. A set of light emitting diodes
which are visible through the front panel of the control box shall be
provided which indicate the status of each UV lamp and the power
to the power control module.
2. Each power control module shall be completely self-contained and
capable of being completely removed from the control box by
disconnecting one power plug .and the related UV module. Solid
state electronics shall be used throughout the power control
module. All power control modules shall be mounted in a
completely weatherproof control box.
C. Control Box: The control box shall be of weatherproof construction
suitable for outdoor installation. The unit shall be sized by the system
manufacturer to contain all of the controls and wiring for the entire system.
The control box shall contain ground fault detectors for each UV and
power control module plus one. spare outlet and shall be supplied with an
integral cooling fan and air ventilator. A window shall be provided on the
front cover for easy status monitoring of the UV and power control
Rev. 4/20/07 PROJECT # 07712 11398 - Page 3

modules and shall be pedestal mounted suitable for anchorage to a
concrete surface. A main switch which powers the total system shall be
included as a part of the control box.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. The equipment shall be installed as shown on the drawings and in strict
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
3.02 QUALITY CONTROL AND FIELD TESTING
A. Qualitv Control: The manufacturer shall furnish the services of a qualified
technician to inspect the installation and provide start-up and operator
training services. At least three (3) days of services shall be furnished by
the manufacturer at no cost to the Owner.
B. Field Testing: The manufacturer's representative shall demonstrate to the
Owner and the Engineer that the system is operating as designed and
according to the performance requirements of the specifications. At least
three (3) consecutive days of successful tests shall be included in the field
test.
3.03 SPARE PARTS
A. The Contractor shall furnish one (1) complete set of recommended spare
.parts and convey the spare parts to the Owner.
END OF SECTION
Rev. 4/20/07 PROJECT # 07712 11398 - Page 4

SECTION 11700 BIOCLERE TRICKLING FILTERS
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Contractor shall furnish and install a factory built, fixed film aerobic
process type sewage treatment facility(ies) with all needed
equipment for efficient operation. The units shall include a trickling
filter situated over a final settling tank.
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. System shall consist of two (2) units each containing a trickling filter
situated over a final settling tank and two automatic backwash sand
filters. Each trickling filter unit shall contain three (3) pumps, two (2)
dosing and one (1) sludge return, and a ventilation .fan. The units
shall be complete with electrical control panels for operation of all
components.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. SHOP DRAWINGS
The manufacturer shall supply a minimum of five (5) sets of standard
Submittal Drawings and Parts List. Standard submittals will consist
of:
1.
Detail Drawings
2.
Control Data
3.
Typical Installation Guides
4.
Technical Manuals
5.
Parts List
B. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
The manufacturer shall furnish three (3) complete sets of operation
and maintenance manuals for the equipment supplied.
1.03 WARRANTY
A. The pump manufacturer shall warrant the units being "supplied to the
owner against defects in workmanship and materials for a period of
Rev. 3/19/2007 PROJECT # 07712 11700 - Page 1

one (1) year from the date of installation under normal use, operation
and service. The warranty shall be in printed form and apply to all
similar units.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Trickling Filter Units
The treatment system shall consist of a Model 24/20 followed in series
by a Model 24/24 Bioclere units. The units shall be delivered complete
from supplier and shall include: random packed PVC manufactured
media, ventilation fan; dosing pumps, sludge return pump, internal
piping, wiring and controls. The trickling filter portion of the tank shall
have fiberglass inner and outer skins with the cavity between filled with
polyurethane foam insulation. The remainder of the plant shall be
constructed of fiber reinforced plastic (FRP) or plastic. All internal
piping shall be schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe. The treatment plant shall
withstand normal pressures from the interior hydrostatic load and from
the soil. The flange connection joining the Bioclere filter section to the
Bioclere sump section shall be factory sealed with FRP to provide a
permanent watertight seal. The internal shipping supports shall be
removed, made from, or encapsulated with non -biodegradable
material.
The Bioclere units shall be leak tested for zero percent 24-hour
leakage by filling the clarifier with clean water to the outlet invert.
B. Trickling Filter Media
The PVC randomly packed filter media shall have a void ratio of >95%.
It shall be UV resistant and resistant to a wide range of aqueous
solutions, acids, alkalis, oxidizing agents, oils, fats, and alcohols.
C. Final Settling Tank
A cone shaped settling tank shall have 60 degree sloped sides to
prevent the accumulation of biological and inorganic suspended solids
and shall contain, the necessary internal baffling to prohibit short-
circuiting of the wastewater.
D. Electrical Components
Rev. 311912007 PROJECT # 07712 11700 - Page 2

E
Each unit shall have a ventilation fan, two (2) alternating dosing
pumps, a sludge . return pump, and a low level float switch with the
following characteristics.
The ventilation fan shall be a 115v/1 ph/60hz, painted metal, ball
bearing fan with a factory rated airflow rate of 240 cubic feet per
minute. The two (2) alternating dosing pumps and recycle pump shall
be 115v/1 ph/6Ohz stainless steel submersible pumps. All pumps shall
have an internal high temperature shut off switch. The alternating
dosing pumps shall be controlled such that when one pump fails the
remaining will complete both dosing cycles. The low level
115v/1 ph/60hz float switch shall be installed to prevent the recycle
pump from operating when water levels are abnormally low in the
Bioclere (i.e. during primary tank pumping).
Floats and controls for the dose counter and high water level alarm
located in the siphon dosing tank shall be included in the Bioclere
electrical equipment.
Power Supply
Each unit shall have a dedicated 30 amp, 115v/1 ph/60hz, power
supply.
F. Wiring
The electrical contractor shall complete the wiring between the
Bioclere control panel and the terminal strip within the Bioclere fan
module meeting all local, state, and federal codes. All fittings,
connections, etc. shall be weatherproof and water tight construction.
Ground terminals are provided in both the main panel and the junction
box for each unit. Each ground terminal shall be wired. to an earth
ground. The junction box for the Bioclere unit shall be located outside
Of the fan module in a separate NEMA 4X enclosure. Care shall be
taken to match the wires between the control panel and the terminal
strip within the Bioclere fan module located on each unit.
G. Control Panel
A control panel shall be furnished with an audio and visual alarm for
pump failure _and tripped circuit breaker conditions, an exterior alarm
silence button, and an on/off/test power/alarm toggle switch. Within the
NEMA 4X enclosure: pump timers, pump run timers for each pump
(elapsed time meters), relays, terminal strip, on/off/test switches, run
lights, dosing pump alternator, circuit breakers and current sensors
Rev. 311912007 PROJECT # 07712 11700 - Page 3

shall be provided. Control panel shall accept a single feeder at 120
vac, 30 amperes. Control panel completed assembly shall be UL
labeled as an "Enclosed Industrial Control Panel". Control components
shall. be NEMA rated. IEQ rated components are not acceptable.
H. Automatic Backwash Sand Filter
Two (2) automatic backwash sand filters with 0.5 hp feed pumps and 1
hp backwash pumps shall be provided. Each filter shall have a forward
feed rate of 15.7 gpm and a backwash rate of 48 gpm. Filter media
shall be a minimum of 300 Ibs of #20430 Silica Sand over 310 pounds
of 1/8" gravel. The footprint of each skid mounted unit shall be a
maximum of 38" x 48" including filter tank, feed and backwash pumps,
control panel, and air compressor.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. All equipment and materials shall be installed in strict accordance with
the manufacturer's recommendations.
3.02 QUALITY CONTROL AND FIELD TESTING
A. QUALITY CONTROL
A technical representative of the manufacturer shall be on site for
testing and commissioning of the trickling filter units upon
substantial completion of site work by the General Contractor.
The manufacturer shall install the randomly packed PVC media and
pumps into the trickling filter units therefore completing unit setup.
The manufacturer shall provide onsite operator training and .instruct
the Owner on the trickling filter unit operation.
B. TESTING
Each pump and ventilation fan shall be field tested by the
manufacturer's technical representative to demonstrate that the pump
or fan performance meets the requirements of the drawings and
specifications.
PART 4: NOT USED
END OF SECTION
Rev. 3/19/2007 PROJECT # 07712 11700 - Page 4

SECTION 15002 ELECTRIC MOTOR ACTUATOR
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
The contractor shall furnish and install electric motor actuators as indicated in
the drawings and as specified herein. This specification covers open/close
service motor actuators.
The contractor shall furnish and install
1. Two (2) modulating actuator for two 4 inch ball valves.
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Electric motor operators shall comply with AWWA C504, latest revision. Where
new valves are furnished, the actuator supplier shall secure and install valves on
the actuators and shall accept total unit responsibility for the valve/actuator
combination. Valves shall be as specified in Section 02640. The valve actuators
shall be capable of fully opening and closing the valves under the maximum
load. The actuator shall be self locking under normal operating conditions in
order to hold the valve in an intermediate position. The actuator shall be
designed for indoor or outdoor service and shall be capable of mounting in any
position. The actuators shall include in one complete unit the motor, power
gearing, travel limit switches, torque limit switches, handwheel, terminals for
motor power and controls and separable worm gear operator. Actuators shall be
selected to open or close the valve in 60-120 seconds. Actuators shall utilize a
solid state starter capable of a minimum of 60 starts/hour for open close service
and 1200 starts/hour for modulating service. The actuators shall be
manufactured by Auma Actuators, Inc. or Rotork Controls, Inc.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
The electrical actuators shall be supplied by a local authorized manufacturer's
representative. Actuators shall be manufactured by a reputable company with at
least five (5) years experience in the manufacture of electric valve actuators
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. SHOP DRAWINGS
The Contractor_ shall submit. at least six (6) copies of complete shop
drawings to the Engineer for approval.
Rev. 3/22/07 PROJECT # 07712 - 15002 - Page 1

B. OPERATION AND MAINTENACE MANUALS
The Contractor shall submit at least three (3) sets of operation and
maintenance manuals to the Engineer.
C. TEST CERTIFICATE
Each actuator provided shall be tested and the test certificate shall be
supplied for record. The certificate shall include, as a minimum, no load
current, current at maximum torque setting, stall current, stall torque, test
voltage, motor flash test, and actuator output speed.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
All materials and equipment shall be delivered, stored and handled in strict'
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
1.06 WARRANTY
Each actuator shall be warranted for a minimum of 24 months of operation or up
to a maximum of 36 months from shipment. This warranty shall be held in effect
regardless of precommissioning conditions in a typical indoor or outdoor
environment as long as the actuators are not left disassembled or are not
physically abused.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 EQUIPMENT
A. ENCLOSURE
The entire actuator enclosure shall be 'O' ring sealed, watertight according
to the Standard NEMA 6. It shall at the same time have an inner
watertight and dustproof 'O' ring seal between the terminal compartment
and the internal electrical elements of the actuator to fully protect the
motor and all other internal electrical elements of the actuator from
ingress of moisture and dust when the terminal cover is removed on site
for cabling. Enclosure must allow for temporary site storage without the
need for electrical supply connection. All external fasteners shall be
stainless steel. The terminal compartment and limit switch compartment
covers shall be fastened to the gear housing by stainless steel bolts which
are "captured" to prevent loss when covers are removed.
Rev. 3/22/07 PROJECT # 07712 15002 - Page 2

B. HOUSING
The gear housing and all load bearing enclosures shall be constructed of
cast iron. The non -load bearing enclosures and covers may be made of
aluminum, cast iron or steel. All housings shall be designed,
manufactured and inspected to guarantee against the ingress of moisture.
C. GEARING
1. All power gearing shall be constructed of hardened steel or bronze,
shall operate in a lubricant and shall be suitable for operation at
any angle. Lubricant shall be standard gear oil, or equal. There
shall be not limitations on mounting position of the actuator
resulting from the type of Lubricant used. Gearing shall be designed
to withstand the stall torque of the motor without failing. The
finaldrive shall be of the self-locking worm and wheel type to
prevent creeping of the valve disc in an intermediate position.
2. The drive nut shall be separable from the gear assembly to
facilitate rapid mounting of the operator on the valve.
3. A lost motion device shall be provided to allow motor to reach full
speed before the load is engaged.
4. All limit switch gearing and feedback potentiometer reduction
gearing shall be made of steel or bronze and adequately lubricated.
All rotating shafts shall be supported by anti -friction bearings.
D. MOTOR
1. The drive motor shall be designed for actuator service and shall be
characterized by high starting torque, low stall torque and- low
inertia, rated 120 VAC, single phase.
2. The motor shall be capable of starting against the rated load either
the open or closed direction when voltage to the motor terminals is
plus or minus 1'0% of the nameplate rating.
3. The motor shall be induction type with Class F - tropicalized
insulation. Modulating actuators shall have class H insulation.
Three thermal switches shall to be imbedded 120' apart in the
windings to insure safe motor shut -down during periods of high
current draw resulting in a high temperature condition.
i
Rev. 3/22107 PROJECT # 07712 15002 - Page 3

4. The motor housing shall be totally enclosed and non -ventilated with
cooling fins to dissipate heat. Motor housing shall be constructed
of aluminum or cast iron.
5. The motor shall be capable of operating in any position. It shall be
properly sealed from the lubricant filled gearcase to allow the motor
to be mounted in any position relative to the gearcase. Removal of
the motor shall not result in loss of lubricant.
E. MOTOR PROTECTION
Protection shall be provided for the motor as follows:
1. The motor shall be de -energized in the event of stall when
attempting to unseat a jammed valve.
2. A thermostat to protect against overheating which senses motor
temperature shall be provided.
3. Single phasing protection shall be provided.
F. HANDWHEEL
A handwheel with a positive declutch mechanism shall be permanently
attached for manual operation. The handwheel shall be stationary during
power operation. Motor operation shall always take priority over manual
operation. An inoperable motor or gearing will not prevent manual
operation. The handwheel selector lever must be padlockable.
G. TORQUE AND TURNS LIMITATIONS
1. Torque limit switches shall be provided to de -energize the motor
control circuit when the valve encounters an obstruction during
travel. Each actuator shall have an open direction torque switch
and a close direction torque switch.
2. Torque switches shall be adequately rated to carry the control
. current. The contacts are to be completely sealed.
3. Should the valve become jammed in the closed position, the
actuator motor contactor must open after a maximum of 10
seconds.
H. TRAVEL LIMIT SWITCHES
1. Travel limit switches shall be provided to de -energize the motor
control circuit when the actuator reaches the limits of travel in the
open and close directions.
Rev. 3/22107 PROJECT # 07712 15002 - Page 4

2. Limit switches and the limit switch drive shall be an integral part of
the actuator.
3. The limit switch drive shall be of the counter gear type and "in step"
with the actuator output drive at all times in either the electrical or
manual modes of operation.
4. A minimum of four (4) contacts, two (2) normally open and two (2)
normally closed shall be supplied at each end of valve travel. The
contacts shall be made of silver and adequately rated to carry the
control current. All contacts shall be completely sealed in a NEMA
4 enclosure to prohibit electrical shock while adjusting, eliminate
shorting out and ensure that contaminants do not foul the contacts.
5. Limit switches shall be fully adjustable when power is applied to the
actuator.
I. CONTROLS
The actuator electrical compartment shall include all _devices
required for valve operation, including but not limited to, solid state
reversing contactor, six limit switches adjustable over the entire
range of valve motion, motor overload protection, control fusing,
electronic positioner module, valve position transmitter, and
terminal blocks for connection of all external wiring.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
All actuators shall be installed in strict accordance with the actuator and valve
manufacturers' recommendations.
3.02 QUALITY CONTROL AND FIELD TESTING
A. QUALITY.CONTROL
The actuator manufacturer's representative shall furnish the services of a
manufacturer's certified factory representative for at least two (2) days to
inspect the installations and provide start-up and operator training
services.
B. FIELD TESTING
Rev. 3/22107 PROJECT'# 07712 15002 - Page 5

The Contractor shall demonstrate to the Owner and the Engineer that the
actuators are operating as specified.
3.03 SPARE PARTS
The Contractor shall furnish and convey to the Owner one (1) actuator of each
size installed on this project.
END OF SECTION
Rev. 3/22107 PROJECT # 07712 15002 - Page 6

SECTION 15400 PLUMBING
PART 1: GENERAL,
A'.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Under these specifications, the Contractor shall- furnish a plumbing
system, complete, fully adjusted, and ready for use. Completeness shall
mean not only that all materials and equipment has been installed
properly, but that all material and equipment has been installed and has
been adjusted, and that, in the opinion of the Engineer, all material and
equipment is operating as intended.
B. Unless otherwise noted, all materials and equipment supplied under this
Section shall be new, of good quality, and in good condition.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. For "multiple prime" contracts, the plumbing contractor shall install proper
roughing for equipment furnished by other contractors as noted on the
plans, including waste, vent, water, gas, etc. All final connections when
equipment is set in place will be made by the contractor who provides the
equipment. Plumbing Contractor is to terminate piping at machines with a
gate valve above finished floor.
B. For a "single prime" contract, and for a "multiple prime" project that does
not include a separate plumbing. contract, the General Contractor or his
plumbing subcontractor shall perform all work referenced in this section to
be performed by the plumbing contractor.
C. Electrical Connections:
The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install all wiring except
equipment control wiring. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish
and install all power wiring complete from power source to motor or
equipment junction box, including power wiring through starters.
Electrical Contractor shall install all starters not factory mounted on
equipment.
2. The Plumbing Contractor shall, regardless of voltage, furnish and
install all equipment control wiring for the equipment that the
Plumbing Contractor furnishes. The Plumbing Contractor shall
provide and be responsible for the heater in all starters that the
Plumbing Contractor furnishes.
Rev. 3119107 PROJECT # 07712 15400 - Page 1

1.03
1.04
1.05
3. After all circuits are energized and completed, the Electrical
Contractor shall be responsible for all power wiring, and all control
wiring shall be the responsibility of the Plumbing Contractor.
4. Each trade shall determine the locations and size of all chases and
openings required for the proper installation of their work, and shall
see that such are provided. Where it is necessary to run pipes or
ducts through walls or footings, the trade performing the work shall
notify the General Contractor so that proper provisions can be
made for same. Each trade shall furnish and set all inserts,
sleeves, hangers, and supports required for their work and shall be
responsible for their proper and permanent locations. No
waterproofing shall be cut for any purpose, except on written
approval of the Engineer. No cutting of any part of the supporting
structure or finish of the building shall be done without the approval
of the. Engineer.
REFERENCES
A. North Carolina State Building Code, Volume 2, Plumbing, latest edition, is
hereby incorporated into and made a part of these specifications and their
provisions shall be carried out by the Contractor. Installation shall also
meet local plumbing inspection approval. All materials used shall be new
unless otherwise shown or called for, and shall be furnished in
accordance with the standard specification of the American Society of
Testing Materials, the American Society of Mechanical Engineers, and
other guide specifications.
SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor shall submit six (6) copies of complete shop drawings to
the Engineer for approval.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. All materials shall be delivered, stored and handled in a manner to protect
the materials from damage and deterioration and in strict accordance with
the manufacturer's instructions.
A. All materials shall be warranted to be free from defects in workmanship
and materials for one (1) year after acceptance.
Rev. 3/19/07 PROJECT # 07712 16400 - Page 2

1.07 MANUFACTURER AND SUPPLIER INFORMATION
A. Manufacturer Nameplate: A manufacturer's nameplate shall be securely
and permanently mounted to each individual piece of equipment furnished
under this Section. The nameplate shall be constructed of a durable, non-
corrosive material. Critical information shall be clearly engraved or
otherwise permanently stamped on the nameplate, and shall be fully
legible. The information contained on the manufacturer nameplate shall
include at least the following:
Manufacturer's Serial Number
2. Name, address and telephone number of equipment manufacturer
3. Model and/or Part Number, including pump impeller sizes, when
applicable
4. Performance Criteria (i.e., capacity, design point, etc.)
5. Motor size, speed and voltage
6. Enclosure Type or Rating
7. Any other pertinent information
Note: All equipment shall include a nameplate with a manufacturer serial
number validating the equipment as new. Failure to meet these
requirements will be cause for rejection of the equipment.
B. Supplier and Service Information: A durable nameplate, stamp or sticker
shall be adhered to each individual piece of equipment containing the
name, address, and telephone number of the local business that supplied
the equipment, and the name, address and telephone number of the local
business that can provide service and replacement parts for the
equipment. A 24-hour emergency service telephone number should also
be included.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. All back bent piping 2" or less, shall be standard weight galvanized steel
with malleable iron screw type fittings.
B. All soil and waste lines, mains, stacks, branches inside of building, and all
vents 2-1/2" and larger shall be standard weight, tarred cast iron, hub and
spigot pipe with equivalent fittings or PVC waste piping.
Rev. 3/19/07 PROJECT # 07712 15400 - Page 3

C. From a point 3'-0" outside the building all pipe for exterior sanitary sewers
shall be service weight, tarred cast iron, hub and spigot pipe with
equivalent fittings.
D. All hot water piping, hot water return, and cold water piping shall be Type
L hard copper tubing with wrought copper sweated fittings. Copper pipe
shall conform to ASTM Specifications B-88 and fittings shall conform to
ASA Specifications B-16-22.
E. All cold water piping underground shall be type "K" seamless soft type
copper tubing.
2.02 EQUIPMENT
A. General:
1. All fixtures specified hereinafter, or shown on Drawings, unless
noted otherwise, are the products of Kohler Plumbing Company,
which is used as a guide. Fixtures by other manufacturers may be
acceptable, provided they are of the same type, quality, and
operations. Any fixtures substituted shall be subject to the written
approval of the Engineer.
2. All fixtures shall be of the best of their respective makes and shall
be properly handled, carefully uncrated, erected and set in place.
On completion, all fixtures shall be properly cleaned and adjusted
and left -in readiness for use. The Contractor shall assume all
responsibility for the proper protection of all fixtures to insure that
they shall be in good condition for acceptance.
3. Exposed metal parts of all fittings, unless otherwise note, shall be
polished chromium finish or nickel -plated brass. All service sinks
shall be cast iron enameled fixtures in acid -resisting enamel. All
fixtures shall have individual keytype cut-off stops. on cold and/or
hot water lines. Where they are not specified as a part of the
fittings, they shall be installed in supply lines as close to fixture as
possible.
4. Fittings, unless specified otherwise, shall be the products of the
manufacturer whose fixtures are used. All fittings shall be plainly
marked with the manufacturer's name or trademark for purposes of
easy identification. No slip joints will be permitted on the sewer
side of any fixture trap. Flush valves shall be complete with an
integral shut-off and factory supplied approved vacuum breaker.
Rev. 3119107 PROJECT # 07712 15400 - Page 4

B. Electric Water Heater:
1. Provide an automatic water heater with a glass lined steel tank
having extra thick fiberglass insulation and encased in a steel
enclosing jacket. Tank shall be hydrostatically tested at 300
pounds per square inch. Each electric heating element shall be
provided with a thermostat to control water temperatures. The hot
water heater shall be electric with automatic controls and approved
by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. The storage capacity and
recovery capacity shall -be as shown on the drawings.
2. Tank shall be heavy gauge steel with inner lining of improved glass
or copper. Tank shall have insulation completely around tank, top
and bottom. There shall be a hose thread drain valve at bottom of
tank and any pipe nipples used in water connections shall have
interior surface to match interior surface or tank. Dielectric unions
shall be used to connect glass -coated galvanized pipe nipples to
copper water pipe. The water heater shall have a jacket of cold
rolled steel with white baked -on enamel finish. Jacket shall have
provisions for access to all controls and heating elements. The
heater shall be equipped with an ASME relief valve, approved for
pressure and' load, piped to drain if available, or to 4" above the
floor. Controls shall allow adjustment of temperature up to 160'
degrees. The electric heating element shall be copper sheeted
immersion type element and shall be installed with thermostat hot
water tap, and cold water inlet baffle.
3. The electric hot water heater shall be set dead level in both
directions, and shall have piping connections as shown on the
drawings. The electric hot water heater shall be protected during
construction and all solder or solder flux removed from the top. It
shall be cleaned and all construction dirt removed at the completion
of the project.
C. Dielectric Unions: Provide dielectric unions on the inlet and outlet
connection to water heaters storage tanks; and at all places where
dissimilar metals join in piping and plumbing systems.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. The piping shown on the drawings shall be installed, complete, and shall
be of the size shown on the drawings. When a pipe size is not indicated,
the plumbing contractor shall request the pipe size from the Engineer
through the General Contractor. All piping shall be installed parallel or
Rev. 31191.07 PROJECT # 07712 15400 - Page 5

perpendicular to the building construction. All piping shall be installed so
as to allow for expansion.
B. Contractor shall provide metal sleeves for pipes which will pass through
floors, ceiling, masonry, or partition walls. Sleeves shall be the full length
of wall thickness, and shall be installed during the building construction so
as to prevent any unnecessary cutting of brick or concrete after it is in
place. Sleeve shall be of sufficient size to accommodate insulation where
applicable. After piping is installed, caulk around piping to seal off sleeves
to the exterior, using oakum and a bituminous mastic at least 1" in depth.
C. 'Pipe Sleeves shall be used in all masonry work and in all poured concrete
floor and wall construction. Sleeves shall be of a size large enough to
accommodate all piping insulation. Pipe sleeves shall be
factory -fabricated with not less than 26-gauge metal with tight fitting round
cropped tops; or if shop fabricated shall not be less than 22-gauge metal.
Pipe sleeves through the floor shall extend V above floor level. Sleeves
in walls shall flush with both sides of the wall.
D. In general, all pipe -in finished spaces shall be run concealed in floors,
walls, partitions, and above ceilings. Where possible concealment of
piping and covering of same shall not be done until authorized by the
Engineer, after proper tests have been made. This applies to all interior
work and exterior work.
E. Cast iron pipe joints in hub and spigot cast iron pipe, or between cast iron
pipe and threaded pipe or caulking ferrules, shall be firmly packed with a
layer of oakum and caulked with lead at least 1" deep, made with one
continuous pouring. Threaded joints in all pipe shall have American
National Taper Screw threads with graphite and oil compound applied to
the male thread only. Joints in copper tubing to be rearmed, cleaned,
fluxed, and soldered within 95% tin and 5% antimony solder.
F. All piping, whether exposed or concealed, shall be substantially supported
and made secure, and shall have provision of expansion. Hangers in
horizontal runs of pipe shall be installed at all points where piping changes
direction and 5'-0" apart for cast iron, waste and soil pipe, and 7'-0" apart
for all other piping.
G. In all finished spaces, rods shall be fitted with approved type chrome
plated cast brass plates with setscrews.
H. Gate, Globe and Check valves shall be installed where indicated or on all
hot and cold water lines and shall be first quality products. Check valves
shall be all bronze swing check type designed for 125 psi working
pressure.
Rev. 3/19/07 PROJECT # 07712 15400 - Page 6

I. Hose bibbs or capped nipples shall be provided at all low points in the
water system to allow for complete drainage of the system. Install metal
cleanouts in iron pipe where indicated on plumbing diagram and at all
risers and changers in direction of piping. Cleanouts shall be so installed
as to provide satisfactory rodding of the entire sewage and waste system.
J. Vacuum breakers shall be provided on each hose outlet. This includes
hose bibbs, service sinks, wall hydrants, etc. Air chambers shall be
provided' on the water supply to each plumbing fixture. Air chambers shall
be one pipe size larger than the line in which they occur and shall extend
vertically 1.8" up and cap. Vent pipes shall extend approximately 9" above
roof. Flashing shall be of 4 pound sheet lead with flange extending 8" in
all directions from the pipe under the roofing material and carried up and
turned down into the pipe to form a watertight joint.
3.02 TESTING
A. Complete connections for all fixtures, traps, wastes, vents, hot and cold
water and other plumbing items shall be provided regardless as to each
item being specifically referred to or specified, and all left in first class
sanitary conditions, ready for use.
B. All soil, waste, vent and water piping shall be tested by the Contractor in
the presence of the Engineer or his representative, and shall be approved
by the Engineer before acceptance. All piping located underground or
concealed in building construction shall be tested before backfilling or -
concealing pipe. all tests required for equipment shall be furnished by the
Contractor without additional cost to the Owner.
C. The entire drainage and venting system shall have all necessary openings
plugged to permit the entire system to be filled with water to the level of
the highest vent stack above the roof or a minimum of 10'-0". Where a
portion of the system is to be tested, the test shall be conducted in the
same manner as described for the entire system, except that a vertical
stack 10'-0" above the highest horizontal line to be tested shall be
installed and filled with water to maintain sufficient pressure. Under any
test, the pressure shall remain constant for not less than 30 minutes
without any further addition of water or air. Contractor shall notify the
Engineer 48 hours in advance when test is to be performed.
D. Upon completion of roughing -in and before setting fixtures, the entire hot
and cold water system shall be tested at a hydrostatic pressure of not less
than 100 pounds per square inch gauge, and proven tight at this pressure.
Where a portion of the water system is to be concealed before
Rev. 3/19/07 PROJECT # 07712 15400 - Page 7

completion, this portion shall be tested separately in the same manner as
described for the entire system.
E. Where any leaks are discovered at joints, a new joint will be made. No
caulking of any faulty joints will be permitted. Tests for the entire system
will be repeated after new joints are made:
END OF SECTION
Rev. 3119/07 PROJECT # 07712 15400 - Page 8

SECTION 16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to
this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Supporting devices for electrical components.
2. Electricity metering equipment.
3. Cutting and patching for electrical construction.
4. Touchup painting.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.04 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, sleeves, and openings with general
construction work and arrange in building structure during progress of
construction to facilitate the electrical installations that follow.
1. Set inserts and sleeves in poured -in -place concrete, masonry work,
and other structural components as they are constructed.
B. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and
equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installing large
equipment requiring positioning before closing in the building.
C. Coordinate electrical service connections to components furnished by
utility companies.
Rev. 3/22107 PROJECT # 07712 16050 - Page 1

1. Coordinate installation and connection of exterior. underground
utilities and services, including provision for electricity -metering
components and pad -mounted transformer foundations.
2. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and of
utility company providing electrical power and other services.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 SUPPORTING DEVICES
A. Material: Hot -dip galvanized steel.
B.' Slotted -Steel Channel Supports:, Flange edges turned toward web, and
9/16-inch- diameter slotted holes at a maximum. of 2 inches o.c., in webs.
1. Channel Thickness: Selected to suit structural loading.
2. Fittings and Accessories: Products of the same manufacturer as
channel supports.
C. Raceway and Cable Supports: Manufactured clevis hangers, riser
clamps, straps, threaded C-clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers,
wall brackets, and spring -steel clamps or click -type hangers.
D. Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized
steel, plain ends.
E. Expansion Anchors: Carbon -steel wedge or sleeve type.
F. Toggle Bolts: All -steel springhead type.
2.02 TOUCHUP PAINT
A. For Equipment: Equipment manufacturer's paint selected to match
installed equipment finish.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc -rich paint recommended by item manufacturer.
Rev. 3/22107 PROJECT # 07712 16050 - Page 2

PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are
not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide
the maximum possible headroom.
B. Materials and Components: Install level, plumb, and parallel and
perpendicular to other building systems and components, unless
otherwise indicated.
C. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or
replacement of components. Connect for ease of disconnecting, with
minimum interference with other installations.
D. Right of WaV: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required
slope.
3.02 ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICE APPLICATION
A. Hot -dip galvanized materials or nonmetallic, U-channel system
components.
B. Selection of Supports: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Strength of Supports: Adequate to carry present and future loads, times a
safety factor of at least four; minimum of 200-lb design load.
3.03 SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Install support devices to securely and permanently fasten and support
electrical components.
B. Install individual and multiple raceway hangers and riser clamps to support
raceways. Provide U-bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware
necessary for hanger assemblies and for securing hanger rods and
conduits.
C. Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze- or
bracket -type hangers.
D. Size supports for multiple raceway installations so capacity can be
increased by a 25 percent minimum in the future.
Rev. 3/22/07 PROJECT # 07712 16050 - Page 3

E. Support individual horizontal raceways with separate, malleable -iron pipe
hangers or clamps.
F. Install 1/4-inch- diameter or larger threaded steel hanger rods, unless
otherwise indicated.
G. Arrange supports for conduits installed on the interior of exterior walls to
provide a minimum clearance from the wall surface of
H. Separately support cast boxes that are threaded to raceways and used for
fixture support.
I. Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnect
switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, and other devices
unless components are mounted directly to structural elements of
adequate strength.
J. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of concrete slabs and
walls unless core -drilled holes are used. Install sleeves during erection of
concrete and masonry walls..
K. -Securely fasten electrical items and their supports to the building structure,
unless otherwise indicated. Perform fastening according to the following
unless other fastening methods are indicated:
1. Masonry: Toggle bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion
bolts on solid masonry units.
2. New Concrete: Concrete inserts with machine screws and bolts.
3. Existing Concrete: Expansion bolts.
4. Steel: Welded threaded studs or spring -tension clamps on steel.
a. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.
5. Welding to steel structure may be used only for threaded studs, not
for conduits, pipe straps, or other items.
6. Fasteners: Select so the load applied to each fastener does not
exceed 25 percent of its proof -test load.
3.04 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, ceilings, and other surfaces
required to permit electrical installations. Perform cutting by skilled
mechanics of trades involved.
B. Repair and refinish disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match
adjacent undisturbed surfaces. Install new fireproofing where existing
Rev. 3/22/07 PROJECT # 07712 16050 - Page 4

firestopping has been disturbed. Repair and refinish materials and other
surfaces by skilled mechanics of trades involved.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect installed components for damage and faulty work, including the
following:
1. Supporting devices for electrical components.
2. Cutting and patching for electrical construction.
3. Touchup painting.
3.06 REFINISHING AND TOUCHUP PAINTING
A. Refinish and touch up paint. Paint materials and application requirements
are specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."
3.07 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. On completion of installation inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt,
paint spots, and construction debris.
B. Protect equipment and installations and maintain conditions to ensure that
coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at
time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION,
Rev. 3/22/07 PROJECT # 07712 16050 - Page 5

SECTION 16051 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions, of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division,1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Electrical equipment coordination and installation.
2. Common electrical installation requirements.
1.03 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment:
1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights
that reduce headroom are indicated.
2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum
interference to other installations.
3. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope.
4. So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will
be clear of obstructions and of the working and access space of other
equipment.
PART 2: PRODUCTS (not used)
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1.
Rev. 3/22/07 PROJECT # 07712 16051 - Page 1

B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and
to center of unit for wall -mounting items.
C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not
indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum
possible headroom consistent with these requirements.
D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement
of components of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations.
Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum
interference with other items in the vicinity.
E. Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope.
END OF SECTION
Rev. 3/22/07 PROJECT # 07712 16051 - Page 2

SECTION 16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes methods and materials for grounding systems and
equipment.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Other Informational Submittals: Plans showing dimensioned as -built locations
of grounding features specified in Part 3 "Field Quality Control" Article, including
the following:
1. Ground rods.
C. Field quality -control test reports.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, -and Accessories: Listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 CONDUCTORS
A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless
otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.
Rev. 3/22107 PROJECT # 07712 16060 - Page 1

B. Bare Copper Conductors:
1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.
2. - Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.
3. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.
4. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with
copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick.
2.02 CONNECTORS
A. Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific
types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.
B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted
pressure -type, with at least two bolts.
1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.
C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic -welding kits of types recommended by kit
- manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions.
2.03 GROUNDING ELECTRODES
A. Ground Rods: steel; 3/4 inch by10 feet (19 mm by 3 m) in diameter.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 APPLICATIONS
A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded
conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare copper conductor, No.
2/0 AWG minimum.
1. Bury at least 24 inches (600 mm) below grade.
C. Conductor Terminations and Connections:
1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted
connectors.
2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors.
Rev. 3/22/07 PROJECT # 07712 16060 - Page 2

3.02 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch
circuits.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Groundinq Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible,
unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or
placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.
B. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches (50 mm) below finished floor or
final grade, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Interconnect ground rods With grounding electrode conductor below grade
and as otherwise indicated.' Make connections without exposing steel or
damaging coating, if any.
2. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least
one -rod length from each other and located at least the same distance
from other grounding electrodes, and connect to the service grounding
electrode conductor.
C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and
maintenance, except where routed through short lengths of conduit,
1. Bondinq to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care
not to penetrate any adjacent parts.
2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and
Supports: Install so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted
equipment.
3. Use exothermic -welded connectors for outdoor 'locations, but if a
disconnect -type connection is required, use a bolted clamp.
D. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:
1. Metal Piping: Install insulated copper grounding conductors; in conduit,
from building's main service equipment to main metal water piping
entrance to pump building. Connect grounding conductors to pipes, using
a bolted clamp connector or by bolting a lug -type connector to a pipe
flange, using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main
water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of
fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at
each end.
Rev. 3122107 PROJECT # 07712 16060 - Page 3

3.04. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. After installing. grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits
have been energized, test for compliance with requirements.
2. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum
ground -resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure
grounding terminal, at ground test wells, and at individual ground rods.
Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected.
a. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after last trace
of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other
than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or
other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance.
b. Perform tests by fall -of -potential method according to IEEE 81.
3. Prepare dimensioned drawings locating each test well, ground rod and
ground rod assembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by
letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and
observations. Include the number of rods driven and their depth at each
location, and include observations of weather and other phenomena that
may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results.
B. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:
1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity 500 WA and
Less: 10 ohms.
C. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified
values, notify Engineer promptly and include recommendations to reduce
ground resistance.
END OF SECTION
Rev. 3/22/07 PROJECT # 07712 . 16060 - Page 4

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16073 SYSTEMS
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.
2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
B. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.
1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of
supported equipment and connected systems and components.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Steel slotted support systems.
1.06 . QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with NFPA 70.
Rev. 3/22/07 PROJECT # 07712 16073 - Page 1

1.07 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor -bolt inserts into
bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in
Division 3.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory -fabricated
components for field assembly.
1. Metallic Coatings: Hot -dip galvanized after fabrication and applied
according to MFMA-4.
2. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.
B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.
C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel, hangers, clamps, and associated
fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.
D. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M,
steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
E. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening
electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following:
1. Mechanical -Expansion Anchors: Insert -wedge -type, zinc -coated stainless
steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear,
and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building
materials in which used.
2. Concrete Inserts: Steel or. malleable -iron, slotted support system units
similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.
3. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type
suitable for attached structural element.
4. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with
ASTM A 325.
5. Toggle Bolts: All -steel springhead type.
6. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.
Rev. 3122/07 PROJECT # 07712 16073 - Page 2

PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 APPLICATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for
electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are
stricter.
B. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze -type supports fabricated with
steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25
percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits.
1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two -bolt conduit
clamps.
3.02 SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as
specified in this Article.
B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, IMC,
and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as
permitted in NFPA 70.
C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of
components so strength will be adequate to carry present. and future static
loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for
strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 Ib (90
kg).
D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface -Mounted Equipment and Components:
Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural
elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:
1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.
2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.
3. To Masonry: Approved toggle -type bolts on hollow masonry units and
expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units.
4. To Existinq Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.
5. To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with
lock washers and nuts Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27)
complying with MSS SP-69.
6. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.
Rev. 3122107 PROJECT # 07712 16073 - Page 3

7. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Buildinq Surfaces:
Mount cabinets, panelb.oards, disconnect switches, control enclosures,
pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted -
channel racks attached to substrate.
E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that
avoid reinforcing bars.
3.03 CONCRETE BASES
A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches
(100 mm) larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a
minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base.
B. Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive -strength concrete. Concrete
materials, reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in
Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete."
C. Anchor equipment to concrete base.
1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment
manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and
directions furnished with 'items to be embedded.
2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to
supported equipment.
3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor -bolt manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.04 PAINTING
A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed
areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as
used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up
field -painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0
mils (0.05 mm).
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and
apply galvanizing -repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION
Rev. 3122/07 PROJECT # 07712 16073 - Page 4

SECTION 16120 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less.
2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Field quality -control test reports.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70.
B. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THHN-THWN.
Rev. 3122/07 PROJECT # 07712 16120 - Page 1

2.02 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
A. Description: Factory -fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating,
material, type, and class for application and service indicated.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Moh
CONDUCTOR INSULATION APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS
Service Entrance: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
Feeders: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
Branch Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.
Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.
INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Use manufacturer -approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary;
compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed
manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure
values.
B. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket -weave
wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.
C. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed
structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.
D. Support cables according to Division 16 Section "Hangers And Supports For
Electrical Systems."
E. Identify and color -code conductors and cables to match existing color coding or
as required by Code.
3.03 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's
published torque -tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not
indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
Rev. 3122/07 PROJECT # 07712 16120 - Page 2

B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that
possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than
unspliced conductors.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has
been energized, test conductors for compliance with requirements.
2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated
in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test
parameters.
C. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:
1. Test procedures used.
2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action
taken to achieve compliance with requirements.
D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
END OF SECTION
Rev. 3/22107 PROJECT # 07712 16120 - Page 3

SECTION 16130 RACEWAYS AND BOXES
PART 1:- GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for
electrical wiring.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
B. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
C. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING
A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.
B. WC: ANSI C80.6.
C. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.
Rev. 3122/07 PROJECT # 07712 16130 - Page 1

D. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Liquidtight): NEMA FB 1; listed for
type and size raceway with which used, and for application and environment in
which installed.
E. Joint Compound for Rigid Steel Conduit or IMC: Listed for use in cable
connector assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect
threaded raceway joints from corrosion and enhance their conductivity.
2.02 METAL WIREWAYS
A. Description: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 250, Type 3R,
unless otherwise indicated.
B. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints,
adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with
wireways as required for complete system.
C. Wireway Covers: Screw -cover type.
D. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.
2.03 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
A. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
B. Cast -Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with
gasketed cover.
C. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
D. Cast -Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, galvanized, cast
iron with gasketed cover.
E. Hinged -Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous -hinge cover
with flush latch, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's
standard enamel.
F. Cabinets:
1. NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized -steel box with removable interior panel
and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard
enamel.
2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.
3. Key latch to match panelboards.
Rev. 3/22107 PROJECT # 07712 16130 - Page 2

4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.
2.04 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING
A. Description: Comply with SCTE 77.
1. Color of Frame and Cover: Gray.
2. Configuration: Units shall be designed for flush burial and have open
bottom, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper -resistant locking devices and
having structural load rating consistent with enclosure.
4. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of
0.50.
5. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC."
6. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit -terminating fittings shall mate with
entering ducts for secure, fixed installation.in enclosure wall.
7. Handholes 12 inches wide by 24 inches long (300 mm wide by 600 mm
long) and larger shall have inserts for cable racks and pulling -in irons
installed before concrete is poured.
B. Polymer -Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer -Concrete Cover:
Molded of sand and aggregate, bound together with polymer resin, and
reinforced with steel or fiberglass or a combination of the two.
2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL FOR UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURES
A. Handhole and Pull -Box Prototype Test: Test prototypes of handholes and
boxes for compliance with SCTE 77. Strength tests shall be for specified tier
ratings of products supplied..
1. Tests of materials shall be performed by a independent testing agency.
2. Strength tests of complete boxes and covers shall be by either an
independent testing agency or manufacturer. A qualified registered
professional engineer shall certify tests by manufacturer.
3. Testing machine pressure gages shall have current calibration certification
complying with ISO 9000 and. ISO 10012, and traceable to NIST
standards.
Rev. 3/22107 PROJECT # 07712 16130 - Page 3

PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 RACEWAY APPLICATION
A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise
indicated:
1. Exposed Conduit: Rigid steel conduit or IMC.
2. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC- 40-PVC, direct buried.
3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic,
Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor -Driven Equipment): LFMC.
4. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
5. Application of Handholes and Boxes for Underground Wiring:
a. Handholes and Pull Boxes in Driveway, Parking Lot, and Off -
Roadway Locations, Subject to Occasional, Nondeliberate Loading
by Heavy .Vehicles: - Polymer concrete, SCTE 77, Tier 15 structural
load rating.
B. Comply with the following indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Exposed: Rigid steel conduit or IMC.
2. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic,
Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor -Driven Equipment): LFMC.
3. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250,
Type 4, stainless steel in damp or wet locations.
C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch (21-mm) trade size.
D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.
1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit
fittings, unless otherwise indicated.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products
specified in Part 2 except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are
stricter.
B. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
C. Support raceways as specified in Division 16 Section "Hangers And Supports
For Electrical Systems."
Rev. 3/22107 PROJECT # 07712 16130 - Page 4

D. Arrange stub -ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished
slab.
E. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run.
F. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor
Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before
making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.
G. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use
insulating bushings to protect conductors, including conductors smaller than
No. 4 AWG.
H. Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches (1830 mm) of
flexible conduit for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or
movement; and for transformers and motors.
Use LFMC.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT
A. Direct -Buried Conduit:
1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit.
Prepare trench bottom as specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for
pipe less than 6 inches (150 mm) in nominal diameter.
2. Install backfill as specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
3. After installing condult, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work
toward end of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with
expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process.
Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting
strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches (300 mm) of
finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete
backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Division 2 Section
"Earthwork."
4. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub -ups at poles and
equipment and at building entrances.
a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this
purpose.
b. For stub -ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases,
extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches (1500 mm)
from edge of equipment pad or foundation. Install insulated
grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.
Rev. 3122107 PROJECT # 07712 16130 - Page 5

3.04 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES
A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth
coordinated with connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections
required for proper entrances.
B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or
gravel, graded from 1/2-inch (12.5-mm) sieve to No. 4 (4:75-mm) sieve and
compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.
C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished
grade. Set covers of other enclosures 1 inch (25 mm) above finished grade.
D. Install handholes and boxes with bottom below the frost line.
E. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable
arms, and insulators; as -required for installation and support of cables and
conductors and as indicated. Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide
spare space for future cables, but short enough to preserve adequate working
clearances in the enclosure.
F. Field -cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written
instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut.
Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after
fittings are installed.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes,
and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial
Completion.
1.. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc -rich paint recommended
by manufacturer.
2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating
recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
Rev. 3122107 PROJECT # 07712 16130 - Page 6

SECTION 16231 PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes packaged gas -engine generator sets with the following
features and accessories:
1. Battery charger.
2. Engine -generator set.
3. Muffler.
4. Outdoor enclosure.
5. Starting battery.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 16 Section "Transfer Switches" for transfer switches including
sensors and relays to initiate automatic -starting and -stopping signals for
engine -generator sets.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Operational Bandwidth: The total variation from the lowest to highest value of a
parameter over the range of conditions indicated, expressed as a percentage of
the nominal value of the parameter.
B. Steady -State Voltage Modulation: The uniform cyclical variation of voltage
within the operational bandwidth, expressed in Hertz or cycles per second.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include the following:
1. Data on features, components, accessories ratings, and performance.
Rev. 3122/07 PROJECT # 07712 16231 -Pagel

2. Thermal damage curve for generator.
3. Time -current characteristic curves for generator protective device.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions,
weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components,
and location and size of each field connection.
1. Dimensioned outline plan and elevation drawings of engine -generator set
and other components specified.
2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Qualification Data: For Installer.
D. Certified summary of prototype -unit test report.
E. Certified Test Reports: For components and accessories that are equivalent,
but not identical, to those tested on prototype unit.
F. Certified Summary of Performance Tests: Demonstrate compliance with
specified requirement to meet performance criteria for sensitive loads.
G. Test Reports:
1. Report of factory test on units to be shipped for this Project, showing
evidence of compliance with specified requirements. /_
2. Report of sound generation.
3. Field quality -control test reports.
H. Certification of Torsional Vibration Compatibility: Comply with NFPA 110.
I. Operation and Maintenance Data: For packaged engine generators to include
in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items
specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures," include the following:
1. List of tools and replacement items recommended to be stored at the
Project for ready access. Include part and drawing numbers, current unit
prices, and source of supply.
J. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained
and approved for installation of units required for this Project.
Rev. 3/22107 PROJECT # 07712 16231 - Page 2

1. Maintenance Proximity: Not more than four hours' normal travel time from
Installer's place of business to Project site.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer. Maintain, within 200
.miles of Project site, a service center capable of providing training, parts, and
emergency maintenance repairs.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain packaged generator sets and auxiliary components
through one source from a single manufacturer.
D. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional
requirements of packaged generator sets and are based on the specific system
indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."
E. Electrical Components. Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as
defined in, NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
F. Comply with NFPA 37.
G. Comply with NFPA 70.
H. Engine Exhaust Emissions: Comply with applicable state and local government
requirements.
I. Noise Emission: Comply with applicable state and local government
requirements for maximum noise level at adjacent property boundaries due to
sound emitted by generator set including engine, engine exhaust, engine
cooling -air intake and discharge, and other components of installation.
1.06. COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor -bolt inserts into
bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in
Division 3.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees
to repair or replace components of packaged engine generators and associated
auxiliary components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
Rev. 3/22/07 PROJECT # 07712 16231 - Page 3

1.08 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12
months' full maintenance by skilled employees of manufacturer's designated
service organization. Include quarterly exercising to check for proper starting,
load transfer, and running under load. Include routine preventive maintenance
as recommended - by manufacturer and adjusting as required for proper
operation. Maintenance agreements shall include parts and supplies as used in
manufacture and installation of original equipment.
1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that
are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels
describing contents.
1. Fuses: One for every 10 of each type and rating, but not less than one of
each.
2. Indicator Lamps: Two for every six of each type used, but not less than
two of each.
3. Filters: One set each of lubricating oil, fuel, and combustion -air filters.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 ENGINE -GENERATOR SET
A. Packaged engine -generator set shall be a coordinated assembly of compatible
components.
B. Power Output Ratings: Nominal ratings as indicated, with capacity as required
to operate as a unit as evidenced by records of prototype testing.
C. Output Connections: Three phase, four wire.
D. SafetV Standard: Comply with ASME B15.1.
E. Nameplates: Each major system component shall be equipped with a
nameplate to identify manufacturer's name and address, and model and serial
number of component.
F. Fabricate engine -generator -set mounting frame and attachment of components
to resist generator -set movement during a seismic event when generator -set
mounting frame is anchored to building structure.
Rev. 3/22/07 PROJECT # 07712 16231 - Page 4

G. Mounting Frame: Adequate strength and rigidity to maintain alignment of
mounted components without depending on concrete foundation. Mounting
frame shall be free from sharp edges and corners and shall have lifting
attachments arranged for lifting with slings without damaging components.
2.02 GENERATOR -SET PERFORMANCE
A. Retain this Article for loads involving sensitive electronic equipment, 'significant
nonlinear load elements, or uninterruptible power supply systems. Coordinate
with "Governor" and "Generator, Exciter, and Voltage Regulator" articles. See
Evaluations.
B. Steady -State Voltage Operational Bandwidth: 3 percent of rated output voltage
from no load to full load.
C. Transient Voltage Performance: Not more than 20 percent variation for 50
percent step -load increase or decrease. Voltage shall recover and remain
within the steady-state operating band within three seconds.
D. Steady -State Frequency Operational Bandwidth: 0.5 percent of rated frequency
from no load to full load.
E. Steady -State Frequency Stability: When system is operating at any constant
load within the rated load, there shall be no random speed variations outside
the steady-state operational band and no hunting or surging of speed.
F. Transient Frequency Performance: Less than 5 percent variation for 50 percent
step -load increase or decrease. Frequency shall recover and remain within the
steady-state operating band within five seconds.
G. Output Waveform: At no load, harmonic content measured line to line or line to
neutral shall not exceed 5 percent total and 3 percent for single harmonics.
Telephone influence factor, determined according to - NEMA MG 1, shall not
exceed 50 percent.
H. Sustained Short -Circuit Current: For -a 3-phase, bolted short circuit at system
output terminals, system shall supply a minimum of 250 percent of rated full -
load current for not less than 10 seconds and then clear the fault automatically,
without damage to generator system components.
Below requires 10-second maximum start time under specific conditions and
includes startup only, not load assumption.
J. StartTime: Comply with NFPA 110, Type 10, system requirements.
Rev. 3/22/07 PROJECT # 07712 16231 - Page 5

2.03 SERVICE CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Engine -generator system shall withstand the
following environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or
degradation of performance capability:
1. Ambient Temperature: Minus 15 to plus 40 deg C.
2. Relative Humidity 0 to 95 percent.
3. Altitude: Sea level to 2200 feet.
2.04 ENGINE
A. Fuel: Diesel
B. Rated Engine Speed: 1800 rpm.
C. Maximum Piston Speed for Four -Cycle Engines: 2250 fpm.
D. Lubrication System: The. following items are mounted on engine or skid:
1. Filter and Strainer: Rated to remove 90 percent of particles 5 micrometers
and smaller while passing full flow.
2. Thermostatic Control Valve: Control flow in system to maintain optimum
oil temperature. Unit shall be capable of full flow and is designed to be
fail-safe.
3. Crankcase Drain: Arranged for complete gravity drainage to an easily
removable container with no disassembly and without use of pumps,
siphons, special tools, or appliances.
E. Engine Fuel System:
1. Diesel System:
a, Carburetor.
b. Secondary Gas Regulators: Yes.
C. Fuel -Shutoff Solenoid Valves: Yes.
d. Flexible Fuel Connectors: Yes.
F. Coolant Jacket Heater: Electric -immersion type, factory installed in coolant
jacket system. Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 equipment for
heater capacity.
G. Governor: Adjustable isochronous, with speed sensing.
Rev. 3/22107 PROJECT # 07712 16231 - Page 6

U
2.05 ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
A. Description: Closed loop, liquid cooled, with, radiator factory mounted on
engine -generator -set mounting frame and integral engine -driven coolant pump.
B. Radiator: Rated for specified coolant.
C. Coolant: Solution of 50 percent ethylene -glycol -based antifreeze and 50
percent water, with anticorrosion additives as recommended by engine
manufacturer.
D. Temperature Control: Self-contained, thermostatic -control valve modulates
coolant flow automatically to maintain optimum constant coolant temperature as
recommended by engine manufacturer.
E. Coolant Hose: Flexible assembly with inside surface of nonporous rubber and
outer covering of aging-, ultraviolet-, and abrasion -resistant fabric.
1. Rating: 50-psig maximum working pressure with coolant at 180 deg F,
and noncollapsible under vacuum.
2. End Fittings: Flanges or steel pipe nipples with clamps to suit piping and
equipment connections.
2.06 FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEM
A. Comply with NFPA 54 and NFPA 58.
2.07 ENGINE EXHAUST SYSTEM
A. Muffler: Critical type, sized as recommended by engine manufacturer; sound
level measured at a distance of 10 feet from exhaust discharge shall be 85 dBA
or less.
B. Condensate Drain for Muffler: Schedule 40, black steel pipe connected to
muffler drain outlet through a petcock.
C. Connection from Engine to Exhaust System: Flexible section of corrugated
stainless -steel pipe.
D. Connection from Exhaust Pipe to Muffler: Stainless -steel expansion joint with
liner.
Rev. 3/22107 PROJECT # 07712 16231 - Page 7

2.08 COMBUSTION -AIR INTAKE
A. Description: Heavy-duty, engine -mounted air cleaner with replaceable dry -filter
element and "blocked filter" indicator.
2.09 STARTING SYSTEM
A. Description: 24-V electric, with negative ground and including the following
items:
1. Components: Sized so they will not be damaged during a full engine -
cranking cycle with ambient temperature at maximum specified in
"Environmental Conditions" Paragraph in "Service Conditions" Article.
2. Cranking Motor: Heavy-duty unit that automatically engages and releases
from engine flywheel without binding.
3. Cranking Cycle: As required by NFPA 110 for system level specified.
4. Battery: Adequate capacity within ambient temperature range specified in
."Environmental Conditions" Paragraph in "Service Conditions" Article to
provide specified cranking cycle at least three times without recharging.
5. Battery Cable: Size as recommended by engine manufacturer for cable
length indicated. Include required interconnecting conductors and
connection accessories.
6. Battery Compartment: Factory fabricated of metal with acid -resistant
finish and thermal insulation. Thermostatically controlled heater shall be
arranged to maintain battery above 10 deg C regardless of external
ambient temperature within range specified in "Environmental Conditions"
Paragraph in "Service Conditions" Article. Include accessories required to
support and fasten batteries in place.
7. Battery -Charging Alternator: Factory mounted on engine with solid-state
voltage regulation and 35-A minimum continuous rating.
8. Battery Charger: Current -limiting, automatic -equalizing and float -charging
type. Unit shall comply with UL 1236 and include the following features:
a. Operation: Equalizing -charging rate of 10 A shall be initiated
automatically after battery has lost charge until an adjustable
equalizing voltage is achieved at battery terminals. Unit shall then
be automatically switched to a lower float -charging mode and shall
continue to operate in that mode until battery is discharged again.
b. Automatic Temperature Compensation: Adjust float and equalize
voltages for variations in ambient temperature from minus 40 deg C
to plus 60 deg C to prevent overcharging at high temperatures and
undercharging at low temperatures.
Rev. 3/22107 . PROJECT # 07712 16231 - Page 8

C. Automatic Voltage Regulation: Maintain constant output voltage
✓ regardless of input voltage variations up to plus or minus 10. percent.
d. Ammeter and Voltmeter: Flush mounted in door. Meters shall
indicate. charging rates.
e. Safety Functions: Sense abnormally low battery voltage and close
contacts providing low battery voltage indication on control and
monitoring panel. Sense high battery voltage and loss of ac input or
do output of battery charger. Either condition shall close contacts
that provide a battery -charger malfunction indication at system
control and monitoring panel.
f. Enclosure and Mounting: NEMA 250, Type 1, wall -mounted cabinet.
2.10 CONTROL AND MONITORING
B. Functional Description: When mode -selector switch on the control and
monitoring panel is in the automatic position, remote -control contacts in one or
more separate automatic transfer switches initiate starting and stopping of the
generator set. When mode -selector switch is switched to the on position, the
generator set starts. The off position of the same switch initiates generator -set
shutdown. When generator set is running, specified system or equipment
failures or derangements automatically shut down the generator set and initiate
alarms. Operation of a remote emergency -stop switch also shuts down the
generator set.
C. Configuration: Operating and safety indications, protective devices, basic
system controls, and engine gages shall be grouped in a common control and
monitoring panel mounted on the generator set. Mounting method shall isolate
the control panel from generator -set vibration.
D. Indicating and protective devices and controls shall include those required by
NFPA 110 for a Level 1. system, and the following:
1. AC voltmeter.
2. AC ammeter.
3. AC frequency meter.
4. DC voltmeter (alternator battery charging).
5. Engine -coolant temperature gage.
6. Engine lubricating -oil pressure gage..
7. Running -time meter.
8. Ammeter -voltmeter, phase -selector switch(es).
9. Generator -voltage adjusting rheostat.
Rev. 3/22/07 PROJECT # 0771.2 16231 - Page 9

10. Generator overload.
E. Supporting Items: Include sensors, transducers, terminals, relays, and other
devices and include wiring required to support specified items. Locate sensors
and other supporting items on engine or generator, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Connection to Data Link: A separate terminal block, factory wired to Form C
dry contacts, for each alarm and status indication is reserved for connections
for data -link transmission of indications to remote data terminals.
G. Common Remote Audible Alarm: Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for
Level 1 systems. Include necessary contacts and terminals in control and
monitoring panel.
2.11 GENERATOR OVERCURRENT AND FAULT PROTECTION
A. Generator Disconnect Switch: Molded -case type, 100 percent rated.
1. Rating: Matched to generator output rating.
2. Shunt Trip: Connected to trip switch when signaled by generator protector
or by other protective devices.
B. Generator Protector: Microprocessor -based unit that continuously monitors
current level in each phase of generator output, integrates generator heating
.effect over time, and predicts when thermal damage of the alternator will
occur. When signaled by the. protector or other generator -set protective
devices, a shunt -trip device in the generator disconnect switch shall open the
switch to disconnect the generator from the load circuits. Protector shall
perform the following functions:
Initiates a generator overload alarm when the generator has operated at
an overload equivalent to 110 percent of full -rated load for 6.0 seconds.
Indication for this alarm is integrated with other generator -set malfunction
alarms.
2. . Under single or three-phase fault conditions, regulates the generator to
300 percent of rated full -load current for up to 10 seconds.
3. As the overcurrent heating effect on the generator approaches the thermal
damage point of the unit, the protector switches the excitation system off,
opens the generator disconnect device, and shuts down the generator set.
4. Senses clearing of a fault by other overcurrent devices and controls
recovery of rated voltage to avoid overshoot.
2.12 GENERATOR, EXCITER, AND VOLTAGE REGULATOR
A. Comply with NEMA MG 1 and specified performance requirements.
Rev. 3/22107 PROJECT # 07712 16231 - Page 10

B. Drive: Generator shaft shall be directly connected to engine shaft. Exciter
shall be rotated integrally with generator rotor.
C. Electrical Insulation: Class H or Class F.
D. Stator -Winding Leads: Brought out to terminal box to permit future
reconnection for other voltages if required.
E. Construction shall prevent mechanical, electrical, and thermal damage due to
vibration, overspeed up to 125 percent of rating, and heat during operation at
110 percent of rated capacity.
F. Coordinate first paragraph below with "Generator -Set Performance" Article
selected.
G. Enclosure: Dripproof.
H. Delete first paragraph below for systems where instrument transformers are
housed in control and power panel.
I. Voltage Regulator: Solid-state type, separate from exciter, providing
performance as specified.
a. Adjusting rheostat on control and monitoring panel shall provide plus
or minus 5 percent adjustment of output=voltage operating band.
J. Strip Heater: Thermostatically controlled unit arranged to maintain stator
windings above dew point.
K. Windings: Two-thirds pitch stator winding and fully linked amortisseur
winding.
2.13 OUTDOOR GENERATOR -SET ENCLOSURE
A. Description: Vandal -resistant, weatherproof steel housing, wind resistant up
to 100 mph. Multiple panels shall. be lockable and provide adequate access
to components requiring maintenance.. Panels shall be removable by one
person without tools. Instruments and control shall be mounted within
enclosure.
2.14 FINISHES
A. Outdoor Enclosures and Components: Manufacturer's standard enamel over
corrosion -resistant pretreatment and compatible standard primer.
Rev. 3/22/07 PROJECT # 07712 16231 - Page 11

2.15 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Prototype Testing: Factory test engine -generator set using same engine
model, constructed of identical or equivalent components and equipped with
identical or equivalent accessories.
1. Consider requiring Level 1 compliance below for other than Level 1 instal-
lations to obtain benefits of specific standard requirements.
2. Tests: Comply with NFPA 110, Level 1 energy converters in Para-
graphs 3.2.1, 3.2.1.1, and 3.2.1.2.
3. Generator Tests: Comply with IEEE 115.
4. Components and Accessories: Items furnished with installed unit that are
not identical to those on tested prototype shall have been factory tested to
demonstrate compatibility and reliability.
B. Project -Specific Equipment Tests: Before shipment, factory test engine -
generator set and other system components and accessories manufactured
specifically for this Project. Perform tests at rated load and power factor.
Include the following tests:
1. Full load run.
2. Maximum power.
3. Voltage regulation.
4. Transient and steady-state governing.
5. Single-step load pickup.
6. Safety shutdown.
C. Report factory test results within 10 days of completion of test.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, equipment bases, and conditions, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting
packaged engine -generator performance.
B. Examine roughing -in of piping systems and electrical connections. Verify actual
locations of connections before packaged engine -generator installation.
Rev. 3122/07 PROJECT # 07712 16231 - Page 12

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.02 CONCRETE BASES
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Verify structural requirements
with structural engineer.
B. Concrete base is specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and
Methods," and concrete materials and installation requirements are specified in
Division 3.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with packaged engine -generator manufacturers' written installation and
alignment instructions and with NFPA 110.
B. Install packaged engine generators level on concrete base.
C. Install packaged engine generator to provide access, without removing
connections or accessories, for periodic maintenance.
D. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by equipment
manufacturers but not specified to be factory mounted.
3.04 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Sections. The
following are specific connection requirements:
1. Install fuel piping adjacent to packaged engine generator to allow service
and maintenance.
2. Connect fuel piping to engines with a gate valve and union.
B. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
C., Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
D. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's
published torque -tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not
indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
Rev. 3122/07 PROJECT # 07712 16231 - Page 13

3.05 IDENTIFICATION
A.. Identify system components according to Division 15 Section "Mechanical
Identification" and Division 16 Section " Electrical Identification."
3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service
representative to inspect, test, and adjust field -assembled components and
equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing.
Report results in writing.
B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated
in NETA ATS, Sections 7.15.2.1 and 7.22.1 (except for vibration baseline
test). Certify compliance with test parameters.
2. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer.
3. NFPA 110 Acceptance Tests: Perform tests required by NFPA 110 that
are additional to those specified here including, but not limited to, the
following:
a. Single-step full -load pickup test.
4. Battery Tests: Equalize charging of battery cells according to
manufacturer's written instructions. Record individual cell voltages.
a. Measure charging voltage and voltages between available battery
terminals for full -charging and float -charging conditions. Check
electrolyte level and specific gravity under both conditions.
b. Test for contact integrity of all connectors. Perform an integrity load
test and a capacity load test for the battery.
C. Verify acceptance of charge . for each element of the battery after
discharge.
d. Verify that measurements are within manufacturer's specifications.
5. Battery -Charger Tests: Verify specified rates of charge for both equalizing
and float -charging conditions.
6. System Integrity Tests: Methodically verify proper installation, connection,
and integrity of each element of engine -generator system before and
during system operation. Check for air, exhaust, and fluid leaks.
C. Coordinate tests with tests for transfer switches and run them concurrently.
Rev. 3/22107 PROJECT # 07712 16231 - Page 14

D. Test instruments shall have been calibrated within the last 12 months, traceable
to standards of the National Institute for Standards and Technology, and
adequate for making positive observation of test results. Make calibration
records available for examination on request.
E. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks
and retest until no leaks exist.
F. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to
confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.
G. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
controls and equipment.
H. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
I. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until
specified requirements are met.
J. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay
settings and measured insulation resistances, time delays, and other values
and observations. Attach a label or tag to each tested component indicating
satisfactory completion of tests.
3.07 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to perform startup service.
B. Inspect field -assembled components and equipment installation, including
piping and electrical connections. Report results in writing.
C. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.08 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's
maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain packaged engine
generators. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."
1. Coordinate this training with that for transfer switches.
END OF SECTION
Rev. 3/22/07 PROJECT # 07712 16231 - Page 15

SECTION 16289 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section includes field -mounted TVSS for low -voltage (120 to 600 V) power
distribution and control equipment.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. ATS: Acceptance Testing Specifications.
B. SVR: Suppressed voltage rating.
C. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor(s), both singular and plural; also,
transient voltage surge suppression.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. . Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities,
operating weights, electrical characteristics, furnished specialties, and
accessories.
B. Product Certificates: For TVSS devices, from manufacturer.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For TVSS devices to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.
D. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, by a testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
Rev. 3/22/07 PROJECT # 07712 16289 - Page 1

B. Comply with IEEE C62.41.2 and test devices according to IEEE C62.45.
C. Comply with NEMA LS 1.
D. Comply withUL 1449.
E. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Service Conditions: Rate TVSS devices for continuous operation under the
following conditions unless otherwise indicated:
1. Maximum .Continuous Operating Voltage: Not less than 115 percent of
nominal system operating voltage.
2. Operating Temperature: 30 to 120 deg F (0 to 50 deg C).
3. Humidity: 0 to 85 percent, noncondensing.
4. Altitude: Less than 20,000 feet (6090 m) above sea level.
1.07 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate location of field -mounted TVSS devices to allow adequate
clearances for maintenance.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees
to repair or replace components of surge suppressors that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Replaceable Protection Modules: One of each size and type installed.
0
Rev. 3122/07 PROJECT # 07712 16289 - Page 2

PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 SERVICE ENTRANCE SUPPRESSORS
A. Surge Protection Devices:
1. Comply with UL 1449.
2. Modular design (with field -replaceable modules).
3. Short-circuit current rating complying with UL 1449, and matching or
exceeding the panelboard short-circuit rating and redundant suppression
circuits; with individually fused metal -oxide varistors.
4. Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring.
5. Redundant suppression circuits.
6. Redundant replaceable modules.
7. Arrangement with wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and
ground bus.
8. LED indicator lights for power and protection status.
9. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed.
10. Form-C contacts rated at 5 A and 250-V ac, one normally open and one
normally closed, for remote monitoring of protection status. Contacts shall
reverse on failure of any surge diversion module or on opening of any
current -limiting device. Coordinate with building power monitoring and
control system.
11. Four -digit transient -event counter set to totalize transient surges.
B. Peak Single -Impulse Surge Current Ratinq: 320 kA per mode/640 kA per
phase.
C. Minimum single impulse current ratings, using 8-by-20-mic.sec waveform
described in IEEE C62.41.2:
1. Line to Neutral: 70,000 A.
2. Line to 'Ground: 70,000 A.
3. Neutral to Ground: 50,000 A.
D. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for grounded wye circuits with 480YI277 V,
3-phase, 4-wire circuits shall be as follows:
1. Line to Neutral: 800 V for 480Y/277 V.
Rev. 3/22107 PROJECT # 07712 16289 - Page 3

2. Line to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277 V.
3. Neutral to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277 V.
2.02 ENCLOSURES
A. Indoor Enclosures: NEMA 250 Type 1.
B. Outdoor Enclosures: NEMA 250 Type 3R.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install TVSS devices at service entrance on load side, with ground lead bonded
to service entrance ground.
1. Provide 60-A circuit breaker as a dedicated disconnecting means for
TVSS unless otherwise indicated.
3.02 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Do not energize or connect service entrance equipment to their sources until
TVSS devices are installed and connected.
B. Do not perform insulation resistance tests of the distribution wiring equipment
with the TVSS installed. Disconnect before conducting insulation resistance
tests, and reconnect immediately after the testing is over.
3.03 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to maintain TVSS devices.
END OF SECTION
Rev. 3/22/07 PROJECT # 07712 16289 - Page 4

SECTION 16410 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to
this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Molded -case circuit breakers (MCCBs).
2. Enclosures.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. NC: Normally closed.
B. NO: Normally open.
C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and
component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and
manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical
characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.
1. Enclosure types and details for types other.than NEMA 250, Type 1.
2. Current and voltage ratings.
3. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate).
4. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual
overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components.
Rev. 3/22/07 PROJECT # 07712 16410 - Page 1

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent
protective devices, components, and accessories, within same product
category, from single source from single manufacturer.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended
location and application.
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the
following conditions unless otherwise indicated:
1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F (minus 30 deg C)
and not exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C).
2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2010 m).
B. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to
facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following -
conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service
according to requirements indicated: -
1. Notify Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed
interruption of electric service.
2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service.
3. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Owner's written
permission.
4. Comply with NFPA 70E.
1.07 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components
with equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain .required workspace
clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.
Rev. 3/22107 PROJECT # 07712 16410 - Page 2

PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MOLDED -CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. General Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3,
with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents.
B. Thermal -Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time -current element for low-level
overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits.
Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit -breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
C. Features and Accessories:
1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.
2. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and
conductor material.
2.02 ENCLOSURES
A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMAAB 1, NEMA KS 1.,
NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed
location.
1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.
2. 'Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit
breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance of the Work.
B. . Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install individual wall -mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform
height unless otherwise indicated.
B. Comply with NECA 1.
Rev. 3122107 PROJECT # 07712 16410 - Page 3

3.03 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and
lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.
B. Set field -adjustable circuit -breaker trip ranges.
END OF SECTION
Rev. 3/22/07 PROJECT # 07712 16410 - Page 4

SECTION 16415 TRANSFER SWITCHES
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes transfer switches rated 600 V and less, including the
following:,
1. Automatic transfer switches.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities,
weights, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Dimensioned plans, 'elevations, sections, and details showing
minimum clearances, conductor entry provisions, gutter space, installed
features and devices, and material lists for each switch specified.
C. Qualification Data: For manufacturer.
D. Field quality -control test reports.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items
specified in Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the
following:
1. Features and operating sequences, both automatic and manual.
2. List of all factory settings of relays; provide relay -setting and calibration
instructions, including software, where applicable.
Rev. 3/22/07 PROJECT # 07712 16415 - Page 1

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Maintain a service center capable of providing —
training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs within a response period of
less than four hours from time of notification.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain automatic transfer switches through one source
from a single manufacturer.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
D. Comply with NEMA ICS 1.
E. Comply with NFPA 70.
F. Comply with NFPA 110.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to
facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following
conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service:
1. Notify Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed
interruption of electrical service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Owner's
written permission.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor -bolt inserts into
bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in
Division 3.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL TRANSFER -SWITCH PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
A. Indicated Current Ratings: Apply as defined in UL 1008 for continuous loading
and total system transfer, including tungsten filament lamp loads not exceeding
30 percent of switch ampere rating, unless otherwise indicated.
10
Rev. 3/22107 PROJECT # 07712 16415 - Page 2

B. Tested Fault -Current Closing and Withstand Ratings: Adequate for duty
imposed by protective devices at installation locations in Project under the fault
conditions indicated, based on testing according to UL 1008.
Where transfer switch includes internal fault -current protection, rating of
switch and trip unit combination shall exceed indicated fault -current value
at installation location.
C. Solid -State Controls: Repetitive accuracy of all settings shall be plus or minus 2
percent or better over an operating temperature range of minus 20 to plus. 70
deg C.
D. Resistance to Damage by Voltage Transients: Components shall meet or
exceed voltage -surge withstand capability requirements when tested according
to IEEE C62.41. Components shall meet or exceed voltage -impulse withstand
test of NEMA ICS 1.
E. Electrical Operation: Accomplish by a nonfused, momentarily energized
solenoid or electric -motor -operated mechanism, mechanically and electrically
interlocked in both directions.
F. Switch Characteristics: Designed for continuous -duty repetitive transfer of full -
rated current between active power sources.
1. Limitation: Switches using molded -case switches or circuit breakers or
insulated -case circuit -breaker components are not acceptable.
2. Switch Action: Double throw; mechanically held in both directions.
3. Contacts: Silver composition or silver alloy for load -current switching..
Conventional automatic transfer -switch units, rated 225 A and higher, shall
have separate arcing contacts..
G. Neutral Terminal: Solid and fully rated, unless otherwise indicated.
H. Heater: Equip switches exposed to outdoor temperatures and humidity, and
other units indicated, with an internal heater. Provide thermostat within
enclosure to control heater.
Factory Wiring: Train and bundle factory wiring and label, consistent with Shop
Drawings, either by color -code or by numbered or lettered wire and cable tape
markers at terminations.
Designated Terminals: Pressure type, suitable for types and sizes of field
wiring indicated.
2. Power -Terminal Arrangement and Field -Wiring Space: Suitable for top,
side, or bottom entrance of feeder conductors as indicated.
Rev. 3122107 PROJECT # 07712 16415 - Page 3

3. Control Wiring: Equipped with lugs suitable for connection to terminal
strips.
J. Enclosures: General-purpose NEMA 250, Type 1, complying with NEMA ICS 6
and UL 508, unless otherwise indicated.
2.02 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES
A. Comply with Level 1 equipment according to NFPA 110.
B. Switching Arrangement: Double -throw type, incapable of pauses or
intermediate position stops during normal functioning, unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Manual Switch Operation: Under load, with door closed and with either or both
sources energized. Transfer time is same as for electrical operation. Control
circuit automatically disconnects from electrical operator during manual
operation.
D. Signal -Before -Transfer Contacts:- A set of normally open/normally closed dry
contacts operates in advance of retransfer to normal source. Interval is
adjustable from 1 to 30 seconds.
E. In -Phase Monitor: Factory -wired, internal relay controls transfer so it occurs
only when the two sources are synchronized in phase. Relay compares phase '-
relationship and frequency difference between normal and emergency sources
and initiates transfer when both sources are within 15 electrical degrees, and
only if transfer can be completed within 60 electrical degrees. Transfer is
initiated only if both sources are within 2 Hz , of nominal frequency and 70
percent or more of nominal voltage.
F. Automatic Transfer -Switch Features:
1. Undervoltage Sensing for Each Phase of Normal Source: Sense low
phase -to -ground voltage on each phase. Pickup voltage shall be
adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of nominal, and dropout voltage is
adjustable from 75 to 98 percent of pickup value. Factory set for pickup at
90 percent and dropout at 85 percent.
2. Adjustable Time Delay: For override of normal -source voltage sensing to
delay transfer and engine start signals. Adjustable from zero to six
seconds, and factory set for one second.
3'r Voltage/Frequency Lockout Relay: Prevent premature transfer to
generator. Pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of
nominal. Factory set for pickup at 90 percent. Pickup frequency shall be
adjustable from 90 to 100 percent of nominal. Factory set for pickup at 95
percent.
Rev. 3/22/07 PROJECT # 07712 16415 Page 4

4. Time Delay for Retransfer to" Normal Source: Adjustable from 0 to 30
minutes, and factory set for 10 minutes to automatically defeat delay on
loss of voltage or sustained undervoltage of emergency source, provided
normal supply has been restored.
5. Test Switch: Simulate normal -source failure.
6. Switch -Position Pilot Lights: Indicate source to which load is connected.
7. Source -Available Indicating Lights: Supervise sources via transfer -switch
normal- and emergency -source sensing circuits.
a. Normal Power Supervision: Green light with nameplate engraved
"Normal Source Available."
b. Standby Power Supervision: Red light with nameplate engraved
"Standby Source Available."
8. Unassigned Auxiliary Contacts: Two normally open, single -pole, double -
throw contacts for each switch position, rated 10 A at 240-V ac.
9. Transfer Override Switch: Overrides automatic retransfer control so
automatic transfer switch will remain connected to emergency power
source regardless of condition of normal source. Pilot light indicates
override status.
10. Engine Starting Contacts: 'One isolated and normally closed, and one
isolated and normally open;. rated 10 A at 32-V do minimum.
11. Engine Shutdown Contacts: Time delay adjustable from zero to five
minutes, and factory set for five minutes. Contacts shall initiate shutdown
at remote engine -generator controls after retransfer of load to normal
source.
12. Engine -Generator Exerciser: Solid-state, programmable -time switch starts
engine generator and transfers load to it from normal source for a preset
time, then retransfers and shuts down engine after a preset cool -down
period. Initiates exercise cycle at preset intervals adjustable from 7 to 30
days. Running periods are adjustable from 10 to 30 minutes. Factory
settings are for 7-day exercise cycle, 20-minute running period, and 5-
minute cool -down period. Exerciser features include the following:
a. Exerciser Transfer Selector Switch: Permits selection. of exercise
with and without load transfer.
b. Push-button programming control with digital display of settings.
C. Integral battery operation of time switch when normal control power
is not available.
11
Rev. 3/22107 , PROJECT # 07712 16415 - Page 5

2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory test and inspect components, assembled switches, and associated
equipment. Ensure proper operation. Check transfer time and voltage,
frequency, and time -delay settings for compliance with specified requirements.
Perform dielectric strength test complying with NEMA ICS 1.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Design each fastener and support to carry load. See Division 16 Section
"Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
B: Set field -adjustable intervals and delays, relays, and engine exerciser clock.
3.02 CONNECTIONS
A. Wiring to Remote Components: Match type and number of cables and
conductors to control and communication requirements of transfer switches as
recommended by manufacturer. Increase raceway sizes at no additional cost
to Owner if necessary to accommodate required wiring.
B. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
C. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service
representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and
equipment installations,. including connections. Report results in writing.
B. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
1. After installing equipment and after electrical circuitry has been energized,
test for compliance with requirements.
2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated
in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test
parameters. .
3. Measure insulation resistance phase -to -phase and phase -to -ground with
insulation -resistance tester. Include external annunciation and control
Rev. 3/22107 PROJECT # 07712 16415 - Page 6

circuits. Use test voltages and procedure recommended by manufacturer.
Comply with manufacturer's specified minimum resistance.
a. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits.
b. Inspect for physical damage, proper installation and connection, and
integrity of barriers, covers, and safety features.
C. Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed.
d. Perform manual transfer operation.
4. After energizing circuits, demonstrate interlocking sequence and
operational function for each switch at least three times.
a. Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer
switches and of emergency source with normal source available.
b. Simulate loss of phase -to -ground voltage for each phase of normal
source.
C. Verify time -delay settings.
d. Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of
control settings.
e. Test bypass/isolation unit functional modes and related automatic
transfer -switch operations.
f. Perform contact -resistance test across main contacts and correct
values exceeding 500 microhms and values for 1 pole deviating by
more than 50 percent from other poles.
g. Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic engine
starting, transfer time delay, retransfer time delay on restoration of
normal power, and engine cool -down and shutdown.
C. Coordinate tests with tests of generator and run them concurrently.
D. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay
settings and measured insulation and contact resistances and time delays.
Attach a label or tag to . each tested component indicating satisfactory
completion of tests.
E. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
Rev. 3122/07 PROJECT # 07712 16415 - Page 7

3.04 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's
maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain transfer switches and
related equipment as specified below.
B. Coordinate this training with that for generator equipment.
END OF SECTION
Rev. 3122/07 PROJECT # 07712 16415 - Page 8

SECTION 16442 PANELBOARDS
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Lighting and appliance branch -circuit panelboards.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. SVR: Suppressed voltage rating.
B. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent
protective device, transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and
component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on
features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.
1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show
tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.
2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.
4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective
devices.
5. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices.
6. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual
overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components.
7. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
Rev. 3/22/07 PROJECT # 07712 16442 - Page 1

8. Include time -current coordination curves for each type and rating of
overcurrent protective device included in panelboards. Submit on
translucent log -log graft paper; include selectable ranges for each type of
overcurrent protective device.
C. Field Quality -Control Reports:
1. Test procedures used.
2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results
that comply with requirements.
D. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions
after load balancing.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include
in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items
specified in Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the
following:
1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent
protective devices.
2. Time -current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of
overcurrent protective device that allows adjustments.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices,
components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer.
B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum
dimensions for panelboards including clearances between panelboards and
adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum
dimensions.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended
location and application.
D. Comply with NEMA PB 1.
E. Comply with NFPA 70.
Rev. 3/22/07 PROJECT # 07712 16442 - Page 2

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install
temporary electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation.
B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NEMA PB 1.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations:
1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces. are enclosed and
weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above
panelboards is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and
maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy
levels during the remainder of the construction period.
2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions
unless otherwise indicated:
a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding minus 22 deg F (minus 30
deg C) to plus 104 deg F (plus 40 deg C).'
b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).
B. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows:
1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified.
2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).
1.08 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other
construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical
and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace
clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace
clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.
1.09 WARRANTY
A. Special, Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees
to repair or replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials
or workmanship within specified warranty period.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
Rev. 3122107 PROJECT # 07712 16442 - Page 3

1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock.
2. Circuit Breakers Including GFCI and Ground Fault Equipment Protection
(GFEP) Types: Two spares for each panelboard.
3. u: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no
fewer than three of each size and type.
4. Fuses for Fused Power -Circuit Devices: Equal to 10 percent of quantity
installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and
type.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS
A. Enclosures: Flush- and surface -mounted cabinets.
1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.
a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.
b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3, Type 4X stainless steel.
C. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping
Noncorrosive Liquids: NEMA 250, Type 12.
2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface -mounted
fronts, match box dimensions; for flush -mounted fronts, overlap box.
3. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard
door within hinged trim cover.
4. Skirt for Surface -Mounted -Panelboards: Same gage and finish as
panelboard front with flanges for attachment to panelboard, wall, and
ceiling or floor.
5. Finishes:
a. Panels and Trim: Steel and galvanized steel, factory finished
immediately after cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's
standard two -coat, baked -on finish consisting of prime coat and
thermosetting topcoat.
Rev. 3/22107 PROJECT # 07712 16442 - Page 4

b. Back Boxes: Same finish as panels and trim.
C. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for overcurrent
protective devices and other components.
6. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in metal frame with
transparent protective cover.
B. Incoming Mains Location: Top.
C. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:
1. Material: Tin-plated aluminum.
2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch -circuit
equipment grounding conductors; bonded to box.
3.. Isolated Ground- Bus: Adequate for branch -circuit isolated. ground
conductors; insulated from box.
4. Extra -Capacity Neutral Bus: Neutral bus rated 200 percent of phase bus
and UL listed as suitable for nonlinear loads.
5. Split Bus: Vertical buses divided into individual vertical sections.
D. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.
1. Material: Tin-plated aluminum.
2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Compression type.
3. Ground Lugs and Bus -Configured Terminators: Compression type.
4. Feed -Through Lugs: Compression type, suitable for use with conductor
material. Locate at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main
device.
5. Subfeed (Double) Lugs: Compression type suitable for use with conductor
material. Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device.
6. Gutter -Tap Lugs: Compression type suitable for use with -conductor
material. Locate at same end of bus.as incoming lugs or main device.
7. Extra -Capacity Neutral Lugs: Rated 200 percent of phase lugs mounted
on extra -capacity neutral bus.
E. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for
panelboards or 'load centers with one or more main . service disconnecting and
overcurrent protective devices.
F. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and
. necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices.
Rev. 3122107. PROJECT # 07712 16442 - Page 5

G. Panelboard Short -Circuit Current Rating: Rated for series -connected system
with integral or remote upstream overcurrent protective devices and labeled by
an NRTL. Include size and type of allowable upstream and branch devices,
listed and labeled for series -connected short-circuit rating by an NRTL.
H. Panelboard Short -Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical
short-circuit current available at terminals.
2.02 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH -CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,
but are not limited to, the following:
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler -Hammer Business Unit.
2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical
Distribution.
3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch -circuit type.
C. Mains: Circuit breaker or lugs only.
D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Plug-in circuit breakers, replaceable
without disturbing adjacent units.
E. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed
alike.
F. Column -Type Panelboards: Narrow gutter extension, with cover, to overhead
junction box equipped with ground and neutral terminal buses.
2.03 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,
but are not limited to, the following:
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler -Hammer Business Unit.
2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical
Distribution.
3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
Rev. 3122/07 PROJECT # 07712 16442 - Page 6

B. Molded -Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting
- -capacity to meet available fault currents.
1. Thermal -Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time -current element for low-
level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip -element for short circuits.
Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit -breaker frame sizes 250 A and
larger.
2. Adjustable Instantaneous -Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element
with front -mounted, field -adjustable trip setting.
3. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field -replaceable rating
plug or field-replicable electronic trip; and the following field -adjustable
settings:
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
a. Instantaneous trip.
b. Long- and short -time pickup levels.
C. Long- and short-time_time adjustments.
d. Ground -fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.
Current -Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let -
through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.
GFCI. Circuit Breakers: Single- and two -pole configurations with Class A
ground -fault protection (6-mA trip).
Ground -Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B
ground -fault protection (30-mA trip).
Arc -Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI) Circuit Breakers: Comply with
UL 1699; 120/240-V, single -pole configuration.
Molded -Case Circuit -Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:
a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.
b. Lugs: Compression style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and
conductor materials.
C. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for
switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent
and high -intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits.
d. Ground -Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with
adjustable pickup and time -delay settings, push -to -test feature, and
ground -fault indicator.
e. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip
at 55 percent of rated voltage.
Rev. 3122/07 PROJECT # 07712 16442 Page 7

f. Undervolta e Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated
voltage without intentional time delay.
g. Alarm Switch: Single -pole, normally open contact that actuates only
when circuit breaker trips.
h. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit -breaker
operation; key shall be removable only when circuit breaker is in off
position.
i. Zone -Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for
interlocking ground -fault protection function with other upstream or
downstream devices.
j. Multipole units enclosed in a single housing or factory assembled to
operate as a single unit.
k. Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit -
breaker handle in off position.
I. Handle Clamp: Loose attachment, for holding circuit -breaker handle
in on position.
C. Fused Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD; clips to accommodate specified fuses;
lockable handle.
1. Fuses, and Spare -Fuse Cabinet: Comply with requirements specified in
Division 16 Section "Fuses."
2. Fused Switch Features and Accessories: Standard ampere ratings and
number of poles.
2.04 PANELBOARD SUPPRESSORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,
but are not limited to, the following:
1. Current Technology; a subsidiary of Danahar Corporation.
2. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler -Hammer Business Unit.
3. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical
Distribution.
4. Liebert Corporation.
5. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
6. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B. Surge Protection Device: IEEE C62.41-compliant, integrally mounted, solid-
state, parallel -connected, non -modular type, with sine -wave tracking
Rev. 3122107 PROJECT # 07712 16442 : Page 8

suppression and filtering modules, UL 1449, second edition, short-circuit current
rating matching or exceeding the panelboard short-circuit rating, and with the
following features and accessories:
1. Accessories:
a. LED indicator lights for power and protection status.
b. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has
failed.
C. One set of dry contacts rated at 5 A and 250-V ac, for remote
monitoring of protection status.
C. Surge Protection Device:. IEEE C62.41-compliant, integrally mounted, wired -in,
solid-state, parallel -connected, modular (with field -replaceable modules) type,
with sine -wave tracking suppression and filtering modules, UL 1449, second
edition, short. -circuit current rating matching or exceeding the panelboard short-
circuit rating, and with the following features and accessories:
1. Accessories:
a. Fuses rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity.
b. Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring.
C. Integral disconnect switch.
d. Redundant suppression circuits.
e. Redundant replaceable modules.
f. Arrangement with wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and
ground bus.
g. LED indicator lights for power and protection status..
h. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has
failed.
Form-C contacts rated at 5 A and 250-V ac, one normally open and
one normally closed, for remote monitoring of system operation.
Contacts shall reverse position on failure of any surge diversion
module or on opening of any current -limiting device. Coordinate with
building power monitoring and control system.
j. Four -digit, transient -event counter set to totalize transient surges.
2. Peak Single -Impulse Surge Current Rating: 80 kA per mode/160 kA per
phase.
3. Minimum single -impulse current ratings, using 8-by-20-mic.sec. waveform
described in IEEE C62.41.2.
Rev. 3/22/07 PROJECT # 07712 16442 - Page 9

a. Line to Neutral: 70,000 A.
b. Line to Ground: 70,000 A.
C. Neutral to Ground: 50,000 A.
4. Withstand Capabilities: 12,000 IEEE C62.41, Category C3 (10 kA), 8-by-
20-mic.sec. surges with less than 5 percent change in clamping voltage.
5. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for grounded wye circuits with
208Y/120-V, three-phase, four -wire circuits shall be as follows:
a. Line to Neutral: 400 V for 208Y/120.
b. Line to Ground: 400 V for 208YM20.
C. Neutral to Ground: 400 V for 208Y/120.
6. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for 240/120-V, single-phase, three -
wire circuits shall be as follows:
a. Line to Neutral: 400 V.
b. Line to Ground: 400 V.
C. Neutral to Ground: 400 V.
7. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for 240/120-V, three-phase, four -wire
circuits with high leg shall be as follows:
a. Line to Neutral: 400 V, 800 V from high leg.
b. Line to Ground: 400 V.
C. Neutral to Ground: 400 V.
8. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for 240-, 480-, or 600-V, three-phase,
three -wire, delta circuits shall be as follows:
a. Line to Line: 2000 V for 480 V, 1000 V for 240 V.
b. Line to Ground: 1500 V for 480 V 800 V for 240 V.
2.05 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES
A. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent
protective device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.
B. Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without
removing from panelboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for
testing panelboard meters and switchboard class relays.
Rev. 3122/07 PROJECT # 07712 16442 - Page 10

PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1.
B. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged
or rusted or have been subjected to water saturation.
C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.
B. Equipment Mounting: Install panelboards on concrete bases, 4-inch (100-mm)
nominal thickness. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in
Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete."
1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless
otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers
around full perimeter of base.
2. For panelboards, install epoxy -coated anchor bolts that extend through
concrete base and anchor' into structural concrete floor.
3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates,
diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be
embedded.
4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to
panelboards.
5. Attach panelboard to the vertical finished or structural surface behind the
panelboard.
C. Mount top of trim 72 inches height above finished floor unless otherwise
indicated.
D. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount
recessed panelboards with ,fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with
back box.
E. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory
installed.
Rev. 3122107 PROJECT# 07712 16442 - Page 14

1. Set field -adjustable, circuit -breaker trip ranges.
F. Install filler plates in unused spaces.
G. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties.
H. Comply with NECA 1.
3.03 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field -installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and. components;
provide warning signs complying with Division 16 Section "Electrical
Identification."
B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard
loads; incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before
installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten
directories are not acceptable.
C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying
with requirements for identification specified in Division 16 Section" Electrical
Identification."
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service
representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and
equipment installations, including connections.
B. Perform tests and inspections.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service
representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment
installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.
C. Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component,
connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each circuit.
D. Tests and Inspections:
1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated
in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test
parameters.
Rev. 3/22107 PROJECT # 07712 16442 - Page 12

2. Correct malfunctioning units on -site, where possible, and retest to
demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare
reports:
a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more
than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of
each panelboard. Remove front panels so joints and connections
are accessible to portable scanner.
b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up
infrared scan of each panelboard 11 months after date of Substantial
Completion.
C. Instruments and Equipment:
1) Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure
temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal
values. Provide calibration record for device.
E. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections.
F. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies
panelboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of
deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial
action.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and
lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.
B. Set field -adjustable circuit -breaker trip ranges as indicated.
C. Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after
Final Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes.
1. Measure as directed during period of normal system loading.
2. Perform load -balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working
schedulq of the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-
hour services such as fax machines and on-line data processing,
computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment.
3. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all
load readings before and after changes and submit test records.
Rev. 3/22/07 PROJECT # 07712 16442 - Page 13

4. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within
a panelboard, is not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to
meet this minimum requirement.
D. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according
to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION
Rev. 3/22107 PROJECT # 07712 16442 - Page 14

SECTION 16511 INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to
this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Interior lighting fixtures with lamps and ballasts.
2. Lighting fixtures mounted on exterior building surfaces.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture scheduled, arranged in
order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories,
finishes, and the following:
1. Physical description of fixture, including dimensions and verification
of indicated parameters.
2. Fluorescent and high -intensity -discharge ballasts.
3. Lamps.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data:. For lighting equipment and fixtures to
include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to
items specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures," include the
following:
1. Catalog data for each fixture. Include the diffuser, ballast, and
lamps installed in that fixture.
C. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
Rev. 3/22/07 PROJECT # 07712 16511 - Page 1

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty for Fluorescent Ballasts: Manufacturer's standard form
in which ballast manufacturer agrees to repair or replace ballasts that fail
in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period for Electronic Ballasts: Five years from date of
Substantial Completion.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS, GENERAL
A. Refer to fixture schedule on drawings for fixture basis -of -design
requirements.
2.02 FLUORESCENT LAMP BALLASTS
A. Description: Include the following features, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Designed for type and .quantity of lamps indicated at full light
output.
B. Electronic ballasts for linear lamps shall include the following features,
unless otherwise indicated:
1. Comply with NEMA C82.11.
2. Ballast Type: Rapid start, unless otherwise indicated. Provide
instant start ballasts for all lighting fixtures on circuits without a
means of switching other than the circuit breaker.
3. Sound Rating: A.
4. Total harmonic distortion rating of less than 10 percent according
to NEMA C82.11.
5. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A.
6. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher.
Rev. 3122/07 PROJECT # 07712 16511 - Page 2

7. Lamp Current Crest Factor: Less than 1.7.
8. Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts connected to
maintain full light output on surviving lamps if one or more lamps
fail.
C. Ballasts for Low -Temperature Environments:
1. Temperatures 0 deg F and Higher: Electronic or electromagnetic
type rated for 0 deg F minus 17 deg C starting temperature.
2.03 HIGH -INTENSITY -DISCHARGE LAMP BALLASTS
A. General: Comply with NEMA C82.4 and UL 1029. Shall include the
following features, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Type: Constant -wattage autotransformer or regulating high -power -
factor type.
2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22 deg F Minus 30 deg C
for single -lamp ballasts.
3. Normal Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F40 deg C.
4. Open -circuit operation that will not reduce average life.
B. High -Pressure -Sodium Ballasts: Solid-state igniter/starter with an average
life in pulsing mode of 10,000 hours at an igniter/starter-case temperature
of 90 deg C.
2.04 FLUORESCENT LAMPS (PERMANENT)
A. Low -Mercury Lamps: Comply with Federal toxic characteristic leaching
procedure test, and yield less than 0.2 mg of mercury per liter, when
tested according to NEMA LL 1.
B. T8 rapid -start low -mercury lamps, rated 32 W maximum, 2800 initial
lumens (minimum), CRI of 75 (minimum), color temperature of 3500 K,
and average rated life of 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated.
2.05 HIGH -INTENSITY -DISCHARGE LAMPS
A. High -Pressure -Sodium Lamps: NEMA C78.42, wattage and burning
position as scheduled, CRI 21 (minimum), color temperature 1900, and
average rated life of 24,000 hours.
Rev. 3/22/07 PROJECT # 07712 16511 - Page 3

2.06 FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS
A. Comply with Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods"
for channel- and angle -iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle
supports.
B. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch- minimum diameter, cadmium -plated, threaded
steel rod.
2.07 FINISHES
A. Fixtures: Manufacturers' standard, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Paint Finish: Applied over corrosion -resistant treatment or primer,
free of defects.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls.
3.02 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's
published torque -tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are
not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and
components.
B. Verify normal operation of each fixture after installation.
C. Corroded Fixtures: During warranty period, replace fixtures that show any
signs of corrosion.
END OF SECTION
Rev. 3122/07 PROJECT # 07712 16511 - Page 4

SECTION 16990 HVAC SYSTEMS
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to
this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Electric Unit Heaters.
2. Exhaust Fans.
3. Control Dampers.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical. Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, .and marked for intended use.
B. Comply with the North Carolina State Building Code.
C: Comply with NFPA 90A.
1.04 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, and openings with general construction
work and arrange in building structure during progress of construction to
facilitate the HVAC installations that follow.
1. Set inserts and sleeves in poured -in -place concrete, masonry work,
and other structural components as they are constructed.
B. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing HVAC materials and
equipment for efficient flow of the Work.
Rev. 3/22/07 ' PROJECT # 07712 16990 - Page 1

PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS
A. General: Electric unit heaters shall be factory -packaged, with steel cabinets,
electric heating elements, fan and motor assemblies, and integral thermostat
control.
B. Cabinets: Cabinets shall be of welded sheet metal construction, with oven -
baked enamel exterior finish. An internal shroud shall be provided around
the heating elements to ensure uniform air flow and delivery temperature
across the entire face of the heater. The control compartment shall have a
hinged and latched access door. Louvers shall be individually adjustable for
directional control of air flow.
C. Heating Elements: Heating elements shall be coiled nickel chromium
resistance wire encased in MgO, with a copper -clad steel sheath with steel
fins. Fins shall be continuously brazed to the sheath.
D. Motors: Motors shall be totally -enclosed, permanently lubricated, matched to
the fan load.
E. Controls: Units shall have factory -installed integral thermostats, with a
temperature. range of 40 to 90 degrees F. Units shall have automatic reset
limit control to cut-off power to the heater elements in an over -temperature
situation.
2.02 EXHAUST FANS
A. General: Exhaust fans shall be axial sidewall type, bearing AMCA Certified
Ratings Seals for both sound and air performance. Select fans according to
the schedule and wall openings indicated on the drawings.
B. Propellers: Propellers shall be constructed with fabricated steel or aluminum
blades and hubs. A standard square key and set screw,or tapered bushing
shall lock the propeller to the motor shaft. Propellers shall be statically and
dynamically balanced.
C. Motors: Motors shall be permanently lubricated, heavy-duty type, matched to
the fan load. Motor drive frame assemblies and fan panels shall be
galvanized or painted steel.
2.03 CONTROL DAMPERS
A. General: Control dampers shall have 5" x 1" x 16-gage galvanized steel hat
channel frames with reinforced corners, 16-gage galvanized steel parallel -
action blades, and exposed linkages and actuators. Actuators shall fully
Rev. 3/22/07 PROJECT # 07712 16990 - Page 2

open dampers when energized, and shall spring -return to the closed position
when de -energized.
B: _Damper Operating Temperature Limits: -25 degrees F to +180 degrees F.
C. Actuator: Two -position, spring -return (when de -energized), 120VAC, with
torque rating sufficient for operating dampers. Operating temperature limits:
-40 degrees F to +135 degrees F.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 HVAC EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Headroom. Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not
indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide the
maximum possible headroom.
B. Materials and Components: Install level, plumb, and parallel and
perpendicular to other building systems and components, unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or
replacement of components. Connect for ease of disconnecting, with
minimum interference with other installations.
D. Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required
slope.
E. Install support devices to securely and permanently fasten and support
HVAC components.
F. Install all conductors in raceway.
G. Install all equipment according to manufacturer's recommendations and
instructions.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect installed components for damage and faulty work. Replace defective
components.
3.03 REFINISHING AND TOUCHUP PAINTING
A. Refinish and touch up paint.
Rev. 3122107 PROJECT # 07712 16990 - Page 3

1. Clean damaged and disturbed areas and apply primer, intermediate,
and finish coats to'suit the degree of damage at each location.
.2. Follow paint manufacturer's written instructions for surface
preparation and for timing and application of successive coats.
3. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc -rich -paint
recommended by manufacturer.
4. Repair damage to paint finishes with matching touchup coating
recommended by manufacturer.
3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. On completion of installation, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt,
paint spots, and construction debris.-
B. Protect equipment and installations and maintain conditions to ensure that
coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time
of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
Rev. 3/22/07 PROJECT # 07712 16990 - Page 4
4

11
R F-C E IV ED
I
SAY 14 2001
AsheviHe Region"A Offlcs
Revised Design Calculations

y
DESIGN CALCULATIONS
SANTEETLAH LAKESIDE
PHASE If WASTEWATER SYSTEM
IBEX THUNDERBIRD L.L.C.
GRAHAM COUNTY, NORTH CAROLINA
%%%%% stiff ,,.
PREPARED BY: DAVID L. HONEYCUTT E.I.
f• ego
REVIEWED BY: HARRY B.,,B-UCKNER,..P.E. 22541
oe
e
Gill
• �+ � qe GINS •o® ! ``
lllt)t11111
A S S O C I A T E S
Engineering e Planning a Finance 41t4l.
Post Office Box 2259
Asheville, North Carolina 28801
MARCH 2O07
REVISED APRIL 2007
07712

Design Flow
The proposed system is intended to serve 13- 2 bedroom houses, a 1,500 SF food stand,
and a bathhouse facility to serve 25 persons.
Facility Type
Quantity
Flo (Unit Units Total
2 Bedroom Home
13 dwellings
12C gpd Bedroom 3,120 gpd
Food Stand
1500 SF
50 gpd 100 SF 750 gpd
Bathouse
25 persons
10 gpd Person 250 gnd
Total 4,120 gpd
During off-season winter months wastewater flows from the proposed facilities will be
significantly reduced due to lack of occupancy. According to US Census data for the
Town of Lake Santeetlah only 22.1 % of homes in the Town are occupied continuously
and 76.7% are seasonal, recreational, or occasional use. The remaining 0.6 percent were
not occupied. Based on this data and conversations with the owner it is assumed that
occupancy during the winter months (November 15th — April 15th) will be 33% or less
than peak summer usage. The following table gives a summary of anticipated wastewater
flows.
Santeetlah Lakeside - Seasonal Wastewater Flow
Month
Residential Flow
Canoe Club FIow
Total ADF Flow
January
1030
330
1360
February
1030
330
1360
March
1030
330
1360
April
2075
665
2740
May
3120
1000
4120
June.
3120
1000
4120
July
3120
1000
4120
August
3120,
1000
4120
September
3120
1000
4120
October
3120
1000
4120
November
2075
665
2740
December
1030
330
1360
ADF for Year
2978
Assume 100% occupancy during April 15 - November 15, 33% occupancy of
residences and canoe club the remaining year
Treatment System
Pg. 1

Wastewater will be beneficially reused for irrigation of a natural area on the project site.
Therefore treatment must meet standards for NC beneficial reuse under 15A NCAC 2T
.0906 In order to use standard tank sizes and treatment units, size treatment system for
5,000 gpd. Irrigation system will be sized based on the above design flow of 4,120 gpd.
Effluent Requirements
BOD5 < 10 mg/l Monthly Average and < 15 mg/l daily maximum
TSS < 5 mg/1 monthly average and <10 mg/l daily maximum
NH3 < 4 mg/l monthly average and < 6 mg/l daily maximum
Fecal Coliform < 14/100 ml monthly average < 25/100 ml daily maximum
Proposed treatment system shall consist of a primary settling (septic) tank, flow
equalization basin, two bioclere treatment units, filter dosing tank, pressure dosed sand
filters, and UV disinfection.
Primary settling (septic) tank volume shall sized for V = Q or minimum 5,000 gallons
Verify tank has adequate volume for settling with peak flows from low pressure sewer
system.
From Metcalf and Eddy Wastewater Engineering 3rd Edition pg 475 Recommended
Overflow Rates = 600 — 800 gpd/sf at ADF or 1,200 —1,700 gpd/sf at peak hourly flow
in primary sedimentation with RAS.
Proposed septic tank first compartment is 11.5' by 8' = 92 SF
At 600 gpd/SF settling tank is capable of treating 55,200 gpd ADF
At 1,200 gpd/SF settling tank is capable of treating 110,400 gpd PHF
Average daily flows to the septic tank including recycle from the Bioclere Units will be
6,180 gpd. Pressure sewer system will have approximately 14 pump stations. Per E=one,
for low pressure sewers with 10-18 pump stations a maximum of 4 pumps will run at any
given time for a peak instantaneous flow of approximately 60 gpm or 86,400 gpd. Peak
hour flows would be expected to be much lower or approximately 4 - 5Q (16,480 —
20,600 gpd). Therefore, settling tank will provide adequate settling.
Verify Aquapoint Bioclere Unit BOD and NH3 removal
The proposed system involves the use of one model 24/20 and one model 24/24 Bioclere
unit. The first Bioclere Unit shall reduce the BOD5 to less than 50 mg/l and oxidize 30%
of the influent ammonia. The second Bioclere unit shall further reduce the B6D5 to less
than 10 mg/1 and the ammonia to < 3 mg/l.
Q = 5,000 gpd
Pg. 2

Assuming 20% removal of BOD in primary septic tank
Influent BOD5 = Si = 300 mg/1 * .80 = 240 mg/1
Recirculation rate = 50%
Calculate Organic Loading to Stage 1 Bioclere unit
Lbs BOD5 / day = influent from primary tank + recirculation
= 5,000 GPD * 8.341bs/gal * 240 mg/1 / 1 x 106 mg / liter water + 0.50 * 5,000 gpd
8.34 * 10 mg/1 (effluent concentration) / 1 x 106 =10.2 lbs of BOD5 / day
Bioclere Model 24/20 contains 247 ft3 of 42.8 ft2/ft3 surface area random packed plastic
media.
Loading rate =1bs BOD / day / ft2 media surface area
Loading rate = 10.2 / (247 * 42.8 / 1,000) = 0.965 lbs / 1,000 ft2-day
Model BOD5 removal for stage 1 Bioclere unit
q = hydraulic loading rate (gpm / ft2) = [k20 D Ot"20/ In (Si / Se)
(Ref. WEF Design of Municipal Wastewater Treatment Plants Volume 1 pg 733)
k2o = filter coefficient = kc20 (6.1/D)0.3 * (150 / Si )o.s
where kc20 = 0.203 (L/s)0-5 / m2 at D = 6.1m
Depth correction factor used is for filters less than 10 ft deep
(Ref. WEF Design of Municipal Wastewater Treatment Plants Volume 1 pg 726)
k2o = 0.203 * (6.1 / (6.083 / 3.281))0-3 * (150 / 240)" = 0.229 (L/s)o.s / mz .
k2o = 0.085 gpmo.s/ ft2
Ot"20 = temperature coefficient = 1.035-5 = 0.842
D = filter depth = 6.083 ft
q = [0.085 * 6.083 * 0.842 / In (240/50)]2
q = 0.077 gpm/ft2
Calculate proposed hydraulic loading rate
q = Design flow / ft2 of filter area
= (5,000 gpd / 1,440.min/day) / 82 * 7u/4 = 0.069 gpm / ft2
Proposed design flow rate for stage 1 is lower than calculated flow rate therefore stage is
conservatively designed.
Calculate Organic Loading to Stage 2 Bioclere unit
Pg. 3

Lbs BOD5 / day = influent from primary tank + recirculation
= 5,000 GPD * 8.34 lbs/gal * 50 mg/l'/ 1 x 106 mg / liter water + 0.50 * 5,000 gpd * 8.34
* 10 mg/1(effluent concentration) / 1 x 106 = 2.29 lbs of BOD5 / day
Bioclere Model 24/24 contains 318 ft3 of 66.2 ft2/ft3 surface area random packed plastic
media.
Loading rate = lbs BOD / day / ft2 media surface area
Loading rate = 2.29 / (318 * 66.2 / 1,000) = 0.109 lb / 1,000 ft2-day
Model BOD5 removal for stage 2 Bioclere unit
q = hydraulic loading rate (gpm / ft) = [k20 D Ot-20/ 1n (Si /.Se)
(Ref. WEF Design of Municipal Wastewater Treatment Plants Volume 1 pg 733)
k2o = filter coefficient = kc20 (6.1/D)0'3 (depth)* (150 / S;) 0.5 (loading)
where kc20 = 0.203 (L/s)0-5 / m2 at D = 6.1m
Depth correction factor used is for filters less than 10 ft deep
(Ref. WEF Design of Municipal Wastewater Treatment Plants Volume 1 pg 726)
k2o = 0.203 * (6.1 / (7.83 / 3.281))0.3 * (150 / 50)0'S = 0.466 (L/s)o.s / m2
k2o = 0.173 gpmo.s/ ft2
Ot"20 = temperature coefficient = 1.035"5
D = filter depth = 7.83 ft
q = [0.173 * 7.83 * 0.842 / In (50110)] 2
q = 0.502 gpm/ft2
Calculate proposed hydraulic loading rate
q = Design flow / ft2 of filter area
_ (5,000 gpd / 1,440 min/day) / 82. * 7r/4 = 0.074 gpm / ft2
Proposed design flow rate for stage 2 is lower than calculated flow rate therefore stage is
conservatively designed.
Model Nitrogen Removal in First Stage Bioclere
Determine the Specific TKN removal Rate (Metcalf and Eddy Wastewater Engineering
4 edition pg 924)
Assume 10% TN removal in the septic tank therefore influent to first stage Bioclere is 45
mg/l + recycle = .
R. = 0.82(BOD/TKN)"o.aa = Rn = 0.82(240/45)"o.a4a = 0.39 g/m2-d

Surface area = 7 in media at 140 m2/m3 = 980 in
Nitrogen removal = 980 m2 * 0.39 g/m2-d = 382.2 g/day = 0.84 lbs/day
0.84 / ( 0.005*8.34) = 20.34 mg/1 removed
Therefore first stage effluent Nitrogen = 45 mg/1— 20.34 mg/1= 24.66 mg/1
Model Nitrogen Removal in Second Stage
R. = 0.82(BOD/TKN)-0.44 = Rn = 0.82(50/24.66)-1-44 = 0.60 g/m2-d
Surface area = 9 m3 media at 230m2/m3 = 2070 m2
Nitrogen removal = 2070 m2 * 0.60 g/m2-d = 1242 g/day = 2.74 lbs/day
2.741bs/day is greater than the remaining TKN in solution. Therefore trickling filters are
conservatively designed for ammonia of less than 4 mg/l.
Bioclere Recycle
Bioclere unit #1 and Bioclere Unit #2 will be set up to automatically recycle every 60
minutes for 2 minutes (70gallons) and 65 minutes for 2 minutes(70 gallons) respectively
for a total recycle flow of approximately 3,080 gallons per day. This recycle will return
solids settled in the secondary clarifiers to the septic tank.
TS_S Removal
TSS will be removed by the septic tank, secondary clarifiers which are part of the
Bioclere units and by the tertiary sand filters. Estimate removal in each step.
Septic tank removal of TSS is typically 50-90%. Assuming 50% to be conservative
effluent from septic tank TSS concentration = 150 mg/1
Verify secondary clarifier is adequately sized. Each clarifier is 8.5' in diameter. Surface
area = 8.52*pi/4 = 56.7 SF
5,000 gpd / 56.7 SF = 88 gpd/sf Metcalf and Eddy Wastewater Engineering .1 Edition
pg. 588 recommends 400-600 gpd/sf at ADF and 1,000-1,200 gpd/sf at PHF. Therefore
clarifiers are conservatively designed.
Secondary clarifier effluent will be typically less than 30 mg/l
Sand filter will remove solids from 30 mg/l to less than 5 mg/l TSS.
Pg. 5

Size ]Filter feed and backwash tanks
Per manufacturer each pump requires 300 gallons minimum for backwash and filter feed.
Therefore with duplex system each tank requires a minimum of 600 gallons.
Determine Solids Production.
Per Metcalf and Eddy Wastewater Engineering 1 Edition pg 773 Trickling Filter sludge
production is typically 0.6 lbs/1000 gallons.
4,120 gpd * 365 days/year * 0.61bs/l000 gallons = 902.28 lbs
Sludge will be digested anaerobically in the 5,000 gallon septic tank. Typically septic
tanks can accumulate solids up to 3-5% dependant on the type of sludge, effluent filters
used, etc. Use 3 % solids for conservative value
902.28 lbs/ (0.03 * 7.48 * 1.05) = 3829.4 gallons of solids per year at 3% Therefore 5,000
gallon septic tank is more than adequate for sludge storage.
Irrigation Area
The drip field will consist of 4 zones with a total of 4,955 LF of drip lines.
4955 LF/ 2 LF/emitter = 2,477 emitters
2,477 emitters * 8 sq. ft. per emitter = 19,816 SF = 0.45 acres
Per Southeast Soil Science the average surface K-sat is 16.3 gpd/sf and the average
subsurface K-sat is 10.7 gpd/sf. The proposed system will utilize the 4,120 gpd of
wastewater flow projected to be produced for irrigation in this area. This will result in an
irrigation rate of 0.21 gpd/sf which is less than 2% of the K-sat.
Drip System Design
Since the system consists of 4 zones design for dosing two zones simultaneously and
flushing one zone.
Zone Physical Characteristics
Zone
Laterals
Drip Line
Highest Lateral
Lowest Lateral
Length
Elevation
Elevation
1
4
1,179 ft
1852
1844
2
4
1,165 ft
1864
1856
3
5
1,346 ft
1876
1866
4
5
1,265 ft
1888
1878

Zone Hvdranlie CharnefPriefirc (f"n— il.. + .-4-._-_i. r_i__ _
Zone
Dosing Flow
Dosing
Headloss
Flushing Flow
Flushing
Headloss
1
5.95 gpm
8.72 ft
12.57 gpm
63.98 ft
2
5.88 gpm
8.54 ft
12.49 gpm
62.84 ft
3
6.79 gpm
7.59 ft
15.54 gpm
59.62 ft
4
6.38 gpm
5.60 ft
14.63 gpm
49.87 ft
�UIIIYuwi 1-k-L uilg riugra.iu wriuen oy bteven Berkowitz, NCDENR
System will dose in groups of 2 zones (Zone 1 and Zone 3, Zone 2 and Zone 4).
Zone 1 and Zone 3 dosing flow rate = 5.95 gpm + 6.79 gpm = 12.74 gpm
Zone 2 and Zone 4 dosing flow rate = 5.88 gpm + 6.38 gpm = 12.26 gpm
Determine Dose Volume
Dose system a maximum of 6 times per day. 4,120 gpd/ 6 = 687 gallons per dose
Doses will be an average of 55 minutes long each. For a total of 5.5 hours of irrigation
time at design flow.
Store a minimum of 1 dose in the dosing tank. Dosing tank is 8' diameter precast tank.
8^2*pi/4 *7.48 gal/cf = 376 gallons per vertical foot. Provide 2' vertical storage for dose
volume.
Zones should be flushed each 50 cycles. Based on 6 doses per day each zone will receive
3 doses. Therefore flushing will occur every 16 to 17 days. Flushing cycle should last
approximately 10 minutes for a total flow of 120 to 160 gallons.
Determine Pump Head Conditions
System headloss = filter headloss + supply headloss + zone headloss + return headloss
Pump head conditions = Static head + system headloss + residual pressure required
Example for Zone 1
Per American Manufacturing maximum filter headloss = 10 psi
Supply headloss = 10.57 Q1-85 L
C1.85 D4.87
Where Q = flow (gpm)
C = Friction coefficient
D = pipe diameter (in)
L = pipe length (ft)
Pg. 7

Dosing Supply Headloss =
Dosing Supply Headloss = 8.40 ft
Flushing Supply Headloss =
Flushing Supply Headloss = 8.20 ft
10.57 12.741 " 340
1201.85 1.484.87
10.57 12.571.85 340
1201.85 1.484.87
Zone Headloss' are listed in the table above.
Return headloss = 10.57 Q1.85 L
C1.85 D4.87
Return Dosing headloss = 0 because -there is 0 flow in the return header during dosing
Return Flushing Headloss '= 10.57 6.621.8s 160
1201.85 0.914.87
Return Flushing Headloss = 12.58 ft
Limiting conditions are the maximum pressure during dosing at the beginning of the
lowest lateral and the minimum pressure required for flushing the highest lateral in a
zone. Pump shall be sized to provide the appropriate flow with these constraints on head.
For Zone 1 Maximum Dosing Pump Hydraulic Grade = lowest lateral elevation (1844) +
filter headloss (23.1) + Dosing Supply Headloss (8.40) + maximum pressure
allowable(138.6)
Zone I Maximum hosing Pump Hydraulic Grade = 2014.10 ft
For Zone 1 Minimum Flushing Pump Hydraulic Grade = highest lateral elevation(1852)
+ filter headloss (23.1) + flushing supply headloss(8.20) + zone flushing headloss (63.98)
+ minimum end of zone pressure (Greatest of Septic Tank WL - Zone high point or 23.1)
+ return flushing headloss (12.58)
Zone 1 Minimum Flushing Pump Hydraulic Grade=1997.86 ft
See attached table for Zones 1 - 4 hydraulics calculations.
Based on calculations presented in the attached table size pump for a minimum of
1996.08 hydraulic grade elevation at 15.54 gpm and a maximum of 2014.10 hydraulic
grade elevation at 12.74 gpm

Pump off Elevation in dosing tank = 1875.0'
Therefore pump heads required: 1996.08 - 1875.0=121.08' minimum at 15.54 gpm
2014.10 — 1875.0=139.10' maximum at 12.74 gpm
See attached spreadsheet for equalization pump headloss calculations.
Buoyancy Calculations
Septic Tank
Proposed septic tank is 16' x 8' x 6' h and weighs a total of 65,900 lbs. Displaced water
= 16' * 8' * 6' *62.41bs/cf = 47,923 lbs. Therefore Septic tank has a safety factor of
65,900/47,923, SF =1.38
Irrigation Storage Tanks
Irrigation Storage Tanks are 10' x 20' x 10.5'. Structures have 8" walls with 10" top and
bottom slabs. Weight of top and bottom slabs = 2 * 10' * 20' * 0.83' * 150 lbs/cf =
49,800 lbs. Weight of walls = 0.66'* 10.5'*(10+10+20+20)*150 lbs/cf = 62,3701bs
Total Structure weight = 112,170 lbs, Structure will be completely buried with a
minimum of 4.5' of soil covering the structure. 4.5' * 10 * 20 * 120 lbs/cf soil = 108,000
lbs. Therefore Total weight = 220,170 lbs
Displaced water = 10' * 20' * 10.5' * 62.4 lbs/cf = 131,040
Safety factor = 220,170/131,040 =1.68
Reject Storage Tanks
Reject Storage Tanks are 10' x 20' x 7.5'. Structures have 8" walls with 10" top and
bottom slabs. Weight of top and bottom -slabs = 2 *­10' * -20' * -0:83' * 150 lbs/cf =
49,800lbs. Weight of walls = 0.66'* 7.5'*(10+10+20+20)*150 lbs/cf = 44,550 lbs Total
Structure weight = 94,3501bs, Structure will be completely buried with a minimum of
4.5' of soil covering the structure. 4.5' * 10 * 20 * 120 lbs/cf soil = 108,000 lbs.
Therefore Total weight = 202,350 lbs
Displaced water = 10' * 20' * 7.5 * 62.41bs/cf = 93,600
Safety factor = 202,350/93,600 = 2.16
Aquapoint Bioclere Units are buoyant if installed in groundwater and are recommended
by the manufacturer to be encased on concrete for these installations. Due to the
topographic location and based on no water table being found during soil investigation it
has been assumed that the groundwater table is highly unlikely to be a factor in this
installation and therefore no protective action is necessary.

See attached spreadsheets -for Equalization Pump Station, Filter Feed Tank,
Backwash Tank, and Dosing Pump Station, Reject Storage Return Pump
Pg. 10

Santeetlah Lakeside
..SYSTEIW, HARAGTERj$TIC,S
L, Force Main Length (ft) 55 Pump Off Elev. (ft) 1881
1
D, Force Main Diameter (in) 2 High Point Elev. (ft) 1890
Q, Peak Flow (gpm) 20.00 C, Friction Coefficient 120
Note: Hazen Williams Friction Coefficient Maximum per NC Design Criteria, DIP (Initial Service 125, End of
Service 100), PVC (Initial Service 140, End of Service 120), HDPE (Initial Service 140, End of Service 120).
For Force Mains with multiple pipe materials use a weighted average friction coefficient.
TDH = Head static + Head friction + Head minor
The friction loss in the force main can be represented as:
Head friction = 10.57 Q1"85 L / (C1.85 D4.87)
10.57 * Q (20.00gpm)11.85 * L (55 ft) / ( C (120)^1 85 "
Friction Headloss (ft) * D (2 inches)^4.87) 0 72
Static Head (ft) High Point Elev. (1890 ft) - Pump Off Elev. (1881 ft) QFg'
e minor losses due to valves and tittings can a represented as:
Head L = K V2/2g
The following valves and fittings, and associated K values, are included in the flow path of the piping
system with one pump running:
Minor Losses
WKvalue K * Quantity
90 degree bends0.8 1.6
45 degree bends0.4 1.6Gate valves0 2 0Plug valves 0 2 0Check Valves2 5 2 5Tee (flow through run)0.6 . 0Tee (flow through branch)1 8 0Exit
1 1
Total K 6.7
Flow Velocity through Force Main (fps) Q (20.09pm) / Area of 2 inch Force Main
4
Total Minor Headloss: (ft) Total K (6.7) * V (2:04)^2 / 2 g U:43'
Friction Head (.7 ft)+Static Head(9.0 ft)+Minor f
Total Dynamic Head: (ft) Headloss (0.4ft) 10 1fi
Pump Operating Point:'n.i;4',; .,-,41f,.,.Wur .....

Company:
Name:
Date: 4/23/2007
3SE152L
Type: 1132-3EJECTOR ,
Speed: 3450 rpm
Synch speed: 3600 rpm
Dia: 2.5 in
Curve: v85535
Impeller:
Specific Speeds:
Ns: --
Nss: --
Dimensions:
Suction: --- in
Discharge: 3 in
Pump Limits
Temperature: -- *F
Power: -- hp
Pressure: --- psi g
'Eye area: -- in2
Sphere size: 1.5 in
Flow: 20 US gpm
Head: 12.6 ft
Eff: 12%
Power: 0.54 hp
NPSHr: --- ft
Shutoff head: 15 ft
'
Shutoff dP: 6.48 psi
Min flow: --- US gpm
=
E 15% @ 63 US gpm
t Ner:
0.671 hp @ 1 US gpm
Max power:
3.69 hp @ 1 US gpm
L
d 0.5
z
0
4
d
3
0
a
2......_....__......_.._......._....._.__.....---- ..._.-- ....._.._...__......... _...
-
0
Flow: 20 US gpm Head: 10.ft
r x,
Water Temperature: 60 °F
SG: 1 Vapor pressure: 0.2563 psi a
Viscosity: 1.105 cP Atm pressure: 14.7 psi a
NPSHa: -- ft
Consult Crane/Barnes to select a motor for this pump.
cu 4u
60 80
100 120 140 160 180 200
US gpm
�p�erforinance lauatuation ��,.. ,� . � ��.. �° ����•�' � . �� �� �.� �-�� �� � � � ; �-
_
Flow
Speed
Head
US gpm
rpm
ft
Efficiency
Power NPSHr
hp ft
24
3450
12.1
14
0.513 ---
20
3450
12.6
12
0.54 _--
16
3450
13.1
10
0.568 __-
12
3450
13.6
7
0.595 ___
8
3450
14
5
0.623
Selected from catalog: Crane Barnes.60 Vers: 14

— �� SYSTEM
>..,,,, .z.�YC�'i . mz ,�k.,,;`i
L, Force Main Length (ft)
C1-{ARACTERISIC
351 Pump Off Elev. (ft) 1879.35
D, Force Main Diameter (in)
21 High Point Elev. (ft) 1889
Q, Peak Flow (gpm)
30.001 C, Friction Coefficient 120
Note: Hazen Williams Friction. Coefficient Maximum per NC Design Criteria, DIP (Initial Service.125, End of
Service 100), PVC (Initial Service 140, End.of Service 120), HDPE (Initial Service 140, End of Service 120).
For Force Mains with multiple pipe materials use a weighted average friction coefficient. "
TDH = Head static + Head friction + Head minor
The friction loss in the force main can be represented as:
Head friction = 10.57 Ql-85 L / (C,s5 D4.87) ..-
Friction Headloss (ft)
10.57 * Q (30.00gpm)11.85 * L (35 ft) / ( C (120)^1.85
* D (2 inches)^4.87)
�g
fig 9
Static Head (ft)
High Point Elev. (1889 ft) - Pump Off Elev. (1879.35
e minor losses due to valves and tittings.can be represented as:
Head L = K V2/2g
The following valves, and fittings, and associated K values, are included in the flow path of the piping
system with one pump running:
Minor Losses
Quantity
K value
KQuantity
90 degree bends
2
0.8
1.6
45 degree bends
6
0.4
2.4
Gate valves
0
0.2
0
Plug valves
0
0.2
0
Check Valves
1
2.5
2.5
Tee (flow through run)
0
0.6
0
Tee (flow through branch)
1
1.8
1.8
Exit
.11
1
1
Total K
9.3
Flow Velocity through Force Main (fps) ,:Q (30.Ogpm) / Area of 2 inch Force Main34fi
Total Minor Headloss: (ft) Total K (9.3) ' V (3.06)12 / 2 g
Total Dynamic Head: (ft)
Friction Head (1.0 ft)+Static Head(9.7 ft)+ Minor
Headloss (1.4ft) ���
R�,
Pump Operating Point`t 36 9Rm@11 98SftTDki�._ Y g ,; ;

16.00
14.00
12.00
10.00
v_
-�
8.00
c�
6.00
4.00
2.00
0.00
0
Flow Equalization Pump Station
System Curve vs. Pump Curve

MIq
,i
n. Handling
2" Spherical Solids .
www.cranepumps.com, Manual & Automatic
- I %'; 2.. & 3" Discharge
f:
DISCHARGE ............................ 2" NPT, Female, Vertical, Bolt -on Flange
'LIQUID TEMPERATURE,...........
104°F (40°C) Continuous
VOLUTE ............................... :......
Cast Iron ASTM A-48, Class 30
MOTOR HOUSING .....................
Cast Iron ASTM A-48, Class 30 '
.
SEAL PLATE .............................
Cast Iron ASTM A-48,, Class 30
IMPELLER: Design ...................
2Vane, open, with pump .out vanes on
back side. Dynamically balanced, ISO G6.3
Material .................
Cast Iron ASTM A-48, Class 30 '
SHAFT
416 Stainless Steel
SQUARE RINGS .............:...........
Buna-N
-
HARDWARE ...............................
300 Series Stainless Steel
PAINT ..........................................
Air Dry Enamel
SEAL: Design ...................
Single Mechanical
Material ..................
Carbon/Ceramic/Buna-N '
Hardware -300 Series Stainless
CORD ENTRY .............................
15 ft. (5m) Cord with plug on 120 volt &
.5HP, 240 volt, 1 phase. Quick connect
custom molded for sealing and strain relief
SPEED .....:.................................
1750 RPM (Nominal)
UPPER BEARING .......................
Single Row, Ball, Oil lubricated
Load .......... .............
Radial
LOWER BEARING ............:.........
Single Row, Ball, Oil lubricated
Load .......................
Radial & Thrust
MOTOR: Design ...................
NEMA L -Single Phase; NEMA B -Three
phase Torque Curve, Oil Filled, Squirrel
Cage Induction Series: SE (SE51 & SE52)
Insulation ............... Class B
SINGLE PHASE .......................... Permanent Split Capacitor (PSC) .5, 075, 1.0HP, 175ORPM,
Includes Overload Protection in Motor 60liz
THREE PHASE ........................... 200-240/480 is Td-Voltage notor 600V. .
Requires overload Protection to be
included in control panel
LEVEL CONTROL ...............: . ' A" -Wide Angle, PVC, Mechanical;
15 ft (5m) cord with 'Piggy -Back Plug, N/Oa
"AU"- Vlfide Angle, Polypropylene, SW
Mechanical, N/O Integral -to pump._
ON and OFF Points are adjustable
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT...........: Seal Material, Impeller Trims, Additional'
cord, Normally Closed Temperature Sensors with cord for 3 phase pumps
(Requires relay in control panel),
Cc,,
,US
CSA 108
UL 778
LR16567
Sample Specifications: Section 1 Page 5.
DESCRIPTION:
SUBMERSIBLE NON -CLOG SEWAGE PUMP
DESIGNED FOR TYPICAL RAW SEWAGE
APPLICATIONS
CRAM E PUMPS & SYSTEMS SECTION iB
PAGE 13
® DATE 6104
n I IcA. /n07\ -7z0 one-7 r---,.r,- InrlIZN Ar7-CZ771 I.,+o.•.. +i.,.,ol• /�47T �1 �_�GDA

eries E-
2" Spherical Solids Handling
M 1&A t t
anua U Of71a IC www.cranepymps.com
2" & 3" Discharge
SE51, SE52, SE-L
SE51A, SE52A
SE51AU, SE52AU
inches
12.63
(321) 625 1.50
(159) (4)
I
.4.88
9.75
18.63
(473)
i .66
(669)
12.63
(321) 6.25 1.50
(159) (38)
4.88(124) O (124)4)
9.759.75(248) (248)
i
I I (473)
6.66
I (169)
12.63
(321)fi25 1.50
I (159) (38)
W41
(248)
18.6 3)
(47
1.
(1 9
(mm)
AODEL NO
PART NO
HP
VOLTIPH
Hz
RPM
(Nom)
NEMA
START
CODE
FULL
LOAD
AMPS
LOCKED
ROTOR
AMPS
CORD
SIZE
CORD
TYPE
CORD
O.D
inch (mm)
SE51
104871
0.5
120/1
60
1750
F
11.6
21.3
14/3
SJTOW
0.375 (9.5)
SE51A
104872
0.5
1 120/1
60
1750
F
11.6
21.3
14/3
SJTOW
0.375 (9.5)
SE51AU
104873
0.5
1 120/1
60
1750
F
11.6
21.3
14/3
SJTOW
0.375 (9.5)
SE52
104874
0.5
1 240/1
60
1750
J
5.9
14.9
14/3
SOW
0.530 (13.5)
.SE52AU
104875
0.5
240/1
60
1750
J
5.9
14.9
1413
SOW
0.530 (13.5)
SE594L .
104881
0.5
200-240/3
60
1750
H/L
3.2/3.0 '
9.8I11.0
14A
SOW
-0.570 (14.5)-
SE5441
104882
0.5
480/3
60
1750
K
1.5
5.3
14/4
SOW
0:570 (14.5)
SE554L
104883
0.5-
600/3
60
1750
H
1.0
3.4
14/4
SOW
0.570 (14.5)
SE774L
104884
0.75
200-240/1
60
1750
G/K
7.4/7.0
21.5/25.8
14/3
SOW
0.530 (13.5)
SE794L
104885
0.75
200-240/3
60
1750
H/K
4.8/4.5
13.7/15.4
14/4
SOW
0.570 (14.5)
SE744L
104886
0.75
480/3
60
1750
K
2.2
7.7
14/4
SOW
0.570 (14.5)
SE754L
104887
0.75
600/3
60
1750
L
1.5
7.2
14/4
SOW
0.570 (14.5)
SE1074L
104888
1.0
200-240/1
60
1750
DIG
8.8/8.3
21.5/25.8
14/3
SOW
0.530,(13.5)
SE1094L
104889
1.0
200-240/3
60
1750
E/H
5.1/4.9
13.7/15.4
14/4
SOW
0.570 (14.5)
SE1044L
104890
1.0
480/3
60
1750
H
2.4
7.7
14/4
SOW
0.570 (14.5)
SE1054L
104891 1
1.0 1
600/3
60
1750 1
J
1.9
7.2
14/4
SOW
0.570 (14.5)
Mechanical Switch on SE51A, cord 16/2, SJOW, 0.320 (8.1mm) O.D:, Piggy -Back Plug
Mechanical Switch on SE -AU, cord 14/2, SJOW, 0.345 (8.8mm) O.D.
IMPORTANT!
1.) PUMP MAYBE OPERATED -DRY- FOR EXTENDED PERIODS WITHOUT DAMAGE TO MOTOR AND/OR SEALS.
2.) THIS PUMP IS APPROPRIATE FOR THOSE APPLICATIONS SPECIFIED AS CLASS I DIVISION II HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS.
3 ;PUMP IS NOTAPPROPRIATE FOR THOSE APPLICATIONS SPECIFIED AS CLASS I DIVISION I HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS.
4, ALLATIONS SUCH AS DECORATIVE FOUNTAINS OR WATER FEATURES PROVIDED FOR VISUAL ENJOYMENT MUST BE INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE
i THE NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE ANSI/NFPA 70 AND/OR THE AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION. THIS PUMP IS NOT INTENDED FOR USE IN
SWIMMING POOLS, RECREATIONAL WATER PARKS, OR INSTALLATIONS IN WHICH HUMAN CONTACT WITH PUMPED MEDIA IS A COMMON OCCURRENCE.
SECTION 1CRAN E
PAGE 14 PUMPS &SYSTEMS
DATE 6/04
ACrana Cn Cmmnami I IRA- (937) 77R-RA47 • Canada• mn514.57-F223 - IntPrnatinnnl• (937) Ri15-359£i

1■\�\■■■■\�\■■■■■■I
:�\■►�\■■■■►�■■■■■I
■►�■■���■■■\:�■■■I
1'�■■■■■\►�■\�\■■■\'

Bottom Slab Diameter (ft.) =outside
__ l_ .. .. .-/
diameter (9.33 ft) + (2 x B.S. Extends (10 in/12))
-
=
­
11.00
Volume:
Top Slab (co =
Outside Diameter (9.33 ft)^2 * pi / 4 * T.S. Thickness (8in/12)
=
45.6 •
Bottom Slab cf) =
B'S. Diameter (11.00 ft)^2 * pi / 4' * B.S. Thickness 8in/12)
1= 163.4
Walls (cf) _
(OS Dia. (9.33 ft)^2 - PS Dia. (8 ft)^2) * pi / 4 * W. thickness
(Bin/12) * Depth (15.15ft)
=
1183.3
Weight of Pump Station:
Top Slab (Ibs.) =
Tob Slab Volume (45.6 cf) * Density of Conc.(150 Ib/cf)
_
6,841.7
Bottom Slab (Ibs.) =
Bottom Slab Volume (63.4 cf) * Density of Conc.(150 ib/cf)
=
9,503.3
Walls (Ibs.) =
walls volume (183.3 cf) * Density of Conc.(150 Ib/cf)
=
27,499.4
Total Weight (Ibs.) =
T.S. weight (6841.7 Ibs) + B.S. weight (9503.3 Ibs) + walls
weight (27499.4 Ibs)
=
43,844.4
Saturated soil over extended
slab:
Volume (cf) =
(B.S. Dia.(11.00 ft)^2 - Outside Dia. (9.33 ft)^2) * pi / 4 *"
Depth(15.15 ft)
=
403.2
-Weight (Ibs.) =
soil volume (403:2 cf) * soil density-(1201bs/cf) -'
48,388:4
Buoyancy Force of Displaced Volume:
Density of water (Ibs/cf): 162.4
Volume Displaced (cf)=
O.S. Dia. (9.33 ft)"2 * pi/4 * (depth (15.15 ft) + B.S. Thickness (8
in/(12 in/ft)) * B.S. Dia. (11 ft)^2 * pi/4
=
1,099.9
Buoyancy Force (Ibs.) =1
Displaced Volume (1099.9 cf) * density of water (62.4lbs/cf) 1=
168,632.0
(
Safety Factor = (68632.Olbs)
P.S. weight (43844.4lbs) + Soil (48388.4)) / Buo. Force
=
1.34
If
greater than 1, then not Buoyant

Santeetlah Lakeside
Filter Feed Tank Buoyancy Calculations
Pump Station Diameter ft): 5
Wall Thickness (in.): 5
Top Slab Thickness (in.): 6
Bottom Slab Thickness (in.): 6
Bottom Slab Extends (in.): 8
Depth (ft. ): 12.5
Density of Concrete (lb/cf):
150
Density of Sat. Soil (lb/cf):
120
Outside Diameter ft) =
PS Diameter (5ft) + 2 *wall thickness (5 in/12)
=
5.83
Bottom Slab Diameter (ft.) =
outside diameter (5.83 ft) + (2 x B.S. Extends (8 in/12))
=
7.17
Volume:
Top Slab cf) =
Outside Diameter (5.83 ft)^2 * pi / 4 * T.S. Thickness (6in/12)
113.4
Bottom Slab (co =
B.S. Diameter (7.17 ft)^2 * pi / 4 * B.S. Thickness (6in/12)
=
20.2
Walls (co _
(OS Dia. (5.83 ft)^2 - PS Dia. (5 ft)^2) * pi / 4 * W. thickness
(5in/12) * Depth (12.5ft)
=
36.9
Weight of Pump Station:
Top Slab (Ibs.) =
Tob Slab Volume (13.4 co * Density of Conc.(150 Ib/cf)
=
2,004.4
Bottom Slab (Ibs.) =
Bottom Slab Volume (20.2 cf) * Density of Conc. 150 lb/cf)
=
3,025.4
Walls (Ibs.) =
walls volume 36.9 cf) * Density of Conc.(150 Ib/cf)
=
5,539.4
Total Weight (Ibs.) =
T.S. weight (2004.4 Ibs) + B.S. weight (3025.4 Ibs) + walls
weight (5539.4 Ibs)
=
10,569.2
Saturated soil over extended
slab:
Volume (cf) =
(B.S. Dia.(7.17 ft)^2 - Outside Dia. (5.83 ft)^2) * pi / 4
Depth(12.5 ft)
=
170.2
Weight (lbs.) =
soil volume (170.2 cf) "soil density (1,201bs%cf) -
=
20;420.4
Buoyancy Force of DisplacedVolume:
Density of water (Ibs/cf):
62.4
Volume Displaced (cf)=
O.S. Dia. (5.83 ft)^2 * pi/4 * (depth (12.5 ft) + B.S. Thickness (6
in/(12 in/ft)) * B.S. Dia. (7.17 ft)^2 * pi/4
=
354.2
Buoyancy Force (Ibs.) =
Displaced Volume (354.2 cf) * density of water (62.41bs/cf)
=
22,104.4
Safety Factor = (22104.4lbs)
( P.S. weight (10569.2lbs) + Soil (20420.4)) / Buo. Force
=
1.40
If
greater than 1, then not Buoyant

Santeetlah Lakeside
Filter Backwash Tank Buovan
Pump Station Diameter (ft.): 5
Wall Thickness (in.):
5
Top Slab Thickness (in.):
6
Bottom Slab Thickness (in.):
6
Bottom Slab Extends (in.):
8
Depth ft):
8.6
Density of Concrete (lb/cf):
150
Density of Sat. Soil (lb/cf):
120
Outside Diameter (ft.) =
PS Diameter (5ft) + 2 * wall thickness (5 in/12)
=
5.83
Bottom Slab Diameter (ft.) =
outside diameter (5.83 ft) + (2 x B.S. Extends 8 in/12))
_,7.17
Volume:
Top Slab (cf) =
Outside Diameter (5.83 ft)^2 * pi / 4 * T.S. Thickness (6in/12)
=
13.4
Bottom Slab (cf) =
B.S. Diameter (7.17 ft)^2 * pi / 4 * B.S. Thickness (6in/12)
=
20.2
Walls (cf) =
(OS Dia. (5.83 ft)^2 - PS Dia. (5 ft)^2) * pi / 4 * W. thickness
(5in/12) * Depth (8.6ft)
=
25.4
Weight of Pump Station:
Top Slab (lbs.) =
Tob Slab Volume (13.4 cf) * Density of Conc.(150 Ib/cf)
=
2,004.4
Bottom Slab (lbs.) =
Bottom Slab Volume 20.2 cf) * Density of Conc.(150 Ib/cf)
=
3,025.4
Walls (lbs. ) =
walls volume (25.4 cf) * Density of Conc.050 Ib/cf)
=
3,811.1
Total Weight (lbs.) =
T.S. weight (2004.4 lbs) + B.S. weight (3025.4 lbs) + walls
weight (3811.1 lbs)
=
8,840.9
Saturated soil over extended
slab:
Volume (cf) _
(B.S. Dia.(7.17 ft)^2 - Outside Dia. (5.83 ft)^2) * pi / 4
Depth(8.6 ft)
=
117.1
Weight Ps.) _
. soil volume (T1'7. c * soil density (1201bs/c " "
_"
14,049.2
Buoyancy Force of Displaced Volume:
Density of water (Ibs/c0:
62.4
Volume Displaced (cf)=
O.S. Dia. (5.83 ft)"2 * pi/4 * (depth (8.6 ft) + B.S. Thickness (6
in/(12 in/ft)) * B.S. Dia. (7.17 ft)^2 * pi/4
= 1250.0
Buoyancy Force (lbs.) _
Displaced Volume (250.0 cf) * density of water (62.41bs/cf)
=
15,600.5
Safety Factor =
( P.S. weight (8840.9lbs) + Soil (14049.2)) / Buo. Force
(15600.5lbs)
=
1.47
If
greater than 1, then not Buoyant

Santeetlah Lakeside
Drip Dosing Wet Well Buoyancy Calculations
Pump Station Diameter (ft.):
6
Wall Thickness (in.):
6
Top Slab Thickness (in.):
8
Bottom Slab Thickness (in.):
8
Bottom Slab Extends (in.):
8
Depth (ft.):
18.5
Density of Concrete (Ib/cf):
150
Density of Sat. Soil (lb/cf):
120
Outside Diameter (ft.) =
PS Diameter (6ft) + 2 * wall thickness (6 in/12)
=
7.00
Bottom Slab Diameter (ft.) _
outside diameter (7.00 ft) + (2 x B.S. Extends (8 in/12))
=
8.33
Volume:
Top Slab (cf) =
Outside Diameter (7.00 ft)^2 * pi / 4 * T.S. Thickness (8in/12)
=
25.7
Bottom Slab (cf) =
B.S. Diameter (8.33 ft)^2 * pi / 4 * B.S. Thickness (8in/12)
=
36.4
Walls (co =
(OS Dia. (7.00 ft)^2 - PS Dia. (6 ft)^2) * pi / 4 * W. thickness
(6in/12) * Depth (18.5ft)
=
94.4
Weight of Pump Station:
Top Slab (Ibs.) =
Tob Slab Volume (25.7 co * Density of Conc.(150 lb/cf)
=
3,848.5
Bottom Slab (Ibs.) =
Bottom Slab Volume (36.4 cf) * Density of Conc.(150 lb/cf)
=
5,454.2
Walls (Ibs.) =
walls volume (94.4 co * Density of Conc.(150 lb/cf)
=
14,166.6
Total Weight (Ibs.) =
T.S. weight (3848.5 Ibs) + B.S. weight (5454.2 Ibs) + walls
weight (14166.6 Ibs)
=
23,469.2
Saturated soil over extended
slab:
Volume (co =
(B.S. Dia.(8.33 ft)^2 - Outside Dia. (7.00 ft)^2) * pi / 4
Depth(18.5 ft)
=
297.1
Weight (Ibs.) =
soil volurne (297.1 cf) * soil density (120lbs/cf)
_`
35,646.6
Buoyancy Force of Displaced Volume:
Density of water (Ibs/cf):
62.4
Volume Displaced (co=
O.S. Dia. (7.00 ft)^2 * pi/4 * (depth (18.5 ft) + B.S. Thickness (8
in/(12 in/ft)) * B.S. Dia. (8.33 ft)^2 * pi/4
=
748.3
Buoyancy Force (Ibs.) =
Displaced Volume (748.3 co * density of water (62.4lbs/cf)
=
46,695.4
Safety Factor =
( P.S. weight (23469.2lbs) + Soil (35646.6)) / Buo. Force
(46695.4lbs)
=
1.27
If greater than 1, then not Buoyant

Zone 1
Zone 2
Zone.3
Zone 4
Linear Feet of Drip Lines
1,179
1,165
1,346
1,265
Emitter Flow (gpm)
5.95
5.88
6.79
6.38
Minimum Flushing Flow (gpm)
12.57
12.49
1.5.54
14.63
Return Flushing Flow (gpm)
6.62
6.61
8.75
8.25
Zone Dosing Headloss (ft)
8.72
8.54
7.59
5.6
Zone Flushing Headloss (ft)
63.98
62.84
59.62
49.87
Zone Highpoint Elevation
1852
1864
1876
1888
Zone Lowpoint Elevation
1844
1856
1866
1878
'Supply Dosing Headloss (ft)
8.40
7.02
6.92
5.76
Supply Flushing Headloss (ft)
8.20
7.27
9.99
7.98
Return Flushing Headloss (ft)
12.58
10.19
4.26
3.13
Maximum Dosing Pump Head
2014.10
20.24.72
2034.62
2045.46
Minimum Flushing Pump Head 1
1997.86
1993.401
1996.08
1995.1'8

Z10UT.ASC
11 l l -
"SUMMARY OF INPUTS:"
"NUMBER OF LATERALS ",fill;"",4,"INPUT FILE NAME :", lift ,"zl.asc"
"TOTAL LAT. LENGTH, FEET = ","","11,1179,"OUTPUT FILE NAME :","","zlout.asc
"INSIDE DIAMETER, INCHES = 1',111',"",.57,"EMITTER SPACING, FEET
"EMITTER FLOW, GPH = ",fill,"",.61,."MIN. SCOUR VEL. _","","",2.
"INLET LAT. NUM. _ " fill fill 1 "OUTLET LAT. NUM fill fill 4
"PRECISION, HARDY CROSS = ","","",7.504728E-05,"OVERALL =
' . 0005
"HEAD LOSS ADJ. FACTORS "
"SUP. MAN. = " fill 1 "RET. MAN. " fill 1 "CATS. " fill 1
11 l l
"LATERAL NETWORK DETAILS"
lift
"LATNUM ","LENGTH ","NUMLPS ","INFLOW ","EMFLOW ","OUTFLOW ","OUTVEL."
1,294,0,3.141509,1.48433,1.657179,2.08187
2,298,0,3.133126,1:504663,1.628462,2.045794
3,296,0,3.138386,1.494497,1.64389,2.065175
4,291,0,3.154014,1.463997,1.690017,2.123124
."MANIFOLD NETWORK DETAILS"
Till
"MANNUM ","INDIA ","INLEN ","INFLOW ","INVEL ","OUTDIA ","OUTLEN ","OUTFLOW
""OUTVEL "
1,,1.48,8,9.425527,1.75637,.91,10,-1.657176,-.8168075
2,1.48,6,6.2924,1..172538,.91,5,-3.285635,-1.619461
3,1.48,4.5,3.154014,.5877249,.91,4.5,-4.929522,-2.429718
fill
"SUMMARY OF OUTPUTS:"
"FLUSHING FLOW, SUPPLY SIDE,GPM =,fill ,fill ,"",12.56704," EMITTER FLOW, GPM
„1„1, 5.952583
/ "RETURN FLUSHING FLOW, GPM =",fill,,"",6.614452
l "MANIFOLD VOLUME, GALLS=","","","",2.31215," LATERAL VOLUME, GALLS
-" "" "" "" 15.62873
"TOTAL NETWORK VOLUME, GALLS=,"",,,17.94088, NETWORK FILL TIME, MINS.
"" "" "" 1 427614
"LONGEST LATERAL DETENTION TIME WHEN FLUSHING, MINUTES.
—to,�., ,��� ��„ „�� 1.659221
"FLUSHING CONDITIONS:"
"SUPPLY MAN. HL., FEET = ,loll ,fill ,""',.1215078," RETURN MAN. HL., FEET =
.2802851
"LAST LAT. �HL., FEET = ,fill,"","",63.84132—," FIRST LAT. HL FEET =
11' 1111' 1111' It
11' 63. 7112
"CLOCKWISE LOOP HL. _ ", till ,I'll , lilt, 63.96283," COUNTER —CLOCKWISE HL =
if ,11
1 , , "" 63.99148
"MEAN TOTAL HEAD LOSS = ",,,,63.97716," VARIANCE _
IT
fill fill It,,,
4.478504E-04
"IRRIGATION CONDITIONS:"
"SUPPLY MAN. HEAD LOSS = ","","",",3.039989E-02," LONGEST LATERAL HL. _
it "" I 1' -1, 11 11,8.687368
"TOTAL NETWORK HL. _ " fill fill fill 8.717769
;' " , , 1 1
"RUN DATA"
"TOTAL ITERATIONS = " fill fill fill 24, INITIAL ITERATIONS
11 1111 11 11 1' "
"NUM. OF FLOW INCREMENTS = ","","",,1," TOTAL FLOW INCREMENT, GALLS.
11 fi_
ll fill fill .2464123
Page 1

Z20UT.ASC
SUMMARY .OF I
"NUMBER OF LATERALS, _ ","","",4,"INPUT FILE NAME :", ","z2.asc"
"TOTAL LAT.. :LENGTH, FEET = ","","", " :","","z2out,asc"
-.1165, OUTPUT FILE NAME -
INSIDE DIAMETER, INCHES = ,.57, EMITTER SPACING, FEET 2
„ „„ ""EMITTER FLOW, GPH = ,.61, MIN. SCOUR VEL. IF 2
"INLET LAT. NUM. ��1 ��OUTLET LAT. NUM ��= 4" - -
ifPRECISION, HARDY.CROSS = ,, ,1.743392E-04,. OVERALL'
pill it IF,.0005
"HEAD 'LOSS ADJ. FACTORS "
"SUP. MAN. = „r„!',1,"RET. MAN. „, IF ,1,"CATS.
"LATERAL.NETWORK DETAILS"'
. IF
it
LATNUM ","LENGTH „ „ ","INFLOW „
NUMLPS INFLOW EMFLOW ,„.'OUTFLOW ,„ OUTVEL
1,286,0,3.130501,1.443664,1.686837,2.119129
2,295,0,3.11451,1.48433,1.630179,2.047951
3,296,0,3.113231,1.494497,1.618734,2.033572
4,288,0,3.136205,1.4.5383,1.682375,2.113523
poll
"MANIFOLD NETWORK DETAILS".
"MANNUM ,"INDIA If,11INLEN ","INFLOW , INVEL to, orOUTDIA OUTLEN OUTFLOW
1. OUTVEL IF
131.48,5.5,9.363944,1.744895,.91,12,-1.686834,-.8314257
2,1.48,5,6.249435,1.164531,.91,7.5,-3.311927,-1.63242 .
'3,1.48,12,3.136205,.5844064,.91,9,-4..9306573-2.430278
"SUMMARY OF OUTPUTS:"
"FLUSHING FLOW, SUPPLY SIDE,GPM=","","","",12.49445,". EMITTER FLOW, GPM
, 5.881417
(• "RETURN FLUSHING FLOW, GPM =","", Fill ,I'll ,6.613029
"MANIFOLD VOLUME, GALLS ","",'"',"",2.973702," LATERAL VOLUME, -GALLS
"TOTAL NETWORK VOLUME,'GALLS _", fill ,will ,"",18.41685," NETWORK FILL TIME, MINS.
„" IF IF
1.474003
"LONGEST'�LATERAL DETENTION TIME WHEN FLUSHING, MINUTES.
„II 11
7
,,,, IF IF
,,,1 ,,,1 If" 1. 658408 ,
fill
"FLUSHING CONDITIONS:
"SUPPLY MAN. HL., FEET = ","", Fill ,I'll,.0992308,'' RETURN MAN. HL., FEET =
11 ,,,, ,,,, ,,,, ,4875072
"."
LAST. LAT.- .HL-. , .FEET 1-"' poll, "",.62.75122," FIRST LAT. HL., FEET -_•
",62.33158
"CLOCKWISE LOOP HL. ",poll,"","",62.85046," COUNTER —CLOCKWISE HL
,1„' ,1„' IF IF
, 62.81909
"MEAN TOTAL HEAD LOSS = ","","",IF 62.83477, IF VARIANCEIF III is '1, _
poll poll 4.991574E-04
"IRRIGATION CONDITIONS:°
"SUPPLY MAN. HEAD LOSS = ","","","",2.470905E-02," LONGEST LATERAL HL. _
of
J,,, IF '1,
8.516918 .,
"TOTAL NETWORK HL. _ 11,"",11","",8.541627
fill
It DATA"
"TOTAL ITERATIONS =Itpoll 14 " INITIAL ITERATIONS =
„ 1
1
,1 ,,,I ,,,, ! 1 7 ! 1
4
"NUM. OF FLOW INCREMENTS=.","","","",l," TOTAL FLOW INCREMENT, GALLS.
It ,,,1 ..2449889.
Page 1

Z30UT.ASC
11 ll
"SUMMARY OF INPUTS:"
"NUMBER OF LATERALS = ","","",5,"INPUT FILE NAME': IV, 1111, llz3.asc
"TOTAL LAT. LENGTH, FEET = ","","",1346,"OUTPUT FILE NAME :",".","z3out.asc"
"INSIDE DIAMETER, INCHES = ",,,.57,"EMITTER SPACING, FEET
"EMITTER FLOW, GPH = ",,,.61,"MIN. SCOUR VEL.
"INLET LAT. NUM. 1. "OUTLET LAT. NUM " 5
"PRECISION,, HARDY CROSS _�",""" ",",2.3-55063E-05,"OVERALL
11 ,,,1 ,," .0005
"HEAD LOSS ADJ. FACTORS "
"SUP. MAN. _ " "" 1 "RET. MAN. — " 1 "LATS. _ " 'i
"LATERAL NETWORK DETAILS"
"LATNUM ","LENGTH ","NUMLPS ","INFLOW ","EMFLOW ","OUTFLOW ","OUTVEL "
1,284,0,3.073661,1.433497,1.640164,2.060494
2,274,0,3.094633,1.382664,1.711969,2.150702
3,268,0,3.107981,1.352164,1.755817,2.205787
4,261,0,3.129922,1.311497,1.818424,2.284439
•5,259,0,3.137525,1.301331,1.836194,2.306762.
"MANIFOLD NETWORK DETAILS"
"MANNUM ","INDIA '","INLEN ","INFLOW ","INVEL ","OUTDIA ","OUTLEN ","OUTFLOW
"OUTVEL "
1,1.48,6.5,12.47006,2.323694,1.17,9,-1.64016,-.4890446
2,1.48,10,9.375424,1.747034,1.17,5,-3.352126,-.9994994
3,1.48,6,6.267447,1.167888,1.17,6,-5.10794,-1.523028
4,1.48,5.5,3.137525,.5846522,1.17,5,-6.921279,-2.063709
"SUMMARY OF OUTPUTS:"
"FLUSHING FLOW, SUPPLY SIDE,GPM=,,,,15.54372," EMITTER.FLOW, GPM
_"' ,�„ , „„ , ""' , 6. 7913.34
"RETURN FLUSHING FLOW, GPM =" , ","", """,.8.752388
"MANIFOLD VOLUME, GALLS=","","","",3.898591," LATERAL VOLUME, GALLS
—" '" "" "" 17.84247
"TOTAL NETWORK VOLUME, GALLS ,Illy ,"","",21.74106," NETWORK FILL TIME, MINS.
"" "" '" 1.398704
"LONGEST LATERAL DETENTION TIME WHEN FLUSHING, MINUTES.
"FLUSHING CONDITIONS:"
"SUPPLY MAN". HL., FEET = "", ,••""., :25874481, RETURN. MAN. HL. , FEET =
It
"" "" "" .1952147
"LAST LAT. HL., FEET = "1""1""1"",59.34795," FIRST LAT. HL., FEET =
if "" '" "" 59.43972
"CLOCKWISE LOOP HL. _ " "" "" "" 59.6067 " COUNTER —CLOCKWISE HL =
It
"" "" "" 59.63494
"MEAN TOTAL HEAD LOSS = ","1""1"",59.62082," VARIANCE _
"" "" "" 4.736634E-04
"IRRIGATION CONDITIONS:"
"SUPPLY MAN. HEAD LOSS = ",","","",5.329656E-02," LONGEST LATERAL HL. _
of
"" "" "" 7.540358
"TOTAL NETWORK HL. _ ",", ," "" "", 7.593654
"RUN DATA"
"TOTAL ITERATIONS = ","","","",58," INITIAL ITERATIONS
of "ll "11
24
"NUM. OF FLOW INCREMENTS = ",,,,2," TOTAL FLOW INCREMENT, GALLS. _
1.,I'll,11,1, 1I'll,.7923374
Page 1

Z40UT.ASC
"SUMMARY OF INPUTS:
"NUMBER OF LATERALS = " "" "" 5,"INPUT FILE NAME "" " "
,. z4.asc
"" "" 1265,"OUTPUT FILE NAME :","","z4out.asc"
"INSIDE
LAT. LENGTH, FEET = , , , "EMITTER
INSIDE DIAMETER, INCHES = ,.57., EMITTER'SPACING, FEET = ,2
"EMITTER -FLOW, GPH = ",,.61,"MIN. SCOUR VEL.
"INLET LAT. NUM. _ ","",,1,"OUTLET LAT. NUM
"PRECISION, HARDY CROSS ","",""12.355063E-05,"OVERALL —
,,.1 .0005 —
"HEAD LOSS ADJ. FACTORS
"SUP. MAN. _ "" 1 "RET. MAN. _ " "" 1 "LATS.
> > > >
"LATERAL NETWORK DETAILS"
"LATNUM ","LENGTH ","NUMLPS "INFLOW ","EMFLOW ","OUTFLOW ","OUTVEL "
1,257,0,2.917392,1.291164,1.626228,2.042988
2,255,0,2.921098,1.280997,1.640101,2.060416
3,254,0,2.919803,1.280997,1.638805,.2.058788
4,252,0,2.925438,1.270831,1.654607,2.078639
5,247,0,2.942694,1.240331,1.702363,2.138633
"MANIFOLD NETWORK DETAILS"
"MANNUM ","INDIA ","INLEN ","INFLOW ","INVEL ","OUTDIA ","OUTLEN ","OUTFLOW
""I'OUTVEL
1,,1.48,5.5,11.70903,2.181883,1.17,5.5,-1.621143,-.4833742
2,1.48,12,8.787934,1.63756,1.17,8,-3.256159,-.9708849
3,1.48,8,5.868133,1.093479,1.17,5,-4.89496,-1.459525.
4,1.48,6,2.942694,.5483471,1.17,4,-6.549566,-1.952876
"SUMMARY OF OUTPUTS:"
"FLUSHING FLOW, SUPPLY-SIDE,GPM=",",,"",14.62643," EMITTER FLOW, GPM
"" "" "" 6.379583
"RETURN FLUSHING FLOW, GPM _", will ,,",8.246842
"MANIFOLD VOLUME, GALLS =","","","",4.071753," LATERAL VOLUME, GALLS
"" "" "", 16.76874
-
"TOTAL NETWORK VOLUME, GALLS =","", fill ,fill ,20.84049," NETWORK FILL TIME, MINS.
-" 'llf,"" "" 1.424852 -
"LONGEST LATERAL DETENTION TIME WHEN FLUSHING, MINUTES.
111' 1 499584
.119
"FLUSHING CONDITIONS:"
''SUPPLY MAN. HL., FEET ",,,, 242095," RETURN MAN.. HL., FEET_=
• 11 �1 11 �1 11 1111 . 1621982 ' . . :. . -.
1 1 , 1
"LAST LAT. HL.- FEET = ","","","",49.61243," FIRST LAT. HL., FEET =
1
"CLOCKWISE LOOP HL. _ ",I'll, I'll ,oil, ,49.85452," COUNTER —CLOCKWISE HL =
" ""/ ""/ 1 "1149.87914
/
"MEAN TOTAL HEAD LOSS = ","","","",49.86683," VARIANCE _
4.935631E-04
1111
"IRRIGATION CONDITIONS:"
"SUPPLY MAN. HEAD LOSS = ",,,,5.126137E-02," LONGEST LATERAL HL. _
It
"" "" "" 5.555493
1
"TOTAL NETWORK HL. _ " "" "" "" 5.606754
1111
1 1 1 1
"RUN DATA"
."TOTAL ITERATIONS = ",,,,45," INITIAL ITERATIONS
11 11 11 11 11 11 11
1 ,15 '
"NUM. OF FLOW INCREMENTS = ","","",,1," TOTAL FLOW INCREMENT, GALLS. _
it
.2867932
Page 1

MAY 14 2 0 0 7
Revised Soils Evaluation 1 AMbiAl'o iE--!i3e,)Icjndj office
..

3ME
BROOKS & ME13LOCK
ENGMEERMG, PLLG
April 23, 2007
Mr. Jose Rosado
IBEX Thunderbird, LLC
169 Miracle Mile
Suite R10
Coral Gables, FL 33134
Email ifiosado(aDaol cam
Dear Mr. Rosado,
On May 8, 9, and 31, June.5, and July 10, 2001 and February 17, 2007, John B. Allison formerly
of Southeast Soil Science, Inc, and currently with Brooks and Medlock Engineering Inc.
conducted a detailed soil and site evaluation on a portion of the Thunderbird Lodge property in
Graham County, NC. The purpose of the evaluation was to determine the potential of the site for
a surface drip irrigation system according to the requirements of Rule 15 A NCAC 2T .0905(b),
non -conjunctive reclaimed surface irrigation systems.
10 backhoe-dug pits and 16 hand auger borings were examined. Complete soil profile
descriptions are enclosed for each pit and boring. A map is also enclosed showing soil series and
the locations of the pits and borings. Pits, borings, and K-sat locations are flagged on site.
Fieldwork was conducted fiom backhoe-dug pits and a 3-inch soil auger to examine the soil,
Munsell Soil Color Chcarts, 1998 revised edition, to measure soil color, a Suunto clinometer to
determine slope, and compact constant head permeameters to measure hydraulic conductivity.
Recommendations are based on, but not limited to, observations made and data collected on
topography, landscape position, parent material, underlying ID
Soil characteristics include depth to a seasonal high water table (SHWT), depth to agy, and soil crestrictive
horizon, total soil depth, soil horizonation, soil structure, soil color, clay mineralogy, bulk
density, consistence, plasticity, stone content, and percent sand, silt, clay, and mica. They follow
Rule 15 A NCAC 2T .0905(b) last amended September 1, 2006. Grading which occurs
subsequent to this fieldwork renders the soil investigation in the graded area null and void.
17 ARLINGTON STREET ASHEVILLE, NC 28801 . [phone] . FAx [phone]

DISCUSSION
The site is an area of soils mapped Junaluska-Brasstown complex. Junaluska soils range in depth
from 20 to 40 inches over highly fractured metasedimentary bedrock.. Brasstown soils range in
depth from 40 to 60 inches over weathered bedrock. hicluded in mapping with Junaluska-
Brasstown complex is an area of Brasstown-Variant soil (pit 16). This soil is greater than 60
inches to weathered bedrock. Also included is an area of Tsali soil (pit 8). This soil is less than
20 inches to weathered bedrock.
The soil textures on this tract are loaln. Soil structure ranges from moderate medium subangular
blocky to weak coarse subangular blocky. Slope ranges 37 to 63 percent. Average slope is 48
percent. Seasonal high water table is below 72 inches.
Please see the Agronomist report for laboratory values for the Standard Soil Fertility Analysis.
The Saturated Soil Hydraulic Conductivity averages 1.09 inches per day in the 0 to 6 inch
portion of the soil profile, 0.92 inches per day in the 18 to 24 inch zone, and 0.62 inches per day
in the 30 to 46 inch zone.'
DEEP PERCOLATION / CONVEYANCE CAPACITY CALCULATION
The average slope is 48.0 percent. The sideslope has an average soil depth to bedrock of 42
inches. K-sat measurements taken 0 to 46 inches below the surface are given in Table 1. The
average of these K-sats is 12.57 GFD.
Drip irrigating on the surface and using Darcy's Law to calculate deep percolation,
Q = KTWS where:
Q = low capacity in gallons per day
K = the average of K-sat values measured in the soil horizons included in "T
T = thickness of soil between the trench bottom and the top of the SHWT or
weathered bedrock, whichever is shallower
W = width of the treated water exit window of the septic field
S = average land slope
Q = 12.57 GFD x 3.5 feet' x 390 feet x 0.48 slope
Q = 8,236 gallons per day
Average depth to top of weathered bedrock minus trench depth.

3
By calculation 8,236 gallons of water could be conveyed out from under the proposed drip field
per day.
RECOMENDATIONS
1. The loading rate, based on the K-sat data taken in the 30 to 46 inch range, is
recommended at 0.62 inches per hour.
2. DWQ is concerned about the road cut downslope of the drip Eeld. There is no way to be
sure that water will not seep out of the cut, but we can be reasonably sure with some
observations:
a) A visual inspection of the cut shows no evidence that water is now or has ever
seeped out of the cut.
b) The conveyance capacity of the site is 8,236 gallons per day, more than twice the
amount of water to be applied during the summer months. In addition,
evapotranspiration will reduce the hydraulic load even further.
c) The underlying metasedimentary bedrock is highly fractured and as a result is
permeable.
Thank you for this opportunity to provide you with soils data and interpretation. Please call. me
if you have questions about this report.
Sincerely,?4 9 �Q
49f;,-
John B. Allison, LSS
cc :Harry Buchner
David Honeycutt

=;MG
BROOKS A MEOLOCK
EN6INEERIN6, PLLC
TABLE 1
SATURATED SOIL HYDRAULIC CONDUCTIVITY MEASUREMENTS
SANTEETLAH LAKESIDE
GRAHAM- COUNTY, NC
Pit
Horizon
Depth
Field
Centimeters
Inches per
GFD*
10%
Number
Texture
per Hour
Day
Pit 3
A
0-6
Loam
2.79
26.36
16.37
1.63
A
Loam_..__._....--.._...._0.77.--...._.._.._--
0.45
Pit 11
--0-6 _....._
- -0.30 �.._..
---4-50- -
.._.._ --
A
0-6
Loam
4.19
1.65
24.60
2.46
Pit 16
Bw
18-24
Loam
1.76
16.62
10.30
1.03
Pit I6
--...__....._._.._.._--
-__._.....__.....__._ __._.._
........__. __..._..____
_ __..._...�....._ _._.__._...____._
......._.__......._._-
Bw
30-36
Loam
2.05
19.37
12.00
1.20
BC
40-46
Loam
2.63
24.85
15.40
1.54 .
Pit 16
A
0-6
Loam
3.75
1.47
Pit 18
......_...__19.68_
_.._.._.._._._1.997
Bw
18-24
Loam
2.90
27.40
17.00
1.70
Boring 9
......_..-.._..�._...__.._......--
._.._..
- --- _._...
--- - -.-_.. --- .._
-_....__........_.�_._...
_ ._.._.._
BC
34-40
Loam
1.09
10.30
6.40
0.64
Bt
30-36
Loam
0.44
4.16
2.60
0.26
Boring 17
__._..._..._....-
__ __...._--
---.__._._...__._
_.__..._._.---_.._....
_.---.� - _
._....._...__...___...
___...---_.....__.._
Bt
40-46
Loam
1.60
15.19
9.40
0.94
GFD* = Gallons square foot per day
17 ARLINGTON STREET - ASHEVILLE, NC 28801 . [phone] - FAX [phone]

� f SAMPLE DATA SHE
Measurement No.,-,__ onducted b
3
Location A~ 5
Weather Conditi6�
Horizon Zjq Source of Water
�J
Hole depth cm Measured (Actual) water level in hole
Distance between reference level Initial cm
and soil surface + cm Final cm
Distance from the hole bottom to
the reference level (D) = cm Clock time
Desired water depth in hole (H) - cm. Start saturation
Constant -head tube setting (d) — cm Steady-state reading
date
Temperature
Reservoirs Used for Measurement of the Steady -State Flow Rate
Flow Measuring Reservoir Only
Conversion Factor (C.F.) = 20 cm'
Both Flow Measuring and Main Reservoirs Conversion Factor (C.F.) = 105'cm2
(To obtain flow volume multiply change in water level by the appropriate C.F. from above )
Clock Reservoir At
Change in Flow Q Q K at _
Time Reading
Water Level Volume s
h:min cm min
cm cm3 cm3/min cm3/h cm/h
'1'. :a �- -
-:..
, : _;- -
57
a
7, c
Z 170 l
t
/j
C i 3S7 0
t
3
r
erage
F
of lasts three measurements:
A &j��
Ksa� = cm/h (other units)
COMMENTS:
3 ty 2.0
N

Measurement No. .� a
t•1
Location -'°�-
Weather Condition
Horizon tf_
Hole depth
Distance between reference level
and soil surface
Distance from the hole bottom to
the reference level (D)
Desired water depth in hole (H)
Constant -head tube setting (d)
SAMPLE DATA SHEETy
Conducted by
C,LZ- ..
X,
date
Temperature
Source -of Water
cm
Measured (Actual) water level in hole
Initial cm
+ cm
Final cm
- cm
Clock time
- cm.
Start saturation
- cm
Steady-state reading
Reservoirs Used for Measurement of the Steady -State Flow Rate
Flow Measuring Reservoir Only Conversion Factor (C.F.) = 20 cm'
Both Flow Measuring and Main Reservoirs Conversion Factor (C.F.) = 105 cm2
(To obtain flow volume multiply change in water level by the appropriate C.F. from above )
Clock
Reservoir
At
Change in Flow
Time
Reading
Water Level Volume
h:min
cm
min
cm cm
l 7e
ttt
_
�
�'
Average of
last three measurements:
KSat c
COMMENTS:
Q Q
cm'/min cm3/h
KSat SA-r I
cm/h C,
r�
5�
4
t 4l`F
4
_ (other" "units) €
i
39

SAMPLE DATA SirF.
Measurement No. 6 C1onducted, by
Location"�� l' date
Weather Condition Temperature
Horizon -/ 6` x1 i `rj Source of Water
Hole depth
Distance between reference level
and soil surface
Distance from the hole bottom to
the reference level (D)
Desired water depth in hole (H)
Constant -head tube setting (d)
cm Measured (Actual) water level in hole
Initial cm
+ cm Final cm
cm Clock time
cm. Start saturation
CM Steady-state reading
Reservoirs Used for Measurement of the Steady -State Flow Rate
Flow Measuring Reservoir Only /� Conversion Factor (C.F.) = 20 cm'
Both FIow Measuring and Main Reservoirs ice_ Conversion Factor (C.F.) = 105'cm2
(To obtain flow volume multiply change in water level by the appropriate C.F. from above )
Clock
Reservoir
At
Time
Reading
h:min
cm
min
26
E7
63
-�
t
37, 2
S
!
<r
Average of
last three measurements
COMMENTS:
Change in Flow Q Q
�at
Water Level Volume
cm Cm cm'/min cm3/h cm/h
f
U
I
3
l�sat = cm/h
� � 1
?� � 1=76 /0,3 /10"
(other units)
39

Measurement No.
Location ( j
Weather Condition /
Horizon V [A- 3-
Hole depth
Distance between reference level
and soil surface
Distance from the hole bottom to
the reference Ievel (D)
Desired water depth in hole (H)
Constant -head tube setting (d)
SAMPLE DATA
Qonducted�-bw
Source of Water
date
Temperature
cm Measured (Actual) water level in hole
Initial cm
+ cm Final cm
cm CIock time
cm. Start saturation
= cm Steady-state reading
Reservoirs Used for Measurement of the Steady -State Flow Rate
Flow Measuring Reservoir Only Conversion Factor (C.F.) = 20 cm2
Both Flow Measuring and Main Reservoirs Conversion Factor (C.F.) = 105'cm2
(To obtain flow volume multiply change in water level by the appropriate C.F. from above )
Clock
Reservoir
At
Change in Flow
Time
Reading
Water Level Volume
h:min
cm
min
cm cm
Z� 3
5
L�
/ t
K
p
l
3t�1
l-7 3
Average of last three measurements:.
e
K., = cm/h
COMMENTS:
cm3/min cm3/h
cm/h 6P" 1 F
f j -�p
` / #V4 1 0
(other units)
1,2, 0 1 t p ,
39

SAMPLE DATA S
Measurement No. /$C` Conducted by _
Location y
Weather Condition f
Horizon -` ( Source of Water _ r
Hole depth cm
Distance between reference level
anA soil surface + cm
Distance from the hole bottom to
the ref 1 I
date
Temperature
Measured (Actual) water level in hole
Initial cm
Final cm
erence eve (D) = cm Clock time
Desired water depth in hole (H) - cm. Start saturation
Constant -head tube setting (d) = cm Steady-state reading
Reservoirs Used for Measurement of the Steady -State Flow Rate
Flow Measuring Reservoir Only Conversion Factor (C.F.) = 20 cm'
Both Flow Measuring and Main Reservoirs; Conversion Factor (C.F.) = 105'cm.'
(To obtain flow volume multiply change in water level by the appropriate C.F. from above )
Clock Reservoir At Ch
Time
Reading
ange in Flow Q Q
Water Level Volumes`
h:min
cm
min
;r.
cm cm3 cm'/min cm3/h cm/h
r
,
S07
v`
f (0
V
&
-D
-
E
0 r
Average of last three measurements:. cm/h (other units)
COMMENTS:
39

1 l-1..
Measurement No.
Location a
Weather Condition,f.
Horizon 1s�
Hole depth
Distance between reference level
and soil surface
Distance from the hole bottom to
the reference level (D)
Desired water depth in hole (H)
Constant -head tube setting (d)
SAMPLE DATA SHEET ,1.-7 -
Source of Water
date
Temperature
cm Measured (Actual) water level in hole
Initial cm
+ cm Final cm
cm Clock time
CM. Start saturation
cm Steady-state reading
Reservoirs Used for Measurement of the Steady -State Flow Rate
Flow Measuring Reservoir Only Conversion Factor (C.F.) = 20 cm'
Both Flow Measuring and Main Reservoirs Conversion Factor (C.F.) = 105*cm2
(To obtain flow volume multiply change in water level by the appropriate C.F. from above )
Clock
Reservoir
At
Change in
Flow
Time
Reading
Water Level
Volume
h:min
cm
min
cm
cm3
o t
1
'.
e
tC
, •1
01_1;
= 8 _5 �
d
i
9, L4 6
't
`
s.F `-''F
17
Average of
44 471
last measure measurements:
02
Ksa�-=
cm/h
-°
COMMENTS:
e15
Q Q
cm'/Min cm3/h
KSat
cm/h r;Pr /€0 f6
(other units)
39

Measurement No.
Location
Weather Condition
Horizon `_5 11' 0 —t i
Hole depth
Distance between reference level
and soil surface
Distance from the hole bottom to
the reference level (D)
Desired water depth in hole (H)
Constant -head tube setting (d)
SAMPLE DATA
Source of Water
date
Temperature
cm Measured (Actual) water level in hole
Initial cm
+ cm Final _ cm
CM Clock time
- cm. Start saturation
= cm Steady-state reading
Reservoirs Used for Measurement of the Steady -State Flow Rate
Flow Measuring Reservoir Only Conversion Factor (C.F.) = 20 cm2
Both Flow Measuring and Main Reservoirs
Conversion Factor (C.F.) - 105'cm2
(To obtain flow volume multiply change in water level by the appropriate C.F. from above )
Clock
Reservoir
At
Change in
Flow
Time
Reading
Water Level
Volume
h:min
cm
min
cm
cm
g��
4_
G6.#
Average of last three measurements:
CONI'IvIENTS
P
Q Q
cm3/min cm3/h
"Sat
54T
3
cm/h
(other units)
39

�i
Measurement No.
.,ocation
Weather Condition _
Horizon
/Avu
37
Hole depth -
Distance between reference level
and .soil surface
Distance from the hole bottom to
the reference level (D)
Desired water depth in hole (H)
Constant -head tube setting (d)
SAMPLE DATA
Conducted by _
date
Temperature
Source of Water
cm Measured (Actual) water level in hole
Initial cm
+ cm Final cm
cm Clock time
cm. Start saturation
= cm Steady-state reading
Reservoirs Used .for Measurement of a Steady -State Flow Rate
Flow Measuring Reservoir Only i Conversion Factor (C.F.) = 20 cm2
Both Flow Measuring and Main. Reservoirs Conversion Factor (C.F.) = 105cm�
(To obtain flow volume multiply change in water level by the appropriate C.F. from above )
Clock
'Reservoir
At
Change in
Flow
Time
Reading
30
Water Level
Volume
'h:min
crn
j
cm
cm3
SD
qLl l q
Lqslx
so
�
31,7
30
�3 Z-
37, r
3 v
! t 0
z�.
3b,3
3s� 5
3L7
1E fJ
Site
} R
` 19
30, �,_
3y�y0
L
€1
as l .Sd
�
3 Lf
E
Average
of last three measurements:.
K., =
cmm
9-7, L4
COMMENTS:
Q Q Kt-
cm3/min cm`/h cm/h GP Pb
(other units)

SAMPLE DATA SH -"-;ET,
Y
Measuremento. Conducted by �
Location t date
Weather Condition g
Temperature
Horizon Source of Water
.
Hole depth cm Measured (Actual) water level in hole
Distance -between reference level Initial cm
and -soil surface + cm Final cm
Distance from the hole bottom to
the reference level (D) _ cm Clock time
Desired water depth in hole (H) - cm Start saturation
Constant -Bead tube setting (d) cm Steady-state reading
Reservoirs Used . for Measurement of the Steady -State Flow -Rate
Flow. Measuring Reservoir Only , Conversion Factor (C.F.) = 20 cm2
Both Flow Measuring and Main. Reservoirs Conversion Factor (C.F.) = 105*cm'
(To obtain flow volume multiply change in water level by the appropriate C.F. from above )
Clock Reservoir At Change in Flow Q Q z�
Time Reading Water Level Volume
Sri
i:min c_tn min cm CO cm'/min cm3/h Cm/h 46
.7 _36,�9
Average of last three measurements:. K t = cmlh
;OMMENTS: % ` `7, -7 01,4,
(other units)

Measurement No.
Location
Weather Con 'aon
date _
Temperature
Horizon % d Source of Water
vo
t
Hole depth- cm Measured (Actual) water level in ho
le
I/ f tt�
Distance between reference level Initial cm
and -soil surface + cm Final cm
Distance from the hole bottom to
the reference level (D) cm Clock time
Desired water depth in hole (H) - cm. Start saturation
Constant -head tube setting (d) cm Steady-state reading
SAMPLE DATA
Conducted by _
ip
Reservoirs Used for Measurement ofhe Steady -State Flow Rate
Flow Measuring Reservoir Only _ _.� Conversion Factor (C.F.) = 20 cm'
Both Flow Measuring and Main. Reservoirs Conversion Factor (C.F.) = 105* cm'
(To obtain flow volume multiply change in water level by the appropriate C.F. from above )
Clock
Time
Z:min
l(�_400
'30
ij 57-
1 r 90
t�s�o
'Reservoir
Reading
cm
�_) 0 t 1
91Of
37. e
3 6 ,'
3
'32,p
52
7, V
�3, b
At
'30
3P1
30
70
3 c�
3�
.30
Change in
Water Level
cm
Flow
Volume
- cm,
30
Q Q Kat,
r
cm'/min cm3/h cm/h 5 A t
111b
Average of last three measurements: K. = . cm/h (other units)
.OMMENTS:

SAMPLE DATA S
Measurement I�ia Conducted by
4/11
Location / date
Weather Con ition Temperature
Horizon " O ' Source of Water
Hole depth-- c
m Measured (Actual) water level in hole
Distance between reference level Initial cm
and soil surface + cm Final cm
Distance from the hole bottom to
the reference level (D) = cm Clock time
Desired water depth in hole (H) - cm. Start saturation
Constant -head tube setting (d) — cm Steady-state reading
Reservoirs Used for Measurement of the Steady-Stat Flow Rate
Flow Measuring Reservoir Only Conversion Factor ) = 20 .F. Cc z
( m
Both Flow Measuring and Main. Reservoirs Conversion Factor (C.F.) = 105'cm'
(To obtain flow volume multiply change in water level by the appropriate C.F. from above )
Clock 'Reservoir At Change in Flow Q Q
Time Reading Water Level Volume
h:min cncl min CT cm3 cm3/min cm3/h cm/h r,/15
Pq
9� t.
/ OZ
3 3}s�
0Q, 6 ► -7
lie llS�
� � �� b� � � 3 -7 �
`_t ° t 3,73
14
`c 3 q
qq ?
Average of last three measurements:. Ks _ cm/h (other units)
5-D t �, -3
;OMMENTS:

Southeast Soil -Science, Inc.
533 Crabtree Mountain Road
Canton, NC 28716
[phone]
PROJECT: Jose Rosado
DATE: May 9, 2001
Thunderbird Mountain Resort
Graham County, NC
CLAY MINERALOGY: Slightly expansive
PIT NUMBER: 1
SOIL DEPTH: 2 inches to weathered bedrock
SOIL GROUP: 2
RESTRICTIVE HORIZON: 2 inches to weathered bedrock
PERCENT SLOPE: 31
SEASONAL HIGH WATER TABLE: >36 inches
LANDSCAPE POSITION: Sideslope
TYPE OF WATER TABLE: N/A
TOPOGRAPHY: Uniform
CLASSIFICATION: Unsuitable
PARENT MATERIAL: Residuum
RECLASSIFIED: N/A
NOTES:
FIELD ESTIMATES
HORIZON
DEPTH
(inches)
MOIST COLOR
MATRIX MOTTLES TEXTURE STRUCTURE CLAY *CONY.
N LTAR
A
0-2
5 YR 4/4
—
Loam
Granular
—
0.7
Cr
2-36
RLWB+
ri
MCS* = Multi -colored saprolite
RLWB+ = Restrictive layer —Weathered bedrock
*CONY. LTAR = Conventional Long Term Acceptance Rate
in gallons per square foot per day
SOIL SCIENTIST: John B. Allison ©2001 Southeast Soil Science, Inc. NC Revised 5/2000

Southeast Soil Science, Inc.
533 Crabtree Mountain Road
Canton, NC 28716
[phone]
PROJECT: Jose Rosado
DATE: May 9, 2001
Thunderbird Mountain Resort
Graham County, NC
CLAY MINERALOGY: Slightly expansive
PIT NUMBER: 2
SOIL DEPTH: 24 inches to weathered bedrock
SOIL GROUP: 2
RESTRICTIVE HORIZON: 24 inches to weathered bedrock
PERCENT SLOPE: 37
SEASONAL HIGH WATER TABLE: >24 inches
LANDSCAPE POSITION: Sideslope
TYPE OF WATER TABLE: N/A
TOPOGRAPHY: Uniform
CLASSIFICATION: Unsuitable
PARENT MATERIAL:, Residuum
RECLASSIFIED: N/A
NOTES:
1. This pit is provisionally suitable for a drip irrigation system.
FIFI n FSTIMATFG
HORIZON
DEPTH
(inches)
MOIST COLOR
MATRIX MOTTLES TEXTURE STRUCTURE CLAY *CONY.
N LTAR
A
0-2
7.5 YR 4/6
—
Loam
Granular
—
0.7
Bw
2-24
5 YR 4/6
—
Loam
Blocky
—
0.6
Cr
24
RLWB+
MCS* = Multi -colored saprolite
RLWB+ = Restrictive layer — Weathered bedrock
SOIL SCIENTIST: John B. Allison
*CONY. LTAR = Conventional Long Term Acceptance Rate
in gallons per square foot per day
© 2001 Southeast Soil Science, Inc. NC Revised 5/2000

Southeast Soil Science, Inc.
533 Crabtree Mountain Road
Canton, NC 28716
[phone]
PROJECT: Jose Rosado
DATE: May 9, 2001
Thunderbird Mountain Resort
Graham County, NC
CLAY MINERALOGY: Slightly expansive
PIT NUMBER: 3
SOIL DEPTH: 23 inches to weathered bedrock
SOIL GROUP: 2
RESTRICTIVE HORIZON: 23 inches to weathered bedrock
PERCENT SLOPE: 37
SEASONAL HIGH WATER TABLE: >23 inches
LANDSCAPE POSITION: Sideslope
TYPE OF WATER TABLE: N/A
TOPOGRAPHY: Uniform
CLASSIFICATION: Unsuitable
PARENT MATERIAL: Residuum
RECLASSIFIED: N/A
NOTES:
1. This pit is provisionally suitable for a drip irrigation system.
FIELD ESTIMATES
HORIZON
DEPTH
(inches)
MOIST COLOR
MATRIX MOTTLES TEXTURE STRUCTURE CLAY *CONV.
(%) LTAR
A
0-6
7.5 YR 4/6
—
Loam
Granular
—
0.7
Bw
6-23
5 YR 5/6
—
Loam
Blocky
20
0.6
Cr
23
RLWB+
MCS* = Multi -colored saprolite
RLWB+ = Restrictive layer —Weathered bedrock
*CONY. LTAR = Conventional Long Term Acceptance Rate
in gallons per square foot per day
SOIL SCIENTIST: John B. Allison © 2001 Southeast Soil Science, Inc. NC Revised 5/2000

Southeast Soil Science, Inc.
533 Crabtree Mountain Road
Canton, NC 28716
[phone]
PROJECT: Jose Rosado
DATE: May 9, 2001
Thunderbird Mountain Resort
Graham County, NC
CLAY MINERALOGY: Slightly expansive
BORING NUMBER: 4
SOIL DEPTH: 36 inches to weathered bedrock
SOIL GROUP: 2
RESTRICTIVE HORIZON: 36 inches to weathered bedrock
PERCENT SLOPE: 46
SEASONAL HIGH WATER TABLE: >39 inches
LANDSCAPE POSITION: Sideslope
TYPE OF WATER TABLE: N/A
TOPOGRAPHY: Uniform
CLASSIFICATION: Provisionally suitable
PARENT MATERIAL: Residuum
RECLASSIFIED: Unsuitable
NOTES:
1. Reclassified unsuitable because of slope soil depth correction.
2. This boring would be provisionally suitable for a drip irrigation system.
FIELD ESTIMATES
HORIZON
DEPTH
(inches)
MOIST COLOR
MATRIX MOTTLES TEXTURE STRUCTURE CLAY *CONV.
N LTAR
A
0-5
7.5 YR 4/6
—
Loam
Granular
—
0.7
Bw
5-29
5 YR 4/8
—
Loam
Blocky
20
0.6
BC
29-36
5 YR 5/6
—
Loam
Blocky
—
0.5
Cr
36-39
RLWB+
MCS* ='Multi -colored saprolite
RLWB+ = Restrictive layer — Weathered bedrock
*CONY. LTAR = Conventional Long Term Acceptance Rate
in gallons per square foot per day
SOIL SCIENTIST: John B. Allison © 2001 Southeast Soil Science, Inc. NC Revised 512000

Southeast Soil -Science, Inc.
533 Crabtree Mountain Road
Canton, NC 28716
[phone]
PROJECT: Jose Rosado
DATE: May 9, 2001
Thunderbird Mountain Resort
Graham County, NC
CLAY MINERALOGY: Slightly expansive
BORING NUMBER: 5-
SOIL DEPTH: >54 inches
SOIL GROUP: 2
RESTRICTIVE HORIZON: >54 inches
PERCENT SLOPE: 53
SEASONAL HIGH WATER TABLE: >54 inches
LANDSCAPE POSITION: Sideslope
TYPE OF WATER TABLE: N/A
TOPOGRAPHY: Uniform
CLASSIFICATION: Provisionally suitable
PARENT MATERIAL: Residuum
RECLASSIFIED: N/A
NOTES:
FIELD ESTIMATES
HORIZON
DEPTH
(inches)
MOIST COLOR
MATRIX MOTTLES TEXTURE STRUCTURE CLAY *CONY.
N LTAR
A
0-4
5 YR 4/4
—
Loam
. Granular
—
0.7
Bt
4-29
2.5 YR 5/8
—
Loam
Blocky
25
0.6
BC
29-54
5 YR 4/8
—
Loam
Blocky
20
0.5
MCS* = Multi -colored saprolite
RLWB+ = Restrictive layer Weathered bedrock
*CONV. LTAR = Conventional Long Term Acceptance Rate
in gallons per square foot per day
SOIL SCIENTIST: John B. Allison © 2001 Southeast Soil Science, Inc. NC Revised 5/2000

Southeast Soil Science, Inc®
533 Crabtree Mountain Road
Canton, NC 28716
[phone]
PROJECT: Jose Rosado
DATE: May 9, 2001
Thunderbird Mountain Resort
Graham County, NC
CLAY MINERALOGY: Slightly expansive
BORING NUMBER: 6
SOIL DEPTH: 38 inches to weathered bedrock
SOIL GROUP: 2
RESTRICTIVE HORIZON: 38 inches to weathered bedrock
PERCENT SLOPE: 51
SEASONAL HIGH WATER TABLE: >38 inches
LANDSCAPE POSITION: Sideslope
TYPE OF WATER TABLE: N/A
TOPOGRAPHY: Uniform
CLASSIFICATION: Provisionally suitable
PARENT MATERIAL: Residuum
RECLASSIFIED: Unsuitable
NOTES:
1. Reclassified unsuitable because of slope soil depth correction.
FIR n F.qTIAAATFS
HORIZON
DEPTH
(inches)
MOIST COLOR
MATRIX MOTTLES TEXTURE STRUCTURE CLAY *CONY.
N LTAR
A
0-6
7.5 YR 4/4
—
Loam
Granular
—
0.7
Bw
6-32
5 YR 4/6
—
Loam
Blocky
20
0.6
BC
32-38
5 YR 4/6
MCS*
Loam
Blocky
—
0.5
Cr
38 `
RLWB+
MCS* = Multi -colored saprolite
RLWB+ = Restrictive. layer —Weathered bedrock
*CONY. LTAR = Conventional. Long Term Acceptance Rate
in gallons per square foot per day
SOIL SCIENTIST: John B. Allison © 2001 Southeast Soil Science, Inc. NC Revised 5/2000

Southeast Soil Science, Inc.
533 Crabtree Mountain Road
Canton, NC 28716
[phone]
PROJECT: Jose Rosado
DATE: May 9, 2001
Thunderbird Mountain Resort
Graham County, NC
CLAY MINERALOGY: Slightly expansive
BORING NUMBER: 7
SOIL DEPTH: 33 inches to weathered bedrock
SOIL GROUP: 2
RESTRICTIVE HORIZON: 33 inches to weathered bedrock
PERCENT SLOPE: 50
SEASONAL HIGH WATER TABLE: >33 inches
LANDSCAPE POSITION: Sideslope
TYPE OF WATER TABLE: N/A
TOPOGRAPHY: Uniform
CLASSIFICATION: Unsuitable
PARENT MATERIAL: Residuum
RECLASSIFIED: N/A
NOTES:
i 1. This pit is provisionally suitable for a drip irrigation system.
FIELD ESTIMATES
HORIZON
DEPTH
(inches)
MOIST COLOR
MATRIX MOTTLES TEXTURE STRUCTURE CLAY *CONY.
N LTAR
A
0-2
7.5 YR 4/4
—
Loam
Granular
—
0.7
Bt .
2-33
5 YR 4/8
—
Loam
Blocky
25
0.6
Cr
33
RLWB+
MCS* = Multi -colored saprolite
RLWB+ = Restrictive layer —Weathered bedrock
*CONY. LTAR =' Conventional Long Term Acceptance Rate
in gallons per square foot per day
SOIL SCIENTIST: John B. Allison © 2001 Southeast Soil Science, Inc. NC Revised 5/2000

Southeast Soil Science, Inc.
533 Crabtree Mountain Road
Canton, NC 28716
[phone]
PROJECT: Jose Rosado
DATE: May 9, 2001
Thunderbird Mountain Resort
Graham County, NC
CLAY MINERALOGY: Slightly expansive
BORING NUMBER: 8
SOIL DEPTH: 16 inches to weathered bedrock
SOIL GROUP: 2
RESTRICTIVE HORIZON: 16 inches to weathered bedrock
PERCENT SLOPE: 57
SEASONAL HIGH WATER TABLE: >16 inches
LANDSCAPE POSITION.: Sideslope
TYPE OF WATER TABLE: N/A
TOPOGRAPHY: Uniform
CLASSIFICATION: Unsuitable
PARENT MATERIAL: Residuum
RECLASSIFIED: NIA
NOTES:
FIELD ESTIMATES
HORIZON
DEPTH
(inches)
MOIST COLOR
MATRIX MOTTLES TEXTURE STRUCTURE CLAY *CONV.
N LTAR
A
0-2
7.5 YR 4/4
—
Loam
Granular
—
0.7
Bw
2-16
7.5 YR 4/6
—
Loam
Blocky
—
0.6
Cr
16
RLWB+
MCS* = Multi -colored saprolite
RLWB+ = Restrictive layer —Weathered bedrock
*CONY. LTAR = Conventional Long Term Acceptance Rate
in gallons per square foot per day
SOIL SCIENTIST: John B. Allison © 2001 Southeast Soil Science, Inc. NC Revised 5/2000

Southeast Soil Science, Inc.
533 Crabtree Mountain Road
Canton, NC 28716
[phone]
PROJECT: Jose Rosado
DATE: May 9, 2001
Thunderbird Mountain Resort
Graham County, NC
CLAY MINERALOGY: Slightly expansive
BORING NUMBER: 9
SOIL DEPTH: 42 inches to weathered bedrock
SOIL GROUP: 2
RESTRICTIVE HORIZON: 42 inches to weathered bedrock
PERCENT SLOPE: 50
SEASONAL HIGH WATER TABLE: >42 inches
LANDSCAPE POSITION: Sideslope
TYPE OF WATER TABLE: N/A
TOPOGRAPHY: Uniform
CLASSIFICATION: Provisionally suitable
PARENT MATERIAL: Residuum
RECLASSIFIED: N/A
NOTES:
FIELD ESTIMATES
HORIZON
DEPTH
(inches)
MOIST COLOR
MATRIX MOTTLES TEXTURE STRUCTURE CLAY *CONY.
N LTAR
A
0-3
7.5 YR 4/4
—
Loam
Granular
—
0.7
Bw
3-29
5 YR 4/6
—
Loam
Blocky
20
0.6
BC
29-42
7.5 YR 5/6
MCS*
Loam
Blocky
—
0.5
Cr
42
RLWB+
MCS* = Multi -colored saprolite
RLWB+ = Restrictive layer — Weathered bedrock
*CONY. LTAR = Conventional Long Term Acceptance Rate
in gallons per square foot per day
SOIL SCIENTIST: John B. Allison © 2001 Southeast Soil Science,] nc. NC Revised 5/2000

Southeast Soil Science, Inc.
533 Crabtree Mountain Road
Canton, NC 28716
[phone]
PROJECT: Jose Rosado
DATE: May 9, 2001
Thunderbird Mountain Resort
Graham County, NC
CLAY MINERALOGY: Slightly expansive
PIT NUMBER: 10
SOIL DEPTH: >54 inches
SOIL GROUP: 2
RESTRICTIVE HORIZON: >54 inches
PERCENT SLOPE: 51
SEASONAL HIGH WATER TABLE: >54 inches
LANDSCAPE POSITION: Sideslope
TYPE OF WATER TABLE: N/A
TOPOGRAPHY: Uniform
CLASSIFICATION: Provisionally suitable
PARENT MATERIAL: Residuum
RECLASSIFIED: N/A
NOTES:
1. Pit located 40 feet beyond end of drain line 1 (upper most line).
FIELD ESTIMATES
HORIZON
DEPTH
(inches)
MOIST COLOR
MATRIX MOTTLES TEXTURE STRUCTURE CLAY *CONV.
N LTAR
A
0-4
5 YR 4/4
—
Loam
Granular
—
0.7
Bw1
4-27
5 YR 4/6
—
Loam
Blocky
20
0.6
Bw2
27-54
7.5 YR 5/6
—
Loam
Blocky
20
0.6
MCS* = Multi -colored saprolite
RLWB+ = Restrictive layer — Weathered bedrock
*CONV. LTAR = Conventional Long Term Acceptance Rate
in gallons per square foot per day
SOIL SCIENTIST: John B. Allison 0 2001 Southeast Soil Science, inc. NC Revised 5/2000

Southeast Soil Science, Inc.
533 Crabtree Mountain Road
Canton, NC 28716
[phone]
PROJECT: Jose Rosado
DATE: May 9, 2001
Thunderbird Mountain Resort
Graham County, NC
CLAY MINERALOGY: Slightly expansive
PIT NUMBER: 11
SOIL DEPTH: >54 inches
SOIL GROUP: 2
RESTRICTIVE HORIZON: >54 inches
PERCENT SLOPE: Not taken
SEASONAL HIGH WATER TABLE: >54 inches
LANDSCAPE POSITION: Sideslope
TYPE OF WATER TABLE: N/A
TOPOGRAPHY: Uniform
CLASSIFICATION: Provisionally suitable
PARENT MATERIAL: Residuum
RECLASSIFIED: N/A
NOTES:
1. Pit located 7 feet bevond end of drain line 1
FIELD ESTIMATES
HORIZON
DEPTH
(inches)
MOIST COLOR
MATRIX MOTTLES TEXTURE STRUCTURE CLAY *CONV.
N LTAR
A
0-6
7.5 4/6
—
Loam
Blocky
—
0.6
Bw
6-54
5 YR 4/8
—
Loam
Blocky
25
0.6
MCS* = Multi -colored saprolite
RLWB+ = Restrictive layer —Weathered bedrock
*CONV. LTAR = Conventional Long Term Acceptance Rate
in gallons per square foot per day
SOIL SCIENTIST: John B. Allison © 2001 Southeast Soil Science, Inc. NC Revised 5/2000

Southeast Soil Science, Inc.
533 Crabtree Mountain Road
Canton, NC 28716
(828) 648=7080
PROJECT: Jose Rosado
DATE: May 9, 2001
Thunderbird Mountain Resort
Graham County, NC
CLAY MINERALOGY: Slightly expansive
PIT NUMBER: 12
SOIL DEPTH: 42 inches to weathered bedrock
SOIL GROUP: 2
RESTRICTIVE HORIZON: 42 inches to weathered bedrock
PERCENT SLOPE: 54
SEASONAL HIGH WATER TABLE: >42 inches
LANDSCAPE POSITION: Sideslope
TYPE OF WATER TABLE: N/A
TOPOGRAPHY: Uniform
CLASSIFICATION: Provisionally suitable
PARENT MATERIAL: Residuum
RECLASSIFIED: NIA
NOTES:
1. Pit located at end of drain line 2 (middle drain line).
FIELD ESTIMATES
HORIZON
DEPTH
(inches)
MOIST COLOR
MATRIX MOTTLES TEXTURE STRUCTURE CLAY *CONY.
N LTAR
A
0-4
5 YR 4/4
—
'Loam
Granular
—
0.7
Bt
4-42
5 YR 4/8
—
Loam
Blocky
25
0.6
Cr
42
RLWB+
MCS* = Multi -colored saprolite
RLWB+ = Restrictive layer —Weathered bedrock .
*CONY. LTAR = Conventional Long Term Acceptance Rate
in gallons per square foot per day
SOIL SCIENTIST: John B. Allison © 2001 Southeast Soil Science, Inc. NC Revised 5/2000

Southeast Soil Science, Inc.
533 Crabtree Mountain Road
Canton, NC 28716
[phone]
PROJECT: Jose Rosado
DATE: May 9, 2001
Thunderbird Mountain Resort
Graham County, NC
CLAY MINERALOGY: Slightly expansive
BORING NUMBER: 13
SOIL DEPTH: 48 inches to weathered bedrock
SOIL GROUP: 2
RESTRICTIVE HORIZON: >54 inches
PERCENT SLOPE: 50
SEASONAL HIGH WATER TABLE: >54 inches
LANDSCAPE POSITION: Sideslope
TYPE OF WATER TABLE: NIA
TOPOGRAPHY: Uniform
CLASSIFICATION: Provisionally suitable
PARENT MATERIAL: Residuum
RECLASSIFIED: NIA
NOTES:
FIELD ESTIMATES 00
HORIZON
DEPTH
(inches)
MOIST COLOR
MATRIX MOTTLES TEXTURE STRUCTURE CLAY *CONY.
N LTAR
A
0-5
5 YR 4/6
—
Loam
Granular
—
0.7
Bt
5-25
2.5 YR 4/8
—
Loam
Blocky
25
0.6
BC
25-48
7.5 YR 5/8
—
Loam
Blocky
20
0.5
CB
48-54
MCS*
7.5 YR 5/8
Loam
Massive
—
0.3
MCS* = Multi -colored saprolite
RLWB+ = Restrictive layer —Weathered bedrock
*CONV. LTAR = Conventional Long Term Acceptance Rate
in gallons per square foot per day
SOIL SCIENTIST: John B. Allison 0 2001 Southeast Soil Science, Inc. NC Revised 5/2000

Southeast Soil. Science, Inc.
533 Crabtree Mountain Road
Canton, NC 28716
[phone]
PROJECT: Jose Rosado
DATE: May 9, 2001
Thunderbird Mountain Resort
Graham County, NC
CLAY MINERALOGY: Slightly expansive
BORING NUMBER: 14
SOIL DEPTH: 34 inches to weathered bedrock
SOIL GROUP: 2
RESTRICTIVE HORIZON: 34 inches to weathered bedrock
PERCENT SLOPE: 53
SEASONAL HIGH WATER TABLE: >34 inches
LANDSCAPE POSITION: Sideslope
TYPE OF WATER TABLE: N/A
TOPOGRAPHY: Uniform
CLASSIFICATION: Unsuitable
PARENT MATERIAL: Residuum
RECLASSIFIED: N/A
NOTES:
1. This boring is provisionally suitable for a drip irrigation system.
FIELD ESTIMATES
HORIZON
DEPTH
(inches)
MOIST COLOR
MATRIX MOTTLES TEXTURE STRUCTURE CLAY *CONY.
N LTAR
A
0-5
5 YR 4/4
—
Loam
Granular
—
0.7
Bt
5-24
5 YR 4/8
—
Loam
Blocky
25
0.6
BC
24-34
7.5 YR 5/6
—
Loam
Blocky
—
0.5
Cr
34
RLWB+ .
MCS* = Multi -colored saprolite
RLWB+ = Restrictive layer —Weathered bedrock
*CONY. LTAR = Conventional Long Term Acceptance Rate
in gallons per square foot per day
SOIL SCIENTIST: John B. Allison 0 2001 Southeast Soil Science, Inc. NC Revised 5/2000

oRn-IFr..T• .lose Rosado
A nnn min RaSnrt
Graham County, NC
oIT nII InnRFR- 15
SUIL C7hCUUt': 4
,-.i-r C% rIOC Rn
rr-K --
I ANDSCAPE POSITION: S
TnvnrRAPHY: Uniform
Souteast Soil Science, Inc-
5 . 3 3 Crabtree Mountain Road
Canton, NC 28716
[phone]
DATE: May 9, 2001
CLAY MINERALOGY: Slightly expansive
SOIL DEPTH: 32 inches to weathered bedrock
RESTRICTIVE HORIZON: 32 inches to weathered bedrock
SEASONAL HIGH WATER TABLE: >32 inches
TYPE OF WATER TABLE: N/A
rI A.q.IFICATION: Unsuitable
RECLASSIFIED: N/A
HAKtN I IVIrN I ������•
NOTES:
1, This pit is provisionally suitable for a drip irrigation system.
HORIZON DEPTH
MATRIX
(inches)
A 0-4
5 YR 4/4
Bt 4-32
2.5 YR 4/8
Cr 32
RLWB+
FIELD ESTIMATES
OR *CONV.
MOTTLES TEXTURE STRUCTURE LAY LTAR
Loam Granular — 0.7
Loam Blocky 25 0.6
MCS* = Multi -colored saprolite *CONV. LTAR = Conventional Long Term Acceptance Rate
in gallons per square foot per day
RLWB+ = Restrictive layer —Weathered bedrock © 2001 southeast soil science, Inc. NC Revised 5/2000
SOIL SCIENTIST: John B. Allison

PPnJFCT• .I se Rosado
Thri„AArhirrl Mnuntain Resort
Graham County, NC
DIT Nil INARFR• 1R
SOIL GROUP: 2
pi=QnPNT .I ()PP' 56
LANDSCAPE POSITION: Sid
TnPnc-.RAPHY: Uniform
Southeast Soil Science, Inc.
533 Crabtree Mountain Road
Canton, NC 28716
[phone]
DATE: May 9, 2001
CLAY MINERALOGY: Slightly expansive
SOIL DEPTH: >60 inches
RESTRICTIVE HORIZON: >60 inches
SEASONAL HIGH WATER TABLE: >60
TYPE OF WATER TABLE: N/A
CLASSIFICATION: Provisionally suitable
PARENT MATERIAL Residuum IRE -CLASSIFIED: N/A
NOTES:
1. Pit located 40 feet beyond drain line 1 (lower line).
FIELD ESTIMATES
HORIZON
DEPTH
(inches)
MOIST COLOR
MATRIX MOTTLES TEXTURE STRUCTURE
CLAY
N
*LTOAR
A
0-6
5 YR 4/6
—
Loam
Granular
—
0.7
2.5 YR 4/8
—
Loam
Blocky
20
0.6
Bw
6-36
7.5 YR 5/8
—
Loam
Blocky
—
0.5
BC
36-60
MCS* = Multi -colored saprolite
RLWB+ = Restrictive layer— Weathered bedrock
SOIL SCIENTIST: JOhn.B. Allison
*CONY. LTAR = Conventional Long Term Acceptance Rate
in gallons per square foot per day
© 2001 Southeast Soil Science, Inc. NC Revised 5/2000

Southeast Soil Science, Inc.
533 Crabtree Mountain Road
Canton, NC 28716
[phone]
PROJECT: Jose Rosado
DATE: May 31, 2001
Thunderbird Mountain Resort
Graham County, NC
CLAY MINERALOGY: Slightly expansive
BORING NUMBER: 17
SOIL DEPTH: 48 inches to weathered bedrock
SOIL GROUP: 2
RESTRICTIVE HORIZON: 48 inches to weathered bedrock
PERCENT SLOPE: 40
SEASONAL HIGH WATER TABLE: >48 inches
LANDSCAPE POSITION: Sideslope
TYPE OF WATER TABLE: N/A
TOPOGRAPHY: Uniform
CLASSIFICATION: Provisionally suitable
PARENT MATERIAL: Residuum
RECLASSIFIED: N/A
NOTES:
FIELD ESTIMATES
HORIZON
DEPTH
(inches)
MOIST COLOR
MATRIX MOTTLES TEXTURE STRUCTURE CLAY *CONY.
N LTAR
A
0-6
5 YR 4/6
—
Loam
Granular
—
0.7
Bt
6-48
2.5 YR 5/6
—
Loam
Blocky
—
0.6
Cr
48
RLWB+
ACS* = Multi -colored saprolite
RLWB+ = Restrictive layer —Weathered bedrock
*CONY. LTAR = Conventional Long Term Acceptance Rate
in gallons per square foot per day
SOIL SCIENTIST: John B. Allison ©2601 Southeast Soil Science, Inc. NC Revised 5/2000

Southeast Soil Science, Inc.
533 Crabtree Mountain Road
Canton, NC 28716
[phone]
PROJECT: Jose Rosado
DATE: May 31, 2001
Thunderbird Mountain Resort
Graham County, NC
CLAY MINERALOGY: Slightly expansive
BORING NUMBER: 18
SOIL DEPTH: 29 inches to weathered bedrock
SOIL GROUP: 2
RESTRICTIVE HORIZON: 29 inches to weathered bedrock
PERCENT SLOPE: 52
SEASONAL HIGH WATER TABLE: >29 inches
LANDSCAPE POSITION: Noseslope
TYPE OF WATER TABLE: N/A
TOPOGRAPHY: Uniform
CLASSIFICATION: Unsuitable
PARENT MATERIAL: Residuum
RECLASSIFIED: Provisionally suitable
nin-rP:c
1 This boring is provisionally suitable for a drip irrigation system.
FIELD ESTIMATES
HORIZON
DEPTH
(inches)
MOIST.COLOR
MATRIX MOTTLES TEXTURE STRUCTURE CLAY
N
*CONV.
LTAR
A
0-3
5 YR 4/4
—
Loam
Granular
—
0.7
Bw
3-29
5 YR 5/6
—
Loam
Blocky
20
0.6
Cr
29
RLWB+
MCS* = Multi -colored saprolite
RLWB+ = Restrictive layer —Weathered bedrock
*CONV. LTAR = Conventional Long Term Acceptance Rate
in gallons per square foot per day
SOIL SCIENTIST: John B. Allison © 2001 Southeast Soil Science, Inc. NC Revised 5/2000

Southeast Soil Science, Inc.
533 Crabtree Mountain Road
Canton, NC 28716
[phone]
PROJECT: Jose Rosado DATE: May 31, 2001
Thunderbird Mountain Resort
Graham County, NC CLAY MINERALOGY: Slightly expansive
PIT NUMBER: 19 SOIL DEPTH: 24 inches to weathered bedrock
SOIL GROUP: 2 RESTRICTIVE HORIZON: 24 inches to weathered bedrock
PERCENT SLOPE: 39 SEASONAL HIGH WATER TABLE: >24 inches
LANDSCAPE POSITION: Noseslope TYPE OF WATER TABLE: N/A
TOPOGRAPHY: Uniform CLASSIFICATION: Unsuitable
PARENT MATERIAL: Residuum RECLASSIFIED: Provisionally suitable
NOTES:
1. This pit is provisionally suitable for a drip irrigation system.
HORIZON
DEPTH
(inches)
MOIST COLOR
MATRIX
MOTTLES
-
—
FIELD ESTIMATES
STRUCTURE
Granular
Blocky
CLAY
—
20
TEXTURE
Loam
Loam
* ON V.
TAR
0.7
0.6
0-3
5 YR 4/4
gvr
3-24
5 YR 5/6
Cr
24
RLWB+
*CONY. LTAR = Conventional Long Term Acceptance Rate
MCS* = Multi -colored saprolite
RLWB+ = Restrictive layer — Weathered bedrock in gallons per square foot per day
- 0 2001 Southeast Soil Science, Inc. NC Revised 5/2000
SOIL SCIENTIST: John B. Allison

Southeast Soil Science, Inc.
533 Crabtree Mountain Road
Canton, NC 28716
[phone]
PROJECT: Jose Rosa do
DATE: May 31, 2001.
Thunderbird Mountain Resort
Graham County, NC
BORING NUMBER: 20
CLAY MINERALOGY: Slightly expansive
SOIL DEPTH: 40 inches to weathered bedrock
SOIL GROUP: 2
RESTRICTIVE HORIZON: 40 inches to weathered bedrock
PERCENT SLOPE: 57
SEASONAL HIGH WATER TABLE: >40 inches
LANDSCAPE POSITION: Sideslope
TYPE OF WATER TABLE: N/A
TOPOGRAPHY: Uniform
CLASSIFICATION: Provisionally suitable
PARENT MATERIAL: Residuum
RECLASSIFIED: N/A
NOTES:
FIELD ESTIMATES
HORIZON
DEPTH
(inches)
MOIST COLOR
MATRIX MOTTLES TEXTURE STRUCTURE CLAY
N
*CONY.
LTAR
A
0-5
5 YR 4/4
—
Loam
Granular
—
0.7
Bw
5-40
5 YR 5/6
—
Loam
Blocky
20
0.6
Cr
40
RLWB+
MCS* = Multi -colored saprolite
RLWB+ = Restrictive layer —Weathered bedrock
SOIL SCIENTIST: John B. Allison
*CONY. LTAR = Conventional Long Term Acceptance Rate
in gallons per square foot per day
©2001 Southeast Soil Science, Inc. NC Revised 5/2000

Southeast Soil Science, Inc.
533 Crabtree Mountain Road
Canton, NC 28716
[phone]
PROJECT: Jose Rosado
DATE: May 31, 2001
Thunderbird Mountain Resort
Graham County, NC
CLAY MINERALOGY: Slightly expansive
BORING NUMBER: 21
SOIL DEPTH: 30 inches to weathered bedrock
SOIL GROUP: 2
RESTRICTIVE HORIZON: 30 inches to weathered bedrock
PERCENT SLOPE: 62
SEASONAL HIGH WATER TABLE: >30 inches
LANDSCAPE POSITION: Sideslope
TYPE OF WATER TABLE: N/A
TOPOGRAPHY: Uniform
CLASSIFICATION: Unsuitable
PARENT MATERIAL: Residuum
RECLASSIFIED: Provisionally suitable
NOTES:
1'3 borings attempted at this site — all have weathered bedrock at 30 inches.
2 This boring is provisionally suitable for a drip irrigation system
FIELD ESTIMATES
HORIZON
DEPTH
(inches)
MOIST COLOR
MATRIX MOTTLES TEXTURE STRUCTURE CLAY *CONV,
N LTAR
A
0-4
7.5 YR 4/4
—
Loam
Granular
—
0.7
Bt
4-30
2.5 YR 5/6
—
Loam
Blocky
25
0.6
Cr
30
RLWB+
MCS* = Multi -colored saprolite
RLWB+ = Restrictive layer —Weathered bedrock
*CONY. LTAR = Conventional Long Term Acceptance Rate
in gallons per square foot per day
SOIL SCIENTIST: John B. Allison © 2001 Southeast Soil Science, Inc. NC Revised 5/2000

Southeast Soil Science, Inc..
533 Crabtree Mountain Road
Canton, NC 28716
(828) ,648-7080
PROJECT: Jose Rosado
DATE: May 31, 2001.
Thunderbird Mountain Resort
Graham County, NC
CLAY MINERALOGY: Slightly expansive
PIT NUMBER: 22
SOIL DEPTH: 44 inches to weathered bedrock
SOIL GROUP: 2
RESTRICTIVE HORIZON: 44 inches to weathered bedrock
PERCENT SLOPE: 63
SEASONAL HIGH WATER TABLE: >44 inches
LANDSCAPE POSITION: Sideslope
TYPE OF WATER TABLE: N/A
TOPOGRAPHY: Uniform
CLASSIFICATION: Unsuitable
PARENT MATERIAL: Residuum
RECLASSIFIED: Provisionally suitable
NOTES:
PIPI n f7c-r1nnATC:Q
HORIZON
DEPTH
(inches)
- - ---- - - --
MOIST COLOR
MATRIX MOTTLES TEXTURE STRUCTURE CLAY *CONV.
N LTAR
A
0-6
5 YR 4/4
—
Loam
Granular
—
0.7
Bw
6-44
2.5 YR 5/6
—
Loam
Blocky
20
0.6
Cr
44
RLWB+
!ACS* = Multi -colored saprolite
RLWB+ = Restrictive layer —Weathered bedrock
*CONV. LTAR = Conventional Long Term Acceptance Rate
in gallons per square foot per day
SOIL SCIENTIST: John B. Allison 0 2001 Southeast Soil Science, Inc. NC Revised 5/2000

Southeast Soil Science, Inc.
533 Crabtree Mountain Road
Canton, NC 28716
[phone]
PROJECT: Jose Rosado
DATE: June 5, 2001
Thunderbird Mountain Resort
Graham County, NC
CLAY MINERALOGY: N/A
BORING NUMBER: 23
FILL DEPTH: 21 inches
SOIL GROUP: N/A
RESTRICTIVE HORIZON: 21 inches to weathered bedrock
PERCENT SLOPE: 47
SEASONAL HIGH WATER TABLE: >21 inches
LANDSCAPE POSITION: Sideslope
TYPE OF WATER TABLE: N/A
TOPOGRAPHY: Uniform
CLASSIFICATION: Unsuitable
PARENT MATERIAL: Fill dirt
RECLASSIFIED: N/A
- NOTES:
FIELD ESTIMATES
HORIZON
DEPTH
(inches)
MOIST COLOR
MATRIX MOTTLES TEXTURE STRUCTURE CLAY *CONY.
(%) LTAR
Fill dirt
0-21
—
—
—
—
Cr
21
RLWB+
JICS* = Multi -colored saprolite
RLWB+ = Restrictive layer —Weathered bedrock
*CONV. LTAR = Conventional Long Term Acceptance Rate
in gallons per square foot per day
SOIL SCIENTIST: John B. Allison © 2001 Southeast Soil Science, Inc. NC Revised 5/2000

Southeast Soil Science, Inc.
533 Crabtree Mountain Road
Canton, NC 28716
[phone]
PROJECT: Jose Rosado
DATE: June 5, 2001
Thunderbird Mountain Resort
Graham County, NC
CLAY MINERALOGY: Slightly expansive.
BORING NUMBER: 24
SOIL DEPTH: 19 inches
SOIL GROUP: 2
RESTRICTIVE HORIZON: >60 inches
PERCENT SLOPE: 45
SEASONAL HIGH WATER TABLE: >54 inches
LANDSCAPE POSITION: Sideslope
TYPE OF WATER TABLE: N/A
TOPOGRAPHY: Uniform
CLASSIFICATION: Unsuitable
PARENT MATERIAL: Residuum
RECLASSIFIED: Provisionally suitable
NOTES:
1. Provisionally suitable if soil/saprolite rule .1956(6)(d) is applied.
2. Truncated profile.
FIELD ESTIMATES
HORIZON
DEPTH
(inches)
MOIST COLOR
MATRIX MOTTLES TEXTURE STRUCTURE CLAY *CONV.
N LTAR
Bw
0-19
5 YR 5/6
—
Loam
Blocky
20
0.6
C
19-54
MCS*
—
Sandy loam
Massive
—
0.5
VICS* = Multi -colored saprolite
RLWB+ = Restrictive layer — Weathered bedrock
*CONV. LTAR = Conventional Long Term Acceptance Rate
in gallons per square foot per day
SOIL SCIENTIST: John B. Allison © 2001 Southeast Soil Science, Inc. NC Revised 5/2000

Southeast Soil Science, Inc.
533 Crabtree Mountain Road
Canton, NC 28716
[phone]
PROJECT: Jose Rosado
DATE: June 5, 2001
Thunderbird Mountain Resort
Graham County, NC
CLAY MINERALOGY: N/A
BORING NUMBER: 25
FILL DEPTH: 32 inches to top of drainline
SOIL GROUP: N/A
RESTRICTIVE HORIZON: >60 inches
PERCENT SLOPE: 42
SEASONAL HIGH WATER TABLE: >32 inches
LANDSCAPE POSITION: Sideslope
TYPE OF WATER TABLE: N/A
TOPOGRAPHY: Uniform
CLASSIFICATION: N/A
PARENT MATERIAL: Fill dirt
RECLASSIFIED: N/A
NOTES:
1. Boring located in a drainfield.
FIELD ESTIMATES
HORIZON
DEPTH
(inches)
MOIST COLOR
MATRIX MOTTLES TEXTURE STRUCTURE CLAY *CONV.
(%) LTAR
Fill dirt
0-32
—
32
Stopped by rock
fragment
Probed to
Winches
)ICS* = Multi -colored saprolite
RLWB+ = Restrictive layer —Weathered bedrock
*CONV. LTAR = Conventional .Long Term Acceptance Rate
in gallons per square foot per day
SOIL SCIENTIST: John B. Allison © 2001 Southeast Soil Science, Inc. NC Revised 5/2000

Southeast Soil Science, Inc.
533 Crabtree Mountain Road
Canton, NC 28716
[phone]
PROJECT: Jose Rosado
DATE: June 5, 2001
Thunderbird Mountain Resort
Graham County, NC
CLAY MINERALOGY: N/A
BORING NUMBER: 26
FILL DEPTH: >60 inches
SOIL GROUP: N/A
RESTRICTIVE HORIZON: >60 inches
PERCENT SLOPE: 42
SEASONAL HIGH WATER TABLE: >60 inches
LANDSCAPE POSITION: Sideslope
TYPE OF WATER TABLE: N/A
TOPOGRAPHY: Uniform
CLASSIFICATION: Unsuitable
PARENT MATERIAL: Fill dirt
RECLASSIFIED: N/A
W
_ Pipi n FC-TIhAATP:C
HORIZON
DEPTH
(inches)
MOIST COLOR
MATRIX MOTTLES TEXTURE STRUCTURE CLAY *CONY.
N LTAR
Fill dirt
0-54
—
—
—
—
—
—
Probed to
60 inches
/ICS* = Multi -colored saprolite
RLWB+ = Restrictive layer —Weathered bedrock
*CONY. LTAR = Conventional Long Term Acceptance Rate
in gallons per square foot per day
SOIL SCIENTIST: John B. Allison © 2001 Southeast Soil Science, Inc. NC Revised 5/2000

PAY 14 2007
al Off -ice
L! llllKim,,�,r rnwt
Manufacturer's Equipment Cut Sheets c

"aeries 3-L I o
'1 Y" S iftbrical Solids Handling e � " ReIu.rrt p,,��,
Single Seal
www.cranepumps.com
2" & 3" Discharge
Series: 3SE-L.
, 1.51 2HP, 345ORPM9 60HZ
PP"�Asmd��
(R" CSA 108 - File No. L16567
UL 778
Sample Specifications: Section, I Page 3.
DESCRIPTION:
SUBMERSIBLE NON -CLOG SEWAGE -PUMP
DESIGNED FOR TYPICAL RAW SEWAGE
APPLICATIONS
DISCHARGE...............................3" NPT, Female, Vertical
LIQUID TEMPERATURE............
104'F (40°C) Continuous
VOLUTE ......................................
Cast Iron ASTM A-48, Class 30
MOTOR HOUSING .....................
Cast Iron ASTM A-48, Class 30
SEAL PLATE .............................
Cast Iron ASTM A-48, Class 30
IMPELLER: Design ...................
2 Vane, open with pump out vanes on
back side. Dynamically balanced, ISO G6.3
Material ................. Cast Iron ASTM A-48,_ Class 30
SHAFT ....................................... 416 Stainless Steel
SQUARE RINGS ......................... Buna-N
HARDWARE ...............................
300 Series Stainless Steel
PAINT..........................................
Air Dry Enamel
SEAL: _ Design ...................
Single Mechanical, Oil filled reservoir
Material ..................
Carbon/Ceramic/Buna-N
Hardware -300 Series Stainless
CORD ENTRY— .......................... 25 ft. (7.6m) Cord. Pressure grommet for
sealing and strain relief
SPEED ........................................ 3450 RPM (Nominal)
UPPER BEARING:
1.0 HP ....................
Sleeve, Oil lubricated
1.5 & 2.OHP ...........
Single Row, Ball, Oil lubricated
Load .......................
Radial
LOWER BEARING ......................
Single Row, Ball, Oil lubricated
Load .......................
Radial & Thrust
MOTOR: Design ...................
NEMA L -Single Phase, NEMA B -Three
phase. Torque Curve, Oil Filled, Squirrel
Cage Induction
Insulation ............... Class A for 1.0HP
Class.B for 1.5 & 2.OHP
SINGLE PHASE ..........................
Permanent Split Capacitor (PSC)
Includes Overload Protection in Motor
THREE PHASE ...........................
200-230/460 is Tri-Voltage. Requires
overload Protection to be included in
control panel
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT............
Seal Material, Impeller Trims, Additional
cord, Normally Closed Temperature Sensors with cord for 3 phase pumps
(Requires.relay in .control panel),
SECTION 113
PAGE 66 CRANE PUMPS & SYSTEMS
DATE 1105
MENEW A Crane Co. Company USA: [phone] • Canada: [phone] International: [phone]

N
' cries 3_
816
��
- 1 %" Spherical Solids Handling
www.cranepumps.com Single Seal
MODEL NO
PART NO
HP
VOLT/PH
Hz
RPM
(Nora)
3SE1022L
085535
1.0
23011
60
3450
3SE1092L
085536
1.0
200-230/3
60
3450
3SE1 142L
085537
1.0
460/3
60
3450
3SE1052L
089291
1.0
575/3
60
3450
3SE1522L
085538
1.5
230/1
60
3450
3SE1592L
085539
1.5
200-230/3
60
3450
3SE 1542L
085540.
1.5
460/3
60
3450
3SE1552L
089292
1.5
575/3
60
3450
3SE2022L
085541
2.0
230/1
60
3450
3SE2092L
085542
2.0
200-230/3
60
3450
3SE2042L
085543
2.0
460/3
60
3450
3SE2052L
089293
2.0
575/3
60
3450
9%'; 2" & 3" Discharge
c
(
NEMA
SMART
CODE
A
FULL
LOAD
AMPS
8.5
LOCGClED
ROTOR
AMPS
17.0
CORD
SIZE
10/3
CORD
TYPE
SOW
B/D
5.7/5.0
18.5/21.3
10/4
SOW
D
2.5
10.7
10/4
SOW
D
A
2.0
12.0
8.5
31.0
10/4
1 0/3
SOW
SOW
C/F _
F
9.8/8.6
4•3
31.3/36.0
18.0
10/4
10/4
sow.
SOW
F
3.4
14.4
1.0/4
SOW
A
13.5
31.0
10/3
SOW
A/C
11.5/10.0
31.3/36.0
1014
SOW
C
5.0
18.0
10/4
SOW
C
4•0
14.4
10/4
SOW
OPTIONAL - Temperature sensor cord for 3 phase models is 14/2 SOW, 0.530 (13.5mm) O.D.
inches
(mm)
CORD
O.D
inch (mm)
0.690 (17.5)
0.750 (19.1)
0.75) (19.1)
0.750 (19,1)
0.690 (17.5)
0.750 (19.1)
0.750 (19.1)
0.750 (19.1)
0.690 (17.5)
0.750 (19.1)
0.750 (19.1)
0.750 (19.1)
IMPORTANT!
1.) PUMP MAY BE OPERATED "DRY" FOR EXTENDED PERIODS WITHOUT DAMAGE TO MOTOR AND/OR SEALS.
2.) THIS PUMP IS APPROPRIATE FOR THOSE APPLICATIONS SPECIFIED AS CLASS I DIVISION II HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS.
3.) THIS PUMP IS NOTAPPROPRIATE FOR THOSE APPLICATIONS SPECIFIED AS CLASS I DIVISION I HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS.
4.) INSTALLATIONS SUCH AS DECORATIVE FOUNTAINS OR WATER FEATURES PROVIDED FOR VISUAL ENJOYMENT MUST BE INSTALLED INACCORDANCE
WITH THE NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODEANSI/NFPA 70AND/OR THE AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION. THIS PUMP IS NOT INTENDED FOR USE IN
SWIMMING POOLS, RECREATIONAL WATER PARKS OR INSTALLATIONS IN WHICH HUMAN CONTACT WITH PI IMPFn nnFnie is � ,....
RAN E PUMPS & SYSTEMS Lij
A Crane Co. Company USA: [phone] • Canada: [phone] • International: [phone]

to

BARNES'
Series SE
-Iaw E� UG/,•z.AA, 2" Spherical Solids Handling
www.cranepumps.com Manual & Automatic
1 % 2„ & 3"Discharge
DISCHARGE .......................2" NPT, Female, Vertical
LIQUID TEMPERATURE
SE411 ...........77-F (25°C) Continuous.
SE421 .... ....... 104°F (40°C) Continuous
VOLUTE ............................... Cast Iron ASTM A-48, Class 30
MOTOR HOUSING .............. Cast Iron ASTM A-48, Class 30
SEAL PLATE ...................... Cast Iron ASTM A-48, Class 30
IMPELLER:
Design...........:.2 Vane,. Open with pump out vanes on back
side, Dynamically Balanced, ISO G6.3
Material ..........
Cast Iron ASTM A-48, Class 30
SHAFT••••-•••-.•.....................416
Stainless Steel
SQUARE RINGS .................Buna-N
HARDWARE :.......................300 Series Stainless Steel
PAINT...................................Air Dry Enamel
SEAL: Design ........... Single Mechanical, Oil Filled Reservoir,
Secondary Exclusion Seal
Material...........
Carbon/Ceramic/Buns-N
Hardware - 300 Series Stainless
CORD ENTRY......................15
ft. (5m) Quick Disconnect Cord with plug
On 115Volt, Pressure Gromment for sealing
and strain relief
SPEED.................................1750
RPM (Nominal)
UPPER BEARING................Single Row, Ball, Oil Lubricated
Load ................ Radial
LOWER BEARING ............... Single Row, Ball, Oil Lubricated
Load ................ Radial`& Thrust
MOTOR: Design ............
NEMA L Torque Curve, Oil Filled, Squirrel
Cage Induction
Insulation ........
Class B
SINGLE PHASE ...................
Permanent Split Capacitor (PSC)
Includes Overload Protection in -Motor
LEVEL CONTROL ...............
"A" - Wide Angle, PVC, Mechanical, 15 ft (5m)
cord with Piggy -Back Plug, N/O
"AU"- Wide Angle, Polypropylene,
Mechanical, N/O, Integral to pump.
ON and OFF Points are adjustable
"VF" -*Vertical Float, PVC, Snap Action,
15 ft (5m) cord, with Piggy -Back plug.
OFF point ONLY is adjustable
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT.....
Seal Material, Additional Cord
Series: SE (SE411 & SE421)
.4HP, 175ORPM, 60Hz
IRA
MEM$ER
40
6C.
US
CSA 108
UL 778
LR16567
Sample Specifications: Section 1 Page 3.
DESCRIPTION:
SUBMERSIBLE NON -CLOG SEWAGE PUMP
DESIGNED FOR TYPICAL RAW SEWAGE
APPLICATIONS
CRAM E PUMPS & SYSTEMS SECTION 113
PAGE 1
A Crane Co. Company USA: [phone] Canada: [phone] • International: [phone] DATE 6/04

zenes SE
[%
2" Spherical Solids Handling
Manual & AUfOnIatIC Ezi
www.cranepumps.com
"'/- 2" & 3" Discharge
I
I yOy
10.75
(273) 5.32 1.56
(135) (40)
u �
O 3.86
(9y8)
1 7'5
I
10.75
(273) 5.32 1.56
(135) (40)
}
av 3.86
O (98)
T5
(197)
O
1 I
I I
10.75
(273)
5.32 1.56
(135) (40)
6.00 t1"
NJ,Y 52) 3.86
(98)
-
175 (97)
O
V
l
Y I
18 J I
I 1
I
01��IY
I I
1 6
�evfi �
I I
E
1
I I I
I I
16.76
I
--� I I
i�
--�
(426)
8.75
(222)
16.76
I (426)
L5.OADJUSTABLE
16.76
426)
(
I
- - 5105.00
2717
(127)
STOP i
MODEL NO
PART NO
HP
VOLT/PH
Hz
RPM
(NOm)
SE411
096747
0.4
115/1
60
1 1750
SE411A
096748
0.4
115/1
60
1750
SE411AU
096749
0.4
115/1
60
1750
SE411 VF
100836
0.4
11511
60
1750
SE421
096750
0.4
230/1
60
1750
SE421AU
096751
0.4
230/1
60
1750
NEMA
START
CODE
FULL
LOAD
AMPS
LOCKED
ROTOR
AMPS
CORD
SIZE
CORD.__,
TYPE
CORD
O.D
inch (mm)
C
12.0
19.0
14/3
SJTOW
SJTOW
SJTOW
SJTOW
0.375 (9.5)
0.375 (9.5)
0.375 (9.5)
0.375 (9.5)
C
12.0
19.0
14/3
C
12.0
19.0
14/3
C
12.0
19.0
14/3
C
6.2
13.0
14/3
SJTOW
0.375 (9.5)
C
6.2
13.0
14/3
SJTOW
0.375 (9.5)
Mechanical Switch on SE -A, cord 16/2, SJOW, Piggy -Back Plug
Mechanical Switch on SE -AU, cord 14/2, SJOW, 0.370 (9.4mm) O.D.
Vertical Switch on SE-VF, cord 16/2, SJOW, 0.320 (8.1mm) O.D. Piggy -Back Plug
IMPORTANT!
1.) PUMP MAYBE OPERATED "DRY" FOR EXTENDED PERIODS WITHOUT DAMAGE TO MOTOR AND/OR SEALS.
2.) THIS PUMP IS APPROPRIATE FOR THOSE APPLICATIONS SPECIFIED AS CLASS I DIVISION II HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS.
3.) THIS PUMP IS NOT APPROPRIATE FOR THOSE APPLICATIONS SPECIFIED AS CLASS I DIVISION I HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS.
4.) INSTALLATIONS SUCH AS DECORATIVE FOUNTAINS OR WATER FEATURES PROVIDED FOR VISUAL ENJOYMENT MUST BE INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE
THE NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE ANSI/NFPA 70AND/OR THE AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION. THIS PUMP IS NOT INTENDED FOR USE IN
- MING POOLS, RECREATIONAL WATER PARKS, OR INSTALLATIONS IN WHICH HUMAN CONTACT WITH PUMPED MEDIA IS A COMMON OCCURRENCE_
SECTION
2g PAGECRAN E PUMPS & SYSTEMS
DATE 6/04 1 m
A Crane Co. Company USA: [phone] • Canada: [phone] • International: [phone].

E
The world's most advanced continuous
self-cleaning, pressure -compensating
dripperline for wastewater.
Applications
• Can be used with domestic septic tank effluent
of 220/220 (ppm) BOD/TSS with proper design,
filtration and operation .
• Typically installed following a treatment
process
• Reuse applications including municipally
treated effluent designated for irrigation
Features/Benefits
• Pressure Compensation - all drippers deliver
equal flow, even on sloped or rolling terrain.
• Unique Flow Path - Turbonet technology
provides more control of water and a high
resistance to clogging.
• Continuous Self -Flushing Dripper Design -
flushes debris, as it is detected - throughout
operation, not just at the beginning or end of
a cycle. Ensures uninterrupted dripper
operation.
• Single Hole Dripper Outlet from Tubing:
- Better protection against root intrusion
- Allows the dripperline to be used in
subsurface applications without need for
chemical protection
• Drippers Capture Water Flow From the Center
of the Tubing - ensures that only the cleanest
flow enters the dripper.
• Built -In Physical Root Barrier - drippers are.
protected from root intrusion without the
need for chemical protection. Water exits
dripper in one location while exiting the
tubing in another.
• Three Dripper Flow Rates - provides the
broadest range of flow rates available. Allows
the designer to match the dripperline to any
soil or slope condition.
• Bioline Tubing is Completely Wrapped in
Purple - the complete tubing is purple,easily
identifiying it as a non -potable, regardless of
how the tubing is installed.
• Vinyzene-Impregnated Drippers - prevents
buildup of microbial slime.
• Can be used subsurface - Bioline can be
installed on -surface, under cover or subsurface.
• No Special Storage Requirements - does not
degrade if stored outdoors.
Techfilter Compatible - an optional level of
protection, provides a limited lifetime
warranty against root intrusion.
EXPLODED VIEW OF BIOLINE DRIPPER
Self -flushing, Free Floating
,w Diaphragm flushes debris
E from dripper anytime
Efficiently Short 3 during operation
eration
Flow Path, W
Pressure Compensating
" Bath and Outlet
Turbonet
Technology - -- Vinyzene Impregnated -
wider antimicrobial protection
cross-section to resist build-up of slime
allows large
particles through `` Physical Barrier -
flow path on back of dripper
Inlet Filter
Specifications
• Dripper flow rates: 0.4, 0.6 or 0.9 GPH
• Dripper spacings: 12", 18" or 24" dripper spacings
and blank tubing
• Pressure compensation range: 7 to 70,psi
(stainless steel clamps recommended above 50 psi)
• Maximum recommended system pressure: 50 psi
• Tubing diameter: 0.66" OD, 0.57" ID
• Tubing color: Purple color indicates non -potable
• Coil lengths: 500' or 1,000' (Blank tubing in 250')
• Recommended filtration: 120 mesh
• Bending radius: 7"
• UV resistant
• Tubing material: Linear low -density polyethylene
Additional flow, spacings, and pipe sizes available by
special order. Please contact Netafim USA Customer
Service for details.

Dripper Spacing
12"
18„
24"
Dripper flow Rate (GPH)
v 15
292
233
175
410
322 i 247 510
405 308
35
486
365
279
656
514 394
760
649 497
,45i
524
407
31��
732
S74 �`439 •
s
8801
�725 �555,
Lateral lengths are calculated for operation while dosing, and allow for
the pressure at the end of the drippedine to be 7 or These data do
not take scouring velocity into account.
psi
greater.
Dripper spacing 12" 18"
Dripper Flow Rate (GPH) 't' r • r , r' : , , , ,
v 151n1et 8� 115 100 85 160 140 120
h 25anlet 784,' 200 170= 140 270
4 i 230 1 200
Q
35Inlet 28A 260 210 180 360 300
� 250
5 , 45'lnlet 384` 310 , ,.2540 21U •k 4,420 .ma : , � 350 r 290', „
Lateral lengths are calculated to achieve 2 fps scouring velocity and pressure at the distal end of the lateral to be 7 ps
1.a
a.9
o.s
y 0.7
0.6
v
0.5
0.4
zt
0 0.3
ti
0.2
0.1
24"
210 1 190 1 170
470 1 410 1 350
•� Su au 50 60 70
Pressure (psi)
Between 0 and 7 psi, the dripper functions as a turbulent flow emitter,
ensuring that the nominal design flow is not exceeded at system start-up.

BIOLINE DRIPPER OPERATION ...
1. Regulating mode
Bioline's continuous self-cleaning
, pressure compensating
dripper is a fully self-contained unit molded to the interior
wall of the dripper tubing. 2. Initiation offlushing cycle
As shown at right, Bioline is continuously self-cleaning during
operation, not just at the beginning and end of a cycle. The 3. Flushing cycle
result is dependable, clog -free operation, year after year.
4. Regulating mode
CROSS SECTION OF
BIOLINE DRIPPER
Shows how effluent enters the
dripper from the center of the flow
where it is the cleanest.
Cleanest
Effluent
Flow
Dril
Inlet f
SAMPLE MODEL NUMBER
1 2 3
Bioline = OSWRAM ' r
DripperlineI A
Dripper Dripper Coil
Flow Rate ?Spacing Length
0.4 GPH = .4 12" = 12 500' = V500
0.6 GPH = .6 18" = 18 1,000' = V
0.9 GPH = .9 24" = 24
BLANK Tubing Model Number. 250' = 08WRAM-250
Debris
Bioline
Dripper

TLCOUP
TLELL
TLTEE
Insert Coupling
'Insert Elbow
Insert Tee
TLO50MA TLO75MA
%2" Male Adapter 314" Male Adapter
— Q 9�BU ''� • �e
TLCR05
Insert Cross
TLO75FTEE TL2W075MA TLIAPE-B
Combination Tee 2-Way Insert Insert Adapter for I" or
Ins x Ins x 3/ " FPT 314 MPT x Insert Larger PE (Requires 11 mm
or 7116 drill or punch)
1%
pF d
y� L
TLIAPVC-B TDB1T16.5 �TLDPLUG
Insert Adapter with Grommet Drill Bit for TLAPVC Dripper Plug Ring to Close Off
1 %2" or larger PVC Pipe Fitting (16.5mm or 21132' j Individual Dripper
TUIG8 TLS6 TLSOV TLCV
Figure 8 Line End 6" Soil Staple Shut -Off Valve Inline Check Valve
Ins x Ins • Flow Range: 0.9 to 4.4 GPM
• Opening Pressure: 7.1 psi
• Closing Pressure: 5.7 psi
Fittings Definitions '
FPT = Female Pipe Thread MPT = Male Pipe Thread Ins x Ins = Insert by Insert
Applications
• Fits Bioline Dripperline
Features/Benefits
• Barbed fittings for secure fit
• Easy installation without glue or tools
• Maximum recommended system pressure without clamps - 50 psi
• Allows for easy on -site inspection of proper fitting installation
For more information call your Authorized
Netafim USA Distributor or call Netafim USA
Customer Service at [phone].
W064 8/06

ANEW! kind ®f DISPOSAL SYSTEM
lip
erc 6 Rite
By American Manufacturing Company, Inc.
ALTERNATIVE DRAINFIELD
ECOLOGICAL ECONOMICAL EASY TO INSTALL —OFF THE SHELF
SIMPLY AMAZING!
THE ONLY DRIP IRRIGATION SYSTEM FOR SEPTIC EFFLUENT
NO OTHER TREATMENT REQUIRED! PATENT NO. 5,200,065
-OPERATION.
The system control panel is equipped with four float switches and controls the timed
doses to be discharged. The water level must be high enough to overcome the
"Redundant Off' (Bottom) float in order for the pump to run. When the water level rises
high enough to overcome the "Dose Enable" (second) float and the timer is in a dose
enable mode the cycle will initiate. The pump will activate and automatically back flush
the disc filters, and then dos& the lead zone. The pump will continue to run for the length
of time as set on the pump run timer to provide a complete dose. The system will remain
off until the preprogrammed off timer enters a new cycle enable mode, at which time the
control will activate another cycle and dose the new lead zone (as long as the "Dose
Enable" float is still up). This process will continue until the water level drops below the
"Dose Enable" float and the pump run timer has timed out. Each zone will automatically
receive a field flush each 50 cycles to clean the drip tubing.
Last revised: 2/14/00 www.americanonsite.com

The control system is equipped with a peak enable circuit to manage peak flows and
excess water use event. If the water level rises enough to overcome the "peak enable"
(third) float and the peak enable selector switch is on, the system will be cycled at the
peak rate. The system will continue to cycle at an increased rate until the peak enable
float is deactivated at which time the system will resume the normal dosing cycle.
In the event the water level continues to rise enough to overcome the "High Level"
(fourth) float, the audio/visual alarm will be activated until silenced by pressing the Test -
Normal -Silence switch to the silence position. The alarm circuit must be reset when the
"High Level" float returns to its normal position.
DRIP SYSTEM PACKAGE SPECIFICATION
CONTROL
The control has a Nema 4X rated enclosure with
hinged inner door, removable aluminum back plate for
component mounting, IEC rated pump contactor,
adjustable pump run timer, high level peak enable
circuit, Hand -Off -Auto toggle switches for all
operations, pump run light, indicator lights, separate
control and pump breakers, control fuse, and finger -
safe terminal blocks with a neatly bundled wiring
harness. The Control unit is U.L. APPROVED AND
LABELED. The microprocessor has manual override
capability to completely operate the system while
bypassing the microprocessor.
TUBING and FIELD FITTINGS
Netafim Ram tubing in 1,000 feet rolls with specialty insert fittings and PVC flex tubing
- is provided ready to glue to schedule 40 PVC supply &- return pipes.
Normally Open _
Supply Valves
Flown eter
Backflush Valves
Supply From
Pump Tank
Disc Filters
Normally Closed
Field Flush Valve
Return To
Septic Tank
Normally Closed
Zone Valves
Last revised: 2/14/00 www.americanonsite.com

polyethylene insulated valve. box . `7 .. �1'
with bolt down cover. The- Control
valves and heater .are pre -wired EX7ENSICN cvr OUT I I j TO CEN7RAE UNR
FOR ap sPFE
with a 15' . cord suitable 1 for i i ��
connection to the control terminal
strips.-
E(TENSICf PPE j
LA
ter MERE)I ; I -
FM ENABLE
PIPE COUPLMG I ;I
SUBMERSIBLE PUMP (BY OTHERS)
cum +. sass a
The pump is .'a 2 hp, 230-volt, 1 MINI ,wsT>Hn OpTnt i
phase septic effluent pump with - '� �� ANCHOR BOLTTMU END QW
1/2" solids handling capacity. SEE INEERr
Available also is a'/z.hp, 115 volt,
1 phase screened effluent pump
with quick disconnect at reduced cost.
PUMP DISCHARGE KIT & FLOAT ROD W/FLOATS
Included in package is a shut off valve, quick disconnect, check valve, and adapters, no
weep hole should be placed in pipe. Vertical float installation is recommended as shown.
ACCESS HATCH AND RISER
Lightweight riser'and lid is an available option.
Copyright ©, American Manufacturing Company, Inc., 2000
Last revised: 2/14/00 www.americanonsite.com

Y OWIMUN5 3Leei submersibles
Pacre 1 of 2
home
g
Print this,
4" Stainless Steel Submersibles
QUICK LINK
> _Grundfos Submersible MS Motors
IMM
• All Stainless Steel construction for increased durability and
reliability
• No lead -leaching components for maximum safety and health of
end -users
• Built-in sand bearing minimizes sand damage experienced in most
other submersible pumps and increases pump life, as well as
offering protection against upthrust
• Built-in, jam -free check valves guarantee smooth running, fail safe
operation
• User-friendly cable guard for the easiest installation among
submersible pumps
4-in Submersible Performance
240C
2200
2000
1800
1600
1400
1
1200
http://www. c,rundfos. com/Web/HomeUs.nsf/webPrintView/064EBAB C912EO6078625 6AD20054... 4/23/2007

,i �iairuess steel Nubmersibles
Page 2 of 2
Performance chart is shown for reference only.
Download the submittal data sheet for exact performance.
. a iY��n( M a�
• Domestic Water Supply
Purchase One Today From An Authorized WaterPro Dealer i
SE>THLINK?IAtNOVATln }
http://www. c,rundfo s. com/Web/HomeUs.nsf/webPrintView/064EBAB C912EO6078625 6AD20054... 4/23/2007

16 GPM
LECTION CHARTS - FLOW RANGE
ikr<adngs are in GALLONS PER HOUR-GPH) (10 TO 20 GPM)
PUMP OUTLET
1 1/4 " NPT
-01
oil
of
• —PSI:
Q---------
r l
r®
r 1 1
®e
®e
e• 1
I e B
:®a
. e
------
���----_-
See 16S performance curves for higher head models.
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE.
GRUNDFOS PUMPS CORPORATION • 2555 Clovis Avenue • Clovis, CA - 93612
Area Centers: Allentown, PA - Atlanta, GA • Chicago, IL - Clovis, CA - Dallas, TX • Seattle, WA
[phone] • FAX [phone] LSP-TL-1E10 1 6/96'
Canada: Mississauga, Ontario • Mexico: Apodaca, N.L. PRINTED IN USA.

A14011- a o-j 0_//3
.12 ::r. ____i �4rW1_
The original ZABEL® Disc Dam Filter was patented in 1959. The '12"series filters have been filtering
wastewater longer than any filter in the wastewater industry. In 2006 Zabel made the best even
o)etter.by introducing a complete redesign of the original with more great features and finer levels
f filtration.
lu
A 100-121 Series
The A100-12 is the commercial filter chosen by more engineers and installed in
more localities than any other filter on the market. The reliable performance and
'flow rates from 3000-6000 gpd allow this filter to be utilized in almost every application.
The new ZABEL' Versa -Case' is available with supplemental by-pass protection
slots on the outlet, built-in reducer and outlet hub that accepts either 4" or 6" SCH
40 pipe. The Al 00-12 Series is also popular in many areas for residential use due
to its high quality effluent and large capacity. Independent research has shown the
A100-12.decreases TSS by 50-90 and CBODS by 20-40%.
1/767"Filtration
AUN1511 r xiJ
Available lengths 20" 28" & 36"
A300-12TM' Series
Long heralded as the ultimate grease trap filter, the
A300-12 provides 1/32" filtration and has been shown
to reduce FOG by as much as 50-98%. The A300-12 is
also used for onsite wastewater systems which require
a finer level of TSS removal, such as laundromats and -
dog kennels. As with all ZABEL Filters extra filter
cartridges are available to speed service time and allow
offsite cleaning of the used cartridge.
1�32"Filtration
Available lengths 20 ; 28" & 36"
A600-12TM' Series
The newest addition to the ZABEL Filter line incorporates the proven performance
of the disc dam design with the finest level of filtration available on the market. The
1/64" filtration of the A600-12 provides optimal filtration levels for•those unique onsite
applications with very fine particulates and suspended solids. Every A600-12 Series
filter includes the exclusive SmartFllter® Alarm switch to alert the owner of required
maintenance. For More. Information Contact:
Jeffrey W. Cox, Sr @
4"Filtration 865 (674-0838)
The Aquatic. Resource Division of AM, Inc.
Available len the 20" 28" & 36" For further technical information:
All products) covered 6y one or more U.S. and/or lntemational patents. ""'-' j 4 t r'''''
OtherUS. and lntemahonalpatents maybe pending. www.zabeizone.com
090602.231

TM
Aq.0
BIOCLER ETM
Performance Based, Wastewater Treatment Solutions Self cbntained
W
e water treatment systems
THE BIOCLERE ADVANTAGE:
.-t
,.
Bioclere is a modified trickling filter over a clarifier. It
:.. ,,,�rt
is designed to treat wastewater with varying organic
xM
and nutrient concentrations as well as intermittent
flows. Bioclere's natural fixed film treatment process
rM
is stable, simple to maintain and inexpensive to
operate.
Bioclere reduces biochemical oxygen demand
(BOD5) and total suspended solids (TSS) to levels
FEATURES & BEN"EFITS
that meet or exceed NSF and EPA -standards. As
water trickles through the biofilter, organic material' is
consumed by' a population of microorganisms that
Treats flows from 200 to 100,000 gpd
form on the surface 'of the media. Sloughed solids
from the biofilter filter are returned to the primary
Cost effective treatment with efficient
`.ailation.and
tank as secondary sludge and treated water is
operation
displaced to the next treatment component or the
Treats high strength wastewater
disposal area.
Internal flow stabilization:treafs
Bioclere is a modular technology. Units can be
intermittent flows
installed in parallel to accommodate large flows or in'
9
series to achieve high levels of treatment. The
Fully automated pump :system
systems are sealed and insulated to minimize the
impact oI seasonal- temperature rvariations on the
Self adjusting'process control YT
treatment process.
Small footprint /,compact design,.'`
NITROGEN REDUCTION:
Bioclere systems can be designed to consistently
a Gravity flow system
convert and reduce nitrogen. Total nitrogen is
reduced substantially and cost effectively by
Quiet operation
recirculation nitrified water from the Bioclere back to
Sealed and insulated fo,r seasonal
the primary settling tank. Large Bioclere systems
incorporate
conditions
may a second stage nitrifying Bioclere
and a tertiary anoxic reactor to achieve < 10 mg/I
x
total nitrogen.
Applications include: residential, commercial, .
institutional, light industrial and municipal
wastewater treatment

Typical.Septic Tank Influent
Septic Tank Effluent
® Bioclere Effluent
* Septic tank effluent is
diluted by the Bioclere's
recirculation system.
BOD " TS
Bioclere 16/12-350 is ANSI/NSF Standard 40 certified
by the National Sanitation Foundation (NSF). The
above performance results are based on a six month
accumulative average from NSF's certification testing
orooram_

ONRBWF-2-040511

For more information., please contact us at:
P.J. Hannah Equipment Sales Corp
Unit #10, 8528-123 St. Unit #9, 151 Brunel. Rd
Surrey, B.C. V3W 3V6 Mississauga, Ont. L4Z 21-16
Tel: [phone] Tel: [phone]
Fax: [phone] Fax: [phone]
Toll Free 1-800-663-6793 Toll Free 1-800-353-3087
Email: [e-mail]
www.pjhannah.com
Also available from P.J. Hannah Equipment Sales Corp.
• Rotating Biological Contactors (RBCs)
o Modules
o Complete package plants
o Single family home to small community
• FRP Conical Hopper Bottom Settling Tanks
WESCAN Self-cleaning Curved Bar Screens- "....."_

. Comp
To Ba(
Coppe
Line fr
Normal
Hydrau
Check)
Backwa
Float Sin
illy Closed
aulic Valve
Pressure
Switch
eck Valve
Conduit
trot Panel
?ck Valve
rig Pump
Heavy Duty Steel Base

SKID MOUNTED.- AUTO BACKWASH FILTER
The SFSBW series of skid mounted tertiary filtration units have been engineered to provide -maximum
pressure tertiary filtration with a small footprint and minimal installation costs. These packaged systems'
come complete with filter tank with internal piping, pumps, motors, valves and control panel. The packaged
filtration system is assembled on a heavy gauge steel base designed to minimize shipping and installation
costs. Systems withdual pumps are available upon request.
Standard Model 24 SFSBW Skid Mounted Filter Model 24 SFSBW with Optional Weather Hood

�'AMM.&TIC.BACKWASH
FILTER
HYDRAULIC AUTOMATIC VALVE
PRESSURE GAUGE
(NORMALLY CLOSED)
AIR COMPRESSOR
PRESSURE RELAY/SWITCH
BACKWASH
-0*-- TO PRIMARY
CLARIFIER
CHECK VALVE
RAUUC
AUTOMATIC VALVE
FILTER®
WATER OUT
�.
(NORMALLY OPEN)-
�
i +
CONTROL PANEL WITH
ALARM LIGHT
BACKWASH LINE
CHECK VALVE
r
O O O O
FILTER TANK
PUMP
0 0 0 0
DOSING LINE
CHECK VALVE
BACKWASH PUMP
j
.
ANODE
CHECK VALVE
{
i
• �
'
{ ;
DOSING PUMP
BACKWASH PUMP
+
s
DOSING PUMP
FEED PIPE
��
�`�
,�
CHECK VALVE
HIGH WATER
i
DOSING PUMP
OVERFLOW
FEED PIPE
- +
- --�
HIGH WATER LEVEL
FLOAT SWITCH
i
I I
OUTLET
INLET
NORMAL
HIGH
WATER
1
WATER
LEVEL
!
LEVEL
I
i NORMAL
TANK
i
i WATER
7
LEVEL
FLOAT SWITCH
- +
TO TURNS
BACKWASH
..
DIFFERENTIAL
PUMP OFF IF
f
FLOAT SWITCH.
WATER LEVEL
ry
TURNS DOSING
IS TOO LOW
u
PUMP ON/OFF
FOOT VALVE
OUTFFA": ' TMK ' _. _._._......__-.
.. _. - ___
FlUER FEED -rA K
FOOT VALVE
(BACKWASH PUMP FEED TANK)
(DOSING PUMP FEED TANK)
4

SIZING CHART:
SI Units
SFSBW
Model
20
24
30
36
42
48
54
60
72
Recommended
For Plant size m3/da
26.5
59.4
41.6
85.6
64.4
133.5
94.6
192
132.5
262
170.3
341
208
433
265
534
378.5
771
Max Ca aci m /da
Filter Diameter,
mm
Bed Area m
508
0.20
610
0.29
762
914
1067
1219
1372
1524
1829
Forward
0.46
0.66
0.89
1.16
1.48
1.82
2.63
Filter rate I/min
Dosing Pump HP
41
59
93
134
182
236
286
371
536
Filter ipe, NPT
1/2
1-1/2"
112
1-1/2"
1/2
1-1/2"
3/4
1-1/2"
1
1-1/2"
1-1/2
2"
2
2
3
Backwash rate
I/m i n
125
3/4
182
1
280
2
400
2
545
3
712
908
1113
1609
Backwash Pump, HP
Backwash pipe, inches
2"
2"1
- 2"
5
5
7 5
7 5
Hei ht mm
Len th
1375
1550
1650
1550
1625
1650
1700
1750
1880
mm
Width mm
1220
865
1220
1375
1525
1675
1830
1980
2135
2800
Weight kg
264
965
1115
1270
1470
1625
1775
1930
2335
1365
275
1365
364
2730
441
2730
873
2730
925
2730
1036
1141
1818
Dosing tank, litres
Effluent tank, litres
1365
1365
2730
2730
2730
2730
3780
3780
3780
3780
3780
3780
US Units
SFSBW
20
24
30
36
42
48
Model
Recommended
7,000
11,000
17,000
25,000
35,000
45,000
For Plant size us pd
Max Capacityusgpd
15,696
22,608
35,280
50,832
69,264
90,000
Filter Diameter,
20"
24"
30"
36"
42"
48"
inches
Bed Area ft
2.18
3.14
4.9
7.07
9.62
12.50
Forward
10.9
15.7
'24.5
35.3
48.1
62.5..
Filter rate us pm
~
Dosing Pump HP
1/2
1/2
1/2
3/4
1
Filter pipe, NPT
1-1/2"
1-1/2"
1-1/2"
1-1/2"
Backwash rate
33
48
74
106
144
1gg
us pm
Backwash Pum , HP
3/4
1
2
2
3
5
Backwash pipe, inches
2"
2"
2"
2"
2-1/2"
3"
Height - inches
54"$300
65"
61"
64"
65"
Length - inches
48"54"
60"
66"
72"
Width - inches
34"44"
50"
58"
64"
Weight lbs.
580800
970
1920
2035
Dosingtank, us
300750
750
750
750
Effluent tank, usg
300750
1
750 1
750
750
54
60
72
55,000
70,000
100,000
114,480
141,120
203,760
54"
60"
72"
15,90
19.60
_ 75.5„
98.0
141..5.
2
2
3
2"
2"
2-1/2"
240
294
425
5
7.5
7.5
3„
4"
4"
67"
69"
74"
78"
84"
118"
70"
76"
92"
2280
2510
3000
1000
1000
1000
1000 1
1000 1
1000
5

The SFSBW filter provides an effective, efficient, automatic backwashing tertiary filtration system
1
DOSING PUMP CHECK VALVE
14
BACKWASH PUMP COUPLING
2
DOSING PUMP INLET
1
BACKWASH LINE ' CHECK VALVE
3
00SING PUMP HAIR 8t LINT TRAP
16
CHECK VALVE
DOSING PUMP
17
HYDRAULIC AUTOMATIC VALVE (NORMALLY CLOSED)
rJ
DOSING PUMP COUPLING
18
CONTROL PANEL WITH ALARM LIGHT
S
DOSING LINE CHECK VALVE
19
AIR COMPRESSOR
7
DISTRIBUTION HEAD
20
SOLENOID VALVE
8
LATERALS (
21
PRESSURE GAUGE
9
HYDRAULIC AUTOMATIC VALVE (NORMALLY OPEN)
PRESSURE RELAY/SWITCH
10
BACKWASH PUMP CHECK VALVE
ANODE
11
BACKWASH PUMP INLET
¢
DRMN PLUG
12
BACKWASH PUMP HAIR & UNT TRAP
FILTER TANK '
13.
BACKWASH PUMP
$
STEEL BASE
A

BffJLLE IIV EFS-99
Pu rp"Hey
Neptune Containment Feed Systems are com-
pact units providing a tank in a containment for a
variety of chemical feed or dispensing applications.
They are used in boiler, cooling tower and disinfection
applications. Other dispensing uses include fertilizers and
chemicals for agricultural, ornamental and turf applications.
Containment feed systems can also serve as the base unit for
drumless chemical programs. -
®am.SCIP'®i®il
Containment feed systems are complete packaged
5
chemical feed systems. The tank, pump and suction
piping are mounted. within the containment base to
capture any leaks or spills. The feed tanks are made of
translucent polyethylene, making levels readily visible.
The narrow design fits doorways and elevators.
• Provides complete, packaged chemical feed system
• Efficiently contains chemical leaks or spills
.ter FCHIE
��� .,��.
MODEL MT 3D
shown with optional
containment
• Allows total reclamation of any spilled chemical
Improves housekeeping. and maintenance_
• Easy access to -pumps since -they -are elevated
Containment tank volume is 125% of feed tank volume
CLOSED CONTAINMENT UNITS
• Gasketed cover with latches allows reclaim of
uncontaminated chemical in the event -of
leakage or spillage
OUTDOOR —Prevents rainwater and debris from
collecting in the containment
INDOOR —Prevents containment from becoming
a convenient refuse receptacle
• Optional hasps allow locking to prevent
unauthorized access to pumps or controls :

CLOSED
CONTAINMENT
UNITS
Standard unit includes contain-
ment basin, 60 or 90 gallon tank
with gasketed cover for contain-
ment area held in place with
latches. Each unit includes
polypropylene suction piping
with 1/2" polypropylene valve
and strainer. Flexible polyeth-
ylene hose with 1/2" threaded
connector is provided
from the strainer to
the pump mounting MODEL CAPACITY (GALLONS)
dental. DAY TANK CONTAIN. TANK
CFS-60 60 110
CFS-90 90 110
MODEL CFS-90
with controls and
pushwater piping
completely
installed with
containment
OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
MODEL
DESCRIPTION
EDA 50C
Double wall discharge line 20' long
HASP
Hasps for locking lid to base
CC-1
100 mi. calibration cyclinder with
isolation valve
CC-2
250 mi. calibration cylinder with
isolation valve
CSA-1.0
Mixer, direct drive, 4" prop
3.165S. propeller and shaft. .
Motor with cord and plug
1 /4hp-1 ph-60hz-115230v-TEFC
PORTABLE MIN/ TANK FEEDERS 0--
Mini-tank system offers portability and economy.
Compact 23-1/2" wide, 36" long, 29" high size
fits through doorways, in elevators and allows
installation in small areas. Tank removes from
base for ease of transport and handling.
• Total weight: 40 lbs. plus pump
• Use with electronic or motor driven pumps
• 8" manway standard

TYPE ECS SYSTEM >
ECS Containment Feed Systems consist of a
cylindrical feed tank mounted in a rectangular
containment tank and a pump shelf.
Each ECS System includes PVC suction tubing,
PVC ball valve, PVC "Y strainer and a PVC foot
valve (required when level in feed tank drops
below pump inlet).
Dome top tanks have 7-inch threaded manway
with vent. Flat top tanks have a one-piece
removable cover.
MODEL
STYLE
CAPACITY (GALLONS)
DAY TANK
CONTAIN. TANK
ECS-65D '
DOME
65
90
ECS-115D
DOME
115
190
MODEL MT-30
shown without
r containment
r�
MODEL
DESCRIPTION
MT-30
30 Gallon System includes polypropylene
suction piping with isolation valve and
"Y" strainer (pump not included)
MT-30T
1 30 Gallon Molded Tank and Base Only
OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
MT -CC
Calibration Column
MT -CT
Containment Tank
MTA
1/20 HP Mixer
MODEL EEN-65D
with dome top and
optional pump
TYPE EE V
Economy EC units come with one or two feed
tanks in a single containment tank. They may
be specified with single or dual feed tanks.
No accessories are included. Molded cover
provides mounting area for optional pump
and optional mixer.
MODEL
STYLE
CAPACITY (GALLONS)
DAY TANK
CONTAIN. TANK
EC-50-1
MOLDED
50
90
EC-50-2
MOLDED
50 EACH
150
EC-65-1
MOLDED
65
90
EC-65-2
MOLDED
65 EACH
150
MODEL EE F 5-0
with molded
cover and
optional
pumps

N
= a N N m N m N m
LL,
Ln v w � m 't U)
an � Z W
O
Iw- _ O`nw u
a ?
z�^OCP p N va m in m m m m
W
Z NM N N N N
X44
y�
$ m
0 0 0 0 0 0
N N N N N N
m m m
tDi--------
®' w
p� W
Lll m o l0 c- O O Ul lfl
C9 1w, 0 V1 Vl L 1 U1 1p �p
Q '~ w w w w W W
I
A
W
W
n
U
Z
�o
0
� M f
o
CL
C�
m
`°off=
N � ti
� "4
R I �

-Tipton Environmental International, Inc.
environmental excellence and common sense for a better world....
Ultraviolet Wastewater Disinfection
Package Wastewater Treatment Systems
For Flow Ranges Less Than 500,000 US GPD
TEII-UV-4M2
1009000 GPD Capacity UV Disinfection System
GENERAL BACKGROUND
The Tipton Environmental International, Inc. (TEII)
Horizontal Channel Type of packaged treatment systems
disinfects wastewater flows ranging from 1 to 500,000
US gallons per day (GPD). The TEII Horizontal Channel
Type's most significant features are the small footprint
and its ease of operation.
The TEII ultraviolet disinfection (UV) system comes
standard with a stainless steel channel and built-in level
control weirs, remote NEMA modified stainless steel
enclosures with window kits and removable waterproof
modules.
OPTIONAL FEATURES
-Ultraviolet (UV) intensity monitoring
•4-20 mA output -or dry. contact -alarming :.
-Hand, off, and auto (HOA) switches
-Transitions for flanged, piped or threaded
connections on the inlet and outlet of the
UV system
-Cleaning racks or tanks
Complete standby spare modules
-Redundant banks
TYPICAL INSTALLATIONS
Private developments
Schools and institutions
Camp grounds and trailer parks
-Highway rest stops
®Small towns
*Business parks
Industrial wastewater plants
-Parks and recreational areas T 1 P T O N
E N V, I R O N M E N T A L
I n t e r n a t I a n a I, 1 n c
STANDARD FEATURES .
Stainless steel channel construction
Built-in level control weir with removable drain plug
-Stainless steel weatherproof modules
Remote modified NEMA enclosures with window
kits displaying lamp status and elapsed run time
-Low pressure high output (HO) or amalgam lamp
technology with 8,500 hour lamp life
4446 State Route 132 • Batavia, Ohio 45103 USA • Phone: [phone] • Fax: [phone] • Email: [e-mail]
www.tiptonenv.com

Inlet and Outlet Connection Options
DESIGN CO.NSID.E.RAT.IONS
When designing an Ultraviolet Disinfection system into
the overall wastewater treatment plant (WWTP), it is
required to connect to the inlet and from the outlet of
the UV system. The connection options are as follows:
Standard U-Channel pattern with bolt connection
(shown as our standard configuration) provides a square
connection and is typically used for bolt -on mount for
structural steel walls, concrete channels, or for custom
connections.
Transitions plates can be bolted to the U-Channel to
allow for pipe stub, threaded pipe or flanged pipe
connections.
Transition boxes can be bolted to the U-Channel
pattern. The boxes can have 150# flanges, flange
patterns, pipe stubs or threaded pipe connections. The
transition boxes are used to connect to piping where
high flows are expected or turbulent. The transition
boxes help to de -energize and baffle the wastewater to
create a more even flow.
Horizontal Channel TVDe Series
Flange Pattem Box
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
In order to meet the discharge permit, the system will
require maintenance. Lamps will need to be replaced every
8,500 hours. Due to the heat of the lamps and the harsh
nature of the wastewater, the quartz sleeves (the protective
material over the lamps) will also need to be cleaned. The
cleaning regime will be directly related to the pre-
treatment, the makeup of the wastewater and access to
personnel. Fouled quartz sleeves will prevent the UV light
from penetrating the wastewater and thus will reduce
system efficiency. An operator is required to remove the
modules and clean the quartz sleeves with a lime, calcium
or rust remover. This can be done on a work table or on a
cleaning rack.
REQUIRED INFORMATION FOR DESIGN
-Discharge permit
-Peak instantaneous flow rate
-Average flow rate
-No flow situations
-UV transmission % at 254 nm
-Total suspended solids (TSS)
-Biological oxygen demand (BOD)
-Installation location (indoor or outdoor)
-Pre-process description
Access to maintenance personnel
I MAXIMUM _
j . AMPS NO. OF
MODEL GPD GPM
( 120V 220V LAMPS 1
TEII-UV_-1S2 5,000 I 3.4
0.8 0.8 2-24"
1
I II-UV-2S2 y 15-00 10.40
�1 1
4 TEII-UV-1 M21 25,000 E 17
1.3 1.1 2-36"
�TEII-UV-2M2� 50,0001 34
TEII-UV-3M2 75,000 s 51
�2.� 1.1 4-36"
_ 1.7 6-36"—1
tTEII-UV-4M2
100,000 j 68
( 4.2 2.1
TE II-UV-5M2 125, 000 1 85�
_8-36"
5.3 2.66"-
�TEII-UV-6M2 150,000T, 102 i
6.3 3.4 12-36" 1
TEII-UV-4M41 200,000 j 139 I
7.4 1 4.3 1 16-36" il
TEII-UV-3L4 l 300,000 1 204
9 4.5 12-64"
TEII-UV-4L4 400,0001 272
- 12 - 6 16-64"
TEII-UV-5L4 500,000 1 340
15 7.5 20-64"
UV System Length (excluding inlet and outlet connection transitions)
-Type "S" Series — 24"
-Type "M" Series — 48"''
[ ype "L" Series —115" T I P T O N
E N V I R O N M E N T A L
1 n t e r n a t i a n a I, 1 n c.
Outlet End of UV System
with Fixed Weir and Drain Plug
4446 State Route 132 • Batavia, Ohio 45103 USA • Phone: [phone] • Fax: [phone] • Email: [e-mail]
www.tiptonenv.com

Endress + Hauser - Promag 1 OW'
Page 1 of 2
Endress + Hauser _ ='+,l
Promag IOW
Electromagnetic Flow Measuring System - Flow measurement of liquids in water or wastewater applications
Application
Electromagnetic flowmeter for bidirectional measurement of liquids with a minimum
conductivity of z 50 pS/cm:
■ Drinking water
■ Wastewater
■ Sewage sludge
■ Flow measurement up to 110,000 m'/h [697 Mgal/d]
■ Fluid temperature up to +80 °C [+176 °F]
■ Process pressures up to 40 bar [580 psi]
■ Lengths in accordance with DVGW/ISO
Application -specific lining materials:
■ Polyurethane and hard rubber
Lined measuring pipes with materials approved for drinking water:
■ KTW, WRAS, NSF, ACS, etc.
Your benefits
Promag measuring devices offer you cost-effective flow measurement with a high degree of accuracy for a wide range of process
conditions.
The uniform Proline transmitter concept comprises:
■ High degree of reliability and measuring stability
■ Uniform operating concept
The tried -and -tested Promag sensors offer:
Jo pressure loss
4ot sensitive to vibrations
■ Simple installation and commissioning
http://www.us.endress.com/eh/sc/america/us/enlproductslhome.nsflprintview/C 1256CB0002A507... 4/23%2007

� § - � ,,,� c � €7 ^� s•C^"� � -:: r- .f-n 3 � � _ � a � � �v,� � 3 ^' ,.,�� .., ��� � k',�� s +� r � �"4� �T'�` i� � �a"`°�z ^r-s+dv, a �-,- a y".".i r
�1e
CL
r e
252
n
USEPA Reporting
The 1720E Low Range'Turbidimeter applies the instrument
design and meets performance criteria established by the
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (USEPA) in Method
180.1, making it suitable for regulatory reporting.
Accuracy
Continuously flowing sample flows through the patented*
bubble removal system, which vents entrained air from
the sample stream and eliminates the most significant
interference in low level turbidity measurement. The
1720E Turbidimeter is not affected by variations in flow
and pressure.
Nephelometric Measurement
Incandescent light directed from the sensor head assembly
down into the turbidimeter body is scattered by suspended
particles in the sample. The sensor's submerged photocell
detects light scattered at 90' from the incident beam.
Sample enters the center column of the turbidimeter, rises
into the measuring chamber and spills over the weir into the
drain port. This configuration results in an optical flat surface
free of turbulence.
Simplicity
A simplified two -module design includes the sensor and
the controller interface. The controller accepts two turbidity
sensors —adding a second 1720E sensor makes a system
with two complete turbidimeters. Connections are simple
plug & play.
Data Collection and Display
The 1720E Turbidimeter uses the sc100 Controller to
receive data from up to two sensors. A built-in data
logger collects turbidity measurement at user selectable
intervals (1-15 minutes), along with calibration and
verification points, alarm history, and instrument setup
changes for 6 months. Communications using
MODBUS®/RS485, MODBUS®/RS232, LonWorksO
protocols or the wireless IR port are available. The sc100
Controller is also compatible with AquaTrend® Networks.
Local display, recall, graphing, and trending in CSV format
make chart recorders redundant.
Experience
The 1720E Turbidimeter reflects 45 years of Hach leadership
in turbidity measurement science. Hach has the largest
turbidimeter installation base in the world. And, Hach offers
a two-year warranty on the 1720E.
*U.S. patent 5,831,727
The Model 1720E Low Range Turbidimeter is the newest is
a long line of successful Hach turbidimeters—from the
unsurpassed world leader in turbidity measurement
Fast Calibration and Verification
Calibration and verification can be performed without loss of
sample flow using the ICE-PICT;^ Calibratio nNerification
Module. One -point calibration with prepared StabICalTM
Stabilized Formazin Solution eliminates the errors of
user -prepared formazin suspension dilution. Features of
the ICE-PIC Module include:
• Calibrate or verify the performance of each sensor
in less than one minute
• Factory calibrated and provided with a certificate
of accuracy.
• Cost effective, one-time investment. No consumables
are needed.
• Small, lightweight design can be used for spot verification
in the facility.
• Available in 20 and 1.0 NTU.
DW = drinking water WW wamtewFxter enunicipal PW = pure water / power
IW _, Industrial wat r E = environmental C = collectlans F8 = food and beverage

-0.
�n�ro �iit� s .
daA N 'T�Y
.Range
0.001-100 Nephelometric Turbidity
Inits (NTU)
iccuracy
(Defined according to ISO 15839.)
±2% of reading or ±0.015 NTU
(whichever is greater) from 0 to 40 NTU;
±5% of reading from 40 to 100 NTU
Displayed Resolution
0.0001 NTU up to 9.9999 NTU;
0.001 NTU from 10.000 to 99.999 NTU
Repeatability -
(Defined according to iSO 15839.)
Better than ±1.0% of reading or
±0.002 NTU, whichever is greater
Response Time
Initial response in 1 minute, 15 seconds
for a full-scale step change
Signal Average lime
User selectable from 6, 30, 60, 90
seconds; default 30 seconds
Sample Temperature
0 to 50°C (32 to 122°F)
Sample Flow Required
200 to 750 mUminute
(3.1 to 11.9 gal/hour)
Operating Temperature
Single sensor system:
0 to 50°C (32 to 122°F)
ro sensor system:
b 40°C (32 to 104°F)
Operating Humidity •
5 to 95 % non -condensing
Storage Temperature
-20 to 60°C (-4 to 140°F)
Power Requirements
100-230 Vac, 50/60 Hz,
auto selecting; 40 VA
Sample Inlet Fitting
1/4" NPT female, 1/4" compression
fitting (provided)
Drain Fitting
1/2" NPT female, 1/2" hose barb (provided)
Recorder Outputs
Two selectable for 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA;
output span programmable over any
portion of the 0-100 NTU range;
built into the sc100 Controller
Alarms
Three set -point alarms, each equipped
with an SPDT relay with unpowered
contacts rated 5A resistive load at
230 Vac; built into the sc100 Controller
Enclosure
NEMA-4X (indoor)/IP66 Controller
Digital Communication
Network card compatible;
MODBUS®/RS485, MODBUS/RS232,
LonWorkso protocol (optional)
Wireless Communication
IR Port on the sc100 Controller to
download into a handheld Personal
Digital Assistant (PDA), or laptop
computer via MODBUSO
Compliance
Standard Methods 213013, USEPA 180.1,
Hach Method 8195
Certifications
Safety:
Listed by ETL to UL 61010A-1: Certified
by ETL to CSA C22.2 No. 1010.1: CE
certified by Hach Company to EN
61010-1
Immunity:
CE certified by Hach Company to
EN61326 (industrial levels)
Emissions:
Class A: EN 61326, CISPR 11, FCC
Part 15, Canadian Interference -Causing
Equipment Regulation ICES-003
Mounting
Turbidimeter body and head assembly:
wall and floor stand
sc100 Controller:
wall, pole, panel, and floor stand
Dimensions
Turbidimeter body and cap:
25.4 x 30.5 x 40.6 cm (10 x 12 x 16 in.)
sc100 Controller:
14.4 X 14.4 X 15.0 cm
(5.67 x 5.67 x 5.91 in.)
Shipping Weight
1720E Turbidimeter and
sc100 Controller:
6.12 kg (13.5 lbs.)
1720E Turbidimeter:
4.54 kg (10 lbs.)
'Specifications subject to change without notice.
.sue e'°.?-'z> v.31..� .r �. w 7 ,��� ���°*`� +�'.,�' ^� .:.*`�°.„ r
Eng�neer�r�eci�icafions � � ;� � . �� �� � f � , K �
,._,.rres,,.t°..x.F..>a_°'�a'"S`„'r"�,=k•":a&¢`e,,, '•5:okd..+-._+M .°�a°
'EA
'R'
1. The turbidimeter shall be a
microprocessor -based, continuous -
reading, on-line nephelometrib'
instrument
2. The turbidity monitoring system shall
include one or two turbidimeter(s)
and one interface unit.
3. The turbidimeter shall measure turbidity
in the range of 0.001-100 NTU
4. Accuracy shall be ±2% of reading or
±0.015 NTU (whichever is greater)
from 0 to 40 NTU; ±5% of reading
from 40 to 100 NTU
5. Displayed resolution shall be 0.0001
NTU from 0 to 9.999 NTU and 0.001
NTU from 10.000 to 9.999 NTU.
6. Repeatability shall be better than
±1.0% of reading or ±0.002 NTU
(whichever is greater).
7. The turbidimeter shall meet all
design and performance criteria
specified by USEPA method 180.1.
Light shall be directed through the
surface of the sample and the
detector shall be immersed in the
sample, eliminating glass windows
and flow cells.
9. Optical components shall be mounted
in a sealed head assembly that can
tie removed for calibration/ service
without disturbing sample flow.
10. The turbidimeter body shall be
constructed of corrosion -resistant
polystyrene.
11. An internal bubble removal system
shall be included to vent entrained
air from the sample stream.
12. Calibration of the turbidimeter
shall be either formazin-based
(20 or 1 NTU) or instrument
comparison -based calibration method.
13. User selectable signal averaging,
bubble removal, alarm and recorder
output hold, and self -test
diagnostics shall be provided.
14. Connections between the
turbidimeter(s) and the controller
shall be "plug and play."
15. All turbidimeters installed on a
network shall have the option for
MODBUS/RS232, MODBUS/RS485,
LonWorks serial input/output
capability for two-way
communication to a computer or a
have a wireless downloading
capability through the IR Port
located on the interface unit to
download and print realtime turbidity
data, calibration history, and current
set points in a CSV format.
16. The Interface unit shall allow
operators to control sensor and
interface functions with menu -driven
software and shall provide data
logging of measurement data from
up to two turbidimeters for 15
minutes, 1 hour, 24 hours, 30 days,
or 180 days.
17. The interface unit shall be able to
transfer data to a computer or
printer via direct MODBUS
communications or directly into a
Personal Digital Assistant (PDA) via
a wireless IR Port.
18. The interface unit shall have a built-
in data logger with the capacity to
store data on 15-minute intervals for
up to 6 months with two sensors per
controller.
19. The interface unit shall include two
analog outputs and 3 unpowered
SPDT alarm contacts.

2 F,
20. The interface unit shall be housed in
a NEMA-4X (indoor) industrial
metal/plastic. enclosure.
21. The DC power supply shall be
housed in. the interface unit .
22. The DC power supply shall
automatically accept input in the
range of 100 to 230 Vac, 50/60 Hz.
[?�mensrc.
23. All system components shall be ETL
listed to UL 61010A-1, certified to
CSA C22.2 No. 1010.1, and CE
.certified by manufacturer to EN
61010-1.
24: All system components shall be CE
certified by the manufacturer to EN
61326 (industrial levels) for immunity
and emissions, Class A.
25. All, system components shall meet
FCC Part 15 for North America and
Canadian Interference -Causing
Equipment Regulation ICES-003,
and CISPR 11 Class A levels for rest
of the world.
26. The turbidimeter shall be Hach
Company Model 1720E Low Range
Turbidimeter with sc100 Controller.
The sc100 controller unit can be installed on a pole, wall, panel or a floor stand. The 1720E turbidimeter can be installed on a
wall or a floor stand. No tools are needed to connect the controller unit to the turbidimeter. The distance between the two units
can be a maximum of 9.62 m (31.6 ft) with.the use of.an extensioncable.
sc100 Controller
20. The interface unit shall be housed in
a NEMA-4X (indoor) industrial
metal/plastic. enclosure.
21. The DC power supply shall be
housed in. the interface unit .
22. The DC power supply shall
automatically accept input in the
range of 100 to 230 Vac, 50/60 Hz.
[?�mensrc.
23. All system components shall be ETL
listed to UL 61010A-1, certified to
CSA C22.2 No. 1010.1, and CE
.certified by manufacturer to EN
61010-1.
24: All system components shall be CE
certified by the manufacturer to EN
61326 (industrial levels) for immunity
and emissions, Class A.
25. All, system components shall meet
FCC Part 15 for North America and
Canadian Interference -Causing
Equipment Regulation ICES-003,
and CISPR 11 Class A levels for rest
of the world.
26. The turbidimeter shall be Hach
Company Model 1720E Low Range
Turbidimeter with sc100 Controller.
The sc100 controller unit can be installed on a pole, wall, panel or a floor stand. The 1720E turbidimeter can be installed on a
wall or a floor stand. No tools are needed to connect the controller unit to the turbidimeter. The distance between the two units
can be a maximum of 9.62 m (31.6 ft) with.the use of.an extensioncable.
sc100 Controller
I
O
I 40.14 mm
O' (1.58 inches)
y
O
E
`^T
6
T -
L V
O II
II
C r N
t�
80.27 mm
(3.16 inches)
II/
E
\I
40.14 mm (1.58 inches)
80.27 mm (3.16 inches) 4X
1720E Turbidimeter M6 X 1.0
312.48 mm (12.30inchesj---------------------
'-~- -----
Allow
wlat least
273.05 mm (10.75 inches- -y above
e t (1 instrument
inches)
above the instrument 238.35 mm (9.36 inches)
19.72 mm 157.00 mm for removal of
inches)-(6.18 inches) I the head assembly. 127.8 mm
is n :....�,.....
' 1720E Turbidimeter
® LOW
MNGE
F'%Yt
my;m
I 2 Slots for
0.25" fastener
Service Drain
0 1.00 I.D.
6W I 384.30 mm
Sample Inlet 05.13 inches)
172.4 mm (6.79 inches)

I? #Q Aw. 4420t
b -MANWOMW
.1720E Turbidimeter
'9101-00 1720E Turbidimeter with
sc100 Controller
D101-01 1720E Turbidimeter, sensor only
1720E with DigitalDirect
Communications
60101-02 1720E/sc100 with
MODBUS/RS485 output
60101-03 1720E/sc100 with
MODBUS/RS232 output
60101-04 1720E/sc100 with
LonWorks output
Cables
57960-00 Extension Cable, 7.7 m (25 ft.)
46306-00 Power Cord w/ strain relief,
125 Vac
46308-00 Power Cord w/ strain relief,
230 Vac, European -style plug
Note: Power cables must be ordered
separately.
Accessories
57432-00 Floor Stand
Calibration Supplies
ICE--PIC Calibration/Verification
Module / 1720E.
52250-00 20 NTU Module
52215-00 1 NTU Module
StablCal Comparative Calibration Standards
26601-53 20.0 NTU, 1 L each
(Calibration Cylinder,
P/N 44153-00, must be
ordered separately.)
StablCal Verification Standards
26979-53 0.3 NTU, 1 L each
26980-53 0.5 NTU, 1 L each
27233-53 0.1 NTU, 1 L each
26598-53 1.0 NTU, 1 L each
27463-53 40.0 NTU, 1 L each
Formazin Calibration Standards
44156-00 Formazin Calibration Kit for
user -prepared calibration
(includes 500 mL of 4000
NTU Formazin, TenSette®
Pipet, and calibration
cylinder)
2461-49 Formazin Primary Standard,
4000 NTU, 500 mL
(replacement for P/N 44156-00)
44153-00 Calibration Cylinder, 1 L
To complete your turbidity
'ieasurement system, choose
,.ne sc10or the sc1000 controller...
Model sc100 Controller
(see Lit. #2463)
LXV401.52.00002 sc100 Controller Standard
LXV401.52.01002 sc100 Controller with RS-232 MODBUSO
LXV401.52.02002 sc100 Controller with RS-485 MODBUSO
LXV402.99.00002
LXV400.99.1 R572
sc1000 Display Module
sc1000 Probe Module, 4 sensors,
4 mA Out, 4 mA In, 4 Relays, 110-230V
sc1000 Probe Module, 4 sensors,
4 mA Out, 4 mA In, 4 Relays,
RS-485 (MODBUS), 110-230V
sc1000 Probe Module, 4 sensors,
4 mA Out, 4 mA In, 4 Relays,
PROFIBUS DP, 110-230V
sc1000 Probe Module, 6 sensors,
4 mA Out, 4 mA In, 4 Relays, 110-230V
Lit. No. 2457
-- Printed in U.S.A.
ch Company, 2005. All rights reserved.
interest of improving and updating its equipment, Hach Company reserves the right to alter specifications to equipment at any time.
-w►itiw.hach-Lange. com ""

Hach - 1720E Low Range Process Turbidimeter and se 100 Controller
Page 1 of 1
View Order 0 item(s), Total:
Username Password .
Register i Reminder
........ _.. .... .. .. -
�� 1
You are here: Browse by Industry/Application > 1720E Low Rancie Process Turbidimeter ar
Controller > Detailed Description
» Catalog Request
» Join Hach Email List
» Advanced Search
>> Search Tips
1720E Low Range Process Turbidimeter and sc
"UM
ControlleLIL r
» Product Category
» Industry / Application
Detailed Description
» Product Brand
>> Parameter
Continuously -flowing sample enters the turbidimeter body and flows through a patented bubbl
system, which vents entrained air from the sample stream. After traveling through the bubble
system, sample enters the center column of the turbidimeter, rises into the measuring chamb(
INFORMATION CENTRAL
spills over the weir into the drain port. Turbidity is measured by directing an incandescent ligh
» Download Documentation
sensor head assembly down into the sample in the turbidimeter body. Light scattered at 900 b
» Learning Library
suspended particles in the sample is detected by the sensor's submerged photocell. The amour
» Industry Links
scattered is proportional to the amount of turbidity in the sample.
�' SUPPORT
» Knowledge Base
» Customer Support
» Product Support MAIN PRODUCT PAGE
Global Distributor Directory
Technical Training » 1720E Low Range Process Turbidimeter and sc100 Controller with Lon Works output
» 1720E Low Range Process Turbidimeter and sc100 Controller with MODBUS RS232 output
> TOOLS » 1720E Low Range Process Turbidimeter and sc100 Controller with MODBUS RS485 output
» Express Order Entry >> 1720E Low Range Process Turbidimeter and sc100 Controller
» MSDS Download » 1720E Low Range Process Turbidimeter Sensor Only
» Certificate of Analysis
WHAT'S NEW
G
CORPORATE o to top
» About Hach
» Event Calendar Home I Info Central I Support I Tools I What's_ New I Corporate Contact. Us
» Career Opportunities
>> Policies ©Copyright 2006 Hach Company
CONTACT US
Hach Company
PO Box 389
Loveland, CO 80539
800-227-4224
970-669-3050
http://www.hach. com/he/view. document. invokerNendorProductCode=6010100Niew=HTMLCA... 3/20/2007

Hach - 1720E Low Range Process Turbidimeter and se 100 Controller
Page 1 of 3
View Order 0 item(s), Total:
Password: ,
Reminder :.. _.
S,�}x�• y ,EgY° ;E>,�t'.N� sw`a''.k€ p'iL .Tl."�ME k xSf r.¢`f_.'e' e e� _ >.a«...w,. tLi_::�,„s4��.... ,..._..,"�,_;,.�6_<3L , "4,1' 't«4� .�Y �C`^, "'°` .> tL
You are Isere: Browse by Indust�JA lication > 1720E Low Range Process Tur6idimeter ar
- --- —...... ---- Controller > Specifications
>> Catalog Request
Join Hach Email List
>> Advanced Search .1720 L Range Process Turbidimeter and sC
Search Tips
)etController
a
Product Category
>> Industry / Application Specifications
>> Product Brand
Parameter
1720E Process Turbidimeter:
A INFORMATION CENTRAL
Specifications
>> Download Documentation
Learning Library
Industry Links
Range:
0 to 100 nephelometric turbidity units (NTU)
Accuracy:
(Defined According to ISO 15389)
SUPPORT
Knowledge Base
>> Customer Support
f 2% of reading or f 0.015 NTU
Product Support
(whichever is greater) from 0 to 40 NTU;
Global Distributor Directory
Technical Training
t 5% of reading from 40 to 100 NTU
�' TOOLS
>> Express Order Entry
f 5% of reading from 40 to 100 NTU
MSDS Download
>> Certificate of Analysis
Displayed
0.0001 NTU up to 9.9999 NTU;.
Resolution:
WHAT'S NEW
0.001 NTU from 10.000 to 99.999 NTU
CORPORATE
Repeatability:
(Defined According to ISO 15389)
About Hach
>> Event Calendar
Career Opportunities
Better than f 1.0% of reading or
>> Policies
f 0.002 NTU, whichever is greater
.�' CONTACT US
Hach Company
PO Box 389
Loveland, CO 80539
800-227-4224 Response Time: Initial response in 1 minute, 15 seconds for a full scale step
970-669-3050 change
Signal Average
Time: User selectable from 6, 30, 60, 90 seconds; default 30 seconds
http ://w.ww.hach. com/he/view. document. invokerNendorProductCode=6010100Niew=HTMLCA... 3/20/2007

Hach - 1720E Low Range Process Turbidimeter and sc100 Controller
Page 2 of 3
Sample Flow
200 to 750 mL/minute
Required:
(3.1 to 11.9 gal/hour)
Storage
-20 to 600 C
Temperature:
(.-4 to 1400 F)
Operating
0 to 50' C for Single Sensor System
Temperature:
(32 to 1220 F)
0 to 40' C for Two Sensor System
(32 to 1040 F)
Operating
5 to 95% non -condensing
Humidity:
Sample
0 to 500 C
Temperature:
(32 to 1220 F)
Recorder Outputs:
Two selectable for 0-20 mA or 4-20 MA;
output span programmable over any portion of the 0 to 100
NTU range; built into the sc100 Controller
Alarms:
Two set -point alarms, each equipped with an SPDT relay with
unpowered contacts rated for 5A resistive load at 230 Vac;
built into the sc100 Controller
Power
100-230 Vac, 50/60 Hz, auto selecting; 40 VA
Requirements:
Sample Inlet 1/4" NPT female, 1/4" compression fitting (provided)
Fitting:
Drain Fitting: 1/2" NPT female, 1/2" hose barb (provided)
Digital Network Card compatible;
MODBUS RS/485, MODBUS/RS232, LonWorks protocol
Communication: (optional)
IR Port on the sc100 Controller to download into a handheld
Personal Digital Assistant (PDA), or laptop computer via
MODBUS
Wireless
Communication:
Dimensions: Turbidimeter Body and Cap:
25.4 x 30.5 x 40.6 cm (10 x 12 x 16")
sc100 Controller:
14.4x14.4x15.0cm(5.67x5.67x5.9111)
Mounting: Turbidimeter Body and Head Assembly:
wall and floor stand
sc100 Controller:
wall, pole, panel, and floor stand
Enclosures: NEMA-4X (indoor) /IP66 Controller
Compliance: Standard Methods 2130B, USEPA 180.1, Hach Method 8195
http://www.hach. com/hc/view.document.invokerNendorProductCode=6010100/View=HTMLCA... 3/20/2007

Hach - 1720E Low Range Process Turbidimeter and se100 Controller Page 3 of 3
Certification Listed by ETL to UL 61010A-1: Certified by ETL to CSA C22.2
No. 1010.1: CE certified by Hach Company to EN 61010-1
Safety:
Certified by ETL to CSA C22.2 No. 1010.1
Immunity: CE Certified by Hach Company to EN61326 (industrial levels)
Emissions: Class A: EN 61326, CISPR 11, FCC Part 15, Canadian
Interference -Causing Equipment Regulation ICES-003
Specifications subject to change.
MAIN PRODUCT PAGE
1720E Low Range Process Turbidimeter and sc100 Controller
1720E Low Range Process Turbidimeter and sc100 Controller with MODBUS RS485 output
1720E Low Range Process Turbidimeter and sc100 Controller with MODBUS RS232 output
» 1720E Low Range Process TUrbidimeter and sc100 Controller with Lon Works output
1720E Low Range Process Turbidimeter Sensor Only
Go to top
Home I Info Central I Support j Tools I What's New I Corporate I Contact Us
© Copyright 2006 Hach Company
http://www.hach. com/he/view.document.invokerNendorProductCode=6010100Niew=HTMLCA... 3/20/2007

Hach - 1720E Low Range Process Turbidimeter and sc100 Controller Page 1 of 1
View Order 0 item(s), Total:
Username: Password:1i
Register _ ......... Reminder ........
- --^.;�
n
You are here. Browse by Industry placation > 1720E Low Range Process Turbidimeter a
--- -
Controller > Overview
» Catalog Request
» Join Hach Email List
» Advanced Search
» Search Tips
1720E Low Range Process Turbidimeter er and sc
��' f :R
Controller
�...��
» Product Category
Overview
» Industry / Application
» Product Brand
» Parameter
The 1720E Low Range Process Turbidimeter provides the sensitivity,
stability and flexibility necessary to continuously track the low levels of
turbidity found in high -quality filtered water. Equipped with the new ` n
INFORMATION.CENTRAL
dual -input digital sc100 controller, the 1720E is easy to calibrate and
Download Documentation
operate, and requires very little maintenance. With an optional network
» LearningLibrary y
card the 1720E communicates via Lonworks directly with existing"
» Industry Links
1720D AquaTrend systems. A basic system consists of one sc100
Controller and one 1720E Turbidity sensor. The addition of a second
SUPPORT
1720E turbidity sensor gives you two complete turbidimeters.
» Knowledge Base'
» Customer Support
» Product Support
Global Distributor Directory
Technical Training
TOOLS
» Express Order Entry
» MSDS Download
» Certificate of Analysis
MAIN PRODUCT PAGE
a WHAT'S NEW
» 1720E Low Range Process Turbidimeter and sc100 Controller
>> 1720E Low Range Process Turbidimeter and sc100 Controller with MODBUS RS485 output
CORPORATE
» 1720E Low Range Process Turbidimeter and sc100 Controller with MODBUS RS232 output
» About Hach
» 1720E Low Range Process Turbidimeter and-sc100 Controller with Lon Works output
» Event Calendar
» 1720E Low Range Process Turbidimeter Sensor Only
» Career Opportunities
» Policies
CONTACT US
.i Go to top
Hach Company
PO Box 389
Home I Info Central I Support I Tools I What's New I Corporate I Contact Us
Loveland, CO 80539
© Copyright 2006 Hach Company
800-227-4224
970-669-3050
http://www.hach.com/he/view.document.invoker/eendorProductCode=601010ONiew=HTMLCA... 3/20/2007

here's nothing more embarrassing —or more
wasteful or costly —than an irrigation system
that runs when it doesn't have to ... in the rain.
Mini-Clik° provides the simplest, most effective way
to prevent sprinklers from coming on during or after
precipitation. It easily installs on any automatic irrigation
system, then shuts sprinklers off in a storm and keeps
them off, automatically compensating for the amount
of rainfall that occurred. Disks absorb water and expand
proportionally to the amount of rain that fell (e.g., a
small cloudburst would result in little absorption, a
6" thunderstorm would lead to more absorption and
expansion). As the moisture -laden disks expand, they
eventually activate a switch that interrupts the circuit from
the controller to the valves. Once dry, they contract and
release the switch.Thus, Mini-Clik O V
automatically resets without ever
affecting your controller. There's no WATER
better way to ensure that a system ,i s
isn't watering when it isn't necessary. 5
Easily installs on any automatic
irrigation system
Versatile enough to work with all
tt popular controllers
Patented mechanism cannot be fouled
by dirt or debris
Reliable operation, no false shutdowns
Adjusts to actuate at various
rainfall quantities
Set from %° to 1' based upon your
local conditions
Includes 25 feet of 20 gauge two
conductor wire
Fast and easy mounting out of sight
5-year warranty
Your guarantee of dependable operation

Models
MINI-CLIK— standard Mini-Clik model
MINI-CLIK-HV — code approved for liquid tight electrical
fittings for 120 or 240 volt wiring applications
MINI-CLIK-C — Yz" female threaded inlet at bottom
MINI-CLIK-NO — normally open switch
MI NI-CLIK-C-NO —1/2" female threaded inlet at bottom,
normally open switch
Dimensions
Height:5 inches
• Length: MINI-CLIK: 6 inches
MINI-CLIK-HV:71/z inches
Operating Specifications
Switch Rating: 5 amps, at 125/250VAC (MINI-CLIK
and MINI-CLIK-C)
• Wiring:MINI-CLIK and MINI-CLIK-C: Typically
interrupts the common ground wire between the
solenoid valves and the controller
MINI-CLIK-HV: For use with high voltage irrigation
systems, and systems using pumps drawing less
than 10 amps peak
MINI-CLIK-NO: for use with controllers that require
a normally open sensor switch
• Included: 25 ft. of #20 two conductor wire, two
mounting screws, controller identification label,
and detailed instructions
Bypass Switch Box: Give Any Automatic Controller's Remote
Sensors the Capability to Bypass
lt's the easy way to put a system in the manual
mode as would be needed during servicing and
troubleshooting operations. Featuring a compact,
heavy-duty switch mechanism, the Bypass Switch
Box mounts quickly and easily with its no -strip
wire connectors and supplied adhesive tape.
SPEClF1Gtk71CiN;GtlIDE'`„:"
EXAMPLE: MINI-CLIK - HV
T
MODEL 'OPTIONS
:MINI-CLIK HV=High Voltage Model for 1106OVAC Applications
C = Conduit Mount
'NO = Normally Open Switch `
Note: For Mini-Clik° in Sensor Guard enclosure, specify SG -MC_'.. -
To add Bypass Switch Box to any non-Hunter.cantraller ,
installation, specify BPSW with sensoc:Bypass switch'funcfion; ,
is standard in all Hunter controllers.
Hunter Industries Incorporated • The Irrigation Innovators
1940 Diamond Street • San Marcos, California 92078 • TEL: [phone] • FAX: [phone] ®2006 Hunter Industries Incorporated
www.Hunterindustdes.com P/N700592 LIT-277 3106

� r! i �, �. ,,?i •'�.: !y N.
fy'
magine going to bed while the temperature is mild,
then having your automatic irrigation system go
on as usual while a freeze set in overnight... and you
arise to see a landscape frozen over, with ice on adjoining
driveways, sidewalks, and even roadways a real possibility.
In some areas, where temperature swings like this are all
too common, the results are not only hazardous to the
life of your lawn and plants, it can also be hazardous to
those who may walk or drive nearby. With the Hunter
Freeze-Clik
Freeze-Clik you can prevent irrigation systems from
activating by automatically stopping the flow of water
when the outdoor temperature drops to a near freezing
level. When the temperature rises above that set point,
Freeze-Cl Ik simply resets your system to its regular cycle.
Easy to mount, easy to use, Freeze-Clik can also be used
in conjunction with other weather sensing devices to
guarantee the optimum effectiveness of a landscape
irrigation system in virtually all types of weather.
Installs simply and easil
No adjustment necessary
Double -epoxy sealed sensing element
Aids the accuracy of temperature sensing
Can be used in conjunction with other sensors
Enhances the overall automation of irrigation systems
5-year warranty
Your guarantee of dependable operation

Models
FREEZE-CLIK — Freeze-Clik Freeze Sensor
FREEZE-CLIK-REV — Freeze-Clik Freeze Sensor with
reverse switching
Dimensions
• Length: 41/z inches
Specifications,
Temperature set point: 3°C+/-2°C (37°F)
Temperature differential: +/-1 °C
• Electrical rating: 24VAC 6 amps
UL listing: Class II Low Voltage (24 volt use only)
Switching: Closed -above 3 ° C; Open -below 3 °C
(Reverse switching model)
• Included: 25 feet of #20 two conductor wire, two
mounting screws and detailed instructions
UL listed
Special Usage Note: For landscape applications only.
Not for crop protection. A freeze sensor should only be
used as part of a sound irrigation system management
program, including regular system visual checks.
Bypass Switch Box: Give
ftab
Any Automatic Controller's
`!
Remote Sensors the
=1
Capability to Bypass
P Y YP
lrtt
3F i
,
It's the easy way to put a system
in the manual mode as would
be needed during servicing and
`M ` - ,-
I
troubleshooting operations. Featur-
ing a compact, heavy-dutyswitch
mechanism, the Bypass Switch Box
mounts quickly and easily with.its no-. .
strip wire connectors and supplied
adhesive tape.
S1PLWT1CAT4U'`N GUIGUIDE
EXAMPLE: FREEZE-CLIK - REV
T
MODEL OPTION
FREEZE-CLIK REV=Reverse Switching
Note: To add Bypass Switch Box to any non -Hunter controller
installation, specify BPSW with sensor. Bypass switch function
is standard in all Hunter controllers.
Hunter Industries Incorporated •The Irrigation Innovators
1940 Diamond Street • San Marcos, California 92078 • TEL: [phone] • FAX: [phone] 02005 Hunter Industries Incorporated
www.Hunterindustries.com LIT-2e0 11/05

l_: PHASE1.1 WASTEWATER SYSTEM
SAN. TEETLAH
S:_. I..D E_
LAKE..
IBEX THUNDERBI
RD L L Cl.
GRAHAM COUNTY, NORTH CAROLINA
SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS
G1 ... COVER SHEET
G2 ... PROJECT LOCATION MAP, LEGEND AND NOTES
G3 HYDRAULIC PROFILE
Cl ... OVERALL SITE PLAN
C2 ... CONTROLS/FILTER BUILDING PLAN
MAR J Z007 C3 ... FLOW EQUALIZATION AND PRIMARY SETTLING TANK DETAILS
C4 ... BIOCLERE UNITS DETAILS
C5 ... SAND FILTER AND UV SYSTEM DETAILS
CO ... FILTER DOSING TANK AND DRIP SYSTEM HYDRAULIC UNITS DETAILS
� a� /��i, L L� ,�+, �U U Jl� ,�1;� C7 ... DRIP SYSTEM DOSING TANK AND EFFLUENT STORAGE DETAILS
!r L�� DS1 .. DRIP FIELD LAYOUT
FINAL DESIGN
NOT RELEASED FOR CON'-zT C DS2 .. DRIP FIELD TYPICAL ZONE AND VALVE DETAILS
c' D1 ... MISCELLANEOUS DETAILS
a'
ELECTRICAL
SEAL
Z541 E1 ... SITE PLAN
cGill'0 E2 ... ELECTRICAL PLAN FOR CONTROUFILTER BUILDING
ASSOCIATES
• E3 ... GENERATOR AND BIOCLERE CONNECTION DETAILS
ENGINEERING -PLANNING -FINANCE
55 BROAD STREET ASHEVILLE, NC PH. [phone] MARCH, 2007 E4 ... PUMP STATION AND SERVICE POLE DETAILS

GENERAL CONSTRUCTION NOTES
1. FINISH GRADE TOLERANCES SHALL BE AS NOTED IN THE SPECIFICATIONS. THE ENGINEER MAY
MAKE GRADE CHANCES AS REQUIRED IN THE FIELD WITHOUT EFFECTING THE UNIT BID PRICE
FOR UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION.
2. UNLESS OTHERWISE STATED, ALL FILL AREAS SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED W LAYERS OF 8' MAXIMUM
THICKNESS. WITH WATER ADDED OR SOIL CONDITIONED TO THE OPTIMUM MOISTURE CONTENT AS
DETERMINED BY THE ENGINEER AND COMPACTED WITH A SHEEP'S FOOT ROLLER TO A COMPACTION
EQUAL TO OR GREATER THAN B5X (100R W THE TOP 2' OF THE SUB GRADE BELOW ROADWAYS AND
PARKING LOTS) OF THE DENSITY 09 AWED BY COMPACTING A SAMPLE OF THE MATERIAL IN
ACCORDANCE WITH THE STANDARD PROCTOR METHOD OF MOISTURE -DENSITY RELATIONSHIP TEST,
ASTM 0688 OR AASHTO-BB UNLE55 3PEQFIEO IN OTHER SPECIFICATIONS,
3. ENTIRE AREA TO BE GOADED SHALL BE CLEARED AND GRUBBED. NO FILL SHALL BE PLACED ON
ANY AREA NOT CLEARED AND GRUBBED.
4. ALL SOIL EROSION CONTROL MEASURES REWIRED BY THE GRADING PLAN SHALL BE PERFORMED
PRIOfl 10 GRADING, CLEARING OR GRUBBING. ALL EROSION CONTROL DEVICES SUCH AS SILT
FENCES, ETC.. SHALL BE MAINTAINED IN WORKABLE CONDITION FOR THE LIFE OF THE PROJECT
AND SHAM BE REMOVED AT THE COMPLETION OF THE PROJECT ONLY ON THE ENGINEER'S
APPROVAL PAYMENT SHALL BE CONSIDERED INCIDENTAL TO CLEARING AND GRUBBING. IF DURING
THE LIFE OF THE PRCJECT, A STORM CAUSES SOIL EROSION WHICH CHANGES FINISH GRAGES OR
CREATES 'GULLIES' AND 'WASHED AREAY, THESE SHALL BE REPAIRED AT NO EXTRA COST. AND
ALL SILT WASHED OFF OF THE PROJECT SITE ONTO ADJACENT PROPERTY SHALL BE'R04OVED AS
DIRECTED BY THE ENGINEER AT NO EXTRA COST. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ADHERE TO ANY
APPROVED EROSION CONTROL PLANS WHETHER INDICATED IN THE CONSTRUCTION PLANS OR UNDER
SEPARATE COVER.
5. DISPOSABLE MATERIAL
A. CLEARING AND GRUBBING WASTES SHALL BE REMOVED FROM THE SITE AND PROPERLY
DISPOSED OF BY THE CONTRACTOR AT HIS EXPENSE, UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE.
B. SOLID WASTES TO BE REMOVED. SUCH AS SIDEWALKS, CURBS, PAVEMENT, ETC.. MAY BE
PLACED IN SPECIFIC DISPOSAL AREAS DELINEATED ON THE PLANS OR REMOVED FROM THE
SITE AS REQUIRED BY THE SPECIFICATIONS. THIS MATERIAL SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM COVER
OF 2'. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL MAINTAIN SPECIFIED COMPACTION REQUIREMENTS IN THESE
AREAS. WHEN DISPOSAL SITES ARE NOT PROVIDED, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL REMOVE THIS
WASTE FROM THE SITE AND PROPERLY DISPOSE OF IT AT HIS EXPENSE,
C. ABANDONED UTILITIES SUCH AS CULVERTS, WATER PIPE, HYDRANTS, CASTINGS, PIPE
APPURTENANCES, UTILITY POLES, ETC ..
SMALL BE THE PROPERTY OF THE SPECIFIC UTILITY
AGENCY, OR COMPANY HAVING JURISDICTION. BEFORE THE CONTRACTOR CAN REMOVE,
DESTROY, SALVAGE, REUSE, SELL OR STORE FOR HIS OWN USE ANY ABANDONED UTILITY,
HE MUST PRESENT TO THE OWNER WRITTEN PERMISSION FROM THE UTILITY INVOLVED.
D. ON SITE BURNING IS AN ACCEPTABLE METHOD OF -DISPOSING OF FLAMMABLE WASTES. WHEN
BURNING IS ANTICIPATED, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR OBTAINING ALL
NECESSARY PERMITS AND MEETING GOVERNING CODES. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY
THE ENGINEER OR HIS REPRESENTATIVE AS TO THE SPECIFIC LOCATION OF BURNING
AFTER BURNING IS COMPLETED, PURE ASH NAY BE DISPOSED OF BY MIXING WITH FILL
DIRT. ALL MATERIAL NOT TOTALLY BURNED SHALL BE DISPOSED OF AS SPECIFIED IN 'B'
ABOVE. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOT HOLD UP WORK PROGRESS FOR THE PURPOSE OF
WAITINO FOR A 'BURNING DAY.
6. IN THE EVENT EXCESSIVE GROUNDWATER OR SPRINGS ARE ENCOUNTERED WITHIN THE UNITS OF
CONSTRUCTION, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL NECESSARY UNDER DRAINS AND STONE
AS DIRECTED BY THE ENGINEER ALL WORK SHALL BE PAID'BASED UPON UNIT BIDS,
UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE,
7. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR THE COORDINATION OF ADJUSTMENT OF ALL UTILITY
SURFACE ACCESSES WHETHER HE PERFORMS THE WORK OR A UTILITY COMPANY PERFORMS THE WORK.
6. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL CONTROL ALL 'DUST- BY PERIODIC WATERING AND SHALL PROVIDE ACCESS
AT ALL TIMES FOR PROPERTY OWNERS WITHIN THE PROJECT AREA AND FOR EMERGENCY VEHICLES.
ALL OPEN DITCHES AND HAZARDOUS AREAS SHALL BE CLEARLY MARKED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE
SPECIFICATIONS.
B. ALL AREAS WHERE THERE IS EXPOSED DIRT SHALL BE SEEDED, FER70JZED AND MULCHED
ACCORDING TO THE SPECIFICATIONS. TIME FINISHED SURFACE SHALL BE TO GRADE AND SMOOTH,
FREE OF ALL ROCKS RI LARGER THAN 3'. EQUIPMENT TRACKS, DIRT CLODS, SUMPS.DGES AND
GOUGES PRIOR TO SEEDING; THE SURFACE SHALL BE LOOSENED TO A DEPTH OF 14'-6' TO
ACCEPT SEED. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOT PROCEED WITH SEEDING OPERATIONS WITHOUT FIRST
OBTAINING THE ENGINEER'S APPROVAL OF THE GRADED SURFACE. ALL SEEDING SHALL BE
I PERFORMED BY A MECHANICAL 'HYDRO -SEEDER'. 14AKD 59EDINO SHALL BE AUTHORIZED ON AN AREA
BY AREA APPROVAL BY THE ENGNEER
10. WHERE SPECIFIED, STORM DRAIN PIPE SHALL BE CORRUGATED METAL PIPE (CUP) CONFORMING TO
AASHTO M-36. WITH REROLLED ENDS TO ACCOMMODATE CORRUGATED COUPUN BANDS. 18" PINE
SHALL BE 16 GAUGE, 24' AND 30' PIPE SHALL BE 14 GAUGE AND 36' PIPE AND OVER SHALL BE
12 GAUGE AS SPECIFIED ON THE PLANS, PIPE AND COUPLING BANDS SHALL CONFORM TO NCDOT 1032-3 FOR
PION PIPE OR 1D32-4 (A) FOR BITUMINOUS COATED AND PARTIALLY PAVED PIPE, DIMPLE BANDS SHALL NOT
BE USED.
WHERE SPECIFIED, STORM DRAIN PIPE SHALL BE REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE (RCP) CONFORMING TO
AASHTO M-170, AS CONTAINED IN NCOOT STANDARD SPECIFICATION 1032-6 FOR WALL 'B" TYPE.
WHERE SPECIFIED, ALL STORM DRAIN PIPE SHALL BE HIGH DENSITY POLYETHELENE (HOPE). SMOOTH
WALL INTERIOR, WITH WATER TIGHT JOINTS, BACKFILLED WITH B 37 WASHED STONE UP TO MIN, 8' OVER
THE TOP OF THE PIPE. HOPE PIPE USED FOR STORM DRAINAGE DETENTION SYSTEMS SHALL BE
RANCOR BLUE SEAL' OR APPROVED EQUAL
ALL CORRUGATED METAL STORM DRAIN PIPE (CMP) SHALL BE ALUMINIZED TYPE 2 CORRUGATED STEEL
MANUFACTURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF AASHTO M-36. THE PIPE SHALL BE
MANUFACTURED FROM ALUMINIZED STEEL TYPE 2 MATERIAL CONFORMING TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF
AASHTO M-274. ALL PIPE SHALL BE FURNISHED WITH REROLLED ENDS AND SMALL BE JOINED 'VAIN
HUGGER BANDS. THE USE OF DIMPLE BANDS WILL NOT BE ALLOWED. PIPE THROUGH 24' DIAMETER
SHALL BE 16 GAUGE, PIPE THROUGH 4Y DIAMETER SHALL BE 14 GAUGE. PIPE THROUGH Se DIAMETER
SHALL BE 12 GAUGE.
11. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY ALL ELEVATIONS BEFORE INSTALLATION OF FACILITIES.
12. CATCH BASINS CAST -IN -PLACE SHALL CONFORM TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF NCOOT STANDARD
SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROADS AND STRUCTURES (LATEST EDITION) ARTICLES 840-1 THROUGH 840-3.
CURB INLET CATCH BASIN SHALL CONFORM TO NCDOT STANDARD DETAILS 840.02
THROUGH 840.04, DROP INLETS SHALL CONFORM TO STANDARD DETAIL 840.14. JUNCTION
BOXES SHALL CONFORM TO STANDARD DETAIL 840,31.
13. CURB INLET FRAME, GRATE AND HOOD SHALL BE NEENAH R-3233D, PRODUCTS BY DEWEY BROS.,
U.S. FOUNDRY OR EQUAL DROP INLET FRAME AND ORATE SHALL BE NEENAH R-3339A OR EQUAL
FIELD INLET COVER SHALL CONFORM TO NCDOT STANDARD DETAIL 840.04, OPENING FACING UPSTREAM.
14, CONCRETE AND MASONRY SHALL MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF APPROPRIATE SECTION OF NCDOT
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND STRUCTURES (LATEST EDITION . CONCRETE SHALL
BE CLASS A OR B, 4000 PSI MINIMUM, MEETING THE REQUIREMENTS OF CTION 1000. CONSTRUCTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 825. MASONRY SHALL MEET THE REQUIREMENTS
OF
SECTION 1040, CONSTRUCTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 830 AND/OR 834.
15. TOPS OF PROPOSED FRAMES AND GRATES SHALL BE FLUSH WAIN FINISHED GRADE.
16. TINDALL PRE CAST CONCRETE BOXES ARE ACCEPTABLE ALTERNATIVES FOR PROPOSED CATCH BASINS.
RECLAIMED WATER FACILITY NOTES
i
1. ALL RECLAIMED WATER VALVES AND OUTLETS TAGGED WITH A WARNING LABEL
WITH THE FOLLOWING WORDING; "CAUTION: RECLAIMED WATER - DO NOT DRINK.
AVOID CONTACT.
2. ALL EXPOSED RECLAIMED WATER PIPING AND APPURTENANCES PAINTED PURPLE.
3. ALL BURIED RECLAIMED WATER LINES INSTALLED WITH PURPLE IDENTIFICATION
TAPE. THE IDENTIFICATION TAPE AT LEAST 3-INCHES WIDE WITH WHITE OR
BLACK LETTERING STATING; "CAUTION: RECLAIMED WATER - DO NOT DRINK.`
IDENTIFICATION TAPE INSTALLED ON TOP OF REUSE WATER PIPELINES, FASTENED
AT LEAST EVERY 10 FEET TO EACH PIPE LENGTH AND RUNS, CONTINUOUSLY
THE ENTIRE LENGTH OF THE PIPE.
0
LEGEND -EXISTING CONDITIONS �`�M °wG¢. TEN SEE q• RIM? wQ
R-P.. TELEPHONE PEDESTAL $E� z'
OMEG PCP. ELECTRIC PEDESTAL \� Hy •, " ' • • �p� ~
{LAW SIGN �Q4' YELLOW CREEK
oux UNDERGROUND CABLE TV SIGN �W4 �,�'/ 28 .�,
{Tug FOP UNDERGROUND FIBER OPTIC CABLE SIGN 'z,
jw m UNDERGROUND TELEPHONE CABLE SIGN
J. G.I UNDERGROUND GAS LINE SIGN Z � �F,� JJ 0 R, � COON 14 Ca� A OuQ 0 Lr U
{Vo "CC UNDERGROUND ELECTRIC SIGN W V GQ' DpK SANTEETLAH Cf z
a�q INTERSTATE HIGHWAY gP + P' O C,'
I6 U.S, HIGHWAYCONCDE W 6� E�PyO 5� a
TE MONUMENT
®o._R/N RIGHT-OF-WAY
MONUMENT ~ G Q" �' T,
W. MAILBOX OR PAPER BOX �rTi� o EAST w Sf, U
PFC POSTAL DROP BOX vI
Yy cR r z
•� LAKE
STREET LIGHT rely
SANTEETLAN
,L UI LIGHT POLE 0 �•{� EEC C UN� Ly
Opp UTILITY POLE �yT6EE �E� , ;.. S E �ST 9 C CR CO W IP,G�i'
F- GUY WIRE ANCHOR L9y C4 _
+uw MONITORING 1YELL P JECT C 143 FRANKS C.R. Z Q
OPx PIEZOMETER
OP„ MANHOLE OCATION ROBBIN LLE z
O°a JUNCTION BOX 0 T TG� ® F°� (� 'O
OG0. SEWER CLEAN -OUT W G 0'O � N e W
0... ELECTRIC SERVICE sus -our NpOPER .Ir�� o y. 4 19
0.. GAS SERVICE STUB -OUT y
CREEK
®® CATCH BASIN DA4L
O+.N WATER METER
ETRI FIRE HYDRANT _ ��°•, (DM
W. DATER VALVE PROJECT LOCATION MAP NOT TO SCALE
pa c/v. TER
GAS VALVE ON»:.^ ••: f.T�`�`
wIa IRRIGATION CONTROL VALVE
D°BV POST INDICATOR VALVE
Z
E Ctrs ELECTRIC CABINET
13 EJUNC ELECTRIC JUNCTION BOX OR OUTLET I--•
caRAvs E,IRANS- ELECTRIC TRANSFORMER FLU
e IRON PIPE/PIN FOUND (PROPERTY CORNER) � NORTH CAROLINA LAND QUALITY SECTION =>
LIJ° PK NAIL FOUND H
o°C"/NL CONTROL PAINT/NAIL SET EROSION CONTROL NOTES Z Z . J
_ _= CULVERT GENERAL: ALL EROSION CONTROL MEASURES ARE TO BE PERFORMED IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH REQUIREMENTS OF THE U 0 ' A J
+-+- FENCE NORTH CAROLINA DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENT AND NATURAL RESOURCES• DIVISION OF LAND RESOURCES, LAND W V,
WARD RAIL QUALITY SECTION. THE FOLLOWING CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE SHALL BE COMPLIED WITH FOR ALL WORK. O (n 0
-----.-----+__--- _ EXISTING SEE LOCATION OF 1. - PRIOR TO BEGINNING WORK ON THE PROJECT THE CONTRACTOR SHALL OBTAIN FROM THE OWNER A COPY OF THE J O }
' EXISTING BEEPER UNEB EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL APPROVAL' FROM THE NORTH CAROUNA DEPARTMENT OF ENMRONMENT AND Q cup Y
----- ---- --- APSTINGPROA WATATEER
LOCATION OF 0
� � EXISTING WATER LINES NATURAL RESOURCES, DIVISION OF LAND QUALITY, OR THE LOCAL AUTHORIZED PROGRAM. THE APPROVAL NOTICE Z W N U
MUST BE AVAILABLE ON-STE DURING ALL GRADING AND CONSTRUCTION ACTINIDES. L✓L /� _
___� APPROXIMATE LOCATION OF lL fli \�
° ° EXISTING GAS LANES 2. - INSTALL ALL EROSION CONTROL MEASURES AS REQUIRED BY THE NORTH CAROLINA DEPARTMENT'OF ENVIRONMENT M
AND NATURAL RESOURCES, DIVISION OF LAND RESOURCES, LAND QUALITY SECTION. E3
---------^-------TOP k TOE LANES �
->->-a->->-)->-a- DITCH LINES NOTE AI I LTILITY INSTALATION WITHIN ] ' OF A RIVER OR STREA BANK HAI I BE IN TA EO PER STRFAM RANK W O
----------- ^-"-^--'-'^- CC Z
APPROXIMATE LOCATION OF PRO -DON D TAI • < FDIN AND M HING SHA B nMPL D DAI Y IN AREAS Np D AS STR AM PRO PROTECTION AREAS_ SII T F NC IN TK S 0.pFAS SHA I NOT R INSTA I FD J THAN W FROM R FK BANK IN ccc Fl I G I- W
UNDERGROUND CABLE TV LINE CONDIDEC PRE'I/FNT SI FFl TENT FARAN AI cI T FEN S SHALL -BE IN PFC D AND AHED A� N D D Q }
APPROXIMATE LOCATION OF OVERHEAD CABLE AFTER EACH RAIN. Q LLL�
^ ^- TV �
-„r ,p. ^- APPROXIMATE LOCATION OF
UNDERGROUND FIBER OPTIC CABLE LINE S. - OBTAIN CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE THROUGH ON -SITE INSPECTION BY A REPRESENTATIVE OF THE NORTH
CAROLINA DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENT AND NATURAL RESOURCES, DIMSION OF LAND RESOURCES, �j
-----+-----T-----+- APPROXIMATE LOCATION OF LAND QUALITY SECTION. i U
UNDERGROUND ELECTRIC LINE
+ , APPROXIMATE LOCATION OF 4. - PROCEED WITH GRADING, CLEARING AND GRUBBING. NOTE: NO OFF SITE DISPOSAL CF MATERIAL IS ALLOWED UNLESS
OVERHEAD ELECTRIC LINE THE DISPOSAL SITE HAS AN APPROVED EROSION CONTROL PLAN.
W
APPROXIMATE LOCATION OF 5, - ALL TEMPORARY STREAM AND CREEK CROSSINGS FOR EQUIPMENT DURING CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE MADE USING TEMPORARY
UNDERGROUND TELEPHONE LINES BRIDGES. NO STREAMBANK OR STREAMBED DISTURBANCE SHALL BE ALLOWED FOR EQUIPMENT CROSSINGS. 5.
I T APPROXIMATE LOCATION OF 6. - SEED AND MULCH DENUDED AREA WITHIN 15 DAYS AFTER FINISHED GRADE ARE ESTABLISHED. SEED AND SOIL
OVERHEAD TELEPHONE LANES AMENDMENTS SHALL BE PLACED ON A PREPARED SEEDBED AT THE FOLLOWING RATES PER ACRE. ////\/�/�
--- -- -- RIGHT STRAW MULCH SHALL BE TACKED WITH TACKING AGENT APPLIED BY HYDROSEEDER. (L
ew7 � TREES/SHRUBS
S (%�
J^""^"_'N TREEUNEUMELEIS v' m
E.I.P. DOSING IRON PIPE OR PIN FERTIUZER (10-10-10) 1,000 LBS r-
RBF REBAR FOUND KY-31 FESCUE 100 LBS
STRAW MULCH 60-80 BALES
OTIPF OPEN TOP IRON PIN FOUND FOR BUMMER SEEDING ADO TO THE ABOVE;
CTIPF CRIMPED TOP IRON PIN FOUND ^ Q IPS IRON PIN SET DER AN MILLET 10 LBS U
DIST. DISTURBED
SUDAN GRASS 15 LBS S Ir) " N S o
CMU CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT FOR WINTER SEEDING ADD TO THE ABOVE
R/W RIGHT OF WAY F6 O m inW 5:O
E CENTERLINE RYE GRAIN 15 LBS G ZTZ W
C CURVE (SEE CURVE TABLE) FOR ALL SLOPES 2:1 OR STEEPER ACID TO THE ABOVE: Z Z m Z
POB PANT OF BEGINNING V
SERICEA LESPEDEZA 40 LBS m < < pp to ZZ
CP CALCULATED POINT G N U O U O
PB PLAT BOOK 1, 00HYDROSEEDING.A WOOD CELLULOSE MAY BE USED IN ADDITION TO STRAW MULCH AT THE RATE OF
I,000 LBS PER ACRE.
DB DEED BOCK ALL SEEDING SHALL BE MAINTAINED. WATERED ETC., UNTIL A PERMANENT VEGETATIVE GROUND COVER IS ^
L UNE (SEE UNE TABLE) ESTABLISHED OVER ALL DISTURBED AREAS. 1.1..
SLOG BUILDING ALL SLOPES 20 OR STEEPER SHALL BE COVERED BY EROSION CONTROL MATTING.
CIP CAST IRON PIPE ,^
CMP CORRUGATED METAL PIPE NATIVE PLANT SEEDING MIX FOR STREAM OR RIVERBANK STABILIZATIONco
CONCRETE SEEDING FOR STREAM OR RIVERBANK STABILIZATION SHALL BE A MIXTURE OF NATIVE GRASSES, PLANTS AND TREES. L
CMU ' CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT NATIVE PLANT MIX SHALL INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING; Z I-
CPP CORRUGATED PLASTIC PIPE GRASSES - BIG BLUESTEM, INDIAN GRASS, LITTLE BLUESTEM, SWITCHGRASS 5 LDS/ACRE EACH O O
DIP DUCTILE IRON PIPE AUGUST THRU MAY - GREENRYE 25 LEIS ACRE EACH L
E&T ELECTRIC & TELEPHONE MAY 1 THRU AUGUST - MILI 25 LBS/ACRE r
EACH z
FOC FIBER OPTIC CABLE TREES - SILKY DOGWOOD (CORNUS AMONUM), SILKY WILLOW (SAUX SERICEA). HAZEL ALDER Q
GIP GALVANIZED IRON PIPE' (ALMUS SERRULATA) AND ELDERBERRY (SAMBUEUS CANADENSIS)GIN r ,
Rep OVERHEAD NATIVE PLANT MIX VARIATIONS SHALL BE APPROVED BY ENGINEER, O Z
RCP REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE Q
U/C UNDERGROUND NOTE: NO FERDUZER SHALL BE USED WITHIN 10' OF 70P OF STREAM OR RIVER BANK
VCP VITRIFIED CLAY PIPE 7, - MAINTAIN SOIL EROSION CONTROL MEASURES UNTIL PERMANENT GROUND COVER IS ESTABLISHED. L �a
PVC POLYVNYL CHLORIDE PIPE 6. - REMOVE SOIL EROSION CONTROL MEASURES AND STABILIZE THESE AREAS, U EL
S. - REQUEST FINAL APPROVAL BY THE NORTH CAROUNA DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENT AND NATURAL •'F�•
RESOURCES, DIVISION OF LAND RESOURCES, LAND QUALITY SECTION. W `; J
O w
a, J
a
SHEET
BEFORE YOU DI01
CALL 1- 2-4949 ��
N.C. ONE-CALLOALL CENTER - -
IT'B THE LAWI
NO. DATE BY REVISION DESCRIPTION

W IN 14B.1B
00 GALLON SEPTIC TANK
ry
FRf
SIM
UNI
Mv. oUr laa6 a TO FILTER
— FEED TANK
TO DRIP
FIELDS
�N
uj U
U
J W
� J
go
0 �
SHEET
G3

/lwb`iQ �i
\ Set `M is /
' r \ ) s
r
PLAN ' \ < /
N SCALE; 1"m 20' i PROPOSED \,
' CONTROLS/
FILTERS/UV
BUILDING \\ .\ ,\ .\ \ ay_•
NIP
PROPOSED
FILTER FEED TANK
DOSING `\\
TANK • /, \ ` \ �� ` \\ \\ \ ` \\�
I / \ PROPOSED
/ BACKWASH TANKPROPOSED
5,000 GALLON
I SEPTIC TANK
PROPOSED
/ FLOW EQUALIZATION TANK
PROPOSED
/ Y BIOCLERE UNIT #2
/ I PROPOSED \ \\\� \ \\ \•,
BIOCLERE UNIT $1
OONE
£;tom cr,,:�Es,„'�q.• ,:`; ::
// / �%:.,
.,, �a .�//%//�////
��/ �
/ j'
%,//��
'' /ice ���
/�y- ••'y//,/��iiij
/� ���.
/O� /
, w
I
I or sa
.�1 r
\ \ \ I LOT 1s r
rr l r \\ `�_ ��- -_-"'---'-I / ' /' l �i/ / , �r 7 \ 1 ! J,-y / ! I I
it /r -_'~ `\, ``� `----_-_' - lrJ/ i
\ \ ` LOT 18 Ir l r /\\ --_ �/
LOT/ill i ` \�\\�`-_- - - - - .- �/ _c_ , �15T BU ON SOX,
�_ - ____-__' - _ - _ �•',^\ / /Ek15TMG/ / / / / n / / /' r V i / p I °I I°
`,\\ _ � _ - �'� sy` , sTPncaNw n? I I
' \ ------------------- —
/------------ i .Z` ; / ; / / I (' / l r y r i I
```\� / �� Lam_=�-�_JI _ _ '.•'�`- !� ^`\ '! ���� / \\�/� / ���---_----_ - //
may'- II `I ` �/ / / / `!'\ j / / , l /i / 1 !/ I + l l 1 I I
�OT 1r�__� ____ ^`✓�". / T
ace_ - - - ,-cl ,t-`r _ _ _ c�,,���/r � ____-- - __ -,
� �`-------------'" 1 r i
_ _ .. � ---- _ -� `•sync o�ru ^-L`.-__'--' i it I � ' �` Z 1 / / /�/ / \ / l
--- -- - --p--- `j'/� \ ���J=�1i ,\ \ Lotza .'.cam/' `-Z• / ' r
5_ �; 1 LOT 27
- - - - - STANKEPK
—ie50—
NO. DATE 8Y REVISION DESCRIPTION
V)Wp
U
z�
C7
�z
UUzz
0 �. .
a
ua
Enz
z
a
W
W�
z�
z0
zz
(50
(5V
00
_jLL
Z_ 0
Lu
LL N
V
w-j
W
20-3
W
J
VJ
w3w -0
LLJ
<
w�
0
Z
i- Z
LLJ
0
%<
(�
�/z
W/ co
N=
�—
P
iz
N O r 3 S W W G
O O] m 41 W
--
I
zz U N N
IFQ` U O
'J O N O U O V . O
SHEET
L1

PROPOSED
SKID MOUNTED A'
BACKWASH SAND
(SEE DETAILS)
PROPOSED
SAMPLE A DRAIN LINES
ER
SAMPLE AND DRAIN UNES
UV SYSTEM CHANNEL
PROPOSED
DRIP SYSTEM HYORAUUC UNIT
INCLUDING ARKAL DISK FILTERS
AUTOMATIC BACKWASH VALVES
FROM FILTER
FEED TANK
FROM \\�----.,.--j LTER
BWIASH
. TANK
1
CONNECT 1 1/2' FILTER 11 PROPOSED
BACKWASH UFN1E TO FLODR 1 ( {' FLOOR DRAIN
DRAIN, PIPE BELOW $LAD 1 f TO SEPTIC TANK
PROPOSED ( 1
SCREENED INTAKE PROPOSED 1 1
LOUVER 4' DIP PLUG VALVE WITH W
ELECTPoC ACTUATOR (TYP. 2)
PROPOSED
ELECTRICAL PANELS
(SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS)
PROPOSED
CHEMICAL FEED
PROPOSED PROPOSED (SEE DETAILS)
4' DIP TO FILTER 4' OIP TO $ OAY 90E
BACKWASH TANK STREAM STORAGE
CONTROLS/FILTER BUILDING PLAN
SCALE: 1' = 2'-0"
PROPOSED
ZONE SOLENOID
VALVE (TYP. 4)
FROM DOSING
TANK
I—� B
1 B
♦
M����������� Or
����MMMEE���I♦��
RE MMEEMMEEM
Y Z
1 r r
-:':..
\
i
ti` v
r
f
GUN I KULS/f-ILI LK bUILUING LLLVAI IUN
SCALE: 1" - 2'-0'
FAN
TO
DRIP
FIELDS
PROPOSED
Zl_4f HOLLOW METAL DOOR
W/ SE"TY WINDOW
PROPOSED
12'x24' WOOD
FRAME BUILDING
CONTROLS/FILTER BUILDING ELEVATION
SCALE: 1' - 2'-0"
PREMANUFACTURED ROOF
TRUSS 0 2'-0' D.C.
20 YEAR ARCHITECTURAL
FIBERGLASS SHINGLES
20 LB. FELT
12
6
J/4R
GRADE PLYWOOD
OF DECK
ROOF DECK
METAL FLASHING
DRIP EDGE (TYP.)
1'x3' TREATED
W000 TRIM
R-30 GATT INSULATION
INS' TREATED
WOOD FACE
PATE WITH
1/2' B-C PLYWOOD
ALUMINUM
COVER
CONTROLS/FlLTER ROO
SEE OTHER DETAILS
2K4 STUD WALL
WITH T1-11
EKTERIOR SIDING
6" CONCRETE SLAB
B' CADC
1
SECTION B-B
NOT TO SCALE
VIWp
U�
wz�
i E* z
r�
�-qz
Uzz
OQ,,^^ z a
vJl�qq
V)z6
z
a
W�
W
z
c7
z.m
WH
0 o .•s
Q O
J LL.
.011
uj
W Q
g } LLI °
Lij
� �W �
LLB Z
LLJ
Q �--- z
w V
w
z
IL ''<^ W
v,
O N �
N = c
O Z m m C K
Z
Z� F 0] Z y
�Zpp
❑ N p U p U O
LLI Z
<L Ja
VJ V
J Z
00
L J
r
Z m
U
SHEET
C2
DATE BY REVISION

SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS (jr2).
-
SEE SPECIFICATIONS AND
ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS,
'
2' 90' BEND (TH. 2)
`
'
ROD TO CONCRETE
EXTENDED SLAB �' DEADMAN W/ ]— 3/4' .,(%`
BASE SECTION �� SSRODS
-READE0
46'x48' BILCO TYPE J '.,4 �'•'^'' �? \ '
ALUMINUM ACCESS . • "'_ .: \
__ _ _ _ _
HATCH OR EQUAL . .1 f ------ —---1•�y ':
"
.••y-. 2x2PRECAST VAULT
8;C' THE J LOCKABLE ALUMINUM
�I4' � I � 'J�:.
ACCESS HATCH OR EQUAL
;�.
(TYP.) I
' tTW'•)
2' FLOW METER
-
µ7
AND H PC
E AND H PROMAO 10 OR
APPROVED EQUAL
ay
\ f. %•
2 PLUG VALVE
WITH BOX (TYP. 2)
STEEL CABLE .•'
STAINLESS •.'r'�,',°•
/
BRACKET FOR FLOATS /
\ \ 8' CIA. PRECAST WETWELL WITH
O
` 6' EXTENDED SLAB BASE SECTION
I=—
e'
6• 4°'
FLOW EQUALIZATION BASIN PLAN VIEW
z
— —
a`
NOT TO SCALE
z
O O
— -------
r------- — — — — — — —
— — ---r�
I I,I I
W U
W
NOTES:
U p
1. SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS SHALL BE REMOVABLE FROM TOP OF STATION THROUGH
J LL
:NOCKOUT
I FT I
ACCESS DOORS. CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR DIMENSION REVISIONS AS REQUIRED
Q C,
L
I FT I
H
a'-o-
IF FINAL PUMP LAYOUT FROM PUMP SUPPLIER IS DIFFERENT FROM DRAWINGS.
z W
LL El)
2 m z4'm
2. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE ALUMINUM LADDER OF SUFFICIENT HEIGHT FOR ACCESS
T
L�
INTO PUMP STATION DURING CONSTRUCTION AND INSPECTION.
J
I I
I LJ I
-
IL
cc
I LJ I
I I I 1
0
I ® II I
I I
F_-
UZ
9-
6'
III THE J LOCKABLE
ALUMINUM ACCESS HATCH OR EQUAL
(DOOR MNGE OPPOSITE PUMP DISCHARGE)
6' DIP VENT WITH NON-
24'm CAST IRON RINGS
k COVERS BROUGHT TO
FERROUS INSECT SCREEN LIFT OUT CHAIN ATTACHED 70
GRADE BY CONTRACTOR
EFFLUENT FILTER,
ZABEL A100-12x36-VC
STAINLESS STEEL EVE BOLT
2'X2' PRECAST VAULT WITH 24'x24"
__ZGROUND ELEVATION 1881.80
OR APPROVED EQUAL
ELEVATION 180
TOB92CCESS
AILCO TYPE J LOCKABLE ALUMINUM
BP HATCH OR EQUAL
,-
\\\. \ \\ \�
f i ,
CROUliD\\LEV \ 1692.0\
i
',
..,..
KNCCKWT
UFTERS\
•%•
L.•
:•. r: "•: •: • :; - :?'
,
ti
\Y\\\
BUSHING
i�\\
\
T
2' MAGNETIC FLOW METER
Y
6"m 2����
j �\ +'.T
i
��
/
`:,
'^ `
E AND H PROMAG 10 OR
\
APPROVED EQUAL
Wt.
BAFFLE W' 950 MB LBS
8
'
7
2' SCH 40 PVC CONDUIT TO
CONTROL PANEL (TH. 2)
7
'
' f-1/2'm BIlfYL RUBBER
6b FLOW HOLES
BRACKET FOR FLOATS
_
v-
SEALANT IN JOINT
TH Of 6
s LIFTERS 16' OC
y
•
S
'
6' GRAVITY SEWER
W/ RUBBER BOOT
' 2' P VALVE
34 lBS
_PLUG
•-
NiTH BOX (TIP. 2)
,
OTTOM E R
.- .• . .., .....' - .,_.,.. , .., .�.,r :. •.._:_, .. :.:i;.,(.'L,'•..',:'..
., :'.
... -.-
6,
INY. EL 1887.78
....:
�'• •'
INJECTION POINT FROM
CHANI
CMENICAL ffE0 SYSTEM
HIGH I ALARM
EL, f867,60
5000 GALLON SEPTIC TANK
N-2' 90' BEND (T. 2) L-5' j87 STONE
H
ROD TO CONCRETE
DEADMAN W/ 3- 3/4-
SS TREADED RODS
TRAFFIC RATED LAG PUMP ON
EL. 1887.00
:.
(STAY -RIGHT PRECAST OR APPROVED EQUAL)
NOT TO SCALE
304 S.S. INTERMEDIATE GUIDE RAIL
SUPPORT (0 V MINIMUM SPACING)
' SDR 13.5 PUMP DISCHARGE PIPE
304 S.S. 1 1/2' GUIDE RAILS
?�
304 STAINLESS STEEL LIFT OUT CHAIN
LEAD PUMP ENABLE
,^,';'�
i--GUIDE PLATE
AWAY FITTING WITH CHECK VALVE
8' DIA. PRECAST WETWflL WITH
NOTE: PUMP OFF LEVEL DA HP a' EXTENDED BASE SECTION
SHALL BE AT ELEVATION SUBMERSIBLE
ABOVE PUMP MOTORS UMP
PUMP SEWAGE
GROUT INVERT TO SLOPE TO PUMPS '.T- ,�' a -MIN.
RDn�gu Od -F
a' MIN, B67
FLOW EQUALIZATION BASIN SECTION VIEW
NOT TO SCALE
PRECAST CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION NOTES
1. ALL PRECAST COMPONENTS SHALL MEET REQUIREMENTS
ASTM C-47B, LATEST REVISION, AND ASTM C-890.
2. ALL 'FORMED IN PLACE' CONCRETE SHALL BE CLASS 'B',
3000 PSI MIN.
3. ALL PRECAST SECTIONS SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED PLUMB.
4. IF MANHOLES OR VAULTS ARE SET IN LOCATION OF HIGH
WATER TABLE OR UNDERGROUND WATER IS ENCOUNTERED,
THE CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL UNDER DRAINS AND STONE
AS DIRECTED IN THE FIELD BY THE ENGINEER.
5. THE PRECAST SUPPLIER SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE
STRUCTURAL DESIGN OF THE STRUCTURE AND, WHEN REQUESTED
BY THE ENGINEER, SHALL SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS AND DESIGN
CALCULATIONS WHICH HAVE BEEN SIGNED AND SEALED BY A
REGISTERED STRUCTURAL ENGINEER.
6. THE PRECAST SUPPLIER SHALL SUBMIT BUOYANCY
CALCULATIONS TO VERIFY ANTI —FLOATATION OF WET WELL.
CONTRACTOR SHALL MODIFY STRUCTURE AS REQUIRED TO
ENSURE ANTI —FLOATATION AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO OWNER.
�r
LLl U
w-JLu
�Z
F n R'
QJ
w �
(�j .
Z
CL �</•�X
VJ W
F is
0 Z p m
• � w
zmp �I fJ U50V)Z
J
O �".
w
LL p
p Y
QO
_U
CL
f- J
W
U
W
SHEET
C3

BIOCLERE MODIFIED TRICKLING FILTER NOTES:
The !allowing North Cardino-specific specifications shall be applicable to all approved Units:
a. Th. Bangs can... tlon jolnng the BIoc1— filter ..at[. to the Blodom sump section shall be factory ..sled with fiber mInlomd1 plastic (FRP) to prove.
a permanent watert[ght seal,
D. Tho Intemal ehfppinq support. snag be removed, made from. er encapsulated with non -biodegradable malerlal.
a Each unR shill have a v.nKlotlon Ion, two alternating do.Ing pump., a sludgo return pump, and a law level Boat ..Itch with the following chcracterlstlu:
The ..!#soon fan shall be a IISv/tph/80hx, pdnlad metal, bell bearing for with a factory rated airflow rate of 240 cubic feel par minute.
d. The junction box for each BIo<lere unit shill be located outside of the !an module In o separate NEMA 4X anrdoeum.
s. Pump run timers fr each pump shill be provided. '
The system sh011 most the following North Comilao-spoelflo speaiflcutWro;
BIOCLERE SPECIFICATION
General
There aholl be fumishad and Installed a factory built fixed film aerobic proses® typo sewage treatment plant(.) with ill needed equipment for efficient operation. The unit shall Include
a triolding inter situated ever a final soloing lank.
Construction
Tha unit shall be dallwrod complete from supDller cool eh0 Include: random pocked PVC manufactured media, vmU]etlm wen, dosing pumps, sludge return Dump, Intemal p"'I
Hn9 and mnir.l.. Tha lrkkln9 111ter porllon of the lank oholl hove flborglses Inner and Dolor skin. with the malty belwean ruled with pdyurathana foam beulallon, .The remalndr al
the loot all I h A P tea sh be oonelmobd ., FRP or last., AI Intemal 'Ping sill be schedule {D VC astlo 4. Ths boo ant loot .boll xlth land. P D D D g fin pie D e narmat pressure from Ns Interior
hydro#lotlo load and from the sag, ,
The flange connection pining the Waders alter section to the Blaolere sump Section #hall be factory sealed with fiber reinforced plastic (FRP) to provide a permonenl watertight seal.
The Intemal shipping support. shall be removed, made from, or sncapsulalod with non-biodegrodcble material.
The Bioclere units Shall be leak tested for 20M pement 24-hour leaks;# by filling the clarlfier with clean water to the "Vet Invert.
Filter Media
Th. PVC randomly packed inter media has a veld ratio of >951L It Is UV reoiatenl and reemtwt to a ride moil. of aqueous eolutlorna, sales, olkdb, oxldi:ng agents, Co.. fate, and
dCohole.
Final Setlllnq Took
A can. shaped csMrs leek shall have 60 degree eloped sides to prevent the accumulation of biological and Nagonlo suspended solids and shal contain the necessary Internalbaffling to prohibit short- Imelling of the wgste-ter.
Electrical Component
e
The unit ah 1 I I alternating
a I haw o vent! al an fan, two al er atng dwnq aortas, a Nudge alum pump, and a low Iswl Boat switch rlth the following charaoterlsllcw
The v.nllotlan (an anall be o 115v/lph/6OhF, pooled metal, ball b.anq fan with a factory rated airflow rota at 240 Cubic feat per min u to.
The two eltamoting dosing pumps and recycle pump shall be 115v/fah/Rohl otaWoOs eletl submersible pumps. All pumps shall have on Internet high temperature shut oN ewllch. The
Channeling dosing pump, shall be <.rtmo.d such that who on. pump folio the remaining wsl .—Plot. both doting cycles.
The low level 115V/lph/60hi Boat switch.holl be Installed to prevent the recycle pump from operating when water levels am abnormally low In the Blalero (Le. during primary tank
pumping).
Fewer Supply
The unit shall haw a dedicated 30 amp, 11Sv/tph/BOhp, power supply
WFing
The electrical ...Vector .hall a —plot. the wiring between the Bloaters .antral Panel and the terminal slap within the Bladere for, module meeting all local, state, and federal codes.
All fitting., connecting, ale. ah.11 be weatherproof and water tight construction. Ground terminate are provided In both the main panel and the junction box for each unit. Each
round termnal all
be wired to w earth ground,
Th. junatlon bax far the RICO— unit .hall be looted mtold. of the Ion modal. In a .operate NEMA 4X ..I... m.
Can shdl be taken to match the wires between the control panel and the terminal strip within the Bloclae fan modulo located on eoch unit.
Control Panel
A control panel end] be lumished with an such, and Meual alarm for pump failure and tripped circuit br.aker Condition., an a.larlor dorm ellenu button, and on on/off/rust
ppoo er/alarm toggl. switch. Within the NEMA 4X #III awn: pump throne, pump run tlmars for each pump (elap.ed time molar.), relays, terminal strip, on/off/to.t bitches, run
Ilghls, seeing pump alternator, ctrpult breakem and current sensors shall he prodd.d.
We -too
As equipment provided shall be warranted against defects In moteride and workmanship for a period of one year from the date of Wtagatbn,
ServIC00 PforlOea
AWTE ar on approved m-Uf,ct.,or'g representative .hall provlda the following services for each project Note that all Blaeloro unit(.) and ancillary equipment supplied by AWTE Ili to
be Instetlad by the gdnarol cwt000lor,
• Review the design alterla, .Ice and pmAde .p.cifkal]ons for the AWIE suppllad equipment.
• Review Ind comment on the slte-epe.ifia alto plan p 1. to monufM, sus
• Provide a ToChnlcdl Manual that ..lodes and to not limited to InatdlaUon In.tricllonN equipment .p"IBcallons and operoUon and maintenance procedures for
the AWTE supplied equipment.
• Provide onsite technical assistance for the handling and poelNmWg of the Blalero unit(s) the day of (notallatlan.
• Return to the alto for tosUnp and/on comeni.alaning o1 the Binders unit(.) upon sub "M" cemplsHe" of .Its work by the general contractor (piping, elaotricol•
grating, eta.). AWIE will Install the randomly pocked PVC mad[. and pump, Into the Bledem anIt(.). which will complete unit setup. AWW rot be available to
train the . ratir(.) and Instruct the owner an Binders op.mtlon the day of cammisolannq/teetng.
• Test and
cammisslon the oncillory oquipmanl supplied by AWTE the day a( Blsalrl commlaelannq and/or testing.
• Remet. accessible to the owner and/or aporalor for phone consultation.
• Bs owilable on a contract basic for additional site Melt, or aonsullotion.
INSTALLATION AND TESTING PROCEDURES
1. A promn.truction conference shall be required to be ott.rdad by the mglaterod prafe..lonal engineer, Aqucpont manulaclura'e mpr.... tentive, Inatager, and load health department
(UiD), prior to beginning con.lrucUsI of the Blaclero Prereatmenl System and oteoctated ground absorption system.
2. The top of the 8loclere Unit shoo be conetrucled to extend at least Welve Inchon above the ground surface and the currmndin7a area graded to shed surface water away from the
cantonment structure. I( the lop Is greater than 48 Inches above the ground suHca. then OSH4compllant access and rolls shall b4 pmvld.d.
3. Each Boras. fnataoothm anal] be Inspected during placement on the pod, and prior to baWNlns by the Aquopolet manufactures represenlotive and the registered pro(eenlanat
encnaer or the ungnsers Inspector.
4. An Aquapdnt manu(acturw'. representative shill canmis.l. the Biodere ..It far ouch Installation
TANK
INLET
; SCKD 40
IYCLE LINE FROM
CLEW UNIT(S)
NOTES FOR CONTRACTOR:
1. SLOPE PIPE BACK TO SEPTIC TANK
WITH NO LOW POINTS,
2• USE PRESSURE FITTINGS ONLY,
SCHD 80 PVC PIPE
TO BE USED INSIDE TANK PIPE TO BE INSTALLED AGAINST
AND ATTACHED TO TANK WALL
U
PVC 80' ELBOW INSTALLED
AT CENTER OF UOUID DEPT
FROM
INVERTTANCE TO TANK BOTTOM)?
CRUSHED STONE
BIOFILTER RECYCLE LINE
v1W�
U
7'-11 1/2• FAN HOUSING LOCKABLE ACCESS COVER W z
NON-SKID GEL CHAT SAMPLE PORT z..-.
4'e BCND 40 � Zi
NOTE;
t•-t 3/4' SLOPE FINISHED GRADE
AWAY FROM UNITS, I"1 z
i 4'� a— ~ U
4' VENT OWITHN
'S CONNECTIDN TO 7'-11I1/2' U
BIOCIERE /2 AUX. VENT 4' VENT, O z
BIOCLERE SEE NOTE 1 �.
r-3 b BIOCLERE UNIT #2 S TED
ti UNIT #1 MODEL 24/24 FUL r-to 1/4'0 ?'
MODEL 24/20
2 WIN. Ur
N.
1-1/2' SCHD 40 VC OR. EL. 18 20t I flNISHED GRADE �-,
RECYCLE UNE TO �\ / 1-1/2' SU 40 VC l-
3' / 5000 GAL SEPTIC TANK // 1\\/ RECYCLE UNE TO / 6' SCH.
3/4' �, I ��\�� ; /1yy \ RE
OAL 6EPTC TANK \ i QuP T� \ �1�
/
B' SOR 21 PVC— / " / ` / /�\ z
N
INFLUENT I 6' SCKD 40 _ - - M FILTER
FEED TANK Z K
COUPLING PVC INLET R Sz L7
4'e VENT TO BE SUPPLIED (S) h
BY THE CONTRACTOR U
Ir-
B'-61/2' W-el1/2' F-• P,.....«.,,.3j, �J
8 i '-11 3" 4. / z 'cy
z tM -Y-3 3/477-1 ' :::f ;i::�:••• 7'-1 3/4• 0 � fad
' CV-1 Ile cc
LLl
sump ❑ p
rl• ;•t.; •: 5': .ri, ,1;. SURRd1N0 ENTIRE ¢
BIOCLERE UNIT z
BELOW GRADE LU
( ) WITH LL LA
r CLEAN SAND OR LU
3/e' PEA STONE 1L
CONCRETE W
...: r. ..
BASE PAD
CONTRACTOR P ANCKdI UNIT
TO CONCRETE FOUNDATION AS I'-6• 12' CRUSHED STONE Z W
RECOMMENDED BY BIOCLERE P 8'-0' --•—� J
UNIT MANUFACTURER (TYP. 2) UI 0
NOTES: (n Y U 1. CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE ALL DIMENSIONS, L.I�
PIPURER.E CONNECTIONS, AND ANCHORAGE OF UNIT TO _
CONCRETE BASE PAD WITH BIOCLERE MANUFACTURER. W
BIOCLERE 24/20 GENERAL ARRANGEMENT (AQUAPOINT, INC. / AWT ENVIRONMENTAL, INC.) H m
2. SEE BIOCLERE MODIFIED TRICKLING FILTER NOTES g Z
FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS.
Z
Q 1woxxx Z O
W M cc�
6
z ~
X (7
PAD ELEVATION u) W
PLAN ON SQUARE (ACROSS CORNERS)
PAD (SEE NOTE 5) REBAR EYES EMBEDDED 6' INTO CONCRETE
WITH 8' LONG LEG TIED TO REBAR GRID
/3 REBAR O 8' O.C.
REBAR GRID TO END
71 .. R. p•_S• 3' FROM EDGE OF 1, U $
I r IPAD PERIMETER O N =
•1�I�(`f,-vII�` I I�' j �.I1'w�17j�II.a.Ii'
YI�IT'L•�.i�,:tT ",{" t,-6. ' µ ' O ~ m m fJ [J a
Jrl, Z W m
' o S' MININU4 CONCRETE w1'-B'--1 O try o U o U O
F'' I '� tea- I-,• �- COVER UNDER REBAR GRID
BIOCLERE1• F' :�`.:'t. •:..F ,r_. L' <.i,!. .Lv.: J:I•' BIOCLERE
INLET 771-a OUTLET
.I ,al.'. .'• •'F • .I<' t.: Ir'a , I y3 REBAR O e' D.C. �L
77 1....(. _.I. .{ ._.d UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED:
1. CONCRETE MINIMUM STRENGTH: 4,000PSI ® 28 DAYS.
' 2, DEFORMED REINFORCING BARS TO BE 60,000 PSI YIELD STRENGTH
Ll. 3. EYES (4): 1/2" DIAMETER REBAR CAST IN PLACE AS SHOWN. D J
B'�• _mil 4. PAD TO BE SUPPLIED AND INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR. WN Q
5.. CIRCULAR PADS CAN BE SUBSTITUTED FOR SQUARE PADS. LPL
CIRCULAR PAD REBAR EYES INSTALLED 6' FROM PAD PERIMETER. LU Q
U
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE MOUNTING PAD 0
FOR BIOCLERE UNITS (TYP. 2) m
SHEET
C4
INSTALLATION AT 5000 GALLON SEPTIC TANK
DATE
REVISION DESCRIPTION

ViWn
U�
wz�
NEMA 4 ENCLOSURE AIR COMPRESSOR DISTRIBUTION HEAD • I'•1
TIME METER AND CONTROL PANEL jSy Dj
PRESSURE
RELAYLL
LEO GREEN ❑ BACKWASH LINE y
TO SEPTIC TANK `— �-•� GAAURGE h•�I Zi
••L
50• U.V METER :: EFFLUENT UNE Uzi z
7I-- TO UV SYSTDd O Z
7' o�
0 0 "a
o
® ON/OFF _ O 00 O
PLAN VIEW SENSOR RECP. 0 00 0 1.- � z
12' CABLE `-FEMALE RECP, W
•GRAVEL
UV SENSOR C7 O
Y MODULE (TYP. 2) I • ". n
I HP PUMP BACKWASH--,,, DOS HP I z z h
T� .d90 OIA MOLE (15X) DOSING PUMP
all
HEIR . - UTERAIS U u„
u,
---------------- — 13, 26 V LAMP (TYP• 4) ( GRAIN PLUG •, y_�•. U
C(5 O `
SACKWASH
FO.IERE IFROME FILTER
ELEVATION VIEW BACKWASH TANK FEED TANK AUTOMATIC BACKWASH ow o P,.•
RIGHT SIDE VIEW SAND FILTER SECTION
AUTOMATIC BACKWASH z w
DEEI NOTES, TYPICAL OF ONE (1) UV UNIT. SEE SHEET C2 SAND FILTER PROFILE LL FOR ARRANGEMENT OF TWO (2) UNITS IN PARALLEL. J U
W
UV SYSTEM DETAILS BACKWASH 2 p J ¢
LINE TO
SEPTIC TANK J
4 �woa
��C�
Q =
_ Lu _j
I M BACKWASH T -r - Z
73._ PUMP �QQQL� W
EFFLUENT
O U 9 STEM �— � z
CHEMICAL
YODEL Cis-00 WITH ¢ H 7 O
CHEMICAL FEW PUMP AND MIXER Lm - - -- L
1/2 HP ' ' 1
DOSING PUMP . • 0
LU
6- <
BACKWASH LINE FROM AR COMPRESSOR INFLUENT LINE FROM v/,
FILTER BACKWASH TANK AND CONTROL PANEL FILTER FEW NK TA
4
AUTOMATIC BACKWASH I .y
SAND FILTER PLAN
� a d
(WESCAN ¢4 OR APPROVED EQUAL)
O m w w j
C z r a o
o
ELEVATION Z o z .N
o
�otios�u o
NEPTUNE MODEL GIMP AND
CNEYICAL FEED PUMP D MIXER ^^
♦J
Q I—
w
SS•
o J�
I�
o�
ZCo
�>
PLAN
CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEM DETAILS SHEET
C5
NO. DATE BY REVISION DESCRIPTION

DIA. MANHOLE NTH
_5' DIA. MANHOLE NTH
EXTENDED BASE SECTION
—5'
EXTENDED BASE SECTION
PUMPS
PUMPS
PLAN MEW
PLAN VIEW
04
2'-10* DtA.
STANDARD OR WATERTIGHT MANHOLE
FRAME AND COVER W, CASKET AND
2'-10- CIA.
STANDARD OR WATERTIGHT MANHOLE
FRAME AND COVER W/ GASKET AND
2'-0' DIA.
STEEL DOLTS AS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS
-21-0. DIA.
STAINLESS STEEL 00 AS SHOO ON DRAWINGS
z
�,-STAINUE15
NO
NON -SHRINK GROUT WITHIN I' OF TOP
?,-6 NITRLIOT.11RIRK RI.IEIS ASFNICISSAII.TO
CONSTRUCT BRICK RISERS AS NECESSARY TO
PLASTER INSIDE AND OUTSIDE F,BRICK RISERS
M INIMUM THICK.
LASTER INSIDE AND OUTSIDE OF BRICK RISERS
MINIMUM 1/2- THICK,
F_
ECCE14TRIC CONE SECTION MAY VARY IN
ECCENTRIC CONE SECTION MAY VARY IN
VERTICAL HEIGHT WITH SUPPLIER OUT
21 SON 40
1/2
PVC
CH 40 PVC
Lu
LIFTING HOLES SHALL 89 FILLED AND
PLASTERED ON OTH EXTERIOR AND
LIFTING HOLES SHALL BE FILLED AND
PLASTERED ON BOTH EXTERIOR AND
MORTAIL
INTERIOR WALLS VATH MORTAR.
V-O" VERTICAL PRECAST MANHOLE
INTEFUO� WALLS NTH
w
cc:
Lu
W-O' OIA.
COMPONENTS MAY VARY IN VER71CAL
HEIGHT NTH SUPPLIER BUT SHALL BE
in
ED
4' PVC TO DRIP DOSING TANK
INV. EL. 1888.00
HIGH WATER ALARM ELEV. 1884.00
W-O' VERTICAL PRECAST MANHOLE
0
COMPONENTS MAY VARY IN VERTICAL
I-GCH MIN. AND P4-W MAX
ALL ANTS BETWEEN PRECAST SECTIONS
_5' SHALL. BE SEALED NTH AN APPROVED
BITUMINOUS SEALANT OR GASKET AND
ALL ONTO BETWEEN PRECAST SECTIONS
_5" SSHALL B SEALED NTH AN APPROVED
ENTU INDUS SEALANT OR GASKET AND
Lu
<
0
MORTUD NTH BOTH EXTERIOR AND
INTERIOR JOINTS PLASTERED NTH MORTAR.
MORTARED WITH BOTH EXTERIOR AND
INTER R JOINTS PLASTERED NTH MORTAR.
10
PUMP OFF ELEV, 1883.90
PUMP OFF MAY, 187990
VALVE
GROUT OOTTOIA TO INTAKE
VAL
---GROUT BOTTOM TO INTAKE
ui
BOTTOM EL 1882.90
BOTTOM EL. 1878.90
Lu
'��MANHOIE
BASE SHALL BE PRECAST.
MANHOLE BASE SHALL HE PRECAST.
m
ELEVATION MEW
ELEVATION VIEW
PRECAST MANHOLE COMPONENTS SHALL MEET
PRECAST MANHOLE COMPONENTS SHALL MEET
REQUIREMENTS OF ASTM C-47B, LATEST REVISION.
REQUIREMENTS OF ASTM C-478, LATEST REVISION.
FILTER BACKWASH TANK
FILTER FEED TANK
m
DISC FILTERS
0 mi
MULIIJET FLOW METER
Z
TH ELECTRICAL OUTPUT
<
DISC BACKFLUSH VALVE
FIELD RETURN VALVE
(NORMALLY CLOSED
BACKWASH AND FIELD
FLUSH RETURN TO
F5 Lu
MAIN SUPPLY VALVE
(NORMALLY OPEN) ZONE VALVES (TYP. 4)
0
(NORMALLY CLOSED
Z
DISC BACXFLUSH VALVE
=)
LU
FROM DRIP DOSING TANK
SHEET
DRIP SYSTEM HYDRAULIC UNIT
No.
DATE
REVISION DESCRIPTION

10
EFFLUENT/REJECT STORAGE TANK PLAN
RIND AND COVER (TYP.)
,..�3' VENT W/
INSECT SCREEN
EXIST. GRADE
B' WALL
1'0 BUM RUBBER
T AT ALL JOINTS
EFFLUENT
10 -8'YB'
�TANKS AGE 4)
AND PENETRATIONSS (T1P.)
FOR REJECT
(T1P52(TYP.
)
APPLY LIBERAL AMOUNTS OF
NON -SHRINK GROUT AT ALL PIPE
8' SOR 35PVC O IR
PENETRATIONS AS REQUIRED TO
INSURE WATERTIGHT SEAL AND
SLOPE (MINT TO DRIP
SYSTEM DO ING TANK
SEE SITE PLAN
INSTALL PSK BOOT OR EQUAL
(RAN-NEK MATERIAL AROUND
ALL JOINTS)
PRECAST CONCRETE TANK
�TWDALL S01020 OR APPROVED EQUAL
#57 WASHED
EFFLUENT/REJECT STORAGE TANK PROFILE
ADAPTER
COOLING COLLIER
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
1-1 //2' SCH 40
1. MEASURE THE DISTANCE FROM THE BOTTOM OF THE TANK TO 6' DOWN
FROM THE TOP OF THE RISER. CUT THE EXTENSION PIPE TO THE LENGTH
CbUPLICH
NECESSARY TO REACH THIS HEIGHT. CUT 1/2 OF U@ PIPE DOWN 12' To IS'
AWAY FROM THE TOP OF THE PIPE FOR PUMP DISCHARGE PIPE
2. GLUE THE EXTENSION COUPLING TO THE EXTENSION PIPE AND TO THE
INLETS
COOL GUIDE,
3. FOR NEW CONSTRUCTION: ANCHOR THE FLAT CAP TO THE BOTTOM OF THE
00 O 0
0 O 0 0
c c 0 a
TANK IN THE PROPER LOCATION TO HOLD COOL GUIDE AND EXTENSION. THE
CAP MAY OR MAY NOT BE GLUED TO THE DEVICE. ATTACH THE EXTENSION
000 0 0
o o o
TO THE RISER.
SDR 30 PVC
4. PLACE THE PIPE DOPE THE COOL GUIDE ADAPTER THREA05 AND
THREAD THEM INTO PUMP DISCHARGE.
DI
6. ATTACH COOLING COLLAR TO ADAPTER WITH SET SCREW PROVIDED.
6. GLUE PIPE INTO FLOW COLLAR AND WITH PUMP ATTACHEO, LONER INTO
THE GUIDE TUBE
FLAT CAP
7 ATTACH TO DISCHARGE PIPE, VALVES, AND CONNECT ELECTRICAL AS
SPECIFIED WITH THE ANCHORS AS SHOWN.
COOL GUIDE DETAIL
ALLOW ENOUGH ELECTRICAL CABLE
FOR EASY ACCESS FOR REMOVING
FLOAT TREE OUT OF TANK
1 1/4' SON 40 PVC PIPE FOR A
REMOVABLE SUSPENDED FLOAT TREE
TIE WRAP FASTENED FLOAT SWITCH,
SETTING AT CORRECT ELEVATION
FLOAT SWITCHES
BLE FLOAT SWITCH
8'15' 50. CONCRETE ANCHOR
15
PRECAST CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION NOTES
1. ALL PRECAST COMPONENTS SHALL MEET REQUIREMENTS
ASTM C-478, LATEST REVISION, AND ASTM C-890.
2. ALL 'FORMED IN PLACE' CONCRETE SHALL BE CLASS 'B',
300D PSI MIN.
3. ALL PRECAST SECTIONS SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED PLUMB,
4, IF MANHOLES OR VAULTS ARE SET IN LOCATION OF HIGH
WATER TABLE OR UNDERGROUND WATER IS ENCOUNTERED,
THE CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL UNDER DRAINS AND STONE
AS DIRECTED IN THE FIELD BY THE ENGINEER.
5. THE PRECAST SUPPUER SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE
STRUCTURAL DESIGN OF THE STRUCTURE AND, WHEN REQUESTED
BY THE ENGINEER, SHALL SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS AND DESIGN
CALCULATIONS WHICH HAVE BEEN SIGNED AND SEALED BY A
REGISTERED STRUCTURAL ENGINEER.
6. THE PRECAST SUPPLIER SHALL SUBMIT BUOYANCY
CALCULATIONS TO VERIFY ANTI -FLOATATION OF WET WELL.
CONTRACTOR SHALL MODIFY STRUCTURE AS REQUIRED TO
ENSURE ANTI -FLOATATION AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO OWNER.
i;
AST WEIWELLSECTION
N1TI1
BASEE 9TC1K1N
f'.
24'x36' PRECAST RISER I .
GROUND
2' CONDUIT 70 CONTROLS
ENCLOSURE FOR PUMP POWER
1 1/2' CONDUIT TO PUMP ENCLOSURE
FOR FLOAT CONTROL CABLES
(3) MERCURY FLOAT SWITCHES
ALARM FLOAT BUTCH ELEV. 1888.0
SDR 21 PVC FROM FILTER BACKWASH TANK ' _
SDR 35 PVC FROM EFFLUENT STORAGE
PUMP OFF ELEV, 1875.0
ELEV. 1872.5
4 B' MIN. /67 STONE
DOSING TANK PLAN
DOSING TANK PROFILE
24"A36' BILCO TYPE EJ
LOCKABLE ALUMINUM
ACCESS HATCH OR EQUAL
6' STEEL CASING W/
SUBMERSIBLE TURBINE
PUMP PER DETAILS
(TP. 2)
SOR 21 PVC FROM
TER BACKWASH TANK
TYPE EJ
NIRJ
OR EQUAL
TURBINE
. GUIDE
6'0 PRECAST WETWELL WITH
EXIENDEO BASE SECTION
GROUT INVERT TO SLOPE TO PUMPS
NOTE: RAILROAD BALLAST AS
REQUIRED IN WET CONDITIONS
REVISION DESCRIPTION
O
cc
-
U
cc
F•
N
(Z7 O
F, U
Lu Lu M
J O
Q
Z LLI
IL
J
W
Or
0
z
W U
J
w '0 v , J
Wui
0
Q m O
=W z
U)-j0�
Q �-- Z O
W��
W
aZ><l
Cn m
SHEET
C7_

0
a
iJ
S
F
6
li
PROPOSED
5,0 GALLO
SEPN TANK
,CKWASH
PROPOSED
DOSING TANK
AIR\RELLI1SE \VALVE t I _ _ _ r- t 87
—-----------"-
--
84
Pill
a1 ----
�\ `\ If ®eta Ills _.
-
\-------------- PROPOSED
_-_PIT1s `_ _ - - END OF ZONE4
�
/ _ i i _ - RETURN MANIFOLD
i------ SEE D�IA1LS
ipo
/------- a PROPOSED
/ i / ' ID(PIT 22 = i - / i / / -/------- DRIP LINES
----------- ---------
,
lk-
----------- i — — — — — — — l',�o
------------
----
N0. DATE BY REVISION DESCRIPTION
\
O
U
cr
N
cD o
ujCC
O
IL
Z 0
IL c
W
W
x
uW U
J
w — J
U)
Q 2
H
=w Z
Qz
WZuJ �
W
j Z
CL < ><
mm
0
J
W
LL
a.
SHEET
DS1

NOTE:
ALL VALVE BOXES TO BE FILLED WITH
BATT TYPE FIBERGLASS INSULATION.
VALVE BOX W1TH COVER
,HE MPT `EIHRADER" PRESSURE AMETEK' 0162001 Q
CHECKING SOCKET _� _ 182002OR EQUAL
SIZE x 0/4' S SCH 40 PVC IL
REDUCER BUSHING IfJ�
S x FPT SCH 40 —
PVC ADAPTER
(SIZE PER MANIFOLD
PIPE SIZE)
12' 12' x 4' p poo
07 WASHED STONE o O
MANIFOLD SIZE VARIES �i �O S
(SEE SITE PLAN)
NOTE:
1 `3/4' S % 1/4" FPT SCH 40
—J PVC REOUCING -141NO
S x MPT SOH 40 PVC
PPE SADAPTEI E)(SIZE PER MANIFOLD
X
800
0
T SCH 4D PVC PIPE
(PIPE SIZE SAME AS MANIFOLD)
NOTE:
ALL VALVE BOXES TO BE FILLED WITH
BAIT TYPE FIBERGLASS INSULATION.
1/4' MPT "SHRADER' PRESSURE VALVE BOX WITH COVER
CHECKING SOCKET (ITEM g61-COP) AMETEK• g182001 @
162002 OR EQUAL
`J/6' S x 1/4' FPT SCH 40
1' S 0/4' S SCH 40 PVC REDUCING BUSHING
PVC REDUCER BUSHING
2- S x MPT SCH
2'• S x FPT SCH 40 PVC ADAPTER
PVC ADAPTER
2' SCH 40 PVC
0
12` x 12" 4" S O
067 WAS STONE C°OE� °o c0
_P S O 0 _eo0 O �/
I I I_ 2" SCH 40 PVC FLOW �M.1111`
H 9DPVClul J —SCM 4D PVC 90' BEND AANffOLDOLD(TYP FOR 2)
SCH 40 PVC TEE TO ACTUAL SIZE MAY VARY
.VALVE BOX CONNECTION SEE DISTRUBTION FIELD PLAN 2'' SCH 40 PVC TEE 'S SCH 40
PVC RECUCER BUSHING
END MANIFOLD CLEANOUT ON-LINE MANIFOLD CLEANOUT
TYPICAL MANIFOLD CLEANOUTS WITH PRESSURE CHECK
PIPE DIMENSIONS ARE FOR ILLUSTRATION
PURPOSES ONLY, ACTUAL PIPE SIZE 15
DETERMINED BY THE DESIGN ENGINEER.
JUMBO METER BOX. WTH 8' EXTENSION
VALVE BOX WTH COVER
ALL VALVE BOXES TO BE FILLED PATH
AND COVER - 'AMETEK' g190106 MIN.
0'
'AMETEK' #182001 4t
BATT TYPE FIBERGLASS INSULATION.
@ 190110 OR EQUAL
182002 OR EQUAL
• \/\\/\\/
/\\
1/4" MPT 'SHRADE
\\/\\
SOCKETR(ITEMEg01NCPO)
2" AIR RELEASE VALVE
\\ SIZE x J 4" S SCH
//
SCH 0 PVL�4REDUCING
(ITEM�#65?ARIM--8-2) —�
40 PVC PEDUCER
BUSHING
Q
BUSHING
SCH
F
S FPT SCH 40
PVC ADAPTER g
S x MPT
40 PVC ADAPTER
(SIZE PER MANIFOLD
2' S x FPT SCH 40 G`Cx
PIPE SIZE)
'
PVC MALE ADAPTER
2" SCH 40 PVC PIPE 7
2" S SCH 40 PVC TEE 2' SCH 40 PVC PIPE
SCH 40 PVC 45' BEND
CONNECT PIPE WITH THE
CORRECT PVC FITTINGS
2° BRASS SWING CHECK
VALVE (THREADED ENDS)
CONNECT PIPE WITH THE
CORRECT PVC FITTINGS
FLOW
SCH 40 PVC 45' BEND
PPB 612B VAREB
PNPe 818 VARIES
BEE 8rtE PLAN
F�OW
8¢e OHB PLAN
SCH 40 PVC TEE
(PIPE SIZE WILL BE
4o
vo p
°0.
THE SAME SIZE AS
THE MANIFOLD)
TO FLUSH RETURN MAIN
AND ULTIMATELY TO
_ TV, o0so
R
o°oo, °o �+ o°o
SEPTIC TANK
o I g 8 �oa o� g po� a 'C.4f' o °
o _Pyh �° �$o 08� -W—� off_
24' x 24" 4'
g67 WASHED STONE
AIR RELEASE, CHECK VALVE AND BOX
W/ CLEANOUT @ END OF ZONE RETURN MANIFOLD
(TYPICAL ONE PER ZONE)
Y°'GK V/41[ AND B ID
PER N51WW1. 20NE
kt�
1 1//22• STIR 21 P .0U
�OOSHO PUMP STADOR (S[S DCIAM SxELG
F
z
OX-wl[ 2u,WTMO
R
nEM2WT A Bo% (SEE DETAIL) RE1R x
- — — — — — — - ----------
In• PE D4lPPJfW2E I—, 4-4 PFA EDAET
`-1/2• PE TWWO w/ 0.01 WH VBYPo EYI
020' O.C. - KETVY PNOATON WC'DWE
(SEE D TI J "EWW7 FJID Y�wf01D
SEE DETAL)
DRIP IRRIGATION ZONE
DRIP IRRIGATION ZONE PROFILE
SRE OF WPPLY D%
5 IEr°S/� 5 P. (TmJ
rl
IM
[Cxt¢CTIM TD 1/1' •i
PC pDPP.URr b xg
. • a SEES.
4/4.1 .-D RAU YAIE AOAPIN NOTF,.
DID* EIIYD101) .
J/.' %3/4' FPT PVC FCUALE AOMi[R S�PPLT DR pETPW uu:IFgD
`�uAry�Fp�D �• PwE SUES (SEE g51RURIlIUN
TiiEYCN J/4• NE% P4C OfhNSOX DfID DET,LL TIaS SYEE1)
PLAN
TYPICAL MANIFOLD 1 DRIPPERLINE
CONNECTION, NON -LOOPED SYSTEM
Q
U
(n
ao
FD U
WCC
op
J lL
¢o
Z W
LL TA
W
W
s
I
Loiwp
U$
Wz�
• E.(zm
Ewa
�z
vuzz
Ody
co)
(D4
L40 6
z
P4
W
W
zqp-I
r,., 0
aq,41
%vH
W h
wv
J
w `0 J �
v i
CO W O
LLI
P _j m
z
N�0z
� LLJ Q
CL </ Lu
v, m
o VU = I p
O ? pm $4 s S N
m 4�1 KW 0
0o�oso s
W
N J
U�FL
Lu
jQ
.J >
W
LL 0
aZ
_Q
SHEET
DS2
DATE
REVISION DESCRIPTION

V
UNDISTURBED
EARTH
CONCRE E
THRUST BLOCK
BEND J..r+Yf�1�911rtiD�`UUNNDWRSTURBEO
EA
TYPICAL THRUST BLOCKS FOR BENDS
REVISION DATE • JANUARY 2, 2007
/-CONCRETE THRUST -
BLOCK rill-IfP=..
TRENCH WIDTH
I
MN. THREADED ROD (GALVANIZED
OR BITUMINOUS COATED)
.(. °
'
112• MIN
_ �
�---
n
-
J.
.1
-
MINT..."
THREADED ROD (CALVANZED
OR BITUMINOUS COATED)
4 PIPE DIAMETERS
I
1
UNOISTURSEO EARTH,
TYPICAL THRUST
BLOCK FOR REDUCERS
REVISION DATE-JANUARY 2, 2007
CONCRETE THRUST �-1U{�`•'
BLOCK 24' MIN.
TRENCH WIDTH
_
-
r-
•yyyy ,.•' a•
12" MN. ! THREADED ROD (GALVANIZED
- OR BITUMINOUS COALED)
f,. n •�"(�
12" MIN.
•'WN�,
•`�^r•_
PWC
•L �.''
'R2' MIN
�4' �'• .'
.•L `� Cam////�, /••�4'��
1�" NMI ' \
- �
7
s_�'
-_�{ • i
-
3/4' TAP W/ CORPORATION
STOP FOR AIR PRESSURE RELIEF
THREADED ROD (GALVANIZED
-
UNDISTURBED EARTH
OR BITUMINOUS COATED)
.1 T
TYPICAL THRUST BLOCK FOR PLUGS
REVISION DATE- JANUARY 2, 2007
A
A 2 A 2
UNDISTURBED
EARTH
•
CONCRETE
THRUST BLOCK
.,,
CONCRETE 1
A ,• I_�: •
THRUST BLOCK
�
�
IF
TEE _4� 1F-
UDITM9ITURBED
TEE EAR
TYPICAL THRUST BLOCKS FOR TEES
REVISION DATE- JANUARY 2, 2007
1G JOINTS SHALL NOT BE POURED IN CONCRETE OR HAVE CONCRETE SPILLED ON THE BOLTS OR NUTS THE FITTING SHALL BE
WRAPPED IN A LAYER OF POLYETHYLENE PLASTIC PRIOR TO POURING THE THRUST BLOCK.
2. ROD AND EYE BOLT DIAMETER SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF 3/4' AND SHALL MATCH THE SIZE OF THE BOLT PROVIDED WITH THE FITTING,
3. CONTRACTOR SHALL REPLACE FITTING BOLTS WITH THREADED ROD FOR 1/2 OF THE BOLTS SUPPLIED WITH EACH FITTING. RODSSHALL
BE EQUALLY SPACED.
TYPF
SIZE
11-1/4' BEND
22-1/2' BEND
45' BEND
RFND
•16
Pi or
2-6
12
12
12
16
14
a
12
12
16
22
22
la
10
12
14
20
28
28
22
12
12
1B
24
32
32
28
4
14
20
2B
38
38
32
18
le
22
32
42
42
36
IB
I6
26
38
48
48
40
20
20
28
40
52
52
44
24
24
34
46
64
64
54
30
30
42
58
78
70
36.
36A
70
14
84
42
40
58
60
f0.
108
u
48
66
80
124
124
1
THRUST BLOCK DIMENSION "A"
REVISION DATE- JANUARY 2, 2007
FINISHED GRADE
COMPACTED BACKFILL
CONCRETE BRICK
SUPPORT
WORD 'SEWER' CAST N TOP
IV x IV x 4' CONCRETE PAD
(MUST
CAST IRON
'ALVE BOX (SCREW TYPE)
CONCRETE BRICK
SUPPORT
�C-MPAGTED__
1•: "UUG VALVE
CONCRETE SUPPORT PAD 6-
LARGER THAN VALVE (REQUIRED ON
VALVES 10' AND LARGER ONLY)
PLUG VALVE DETAIL
REVISION DATE • JANUARY 2, 2007
U
APPROVEDBOVE PIPE (PPVVCINONLY)E 24' rTl ",
• [�z
I.y v
BACKFI
COMPACTED
1 D IN 6PL BACKFILL DIN 6(L
COMPACTED T 8' LIFTS COMPACTED T I UFIS V�
' By UI U Z x6'
N6' MBACKFILL MATECACKFILLER3I �UFT54PACOMPACTED IN 3CDN a
l " - N4.12 COATED n n / �\ a
PPER ACWIRE
UNDISTURBED PVC ON L WG UNDISTURBED 6• r^ C7 a
EARTH NOTE, EARTH 1/I z
BELL HOLES NOT SHOWN ►1
STANDARD EXCAVATION OVERCUT EXCAVATION QI w
NOTE: 1. CONSTRUCTION OF TRENCHES SHALL COMPLY WITH ALL FEDERAL, STATE AND LOCAL SAFETY AND W
HEALTH REGULATIONS WHICH HAVE JURISDICTION AT THE PROJECT SITE. IT IS THE CONTRACTOR'S Z ^
RESPONSIBILITY TO BE FAMILIAR WITH THE APPLICABLE REGULATIONS AND FOLLOW THEM ACCORDINGLY. a
2. PAYMENT FOR ROCK EXCAVATION AND SELECT BACKFILL IN TRENCH SHALL BE FOR ACTUAL a
QUANTITIES AND SHALL NOT EXCEED THE MOTH OF TRENCH SHOWN ON THIS DETAIL O �Y�. z m
w h
TYPICAL TRENCHING DETAILS r
SEWER FORCE MAIN .......... g ii"'
REVISION DATE- JANUARY 2, 2007 ZO
U
fn`M
LU
cl
O �'
Y .... .•'•�,P.
Z 0 u
_LL W
J
cc
J
5.W��
Q U
FW-Jm
Q = 0� z
LLI
co
� Lu 0
W
?z~�
°' fQ W�•y�
W
O 0 = _
t,N 0Is 331
��3TUw
O O m m W W
z e y z¢ v
O In O U D U O
SHEET
D1
REVISION DESCRIPTION

5 KW UNIT HEATER
CONTINOUS TURBIDIMETER WITH
SAMPLE AND DRAIN LINES TO UV
SYSTEM CHANNEL
UV PANEL N0. 1
1 — —
UV PANEL NO—�
SCREENED INTAKE LOUVER —
FLOAT WIRES
IN 3/4" C.
DUPLEX ULTRAVIOLET LICHT
DISINFECTION UNITS �_7
21,23
A-6
/A-5
x8
FLOAT WIRES
SKID MOUNTED AUTOMATIC IN 3/4" C.
BACKWASH SAND FILTERS
SF SF
A-7,9 A-10,12
DRIP SYSTEM CONTROL
PANEL
A A-19 BIOCLERE CONTROL PANEL A A
i` A-18 A -I I PANEL 'A• \\
�► A-2 joj(=�F Al _ \
A 20NJ
I I I
4" DIP PLUG VALVES WITH
ELECTRIC ACTUATORS I PROVIDE METER BASE AND
A-13,15,16,17 I I A-14 I KWH METER IN ACCORDANCE
CHART RECORDERS DOSING ---J I WITH POWER CO.
TANK I I I L _ TO UTILITY POLE
1 I I I PRE-EOUAUZATION
U pITLERE 5--- J I PUMP STATION CONTROL
PANEL
1 I I
TO
B OCLERE
UNIT y2
1 I
TO I
WETWELL S-
1
CONTROLS/FILTER BUILDING ELECTRICAL PLAN
SCALL' I'W-O'
KEYED NOTES
n1 PROVIDE POWER AND CONTROL WIRING IN CONDUIT($)
PER THE MANUFACTURER'S DRAWINGS, ALL WIRING
AND CONDUIT FILL SHALL BE BASED ON NED 2005.
SERVICE DROP BY POWER CO.
CONNECTION BY POWER CO.
PROVIDE SERVICE MAST, WEATHERHEAD AND SERVICE CONDUCTORS
PROVIDE WITH PROVIDE NTH INTEGRAL TVSS
INTEGRAL 150A MAIN
BREAKER AND SERVICE
ENTRANCE LISTED AND 1
LABELLED
120/240V I 2 ATS-1 2 PANEL
EG-1 10, 3W
NEMA 3R
METERBASE
L_ _ CONTROL/FILTER BUILDNG
2
CONTROLS/FILTER BUILDING RISER DIAGRAM
NOT TO UGALE
DRIP SYSTEM HYORAUUC UNIT
INCLUDING Al - DISK FILTERS AND
AUTOMATIC BACKWASH VALVES
�420 CFM EXHAUST FAN
1
�12' X 24' WOOD FRAME BUILDING
A-22
42" HOLLOW METAL DOOR W/
SECURITY WINDOW
A-1
B
A-3
A-4
CFI
WP
FEED SYSTEM
FEEDER SCHEDULE
NO. OF
PHASE/
ID
AMPS
PARALLEL
NEUTRAL
GROUND
CONDUIT
SETS
1
150
1
3p1/0
-
2"
2
150
1
3a1/0
1-0
2"
A-2
PANEL
A
OCT
LOAD
DESCRIPTION
C
G
W
CB
CCT
CCT
CB
W I
G I
C I
DESCRIPTION
LOAD
COT
1
192
INT. LIGHTS
12
12
20
1
2
20
12
12
RECEPTACLE
360
2
3
150
EXT. LIGHTS
12
12
20
3
4
20
12
12
CHEM. FEED RECEPTACLE
ISO
4
5
252
UV PANEL NO. 1
12
12
20
5
8
20
12
12
314
TURBIDITY METER RECEPT.
180
6
7
1344
SAND FIL. NO. 1 CNTRL.
121121
20
1 7
8
20
12
12
UV PANEL NO. 2
252
8
9
1344
1
1 2P
1 9
10
20
12
12
SAND FlL, N0. 2 CNTRL
1344
10
11
2050
PRE-EQU, CNTRL PNL.
374
ID
10
30
1 11
12
2P
-
1344
12
13
602
DRIP CNTRL ALARM
12
12
20
13
14
30
10
10
BIOCLERE CNTRL PNL.
2880
14
16
900
DRIP CNTRL PUMPS
10
B
40
15
16
20
12
12
DRIP CNTRL SUPPLY
600
16
17
9DO
-
2P
17
18
20
12
12
ELECT. VALVE ACTUATOR
250
18
19
220
CHART RECORDERS
12
12
20
19
20
20
12
12
ELECT. VALVE ACTUATOR
250
20
21
2500
UNIT HEATER
10
10
30
21
22
20
12
12
EXHAUST FAN
75
22
23
2500
-
--
--
--
2P
23
24
20
12
12
GEN. BATTERY CHARGER
200
24
26
0
SPACE ONLY
--
--
--
--
25
26
30
10
10
GEN. COOLANT HEATER
1000
28
27
0
SPACE ONLY
-
27
28
2P
1000
28
29
0
SPACE ONLY
-
29
JO
-
-
SPACE ONLY
0
30
31
0
SPACE ONLY
--
--
--
--
31
32
--
--
--
--
SPACE ONLY
01
32
33
0
SPACE ONLY
--
--
--
--
33
34
--
--
--
--
SPACE ONLY
0
34
35
0
SPACE ONLY
-
35
36
-
-
SPACE ONLY
0
36
37
0
SPACE ONLY
-
37
38
-
-
SPACE ONLY
0
38
39
1 01
SPACE ONLY
-
39
40
-
-
SPACE ONLY
0
40
120 / 240 V
1 PHASE
3 WIRE
200 A MINIMUM BUS SIZE
MAIN LUGS ONLY
10,000 MINIMUM AIC RATING
SURFACEMOUNTING
NEMA 1 ENCLOSURE
GROUND BAR
NOTES:
1.
2,
3,
4,
5.
CONNECTED LOADS
PH. L.
9.8 KVA
PH. L21
9.3 K
TOTAL:
19.1 K
DEMAND
92.0 A
EXHAUST FAN SCHEDULE
MARK
CFM
T• S.P.
(IN W.C.)
FAN
RPM
BONES
HP
VOLTAGE
DRIVE
CONTROL
NOTES
EF-1
420
0.25
860
5.9
1/8
12OV, 10
DIRECT
T'STAT
1
NOTES:
1. PROVIDE FAN MANUFACTURER'S GRAVITY BACK DRAFT DAMPER, WALL COLLAR, AND MOTOR SIDE FAN GUARD. SIZE WALL
OPENING PER WALL COLLAR DIMENSIONS.
UNIT HEATER SCHEDULE
MARK
CFM
FAN HP
BTU/HR
KW
VOLTAGE
NOTES
UH-1
400
6 W
17,060
5.0
24OV, 10
1
NOTES
1. PROVIDE WITH INTEGRAL THERMOSTAT.
ENGINE -GENERATOR SET SCHEDULE
IT
RATED
STARTING KVA
OUTPUT
MARK
RATING
PF
VOLTAGE
AT 16%
CB TRIP
(KVA)
VOLTAGE DIP
RATING (A)
EG-1
50 KVA
687
120/240Y, 10, 60 H2
19.5 KVA
150
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH SCHEDULE
SWITCHRATIN-3
SWITCHED
CLOSING AND
MARK
(A)
POLES
VOLTAGE
WITHSTANDRATING
(RMS SYM. A)
ATS-1
150
2
120/240V, 10, 60 Hz
10K
VA U � • • hoc
VA
z ' �'•. 40' �bva`
zz ?d
0 o ,,,,,.....1
W 0
f) ��ppL,NNINHI�
W E[
❑ U_
Q LL
Z Lu
CD U
LL Lu
x I—
W
Y LLLLI
=
I'- m
= WLLJ Z
LLJ 0
Z
a Q X
cl)w
W
a
n o
n = o i 3
ouou o
0
Z
O
m
a�
Q J
U—
LIGHTING. FIXTURE SCHEDULE
TYPE DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURER AND CATALOG NO. MOUNTING VOLTAGE LAMPS BALLASTS/ WATTS(
FIXTURE FIXTURE
8' ENCLOSED AND GASKETED LUMINAIRE HUBBELL LON8-259-ES12120 PENDANT A HIGH IMPACT ACRYLIC LENS T LU RIES U.O.N. DPLANS 120 (2) 59W T8 1 LOW TEMP. 110
LISTED FOR USE IN WET LOCATIONS UTHONIA DM SERIES
WALL PACK LUMINAIRE HUBBELL NRG-300 SERIES
B IMPACT RESISTANT GLASS GE WALUGHTER 70 SERIES WALL 120 (1) 100W HPS 1 LOW TEMP. 120
LISTED FOR USE IN WET LOCATIONS UTHONIA TWL SERIES
DATE
SHEET
E2_
LIGHTING. FIXTURE SCHEDULE
TYPE DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURER AND CATALOG NO. MOUNTING VOLTAGE LAMPS BALLASTS/ WATTS(
FIXTURE FIXTURE
8' ENCLOSED AND GASKETED LUMINAIRE HUBBELL LON8-259-ES12120 PENDANT A HIGH IMPACT ACRYLIC LENS T LU RIES U.O.N. DPLANS 120 (2) 59W T8 1 LOW TEMP. 110
LISTED FOR USE IN WET LOCATIONS UTHONIA DM SERIES
WALL PACK LUMINAIRE HUBBELL NRG-300 SERIES
B IMPACT RESISTANT GLASS GE WALUGHTER 70 SERIES WALL 120 (1) 100W HPS 1 LOW TEMP. 120
LISTED FOR USE IN WET LOCATIONS UTHONIA TWL SERIES
DATE
SHEET
E2_
DATE
SHEET
E2_

u�
• Wz�
�wxa'
�7
ENCLOSURE Z U
Uzz
CONTROL PANEL Z+ °
iAu Uo a
E3 Uj a
U C c7
oz
M�NBR7EgAKERSUIT M pr]
ALL• SIDES LEARANCE SUB BASE FUEL TANK
JUNCTION BOX LOCKABLE ACCESS COVER
7'-11 t/2° FAN HOUSING JUNCTION BOX 213 C. TO ATS CONTROL- ""I
O
NON-SKID GEL COAT SAMPLE PORT Y C. TO ATS —•' za
4 2 4". SCHD 40 O '.;... W
m SEE MANUFACTURER'S NOTE: GENERATOR DETAIL ~
INSTALLAlIIX4 U IIIIIIIIiI///
INSTRUCTIONS
I' -I 3/4" SLOPE FINISHED GRADE NOT TO SCALE,,,,N'•� '
- AWAY FROM UNITS. Z � �� • �••a Od:,�ry
4VENT WTH SEE MANUFACTURER'S #408
SIOC ECPON TO INSTALLATION
810CLERE y2 AUX. VENT TO BIOCLERE INSTRUCTIONS 4.
NOT W U �yyo rya;'``
CONTROL SEE NOTE I
s PANEL BIOCLERE INSULATED O �d'O �•••!"`��`
r_3" BIOCLERE UNIT'2 FILTER
v
UNIT y�i To elocLERE z n mrynnunaT
CONTROL PAN EL. 2'-0" v� .,� LU
MIN. TQn
1-1/2" SCHO 40 yC OR. EL. 1BS2.0} FINISHED GRADE. W
f� �/. ,�� RECYCLE LINE TO \/ �� \ 1-1/2" SCHO K.
VC h �4 ®B° O.C. EACH WAY IU
\�j• \/ \ RECYCLE LINE TO L 6 SCN, -\U`
5000 GAL. .SEPTIC TANK �\\ \ 5000 CA,
. SEPTIC TANK / l 9FF06 �: �� \ ,�\/��\;\Ti L
i v� AS REQUIRED BY MANUFACTURER Lr
6" SCHD 40 �— oEN�ERATOR BASE STRUCTURAL DETAIL � SCALE 0
8Y
-_ COUPLING PVC INLET
4°m VENT BE SUPPLIED VJ 4
7NE CONN TRACTOR
tg•_2 3/4" CONCRETE PAD Fn
"""•• ""
SUB BASE FUEL TAN -K
8'-71.. 3/4° ••;.ip }'; :a•.
•.."
7'-3 3/4" S •;'• 7'-7 3/4' �; GENERATOR ENCLOSURE 12
Z
LU
SURROUND ENTIRE T
SIOCLERE UNIT
BELOWLOW GRADE
•'. I t• SUMP (BELOW
CLEAN SAND NIT CIRCUIT BREAKE S Q 1— 7
:;:ti;•• OR 3/8• PEA STONELu
1�—' L�� O
V
:....
CONCRETE, LENGTH AS RED. BY MANUf. L( V_O" BASE PAD 1 ° 12 z \/
CONTRACTOR TG ANCHOR UNIT 1'-6" I 12" CRUSHED STONE ..aLL Lu
TO CONCRETE FOUNDATION AS—p �11
RECOMMENDED BY BIOCLERE 8'-0° GENERATOR BASE PLAN m
UNIT MANUFACTURER (TYP. 2) NOT TO SCALE
BIOCLERE ELECTRICAL CONNECTION
NOT TO SCALE a I I a
n P
a c
o F U W
N N 2 z-
In
U IZ�� m, N S a
a Q 0 ) Lr 0: W
S 17W�� pm ZF I
O Q U G7 4 W 0 r
p N O UJp V O
z
O
I—
.W
0 z LJ
O I—
LU W
W W
W J
0O
m
SHEET
E3
NO. DATE BY REVISION DESCRIPTION

11
t
rm
CHEMICAL I I FLOW
FEED CHART
SYSTEM RECORDER
PUMP
CONTROL
25' CLASS 5 POLE
207
F
`
INFLUENT TSH MSH
iUTODIALER
HIGH 41
FM
LAG 220E
EFFLUENT
LLAD TSH MSH
TURBIDITY
METER
$AND
FILTER
CONTROL
SAND
FILTER
CONTROL
DRIP
SYSTEM
SEWAGE
ATS GENERATOR PUMP
OFF
I
PANEL
NO. 2
PANEL
NO. 1
CONTROL
PANEL
CONTROL CONTROL
PANEL PANEL TELCO
LT WELL --
VAULT
TYPICAL SEWAGE PUMP STATION CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOT TO SCALE
NQIES
1) ALL SPACE INSIDE OF WET WELL IS CLASSIFED ELECTRICALLY ACCORDING TO THE
NEC AS A CLASS I, DIVISION 1, GROUP D AND ALL ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION
SHALL COMPLY WITH THE APPLICABLE CODE REQUIREMENTS.
2) THE CONTROL PANEL IS SPECIFIED WITH THE SEWAGE PUMPING EQUIPMENT. REFER
TO APPLICABLE SPECIFICATIONS SECTION FOR CONTROL SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
REQUIREMENTS FOR SEWAGE PUMPING SYSTEMS,
3) REMOTE MONITORING CONNECTION IS NOT INDICATED ON THIS DIAGRAM. PROVIDE
CONNECTION TO SCADA, AUTODIALER, OR OTHER SYSTEMS AS INDICATED
ELSEWHERE.
AUTODIALER SIGNAL DIAGRAM
NOT TO SCALE
NOTES
1) CONTROL PANELS AND TRANSFER SWITCH ARE ELEMENTS OF SPECIFIED PACKAGE
SYSTEMS, REFER TO APPLICABLE SPECIFICATIONS SECTION FOR CONTROL SYSTEM
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR THESE SYSTEMS.
1/0 SCHEDULE —AUTODIALER
DESCRIPTION
TYPE
GENERATOR TROUBLE ALARM
DIGITAL INPUT
TRANSFER SWITCH TROUBLE ALARM
DIGITAL INPUT
SEWAGE SYSTEM TROUBLE ALARM
DIGITAL INPUT
WET WELL HIGH WATER ALARM
DIGITAL INPUT -
DRIP DOSING TANK HIGH WATER ALARM
DIGITAL INPUT
DRIP DOSING FLOW VARIANCE ALARM
DIGITAL INPUT
SAND FILTER FEED TANK HIGH WATER ALARM
IDIGITAL INPUT
HIGH TURBIDITY ALARM I
DIGITAL INPUT
KEYED NOTES
O1 6' X 6' X 32' NEMA 3R AUX. GUTTER FOR FLOAT SWITCH
CONNECTIONS,
O2 B'DEEP X 10'HGH X S'LONG NEMA 3R JUNCTION BOX WITH BARRIER
FOR PUMP POWER AND CONTROL V(IRING CONNECTIONS.
3 CONDUIT SEAL FITTING,
4 TYPE LB CONOULETS.
3 CONDUIT UNDERGROUND TO CONTROL PANEL
Ofi PUMP CONTROL CABLE IN WETWELL FOR TEMPERATURE SWITCH AND
MOISTURE SENSOR. TRAIN AND SECURE TO ALLOW FOR PUMP
REMOVAL
O PUMP POWER CABLE IN WETWELL, TRAIN AND SECURE TO ALLOW
FOR PUMP REMOVAL
OHANG FLOAT SWITCH THROUGH CONDUIT INTO WETWELL (TYPICAL FOR
FOUR).
6 1/2' PVC CONDUIT.
10 PVC CONDUIT FEMALE ADAPTER.
11 CORD GRIP CONNECTOR.
PLAN
12
KNOT IN CABLE TO PREVENT LOSING CABLE END IN WETWELL
SCALE: 1/2'-1'-0!
13
INTERCONNECTION POINT 9F CABLE AND STANDARD WIRING.
13
14
PHYSICAL BARRIER IN BOX.
12 1S 1S 14
15
ANCHOR/SCREW (TYPICAL).
11
18
6' LONG HOT -DIPPED GALVANIZED C6X8.2 LB CHANNEL AT EACH
0 010
'END AS INDICATED. FABRICATE WITH TWO-9/16' DIA HOLES, 4' ON
CENTER, CENTERED IN EACH FLANGE
Ig
17
3
17
SEAL MIND ALL CONDUIT PENETRATIONS IN WETWELL COVER.
10
9
G[NFFAI_ NOTES
8 101- (TYP )I
I)
MAKE SUGHT MODIFICATIONS TO ARRANGEMENT TO
ACCOMMODATE FIELD CONDITIONS, ADJUST
BETWEEN
FLOAT SWITCH
PENETRATIONS OF CONCRETE TOP TO AVOID
REINFORCING.
CONDUITS
ELEVATION
SCALE: 1'-1'-0'
PUMP STATION ELECTRICAL DETAILS
SCALE: AS NOTED
120/24OV, 10, 3W, 1SOA
SERVICE DROP BY POWER
COMPANY
VE PIGTAILS FOR
INECTION BY POWER CO.
WEATHERHEAD
6 HDBC STAPLED TO
0 12" INTERVALS
32'
INTO METER BASE
\\��\\ AAWG AS GND TO WATER
PIPE
COPPER WELD
GROUND ROD
SERVICE POLE DETAIL
NOTTO SCALE
NOTE:
POLE TO BE VERTICAL AFTER
ATTACHMENT OF SERVICE DROP,
PROVIDE GUYING IF NECESSARY
FOR POLE TO REMAIN VERTICAL,
TURBIDITY TURBIDITY
CHART METER
RECORDER
TURBIDITY CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOT TO SCALE
CONTROL SYMBOL LEGEND
NOT TO SCALE
INSTRUMENT CONNECTION TO PROCESS
— 70S1
ELECTRIC SIGNAL - GENERAL
W7i
ELECTRIC SIGNAL - ON/OFF
PROCESSING PIPING/SYMBOLS
PUMP
QFLOAT
SWITCH
MSH
MOISTURE SWITCH - HIGH
OTEMPERATURE
35F
SWITCH - LOW -- SETPOINT. INDICATED
TSH 220ETEMPERATURE
SWITCH - HIGH -- SETPOINT INDICATED
F®�M
FLOW METER '
I�
MOTOR ACTUATED VALVE
(3
U
t!
00
r3
W Q'
0
J O
_Z 0 U..
W
cc
o W n
U
Wz
Hz
P-4z
Uzz
z-
�Oa
�c7�a
z
W
w
z�
y O
uj U
J
V
w'�^J�
} Lij 0 O
0
W w
W W Z
c~nJOZ.
� UJ
Z
aC¢!)ww�
W
VJ
0 J
Q
W
oa
_ W
N a.
Lu
^� N
[L Idj
I.LI
U)
SHEET
E4
DATE

0
•
•
L,
PIPE SCHEDULE
PIPE If
DIAMETER
ENERGY
DISSIPATER
DISSIPATOR
UNING
1
18 in.
6 ft.
3' RIP RAP
2
18 In.
6 ft.
3" RIP RAP
3
18 In.
6 ft.
3' RIP RAP
4
18 in.
6 ft.
3" RIP RAP
NOTE:
RPRAP CHECKS SHALL BE INSTALLED IN ALL
DITCHES WITH GRADES 5.0% OR MORE UNTIL
SLOPES ARE STABILIZED WITH VEGETATIVE COVER.
DITCH SCHEDULE
DITCH #
TYPE
TOP/BOTTOM
WIDTH
SIDE
SLOPE
LINING
1
TRAPEZOIDAL
1 ft.
2:1
6' RIP RAP
2
TRAPEZIODAL
1 ft.
2:1
6' RIP RAP
3
TRAPEZOIDAL
1 ft.
2:1
6' RIP RAP
4
TRAPEZIODAL
1 ft.
2:1
6" RIP RAP
5
TRAPEZIODAL
1 ft.
2:1
6" RIP RAP
6
TRAPEZIODAL
1 ft.
2:1
12' RIP RAP
7
TRAPEZIODAL
1 ft.
2:1
12" RIP RAP
8
V-DITCH
4 ft.
2:1
12" RIP RAP
9
V-DITCH
4 ft.
2:1
12" RIP RAP
•B1DTH NOTED M1LL BE DICTATED BY
DITCH TYPE. TRAPEZIODAL DITCHES
WILL BE BOTTOM WIDTH, V-DITCHES
WILL BE TOP WIDTH.
TEMPORARY SEDIMENT TRAP SCHEDULE
TEMPORARY
SEDIMENT
TRAP
DISTURBED
AREA (ac)
REQUIRED
STORAGE
(cf)
REQUIRED
SURFACE
AREA (sq ft)
LENGTH-
(ft)
VADTH
(ft)
DEPTH
(ft)
ACTUAL
STORAGE
(cf)
ACTUAL
SURFACE
AREA (sq ft)
WEIR
LENGTH
(ft)
1
7-1-6-56-7
409
30
29
2.00_�
3480
870
4.0
2
1 0.26
938 -]
231
24
21
2.00
2016
504
4.0
3
0.71
396
98
15
14
2.00
840
216
4.0
4
0.09
I 324
00
15
11
2.00 -i
660
165
4.0
5
0.23
028
204
21
21
2.00
1784
441
4.0
3
0.23
828
204
1 21
1 21
1 2.601
, 1764
441
4.0
40.91:"
I F—R90
1 98
1 15
1 14
. 2.00
840
210
4.0
5
1 L-A.48
1656
1 409
1 30
1 29
9.00 1
.3480
870
' 4.0
'LENGTH SHOULD BE 2 TIMES THE WIDTH (MINIMUM),
T. D. Haney _ N:���'9 - FROJ No.: 07-102
opt kssi �%y- nAre: fvexu�r. zorn
XALE: 15 5H'JWN
• CONSULTING ENGINEERS, PA E ''
69 Jenkins Valley koad
ov-loz-ecr
Alexander, North Carolina ""':N"'
[phone]
i III
I
� PLAN
\
I I
SCALE: 1'= 50`
I
I
� 1
`
I
I 1
_
��•\I ,��
��
�'
`
GRAVEL CONSTRUCTION --US HWY 64_
I
ENTRANCE --
-� :- ----------------,--------
I +�'_
+moo
GRAVEL CONSTRUCTION \
ENTRANCE
- I CMP �1
DITCH #9
o \\f \\ 12%
'Y'0,
•\I
i
� mvrxr aurnnw
CMP #2
15,
f
i
1
�l
l
mm
I '8
w X
c . c
♦♦♦♦♦♦♦♦N4♦ram ,.
c
\\
y t RIFIE ter r
-SE'EDED,&& M�yLC\HEC.AREAS
�ro�nTvr innow • pRf� G i
_ \ 1 Dt11T 0✓
\\��`��rl� .-`W�a�w�q��AiE• �`�MA3 �� r�• V')lp iif
o\
RIP RAP APRON
AT CULVERT OUTLET
SITE IMPROVEMENTS
for
PEDDLERS VILLAGE
CHEROKEE COUNTY, NORTH CAROLINA
RIP RAP APRON
AT CULVERT OUTLET
I
FINAL DESIGN - NOT RELEASED FOR CONSTRUCTION
SEDIMENTATION AND 2 OF
EROSION CONTROL PLAN sN�F_-r

= Michael F. Easley, Governor
William G. Ross Jr., Secretary
North Carolina Department of Environment and Natural Resources
Paul E. Rawls, Chairman
Water Pollution Control System Operators Certification Commission
January 17, 2008
CERTIFIED MAIL
RETURN RECEIPT REQUESTED
Mr Jose F Rosado .
Ibex Thunderbird LLC
2332 Galiano St
Coral Gables F133134
Subject: Classification of Water Pollution Control System
Facility: Santeetlah Lakeside - Phase II
Permit #: WQ0031396
County: Graham
Dear Mr. Rosado:
R"SCE-W D
JAN 22 2008
A-sheville Regional Offic
,�._ � �.9ifef PP®I2Cti®n
In accordance with North Carolina General Statute 90A-37, the Water Pollution Control System
Operators Certification Commission is required to classify all water pollution control systems. The
Commission hereby classifies the subject,,facility: ias: • &;:Surface- Irrigation -System; and - a 'Grade 2
Biological Water Pollution Control System effective today. In accordance with 15A NCAC 8G .0201
and your permit, you must designate one Operator in Responsible Charge (ORC) and one or more Back-
up ORC(s) of the appropriate type and grade.
Your system requires an ORC who holds an active Surface (Spray) Irrigation System Operator
Certification and an active Grade 2 or higher Biological Water Pollution Control System Operator
Certification. In addition, your system requires a Back-up ORC who holds an active Surface (Spray)
Irrigation System Operator Certification and an active Grade 1 or higher Biological Water Pollution
Control System Operator Certification.
You must complete and return the enclosed designation form to this office by June 30, 2008. The form
must be signed by the ORC, the Back-up ORC(s), and you or your designee. You may designate yourself
and/or employees to be the ORC and Back-up ORC(s), or you may engage a contract operations firm to
perform these services. All operators designated as ORC or Back-up ORC must be actively certified as
described above.
If construction of your system is incomplete or has not yet begun, you must notify this office, in writing,
of an anticipated startup date and your plans for obtaining and designating the required certified operators.
Please note that failure to designate a properly certified ORC and Back-up ORC 60 days prior to the
introduction of waste into the system is a violation of Rule 15A NCAC .0301(3)(a).
A Surface (Spray) Irrigation System Operators Training School is being offered May 5 — 8, 2008, at the
McKimmon Center in Raleigh. This school will not be offered again until May 2009..Registration
information for the Surface (Spray) Irrigation School, a list of contacts for biological schools, and a list of
contract operators are enclosed.
Noe Carolina
Technical Assistance & Certification Unit Internet: hfp://h2o.enr.state.nc.us/t6cu
1618 Mail Service Center, Raleigh, NC 27699-1618 Telephone [phone] Fax [phone]
An Equal Opportunity Action Employer 50% recycled/10% post -consumer paper

Jose F Rosado
WQ0031396
Page Two
If you have questions concerning this requirement, please contact Beth Buffington at [phone],
extension 313, or [e-mail].
Sincerely,
-7
J rry Rimmer, Supervisor
Technical Assistance and Certification Unit
Enclosures
cc: A Nevi! i e Regional `ace, Aquiferol?rotec i Se tionri:K
DWQ APS Central Files
DWQ LAU Files
DWQ TACU Facility Files

fliK 0�
MCDENR
North Caroiina Department of Environment and
t al Resources
Division of Water Quality
Beverly Eaves Perdue
Coleen H. Sullins
D e Freeman
Governor
Director
Secretary
P4AY 24 2G10
May 19, 2010
Asheville Regional Office
-
A uifer Prat®cticr>I
CERTIFIED MAIL # 7006 2150 0003 5467 2312
RETURN RECEIPT REOUESTED
Jose F. Rosado, President
.Ibex Thunderbird, LLC
1302 San Jose Street
Coral Gables, FL 33156
Subject: Notice of Violation NOV-2010-PC-0503
Santeetlah Lakeside - Phase II
Permit Number WQ0031396
Graham County
Dear Mr. Rosado,
As of this date, our records indicate that the above -referenced permit, which was issued on May
15, 2007 and expires on April 30, 2015, has overdue fees. It is both a condition of your permit and
required by Rule 15A NCAC 2T .0105(e)(2) to pay the annual administering and compliance fee within
thirty (30) days of being billed by the Division.
Failure to pay the fee accordingly may result in the Division initiating enforcement actions, to
include the assessment of civil penalties. Failure to comply with conditions in a permit may result in a
recommendation of enforcement action, to the Director of the Division of Water Quality who may issue a
civil penalty assessment of not more that twenty-five thousand ($25,000) dollars against any "person"
who violates or fails to act in accordance with the terms, conditions, or requirements of a permit under
authority of G.S. 143-215.6A: Therefore, it is imperative that you submit the appropriate fee as requested
within thirty (30) days of this Notice of Violation (NOV). The following invoices are outstanding:
Invoice Number
Invoice Date
Due Date
Outstanding Fee
2008PR006063
6/18/2008
7/18/2008
$810.00
2009PR005735
5/28/2009
6/27/2009
$810.00
Please remit payment, made payable to the North Carolina Department of Environment and
Natural Resources (NCDENR) in the amount of $1,620.00. Please mail this payment to:
Division of Water Quality — Budget Office
Attn: Fran McPherson
1617 Mail Service Center
Raleigh, NC 27699-1617
AQUIFER PROTECTION SECTION
1636 Mail Service Center, Raleigh, North Carolina 27699-1636
Location: 2728 Capital Boulevard, Raleigh, North Carolina 27604
Phone: [phone] FAX 1: 919-715-0588; FAX 2: 919-715-60481 Customer Service: 1-877-623-6748
Internet: www.nmaterguality.oro
An Equal Opportunity i.Afiirmative Action Employer
N6ithCaralina
�fII'l

Permit: WQ0031396 Owner - Facility: Ibex Thunderbird LLC
Inspection Date: 02/11/2010 Inspection Type: Reconnaissance Reason for Visit: Routine
Inspection Summary:
Facility is about 95% complete but no homes to tie into the system yet per Dave Honeycutt (McGill & Assoc.) Phone
conversation 2/11/2010.
Page: 2

OWN MI'll-mmm
WK
N
11"',
MR�

Compliance Inspection Report
Permit: WQ0031396 Effective: 05/15/07 Expiration: 04/30/16 Owner: Ibex Thunderbird LLC
SOC: Effective: Expiration: Facility: Santeetlah Lakeside - Phase II
County: Graham 90 Old Lodge Rd
Region: Asheville
Lake Santeetlah NC 28771
Contact Person: Jose F Rosado Title: Phone: [phone]
Directions to Facility:
System Classifications: WW2,
Primary ORC:
Secondary ORC(s):
On -Site Representative(s):
24 hour contact name
Related Permits:
Inspection Date: 08/31/2012
Primary Inspector: Beverly Price
Secondary Inspector(s):
SI,
Certification
David L Honeycutt
Entry Time: 10:50 AM
Reason for Inspection: Routine
Permit Inspection Type: Reclaimed Water
Facility Status: ❑ Compliant ❑ Not Compliant
Question Areas:
0 Miscellaneous Questions
(See attachment summary)
Exit Time: 10:55 AM
Phone:
Phone: [phone]
Phone: [phone]
Inspection Type: Reconnaissance
Page: 1

Permit: WQ0031396 Owner - Facility: Ibex Thunderbird LLC
Inspection Date: 08/31/2012 Inspection Type: Reconnaissance
Inspection Summary:
Voice mail from David Honeycutt (Project Enginneer- McGill Assoc.) 8/31/12
Reason for Visit: Routine
Nothing new for Santeetlah Lakeside - same place as last yesr. Still waiting for last couple of items before it can be
certified. David hasn't heard anything from the client this year, facility is probably rusting.
Page: 2

Compliance Inspection Report .
Permit: WQ0031396 Effective: 05/15/07 Expiration: 04/30/16 Owner: Ibex Thunderbird LLC
SOC: Effective: Expiration: Facility: Santeetlah Lakeside - Phase II
County: Graham 90 Old Lodge Rd
Region: Asheville
Lake Santeetlah NC 28771
Contact Person: Jose F Rosado Title: Phone: [phone]
Directions to Facility:
System Classifications: WW2,
Primary ORC:
Secondary ORC(s):
On -Site Representative(s):
24 hour contact name
Related Permits:
Inspection Date: 08/30/2011
Primary Inspector: Beverly Price
Secondary Inspector(s):
SI,
David L Honeycutt
Entry Time: 10:15 AM
Reason for Inspection: Routine
Permit Inspection Type: Reuse
Facility Status: ❑ Compliant ❑ Not Compliant
Question Areas:
Miscellaneous Questions
(See attachment summary)
Certification: Phone:
Exit Time: 10:30 AM
Phone: [phone]
Phone: [phone]
Inspection Type: Reconnaissance
Page: 1

Permit: WQ0031396 Owner - Facility: Ibex Thunderbird LLC
Inspection Date: 08/30/2011 Inspection Type: Reconnaissance Reason for Visit: Routine
Inspection Summary:
per phone conversation with David Honeycutt, Engineer (828-252-0575), the status has not changed much in the last
year. The facility is 95% complete, MW s have not been installed. No lots/houses have been sold yet. David has not
heard from Mr. Rosado (owner) in about a year. Three years overdue permit fees.
Page: 2

Pat McCrory
Governor
Division of Water Quality
Thomas A. Reeder
Acting Director
June 28, 2013
CERTIFIED MAIL # 70121640 0000 9792 4183
RETURN RECIEPT REQUESTED
Mr. Jose F. Rosado
13002 San Jose Street
Coral Gables, FL 33156
Subject: Notice of Deficiencies NOD.
Santeetlah Lakeside Phase H
Permit Number WQ0031396
Reclaimed Water Permit
Graham County
Dear Mr. Rosado:
As of this date, our records indicate that the above -referenced permit,
and expires on April 30, 2016, has overdue fees. It is a condition
administering and compliance fee within thirty (30) days of bein
Quality (Division).
John E. Skvarla, III
Secretary
which was issued on May 15, 2007
of your permit to pay the annual
g billed by the Division of Water
Failure to pay the fee accordingly may result in the Division initiating enforcement actions, to include the
assessment of civil penalties. Civil penalty assessments may be issued of not more that twenty-five
thousand ($25,000) dollars against any "person" who violates or fails to act in accordance with the terms,
conditions, or requirements of a permit under authority of G.S. 143-215.6A.
Therefore, it is imperative that you submit the appropriate fee as requested within thirty (30) days of the
receipt of this notice. According to our records, the following invoice(s) are outstanding:
Invoice Number
Invoice Date
Due Date
Outstanding Fee
2013PR003087
April 3, 2013
May 30, 2013
$810.00
2012PR003157
April 4, 2012
May 4, 2012
$810.00
2011PR003157
April 6, 2011
May 6, 2011
$810.00
2010PR003881
April 8, 2010
May 8, 2010
$810.00
2009PR005735
May 28, 2009
June 27, 2009
$810.00
AQUIFER PROTECTION SECTION
1636 Mail Service Center, Raleigh, North Carolina 27699-1636
Location: 512 N. Salisbury St. Raleigh, North Carolina 27604
Phone: [phone] FAX: [phone]FAX: [phone]
Internet: www.ncwaterguality.org
One
NorthCarohna
A)atmrallff
An Equal Opportunity 1 Affirmative Action Employer

Mr. Jose F. Rosado
June 28, 2013
Page 2 of 2
Please remit payment made payable to the North Carolina Department of Environment and Natural
Resources in the amount of $4,050.00. Please mail this payment to:
Division of Water Quality
Budget Office
Attn: Fran McPherson
1617 Mail Service Center
Raleigh, NC 27699-1617
For questions regarding any overdue annual fees, please contact Fran McPherson with the Division's
Budget Office at [phone]. If you have any other questions, please contact Ed Hardee by phone at
[phone] or by email at [e-mail].
Sincerely,
/OnRisgaard, Supervisor
Land Application Unit
cc:sIle:Reg�onal�OceA'S'
APS Central Files - Permit No. WQ0031396
Fran McPherson — DWQ Budget Office

rat Ivlcurory
Governor
-3 ,a
NCDENR
North Carolina Department of Environment and Natural Resources
Division of Water Quality
Thomas A, Reeder John E. Skvarla, III
Acting Director Secretary
June 27, 2013
Jose F. Rosado, President
IBEX Thunderbird, LLC
95 Merrick Way, #610
Coral Gables, FL. 33134
SUBJECT: 2013 Reconnaissance Inspection
Santeetlah Lakeside — Phase II
Non -Conjunctive Wastewater Treatment
and Reclaimed Water Utilization System
Permit No: WQ0031396
Graham County
Dear Mr. Rosado:
On June 6, 2013 1 inspected the subject facility in Graham County. The purpose of the
inspection was to determine the status of the facility. It appears that the wastewater treatment
plant and the drip irrigation system have been constructed, with the exception of the monitoring
wells. It also appears that the system is not being operated or maintained.
Please contact me at your earliest convenience so that we can discuss the status of this
facility. I can be reached at 828-296-4685 or via e-mail at bev.price(a-)_ncdenr.gov. Thank -you in
advance for your assistance. Attached is the Compliance Inspection Report (Inspection
Summary Page 2) with additional comments.
Sincerely,
Beverly Price
-)
Environmental Specialist
Enclosure
c. APS Cen I raI-F_iles,
ER.— MAPS isles
AQUIFER PROTECTION SECTION —Asheville Regional Office (ARO)
2090 U.S. 70 Highway, Swannanoa, NC 28778-8211
Phone: [phone] FAX: [phone]
Internet: www.nGwatercivality.org
An Equal Opportunity'. Affirmative Action Ernployer

)031396
SOC:
County: Graham
Region: Asheville
Compliance Inspection Report
Effective: 05/15/07 Expiration: 04/30/16 Owner: Ibex Thunderbird LLC
Effective: Expiration: Facility: Santeetlah Lakeside - Phase II
90 Old Lodge Rd
Lake Santeetlah NC 28771
Contact Person: Jose F Rosado Title: Phone: [phone]
Directions to Facility:
Hwy.19 through the Nantahala Gorge. Turn right onto Hwy. 129 to Robbinsville. Continue on Hwy. 129 through Robbinsville to Lake
Santeetlah.Turn left onto Thua ird Mtn rd. Go past Santeetlah Marina. The facility is located on the left.
System Classifications: ,
Primary ORC: Certification: Phone:
Secondary ORC(s):
On -Site Representative(s):
Related Permits:
Inspection Date: 06/06/2013
Primary Inspector: Beverly Price
Secondary Inspector(s):
Entry Time: 11:00 AM Exit Time: 11:30 AM
Reason for Inspection: Routine
Permit Inspection Type: Reclaimed Water
Facility Status: ❑ Compliant Q Not Compliant
Question Areas:
E Miscellaneous Questions
(See attachment summary)
Phone: [phone]
Inspection Type: Reconnaissance
Page: 1

Permit: WQ0031396 Owner - Facility: Ibex Thunderbird LLC
Inspection Date: 06/06/2013 Inspection Type: Reconnaissance
Inspection Summary:
Reason for Visit: F
The facility appears to be complete with the exception of installation of monitoring wells but it is not being operated or
maintained at this time. The Engineering Certification has not been received. The startup inspection has not been
conducted. The facility will likely need a lot of work to get it in working order since it has been sitting for so long.
A few houses appear to be occupied but there was no one on -site to talk to.
Engineer contact:
David Honeycutt -McGill & Associates: Spoke with Mr. Honeycutt on 5/13/13.
0
Page: 2

I'
Compliance Inspection Report
Permit: WQ0031396 Effective: 05/15/07 Expiration: 04/30/16 Owner: Ibex Thunderbird LLC
SOC: Effective: Expiration: Facility: Santeetlah Lakeside - Phase II
County: Graham 90 Old Lodge Rd
Region: Asheville
Lake Santeetlah NC 28771
Contact Person: Jose F RosadoTitle: r f Phone: [phone]
Directions to Facility: �WL( 19 V- �A) rcuc JLn (V�„" �.�/l�✓l� c"L- - , `rc �-. '<'-• 0" ( 0
.s,);(({ ,clCL) —mot 2 `r0 t,L- .—uL
System Classifications: WW2, SI,
Primary ORC: Certification: Phone: I
Secondary ORC(s):�L`
On -Site Representative(s):
Related Permits:
Inspection Date: 06/06/2013 Entry Time: 11:00 AM Exit Time: 11:30 AM
Primary Inspector: Beverly Price
Secondary Inspector(s):
Reason for Inspection: Routine
Permit Inspection Type: Reclaimed Water
Facility Status: ILA Compliant 0 Not Compliant
Question Areas:
0 Miscellaneous Questions
5 DOI' •e- vA (J'/_�) e 0 i-%
Sa�_s 1"ZOE4�"
(See attachment summary)
OL
Phone: [phone]
Inspection Type: Compliance Evaluation
6.k &Vt 1+
Does v�
n�
�v G�Ak,
LLA n6
M ess& _
Page: 1

Water Resources
ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY
February 14, 2017
Certified Mail # 7015 3010 0001 4933 6205
Return Receipt Requested
MR. ALLEN G. WILLIAM, OWNER
RR DEVELOPMENT NORTH III LLC
3129 SPRINGBANK LANE
CHARLOTTE, NC 28226-3379
Dear Mr. Rosado:
ROY COOPER
Governor
MICHAEL S. REGAN
Secretary
S. JAY ZIMMERMAN
Director
Subject: Notice of Violation
Intent to Enforce
NOV-2017-PC-0092
Permit No. WQ0031396
Santeetlah Lakeside- Phase II
Reclaimed Water
Graham County
Division of Water Resource records indicate that the above referenced permit, which was issued
May 15, 2007 and expired on April 30, 2016 has not been renewed. It is a condition of your permit and
required by administrative code 15A NCAC 02T .0109 to request renewal of your permit at least 180 days
prior to its expiration. -
As the Permittee, you are responsible for renewing and maintaining this permit. Failure to do so
will result in assessment of civil penalties in accordance with North Carolina General Statute § 143-215.6A.
Therefore, it is important that you respond by selecting one of the following options within 30 days of
receipt of this notice:
1. APPLY FOR PERMIT RENEWAL — When you apply for and receive a renewal, operation of your
non -discharge system will be permitted to continue. As such, the payment of annual fees, and any
operation and maintenance procedures specified in your permit will be required. You may renew your
reclaimed water permit by submitting a completed Non -Discharge System Renewal Application (Form:
NDSR 06-16). An electronic version of this application is available for download at
https://deg .nc. gov/about/divisions/water-resources/water-resources-permits/wastewater-branch/non-
discharge-permitting_unit/application.
P-�Noth'ing Comp��
State of North Carolina I Environmental Quality I Water Resources I Water Quality Permitting I Non -Discharge Permitting -
1617 Mail Service Center I Raleigh, North Carolina 27699-1617
919-807-6332

Mr. Jose F. Rosado
NOV-2017-PC-0092
February 14, 2017
Page 2 of 2
2. Payment made payable to the North Carolina Department of Environmental Quality in the amount of
$810.00 for the following overdue annual fees (invoices attached):
Invoice Number
Invoice Date
Due Date
Outstanding Fee
2016PR003142
05/01/2016
05/06/2016
$810.00
3. APPLY FOR PERMIT RESCISSION — If the non -discharge system has not been constructed, or if it
is no longer active, you may request to rescind your permit. By rescinding your permit, all overdue
annual fees will be waived; however, if in the future you wish again to operate the subject non -discharge
system, you,must first apply for and receive a new reclaimed water permit..
Please submit the completed forms to the following address:
Division of Water Resources
Non -Discharge Permitting Unit
ATTN: Nathaniel Thornburg
1617 Mail Service Center
Raleigh, NC 27699-1617
Thank you in advance for your cooperation and timely response. If you need additional information
regarding this notice, please contact Sonia Gregory at [phone] or [e-mail]. .
Sincerely,
Nathaniel D. Thornburg, Supervisor
Division of Water Resources
cc: /Asheville Regional Office, Water Quality Regional Operations Section
Central Files

rerrmc: VVWU 31396
SOC:
County: Graham
Region: Asheville
Compliance Inspection Report
Effective: 05/15/07 Expiration: 04/30/16 Owner: Ibex Thunderbird LLC
Effective: Expiration: Facility: Santeetlah Lakeside - Phase II
90 Old Lodge Rd
Lake Santeetlah NC 28771
Contact Person: Jose F Rosado Title: Phone: [phone]
Directions to Facility:
Hwy.19 through the Nantahala Gorge. Turn right onto Hwy. 129 to Robbinsville. Continue on Hwy. 129 through Robbinsville to Lake
Santeetlah.Tum left onto Thunderbird Mtn. Rd. Go past Santeetlah Marina. The facility is located on the left.
System Classifications: WW2, SI,
Primary ORC: Certification: Phone:
Secondary ORC(s):
On -Site Representative(s):
Related Permits:
Inspection Date: 12/09/2016 Entry Time: 01:OOPM
Primary Inspector: Beverly Price DID
Secondary Inspector(s):
Reason for Inspection: Routine
Permit Inspection Type: Reclaimed Water
Facility Status: ❑ Compliant Not Compliant
Question Areas:
Miscellaneous Questions Record Keeping
(See attachment summary)
Exit Time: 02:OOPM
Phone: [phone]
Inspection Type: Compliance Evaluation
Page: 1

Permit: WQ0031396 Owner - Facility: Ibex Thunderbird LLC
Inspection Date: 12/09/2016 Inspection Type: Compliance Evaluation Reason for Visit: Routh
Inspection Summary:
The inspection was conducted by Beverly Price and Mikal Willmer of the Asheville Regional Office.
Several attempts were made to contact Mr. Jose Rosado.
The facility appears to be complete with the exception of monitoring wells but it is not being operated or maintained at this
time.
The permit expired April 30, 2016.
Page: 2

Permit: WQ0031396
m Date: 12/09/2016
Owner - Facility: Ibex Thunderbird LLC
Inspection Type: Compliance Evaluation Reason for Visit: Routine
Record Keeping
Is a copy of current permit available?
Are monitoring reports present: NDMR?
NDAR?
Are flow rates less than of permitted flow?
Are flow rates less than of permitted flow?
Are application- rates adhered to?
Is GW monitoring being conducted, if required (GW-59s submitted)?
Are all samples analyzed for all required parameters?
Are there any 2L GW quality violations?
Is GW-59A certification form completed for facility?
Is effluent sampled for same parameters as GW?
Do effluent concentrations exceed GW standards?
Are annual soil reports available?
# Are PAN records required?
# Did last soil report indicate a need for lime?
If so, has it been applied?
Are operational logs present?
Are lab sheets available for review?
Do lab sheets support data reported on NDMR?
Do lab sheets support data reported on GW-59s?
Are Operational and Maintenance records present?
Were Operational and Maintenance records complete?
Has permittee been free of public complaints in last 12 months?
Is a copy of the SOC readily available?
No treatment units bypassed since last inspection?
Comment:
Yes No NA NE
❑ ❑ ❑ ❑
❑ ❑ ❑ ❑
❑ ❑ ❑ ❑
❑ ❑ ❑ ❑
❑ ❑ ❑ ❑
❑ ❑ ❑ ❑
❑ ❑ ❑ ❑
❑ ❑ ❑ ❑
❑ ❑ ❑ ❑
❑ ❑ ❑ ❑
❑ ❑ ❑ ❑
❑ ❑ ❑ ❑
❑ ❑ ❑ ❑
❑ ❑ ❑ ❑
❑ ❑ ❑ ❑
❑ ❑ ❑ ❑
❑ ❑ ❑ ❑
❑ ❑ ❑ ❑
❑ ❑ ❑ ❑
❑ ❑ ❑ ❑
❑ ❑ ❑ ❑
❑ ❑ ❑ ❑
❑ ❑ ❑ ❑
❑ ❑ ❑ ❑
❑ ❑ ❑ ❑
Page: 3

Click Here To:
Page 1 of 1
North Carolina
Elaine F Marshall DEPARTMENT oFrHE:
Secretary SECRETARYOFSTATE
PO Box 29622 Raleigh, NC 2762"622 [phone] Account
Login
Register
View Document Filings File an Annual Report Amend a Previous Annual Report
Print a Pre -Populated Annual Report form
Corporate Names
Legal: Ibex Thunderbird, L.L.C. L&4_s-a2. - PAw c
Limited Liability Company Information
Sosid:
0585815
Status:
Wdn N*&iss_olvBA
Annual Report Status:
Not Applicable
Citizenship:
Domestic
Date Formed:
3/27/2001
Fiscal Month:
December
Registered Agent:
Rosado, Jose F
Corporate Addresses
Mailing:
13002 San Jose Street
Coral Gables, FL 33156
Principal Office:
13002 San Jose Street
Coral Gables, FL 33156
Reg Office:
90 Old Lodge Road
Lake Santeetlah, NC 28771
Reg Mailing:
90 Old Lodge Road
Lake Santeetlah, NC 28771
Company Officials
All LLCs are managed by their managers pursuant to N.C.G.S. 57D-3-20.
Manager: IBEX Mountain Ventures, Inc.
13002 San Jose Street
Coral Gables FL 33156
http://www.sosnc.gov/Search/profcorp/5320213
12/30/2016

Permit: WQ0031396
SOC:
County: Graham
Region: Asheville
Compliance Inspection Report
Effective: 05/15/07 ExpirationLn-
: - 04/30/16 Owner: Ibex Thunderbird LLC.
Effective: Expirati�/ Facility: Santeetlah Lakeside - Phase II
90 Old Lodge Rd
Lake Santeetlah NC 28771
Contact Person: Jose F Rosado Title: Phone: [phone]
Directions to Facility:
Hwy.19 through the Nantahala Gorge. Turn right onto Hwy. 129 to Robbinsville. Continue on Hwy. 129 through Robbinsville to Lake
Santeetlah.Tum left onto Thunderbird Mtn. Rd. Go past Santeetlah Marina. The facility is located on the left.
System Classifications: WW2, SI,
Primary ORC: Certification: Phone:
Secondary ORC(s):
On -Site Representative(s):
Related Permits:
Inspection Date: 12/09/2016 Entry Time: 01:OOPM
Primary Inspector: Beverly Price
Secondary Inspector(s):
Reason for Inspection: Routine
Permit Inspection Type: Reclaimed Water
Facility Status: ❑ Compliant Not Compliant
Question Areas:
Miscellaneous Questions Record Keeping
(See attachment summary) /
VA C)
C, lab
$ %to
Exit Time: 02:OOPM
Phone: [phone]
Inspection Type: Compliance Evaluation
Page: 1

Permit: WQ0031396 Owner - Facility: Ibex Thunderbird LLC
Inspection Date: 12/09/2016 Inspection Type : Compliance Evaluation Reason for Visit: Routine
Inspection Summary:
Page: 2

Permit: WQ0031396 Owner - Facility: Ibex Thunderbird LLC
Inspection Date: 12/09/2016 Inspection Type : Compliance Evaluation Reason for Visit: Routine
Record Keeping
Is a copy of current permit available?
Are monitoring reports present: NDMR?
NDAR?
Are flow rates less than of permitted flow?
Are flow rates less than of permitted flow?
Are application rates adhered to?
Is GW monitoring being conducted, if required (GW-59s submitted)?
Are all samples analyzed for all required parametei
Are there any 2L GW quality violations? if
Is GW-59A certification form completed/for facility?
Is effluent sampled for same parameters as GW?
Do effluent concentrations exceed GW standards?
Are annual soil reports available?
r
# Are PAN records reauired?
# Did last soil report indicate a need for lime?
r
If so, has it beeWapplied?
Are operational logs present?
Are lab sheets available for review?
Do lab sheets support data reported on NDMR?
Do lab sheets support data reported on GW-59s?
Are Operational, and Maintenance records present?
Were Operational and Maintenance records complete?
Has permittee been free of public complaints in last 12 months?
i
Is a copy of Xhe SOC readily available?
e
No treatment units bypassed since last inspection?
Commentr:
t
Yes No NA NE
❑ ❑ ❑ ❑
❑ ❑ ❑ ❑
❑ ❑ ❑ ❑
❑ ❑ ❑ ❑
❑ ❑ ❑ ❑
❑ ❑ ❑ ❑
❑ ❑ ❑ ❑
❑ ❑ ❑ ❑
❑ ❑ ❑ ❑
❑ ❑ ❑ ❑
❑ ❑ ❑ ❑
❑❑❑❑
❑ ❑ ❑ ❑
❑ ❑ ❑ ❑
❑ ❑ ❑ ❑
❑ ❑ ❑ ❑
❑ ❑ ❑ ❑
❑ ❑ ❑ ❑
❑ ❑ ❑ ❑
❑ ❑ ❑ ❑
❑ ❑ ❑ ❑
Page: 3

Y COOPER
Fernor
MICHAEL S. REGAN
Secretary
LINDA CULPEPPER
Director
NORTH CAROLINA
Environmental Quality
JACK MINSKI — MANAGING MEMBER
LAKE POINT PROPERTIES ON SANTEETLAH, LLC
1815 GRIFFIN ROAD, SUITE 404
DANIA, FLORIDA 33004
Dear Mr. Minksi:
In accordance with your pi
°�, and subsequent additi
Permit No. WQ0031396 dated 'ern
construction only of the subject > eclair
The folloi
Ibex Thunderbird,
This
Permit Nor
The Pe -
differ from the
maintaining the
the subj
Permit No. WQ0031396
`Santeetlah Lakeside WWTP
ReGaimed Water Generation and
Tedcated Utilization System
change iegtiest received December 19, 2018,
io�
orl recelvedbAT� E(S , we are forwarding herewith
Lake Polrit''� perties on Santeetlah LLC for the
lerattq tilization facilities.
f/ y¢
perm re asWq llWs the permittee has changed from
tryshall beVfective H . tkie date 6VINssuance through + rMNTND`" Z ,shall void
�� , 1/ ffif 1G %92
%96 Issued ` ay 15; 26 Fad shall bOubject to the conditions and limitations therein.
11 sui mi a r ni r1 applicatiouAo.2later than AT + W U
f� ,"M
attention tofxrlonitorttk;equirements listed Attachments A, B, and C for they may
1ous permit` ssuance. �filure to establish an adequate system for collecting and
fixed operationalalformation shall result in future compliance problems.
The Division h >�em V d: the following permit condition 1 e+andition since the last permit
issuance dated May 15,0`::`
➢ Old Condition H.14. — This condition is not necessary.
The following permit conditions are new since the last permit issuance dated May 15, 2007:
➢ Condition I.7. — Within 30 days of construction, a Well Construction Record (Form GW-1)
listing this permit number and the appropriate monitoring well identification number shall be
submitted for each well constructed.
➢ Condition IV.8. — This condition has been updated.
➢ Condition VI.8. —This permit is subject to revocation or modification upon 60-day notice from
the Division Director, in whole or part.
North Carolina Department of Environmental Quality I Division of Water Resources
E�1/�
512 North Salisbury Street J 1617 Mail Service Center I Raleigh, North Carolina 27699-1617
Noan+oaPDU!�'
��"^ Qt�j�._ ^Wautfft\ /�
919.707.9000

Mr. Jack Minski
WAN : RM1
Page 2 of 2
➢ Condition VI.9. — Unless the Division Director grants a variance, expansion of the facilities
permitted herein shall not occur.
➢ Attachment A — The PPI's have been modified.
If any parts, requirements, or limitations contained in this permit are unacceptable, the Permittee
has the right to request an adjudicatory hearing upon written request within 30 days following receipt of
this permit. This request shall be in the form of a written petition, conforming to Chapter 150B of the North
Carolina General Statutes, and filed with the Office of Administrative Hearings at 6714 Mail Service
Center, Raleigh, NC 27699-6714. Otherwise, this permit shall be final and binding.
If you need additional information concerning this permit, please contact Tessa Monday at (919)
707-3660 or [e-mail].
Sincerely,
Linda Culpepper, Director
Division of Water Resources
cc: Graham County Health Department (Electronic Copy)
Asheville Regional Office, Water Quality Regional Operations Section (Electronic Copy)
Laserfiche File (Electronic Copy)
Digital Permit Archive (Electronic Copy)
Central Files

NORTH CAROLINA
ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT COMMISSION
DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY
RALEIGH
RECLAIMED WATER GENERATION AND DEDICATED UTILIZATION SYSTEM PERMIT
In accordance with the provisions of Article 21 of Chapter 143, General Statutes of North Carolina as
amended, and other applicable Laws, Rules, and Regulations
PERMISSION IS HEREBY GRANTED TO
Lake Point Properties on Santeetlah, LLC
Graham County
FOR THE
construction onl 4,120 gallon per day (GPD) reclaimed water generation and dedicated utilization
Cfa—ciTi—ty consisting of_._.
an influent flow measuring device; a 5,000 gallon baffled septic tank with an effluent filter; a 3,750 gallon
flow equalization tank with two submersible pumps rated at 30 gallons per minute (GPM) and
audible/visual high water alarms; a Bioclere Unit Model # 24/20 with a 1,847 gallon Ist stage and 2,377
gallon 21 stage trickling filter and four submersible dosing pumps rated at 10 GPM; a Bioclere unit Model
# 24/24 with a 1,600 gallon clarifier and two submersible sludge return pumps rated at 35 GPM; a sand
filter feed tank with two centrifugal self -priming feed pumps rated at 15.7 GPM and audible/visual high
water alarms; two automatic backwash sand filters; a filter backwash tank with two centrifugal self -priming
backwash pumps rated at 48 GPM; a chemical feed tank with a pump for pH adjustment and 1/4 horsepower
(hp) mixer; four ultraviolet (UV) disinfection banks each with two lamps and rated for 40 GPM; a
turbidimeter; a standby generator; an effluent flow measuring device; four 15,000 gallon interconnected
storage tanks; a 3,490 gallon dosing tank with two submersible turbine pumps and audible/visual high water
alarms; two 10,300 gallon interconnected tanks providing five day upset storage with a submersible 20
GPM return pump; four drip irrigation fields providing 0.45 acres of wetted area; and all associated piping,
valves, controls, and appurtenances
to serve the Santeetlah Lakeside WWTP consisting of 26 bedrooms on 13 residential lots, a private
bathhouse restroom, and a 1,500 square foot (W) food stand, with no dischargeeoo wastes to surface waters,
pursuant to the application received December 19, 2018; subsequent additional
information received 1�,E and in conformity with the Division -approved plans and specifications
considered a part of this permit.
This permit shall be effective from the date of issuance through , shall void Permit
No. WQ0031396 issued May 15, 2007, and shall be subject to the following conditions and limitations:
I. SCHEDULES
1. Prior to the Division permitting operation of the subject permit, the Permittee shall submit a plat map
that has been recorded in the Graham County Register of Deeds, and the plat map shall delineate the
exact location of the recreational amenity, and note the recreational amenity as the responsibility of the
Homeowners Association (HOA).
WQ0031396 Version 2.0 Shell Version 181211 Page 1 of

41
2. Prior to the Division permitting operation of the subject permit, the Declaration of Covenants, Bylaws,
etc. shall be amended to include information about the proposed recreational amenity. At a minimum,
this .information shall include the residential owners financial responsibilities to upkeep and maintain
the recreational amenity through the contracted landscaping company. In addition, a budget shall be
provided showing how much each residential owner must annually pay to maintain the recreational
amenity. The aforementioned documents shall be submitted to the Division along with a minor permit
modification request asking for permission to operate the subject wastewater treatment and reclaimed
utilization facility. These documents shall also be in compliance with Condition II.14. and the attached
Operational Agreement.
Upon completion of construction and prior to operation of the permitted facility, the Permittee shall
submit an engineering certification from a North Carolina licensed Professional Engineer certifying
that the permitted facility has been constructed in accordance with G.S. 143-215.1, Administrative
Code Title 15A Subchapter 02U, this permit, and the Division -approved plans and specifications. For
phased and partially certified facilities, the Permittee shall retain the responsibility to track further
construction approved under this permit, and shall provide a final engineering certification upon project
completion. Mail the Engineering Certification to the Division of Water Resources, Non -Discharge
Branch, 1617 Mail Service Center, Raleigh, NC 27699-1617, or [e-mail].
[15A NCAC 02T .0I 16(a)]
4. The Permittee shall notify the Asheville Regional Office, telephone number [phone], at least
two business days in advance of initial operation of the constructed facilities so that the Division can
conduct a startup inspection. [15A NCAC 02T .0108(b)(1)(B)]
The Asheville Regional Office, telephone number [phone], shall approve monitoring wells
MW-1 and MW-2 prior to installation, and the monitoring wells shall be installed prior to beginning
waste disposal operations. The Asheville Regional Office shall be notified at least two business days
in advance of construction of any monitoring well. The monitoring wells shall be constructed such
that the water level in the well is never above or below the screened portion of the well, and in
accordance. with 15A NCAC 02C .0108. The general location and Division -approved name for each
monitoring well is on Figure 1. [15A NCAC 02C .0108, 02T .0108(b)(1)(B)]
6. Within 90 days of completing installation of monitoring wells MW-1 and MW-2, the Permittee shall
submit two original copies and one digital copy of a site map with a scale no greater than 1-inch equals
100 feet; however, special provisions may be granted upon prior approval for large properties. The
map shall include the following information:
a. Legend, north arrow, scale, and legible in black and white.
b. Topographic contour intervals not exceeding 10 feet or 25 percent of total site relief.
c. All.habitable residences or places of assembly within 500 feet of the irrigation area.
d. Location of all wells, streams (ephemeral, intermittent, and perennial), springs, lakes, ponds,
ditches, and other surface drainage features within 500 feet of the irrigation area. -
e. Location and identification of each monitoring well (identify any background/upgradient wells).
f. Latitude and longitude coordinates of each monitoring wells (decimal degrees to the sixth decimal
degree and in NAD83).
g. Location and identification of major components of the waste disposal system.
h. The perimeter of all irrigation areas with field names (named according to the approved permit)
i. Location and ownership of property boundaries within 500 feet of the irrigation area (including
road/rail right-of-ways and easements).
j. Latitude and longitude of the established horizontal control monument (decimal degrees to the sixth
decimal degree).
k. Elevation of the top of the well casing (i.e., measuring point) relative to a common datum.
1. Depth of water below the measuring point at the time the measuring point is established.
in. Delineation of the compliance and review boundaries.
n. Distance measurements verifying all setbacks are being met.
o. Stormwater drainage controls.
p. 100-year floodplain.
WQ0031396 Version 2.0 . Shell Version 181211 Page 2 of

Pr
q. The date the map is prepared and/or revised.
Boundaries and physical features not under purview of other licensed professions shall be provided by
a Professional Surveyor. Control monuments shall be installed in such a manner and made of such
materials that the monument will not be destroyed due to activities taking place on the property. The
map and any supporting documentation shall be sent to the Division of Water Resources, Non -
Discharge Branch, .1617 Mail Service Center, Raleigh, NC 27699-1617, or Non-
Discharge.Reportsgncdenr.gov. [15ANCAC 02C .0105(f), 02T .0108(b)(1)(B)]
Within 30 days of construction, a Well Construction Record (Form GW-1) listing this permit number
and the appropriate monitoring well identification number shall be completed for each well constructed,
and mailed to the Division of Water Resources, Non -Discharge Branch, 1617 Mail Service Center,
Raleigh, NC 27699-1617, or Non-Discharge.Reportsgncdenr. og_v. A North Carolina Certified Well
Contractor shall construct the monitoring wells according to the North Carolina Well Construction
Standards (15A NCAC 02C .0113) and local county rules. [15A NCAC 02C .0113, 02T
.0108(b)(1)(B)]
8. . The Permittee shall request renewal of this permit on Division -approved forms no later than
!� . [15A NCAC 02T .0105(b), 02T .0109]
H. PERFORMANCE STANDARDS
The Permittee shall maintain and operate the subject reclaimed water facilities so there is no discharge
to surface waters, nor any contravention of groundwater or surface water standards. In the event the
facilities fail to perform satisfactorily, including the creation of nuisance conditions due to improper
operation and maintenance, the Permittee shall take immediate corrective actions, including Division
required actions, such as the construction of additional or replacement reclaimed water generation and
utilization facilities., [15A NCAC 02T .0 1 08(b)(1)(A)]
2. This permit shall not relieve the Permittee of their responsibility for damages to groundwater or surface
water resulting from the operation of this facility. [15A NCAC 02T .0108(b)(1)(A)]
3. Groundwater monitoring wells shall be constructed in accordance with 15A NCAC 02C .0108
(Standards of Construction for Wells Other than Water Supply), and any other jurisdictional laws and
regulations pertaining to well construction. [15A NCAC 02C .0108]
4. Effluent limitations for generated reclaimed water shall not exceed those specified in Attachment A.
[15A NCAC 02U .0301]
5. Application rates shall not exceed those specified in Attachment B. [15A NCAC 02U .0401(g)]
6. All reclaimed water valves, storage facilities, and outlets shall be tagged or labeled to warn the public
or employees that the water is not intended for drinking. [15A NCAC 02U .0403(b)]
7. All reclaimed water piping, valves, outlets, and other appurtenances shall be color -coded, taped, or
otherwise, marked to identify the source of the water as being reclaimed water as follows:
a. All reclaimed water piping and appurtenances shall be either colored purple (Pantone 522 or
equivalent) and embossed or integrally stamped or marked "CAUTION: RECLAIMED WATER -
DO NOT DRINK" or be installed with a purple (Pantone 522 or equivalent) identification tape or
polyethylene vinyl wrap. The warning shall be stamped on opposite sides of the pipe and repeated
every three feet or less;
b. Identification tape shall be at least three inches wide and have white or black lettering on purple
(Pantone 522 or equivalent) field stating "CAUTION: RECLAIMED WATER - DO NOT
DRINK". Identification tape shall be installed on top of reclaimed water pipelines, fastened at least
every 10 feet to each pipe length and run continuously the entire length of the pipe; and
WQ0031396 Version 2.0 Shell Version 181211 Page 3 of

c. Existing underground distribution systems retrofitted for the purpose of conveying reclaimed water
shall be .taped or otherwise identified as noted IV.5.a. and IV.5.b. This identification need not
extend the entire length of the distribution system but shall be incorporated within 10 feet of
crossing any potable water supply line or sanitary sewer line.
[15A NCAC 02U .0403(c)]
8. All reclaimed water valves and outlets shall be of a type, or secured in a manner, that permits operation
by personnel authorized by the entity that operates the reclaimed water system. [15A NCAC 02U
.0403(d)]
9. Hose bibs shall be located in locked, below grade vaults that shall be labeled as being of non -potable
quality. As an alternative to the use of locked vaults with standard hose bib services, other locking
mechanisms such as hose bibs that can only be operated by a tool may be placed above ground and
labeled as non -potable water. [15A NCAC 02U .0403(e)]
10. There shall be no direct cross -connections between the reclaimed water and potable water systems,
unless such connection has been approved by the Department pursuant to 15A NCAC 18C .0406. [15A
NCAC 02U .0403(f)]
11. Reclaimed water irrigation fields permitted on or after September 1, 2006 have compliance and review
boundaries established at the irrigation area boundaries. Any exceedance of groundwater standards at
or beyond the compliance boundary shall require corrective action. Division -approved relocation of
the compliance boundary shall be noted in Attachment B. Multiple contiguous properties under
common ownership and permitted for use as a disposal system shall be treated as a single property with
regard to determination of a compliance boundary. [15A NCAC 02L .0106, 02T .0105(h), 02U
.0501(a)(6), G.S. 143-215.1(i), G.S. 143-215.1(k)]
12. The Permittee shall apply for a permit modification to establish a new compliance boundary prior to
any sale or transfer of property affecting a compliance boundary (i.e., parcel subdivision). [ 15A NCAC
02L .0107(c)]
13. No wells, excluding Division -approved monitoring wells, shall be constructed within the compliance
boundary except as provided for in 15A NCAC 02L-.0107(g). [15A NCAC 02L .0107]
14. Except as provided for in 15A NCAC 02L .0107(g), the Permittee shall ensure any landowner who is
not the Permittee and owns land within the compliance boundary shall execute and file with the Graham
County Register of Deeds an easement running with the land containing the following items:
a. A notice of the permit and number or other description as allowed in 15A NCAC 02L .0107(f)(1);
b. Prohibits construction and operation of water supply wells within the compliance boundary; and
c. Reserves the right of the Permittee or the State to enter the property within the compliance boundary
for purposes related to the permit.
The Director may terminate the easement when its purpose has been fulfilled or is no longer needed.
[ 15A NCAC 02L .0107(f)]
WQ003.1396 Version 2.0 Shell Version 181211 Page 4 of

V15.P
The facilities herein were permitted per the following setbacks:
a. The reclaimed water irrigation sites were originally permitted May 15, 2007. The setbacks for drip
irrigation sites originally permitted or modified from September 1, 2006 to June 17, 2011 are as
follows (all distances in feet):
i. Surface waters classified SA: 100
ii. Surface waters not classified SA: 25
iii. Each well with exception of monitoring wells: 100
[15A NCAC 02T .0912(b)]
b. The storage and treatment units were originally permitted May 15, 2007. The setbacks for storage
and treatment units originally permitted or modified from September 1, 2006 to June 17, 2011 are
as follows (all distances in feet):
i. Each habitable residence or place of assembly under separate ownership: 1001
ii. Each private or public water supply source: 100
iii. Surface waters: 50
iv. Each well with exception of monitoring wells: 100
v. Each property line: 50 2
1 Habitable residences or places of assembly under separate ownership constructed after the
facilities herein were originally permitted or subsequently modified are exempt from this
setback.
2 Setbacks to property lines are not applicable when the Permittee, or the entity from which the
Permittee is leasing, owns both parcels separated by the property line.
[15A NCAC 02T .0912(a)]
III. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
The Permittee shall operate and maintain the subject facilities as anon -discharge system. [15A NCAC
02U .0101]
2. The Permittee shall maintain an Operation and Maintenance Plan, which shall include:
a. A description of the operation of the system in detail to show what operations are necessary for the
system to function and by whom the operations are to be conducted;
b. A description of anticipated maintenance of the system;
c. Provisions for safety measures, including restriction of access to the site and equipment; and
d. Spill control provisions that include response to upsets and bypasses, including control,
containment, and remediation, and contact information for personnel, emergency responders, and
regulatory agencies;
[15A NCAC 02U .0801(a)]
3. Upon the Water Pollution Control System Operators Certification Commission's (WPCSOCC)
classification of the subject non -discharge facilities, the Permittee shall designate and employ a certified
operator in responsible charge (ORC), and one or more certified operators as back-up ORCs. The ORC
or their back-up shall operate and visit the facilities as required by the WPCSOCC. [15A NCAC 02T
.0117]
4. An operator certified by the Water Pollution Control System Operators Certification Commission
(WPCSOCC) of a grade equivalent or greater than the facility classification shall be on call 24 hours
per day. [15A NCAC 02U .0401(e)]
WQ0031396 Version 2.0 Shell Version 181211 Page 5 of

5. The Permittee shall maintain vegetative cover on the irrigation sites, such that crop health is optimal,
allows even effluent distribution, and allows inspection of the irrigation system. [15A NCAC 02U
.0801(b)]
6. The Permittee shall take measures to prevent effluent ponding in or runoff from the irrigation sites
listed in Attachment B. [15A NCAC 02U .0801(c)]
7. The Permittee shall not irrigate treated effluent during inclement weather; or .when the soil is in a
condition that will cause ponding or runoff. [15A NCAC 02U .0401(k)]
8. The reclaimed water utilization system shall be connected to a rain or moisture sensor that shall indicate
when reclaimed water application is not appropriate in accordance with Conditions III.6. and 111.7.
9. Irrigation equipment shall be tested and calibrated once per permit cycle. [15A NCAC 02U .0801(d)]
10. Only reclaimed water generated from the Santeetlah Lakeside WWTP shall be irrigated on the sites
listed in Attachment B. [15A NCAC 02U .0101]
11. The Permittee shall not allow vehicles or heavy machinery on the irrigation area, except during
equipment installation or maintenance activities. .[15A NCAC 02U .0801(e)]
12. The Permittee shall prohibit public access to the wastewater treatment and storage facilities. [15A
NCAC 02U .0402(e)]
13. Public access to reclaimed water utilization sites shall be controlled during active site use. Such
controls may include the posting of signs showing the activities being conducted at each site. [15A
NCAC 02U .0501(a)(2)]
14. The Permittee shall dispose or utilize generated residuals in a Division -approved manner. [ 15A NCAC
02T .1100, 02U .0802].
15. The Permittee shall not divert or bypass untreated or partially treated reclaimed water from the subject
facilities. [15A NCAC 02U .0402(g)]
16. A protective vegetative cover shall be established and maintained on all berms, pipe runs, erosion
control areas, surface water diversions, and earthen embankments (i.e., outside toe of embankment to
maximum allowable temporary storage elevation on the inside of the embankment). Trees, shrubs, and
other woody vegetation shall not be allowed to grow on the earthen dikes or embankments. Earthen
embankments shall be kept mowed or otherwise controlled and accessible. [15A NCAC 02U .0801(g)]
17. Metering equipment shall be tested and calibrated annually. [15A NCAC 02U .0801(d)]
18. An automatically activated standby power source capable of powering all essential treatment units shall
be on site and operational at all times. If a generator is employed as an alternate power supply, it shall
be tested weekly by interrupting the primary power source. [15A NCAC 02U .0401(d)]
19. If turbidity exceeds 10 NTUs or if the permitted pathogen levels cannot be met, all effluent shall be
routed to the five day upset storage tank until the problems associated with the reclaimed water
generation system have been corrected. The water in the five day upset storage tank shall be pumped
back to the treatment plant headworks for re -treatment or treated in the five day upset storage tank prior
to utilization. [15A NCAC 02U .0402(d)]
20. The Permittee shall provide notification to the public and its employees about the use of reclaimed
water, and that reclaimed water is not intended for drinking. Such notification shall be provided to
employees in a language they can understand. [15A NCAC 02U .0501(a)(2)]
WQ0031396 Version 2.0 Shell Version 181211 Page 6 of

V21.P
The Permittee shall develop and implement an education program to inform users and its employees
about the proper use of reclaimed water. Educational material shall be provided to all residents and/or
other facilities provided with reclaimed water, and these materials shall be maintained consistent with
the reclaimed water uses. All educational materials shall be made available to the Division upon
request. [15A NCAC 02U .0501(a)(4)]
1 U� ffiel 1� CI O410M. ►1INA-09T ll 1 Quej.7XIM 19:3 11�►
1. The Permittee shall conduct and report any Division required monitoring necessary to evaluate this
facility's impact on groundwater and surface water. [15A NCAC 02T .0108(c)]
2. A Division -certified laboratory shall conduct all analyses for the required effluent, groundwater, and
surface water parameters. [15A NCAC 02H .0800]
3. Flow through the treatment facility shall be continuously monitored, and daily flow values shall be
reported on Form NDMR. Facilities with a permitted flow less than 10,000 GPD may estimate their
flow from water usage records provided the water source is metered. [15A NCAC 02T .0105(k), 02T
.0108(c)]
4. The Permittee shall monitor the generated reclaimed water at the frequencies and locations for the
parameters specified in Attachment A. [15A NCAC 02T .0108(c)]
5. The Permittee shall maintain records tracking the, amount of reclaimed water irrigated. These records
shall include the following information for each irrigation site listed in Attachment B:
a. Date of irrigation;
b. Volume of reclaimed water irrigated;
c. Site irrigated;
d. Length of time site is irrigated;
e. Continuous weekly, monthly, and year-to-date hydraulic (inches/acre) loadings;
f. Continuous monthly and year-to-date loadings for any non -hydraulic parameter specifically
limited in Attachment B;
g. Weather conditions; and
h. Maintenance of cover crops.
[15A NCAC 02T .0108(c)]
6. Three copies of all monitoring data (as specified in Conditions IV.3. and IV.4.) on Form NDMR for
each PPI and three copies of all operation and disposal records (as specified in Condition IV.5.) on
Form NDAR-1 for every site in Attachment B shall be submitted on or before the last day of the
following month. If no activities occurred during the monitoring month, monitoring reports are still
required documenting the absence of the activity. All information shall be submitted to the following
address:
Division of Water Resources
Information Processing Unit
1617 Mail Service Center
Raleigh, North Carolina 27699-1617
[15A NCAC 02T .0105(1)]
7. The Permittee shall maintain a record of all residuals removed from this facility. This record shall be
maintained for five years, and shall be made available to the Division upon request. This record shall
include:
a. Name of the residuals hauler;
b. Non -Discharge permit number authorizing the residuals disposal, or a letter from a municipality
agreeing to accept the residuals;
c. Date the residuals were hauled; and
WQ0031396 Version 2.0 Shell Version 181211 Page 7 of `

d. Volume of residuals removed.
[15A NCAC 02U .0802(b)]
8. A maintenance log shall be kept at this facility. This log shall be maintained for five years, and shall
be made available to the Division upon request. This log shall include:
a. Date of flow measurement device calibration;
b. Date of irrigation equipment calibration;
c. Date of turbidimeter calibration;
d. Date and results of power interruption testing on alternate power supply;
e. Visual observations of the plant and plant site; and
f. Record of preventative maintenance (e.g., changing of equipment, adjustments, testing, inspections
and cleanings, etc.); and
g. Record of all discharges of reclaimed water to surface waters or the land surface, including the date
of occurrence, estimated volume, and corrective action taken.
[15A NCAC 02U .0801(h)]
9. Monitoring wells MW-1 and MW-2 shall be sampled after construction, and within three months prior
to initiating reclaimed water utilization operations. Monitoring wells MW-1 and MW-2 shall be
sampled thereafter at the frequencies and for the parameters specified in Attachment C. All mapping,
well construction forms, well abandonment forms, and monitoring data shall refer to the permit number
and the well nomenclature as provided in Attachment C and Figure 1. [15A NCAC 02T .0105(m)]
10. For initial sampling of monitoring wells MW-1 and.MW-2, the Permittee shall submit a Compliance
Monitoring Form (GW-59) and a Well Construction Record Form (GW-1) listing this permit number
and the appropriate monitoring well identification number. Initial Compliance Monitoring Forms
(GW-59) without copies of the Well Construction Record Forms (GW-1) are deemed incomplete, and
maybe returned to the Permittee without being processed. [15A NCAC 02T .0105(m)]
11. Two copies of the monitoring well sampling and analysis results shall be submitted on a Compliance
Monitoring Form (GW-59), along with attached copies of laboratory analyses, on or before the last
working day of the month following the sampling month. The Compliance Monitoring Form (GW-59)
shall include this permit number, the appropriate well identification number, and one GW-59a
certification form shall be submitted with each set of sampling results. All information shall be
submitted to the following address:
Division of Water Resources
Information Processing Unit
1617 Mail Service Center
Raleigh, North Carolina 27699-1617
[15ANCAC 02T .0105(m)]
17. Noncompliance Notification:
The Permittee shall report to the Asheville Regional Office, telephone number [phone], within
24 hours of first knowledge of the following:
a. Treatment of wastes abnormal in quantity or characteristic, including the known passage of a
hazardous substance.
b. Any process unit failure (e.g., mechanical, electrical, etc.) rendering the facility incapable of
adequate wastewater treatment.
c. Any failure resulting in a discharge untreated or partially treated wastewater to surface waters.
d. Any failure resulting in a discharge of reclaimed water directly to surface waters or any unpermitted
release of reclaimed water to land surface greater than or equal to 5,000 gallons. Unpermitted
releases less than 5,000 gallons to land surface shall be documented by the Permittee in accordance
with Condition IV.8.g. but do not require Regional Office notification.
WQ0031396 Version 2.0 Shell Version 181211 Page 8 of

e. Any time self -monitoring indicates the facility has gone out of compliance with its permit
limitations.
f. Ponding in or runoff from the irrigation sites.
Emergencies requiring reporting outside normal business hours shall call the Division's Emergency
Response personnel at telephone number [phone], [phone], or [phone]. All
noncompliance notifications shall file a written report to the Asheville Regional Office within five days
of first knowledge of the occurrence, and this report shall outline the actions proposed or taken to ensure
the problem does not recur. [15A NCAC 02T .0108(b)(1)(A)]
V. INSPECTIONS
1. The Permittee shall perform inspections and maintenance to ensure proper operation of the reclaimed
water generation and utilization facilities. [15A NCAC 02U .0801(i)]
2. The Permittee shall inspect the reclaimed water generation and utilization facilities to prevent
malfunctions, facility deterioration, and operator errors that may result in discharges of wastes to the
environment, threats to human health, or public nuisances. The Permittee shall maintain an inspection
log that includes the date and time of inspection, observations made, and maintenance, repairs, or
corrective actions taken. The Permittee shall maintain this inspection log for a period of five years
from the date of the inspection, and this log shall be made available to the Division upon request. [15A
NCAC 02U .0801(h), 02U .0801(i)]
Division authorized representatives may, upon presentation of credentials, enter and inspect any
property, premises, or place related to the reclaimed water generation and utilization facilities permitted
herein at any reasonable time for determining compliance with this permit. Division authorized
representatives may inspect or copy records maintained under the terms and conditions of this permit,
and may collect groundwater, surface water, or leachate samples. [G.S. 143-215.3(a)(2)]
VI. GENERAL CONDITIONS
Failure to comply with the conditions and limitations contained herein may subject the Permittee to a
Division enforcement action. [G.S. 143-215.6A, 143-215.613, 143-215.6C]
2. This permit is effective only with respect to the nature and volume of wastes described in the permit
application, and Division -approved plans and specifications. [G.S. 143-215.1(d)]
3. Unless specifically requested and approved in this permit, there are no variances to administrative codes
or general statutes governing the construction or operation of the facilities permitted herein. [15A
NCAC 02T .0105(n)]
4. The issuance of this permit does not exempt the Permittee from complying with all statutes, rules,
regulations, or ordinances that other jurisdictional government agencies (e.g., local, state, and federal)
may require. [15A NCAC 02T .0105(c)(6)]
5. If the permitted facilities change ownership, or the Permittee changes their name, the Permittee shall
submit a permit modification request on Division -approved forms. The Permittee shall comply with
all terms and conditions of this permit until the permit is transferred to the successor -owner. [G.S. 143-
215.1(d3)]
6. The Permittee shall retain a set of Division -approved plans and specifications for the life of the facilities
permitted herein. [15A NCAC 02T .0105(o)]
7. The Permittee shall maintain this permit until the proper closure of all facilities permitted herein, or
until the facilities permitted herein are permitted by another authority. [15A NCAC 02T .01050)]
WQ0031396 Version 2.0 Shell Version 181211 Page 9 of

This permit is subject to revocation or modification upon 60-day notice from the Division Director, in
whole or part for:
a. violation of any terms or conditions of this permit or Administrative Code Title 15A Subchapter
02U;
b. obtaining a permit by misrepresentation or failure to disclose all relevant facts;
c. the Permittee's refusal to allow authorized Department employees upon presentation of credentials:
i. to enter the Permittee's premises where a system is located or where any records are required
to be kept;
ii. to have access to any permit required documents and records;
iii. to inspect any monitoring equipment or method as required in this permit; or
iv. to sample any pollutants;
d. the Permittee's failure to pay the annual fee for administering and compliance monitoring; or
e. a Division determination that the conditions of this permit are in conflict with North Carolina
Administrative Code or General Statutes.
[15A NCAC 02T .0110]
9. Unless the Division Director grants a variance, expansion of the facilities permitted herein shall not
occur if any of the following apply:
a. The Permittee or any parent, subsidiary, or other affiliate of the Permittee has been convicted of
environmental crimes under G.S. 143-215.613, or under Federal law that would otherwise be
prosecuted under G.S. 143-215.613, and all appeals of this conviction have been abandoned or
exhausted.
b. The Permittee or any parent, subsidiary, or other affiliate of the Permittee has previously abandoned
a wastewater treatment facility without properly closing the facility.
c. The Permittee or any parent, subsidiary, or other affiliate of the Permittee has not paid a civil
penalty, and all appeals of this penalty have been abandoned or exhausted.
d. The Permittee or any parent, subsidiary, or other affiliate of the Permittee is currently not compliant
with any compliance schedule in a permit, settlement agreement, or order.
e. The Permittee or any parent, subsidiary, or other affiliate of the Permittee has not paid an annual
fee.
[15A NCAC 02T .0120(b), 02T .0120(d)]
10. This permit shall not be renewed if the Permittee or any affiliation has not paid the required annual fee.
[15A NCAC 02T .0120(c)]
Permit issued this the N day of
NORTH CAROLINA ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT COMMISSION
Linda Culpepper, Director
Division of Water Resources
By Authority of the Environmental Management Commission
Permit Number WQ0031396
WQ0031396 Version 2.0 Shell Version 181211 Page 10 of 91

FPermit No. WQ0031396
Lake Point Properties on
Santeetlah, LLC
Santeetlah Lakeside
WWTP
❑ Partial ❑ Final
Reclaimed Water Generation and Dedicated Utilization System
ENGINEERING CERTIFICATION
Graham County
as a duly licensed North Carolina Professional
Engineer, having ❑ periodically / ❑ fully observed the construction of the permitted facilities, do hereby
state to the best of my abilities that the facility was constructed in compliance with G.S. 143-215.1,
Administrative Code Title 15A Subchapter 02U, this permit, and the Division -approved plans and
specifications.
Documentation of any variation to this permit, and the Division -approved plans and specifications, is in the
attached as -built drawings.
Description of variations:
THE COMPLETED ENGINEERING CERTIFICATION, INCLUDING ALL SUPPORTING
DOCUMENTATION, SHALL BE SENT TO THE FOLLOWING ADDRESS:
NORTH CAROLINA DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY
DIVISION OF WATER RESOURCES
NON -DISCHARGE BRANCH
By U.S. Postal Service By Courier/Special Delivery
1617 MAIL, SERVICE CENTER 512 N. SALISBURY ST.
RALEIGH, NORTH CAROLINA 27699-1617 RALEIGH, NORTH CAROLINA 27604
WQ0031396 Version 2.0 ;' Shell Version 181211 Page 11 of

ATTACHMENT A — LIMITATIONS AND MONITORING REQUIREMENTS
PPI 001— Reclaimed Water Generation System Effluent
Permit Number: WQ0031396 Version: 2.0
EFFLUENT CHARACTERISTICS
EFFLUENT LIMITS
MONITORING REQUIREMENTS
PCs
Code
Parameter Description
Units of
Measure
Monthly
Average
Monthly
Geometric Mean
Daily Minimum
Daily Maximum
Measurement
Frequency
Sample
Type
00310
BOD, 5-Day (20 °C)
mg/L
10
15
4 x Year 3
Composite
00940
Chloride (as Cl)
mg/L
3 x Year
Composite
31616
Coliform, Fecal MF, M-FC Broth, 44.5 °C
#/100 mL
14
25
4 x Year 3
Composite
50050
Flow, in Conduit or thru Treatment Plant
GPD
4,1204
Continuous
Recording
50050
Flow, in Conduit or thru Treatment Plant
GPD
4,1205
®
Continuous
Recording
50050
Flow, in Conduit or thru Treatment Plant
GPD
4,1201
Continuous
Recording
00610
Nitrogen, Ammonia Total (as N)
mg/L
4
6
4 x Year 3
Composite
00625
Nitrogen, Kjeldahl, Total (as N)
mg/L
4 x Year 3
Composite
00620
Nitrogen, Nitrate Total (as N)
mg/L
4 x Year 3
Composite
00615
Nitrogen, Nitrite Total (as N)
mg/L
4 x Year 3
Composite
00600
Nitrogen, Total (as N)
,..,./i
i 9-n
,
00400
pH
su
6
9
Weekly z
Grab
00663
ffig/L
70300
Solids, Total Dissolved —180 °C
mg/L
3 x Year 1
Grab
00530
Solids, Total Suspended
mg/L
5
10
4 x Year 3
Composite
00076
Turbidity, HCH Turbidimeter
NTU
10
Continuous
Recording
1. 3 x Year sampling shall occur March, July, and November.
2. pH can be 'Ter Event" if the Permittee documents that the facility irrigates at a rate less than once per week.
3. 4 x Year sampling shall occur March, May, June, and November
4. Due to the seasonal nutrient uptake variation of the irrigation field vegetation, the monthly average flow limitation is 4,120 GPD from May through October
5. Due to the seasonal nutrient uptake variation of the irrigation field vegetation, the monthly average flow limitation is 2,750 GPD in April and November
6. Due to the seasonal nutrient uptake variation of the irrigation field vegetation, the monthly average flow limitation is 1,360 GPD from December through March
WQ0031396 Version 2.0 Attachment A
PagAll

THIS PAGE BLANK

ATTACHMENT B — APPROVED DEDICATED LAND APPLICATION SITES
Lake Point Properties on Santeetlah, LLC — Santeetlah Lakeside WWTP
Permit Number: WQ0031396 Version: 2.0
IRRIGATION AREA INFORMATION
APPLICATION LIMITATIONS
Field
Owner
County
Latitude
Longitude
Net
Dominant
Parameter
Hourly
Yearly
Units
Acreage
Soil Series
Rate
Max
1
Lake Point Properties on
Graham
35.3650
-83.85890
0.11
JbE
01284 — Non -Discharge Application Rate
0.12
88.57
inches
Santeetlah, LLC
WQ09 — Plant Available Nitrogen
152
lbs/ac/yr
2
Lake Point Properties on
Graham
35.3650
-83.85890
0.11
JbE
01284 — Non -Discharge Application Rate
0.12
inches
Santeetlah, LLC
WQ09 — Plant Available Nitrog
152
lbs/ac/yr
3
Lake Point Properties on
Graham
35.3650
-83.85890
0.12
JbE
01284 — Non -Discharge Application Rate
0.12
inches
Santeetlah, LLC
WQ09 — Plant Available Nitrog
152
lbs/ac/yr
4
Lake Point Properties on
Graham
35.3650
-83.85890
0.12
JbE
01284 — Non -Discharge Application Rate
0.12
inches
Santeetlah, LLC
WQ09 — Plant Available Nitrog
152
lbs/ac/yr
Totals
0.46
WQ0031396 Version 2.0 Attachment B
Page 1

ATTACHMENT C — GROUNDWATER MONITORING AND LIMITATIONS
Monitoring Wells: MW-1 and MW-2
Permit Number: WQ0031396 Version: 2.0
GROUNDWATER CHARACTERISTICS
GROUNDWATER STANDARDS
MONITORING REQUIREMENTS
PCS Code
Parameter Description
Daily Maximum
Frequency Measurement
Sample Type
Footnotes
00680
Carbon, Tot Organic (TOC)
mg/L
3 x Year
Grab
1,6
00940
Chloride (as CI)
250
mg/L
3 x Year
Grab
1
31616
Coliform, Fecal MF, M-FC Broth, 44.5 °C
#/100 mL
3 x Year
Grab
1
00610
Nitrogen, Ammonia Total (as N)
1.5
mg/L
3 x Year
Grab
1
00620
Nitrogen, Nitrate Total (as N)
10
mg/L
3 x Year
Grab
1
00400
pH
6.5-8.5
su
3 x Year
Grab
1,2
00665
Phosphorus, Total (as P)
mg/L
3 x Year
Grab
1
70300
Solids, Total Dissolved - 180 °C
500 '
mg/L
3 x Year
Grab
1
GWVOC
Volatile Compounds (GW)
Present: Yes/No
Annually
Grab
1, 4, 5
82546
Water Level, Distance from measuring point
feet
3 x Year
Calculated
1, 2, 3
1. 3 x Year' monitoring shall be conducted in March, July, and November; Annual monitoring shall be conducted in November.
2. The measurement of water levels shall be made prior to purging the wells. The depth to water in each well shall be measured from the surveyed point on the top of the casing. The measurement of
pH shall be made after purging and prior to sampling for the remaining parameters.
3. The measuring points (top of well casing) of all monitoring wells shall be surveyed to provide the relative elevation of the measuring point for each monitoring well. The measuring points (top of
casing) of all monitoring wells shall be surveyed relative to a common datum.
4. Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) - In November only, analyze by one of the following methods:
a. Standard Method 6230D, PQL at 0.5 µg/L or less
b. Standard Method 6210D, PQL at 0.5 µg/L or less
c. EPA Method 8021, Low Concentration, PQL at 0.5 µg/L or less
d. EPA Method 8260, Low Concentration, PQL at 0.5 µg/L or less
e. Another method with prior approval by the Water Quality Permitting Section Chief
Any method used shall meet the following qualifications:
a. A laboratory shall be DWR certified to run any method used.
b. The method used shall include all the constituents listed in Table VIII of Standard Method 6230D.
c. The method used shall provide a PQL of 0.5 µg/L or less that shall be supported by laboratory proficiency studies as required by the DWR Laboratory Certification Unit. Any constituents
detected above the MDL but below the PQL of 0.5 µg/L shall be qualified (estimated) and reported.
5. If any volatile organic compounds (VOC) are detected as a result of monitoring as provided in Attachment C, then the Asheville Regional Office supervisor, telephone number [phone],
shall be contacted immediately for further instructions regarding any additional follow-up analyses required.
6. If TOC concentrations greater than 10 mg/L are detected in any downgradient monitoring well, additional sampling and analysis shall be conducted to identify the individual constituents comprising
this TOC concentration. If the TOC concentration as measured in the background monitor well exceeds 10 mg/L, this concentration will be taken to represent the naturally occurring TOC
concentration. Any exceedances of this naturally occurring TOC concentration in the downgradient wells shall be subject to the additional sampling and analysis as described above.
7. Monitoring wells shall be reported consistent with the nomenclature and location information provided in Figure 1 and this attachment.
WQ0031396 Version 2.0 Attachment C Page 1

;Fr4-�Mu
WQ0031396 Version 2.0 Figure 1 Page 1 of 1

jots
�� E)Wn�— �OcS

JOSS F..ROSADO - PRESIDENT
.IBEX THUNDERBIRD, LLC
95 MERRICK WAY, #610
CORAL GABLES, FLORIDA 33134
Dear Mr. Rosado: -
Michael N. Easley, Governor
�`'�''•{ William G. Ross Jr., Secretary
North --Ca' :Department of Environment and Natural Resources
Alan W. Klimek, P.E. Director
Division of Water Quality
May 15, 2007 j,�m�
rm
J
Le
0IV k Lu
PAY " 212007
Asheville Regional Office
Subi ect:A�t.,Pdr`rriif­ N;ofeW,;Q�0,0313 96
.J
Santeetlah Lak�esie—�'hase II
Non -Conjunctive Wastewater
Treatment and Reclaimed Water
Utilization System
Graham County,
In accordance with your permit application request received March 28, 2007, and subsequent
additional information received April 25, 2007, we are forwarding herewith Permit No. WQ0031396,
dated May 15, 2007, to IBEX Thunderbird, LLC and Santeetlah Properties, LLC for the construction only
of the subject wastewater treatment and reclaimed water utilization facilities.
This permit shall be effective from the date of issuance until April 30, 2012, and shall be subject
to the conditions and limitations as specified therein. Please pay particular attention to the monitoring
requirements in this permit. Failure to establish an adequate system for collecting and maintaining the
required operational information will result in future compliance problems. ,
Please pay attention to the following permit conditions for they are specific,to this permit:
➢ Condition I.1. — The Permittee shall submit a completed plat map that delineates the proposed
recreational reclaimed utilization amenity, and that has been recorded in the Graham County
Register of Deeds
➢ Condition I.2. — The Permittee shall submit the updated Declaration of Covenants and
Bylaws, etc.,'that state the responsibilities of the Homeowner Association regarding the
proposed reclaimed utilization recreational amenity.
Condition IV.12.d. — If the Permittee's self -monitoring indicates that wastewater is seeping
out of the vertical cut East of the proposed utilization area, the Pennittee shall immediately
contact the Asheville Regional Ofce's Aquifer Protection Section.
Please note that the Division has reservations regarding the proposed location of the flow
equalization basin downstream of the septic tank. It is the Division's opinion that in order for flow
equalization to operate properly, it shall be located prior to any treatment system (i.e., prior to the septic
tank). If the wastewater treatment system fails to operate. as designed, the Division reserves the right to
enforce Permit Condition II.1., which requires the Permittee to take corrective actions in the event the
facilities do not perform satisfactorily.
NooLCarolina
Naturally
Aquifer Protection Section 1636 Mail Service Center Raleigh, NC 27699-1636 Telephone : [phone]
Internet: www.ncwaterqualiiy.org Location: 2728 Capital Boulevard Raleigh, NC 27604 Fax 1: [phone]
Fax 2: [phone]
An Equal Opportunity/Affirmative Action Employer— 50% Recycled/10% Post Consumer Paper Customer Service: [phone]

May 15, 2007
Page 2 of 2
If any parts, requires ___ as, or limitations contained in this permi_ _ unacceptable, you have the
right to request an adjudicatory hearing upon written request within 30 days following receipt of this
permit. This request must be in the form of a written petition, conforming to Chapter 150B of the North
Carolina General Statutes, and filed with the Office of Administrative Hearings, 6714 Mail Service .
Center, Raleigh, NC 27699-6714. Unless such demands are made this permit shall be final and binding.
One set of approved plans and specifications is being forwarded to you. -If you need additional
information concerning this matter, please contact Nathaniel Thornburg at [phone] or
[e-mail].
Sincerely
Alan W. Klimek;
cc: Graham County Health Department
sheville Regional Office, Aquifer_Protection Section
Richard D. Hayes, LSS — Raleigh Regional Office, Aquifer Protection Section
Harry B. Buckner, PE — McGill Associates, PA
Santeetlah Properties, LLC '
Technical Assistance and Certification Unit
APS Central Files
LAU Files

t
NORTH CAROLINA
ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT COMMISSION
DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENT AND NATURAL RESOURCES
RALEIGH
NON -CONJUNCTIVE WASTEWATER TREATMENT ANDRECLAIMED WATER
UTILIZATION SYSTEM PERMIT
In accordance with the provisions of Article 21 of Chapter 143, General Statutes of North Carolina as
amended, and other applicable Laws, Rules, and Regulations ,
PERMISSION IS HEREBY GRANTED TO
IBEX Thunderbird, LLC & Santeetlah Properties, LLC
Graham County,,
FOR THE
construction only of a 4,120 gallon per day (GPD) wastewater treatment and reclaimed water utilization
facility consisting of:
an influent flow measuring device; a 5,000 gallon baffled septic tank with an effluent filter; a 3,750 gallon
flow equalization tank with two (2) submersible pumps rated at 30 gallons per minute (GPM) and
audible/visual high water alarms; a Bioclere Unit Model # 24/20 with a 1,847 gallon V -stage and 2,377
gallon 2nd-stage trickling filter, and four (4) submersible dosing pumps rated at 10 GPM; a Bioclere Unit
Model # 24/24 with a 1,600 gallon clarifier and two (2) submersible sludge return pumps rated at 35
GPM; a sand filter feed tank with two (2) centrifugal self -priming feed pumps rated at 15.7 GPM and
audible/visual high water alarms; two (2) automatic backwash sand filters; a filter backwash tank with
two (2) centrifugal self -priming backwash pumps rated at 48 GPM; a chemical feed tank with a pump for
pH adjustment and horsepower (hp) mixer; four(4) ultraviolet (UV) disinfection banks each with two
(2) lamps and rated for 40 GPM; a turbidimeter; a standby generator; an effluent flow measuring device;
four (4) 15,000 gallon interconnected storage tanks; a 3,490 gallon dosing tank with two (2) submersible
turbine pumps and audible/visual high water alarms; two (2) 10,300 gallon interconnected tanks
providing five (5) day upset storage with a submersible 20 GPM return pump; four (4) drip irrigation
zones providing 0.45 acres of wetted area in the Santeetlah Lakeside Walking Trail Amenity;
to serve Santeetlah Lakeside — Phase H consisting of 26 bedrooms on 13 residential lots, a private
bathhouse restroom and a 1,500 ftZ food stand, with no discharge of wastes to the surface waters, pursuant
to the application received March 28, 2007, and subsequent additional information received by the
Division of Water Quality (Division), and in conformity with the project plan, specifications, and other
supporting data subsequently filed and approved by the Department of Environment and Natural
Resources and considered a part of this permit.
This permit shall be effective from the date of issuance until April 30, 2007, and shall be subject to
the following specified conditions and limitations:
WQ0031396 Version 1.0 Shell Version 070320 1 - Page 1 of 10

I. SCHEDULES
1. Prior to the Division permitting operation of the subject permit, the Permittee shall submit a plat map
that has been recorded in the Graham County Register of Deeds, and the plat map shall delineate the
exact location of the recreational amenity, and note the recreational amenity as the responsibility of
the Homeowners Association (HOA).
2. Prior to the Division permitting operation of the subject permit, the Declaration of Covenants,
Bylaws, etc. shall be amended to include information about the proposed recreational amenity. At a
minimum, this information shall include the residential owners financial responsibilities to upkeep
and maintain the recreational amenity through a contracted landscaping company. In addition, a
budget shall be provided showing how much each residential owner must annually pay to maintain
the recreational amenity. The aforementioned documents shall be submitted to the Division along
with a minor modification request asking for permission to operate the subject wastewater treatment
and reclaimed utilization facility. These documents shall also be in compliance with Condition 11.14.
and the attached Operational Agreement.
Upon completion of construction and prior to operation of this permitted facility, a certification (see
attached form) must be received from a professional engineer certifying that the permitted facility has
been installed in accordance with this permit, the approved plans and specifications, and other
supporting materials including the location of all monitoring wells as applicable. If this project is to
be completed in phases and partially certified you shall retain the responsibility to track further
construction approved under the same permit and shall provide a final certificate of completion once
the entire project has been completed. Mail the Certification to the Aquifer Protection Section,
Division of Water Quality, 1636 Mail Service Center, Raleigh, NC 27699-1636.
4. The Asheville Regional Office, telephone number [phone], shall be notified at least 48 hours
in advance (excluding weekends and holidays) of operation of the installed facilities so that an in -
place inspection can be made. Such notification to the Aquifer Protection Section regional supervisor
shall be made during the normal office hours from 8:00 a.m. until 5:00 p.m. on Monday through
Friday, excluding State Holidays.
No later than six months prior to the expiration of this permit, the Permittee shall request renewal of
this permit on official Division forms. Upon receipt of the request, the Division will review the
adequacy of the facilities described therein, and if warranted, will extend the permit for such period of
time and under such conditions and limitations as it may deem appropriate. Please note that Rule
15A NCAC 02T .0105(d) requires an updated site map to be submitted with the permit renewal
application. The permittee shall submit a copy of the declarations and bylaws that documents
compliance with the attached Operational Agreement in accordance with Rule 15A NCAC 02T .0115.
Monitoring wells MW-1 (upgradient) and MW-2 (downgradient) shall be approved by the Asheville
Regional Office, telephone number [phone] prior to installation and installed prior to
beginning waste disposal operations. The regional office shall be notified at least 48 hours prior to
(excluding weekends and holidays) the construction of any monitoring well. Such notification to the
Aquifer Protection Section regional supervisor shall be made during the normal office hours from
8:00 a.m. until 5:00 p.m. on Monday through Friday, excluding State Holidays. The wells shall be
constructed such that the water level in the well is never above or below the screened (open) portion
of the well at any time during the year and in accordance with 15A NCAC 02C .0108. The general
location and name for each well is marked on Figure 1. See also well construction form submittal
requirements in Section IV. of this permit.
WQ0031396 Version 1.0 Shell Version 070320 Page 2 of 10

0
7. Within 60: days of comp.,;..on of the monitoring wells, the permitter :.::all submit two original copies
of a scaled site map .(scale no greater than 1 "=100'); however, special provisions°may be granted upon
prior approval for large properties. The map must include the following information:
a. The location and identity of'each monitoring well.
b: The location of major components of the reclaimed water system.
C. The location of property boundaries within 500 feet of the utilization area.:
d. The latitude and longitude of the established horizontal control monument.
e. .The, elevation of the top of the well casing (which shall be known as the "measuring point")
relative to a common datum.
f. The depth of water below the measuring point at the time the measuring point is established.
g. The location of review and'compliance boundaries.
' h. The date the map, is, prepared and/or revised..
Control monuments shall be installed in such a manner and made of such materials that the
monument will not be destroyed due to activities that may take place, on the property. The maps and
any supporting documentation shall be sent to the N.C. Division of Water Quality, Aquifer Protection
Section, 1636 Mail Service Center, Raleigh, N.C. 27699-1636. The permittee is responsible for the
geographic accuracy of any map submitted, however produced.
PERFORMANCE STANDARDS
1. The reclaimed water utilization facilities shall be effectively maintained and operated at all times so
that there is no discharge to the surface waters, nor. any contamination of ground waters, which will
render them unsatisfactory for normal use. In the event that. the facilities fail to perform satisfactorily,
including the creation of nuisance conditions or failure of the utilization area to adequately assimilate
the wastewater, the Permittee shall take immediate corrective actions including those actions that may
be required by the Division of Water Quality (Division), such as the construction of additional or
replacement wastewater treatment and disposal facilities.
2. The issuance of this permit shall not relieve the Permittee of the responsibility for damages to ground
or surface waters resulting from the operation of this. facility.
3: All wells that are constructed for .purposes of groundwater monitoring shall be constructed in
accordance with 15A NCAC 02C .0108 (Standards of Construction for Wells Other than Water
Supply) and any other state and local laws and regulations pertaining to well construction.
4. Effluent limitations shall not exceed those specified in Attachment A.
5. Application rates, whether hydraulic, nutrient, or other pollutant shall not exceed those specified in
Attachment B.
6. The COMPLIANCE and REVIEW BOUNDARIES for the reclaimed utilization areas are established
at the utilization area boundaries. Any exceedance of standards at the Compliance or Review
Boundary shall require action in accordance with 15A NCAC 02L .0106.
7. The Permittee shall apply for a permit modification prior to any sale or transfer of property that
affects a compliance boundary to establish a new compliance boundary.
8. In accordance with 15A NCAC 02L .0107(d), no wells, other than monitoring wells, shall be
constructed within the compliance boundary except as provided by 15A NCAC 02L .0107(g).
W.Q0031396 Version 1.0
Shell Version 070320
Page 3 of 10

9. The facilities permitted' 4n must be constructed according to the ,wing setbacks:
a. The setbacks for reclaimed utilization sites shall be as follows (all distances in feet):
i. Surface waters not classified SA:
ii. Surface waters classified SA:
iii. Any well with exception to monitoring wells 100
b. The setbacks for treatment and storage units shall be as follows (all distances in feet):
i. - Any habitable residence or place of public assembly under separate ownership: 100
ii. Any private or public water supply source: 100
iii. Surface waters: 50
iv. Any, well with exception of monitoring wells: 100
v. Any property line: 50
10. The following shall be requirements for the reclaimed. water distribution, storage, and utilization
facilities:
a. All reclaimed water valves, storage facilities, and outlets shall be tagged or labeled to warn the
public or employees that the water is not intended for drinking. Where appropriate, such warning
shall inform the public or employees to avoid contact with the water.
b. All reclaimed water piping, valves, outlets, and other appurtenances shall be color -coded, taped,
or. otherwise marked to identify the source of the water as being reclaimed water.
i. All reclaimed water piping and appurtenances shall be either colored purple (i.e., Pantone
522) and embossed or integrally stamped or marked "CAUTION: RECLAIMED WATER —
DO NOT DRINK" or be installed with a purple (i.e., Pantone 522) identification tape or
polyethylene vinyl wrap. The warning shall be stamped on opposite sides of the pipe and
repeated every three feet or less.
ii. Identification tape shall be at least three inches wide and have white or black lettering on
purple (i.e., Pantone 522) field stating "CAUTION: RECLAIMED WATER — DO NOT
DRINK." Identification tape shall be installed on top of reclaimed water pipelines, fastened
at least every 10 feet to each pipe length and run continuously the entire length of the pipe.
c. All reclaimed water valves and outlets shall be of a type, or secured in a manner, that permits
operation by authorized personnel only.
d. Above -ground hose bibs (i.e., spigots or other hand -operated connections) shall not be present..
Hose bibs shall be located in locked below -grade vaults that shall be clearly labeled as being of
non -potable quality. As an alternative to the use of locked below -grade vaults with standard hose
bibs services, hose bibs, which can only be operated by a special tool or connected to a special
hose connection, may be placed in non -lockable underground services boxes clearly labeled as
non -potable water.
11. Reclaimed water distribution lines shall be located 10 feet horizontally from and 18 inches below any:;,..
water line where practicable. Where these separation distances cannot.be met, the piping and integrity
testing procedures shall meet water main standards in accordance with 15A NCAC 18C.
12. Reclaimed water distribution lines shall not be less than 100 feet from a well unless the piping and
integrity testing procedures meet water main standards in accordance with 15A NCAC 18C, but no
case shall they be less than 25 feet from a private well or 50 feet from a public well.
13. Reclaimed water distribution lines shall meet the separation distances to sewer lines in accordance
with Rule .0305 of Subchapter 02T.
WQ0031396 Version 1.0 Shell Version 070320 Page 4 of 10

'he Operational Agra .nt (see attached) between the Pei ee and the Environmental
2anagement Commission is incorporated herein by reference and s • be a condition of this permit.
loncompliance with the terms of the Operational Agreement shall subject the Permittee to all
auctions provided by North Carolina General Statutes § 143-215.6A to § 143-215.6C for violation of
r failure to act in accordance with the terms and conditions of this permit.
15. The reclaimed water utilization system shall be connected to a rain or moisture sensor that shall
indicate when reclaimed water application is not appropriate in accordance with Condition IIIA. and
III.5. of this permit.
III. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
1. The facilities shall be properly maintained and operated at all times. The facilities shall be effectively
maintained and operated as a non -discharge system to prevent the discharge of any wastewater
resulting from the operation of this facility. The Permittee shall maintain an Operation and
Maintenance Plan pursuant to 15A NCAC 02T .0913 including operational functions, maintenance
schedules, safety measures, and a spill response plan.
2. Upon classification of the wastewater treatment and reclaimed utilization facilities by the Water
Pollution Control System Operators Certification Commission (WPCSOCC), the Permittee shall
designate and employ a certified operator to be in responsible charge (ORC) and one or more certified
operator(s) to be back-up ORC(s) of the facilities in accordance with 15A NCAC 08G .0200. The
ORC shall visit the facilities in accordance with 15A NCAC 08G .0200 or as specified in this permit
and shall comply with all other conditions specified in these rules.
3. A suitable year round vegetative cover shall be maintained such that crop health is optimized, allows
for even distribution of effluent, and allows inspection of the reclaimed water utilization system.
4. Adequate measures shall be taken to prevent ponding or runoff from the reclaimed water utilization
areas.
5. Reclaimed water application shall not be performed during inclement weather or when the ground is
in a condition that will cause ponding or runoff.
6. All reclaimed water application equipment must be tested and calibrated at least once per year.
Records of the calibration must be maintained for five years.
7. No type of wastewater other than that from Santeetlah Lakeside — Phase lI shall be applied to the
reclaimed water utilization area.
8. An automatically activated standby power source shall be on site and operational at all times capable
of powering all essential treatment units. If a generator is employed as an alternate power supply, it
shall be tested weekly by interrupting the primary power source.
9. Public access to the reclaimed water utilization sites shall be controlled during active site use. Such
controls may include the posting of signs showing tlie'activities being conducted at each site.
10. The residuals generated from these treatment facilities must be disposed / utilized in accordance with
15A NCAC 02T .1100. The Permittee shall maintain a residual management plan pursuant to 15A
NCAC 02T .0914.
11. Diversion or bypassing of the untreated wastewater from the treatment facilities is prohibited.
WQ0031396 Version 1.0 Shell Version 070320 Page 5 of 10

12. A protective vegetative er shall be established and maintained H earthen basin embankmen'M
(outside toe of embankment to maximum allowable temporary storage elevation on the inside of the
embankment), berms, pipe runs, erosion control areas, and surface water diversions. Trees, shrubs,
and other woody vegetation shall not be allowed to grow on the earthen basin dikes or embankments.
Earthen basin embankment areas shall be kept mowed or otherwise controlled and accessible.
13. All wastewater shall be routed to the 5-day holding storage tanks should the limit for fecal coliform
(daily maximum concentration of 25 per 100 ml) or turbidity (instantaneous maximum of 10 NTU) be
exceeded, until such time that the problems associated with the treatment capability of the wastewater
treatment plant have been corrected. The wastewater in the 5-day holding storage tanks shall be
pumped back to the treatment plant for re -treatment or treated in the 5-day storage tanks prior to
discharge to the storage tanks.
IV. MONITORING AND REPORTING REQUIREMENTS
Any monitoring (including groundwater, surface water, soil or plant tissue analyses) deemed
necessary by the Division to ensure surface and ground water protection will be established and an
acceptable sampling reporting schedule shall be followed.
2. All laboratory analyses for effluent, ground waters, or surface waters shall be made by a laboratory
certified by the Division for the required parameters under 15A NCAC 02H .0800.
3. Flow through the treatment facility shall be continuously monitored and daily average flow values
shall be reported on Form NDMR. Flow may be estimated from water use records provided water
use is metered. Daily average values shall be calculated by dividing monthly flow volume by the
number of days in the month.
4. The effluent from the subject facilities shall be monitored by the Permittee at the frequency(ies) and
location for the parameters specified in Attachment A.
5. The Pennittee tracking the amount of reclaimed water applied shall maintain adequate records. These
records shall include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following information:
a. Date of reclaimed water application,
b. Volume of reclaimed water applied,
c. Field irrigated,
d. Length of time field is irrigated,
e. Continuous weekly, monthly, and year-to-date hydraulic (inches/acre) loadings for each field,
f. Continuous monthly and year-to-date loadings for any non -hydraulic parameter specifically
limited in Attachment B for each field,
g. Weather conditions, and
h. Maintenance of cover crops.
6. Monitor wells MW-1 and MW-2 shall be sampled after construction and within three months prior to
initiating waste disposal operations. Monitor wells shall be sampled thereafter at the frequencies and
for the parameters specified in Attachment C. All mapping, well construction forms, well
abandonment forms and monitoring data shall refer to the permit number and the well nomenclature
as provided in Attachment C and Figure 1.
7. For the initial sampling of the well as specified elsewhere in the permit, the permittee shall submit a
copy of the GW-1 Form (Well Construction Record) that lists this permit number and the appropriate
monitoring well identification number with the Compliance Monitoring Form (GW-59) for that well.
Initial Compliance Monitoring Forms that do not include copies of the GW-1 form are incomplete
and may be returned to the permittee without being processed.
WQ0031396 Version 1.0 Shell Version 070320 Page 6 of 10

'wo copies of the re of the sampling and analysis muss received on Form GW-59
Groundwater Quality �,.,,nitoring: Compliance Report Form), -.-.ig with attached copies of
aboratory analyses, by the Division of Water Quality, Information Processing Unit, 1617 Mail
;ervice Center, Raleigh, North Carolina 27699-1617 on or before the last working day of the month
611owing the sampling month. Form GW-59 shall include the number of this permit and the
.ppropriate well identification number. One Form GW-59a certification form shall be provided for
each set of sampling results submitted.
Three copies of all monitoring data [as specified in Conditions IV.3. and IV A.] on Form NDMR for
each point prior to irrigation (PPI) and three copies of all operation and disposal records [as specified
in -Condition IV.5. on Form NDAR-1 for every utilization area shall be submitted on or before the last
day of the following month. If no activities occurred during the monitoring month, monitoring
reports are still required documenting the absence of the activity. All information shall be submitted
to the following address:
Division of Water Quality
Information Processing Unit
1617 Mail Service Center
Raleigh, North Carolina 27699-1617
10. A record shall be maintained of all residuals removed from this facility. This record shall include the
name of the hauler, permit authorizing the disposal or a letter from a municipality agreeing to accept
the residuals, date the residuals were hauled, and volume of residuals removed.
11. A maintenance log shall be maintained at this facility including but not limited to the following items:
a. Visual observations of the plant and plant site.
b. Record of preventative maintenance (changing of filters, adjusting belt tensions, alarm testing,
diffuser inspections and cleanings, etc.).
c. Date of calibration of flow measurement device.
d. Date and results of power interruption testing on alternate power supply.
12. Noncompliance Notification:
The Permittee shall report by telephone to the Asheville Regional Office, telephone number (828)
296-4500, as soon as possible, but in no case more than 24 hours or on the next working day
following the occurrence or first knowledge of the occurrence of any of the following:
a. Any occurrence at the wastewater treatment facility which results in the treatment of significant
amounts of wastes which are abnormal in quantity or characteristic, such as the dumping of the
contents of a sludge digester; the known passage of a slug of hazardous substance through the
facility; or any other unusual circumstances including ponding in the reclaimed utilization area or
runoff from the reclaimed utilization areas.
b. Any process unit failure, due to known or unknown reasons, that render the facility incapable of
adequate wastewater treatment such as mechanical or electrical failures of pumps, aerators,
compressors, etc.
c. Any failure of disposal system resulting in a by-pass directly to receiving waters.
d. Any time that self -monitoring information indicates that the facility has gone out of compliance
with its permit limitations including, but not limited to, freeboard measurements, effluent
limitations, exceedances of groundwater standards, or overloading of any utilization area,
including the seeping of wastewater out of the vertical cut immediately down slope of the
irrigation area.
WQ0031396 Version 1.0 Shell Version 070320 Page 7 of 10

For any emergency tha luires immediate reporting (e.g., disch, s to surface waters, immineq
failure of a storage stru„Luie, etc.) outside normal business hours tiivaL be reported to the Division's
Emergency Response personnel at telephone number [phone], [phone], or (919) 733-
3300. Persons reporting such occurrences by telephone shall also file a written report in letter form
within five (5) days following first knowledge of the occurrence. This report must outline the actions
taken or proposed to be taken to ensure that the problem does not recur.
V. INSPECTIONS
1. Adequate inspection and maintenance shall be provided by the Permittee to ensure proper operation
of the subject facilities.
2. The Permittee or his designee shall inspect the wastewater treatment and disposal facilities to prevent
malfunctions and deterioration, operator errors and discharges which may cause or lead to the release
of wastes to the environment, a threat to human health, or a nuisance. The Permittee shall keep an
inspection log or summary including at least the date and time of inspection, observations made, and
any maintenance, repairs, or corrective actions taken by the Permittee. This log of inspections shall
be maintained by the Permittee for a period of five years from the date of the inspection and shall be
made available upon request to the Division or other permitting authority.
3. Any duly authorized officer, employee, or representative of the Division may, upon presentation of
credentials, enter and inspect any property, premises or place on or related to the disposal site or
facility at any reasonable time for the purpose of determining compliance with this permit; may
inspect or copy any records that must be maintained under the terms and conditions of this permit,
and may obtain samples of groundwater, surface water, or leachate.
VI. GENERAL CONDITIONS
1. Failure to abide by the conditions and limitations contained in this permit may subject the Permittee
to an enforcement action by the Division in accordance with North Carolina General Statute 143-
215.6A to 143-215.6C.
2. This permit shall become voidable unless the facilities are constructed in accordance with the
conditions of this permit, the approved plans and specifications, and other supporting data.
This permit is effective only with respect to the nature and volume of wastes described in the
application and other supporting data. No variances to applicable rules governing the construction
and / or operation of the permitted facilities are granted unless specifically requested and granted in
this permit.
4. The issuance of this permit does not exempt the Permittee from complying with any and all statutes,
rules, regulations, or ordinances, which may be imposed by other government agencies (local, state,
and federal) that have jurisdiction. Of particular concern to the Division are applicable river buffer
rules in 15A NCAC 02B .0200, erosion and sedimentation control requirements in 15A NCAC
Chapter 4 and under the Division's General Permit NCGO10000, and any requirements pertaining to
wetlands under 15A NCAC 02B .0200 and 02H .0500.
5. In the event there is a desire for the facilities to change ownership, or there is a name change of the
Permittee, a formal permit request must be submitted to the Division on official Division forms,
documentation from the parties involved, and other supporting materials as may be appropriate. The
approval of this request will be considered on its merits and may or may not be approved. The
Permittee of record shall remain fully responsible for compliance until a permit is issued to the new
owner.
6. The Permittee shall retain a set of approved plans and specifications for the life of the facilities
permitted herein.
WQ0031396 Version 1.0 Shell Version 070320 Page 8 of 10

The Permittee shall ma, 'in this permit until all permitted facilit.- ierein are properly closed or
permitted under another �,..mit issued by the appropriate permitting . .ority.
The Permittee must pay the annual fee within 30 days after being billed by the Division. Failure to
pay the fee accordingly may cause the Division to initiate action to revoke this permit pursuant to
15A NCAC 02T .0105(e).
Permit issued this the 15t' day of May 2007
NORTH C VLINAE:EENTALI MANAGEMENT COMMISSION
7.Alan W. Klimek, P.E., Director
Division of Water Quality
By Authority of the Environmental Management Commission
Permit Number WQ0031396
WQ0031396 Version 1.0 Shell Version 070320 Page 9 of 10

Permit No. WQ0031396
May 15, 2007
ENGINEER'S CERTIFICATION
Partial Final
I, , as a duly registered Professional Engineer in the State
of North Carolina, having been authorized to observe (periodically, weekly, full time) the construction of
the project,
Project Name
Location and County
for the Permittee hereby state that, to the best of my abilities, due care and diligence was used in the
observation of the construction such that the construction was observed to be built within substantial
compliance and intent of this permit, the approved plans and specifications, and other supporting
materials.
Signature
Date
Registration No.
WQ0031396 Version 1.0 Shell Version 070320 Page 10 of 10

ATTACHMENT A - LIMITATIONS AND MONITORING REQUIREMENTS
PPI 001— WWTP Effluent
Permit Number: WQ0031396 Version:
EFFLUENT CHARACTERISTICS
EFFLUENT LIMITS
MONITORING REQUIREMENTS
Parameter Description - PCS Code
Monthly Average
Weekly Average-
Daily Maximum
Measurement
Frequency
Sample
Type
BOD, 5-Day (20 Deg. C) — 00310
10
mg/l
15
mg/l
Monthly
Composite
Chloride (as Cl) — 00940
3 x year
Grab
Coliform, Fecal MF, M-FC Broth, 44.5C — 31616
14
#/100 ml
25
#/100 ml
Monthly
Grab
Flow, in Conduit or thru Treatment Plant — 50050
4,120 '
gpd
Continuous
Recording
Flow, in Conduit or thm Treatment Plant — 50050
2,7402
gpd
Continuous
Recording
Flow, in Conduit or thru Treatment Plant — 50050
1,3603
gpd
Continuous
Recording
Nitrogen, Ammonia Total (as N) — 00610
4
mg/1
6
mg/l
Monthly
Composite
Nitrogen, Kjeldahl, Total (as N) — 00625
Monthly
Composite
Nitrogen, Nitrate Total (as N) — 00620
Monthly
Composite
Nitrogen, Nitrite Total (as N) — 00615
Monthly
Composite
pH — 00400
6-9
S.U.
Weekly
Grab
Solids, Total Dissolved — 70300
3 x year
Composite
Solids, Total Suspended — 00530
5 '
mg/l
10
mg/1
Monthly
Composite
Turbidity, HCH Turbidimeter — 00076
10
ntu
Continuous
Recording
1.. 3 x year: March, July and November
2. Monthly average flow limitation is 4,120 from May through October
3. Monthly average flow limitation is 2,740 April and November
4. Monthly average flow limitation is 1,360 from December through March
WQ0031396 Version 1.0 Attachment A Page 1 of 2

THIS PAGE BLANK.
WQ0031396 Version 1.0 Attachment A

ATTACHMENT B - APPROVED LAND APPLICATION SITES AND LIMITATIONS Permit Number: WQ0031396 Version: ]
IBEX Thunderbird, LLC & Santeetlah Lakeside, LLC — Santeetlah Lakeside — Phase H
UTILIZATION AREA INFORMATION
APPLICATION LIMITATIONS
Field/
Basin
Owner
County
Latitude
Longitude
Net
Acreage
Dominant
Soil Series
Parameter
Rate
Pearly
Max
Units
1
IBEX Thunderbird, LLC
Graham
35° 21' 54"
-83051' 32"
0.11
Junaluska
01284 — Application Surface Irrigation
0.12
88.57
inches
WQ09 — Plant Available Nitrogen
152
Ibs/ac/yr
2
IBEX Thunderbird, LLC
Graham
35° 21' 54"
-83° 51' 32"
0.11
Junaluska
01284 — Application Surface Irrigation
0.12
88.57
inches
WQ09 — Plant Available Nitrogen
152
Ibs/ac/yr
3
IBEX Thunderbird, LLC
Graham
35° 21' 54"
-83° 51' 32"
0.12
Junaluska
01284 — Application Surface Irrigation
0.12
88.57
inche
WQ09 — Plant Available Nitrogen
152
lbs/ac/yr
4
IBEX Thunderbird, LLC
Graham
35° 21' 54"
-83° 51' 32"
0.12
Junaluska
01284 —Application Surface Irrigation
0.12
88.57
inches
WQ09 — Plant Available Nitrogen
152
lbs/ac/yr
Total
0.46
WQ0031396 Version 1.0 Attachment B Page 1 of 2

THIS PAGE BLANK
WQ0031396 Version 1.0 Attachment B

ATTACHMENT C — GROUNDWATER MONITORING AND LIMITATIONS
Monitoring wells: MW-1 and MW-2
Permit Number: WQ0031396 Version: ]
GROUNDWATER CHARACTERISTICS
GROUNDWATER STANDARDS
MONITORING REQUIREMENTS
Parameter Description - Parameter Code
Daily Maximum
Frequency Measurement
Sample Type
Footnotes
Carbon, Tot Organic (TOC) — 00680
mg/I
3 x year
Grab
1,6
Chloride (as Cl) — 00940
250
mg/I
3 x year
Grab
1
Coliform, Fecal MF — 31616
#/100m1
3 x year
Grab
1
Nitrogen, Ammonia Total (as N) — 00610
mg/1
3 x year
Grab
1
Nitrogen, Nitrate Total (as N) — 00620
10
mg/I
3 x year
Grab
1
pH — 00400 .
6.5-8.5
s.u.
3 x year
Grab
1,2
Phosphorus, Total (as P) — 00665
mg/1
3 x year
Grab
1
Solids, Total Dissolved- 180 Deg C — 70300
500
mg/l
3 x year
Grab
1
Volatile Organic Compounds (GC/MS) — 78732
_
mg/l
Annual
Grab
1, 4, 5
Water level, distance from measuring point— 82546
ft
3 x year
Calculated
1, 2, 3
1. 3 X year monitoring shall be conducted in March, July & November; Annual monitoring shall be conducted every November.
2. The measurement of water levels shall be made prior to purging the wells. The depth to water in each well shall be measured from the surveyed point on the top of the casing. The measurement
of pH shall be made after purging and prior to sampling for the remaining parameters.
3. The measuring points (top of well casing) of all monitoring wells shall be surveyed to provide the relative elevation of the measuring point for each monitoring well. The measuring points (top
of casing) of all monitoring wells shall be surveyed relative to a common datum.
4. Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) - In November only, analyze by one of the following methods:
a. Standard Method 6230D, PQL at 0.5 µg/L or less
b. Standard Method 6210D, PQL at 0.5 µg/L or less
c. EPA Method 8021, Low Concentration, PQL at 0.5 µg/L or less
d. EPA Method 8260, Low Concentration, PQL at 0.5 µg/L or less
e. Another method with prior approval by the Aquifer Protection Section Chief
Any method used must meet the following qualifications:
a. A laboratory must be DWQ certified to run any method used.
b. The method used must, at a minimum, include all the constituents listed in Table VIII of Standard Method 6230D.
c. The method used must provide a PQL of 0.5 µg/L or less that must be supported by laboratory proficiency studies as required by the DWQ Laboratory Certification Unit. Any constituents
detected above the MDL but below the PQL of 0.5 µg/L must be qualified (estimated) and reported.
5. If any volatile organic compounds (VOC) are detected as a result of monitoring as provided in Attachment C, then the Asheville Regional Office Aquifer Protection Supervisor, telephone
number [phone], must be contacted immediately for further instructions regarding any additional follow-up analyses required.
WQ0031396 Version 1.0 Attachment C Page 1 of 2

6. If TOC concentrations greater than 10 mg/1 are detected in any downgradient monitoring well, additional sampling and analysis must be conducted to identify the individual constituents
comprising this TOC concentration. If the TOC concentration as measured in the background monitor well exceeds 10 mg/l, this concentration will be taken to represent the naturally occurring
TOC concentration. Any exceedances of this naturally occurring TOC concentration in the downgradient wells shall be subject to the additional sampling and analysis as described above.
7. Monitoring wells shall be reported consistent with the nomenclature and location information provided in Figure ¥ and this attachment.
WQ0031396 Version 1.0 Attachment C

SANTEETLAH LAKE, :RECLAIMED WASTEWATER SYSTEM
IBEX THUNDERBIRD, LL:C.
GRAHAM COUNTY, NORTH CAR.OLINA
tl'�sx } MR,
'�T� �t� r�'��J z ; UUAD� FONTANA DAM, NC
QUAD, TAPOCO, NC -TN > `7 N3522.5-W8345/7.5
QUADi SANTEETLAH CREEK,
N3515-W8352.5/7.5
SITE 1
RECLAIMED WASTEWATER DISP❑SAL SYSTEM
TREATMENT AND DISP❑SAL SYSTEM L❑CATI❑N
QUADi ROBBINSVILLE, NI
35083-C7-TF-024
• ` i SCALE 1 2000
lmmcG z
AS S0CIATES
ENGINEERING PLANNING FINANCE
55 BROAD STREET ASHEVILLE, NC PH. [phone]

NORTHCAROLEQA
:)F 69A µ4M
A. AGI T P ..1 3- 1 _1 �aii1 amd. a s 1.3 day of
�-� 205� by and: between the North -Carolina Environmental Management
Commission, an agency of the State of North`Carolina,.hereinailer known as the COMMISSION, and
/ Be k TMu.+y M4AID, , LL.Cr , a corporation/general partnership registered/licensed to do
business in the State of North Carolina, hereinafter known as the DEVELOPER.
WITNESSETH:
1. , . The DEVELOPER is the owner of the . Iands lying in A �`'� County, upon
which it is erecting and will erect dwelling units and other improvements, said development to .be known
as (hereinafter the Development).
2. The DEVELOPER desires, to construct a wastewater collection system with pumps, wastewater treatment
works, and/or disposal facilities (hereinafter Disposal System) to provide sanitary sewage disposal to serve
the Development on said lands. -
3. The DEVELOPER has applied to the COMII IISSION for the issuance of a permit pursuant to G.S.143-
215:1 to; construct, maintain, and operate the Disposal System.
4. The DEVELOPER has created or shall create unit ownership in said dwellings units, other improvements
and lands through filing of a Declaration of Unit Ownership (hereinafter Declaration),, pursuant to Chapter
47C of the North Carolina General Statutes.
5. The DEVELOPER has caused to be formed or will. cause to be formed at.the time of filing of the
Declaration, the (Unit Owners' Association)-%0TrKTuw L is oE. Ow ota's Ass.aa'paj (hereinafter
Association), a non-profit corporation organized and existing under and by the virtue of the laws of the
State of North Carolina, for the purpose, among others, of handling the property, affairs and business of
the Development; of operating, maintaining, re -constructing and repairing the common elements of the
lands and improvements subject to unit ownership, including the Disposal System; and of collecting dues
and assessments to provide funds for such operation, maintenance, re -construction and repair.
6. The COMMISSION desires to assure that the Disposal System. of the Development is properly
.constructed, maintained and operated m accordance with law and permit provisions in order to protect the
quality of the waters of the State and the public interest therein..
NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the promises and the benefits to be derived by each of the parties
hereto, the COMMISSION and DEVELOPER do hereby mutually agree as follows:
l . The DEVELOPER shall construct the Disposal System in accordance with the permit and plans and
specifications hereafter issued and approved by the COMMISSION, and shall thereafter properly operate
and maintain such systems and facilities in accordance with applicable permit provisions and law.
2. The DEVELOPER shall not transfer ownership and/or control of the Disposal System to the Association
until construction has been completed in accordance with the permit and approved plans, and the staff of
the Division of Water Quality has inspected, and approved of the facilities. In order to change the name of
the permit holder, the DEVELOPER must request that the permit be reissued to the Association. The
request must include a copy of the Association Bylaws and Declaration.
t ='3. The DEVELOPER shall not transfer, convey, assign or otherwise relinquish or release its responsibility
for the operation and maintenance of its Disposal System until a permit has been reissued to the.
DEVELOPERs successor.
FORM: DEV 09-06
Page 1 of 2

4., The DEVELOPER shall provide in the Declaration and Association Bylaws that the Disposal Sj
appurtenances thereto are of the common elements and shall t] ifter be properly maintained
operated in conformity wim iaw and the provisions of the permit for construction, operation, repair,Imaintenance of the system and facilities. The Declaration and Bylaws shall identify the entire wast
treatment, collection and disposal system as a common element, which will receive the highest priority for
expenditures by the Association except for Federal, State, and local taxes and insurance.
5. The DEVELOPER shall provide in the Declaration and Association Bylaws that the Disposal System will
be maintained out of the common expenses. In order to.assure that there shall be funds readily available to
repair, maintain or construct the Disposal System, beyond -the routine operation and maintenance
expenses, the Declaration and Association Bylaws shall provide that a fiord be created out of the common
expenses. Such fund shall be separate from the routine maintenance funds allocated for the facility and
shall be part of the yearly budget.
6. In the event the common expense allocation and separate fluid are not adequate for the construction,
reair, and maintenance of the Disposal System, the Declaration and Association Bylaws shall provide for
..Sp . ecial assessments to cover, such necessary costs. There shall be no limit on the amount of such
assessments, and the Declaration and Bylaws shall provide that such special assessments can be made as
necessary at any time.
7. If a wastewater collection system and wastewater treatment and/or disposal facility provided by any city,
town, village, county, water and sewer authorities, or other unit of government shall hereinafter become
available.to serve the Development, the DEVELOPER shall take such action as is necessary to cause the
existing and future wastewater of the Development to be accepted and discharged into said governmental
system, and shall convey or transfer as much of the Disposal System and such necessary easements as the
governmental unit may require as condition of accepting the Development's wastewater.
8. Recognizing that it would be contrary to the public interest and to the public health, safety and welfare for
the Association to enter into voluntary dissolution without having made adequate provision for the
C continued proper maintenance, repair and operation of its Disposal System, the DEVELOPER shall
provide in the Association Bylaws that the Association shall not enter into voluntary dissolution without
first having transferred its said system and facilities to some person, corporation or other entity acceptable
to and approved by the COINMSSION by the issuance of a permit.
9. The agreements set forth in numbered paragraphs 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8 above shall be conditions of any
permit. issued by the CONMSSION to the DEVELOPER for the construction, maintenance, repair and
operation of the Disposal System.
10. A copy of this agreement shall be filed at the Register of Deeds in the County(ies) where the Declaration is
filed and in the offices of the Secretary of State of North Carolina with the. Articles of Incorporation of the
Association.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this agreement was executed in duplicate originals by the duly authorized
representative of the parties hereto on the day and year written as indicated by each of the parties named below:
=ORTHEE O AL /UX-rr�ualab, LLC
NT CO Name of P
B v.
.%
an W. Klimek, P.E., Director (Signature)
Division of Water Quality
Print Name and Title
3/Zb/o -7
(Date) (Date)
FORM: DEV 09-06 Page 2 of 2

CNIQ 4—(
;F� LV tAk
1 T 4-
iL��
rcoq, �v-4�t
i ���
�� i �
71b
�9 L
I

State of North Carolina
Department of Environmental Quality
Division of Water Resources
WATER QUALITY REGIONAL OPERATIONS SECTION
,r Divv r Resources ision of NON -DISCHARGE APPLICATION REVIEW REQUEST FORM
Wate
December 19, 2018
To: RO-WQROS: Landon_Davidson_/_Zan Price
From: Tessa Monday, Water Quality Permitting Section - Non -Discharge Branch
Permit Number: WQ0031396 Permit Type: Reclaimed Water
Applicant: Lake Point Properties on Santeetlah, LLC Project Type: Change of Ownership
Owner Type: Organization Owner in BIMS? No
Facility Name: Santeetlah Lakeside WWTP Facility in BIMS? Yes
'Signature Authority: Jack Minski Title: Member
Address: 1815 Griffin Rd., Ste 404, Dania, FL 33004 County: Graham
Fee Category: Non -Discharge Major Fee Amount: $0 - Minor Mod
Comments/Other Information:
Attached, you will find all information submitted in support of the above -referenced application for your review,
comment, and/or action. Within 45 calendar days, please take the following actions:
® Return this form completed. ® Return a completed staff report.
Attach an Attachment B for Certification. ❑ Issue an Attachment B Certification
When you receive this request form, please write your name and dates in the spaces below, make a copy of this sheet, and
return it to the appropriate Central Office Water Quality Permitting Section contact person listed above.
RO-WQROS Reviewer: N8W A//1v_j Date:
FORM: _WQROSNDARR 09-15
Division of Wa?ar Resources
DEC 2 7 2018
Water Ova!!t; R aionai operations
Ast�s•,�'� nr �s;�FGfEc9 ge
1 of 1

ROY COOPER
averraor
1 t ?y
Dkilefor
NORTH CA OLINA
Enviroaa¢tentafQuality
December 20, 2018
JACK MINSKI — MEMBER
LAKE POINT PROPERTIES ON SANTEETLAH, LLC
1815 GRIFFIN RD., STE 404
DANIA, FL 33004
Subject: Acknowledgement of
Application No. WQ0031396
Santeetlah Lakeside WWTP
Reclaimed Water System
Graham County
Dear Mr. Minski:
The Water Quality Permitting Section acknowledges receipt of your permit application and
supporting documentation received on December 19, 2018. Your application package has been assigned
the number listed above, and -the primary reviewer is Tessa Monday.
Central and Regional Office staff will perform a detailed review of the provided application, and
may contact you with a request for additional information. To ensure maximum efficiency in processing
permit applications, the Division of Water Resources requests your assistance in providing a timely and
complete response to any additional information requests.
Please note that processing standard review permit applications may take as long as 60 to 90 days
after receipt of a complete application. If you have any questions, please contact
Tessa Monday at [phone] or [e-mail].
Sincerely,
Nathaniel D. Thornburg, Supervisor
Division of Water Resources
cc: As�ieville Regional Office Water uality Region- al: Operations Section
Permit File WQ0031396
Div
D E C 2 7 2018
D.EQ
4 � gom �;-p
y i rater (,1U7nrtonal
i Operations
North Carolina Department of Environmental Quality I Division of Water Resources I Non -Discharge Branch
512 North Salisbury Street 11617 Mail Service Center I Raleigh, North Carolina 27699-1617
919.707.3654

' RECEIVED/NCDEQIDWR
DEC 19 1018 State of.North Carolina
Department of Environmental Quality
Non•pisoharge
Division of Water Resources
Permltting Uflif NON -DISCHARGE PERMIT OWNERSHIP/NAME CHANGE
Division of Water Resources INSTRUCTIONS .FOR FORM: NDPONC 06-16 & SUPPORTING DOCUMENTATION
This form is for ownership changes or name changes of a non -discharge system permit. Please note that "Permittee"
references the existing permit holder, and that "Applicant" references the entity applying for the ownership/name change.
For more information, visit the Water Qualify Permitting Section's Non -Discharge Pennitti'ng Unit websile
A. Non -Discharge Permit Ownership/Name Change (FORM: NDPONC 06-16) Application (All Applications):
❑ Submit an original completed and appropriately executed Non -Discharge Permit Ownership/Name Change (FORM:
NDPONC 06-16) application.
❑ The Existing Permittee's Certification shall be signed in accordance with 15A_NCAC-.02T...0I06(b). Per 15A_ NCAC_02T
,Q106(c), an alternate person may be designated as the signing official if a delegation letter is provided from a person 'who
meets the criteria in 15A NCAC 02T.0106(b).
The Applicant's Certification shall be signed in accordance with 15A NCAC,02T .0106,(h). Per 15A NCAC 02T.0106(c), an
alternate person may be designated as the signing official if a delegation letter is provided from a person who meets the
criteria in 15A NCAC 02T .0106(b).
B. Existing Permit (All Applications):
❑ Submit a copy of the most recently issued permit.
C. Property Ownership Documentation (All Applications):
➢ Per 1,5A NCAC 02T.0504(f), 15A NCAC UT .0604(e), 15i NCAC_02T..0704{#), 15A NCAC 02T_.0804. 15A NCAC 02T
4004Ea), I5A NCAC 02T-,1104(d){7 _, 1SA.NCAC 02T_,1104(e)(5), 15A-I�Cr3C O�U .0201(e) or _I5A NCAC 02U .0202(i),
the Applicant shall demonstrate they are the owner of all property containing the non -discharge system facilities:
❑ Legal documentation of ownership (i.e., GIS, deed or article of incorporation), or
❑ Written notarized intent to purchase agreement signed by both parties with a plat or survey map, or
❑ Written notarized lease agreement that specifically indicates the intended use of the property and has been signed by both
parties, as well as a plat or survey map. Lease agreements shall adhere to the requirements of 15A NCAC• 02L..0107.
D. Certificate of Public Convenience and Necessity (All Applications where the Applicant is a Privately -Owned Public Utility):
❑ Per 15A„ NCAC, 02T._0115(aJ(1), provide one copy of the Certificate of Public Convenience and Necessity from the Noph
Carolina_Ulilities Cotntnission demonstrating the Applicant is authorized to hold the utility franchise for the area to be served
by the non -discharge system
E. Operational Agreements (All Applications where the Applicant is a HomeJProperty Owners' Association or Developer of lots to
be sold):
➢ home/Property_Owners' Associations
❑ Per 15A NCAC.02T .0115(c), submit an original properly executed Operational. Agreement_(FOI MI : HOA).
❑ Per iSA.NCAC 02T .(3115(c), submit an original proposed or approved Articles of Incorporation, Declarations and By-
laws.
➢ Developers of lots to be sold
❑ Per 15A NCAC _02T_.0115(b), submit an original of the properly executed Operational Agreement (FORM: DEV).
F. Operation and Maintenance Agreement (All Applications for Single -Family Wastewater Irrigation Systems):
❑ Per 15A„NCAC 02T .0604(h), submit an original of a notarized Operation and Maintenance Agreement (FOils'v_: SFRW`WIS
OSzM) that has been signed and dated by all deeded property owners.
THE COMPLETED APPLICATION AND SUPPORTING DOCUMENTATION SHALL RE SUBMITTED TO.
NORTH CAROLINA DEPARTMENT OF E_NVI[RONMENTAL QUALITY
DIVISION OF INVATER RESOURCES
WATER QUALITY PERMITTING SECTION
NON -DISCHARGE BRANCH � OIVl3�1c,1 G J.=:i:OFyP;J: sou
PCSS
By_t4S. Postal_ Service: Bz_Cc
1617 MAIL SERVICE CENTER 512
RALEIGH, NORTH CAROLINA 27699-1617 RA€.EIGH.
TELEPHONE NUMBER: [phone]
2740418
� 1�_,.t�i �: •,tE�•,; ��7i.^�^,.l ��?3'cl'IOf1S
INSTRUCTIONS FOR FORM: NDPONC 06-16 & SUPPORTIN—G DOCUMENTATION Page 1 of 1

1
State of North Carolina
Department of Environmental Quality
Division of Water Resources
-DISCHARGE PERMIT 0AINERNONSHIPINAME CHANGE
"Division of Water Resources FORM: NTDPONC 06-16
I. EXISTING PEP-NUTTEE INFORMATION; RECEIVED/NCDEQ/DWR
I. Permittee's name: IBEX Thunderbird, L,LC
2. Signature authority's name: Jose F. Rosado per 15A NCAC 02T .0I 06(h). DEC 19 2018 Title: President
3. Permittee's mailing address: 13002 San Jose Street Non -Discharge
City: Coral Gables State: FL Zip: 33156- Permitting Unit
4. Permittee's contact information: Phone number: 195 772-5111 Email Address: Rasado jfCgmail.com
5. Demonstration of historical consideration for permit approval —1 aA __NCAC 02T .0120:
Has the Permittee or any parent, subsidiary or other affiliate exhibited the following?
a. Has been convicted of environmental crimes under Federal law or G.S.-143-215.6B? ❑ Yes or ® No
b. Has previously abandoned a wastewater treatment facility without properly closing that facility? Q Yes or [D No
c. Has unpaid civil penalty where all appeals have been abandoned or exhausted? Q Yes or ® No
d. Is non -compliant with an existing non -discharge permit, settlement agreement or order? Q Yes or No
a. Has unpaid annual fees in accordance with 1.5A.NCAC 02T20105(z)(2)? Q Yes or Q No
11. FACILITY INFORMATION:
1. Facility name: Santeetlah Lakeside WWTP
2. Facility's physical address:. 34 Marina Drive
City: Lake Santeetlah State: ETC Zip: 28771-_ ^ County: Graham
III. PERMIT INFORMATION:
1. Existing permit number: WQ0031396 and most recent issuance date: May_15, 2007
2. Existing permit type: Reclaimed Water Local Program Approval
3. Reason for the permit application: Change ofOwnership
4. Has the facility been constructed? ® Yes or Q No
IV. APPLICANT LNFORNIATIONI:
1. Applicant's name: Lake Point Properties. on Santeetlah,, LLC
2. Signature authority's name: Jack,Minski per 15A NCAC 02T,0106(b) Title:
3. Applicant's mailing address: 1815 Griffin Rd. #404
City: Dania State: FL Zip: 33004
4. Applicant's contact information: Phone number: C786) 271-3850 Email Address: jack@futura-capital eom
5. Demonstration of historical consideration for permit approval—15A.NCAC 02T .0120:
Has the Applicant or any parent, subsidiary or other affiliate exhibited the following?
a. Has been convicted of environmental crimes under Federal law or G.S. 143-215.6B? Q Yes or ED No
b. Has previously abandoned a wastewater treatment facility without properly closing that facility? Q Yes or 0 No
c. Has unpaid civil penalty where all appeals have been abandoned or exhausted? Q Yes or Q No
d. Is non -compliant with an existing non -discharge permit, settlement agreement or order? Q Yes or 0 No
e. Has unpaid annual fees inaccordance with 1-5A NCAC 02T .0105(e)(2)? Q Yes or 0 No
FORM: NDPONC 06-16 Page 1 of 2

Existing Permittee's Certification per 15A_NCAC 02T.0106(b):
77
_att st that this application for
(Signature Authority's name & title from Application Item )
E7
... �.._.._.._ .
(Facility name from Application Item H.1.)
has been reviewed by me -and is accurate and complete to the best of my knowledge. I understand that prior to reissuance of the
permit into the Applicant's name, any discharge of wastewater from this non -discharge system to surface waters or the land will result
in an enforcement action that may include civil penalties, injunctive relief, and/or criminal prosecution. I will make no claim against
the Division of Water Resources should a condition of the existing permit be violated. I also understand that if all required parts of
this application package are not completed and that if all required supporting information and attachments are not included, this
application package will be returned as incomplete. I further certify that the existing Permittee or any affiliate has not been convicted
of an environmental crime, has not abandoned a wastewater facility without proper closure, does not have an outstanding civil penalty
where all.appeals have been exhausted or abandoned, are compliant with any active compliance schedule, and do not have any
overdue annual fees per 15A NCAC 02T .0105(e).
NOTE — In accordance with eral Slaiute 13-215.4Cand 143-215 6I3, any person who knowingly makes any false statement,
representation, or certiGea ' n in any applicati n pac ge shall be guilty of Class 2 misdemeanor, which may include a fine not to
exceed S10,000 as well civil p up t S25 0 per violation.
Signature: .. __.. % .. .._ _._....._......_. ._.._._ Date: _.... ,�. "...___6 . .._.__.. __........
Applicant's Certification per 15A ' -_ _ .-. _ T.0106(b):
� o,S SgN"[e-mail]�ha, �.lL
J1�_ �,tsSLI Nr��s_, UML,5 110,,< Pais test that this application for
(Signature Authority's name & title from Application Item A17.2.)
JCS
(Facility name from Application Item R.I.)
has been reviewed by me and is accurate and complete to the best of my knowledge. I understand that after reissuance of the permit
into the Applicant's name, any discharge of wastewater from this non -discharge system to surface waters or the land will result in an
enforcement action that may include civil penalties, injunctive relief, and/or criminal prosecution. I will make no claim against the
Division of Water Resources should a condition of this permit be violated. I also understand that if all required parts of this
application package are not completed and that if all required supporting information and attachments are not included, this
application package will be returned to me as incomplete. I further certify that the Applicant or any affiliate has not been convicted of
an environmental .crime, has not abandoned a wastewater facility without proper closure, does not have an outstanding civil penalty
where all appeals have been exhausted or abandoned, are compliant with any active compliance schedule, and do not have any
overdue annual fees per 15A NCAC 02T .0105(e).
NOTE — In accordance with General Statutes 143-215.6A and 143-215.6H, any person who knowingly makes any false statement,
representation, or certification in any application package shall be guilty of a Class 2 misdemeanor, which may include a fine not to
exceed S10,000 as s civil enalties up to 525,000 per violation.
Signature: . Date: i'L 1191
DEC 2 7 2018
RECEIVED/NCDEQ/DWR
DEC 19 2018
Non -Discharge
Permitting Unit
FORM: NDPONC 06-16 I Water Oua!!ty "-Atonal operations ! Page 2 of 2
FORM: NDPONC 06-16 psnev'�:710nF:t4� ----'' Page 2 of 2